The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by
Leonard Bloomfield

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org.  If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.



Title: Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis

Author: Leonard Bloomfield

Release Date: December 30, 2015 [EBook #50797]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***




Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of
public domain material from the Google Books project.)








                     UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS STUDIES
                                   IN
                        LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

             Vol. III      May-November, 1917      Nos. 2-4


                            Board of Editors

                             George T. Flom
                          William A. Oldfather
                           Stuart P. Sherman


                Published by the University of Illinois
               Under the Auspices of the Graduate School
                            Urbana, Illinois






                            Copyright, 1917
                     By the University of Illinois.







                             TAGALOG TEXTS
                            WITH GRAMMATICAL
                                ANALYSIS

                     PART I: TEXTS AND TRANSLATION
                     PART II: GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS
               PART III: LIST OF FORMATIONS AND GLOSSARY


                                   BY

                           LEONARD BLOOMFIELD


                         UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

                                  1917









TABLE OF CONTENTS


PART I
                                                               PAGE
    Preface                                                       9
    List of Books and Articles consulted                         13
    Texts in Phonetic Transcription and Translation              16


PART II--GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS

    A. PHONETICS                                                134

        1. Distinctive sounds                                   134
        2. Syllabication                                        138
        3. Accentuation                                         141

    B. SYNTAX                                                   146

        1. Sentence and word                                    146

            a. Syntactic relations                              146
            b. Parts of speech                                  146
            c. Static and transient words                       147
            d. Personal names                                   147
            e. The object construction                          148
            f. Expressions of indefinite quantity               150

        2. Subject and predicate                                151

            a. Non-predicative sentences                        151
            b. The subject                                      153
            c. The predicate                                    153
            d. Subordinate predications                         159
            e. Omission of predicate                            160

        3. Attributes                                           160

            a. Conjunctive attributes                           162
            b. Disjunctive attributes                           170
            c. Local attributes                                 177
            d. Absolute attributes                              180

        4. Serial groups                                        205

    C. MORPHOLOGY                                               210

        1. Composition                                          210
        2. General features of word-formation                   211
        3. Description of formations                            218

            I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, pang-)               218

                A. Simple static forms                          218

                    (1) Root-words                              218
                    (2) Doubling                                223
                    (3) Reduplication                           224
                    (4) Prefix pang-                            224

                B. Transients, abstracts, and special static
                   words                                        226

                  (1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag-   226
                  (2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r 231
                  (3) Active with mang- and abstract with
                      pang- r                                   239
                  (4) Special static words                      241
                  (5) Direct passive, with -in                  243
                  (6) Special static words                      247
                  (7) Instrumental passive, with i-             247
                  (8) Special static words                      250
                  (9) Local passive, with -an                   250
                 (10) Special static words                      257

            II. Secondary groups                                262

                1. Prefix si-                                   262
                2. Prefix paki-                                 263
                3. Prefix ka-                                   265

                  (1) Simple static forms                       265
                  (2) Normal transients, abstracts, and
                      special static forms                      268
                  (3) Additional transients, abstracts, and
                      special static forms                      280

                4. Prefix pa-                                   298

                  (1) Simple static forms                       299
                  (2) Normal transients, abstracts, and
                      special static forms                      301
                  (3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka- 309

                5. Prefix pati-                                 313

            III. Irregular derivatives                          314


PART III

    LIST OF FORMATIONS                                          317
    INDEX OF WORDS                                              320
    CORRIGENDA                                                  406









PREFACE


This essay is purely linguistic in character and purpose.

In taking phonetic notes on Tagalog I noticed that the pronunciation
of the speaker to whom I was listening, Mr. Alfredo Viola Santiago
(at present a student of architectural engineering in the University
of Illinois) presented certain features of accentuation not mentioned
in the descriptions familiar to me. With the intention of briefly
describing these features, I took down more extensive notes and
asked Mr. Santiago to tell me in Tagalog the stories of "The Sun"
and "The Northwind and the Sun," used as models by the International
Phonetic Association.

The data so obtained showed that the features of accentuation I had
observed were in part distinctive (expressive of word-meaning), and,
further, that certain other features, which were but imperfectly
described in the treatises I knew (so especially the use of the
"ligatures"), appeared in Mr. Santiago's speech in a regular and
intelligible manner. A more extensive study was thus indicated.

The results of this study were subject to two obvious limitations. The
utterances I had transcribed were either translations or isolated
sentences, and I could not determine to what extent the features of
Mr. Santiago's speech which I had observed were general in Tagalog.

The former of these limitations was fully overcome when I asked
Mr. Santiago to tell me connected stories. In addition to fortunate
endowments of a more general kind Mr. Santiago possesses, as I found,
that vivacity of intellect and freedom from irrelevant prepossessions
which we seek and so rarely find in people whose language we try
to study. This latter quality may be due in part to the fact that,
as Mr. Santiago's education has been carried on entirely in Spanish
and English, his speech-feeling for his mother-tongue has not been
deflected by the linguistic, or rather pseudo-linguistic training
of the schools, so familiar to us. However this may be, I cannot
be grateful enough to Mr. Santiago (and I hope that the reader
will join me in this feeling) for the intelligence, freshness, and
imagination with which he has given us connected narratives in his
native language,--stories he heard in childhood and experiences of
his own and of his friends. It is to be hoped that some of these
will be of interest to students of folk-lore (as, for instance,
Nos. 9, 10, 11, the old Hindu fable in No. 4, and the Midas story,
much changed, in No. 5); the texts are here given, however, only for
their linguistic interest.

The second limitation could not be overcome. As there exists at present
no adequate description of the dialectal differentiation of Tagalog,
nor even an adequate description of any one form of the language,
I can make no definite statement as to the relation of Mr. Santiago's
speech to other forms of Tagalog.

What is here presented is, then, a specimen of the speech of an
educated speaker from Mr. Santiago's home town, San Miguel na Matams,
Bulacn Province, Luzn. It would have been possible to include in the
description the speech of at least one other educated Tagalog from a
different region (uneducated speakers are unfortunately not within
my reach), as well as such data as might be gathered from printed
Tagalog books: I have refrained from this extension because, at the
present state of our knowledge, a single clearly defined set of data
is preferable to a necessarily incomplete attempt at describing the
whole language in its local and literary variations. Comparison of
literary Tagalog (chiefly the translation of Jos Rizal's "Noli me
Tangere" by Patricio Mariano, Manila, Morales, 1913 [1]) shows that
Mr. Santiago's speech is not far removed from it. In most cases where
my results deviate from the statements of the Spanish grammars, the
evidence of printed books (and not infrequently the internal evidence
of the grammars themselves) shows that the divergence is due not
to dialectal differences but to the fact that the grammars are the
product of linguistically untrained observers, who heard in terms of
Spanish articulations and classified in those of Latin grammar.

This study presents, then, the first Tagalog texts in phonetic
transcription and the first scientific analysis of the structure of
the language [2]. Although the nature of the problem forbade the use
of any material other than that obtained from Mr. Santiago, I have
examined all the treatises on Tagalog accessible to me. No experience
could show more clearly than the reading of these books the necessity
of linguistic and especially phonetic training for anyone who wishes
to describe a language. Not one of the works in the following list
[3] contains an intelligible description of the pronunciation of
Tagalog. The only general work of scientific value is the excellent
second volume of P. Serrano Laktaw's dictionary. Much as one may admire
the pioneer courage of Totanes and the originality of Minguella,
these venerable men were as little able to describe a language as
one untrained in botany is to describe a plant. Among the authors of
monographs are several good names and one or two of the greatest in
our science: nearly all of these authors mention the difficulty under
which they labored for want of an adequate description of the language.









LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES CONSULTED


Alter, F. C., ber die tagalische Sprache. Wien 1803.

Blake, F. R., Contributions to comparative Philippine Grammar. (Journal
of the American Oriental Society, vols. 27, 28, 29, 30).

Brandstetter, R., Tagalen und Madagassen, Luzern 1902. (= his
Malayo-polynesiche Forschungen, ser. 2, no. 2).

Conant, C. E., The names of the Philippine languages. (Anthropos,
vol. 4).

The pepet law in the Philippine languages. (Anthropos, vol. 7).

de Coria, J., Nueva gramtica tagalog. Madrid 1872.

Cue-Malay, G., Frases usuales para la conversacion en espaol tagalo
 ingles. Manila 1898.

Doherty, D. J., The Tagalog language. (Educational Review, vol. 24).

Durn, C. G., Manual de conversaciones en castellano tagalo 
ingls. Manila 1900.

Fernandez, D. E., Nuevo vocabulario  manual de conversaciones en
espaol, tagalo y pampango. Binondo 1901.

Francisco [Blancas] de San Josef, Arte y Reglas de la lengua
Tagala. Manila 1832.

Garcia, F., at Herrera, V., Manga onang turo sa uikang ingls. Maynila
1902.

Gaspar de San Agustin, Compendio de la Lengua Tagala. Manila 1879.

Hvia Campomanes, J., Lecciones de gramtica Hispano-Tagala. Manila
1872. 3d ed. 1883. 4th ed. 1888.

von Humboldt, W., Die Kawi-Sprache, vol. 2, pp. 315 ff., 347 ff. (=
Berlin Academy Transactions, 1832, vol. 3).

Kern, J. H. C., Over zoogenaamde verbindingsklanken in het
Tagala. (Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde van
Nederlandsch-Indi, ser. 3, vol. 11).

Sanskritsche woorden in het Tagala. (ib., ser. 4, vol. 4).

Kirk, May, The Baldwin primer. Tagalog edition. New York [1899 and
1902 copyright].

Lendoyro, C., The Tagalog language. Manila 1902.

MacKinlay, W. E. W., A handbook and grammar of the Tagalog
language. Washington 1905.

Marre, A., Grammaire tagalog (Bijdragen, ser. 6, vol. 9).

Merrill, E. D., A dictionary of the plant names of the Philippine
Islands. Manila 1903. (Publications of the Bureau of Government
Laboratories, Department of the Interior, Philippine Islands, no. 8).

Miles, J., Mtodo terico-prctico y compendiado para aprender el
lenguaje Taglog. Barcelona 1887.

Minguella, T., Ensayo de gramtica Hispano-Tagala. Manila 1878.

Mtodo prctico para que los nios y nias de las provincias tagalas
aprendan  hablar Castellano. Manila 1886.

Neilson, P. D., English-Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Tagalog-English Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Nigg, C., Tagalog English and English Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1904.

de Noceda, J., y de Sanlucar, P., Vocabulario de la lengua
Tagala. Manila 1860.

Paglinawan, M., Balarilang Tagalog [on cover: Gramatikang Tagalog]
Maynila 1910.

Pardo de Tavera, T. H., Consideraciones sobre el origen del nombre
de los nmeros en Tagalog (La Espaa oriental 1889).

El Snscrito en la lengua Tagalog. Paris 1887.

Rizal, Jos, Die Transcription des Tagalog. (Translated by
F. Blumentritt, Bijdragen, vol. 42).

de los Santos, Domingo, Vocabulario de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1835
(reimpreso).

Serrano, R., Diccionario de terminos comunes
Tagalo-Castellano. Ed. 3. Binondo 1869.

Nuevo diccionario manual Espaol-Tagalo. Manila 1872.

Serrano Laktaw, P., Diccionario Hispano-Tagalog. Primera parte. Manila
1889.

Diccionario Tagalog-Hispano. Segunda parte. Manila 1914.

de Totanes, S., Arte de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1745. Sampaloc
1796. Manila 1850. Binondo 1865 (reimpreso).

Wolfensohn, L. B., The infixes la, li, lo in Tagalog. (Journal of
the American Oriental Society, vol. 27).









I. TEXTS IN PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION


1. ANG ULL NA UNGG` AT ANG MARNONG NA PAGNG.

Mnsan ang pagng hbang nallgo sa log, ay nakkta sy nang isa
ng pno-ng-sging na lumltang at tintangy nang gos. Hinla niya
sa pasgan, dtapwat hind nya madal sa lpa`. Dhil dto tinwag
nya ang kaybgan niya ng ungg` at iniylay ny ang kaptol nang
pno-ng-sging kung ittanim ny ang kany ng kapart. Tumang` ang
ungg` at hinte nil sa gitn` mul sa magkbila ng dlo ang pno
nang sging. Inangkn nang ungg ang kaptol na my manga dhon,
dhil sa panukl nya na iyn ay ttbo na mabti ky sa kaptol na
wala ng dhon.

Nang makaran ang ila ng raw, ang pno nang ungg` ay namaty, ymang
ang sa pagng ay tumbo hanggng sa magbnga. Ang manga sging ay
nahing, dtapwat hind maakyt nang pagng. Dahil dto tinwag ny
ang kanya ng kaybga ng ungg` at inylay nya ang ila ng bnga nang
sging kung akyatin ny ang pno`. Ang ungg` ay umakyt at kumin
nang makkya.

Sinbi nang pagng: "Hulgan mo ak."

Dtapuwat isinagt nang ungg`: "Balat mn at malinamnm ay hind
kita hhulgan."

Ang pagng ay naglit at nagsbug sya nang tink sa palgid nang
pno`. Nang lumuks ang ungg ay ntinik sy. Pinagbintangan ny ang
pagng at kanya ng hinnap pang parushan niy. Nhli nya ang pagng
sa kabil nang isa ng tod.

Sinbi nya sa pagng: "Kit ay ki ng parrushan. Mamli ka sa
dalaw. Dikdikn kit sa lusng o lunrin kit sa log?"

Ang marnong na pagng ay nagumpis nang pagsisigw at hinilng nya
sa ungg` na, kung mare`, ay dikdikn siya sa lusng.

Dtapwat isinagt nang ungg`: "Ibbigay k sa iy ang parsa na
hind mo gust."

At inihgis nya sa log ang pagng.

Nang dumpo ang pagng sa tbig ay nagsisigw sya at sinbi ny sa
ungg`: "Salmat, kaybgan. It ang ki ng trhan!"





2. ANG PAGTATAKBHAN NANG US AT NANG SUS`.

Is ng us ng nangnginin sa gbat ay naktagp nang isa ng sus` na
gumgpang sa dhon nang bho`. Ang us ay naghint nang panginginin
at pinagmasdn ny ang mabgal na paggpang nang sus`.

Makaran ang ila ng sandal` ay sinbi ny sa sus`: "Ano ng hna mo
ng lumkad! Bkit hind ka magral na lumkad nang matlin? Gya ko,
ak y parti ng nhhbul nang manga so, dtapwat ang matlin ko ng
pagtakb ay sya ng naglligts sa kin nang ki ng bhay. Dtapwat
gya m, kung ikw ay hablin nang khit an ng kaway, papno ang
mangyyri sa iyo ng bhay? Pho ng ikw ay mppaty."

Pagkrinig nang sus` sa manga salit ng it ay tiningnn nya ang us
at kanya ng pinagarlan ang manam nya ng pangangatawn, ang kanya ng
mahahba ng pa, at ang malalaks nya ng lamn. Inbig nya na siya mn
ay gaya rn nang us pang siy ay makatakb nang matlin. Dtapwat
kany ng inakl` na, kung piltin nya na sya y tumakb, ay hind
sya mhhul nang malak sa us.

Sa gayn ay isinagot ny sa us: "Ikw ay mapangmat. Hind
mo hinhinl` kung an ang maggawa nang isa ng may matbay na
paggust. Hinhmon kit na makipagtakbhan sa kin mula rto hanggng
sa log na nsa band ng kalunran mul rto."

Ang us ay tumwa nang malaks at isinagt sa sus`: "Bkit mo inakla
ng ttalnin mo ak? Sigro ng ikw ay magddya`!"

Isinagt nang sus`, na hind siya magddya`, at, pang my-roo
ng tumingn sa kanil at magng hukm sa kanila ng pagtatakbhan,
ay sinbi ny na tumwag sil nang is sa manga kayibgan nil,
na sya ng magging hukm.

Ang us ay pumyag, at tinwag nil ang isa ng klaw, pang siya ng
magng hukm.

Nang magumpis sil nang pagtakb ay malak ang nagng pagkhuli nang
sus`. Sa kany ng pagtakb ang us ay nakran nang isa ng maybung
na damhan. Naghint sya pang manginin, ymang malak ang pagkuna
nya sa sus`. Binlak ny na pagktanaw nya na dumrating ang sus`
ay ttakbo sy ng mul`. Dtapuwat, nang sya y makapanginin, ay
sinumpng sya nang katmran. Natlug sya sa panukl na mggising
sy bgo dumatng ang sus`.

Dtapwat, hbang sya y nattlog, ay nakaran ang sus`. Nang mgising
sy ay mallim n sa hpon. Tumakbo sy nang bus-laks patngu sa
log, at don ay sinalbong sya nang sus` at nang kanila ng hukm
na klaw.

"Ikw ay talnan," winka pagdka nang kanila ng hukm.





3. IS NG BIYRNES-SNTO.

Si Hwn at ang kany ng kaybga ng si Pdro ay nammangk sa lug
patngo sa bya-ng-Balwag. Sa bangk` ay my-roon sil ng is ng
larwan nang Krsto na kanila ng inihhatid sa pre`, pang magmit sa
pagdadus nang isa ng Pit ng Wka`. Si Hwn ay sinsigln nang tkot.

Sinbi nya kay Pdro: "Ang twu ntin sa bangk` ay tadtd nang sgat
at hind humhing. Sa akl ko y paty ang to ng iyn. Bak tyu
ang pagbintangn nang pri ng ti ng paghhatdn sa kany."

Isinagt ni Pdro: "Ssabhin ntin sa kany na, nang mllan sa
ti ng bangk` ang to ng it y ganyan n ang kanya ng any`. Tyu
y marmi ng tagapagpatoto, kany hwag k ng matkot."

Nang dumatng sila sa pre`, ay ibinigy nila ang larwan. Pinagsabhan
sil nang pre` na pumaron sila sa simbhan kinbuksan nang hpon,
pang making nang srmon.

Si Hwn ay sinigl ng mul nang tkot, sapagkt hind nya mpagkro
kung bkit big nang pre` na sil ay psa simbhan. Parti sya ng
nakrinig nang manga to ng kinumbid sa simbhan at don ay hinli
nang gwrdya-sibl. Dtapuwat hind sya nagwka nang anu mn kay Pdro,
sapagkt nkkta nya na it y wal ng tkot.

Kinbuksan nang hpun ay naparon sila sa simbhan, at don ay nkta
nil ang isa ng Krsto ng nppk sa krs.

Wink ni Hwn: "Ang tu ng yan, kung iy ng nattandan, ay sya
nti ng inihatd sa pre`. Mabti tyo y dumon sa isa ng lugr na
hind maabut nang mat nang pre`."

Kany sil ng dalaw ay naparon sa illim nang plpito, pang don
nil pakinggn ang srmon. Nagumpis ang Syti-Palbras, at ang pr
ay dumrating n sa band ng hul nang kanya ng srmon.

Wink nang pri sa kanya ng srmon: "Magssi kay sa iny ng manga
kasalnan, malulupt na to. Masdn niny ang manga sgat na hinwa
niny sa katawn nang ti ng Mnankop."

Pagkrinig nit ni Hwn ay sya y sinigl ng mul nang tkot, sapagkt
inakl nya na siya y nppagbintangn.

Kany` ang ginaw nya ay umals sya sa illim nang plpito, hinarp nya
ang pre`, at sinbi nya: "mong, hind po kam ang sumgat sa to ng
iyn. Nang sya y illan sa mi ng bangk`, ay sugatan n sya antimno."

Pagkawk nya nit ay bumalk sya sa illim nang plpito. Hind
pinansn nang pr` ang manga nrinig nya ng salit`, at ipinatluy
nya ang kanya ng srmon.

"Dumating n ang raw na kay ng manga makasalnan ay dpat
magsipagssi. Ang manga pintan nang lngit ay nbuksan n sa
pagkamaty nang ti ng Mnankop, at khit na snu ng makasalnan ay
makappsuk sa lngit, kung sila y magsipagssi. Dtapwat, kung hind
kayo magsipagssi, ay mpparushan kay nang hrap na wala ng hanggn
sa manga apy sa infyrno, dahiln sa manga hrap na ipinaskit niny
sa ti ng Mnankop. Masdn niny ang kany ng katawn na pumpwis
nang dug`, ang kanya ng pa t kamy na nppko sa krs, at ang kany
ng manga sgat mul sa pa hanggng lo. Wala ng ib ng nagppahrap
sa kany at sumgat sa kany ng mahl na katawn, kung hind kay,
manga two ng makasalnan, at, kung hind kayo magsipagssi, ay
mahhlug kayo sa infyrno!"

Si Hwn ay hind mpalagy, at inakl nya na ang pri ay
sinsilakbuhn nang glit lban sa kany.

Kany` hinarap ny ng mul ang pre`, at sinbi nya nang bus-laks:
"mong, sinbi ko na p` sa iny kanna na hind ako kasle ng sumgat
sa to ng iyn, kany hwag p ninyo ak ng ipadal sa impyrno."

Ang pri ay sinigln nang malak ng glit, kany sinbi nya sa mang
nakking: "Anu ba kay, manga ungs na to? Wal baga n isa sa iny
na makahwak sa to ng it pang bigtihn?"

Pagkrinig nit ni Hwn ay tumakbo sy nang bus-laks at sinagasa
ng wal ng patumangg ang manga to ng nlluhd at umiyk sa
pagsissi nang kanil ng kasalnan. Sinundan sy ni Pdro at sil ng
dalaw ay nagtakbhan nang wala ng hint hanggng sa dumatng sila
sa kanila ng byan. At don ay ipinamalt nila ang btas-karyum na
niligtasn nil.





4. ANG KBA` AT ANG BULG.

Isa ng kba` at isa ng bulg ay matlik na magkaybgan. Kung sila
y nagllakd ang kba` ang umkay sa bulg. Ang bulg namn ay sy
ng pumpasn sa kb kung my-roon sil ng mahrap na nillakran,
sapagkt ang kba` ay mahna` ang katawn.

Mnsan sila y nakran nang is ng pno-ng-nyg. big nila ng pumits
nang bnga, dtapuwat hind nila mlman kung sno sa kanil ng
dalaw ang akyt sa pn`. Sinbi nang bulg na hind sya makaakyt,
sapagkt hind nya mkkta kung aln ang ppitasn, ymang my-roo
ng manga mra ng bnga. Ang kba` ay hindi rn big umakyt, dahiln
sa kany ng kahinan. Dtapuwat malak ang pagkgusto ny na kumin
nang nyg. Kany`, sa katapusn ay sinbi nya na siy ang akyt.

"pang huwag k ng mnakwan nang manga illaglag k ng bnga, ay
bbilngin mo nang malaks ang kalabg sa lpa nang manga bnga na
illaglag k, pang ki ng matandan ang blang."

Ang kba ay nagumpis nang pagakyt, dtapwat pangangalaht nya ay
nahlug sy.

"Is!" ang sbi nang bulg.

Sinbi sa kany nang kb` na siy ang kumalabg at hind ang bnga
nang nyg.

Umakyt sya ul`. Pagkaran nang ila ng sandal` ay nahlog ul sya.

"Dalaw!" isinigw nang bulg.

Ang kba ay naglit, at sinbi nya sa bulg na sy ay malit.

Wink nya: "Iyo ng na ng kumalabg ay ak, ang ikalaw ay ako
rn. Kany`, wala p ng niyg ak ng nppits."

Dtapuwat ang bulg ay nagakla ng gaw ng katatawann ang pagkahlog
nang kba`. Kany binlak nya na, kung makrinig sy ul nang kalabg,
ay ssigaw sy nang "Tatl!"

Ang kba ay umakyt na mul`, dtapwat nahlog dn sy. Ang bulg
ay sumigw nang "Tatl!" at tumwa sya. Ang kba ay nagnit nang
glit. Nilaptan nya ang bulg at kany ng sinampl sa mukh`. Ang
sampl ay tumma sa manga mat nang bulg, at dhil dto ay nadlat
ang kany ng manga mat.

pang manghigant sya ay sinp nya ang kba`. Tinamaan ny it sa
likd at dhil dto ay nnat ang kanya ng kba`.

Sil ng dalaw ay natw sa nangyri at llo ng tumbay ang kanila ng
pagkakaybgan sa lugr nang magkasir sil.





5. ANG HRI NG MAY SNGAY AT SI HWN.

Sa is ng kapuluwn naghhri ang isa ng twu ng may dalaw ng maiikl
ng sngay na nttg sa malag nya ng buhk. Hind it nllman nang
kanya ng manga pinaghharan. Dtapwat ang lhim na yt y nagumpis ng
nibady sa madl` sa pamamagtan nang manga manggugpit na nakptul
nang kany ng buhk.

Kany sya y nagkaron nang malaki ng glit sa manga barbro, at inakl
nya ng liplin ang manga barbro sa kanya ng kaharyn. Iniytus nya ng
humkay nang pat na mallim na baln sa harapn nang kanya ng trhan,
at sa gitn nang pat na hkay na yit ay nagpalagy sya nang isa ng
pan. Isa ng raw naup sya sa taburte sa gitn nang pat na hkay,
at bwat to ng nagdan ay tinanng nya kung marnung manggupt. Ang
bwat sumagt nang "o" ay pinahint nya pang bigyn nya nang guntng
at sy y gupitn. Pagkaran nang il ng sandal` ay itinanng nya sa
bwat manggugpit kung an ang nkkta nya sa lo nang hre`. Ang
manga manggugpit ay nagsipagsbi nang katotohnan at bwat is
sa kanil ay sumagt nang sngay ang kanila ng nkkta. Ang bwat
sumagt nang ganit ay ibinuld nang hre` sa is sa manga hkay sa
palgid niy.

Nakaran ang ila ng raw at ang dalaw ng hkay ay napun n nang manga
barbro at pinatabnan na ny. Dumlang ang manga tao ng nagddan
na marnung manggupt, at ang hre ay nagakla ng npatay n niya ng
laht ang manga barbro sa kany ng kaharyn.

Isa ng raw ay naghinty sya sa kanya ng pan hanggng katanghalan
bgo nagdan ang isa ng to na nagsbi ng sya y marnung gumupt
nang buhk.

Itinanng sa kany nang hre`: "An ang panglan mo?"

Isinagt nang to: "Ang panglan ko p` ay Hwn."

"Gupitn mo ak, Hwn," iniytus nang hre`.

Lumpit si Hwn sa hre` at inumpisahan ny ang panggugupt.

Makaran ang ila ng sandal` ay itinanng nang hre`: "An ang nkkta
mo sa lo ko, Hwn?"

Ang kanya ng sagt ay ganit: "Ang iyo p ng Kamhlan, nkkta ko
sa lo niny ang korna."

It ay ikinatuw nang hre`. Kany nagtindig sy sa pan at inkay
nya si Hwn sa kanya ng palsiyo at ginaw nya si Hwn na barbro nang
hre`. Malak ang suwldu na ibinigy nya kay Hwn, at pinatabnan
nya ang manga nttir ng hkay.





6. TATL NG ESTUDYNTE.

Si Hwn, si Pdro, at si Andrs ay tatl ng magkakayibga ng estudynte
ng magkababyan. Nang dumatng ang pagbubuks nang manga paraln ay
nlman nil na sil ay magkkahiw-hiwaly. Iba t ib ng byan ang
kappatunghan nang bwat is sa kanil. Bgo sil naghiw-hiwaly
ay nagtpnan sil nang pagttagpun nila ng lugr paguumpis nang
bakasyn.

Nakaran ang isa ng tan at dumatng ang pagsasar nang klse at ang
manga estudynte ay naguwan sa kan-kanil ng byan, at ang tatl
ng magkakaybga ng si Pdro, si Hwn, at si Andrs ay nagtatagp sa
bya ng tinuban ni Pdro, pang don sila magpalpas nang bakasyn.

Nang sil y magkikta, pagkaran nang iba t ib ng bgay na kanil ng
pinaguspan, ay nagsiysat sil kung gan ang ntuthan nang bwat
is sa kanila ng pagaral nang wka ng Kastla`. Sinbi ni Pdro na
sy ay marmi ng nllma ng salit ng Kastla`, dtapuwat ang magi
nya ng nattandan ay ang salit ng "Bmos."

Sumagt namn si Hwn: "Ako mn ay marmi r ng nllman, dtapuwat
sa ngayn ang nalala ko ay ang salit ng 'Matr.'"

Si Andrs namn ay nagwka ng wal sya ng ntuthan kung hind ang
salit ng "S."

Makaran ang kanila ng pagsaslitan ay nagyay si Pdro na sila
ay mamangk sa log at magsipalgo tuly. Nang sila y nammangk na
sa log, sa pangpng ay naktanaw sil nang is ng Kastl` na big
malgo`. Sinbi ni Pdro na mabti ay makipagsap sil sa Kastla`,
pang sa gay y mipakta nil ang kan-kanil ng dnong.

Nagumpis si Pdro at sinbi nya ng "Bmos!"

Si Hwn namn ay sumagt: "Matr!"

At sa hul ay si Andrs ang kanya ng "S!"

Nang mrinig it nang Kastla`, ay sinigln sya nang tkot, sapagkt
inakl nya na ppatan sya nang tatl ng nammangk`. Kany, khit na
hind sya marnung lumangy, ay nagtaln sya sa log at sya y nalnod.





7. ISA NG SUNDLU NG MARNUNG NANG LATN.

Tatl ng magkakayibgan, isa ng pr`, isa ng manggagmut, at isa
ng sundlu, ay magkakasma ng nagsipamarl nang mailap na hyup sa
is ng malwak na gbat. Ang gbat ay maly sa byan. Kany` sil
ay nagdal nang marmi ng bon, pang hwag sil ng gutmin.

Nakaran ang ila ng raw, dtapuwat wal pa sila ng nhhli khit
an. Ang kanila ng bon ay umunt nang umunt` hanggng sa wal ng
ntira kung hind isa ng hilw na itlg. Dumatng sa kanil ang raw
nang malaki ng gtom, dtapuwat sila ng tatl ay wal ng pagkin kung
hind ang itlg lmang na nttir.

Sinbi nang pre` na, kung paghatan nil ang isa ng itlg, ay hind
makabbti sa kanil, sapagkt hind makappwi` nang kan-kanila ng
gtom. Kaniy` ipinyu nang pr` na is lmang sa kanil ng tatl ang
kumin nang itlg na nttir,--at sa kanya ng kasakimn ay ipinyu
nya na kung snu sa kanil ang pinakamahsay na magsalit nang Latn
ay sya lmang kkin nang itlg. Inakl nya na ang sundlu ay hind
marnung nang Latn at ang mdiko lmang ang sya ny ng mkkatlo,
at ang dnong nit y kanya ng minmat.

Ang mdiko y umyun sa htul nang pr`, dtapuwat ang sundlu ay yaw
pumyag, sapagkt hind sya nagral na gya nang pri` at nang mdiko;
ngnit wal sya ng magaw`.

Kinha nang pr` ang itlg at itinuktk nya sa isa ng bat. Nang
mabsag ang itlg ay sinbi ny: "Korontum est," at tiningnn ny
ang dalaw nya ng kasma.

Inabt nang mdiko ang basg na itlg, inalis ny ang balt na basg
at nilagyan ny nang asn at kanya ng sinbi: "Sltum est."

Iniyabt nang manggagmot sa sundlu ang itlg, at ang pre at siy ay
naghinty nang ssabhin nang sundlo. It y wal ng mlma ng sabhin,
sapagkt katunya ng wal sya ng nllman khit isa ng hta tungkl sa
Latn. Sa kanya ng pagiisp ay nalala nya na, mnsan pumsuk sya sa
simbhan pang making nang Syti-Palbras, ay nrinig ny sa pr` na
ang kahulugn nang salit ng "Konsumtum est" ay "Tapus n ang laht."

Kany ibinhos nya sa kany ng bibg ang itlg, at pagkalaguk ny ay
kanya ng sinbi: "Konsumtum est."

Ang dalaw nya ng kasma ay npaglat nang malak sa hind nila
hininla ng dnung nang sundlo.





8. ANG PIT NG DWNDE.

Is ng magaswa ay my-roo ng pit ng ank na dwnde. Ang am ay wal
ng trabho at hind rn siya makkta nang trabho. Ang in namn ay
hind kumkta nang salap`, sapagkt mahna` ang kany ng katawn
at parti sa sakt.

Isa ng tanghli` sila y nup sa isa ng bangk` at pinaguspan nil
ang kanila ng pamumhay na pinagddaann. Itinanng nang lalke kung
an ang mabte nila ng gawn sa kanila ng marmi ng ank. Ipinyu
nang babye na kanil ng ihnap nang trabho ang manga bta`, pang
kumta sil nang kwalt. Dtapuwat isinagt nang lalki na sa akl
nya ay hind sila makkkta nang trabho, sapagkt siya rn ay
wala ng mkta. Kany` ipinyu ny na ang mabti ay itpun nil ang
manga bta`.

It y ikinalungkt at ikiniyk nang babye. yaw sya ng pumyag
na itpon ang manga bta`. Dtapuwat ipinakta sa kany nang kany
ng aswa na, kung hind nila gawn iyn, sila ng laht ay mammatay
nang gtom. Sa kalanan ay pumyag ang babe at pinagksundun nila
na dalhn nila ng magpasyl ang manga bta` at kanila ng wan sa dan.

Hbang pinaguspan nil it, ang ikapit ng bt ay nsa is ng
bitk nang bangk na kanila ng inupn at nrinig nya ng laht ang
ggawin sa kanil nang kanila ng maglang. Pagkaran nang kanil ng
slitan ay hinnap pagdka nang bta ang kany ng manga kapatd at
ibinalt nya ang kanya ng nring. Sil ay nagykan, sapagkt hind
ipinalam sa kanil nang kanila ng maglang na sil ay nakabbigat
sa kanila ng pamumhay. Inakl nila na, kung it y nlman nil,
khit na papno ttlong sila ng maghnap nang kabuhyan. Dtapuwat
pinagksunduwan nil na sil y summa pag niyy sila ng magsipagpasyl
at paligw sil.

Kinbuksan hinnap sil nang kanil ng am, pinapagbhis
sila, binigyn sila nang manga pto, at sinbi ng sila y
magssipagpasyl. Nang sil y magumpis ang ikapit ng bta ay
hind kinin ang kanya ng tinpay, dtapuwat magmul sa kanila ng
trangkhan ay dinrog nya ang tinpay at ibinudbd nya sa da ng
kanila ng nilakran. Nang sila y mlay n ay naubsan sya nang
tinpay, kany nanghing sya sa kanya ng manga kapatd. Dtapwat
hind nila sy binigyn. It namn ay hind sinbi sa kanil kung
bkit sya naubsan agd nang tinpay. Nang hind sya makhing nang
tinpay ay namlot sya nang manga bat, at it y sya ny ng isa-is
ng inilaglg sa kanila ng pinagdanan.

Nang dumatng sila sa isa ng gbat ay inwan sil nang kanil
ng maglang at pinagsabhan sil na hantayn sila don, at sil y
bbalik agd. Sil y nawan, dtapwat nllman nil na hind sila
pagbbalikn nang kanila ng maglang.

Nang makaran ang ila ng sandal`, ay nakrinig sil nang isa ng
ngay. Pinuntahn nil ang lugr na pinangggalngan nang ngay. Don
ay nkta nil ang isa ng malak ng hignte na nallgo sa tabi nang
isa ng baln. Tiningnn nila ang palgid-lgid nang lugr, at sa
tab nang isa ng khuy ay nkta nil ang pananamt nang hignte. Ang
ikapit ng bta ay pinaals ang kanya ng manga kapatd at sinbi nya
na magtgo sil at kany ng nnakwin ang saptos nang hignte. It
ay kanila ng ginaw`, at ninkaw nang bta ang saptos.

Nang makapalgo` ang hignte at siy y nagbbhis ay hind nya mkta
ang kanya ng manga saptos. Sya y naglit at nagmur. Tumwag sya nang
tlong. Nang it y mring nang numkaw nang saptos ay dali-dli sya
ng dumal. Nang mkta sya nang hignte ay hind sya pinagbintangn,
sapagkt dahiln sa kanya ng kaliitn ay inakl nang hignte ng
hind nya maddala ang saptos.

Kany` it y nagwka sa kany: "Kung iyo ng ddalhn ito ng spot ko
nang kwalt sa ki ng aswa at pabilhn mo sy nang saptos at ihatd
nya sa kin, ay uphan kit nang marmi ng kwlta."

Sinbi tuly nya na sya y hind nakallkad nang wala ng saptos,
kany sya y magmadal`. Nang mkha nya ang spot nang kwalt ay
ipinangk nya ng bbalik sy agd. Dtapwat, nang mlayo sya, ay
tinwag nya ang manga nttg nya ng kapatd, at nang sila y mapon ay
nagyay sya ng umuw`. Dtapwat isinagt nang kanya ng manga kapatd
na hind nila nllman ang da ng pauw`. Ngnit kany ng isinagt
na ttuntunn nil ang kanya ng inilaglg na bat at tinpay sa dan.

Sinbi nang is ny ng kapatd na, kung nlman nya kung an ang
kanya ng ginaw` sa tinpay, ay binigyn sna nya sy nang sy y
manghing`. Kanil ng ikinalungkt ang ipinakta nila ng karamtan
sa kanila ng kapatd.

Hind nalon at ntagpuan nil ang hilra nang manga bat sa dan. It
y tinuntn nila at nakaratng sila sa kanila ng bhay, dal nil
ang spot nang kwalt na kanila ng ibinigy pagdka sa kanila ng
maglang. Sil y nangatw at nangalungkt dahiln sa kanil ng mal
ng insal sa manga ank,--sila y natw sapagkt my-roon sila ng
ikabbhay sa malo ng panahn.





9. IS NG PULS NA NAGASWNG-ASWNGAN.

No ng tagraw nang ta ng mle-nobisyntos-ds, hbang ang manga
hing na bnga nang khoy ay nangakabiybit sa manga sang, lumagnap
ang balta sa boo ng byan nang San-Antnyo na my-roo ng aswng na
nagllibot sa byan.

Ang manga to-ng-San-Antnyo sa manga ta ng iyn ay may paniniwla`
sa manga nno`, aswng, dwnde, at iba p ng katatakutn. Karamhan sa
kanil y hind nagkaplad na makapagral, dtapwat, khit na ganit ang
kalgyan nila, sila y manga two ng mababat, matahmik, at masispag.

Ang manga bhay sa bya ng it ay malilit at nayyr nang pwid at
kawyan. My-roon d ng ila ng bhay na tabl. Karamhan ay nttay
sa malalak ng bakran, at ang dulhan nang bakran ay nttamnn
nang manga pno-ng-khoy na masasarp ang bnga, gya nang tsko,
sha`, santl, mablo, mangg, at iba p.

Kasalukya ng nagkkahing ang manga bnga-ng-khuy na yt nang
lumagnap ang balta na may-ron n ng ila ng gab na nmatan nang ila
ng babe ang aswng sa ib t iba ng dulhan. Ang manga bta at manga
babe ay sinigln nang malak ng tkot, kany pagkagt nang dilm ay
agad-agd sil ng nagsipanahmik sa lob nang bhay. Karamhan nang
manga lalki ay nangatkot dn, dtapwat my-roo ng ila ng nagsipagsbi
na sila y hind nattkot, sapagkt hind pa sila naktagpo nang
aswng, at sa ganit y hind nila nllman kung dpat kataktan
ang aswng.

Ang aswng ay isa ng to ng malak ang kapangyarhan. Nakapagiba-t-ib
sya nang pangangatawn. Kung mnsan ay may katawn siya ng pra ng to,
dtapwat maitm, kung mnsan siya y isa ng malak ng so o bboy. Sya
y nangngin nang to, ll n nang manga bta`. Dtapuwat ang llo ng
mahalag nya ng pagkin at sya rn namn ny ng karanya ng kinkin
ay ang bta ng hind pa naipangngank at nssa tiyn pa lmang nang
kanya ng in. Kany ang manga bunts na babye sa bya ng yan ay
llo ng malak ang tkot. Hind nila pinatlog ang kanila ng aswa
sa pagbabanty sa kanila ng tab. Ang aswng ay mahrap mpatay nang
patalm o barl, sapagkt my-roon sya ng isa lmang na lugr na
dpat mtaman o masugtan pang sya y mpaty, at ang lugr na yt
ay lihm. Ang bgay lmang na kanya ng inilgan ay ang bwang. Kany
it y malak ng kagamitn sa pagpapalyas nang aswng.

Dtapwat is ng bgay na nakapagttak sa aswng na iyn ay ang kany
ng inugli ng pagtitir sa manga dulhan nang bakran. Katak-tak rn
ang bgay na manga dalga ang karamhan nang nagsipagsbi ng nmatan
nil sa dulhan sa itas nang sha` o iba p ng pno-ng-khoy ang
aswng na iyn. Ila ng to ng matalno ay nagsbi ng ang bintng nil
y isa ng magnankaw at hind aswng ang pinagkkatakut ng iyn.

Isa ng pols na may hind karanya ng tpang ay siya ng tumiktk sa
aswng na it sa dulha ng bgo ng kinakitan sa kany. Pagdilm ay
nroon na sy sa kanya ng kublhan. Hind nalanan at dumatng ang
aswng, umakyt sa isa pno-ng-sha`, at nrinig niya ng pumits nang
marmi ng bnga. It y bumba` at umals, dtapwat sya y sinundn
nang puls hanggng sa bhay na kanya ng pinaskan.

Malak ang nagng pagkglat nang pols, nang dto nmlas nya ng ang
kpwa nya pols nabblot nang maitm na kmot, at ang spot na itm
na pun nang sha` ay kasalukyan pa lmang niya ng inillapg.

Niyy nya sa munispyo ang kpwa nya pols, at don kinbuksan
ipinagsumbng ny sa presidnte. Ang pols na nagaswang-aswngan ay
nbilangg dahiln sa sla ng pagnankaw.





10. IS NG ASWNG NA NPATY.

Is ng gab sa is ng bhay na pngaserahn nang il ng manga
nagssipagral sa bya-ng-Mallos ay nrinig ko ng isinalaysy nang
is ng matand` na may glang na siym na p ng tan sa is ng umpkan
ang sumsund.

No ng sya y bgo ng twu pa lmang ay sa bkid sya nagttir. ilan
lmang sil ng magkakpit-bhay. Isa ng raw ay namatayn ang isa ny
ng kpit-bhay. Sa pagsund sa isa ng matand ng kaugalin ay dumalo
sy sa kpit-bhay na may hpis.

Nang dumatng sya don ay hind nalanan at nbalitan ny na may
aswng sa kanila ng lugr. Sy ay may malak at katutbo ng glit sa
manga aswng, kaniy inakl nya ng magbanty nang gab ng iyn.

Nang mallim n ang gab ay nanog sya sa bhay at sa isa ng karit
ng d malyo sa bhay, don sya nahig`. Kabilgan nang bwn nang
gabi ng iyn, kany malnaw ang pagkkta nya sa manga bgay sa
palgid-lgid. Wal sya ng nmlas na mpaghhinala ng isa ng aswng,
kany sya y natlog.

Kinhti-ng-gabihn ay ngising sy at ang na ng tinaman nang kany
ng manga mat ay is ng bgay na maitm sa bubungn nang bhay nang
kinamatayn. Ang maitm na iyn ay wal roon bgo sya natlog, kaniy
nagbintang sy na iyn ay ang aswng na nbalitan ny. Ang aswng
ay nangngin nang paty na to, kany sinapanth nya na ang paty
ang sady don nang aswng na iyn.

Pumanhk sya sa bhay at dal ny ang isa ng glok. Ang manga to
y nattlog. Sa itas ay may-roon sy ng nkta ng isa ng bgay na
nakalawt mul sa bubungn nang bhay. It y gya nang bitka nang
mank. Humb nang humba`, hanggng sa ang dlo y pumsok sa bibg
nang paty. Ang paty ay nagtindg sa kany ng kinllagyn pagkapsok
sa kanya ng bibg nang bgay na iyn.

Ang ginaw nang bgo ng to ay lumpit siya sa nakatindg na paty at
sa pamamagtan nang dala ny ng glok ay pintol niya ang bgay na iyn
na pra ng bitka nang mank. Nang it y maptol ay may kumalabg sa
tab nang bhay. Nanog siya at don ay nkta nya ang paty na aswng.





11. ANG MANGKUKLAM.

Sa il ng pok sa Filipnas ay may lubs na paniniwl sa mangkuklam
ang manga to. yon sa kanila ng paniwla` ang mangkuklam ay isa ng
to ng may malak ng kapangyarhan at ang kapangyarha ng it y gling
sa dimniyo o kay y mna sa maglang. Bgo mkamtn ang kapangyarha
ng iyn ang is ay dpat mna ng makipagkayibgan at magsilb sa
dimniyo. Dtapwat may ilan d ng nanniwla ng npplot o nagaw
ang kapangyarha ng iyn sa gbat o ilng na lugr na mahrap puntahn
at karanywa y pinagkkatakutn.

Ang klam ay siy ng nagaw, nmmna, o ibinbigay nang dimniyo, at
iy y sya ng pinangggalngan nang kapangyarhan nang nagmme-re`. Ang
hitsra nang klam ay hind par-parho. Kung mnsan ay isa ng bat o
isa ng manka ng malit at masam` ang hitsra. Kung madilm ang klam
na it y nagnningnng na pra ng alitaptp, dtapwat ang ningnng
na it y nawwal namn pag inbig nang klam. Ang klam at ang to,
khit lalki o babe, na nagri sa kany ay hind naghhiwaly khit
is ng sandal` at khit na sa pagpalgo` ay dindala nang mangkuklam
ang kanya ng klam. Dhil dto ang manga to ng mapagsysat, pag
big nil ng mpagkilla kung mangkuklam ng` o hind` ang isa ng
to ng kanila ng pinaghhinalan, ay sinsubkan nila it sa kany
ng pagpalgo`. Kung hind mangat at wal ng hinl ang mangkuklam
na sy y sinsubkan, kung mnsan ay nagkkaplad ang nannbok na
mkta nya ang klam.

Ang mangkuklam ay may kapangyarhan d ng itgo` sa lob nang kany
ng katawn ang klam, at hindi bihra` ang manga to ng nakkta nang
mangkuklam sa kanya ng pagkamaty. Sa khul-hulha ng sandal`,
bgo malagt ang hining, inilluwa nil ang klam.

It y nangyyri lmang kung yaw ipamna nang mangkuklam ang kany
ng klam. Kung ipinammna namn it, malwat p bgo mamaty ang
mangkuklam ay tintwag na ny ang kany ng big pamanhan, at dto
y lhim na lhim nya ng ibinbigay ang klam.

Ang malak ng kapangyarhan nang mangkuklam ay gingmit nya lban sa
kanya ng manga kaway, sa manga to ng kany ng kinaggaltan, o kay
y sa manga hyop nil, kung siya ny ng big panghigantihn. Gayon
dn gingmit nya ang kanya ng kapangyarhan sa pangbibro` sa isa
ng to o hyop na kanya ng mkatwan.

Ang kany ng pinassaktan kadalas y naganyo ng pra ng ull. Kung
mnsan ang kanya ng kinklam ay dumdaing na masakt ang kanya ng bu
ng katawn, nagssisigw, at hind mtahmik khit is ng sandal`. Sa
hyop namn karanywa y ang bbuy na pinakamahalag sa may ri`,
ang kanya ng ibinbigay na parsa ay gya nang sakt na klera,
dtapuwat llu ng mabagsk ky sa rto. Ang pagdum nang hyop ay
wala ng patd, at pagkaran nang il ng ras, khit na gno katab`
ang hyop, ay nagging but t balt. Ang to ng nkklam nya ay
malaks kumin, katimbng nang dalaw kato, at mapanghilng nang
masasarp na pagkin. Dhil dto ang paniwla nang manga to y kaslo
ng kumkin nang my sakit ang mangkuklam na nagpparsa sa kany.

Ang mangkuklam ay may kapangyarha ng pumalob sa katawn nang
kany ng kinklam. It y sya ng paniwla`, dtapuwat kung papno
ang paran nang pagpsok nang mangkuklam at kung san sya pumpsok
sa katawn nang kanya ng kinklam ay wal ng nakalm. Ngnit ang
kanya ng nillabasn ay ang hintutro`. Ang bgay na it ay malak ng
kabuluhn kol sa paggamt sa nkklam at gayon dn sa pagpaparsa
sa mangkuklam.

Khit na malak ang kapangyarhan nang mangkuklam ay mayroon dn sya
ng kinattaktan, karanywa y ang manga to ng malalaks, matpang,
at wala ng paniwl sa kapangyarhan nang mangkuklam at iba p ng
pinagkkatakutn nang manga iba ng to. Dhil dto y hind bihra`
na ang is ng to y pamagat ng "mdiko-ng-mangkuklam" pagkaran
nang na o ikalaw nya ng pagpapagalng nang to sa sakt na it.

Mnsan ay nrinig ko ng magbalta` ang isa ng to ng nakkta
nang panggagamt nang to ng nkklam. Ang to ng it y may isa
ng kpit-bhay na may ank na dalga. Sa dalga ng it y marmi ng
manglilgaw, at ang is sa kanil y pinaghhinala ng mangkuklam. Sa
kasama-ng-plad nit ay nagng isa sy sa manga hind ntanggp. Sa
malak nya ng glit ay magkasund nya ng kinlam ang babye at lalki
ng magkabgan.

Inna nya ang babye at ito nam y agd na itinwag nang
mdiko-ng-mangkuklam nang kany ng manga maglang. Nang dumatng ang
mdiko at nkta nya ang my sakt, ay sinbi nya ng nkklam ng`
ang babye.

Sinbi nya sa manga to don na hwg paalman sa nkklam na sy y
nrron sa bhay. Pag it y nlman nang my sakt, ay mllman dn
nang mangkuklam na nsa lob nang kanya ng katawn, at makaalis agd
ang mangkuklam. Ang mdiko y lumpit na hind nmalyan nang babye,
at pagdka y tinangnan ny nang mahigpt ang dalaw ng hintutro`
nang babye. It y llo ng inilaks ang pagsigw, at kuming na pra
ng isa ng nattkot.

Ang mangkuklam, yon sa paniwl nang manga to, ay sya ng
nakrramdm nang ano m ng paskit na ibigy sa katawn nang kany
ng kinklam hbang sya y nssa lob nang katawn nit. Gayon dn,
kung kauspin ang my sakt, ay siy ang sumsagt.

Dhil dto y itinanng pagdka nang mdiko: "An ang gingaw mo
rto, salbhe?"

Ang my sakit ay hind kumib`, dtapwat nagplit na magkawal`. Ang
ipinakta nya ng laks ay hind karanywa ng laks nang babye.

Dtapuwat hind sya pinawaln nang mdiko, at it y tumanng na mul`:
"An ang gingaw mo rto? Bkit ka naparto? Pag hind ka sumagt,
ay pahhirpan kit."

Ang babye ay nagmmakawa ng sumagt: "Wal po`, hind na po` ul`,
pawalan p` ninyo ak, at ak y nahhirpan n."

"Pawaln kit?" itinanng agd nang mdiko, "Mangk ka mna sa kin
na hind ka na bbalik."

"Hind na p` ak bbalik," ang sagt nang babye.

"Pag nhle kit ul` dto, ay ppatayn kit. Hwag k ng
salbhe. Tumahmik ka sa iy ng bhay."

" po`,  po`, hind na p` ak bbalik. Pawaln na p ninyo ak!"

Hbang ang slita ng it y nangyyri ang babye ay nagpplit
na magkawal`, big nya ng mabitwan nang mdiko ang kanya ng
hintutro`. Pagkapangko nang babye ay binitwan nang mdiko
ang dalaw nya ng hintutro`. Ang mukh nang babye na dti ay
nagppakilla nang malak ng paghihrap ngay y nhsay, at sya y pra
ng gga na pinagsa-uln nang pagisip. Sya ay tumahmik, pintol ang
pagsisigw, at nkasap nang matwd.

Ang lalki namn ay nttir sa isa ng bya ng malpit. Nang sya y
kinklam n ay itinwag sya nang manggagmot nang kanya ng kapatd
na lalke. Sa kalakhn nang glit nang kapatd na yt ay sya ny ng
tinwag ang manggagamt na mabagsk at malupt sa pagtarto nya sa
mang mangkuklam.

Lhim na dumatng ang manggagmot sa bhay nang my sakt. Mul sa
kanya ng kublhan ay pinho mna nya kung ang mangkuklam ay nssa
katawn ng` nang my sakt. It y npagkkilla sa pagsisigw,
pagklos, at pananalit ng hind tul-tul` nang my sakt. Ang
manggagamt ay nagpatalm nang is ng glok at pagkatpos ay maligs
sya ng tumakb sa tab nang my sakt. Tinangnan ny ang dalaw
ng hintutro nit, dinagann nya ang katawn, at tinag nya ng
makilan ang mukh nang my sakt. It y nagsisigw at nagkawal`,
dtapwat nang makawal sya y may manga sgat na ang kany ng mukh`
at ang dug y umgos na wala ng patd. Wal ng kib sya inwan nang
manggagamt. Hinnap nit ang kapatd nang sugatn at kanya ng sinbi
na hwag pansinn ang manga sgat nang kanya ng kapatd, at kinbuksa
y mawwala` iyn at mllpat sa mangkuklam, sapagkt dinatnn nya
it sa katawn nang kany ng kapatd. Kinbuksan ay pinarunn nang
mdiko ang kanya ng ginamt nang patalm, at malak ang tuw nya nang
it y mkta nya ng mahsay at wala ng bakas-sgat sa mukh`. Pagkaran
nang ila ng raw nbalitan nil na isa ng mangkuklam sa kpit-byan
nil ay malubh` ang lagy dahiln sa pagdudug ng hind maampt nang
manga sgat nya sa mukh`.

My-roon dn nam ng mangkuklam na maligs at hind na paabot
sa manggagamt. Ang manggagamt namn ay kinkayilnga ng bihsa`
at maligs. Ang khit sno y mari ng gumamt sa is ng nkklam,
ymang wal nam ng ib ng panggamt kung hind` ang pagpapahrap
sa katawn nang nkklam. Dtapuwat malak ang pangnib, sapagkt,
kung hind maligs, dahiln sa kawaln nang snay, ang gumgamt,
mari ng makawal` ang mangkuklam. Kung magkgayo y ang nkklam
msmo ang maghhrap dahiln sa parsa. Mnsan ay my nbalta ng
nangyri na gya nit ng sumsund.

Ang is sa dalaw ng magkapatd na lalki ay kinlam nang kanya ng
karibl sa paglgaw. Wal ng mtwag na mdiko-ng-mangkuklam. Sa
malak ng w sa kany nang kanya ng kya ay tinalag nit ng
gamutn sya khit na wal sya ng pagkasnay. Hind ng sya sany,
dtapwat madals nya ng npakinggn sa manga manggagamt ang paran
nang paggamt. Isa ng hpon, nang inakl nya ng nsa lob na namn
nang katawn nang kany ng kapatd ang mangkuklam, ay sinunggabn
nya agd ang isa ng glok at pagklapit ny sa kanya ng kapatd ay
tinag nya it nang wal ng tus. Kinbuksan sa lugr nang mkta
nya ng magalng at wala ng sgat ang kany ng kapatd it y bangky
na lmang. Ang mangkuklam ay nakawal`.





12. ANG LARO NG SPA` SA FILIPNAS.

Ang laro ng sp sa Estdos-Undos at sa Filipnas ay lubh ng malak
ang pagkakib. Sa lugr nang dalaw ng pangkt na nagttlo ang
nagssipaglar` na gya nang ftbol, sa sp ay is ng pangkt lmang
ang nagllar`. Sa sp ang hangd nang nagssipaglar ay hind ang
talnin ang isa ng kaway, dtapuwat ang huwg baya ng lumagpk sa
lp ang bla o spa`.

Ang bla ng gmit ay malak ng malaki rn ang kaibhn. It y nayyr
nang yantk na tinild at nilla ng pabilg. Wal ng lamn ang lob,
at ang manga mat nang sulihiy ay malalak. Dhil dto ay magan
ang spa`, hind gya nang bla ng gmit sa bsbol.

Mul sa dalaw hanggng sa dalaw ng p` ang blang nang
nagssipaglar`. Kung sil ay marmi ang yos ay pabilg. pang
umpisahn ang paglalar` is sa manga kasle ay ihinhits ang spa
na paitas at patngo sa is sa manga nagssipaglar`, karanywa y sa
is ng katapt ny. Ang to ng hinitsahn nang spa` ay ipinabbalik
it sa naghgis sa kany, hind nang kanya ng kamy, dtapwat nang
kanya ng pa.

Kung ang manga nagssipaglar ay marurnong, napappunta nil ang
pelta sa khit na sno sa manga kasle, kay t bwat is sa kanil
ay nakaabng at naghhintay nang pagdatng nang spa`. Ang bwat is
ay nagngat na hwg baya ng lumagpk sa lpa ang pelta. Kadalasn
ang manga nagssipaglar ay nagppakta nang sar-sri ng yus nang
pagspa`. Ang manga magand ng pagbabaluktt nang pa sa harapn
o likurn, ang maligs at maga ng lundg, ang banyad at maga ng
pagsp sa pelta, at ang pagpapadal nang sp sa khit na al ng
band ay manga bgay na nagppagand sa laro ng spa`. Hindi rn
bihra na ang balkat, ang sko, ang thod, o ang kamy ay sya ng
gingmit sa pagpapabalk nang pelta.

Papno ang pagkakatal sa lar ng it? It y mari lmang sa
pagpaptaglan nang hind paglagpk nang sp sa lpa`.

Kung halimbwa y big makipaglban nang isa ng pangkt nang manga
mninpa o sipros sa yb ng pangkt, ang na y manghhmon sa alin m
ng pangkt na kanila ng mple`. Kung it y tanggapn, ang raw, ras,
at lugr nang paglalar ay agad n ng nbbalta sa manga phayagn.

Sa ras nang paglalar` ay hind ilan lmang na lbo ng to ang
nagssipanod. Ang manghahmun karanywa y umpa nang isa ng
bnda-ng-msika at tintugtugn ang bwat pangkt sa kanil ng
paglalar`. Karanywa y dalaw ng bnda ang msika, sapagkt, kung
ang hinmon ay may kaunt ng glas, ay big dn namn nil ng ipakta,
at dhil dto y nagddala sil nang sarle nil ng bnda nang msika.

Pagkaran nang lar` ang hukm ay sy ng nagppahyag sa manga nannod
kung al ng pangkt ang nanlo. Pagkrinig nil nang pahyag nang
hukm ay agad-agd inumpisahn ang pagisgwan at manga pagpri sa
nanlo ng pangkt. Ang mnanal ng pangkt at ang kanila ng manga
kaybgan magkakasma ng tintugtugn nang kanila ng bnda nang msika
ay agd-agd na nagppasyo sa manga lugr na malpit sa kanil
ng pinaglarun. Kinbuksan ang laht nang nangyri ay nkkta sa
manga phayagn.

Ang ganit ng manga paglalar nang spa ay hind karanywan sa manga
bya ng malilit sa provnsiya, dtapuwat sa malalak lmang na byan,
gya nang Maynla` at iba p.





13. ANG KRA NG SI PATPAT.

Sa bya-ng-San-Migl ay my-roo ng nagtir ng isa ng to no ng manga
hul ng raw nang panahn nang Kastla`. Ang to ng it y nagral
at sa kanya ng katalinhan ay nintindihan ny ang manga masam ng
palkad nang manga kra na sya ng manga malilit na hre sa kanila
ng bayn-bayn.

Sa San-Migl ang kra ng ndistno ay isa ng mabagsk at manit ang
lo. Ang twag sa kany nang manga to ay "si Patpat."

Isa ng linggo ang twu ng nbanggt sa itas nit ay naparon sa
simbhan pang making nang srmon nang pre`. Sapagkt ang pri ng
it ay nagakla ng manga wal ng pinagarlan ang kany ng sinsrmunan
ay hind sya nagplit na makapagsalit ng matwd nang Taglog. Ang
kanya ng pananalit` ay wal ng pno t dlo, at hal-hlo ng pra
ng kalmay. Gayon dn ang kanya ng isinsrmun ay hind nib sa
infiyrno, purgatriyo, manga salbhi ng to-ng-byan, at katapusn
nang mund.

Nang ang srmon nya ay nagumpisa n, pumsok sa simbhan ang ti ng
kaybga ng si Pranssko.

Gya nang karanywan inumpisahn nang kra ang kanya ng srmon sa
ganit ng pananalit`: "Man kapatr-konkristynos!"

May pat na pu ng tan na sya sa lpa ng Katagalgan, ay hind pa
nya ntutha ng sabhi ng matwd ang "Mang kapatd-Kongkristynos."

Si Pranssko ay nttay sa isa ng lugr na malpit sa plpito,
pinakinggn nya ng mabte ang srmon na no y wala ng ib kung hind
ang makllbo n ng inlit nang pri ng it, at iy y kul sa manga
hrap sa infiyrno at purgatriyo at pagtutlus nang kandla` at
pagbibigy nang kwlta sa simbhan pang mligtasn ang manga hrap
na iyn. Si Pranssko ay sinigln nang malak ng glit, sapagkt
npagkilla nya na nillko nang pre ang kany ng manga to, at wal
sya ng ib ng pkay kung hind ang taktin lmang ang manga nammyan
pang kanil ng payamnin ang simbhan at manga kra.

Pagkaran nang srmon ay hind umw si Kko na gya nang karanywan,
dtapuwat hinanty nya ng matpus ang msa. Pagkaran nit y nagpiwan
sy sa simbhan. Kumha sya nang manga papl at sumlat sya sa pre
nang ganit:

"mong, nring ko p` ang inyu ng srmon kanna ng
umga. Npagkkilla ko na kay y nanniwla ng may infiyrno at
may purgatriyo. Ak y wal ng paniwla dto. Sa linggo ng drating,
kung big mo, prubahn mo sa iyo ng srmon sa manga to na my-roo
ng infyrno at purgatriyo. Pagkatpos pprubahn k namn sa kanil
na wal ng infiyrno ni purgatriyo. Kung ikw ang paniwalan nang
manga to hind bli ng ipabtay mo ak dahiln sa ki ng pagkatlo
at hind paniniwla`. Dtapuwat, kung ak y manlo ang hinhiling ko
lmang sa iy ay pabayan mo ak ng makapagsbi sa madl` na wal ng
infyrno ni purgatryo."

Ang il ng kpya nang slat na yt ay idinikt nya sa manga padr
nang simbhan at ang is y ipinaabt nya sa kra.

Nang it y mbsa ni Patpat sumub ang kanya ng dug`, at
wal ng pagksyahn ang kanya ng glit. Ipinatwag nya ang manga
gwrdya-sibl, at sa gabi dn nang lingg ng iyn ay pinapanhikn at
pinahanpan nya ang manga bahy-bahy sa boo ng byan, pang hulhin
si Kko`. Dtapuwat si Kko ay hind nila nhle. Nang hpon d ng
iyn ay ibinalta ni Kko sa iln nya ng matlik na kaybgan ang kany
ng ginaw`, at sil y nangpamangh`. Itinanng nil kung bkit niya
ginaw iyn at kung hind nya napagkkro ang mangyyri sa kany.

Ang is sa kanil y nagsbi nang ganit: "Magbalt ka n nang damt,
at umals ka ngayon dn, kung hind mo gust ng mhli ka nang manga
sundlo ni Patpat at maipabarl ka kinbuksan."

Si Kko ay yaw sumund sa kany ng pyo, sapagkt inakl nya ng
ttanggapn ni Patpat ang kanya ng hmon tungkl sa pagpapakilla
sa manga to na wal ng infiyrno ni purgatriyo at ang manga it y
panghle lmang nang manga pre nang kwlta. Kany sya y nagpabot
nang gab sa bhay nang isa ny ng kaybgan.

Nang dumilim n at ang bya y naggulo dahiln sa paghahanp nang
manga gwrdya-sibl ay sak pa lmang nya npagkilla ang malak ng
pangnib na kany ng kinbbingtan. Sapagkt it y nbalitan nya
agd, kany nagkaron sya nang panah ng makapagtgo sa isa ng lhim
na slok sa bhay nang kanya ng kaybgan.

Nang makaran ang manga paghahanapn sya y lumabs sa kanya ng
tagun, umw sya, nagbalt nang il ng damt, nagpasingkw nang isa
ng karumta, at pagkakha nya nang manga bla nang barl, binitbt
nya ang barl, sumaky sya sa karumta, at napahatd sa labs nang
byan. Pagkaran nang ila ng raw ay namundok sy, kasma nang il
ng manga to-ng-byan na hind makatir sa lob nang byan, sapagkt
nkagaltan sila nang kra o nang iba p ng Kastla ng may katungklan
sa byan.

Dto sa pamumundok ny sya y inabtan nang paghihmagskan lban sa
manga Kastla` nang ta ng isa ng lbo walo ng dan wal ng pu t nim.





14. SI MARYNO AT ANG PRI NG SI PATPAT.

Si Maryno ay is sa ila ng botikriyo sa bya-ng-San-Migl. Sya
y nagng is sa manga nasawi-ng-plad dahiln sa pagswy sa manga
kautusn nang kra ng si Patpat. Sya y may famliya; bukd sa aswa
ay may dalaw sya ng ank, is ng dadalawhi ng tan at is ng kabbgu
ng pangank pa lmang.

Isa ng raw ang kany ng alla ay nagkasakt. Sya y may bayw na
mdiko, kany ang alla` ay ipinagamt nya dto na wal ng byad,
at ang gamt namn ay ibinigy nya na wal ng byad sa alla`. Nang
makaran ang il ng raw ay gumalng ang alla` at it y nagakla
ng magpahing ng sandal` sa bkid. Kany` binayran nya ang kanya
ng tang at napalam sya kay Maryno pang magtir sa bkid. Hind
nalanan ang pagtitira ny sa bkid at ang alla ng it y nagkasakt
na mul`, at ang naging dlo y ang kanya ng pagkamaty.

Sa Filipnas nang manga panah ng yan ay hind mari ng huwg
pabendisyunn ang isa ng paty bgo mban. It y hind ipinahhintlot
nang manga kra, dtapuwat ang pagsasma na hind kasl nang isa ng
babye at lalki ay hind nila masydo ng pinpansn, palibhsa y
gaw rin namn nil.

Ang paty na all ni Maryno ay lubh ng mahrap at ang kany ng
manga kamagnak ay mahihrap dn at wal ng ikakya ng magbyad sa
halag na sinsingl ni Patpat. Dhil dto y wal ng magpaban sa
katawn nang alla`.

Nang mlman it ni Patpat ay ipinatwag nya si Maryno at sinbi
nya ng siy ang dpat magpaban sa paty at siy ang magbyad
nang gstos. Sa akl ni Maryno ay lumlamps ang kasalbahhan ni
Patpat. Kany sinbi nya na hindi ny sya bbayran sa pagbaban
nang paty, khit na an ang mangyre.

Si Patpat ay sinubhn nang glit. Ipinaban niya ang paty at sa
raw di ng iyn ay naparon sya sa hkman at ipinagsakdl nya si
Mariyno pang pagbayran siy nang gstos sa pagbebendisyn sa paty.

Nang dumatng ang paghuhkman si Maryno y naparon at nang itinanng
nang hukm kung an ang big nya ng sabhin tungkl sa sakdl na iyn,
ay sinbi nya it ng sumsund:

"Gino ng Hws, ang namaty na iyn ay wal na sa ki ng kapangyarhan,
sapagkt hind ku n sya alla nang sya y namaty. Noo ng sy
y my sakit pa lmang ay ipinagamt ko sy ng wala ng byad, at
binigyn ko sy ng wala ng byad nang gamt. Nagaw ku n ang ki ng
katungklan sa ki ng kpuwa to at ang katungkla ng iniytas sa
kin ni Bathla`. Is sa manga katungklan nang manga pr` ay ang
magpaban nang manga paty. Ngay ng ang to ng iyn ay patay n,
bkit namn hind magaw nang pri ng it ang kanya ng katungklan
na wal ng pa, ymang ito namn ay hind mangyyri kung may kya
ang manga kamagnak nang namaty?"

Pagkaran nang manga ilan p ng manga tanng nang hukm sa kra at
kay Mariyno ay tinpus nya ang paghuhkman, at ipinahyag nya ng
si Mariyno ay nsa katwran at ang kra y dpat magpasynsya sa
pagkbendisyon ny nang paty na wala ng pa.

Nang makaran it y llu ng lumak ang glit ni Patpat kay Maryno,
at pagkaran nang il ng raw ay ipinagsakdl niya ng mul si
Mariyno. Ngayn ay iba namn ang kanya ng sakdl. Isinakdl niya sa
hkman na si Maryno ay is ng Masn, sapagkt sya y hind nagssimb
n hind nangngumpisl n hind rin nagmmno sa pre`. Ang manga
Masn ay kaway nang Romansmo at sa makatwd ay kaway dn nang
pmahalan sa Filipnas nang manga panah ng iyn, at dhil dto y
kanya ng ipinyo na si Maryno y ipatpon sa ib ng lupan.

Nang mbalitan ni Maryno ang sakdl na yit ni Patpat ay inakl
nya ng wal na sya ng pagsa kung hind ang magtag o umlag sa mang
manghuhli sa kany. Kany` ang ginaw nya ay lumws sya sa Maynla`
at don sya nagtag`.

Dtapuwat doon mn ay nhli rn sy nang manga gwrdya-sivl. Kasma
nang pit o wal ng taga iba t ib ng byan sya y inillan sa is
ng bapr at dinal sila sa ibab nang kapulu-ng-Filipnas. At don
pagdatng nil ang ib sa kanila ng magkakasma ay pinagbbarl nang
manga sundlo ng naghatd sa kanil, sapagkt iyn ang tos nang
pinno ng nagpatpon sa manga to ng iyn.

Dtapuwat si Maryno y hind naging is sa manga nbaril na iyn. Don
sya ntir hanggng sa pananlo nang manga Amerikno ay nagkaron sya
nang kalaya ng makabbalik sa kanya ng famliya. Nang it y datnan
ny ang isa ny ng ank ay pit na ng tan ang glang at ang ikalaw
namn ay lim na ng tan.





15. ANG INTSK NA MNGANGTAM.

Si Hwn ay isa ng alwge na may kpit-bhay na Intsk na aluwge
rn. Ang Intsk na yt ay isa ng magalng na alwge at ang kanya ng
knis ay npagkkilla sa magalng nya ng paggmit nang katm. Isa
ng raw nakbili sy nang isa ng pirso-ng-khoy na may pat na
pu ng pa ang hba`. It y kanya ng nilnis. Sinubkan nya kung
makakkha sy nang pinagkatamn na wal ng patd sa bo ng hb
nang khoy. Dahiln sa hsay nang kany ng kasangkpan at sa kany
ng kabuthan sa pagaalwge, ang bgay na yn ay nagng pra ng wal
ng ano mn sa kaniy. Tw ng isslung niya ang katm ay nakakkha
nang pinagkatamn na wal ng patd, pat na pu ng pa ang hba`. pang
ipakilla nya sa kpit-bhay niya ng aluwgi ng Taglog ang kany ng
galng, it y kany ng pinadalhn nang isa ng pinagkatamn raw-raw.

Ang aluwgi ng Taglog na si Hwn ay npaglat sa galng nang
Intsk. pang gantihn nya ang kany ng manga tinanggp na
pinagkatamn, sinubkan dn ny ng kumatm at ipadal sa Intsk ang
pinagkatamn. Dtapuwat ang pinakamahb nya ng nkha na pinagkatamn
ay may-roon lmang na lab ng lim ng pa. It y kahy-hiy ng ipadal
sa Intsk.

Si Hwn ay magalng gummit nang dars at siya y nakapagppaknis
nang tabl sa pamamagtan lmang nang dars. Hind na kayilnga ng
gamtan nang katm ang ano m ng khoy na kanya ng darasn, dtapuwat
ang pinagdarasn ay manga ttal na maiikl lmang, hind skat
pagkkilanln nang kany ng galng, at hind nya mipadal sa Intsk.

Hbang si Hwn ay wal ng mlma ng gawn, ang Intsk namn ay hind
naglluby nang pagpapadal nang pinagkatam ng mahahba`. Sinigln
si Hwn nang glit. Sinunggabn nya ang kanya ng dars at pinarunn
nya ang Intsk. It y npaglat at natkot nang mkta si Hwn.

Sinbe nit: "An ang gustu mu ng sabhin sa manga ipinagpapadal
mo ng pinagkatamn sa kin? Ak y binuwsit mo at it y iyo ng
pagbbayran. Pputlin ko ang buhuk m sa pamamagtan nang dars
na it."

Ang Intsk ay natkot, sapagkt, pag ang lo nya y tinaman na nang
dars na iyn, ay pho ng hind sya mabbhay. Sya y nagkkawal`,
dtapuwat sinunggabn sya ni Hwn, iginpus sya sa bangk`, at
inumpisahn nya ng dinars ang lo nang Intsk.

Ang dars ay isa ng kasangkpa ng malak, gya nang is ng pko, at
mabigt, dtapuwat sa magalng na kamy ni Hwn it y naging pra ng
isa ng guntng lmang. Ang lagpk nang dars sa lo nang Intsk ay
lubh ng banyad, at ang manga buhk lmang ang pinptol nang patalm.

Sa tkot nang Intsk it y nagsisigw na sinbe: "Waplo! Daluhn
niny k, masam to si Hwn, hind Kilistyno!"

It y nrinig nang manga kpit-bhay at ib ng nagssipaglakd.

Kany pumsok sil sa gwan nang Intsk at don ay sinbi sa kanil
ni Hwn: "Hwag kay ng makialm dto! Ang Intsk na yit y hind ko
sinsaktn. kin lmang pinputln nang buhk."

At patluy dn ang kany ng pagdars.

Nang maptul na nya ng laht ang buhk nang Intsk ay malak ang
nagng pagkmangh nang nagssipanod, sapagkt ang buhk nang Intsk
ay pra ng ginupt nang guntng nang isa ng bihas ng barbro. Ang
Intsk namn, nang mkta nya sa salamn na wala ng sgat ang kanya
ng lo, ay malaki rn ang nagng pagkmangh`, at hind mapatd ang
pagpri nya sa galng ni Hwn sa paggmit nang dars.





16. ISA NG TO NG MAY BIRTD NANG US.

Mnsan sa isa ng byan sa kapulu-ng-Filipnas ay nhayg ang panglan
nang isa ng to sa kanya ng manga kababyan at manga kpit-byan,
dahiln sa hind karanywa ng laks nya sa pagtakb at pagluks.

Sya y isa ng to ng hind maybang, dtapuwat may kaunt ng talno
sa paghahnap at gayon dn may kaunt ng tpang. Ang kanya ng hind
karanywa ng kapalran ay hind nya ipinagmayabng n hind nya
ipinagkayil` kung an ang pinangggalngan nang kany ng d karanywa
ng laks. Sinbi nya sa mang mapagussa` na ang pinangggalngan
nang kanya ng laks ay ang angkn niya ng birtd nang us. Hind nya
sinbe kung papno ang pagkpasa kany nang birtd na iyn, dtapuwat
siya y hind marmot sa pagbibigy-lob pang ikatlung niya sa mang
kakilla o hind` ang kanya ng laks.

Sya y may pagbig na yumman, gya nang karamhan nang to, at dto
nya ginmit ang kanya ng laks. Parti sya ng nakkipagtakbhan, at
ang manga takbha ng it y lg na ng pinagkatalunn nang marmi ng
salap`. Sya ay lg na ng may malak ng pust. Wal sya ng itinng na
pinakkipagtakbuhn. Kung mnsan nakkipagtakbhan sya sa kpwa to,
kung mnsan ay sa kabyo, sa so, at sa iba p ng hyop na matli
ng tumakb.

Pagkaran nang ila ng raw ay dummi ang napon nya ng salap`
na pinanalnan sa pusthan. Gayon dn ang kanya ng manga kaybgan
na nagsipust sa kany ay nagkaron nang marmi ng kwlta. Nang
mpagalman nang manga to na sy y may birtd nang us ay hind
na sya big labnan sa takbhan. Dhil dto y pang hwag mhinto`
ang kanya ng pananlo at pagkta nang kwalt, ay nagbbigay sy
nang malalak ng palgit sa kanya ng kinkalban. Dhil sa kalakhn
nang manga palgit na ibinigay ny ay marmi r ng to ng lumban
sa kany. Dtapuwat tuw n y sya ang nagng mnanal. Gayon dn sa
manga pakikipaglukshan parti n ng sy ang nannlo.

Dtapuwat, kung malaki mn ang kabutha ng nkamtan ny sa birtd
na yt, ay my-ron d ng il ng kahirpan na nkamtan ny dahilan
dto. Dahilan dn sa kahirpa ng it ay hind nya natagal ng angkinn
hbang bhay nya ang birtd na iyn. Dahiln sa birtd na iyn sya
y nagng lubh ng magugulatn. Ang manga kalabg, ngay, at tahl
nang so kung gab ay hind nagpatlug sa kany. Dahiln sa manga
ngay na yit, kung nattlug sya ay palgi ng nppaluks. Ll na,
kung isa ng tahl nang so, halimbwa`, ang makgsing sa kany,
sya y nppaluks nang lubh ng matas sa kany ng hihign, at bgo
sya pagsa-uln nang sarle, ay nagttatakb na sy. Sa pagluksu
ny ng it na hind sinsadya` ay wal sya ng nagging pagingat at
karanywa y umabot sy sa ituktk nang bubungn, at sa kababan nit
y lgi ng nallamog ang kanya ng katawn o kay y nagkkabkul sy sa
lo, dahiln sa pagkhampas ny sa bubungn. Gayon dn sa kanya ng
hind sinsadya ng pagtakb pagkgising ny dahiln sa pagkglat,
ay nagkkaumpg-umpg ang bo ng katawan ny sa manga dindng nang
kanya ng bhay.

It y is ng mahrap na tsin, at inakl nya ng hind sya mabbhay
n ng malwt dahiln sa hind pagkkatlog kung gab. Kany inakl nya
ng itpon ang birtd na yt pagkaran nang il ng raw. Nang sumpit
ang ikapit ng raw nang kanya ng pagare` sa birtd ay sya y lubh
ng hirap n at inakl nya ng sya y mammatay n sa hrap. Ang lu
nya ay bukuln. Ang mukh nya ay marmi ng pas` at khit na hind
sya nabalan nang but, ang manga lamn namn nya ay lubh ng lamg.

Dhil dto y wal ng kib sya ng naparon sa isa ng prang at itinpon
nya don ang birtd na nplut nya, ymang marmi na rn lmang siya
ng salap ng pinanalnan.





17. ANG ALLA NG UNGG`.

Siy Andrs ay my-roo ng isa ng alla ng ungg na kany ng lubh ng
minmahl, sapagkt ang unggu ng it y nagbbigay sa kany nang malak
ng serbsyo. Kung gab ipinaglltag sya nang bang nang unggo ng it;
kung umga ay inihhand` ang kany ng panghilmos, at ang ano m ng
kanya ng iytos ay sinsunod nang ungg`.

Gab-gab ang unggu ng it y nattlog sa illim nang ktri ng
tintulgan nang kanya ng panginon. It y hind gust nang kanya
ng panginon, sapagkt, dahiln sa kanya ng malak ng kabuluhn,
ay big ni Andrs na sy y bigyn nang isa ng mabte ng lugr na
tulugn. Dtapuwat, khit na gnu ng pagplit ang gawn ni Andrs,
ay hind nya mapatlog sa ib ng lugr ang kanya ng alla ng ungg`.

Siy Andrs ay isa ng twu ng may tkot at pagbig sa Dys. Kany
gabi-gab bgu sya matlog ay nagkkurus sy at tumtwag sya sa
Dys. Sa ras nang kanya ng paghig gabi-gab ay dinratnan n ny
na nsa illim nang kanya ng ktri ang ungg`. Mnsan mn ay hind
sya nuna sa paghig` sa unggu ng it.

Isa ng raw ang pr sa byan ay dumlaw kay Andrs sa kanya ng
bhay. Pagkaran nang il ng sandal ng pagsaslitan ay ibinalt niy
Andrs sa pre` na sya y my-roo ng is ng alla ng ungg na lubh
ng malak ang kabuluhn, sapagkt sya y pinagssilbih ng mabte,
at khit na an ang iytos nya ay sinsunod, at sinbi pa ny ng
maspag pa ky sa manga iba ny ng alla` ang unggo ng iyn.

Malak ang nagng pagtatak nang pre`, at hiniling ny ng ipakta sa
kany ang ungg ng iyn. Kany tinwag ny Andrs ang ungg`. Hind gya
nang dti, na sa is ng twag lmang niy Andrs ay lumlpit agad-agd
ang ungg`, ngayn maksa-m-pu ng twag n ay wal pa sy. Siy Andrs
ay naglit, nagtindg, at hinnap nya sa manga sulok-sulk nang bhay
ang ungg`.

Ito y nkta nya sa isa ng slok at nakakpit na mabte sa isa ng
halge. Tinwag nya at kanya ng pinaalis sa slok, dtapuwat ang
ungg y yaw umals don, khit na an ang gawn sa kany. Dhil dto
ay tinwag nya ang pre`, pang it y don tingnn sa slok ang all
nya ng ungg`.

Pagklapit nang pre` ang ungg y kuming sa tkot. Nagkaron nang
hinl ang pr` na ang ungg ng iyn ay is ng dimnyo. Kany` ang
ginaw nya y nagkurs sya at pagkabendisyn nya nang kaunt ng tbig
ay niwisikn nya ang ungg`.

Pagdpo` sa katawn nit nang tbig ay pumutk na pra ng isa ng barl,
at sa lugr nang ungg` ay wal sil ng nkta kung hind asu lmang
na agd nawal`.

Pagkaran nit siniysat nang pre si Andrs tungkl sa kanya ng
paniniwla sa Diys. Sinbi ny Andrs na hind nabbgo ang matbay
nya ng paniniwla` at gabi-gab nagddasal sy bgo matlog. Siniysat
dn nang pre` kung san tumtlog ang ungg`. Sinbe ni Andrs na
it y tumlog gabi-gab sa illim nang kany ng ktri ng tulugn.

Pagkaran nit y ipinakilla sa kany nang pre` na ang ungg ng
iyn ay is ng dimnyo na umabng sa kany, at kung sy y sumla
nang pagtwag sa Diys bgu matlog, sa gab di ng iyn ay ihhlug
sya nang dimnyo sa infyrno.





18. ANG MATAND SA PUNS SA LIWNAG NANG RAW.

Si Pdro ay is ng matpang na lalke. Parti sya ng nakrinig nang
manga kwnto tungkl sa asuwng, duwndi, mangkuklam, at mang matand
sa puns, dtapuwat ang ipinagttak ni Pdro ay kung bkit hind sya
maktagpo n khit is nang mang bgay na it. big niya ng makkta
nang isa man lmang sa kanil, pang mlman nya kung tnay ng` na
sil y my-roo ng manga kapangyarha ng hind karanywan sa karamhan
nang to.

Sya y nagllakd na isa ng gab sa is ng lugr na madilm at
pinagkkatakutn, sapagkt dto y marmi ng nakkta nang matand
sa puns.

Ang tabko nang matanda ng it y nakattkot ang lak, at kung it
y hititin ny ang liwnag na nangyyri ay pra ng liwnag nang is
ng sig`.

Sa gabi ng iyn sa kany ng paglalakd maly pa sy y nakkta na
sy nang is ng liyb. Ang buhuk ny y nagsitindg at inakl nya
ng bumalk, dtapuwat npiglan nya ang kany ng tkot at ipinatloy
din ny ang kanya ng paglkad.

Sya y sinalbong nang nagttabko. Pagklapit nya y inannaw nya
ang katawn nang matand ng iyn, dtapuwat hind rin nasyahn ang
kanya ng pagsisysat, kanya inbig nya ng mkta sa skat nang raw
ang matand ng iyn. pang it y mangyri dpat nya ng piglin ang
matand`, sapagkt ang manga ispritu ng it ay bumbalik sa kanil
ng thnan sa impyrno o iba pa m ng lugr sa paglpit nang umga.

Kany` ang ginaw nya y hinawkan nya agd ang matand`. Ito y
nakipagbun sa kany. Kung mnsan sya y nsa illim, kung mnsan sya
y nsa ibbaw, dtapwat hind nya pinakawaln ang matand`. Mahigpt
na mahigpt ang kanya ng kpit at tinalaga ny ng summa khit na
san sya dalhn nang matand kung it y malaks ky sa kany.

Sil y nagbun hanggng alastrs. Si Pdro sa ras na it ay pagd na
pagod n at malak ang panglalat`, dtapuwat hind rin nya binitwan
ang kany ng kabun`. Nang magalaskwtru n ay nagluby nang pagklos
ang kanya ng hwak. Nang makaran ang kalahti-ng-ras ang snag nang
raw ay nagumpisa n nang pagtanglw sa kanil, dtapuwat hind pa
rn lubh ng maliwnag pang mpagkilla ni Pdro kung an ang kany
ng tngan. Nang dumatng ang alasngko ay malaki ny ng pagkmangha`,
nang mkta nya ng sya y nkap sa is ng halgi ng hind lubh ng
matas ky sa kany, dtapuwat nttlus sa lp at sung na sung.





19. ANG TIYNAK NI HWN.

Isa ng gab si Hwn ay tumawd sa log sa kanya ng paglilibt. Nang
sya y nsa pasgan pa lmang, nakramdam sy nang sbuy nang buhngin
sa kanya ng likd, nang sya y mtuntung n sa kabuhangnan.

Nang na ng gab it y hind nya inin. Nang ikalaw ng gab, nang
magdan sya ng ul sa pasga ng it, nakramdam sya ng mul nang sbuy
nang buhngin sa kanya ng likd. Inakl nya ng subkan at hulhin
ang nagssbuy sa kany nang buhngin, kany` sa kanya ng paglkad
ay pamnsan-mnsan sya ng pumphit na pabigl` sa kanya ng likurn,
dtapwat wal sya ng mkta khit na an.

Dhil dto y sinigln siya nang kaunti ng tkot at inakl nya ng bak
kung an ng matand sa puns o tiynak ang kanya ng nkkatngo. Kany`
tinulnan nya ang pagtakb, dtapuwat hbang nagttlin sya ay llu
nam ng dumdalas ang pagdp nang buhngin sa kanya ng likd. Lumak
ang kanya ng tkot at dhil dto y bumalik sy sa kanya ng bhay na
patakb nang bus-laks.

Nang dumatng sya don ay hinhbul nya ang kanya ng hining at hind
sya makasap. Nang sya y makapaghinga n nang kaunt` ay sak pa lmang
sya nakasagt sa marmi ng manga tanng nang kanya ng am at iba p
ng kasa-ng-bahy. Sinbi nya sa kanya ng am na sya y sinsundn nang
manga dwnde sa kanya ng paglalakd at sinsabyan sya nang buhngin.

Itinanng nang kanya ng am kung san ang lugr na iyn at sinbi nya
ng sa pasgan nang log. Ang kanya ng am ay npahalakhk nang twa
at sinbi nya ng iyn ay hind dwnde, dtapuwat ang kany lmang
pa ang nagttangy nang buhngin sa kanya ng likd sa bwat kanya
ng paghakbng.

Dtapuwat si Hwn ay yaw maniwla` at my ila ng raw na hind
sya nanog nang bhay. Dhil dto y inbig nang kanya ng am na
mipakilla sa kany ang katotohnan nang kanya ng sinbe, at isa ng
gab ay sinbi nya kay Hwn na sya y magpasyl at magdan sa lugr
di ng iyn at sya y kany ng ssamhan.

Pumyag si Hwn at sila ng dalaw y naparon sa pasgan. Nang dumatng
na sila don ay nagpahle ang ama ni Hwn. Nang itu namn ay nagllakad
n sa kabuhangnan at nang sya y nakramdam nang sbuy nang buhngin
sa likd, sinigln sya ng mul nang tkot at isinigw nya sa kanya
ng am na nagumpisa n nang pagsbuy nang buhngin sa kanya ng likd.

Pinabalk nya si Hwn at kanya ng pinalkad na mul`. Ngayn ay
sinsundan ny sa likurn. Dhil dto y nkta nang ama ni Hwn na
tw ng sya y hhakbng ang sinlas na sot nya ay nagttangy nang
buhngin, at sa pagaals nit nang pa ang buhngi ng tangy ay
nappasbuy sa likd ni Hwn.

Ang ginaw nang kanya ng am ay ipinaals ang sot nya ng sinlas at
pinalkad sya ng mul`. Ngayn, khit na gno kalyo` ang lakran ni
Hwn ay wal na sya ng nrramdam ng sbuy nang buhngin sa kanya
ng likd.

Mul noon ay nawaln sya nang tkot sa manga matand`, duwnde,
asuwng, at iba p ng pinagkkatakutn.





20. SI HW NG MANGLILGAW.

Ang dalga ng si Mary ay balta nang gand sa kanya ng
briyo. Dtapuwat wal ng manglilgaw sa kany, lban na lmang kay
Hwn. Ngnit ang am ni Mary ay malak ang pagkayaw kay Hwn. Hind
mkasap ni Hwn ang nilligwan kung hind palihm, sapagkt pag
nlman nang am ni Mary, it y sinsaktan sil kpwa` sa pamamagtan
nang paml`. Kung mnsan at malak ang glit nang am ay bamb ang
gingmit nya kay Hwn, at sa ganit y malpit sya ng mabalan nang
but kylan man at sila y mhli sa pagusap.

Isa ng gab ng madilm ang am ni Mariy ay naglibt. Nang it y
mlman ni Hwn pinarunn nya si Mariy pang kauspin. Nalibng
sila sa pagusap, kany sila y dinatnn nang am ni Mary sa kanya
ng pagw`.

Sinigln sya agd nang glit at pasigw nya ng kinasap si Hwn:
"Anu k, salbhe? Sinbi ku n sa iy ng hwag k ng ttuntong dto
sa ki ng pamamhay. Ano ang big mo t nrrito k?"

At pagkasbe nit y sinunggabn nya ang isa ng bisg nang kawyan at
inakman nya ng bambuhn si Hwn. Sa malaki ng tkot nit ay nagtaln
sya sa bintn`, dtapuwat sinundn din sy nang am. Kany ang ginaw
nya y tumakb sya nang bus-laks.

Ang gab ay madilm na pra ng ling, at hind nya mtumpakn kung san
ang parunn, dtapuwat patloy rin sya nang pagtakb. Nagkangdadp
sya sa pagtakb, dtapwat maligsi sy ng nagbbngon at patluy din
sa pagtakb.

Hind nalon at nakdaan sya nang is ng malak at maitm na
bgay. Nkilla nya ng iyn ay isa ng kalabw, kany sya y lumundg
agd sa likd nit, at kanya ng pinatakb.

Ang pagsaky sa kalabw ay hind lubh ng mahrap sa kalapran nang
likd nit at sa kahinan nang takb. Kany`, khit na wal ng pamitk
si Hwn ay d natkot na sumaky. Sa kadilimn nang gab sa kanya
ng pagsaky ay nangyri ng nharap sya sa bunttan nang kalabw at
hind sa uluhn.

Pinatlin nya ang kalabw. Nangyri nam ng ang kalabw na it ay
r nang am ni Mary. Hind nalanan at naktanaw sya nang bhay na
malaw sa pinattunghan nang kalabw. Ang bo ng sa ny ang bhay
na iyn ay sa kanya ng kpit-bhay. Kany bumab sya sa kalabw at
patakbo sy ng pumanhk sa bhay.

Malak ang nagng pagkalit nya at pagkatkot nang pagkpanhik nya y
sinalbong sya nang am ni Mary, at binamb sya sa katawn at sinbi:
"An t nagbalk ka p? Hind ba pinalyas na kit, wala ng hy`?"

Nang pagsa-uln si Hwn nang kanya ng sarli ay nagtaln sya sa
bataln at tumakb sya ng mul patngo sa kanya ng bhay, dtapuwat
ngay y hind na sya sumaky sa khit an pa mn.





21. SI MARIY NG MARMOT.

Nang nabbhay pa si Mariy ay ntira sy sa kanya ng manam na bhay
sa gitn nang isa ng malwak na bakran na may magagand ng hardn
at manga pnu-ng-khoy. Sya y lubh ng mayman, kany` ang bhay nya
y isa ng pany na kaginhawhan.

Hind sya nakaratng nang pat na pu ng tan sa glang at sya y
namaty. Ang laht nang kanya ng yman ay hint nya sa kanya ng
kapatd at sa simbhan. Hind nya nalala ang mahihrap nya ng
kakilla at il ng kpit-bhay.

Ang kapatd na nawan ay nagpamsa nang sund-sund sa lob nang pito
ng raw, pang ang kluluwa ni Mariy ay papaskin ni Sam-Pdro sa
pintan nang lngit.

Nang ang kanya ng kapatd ay nabbhay pa it y balta ng balt
sa karamtan. Siya msmo ay bihra ng magpamsa o magpatlos nang
kandla`. Ang manga pulbi ng nagppalims, kung tumwag sa kany,
ay pinallyas nya at hind nillimusn. Kadalasn ay ipinahhbul
pa ny sa so. Ang kanya ng manga kasam ay pinapagttrabho nya
nang wal ng pa, at kung kanya ng paknin, ay wala ng lam,--asn
at knin lmang. Sa panunyo sa kany nang kanya ng manga kasam,
twi ng sil y nagssiuw` ay nagddala sila nang manga mank, itlg,
bik, at manga bnga nang glay o halman, pang ibigy kay Mary. Ang
manga alala ng it ay hind nila ibinbigay dahiln sa kanil ng
pagmamahl kay Mary, dtapwat pra ng isa ng shol, pang sila y hwag
masiydu ng alipustan sa kanil ng pagparon sa kanya ng bhay. Kung
si Mary namn ay lumlabas sa bkid sa kanya ng manga kasam, ang
bwat mkta nya sa pamamhay nila na kanya ng mgustuhn ay kinkha
nya nang wala ng kib` at hind nya binbayran. Kung halimbwa y
makkta sya sa kanya ng manga kasam nang is ng bgu ng yri ng
bkol, bilo, bisty, bayng, bang, palayk, lumb, sandk, kaln,
o iba p ng kasangkpan sa bhay, ay kinkha ny at ipinaddala ny
sa kanya ng bhay. Kung hind nya magmit ang manga pinagkkuha ny
ay ipinagbbili ny. Gayon dn ang gaw nya sa manga hyop nang kanya
ng manga kasam. Dhil dto y yumman sya ng agd.

Nang sya y my-roon n ng tatlu ng raw na nammaty, ang kany
ng kapatd ay nrron sa kany ng bhay at don nagppalpas nang
pagdadalamhte`. Isa ng hpun nang sya y nagllakad sa hlamann,
ntabi sy sa baln na nsa bakran. Npaglat sya, sapagkt
sa illim nang baln ay may nrinig sy ng tumtwag sa kanya ng
panglan. Itinungu ny ang kanya ng lo sa baln at don ay llu ng
nrinig ny ng mabte ang pagtwag, dtapuwat wal sya ng mkta ng
to na khit an.

Sinbi nang bses: "ki ng kapatd, ak ay si Mariy. Ang ginaw
ku ng pamumhay na karamtan, kasakimn, at kalupitn ay ki ng
pinagbbayran ngayn. Ak ay nrrin sa prusahn ni Bathl sa laht
nang makasalnan. Kung mar ay hwg mu ak ng tulran, at ikaw sna
y humnap nang paran pang mahngo mo ak dto sa kumkulu ng langs
na ki ng trhan ngayn."

Ang kanya ng kapatd ay lubh ng malak ang nagng pagkahpis,
at sya y naparon agd sa pre`, pang ipagtanng kung papno ang
para ng maggaw ny pang mahngo nya sa infyrno ang kany ng
kapatd. Ipinyo nang pri` na sya y magsady sa isa ng byan na
my-roo ng larwan ni Sam-Pdro na milagrso. Ang larwa ng it ni
Sam-Pdro ay nakkipagsap sa manga to at naghhtol nang sar-sri
ng paran pang makapsok sa lngit. Iyn ang kanya ng milgro.

Ang kapatd ni Mary ay nagsady agad-agd sa bya ng kindroonn
nang Sam-Pdro ng milagrso. Nang dumatng sya ron at nakkipagsap na
sy kay Sam-Pdro, sinbi nya ang laht-laht. Sinbi nya ng ang sbi
sa kany nang kany ng kapatd ay ang kanya ng ginaw ng karamtan,
kasakimn, at kalupitn ay sya ny ng ikinahlog sa infyrno.

"Kung gayn," ang wk ni Sam-Pdro, "humnap ka nang khit isa ng
to, hyop, o halman na ginawan nang iyo ng kapatd nang is ng
kabtan. Kung ikw ay makkta n, bumalik k ng mul sa kin, at
bbigyn kit nang para ng ikahhngo mo sa hrap sa iyo ng kapatd."

Ang kapatd ni Mary ay umuw agd sa kanila ng byan, at dto y
naguss sya sa laht nang nammyan kung sno ang may tang na lob sa
kanya ng kapatd o kay kung sno ang kanya ng ginawn o pinagsalitan
nang mabti. Dtapuwat khit is ay wal ng makasagt. Ang manga
hyop namn sa manga kpit-bhay at sa bakran ni Mary ang kanya ng
pinagusis`, dtapuwat wal rin sy ng nkta na ginawan nang mabti
nang kany ng kapatd.

Ang isa ng so ng buto t balt ay nagsbi sa kany: "Isa ng hpon ak y
gutm na gutm. Nakdaan ak sa kany ng bakran nang isa ng but. It
y kinagat k at ki ng dindala, nang mkta nya ak. Ipinahbol
nya ak ng agd, at nang bitwan ko ang but it y ipinabaon ny sa
lpa`. Iyan b y isa ng kabtan?"

Llu ng lumak ang hpis nang kapatd ni Mariy at unt-unt
ng nawwal ang kanya ng pagsa na mahngo sa hrap ang kanya ng
kapatd. Inumpisahan ny ng usisin ang manga halman sa bakran nang
kanya ng kapatd. Inisa-is nya ng laht ang manga kalabsa, po,
pipno, sle, miln, singkams, man`, talng, staw, at sibyas,
bwang, at iba p ng glay. Sa kanil y wal sya ng nkta nang kanya
ng hinhnap. Isinund namn ny ang manga pno-ng-khoy. Siniysat
nya is-is ang manga pn nang sko, annas, tis, mablo, sh`,
dalandn, dyap, at balbad. Ngnit wal ri ng nagng katuturn ang
kanya ng pgod; isa na lmang pangkt nang manga halman ang hind pa
nya naussa`, at kung dto y hind sya makkta nang kanya ng hnap,
ay wal sya ng maggaw sa pagdudsa nang kanya ng kapatd. Nalbot
nya sila ng laht, dtapuwat wal ng nakapagsbi na tumanggp sila
nang is ng gaw ng kabtan sa kay Mary.

Sa khuli-hulhan pumaron ang kapatd sa tab nang baln, at don
inuss nya ng laht ang manga dam. Nang dumatng ang gab ay isa
na lmang na pnu-ng-dam ang hind nya naussa`. It y nilaptan
nya na pun ng pun nang tkot at pagsa.

Itinanng nya sa pno nang dam na nttanm sa tab nang baln:
"Nang nabbhay ba ang ki ng kapatd, ay ginawn ka ny nang is
ng kabtan?"

Isinagt nang dam: "! Ang iyo b ng kapatd? Siy ng`, siy ang
nagbigy sa kin nang bgo ng bhay. No ng tagraw na nagdan, lant
ng lanta n ang ki ng manga dhon at ak y malpit na ng mamaty,
dtapuwat ang iy ng kapatd ay nalgo` isa ng hpon sa tab nang
balo ng it. Sa kanya ng pagpalgo` ay nwisikan ak nang tbig at
dhil dto y lumaks ako ng mul`, at ang manga lant ku ng dhon ay
nanarwa ng muli`."

Wala ng pagksyahn ang naging tuw nang kapatd ni Mary, at sa gab
ri ng iyn ay nagbalk sya kay Sam-Pdro. Binigyan sy ni Sam-Pdro
nang isa ng dslan, at sinbi sa kany na umuw sya at ilwit nya
sa baln ang dsla ng iyn. Tawgin nya si Mary at pakaptin nya sa
dslan, at dhil dto y mahhng nya sa hrap ang kanya ng kapatd.

Nagbalk sya ng agd at sumskat pa lmang ang raw nang sya
y dumatng sa bakran ni nasra ng Mary. Lumpit sya sa baln,
inilawit ny ang dslan, at tinwag nya ang kanya ng kapatd. It y
lumitw sa ibbaw nang tbig at humwak sa dslan. Inumpisahn nang
kany ng kapatd ang paghtak sa dslan at sya y ntaas n unt-unt`.

Sa paghngo ng it sa kany ay my-roo ng ib ng kluluwa na big
di ng makaals sa infyrno. Kany sil y nagsikpit sa pa ni Mary,
nang mkta nil na it y nahhng sa hrap. Dtapuwat nang ang pa
ni Mary ay sya na lmang nllubg sa tbig ang ginaw nya y ikinawg
nya ang dalawa ng pa, pang ang manga kluluwa ng nkkpit sa kany
ay mangkabitw.

Nang it y gawin ny ay napatd ang dslan at agad-agd sya ng lumubg
sa baln, at mul noon ay hind n sya nkasap nang kanya ng kapatd.

Bumalk it kay Sam-Pdro at ibinalta` ang nangyre, dtapuwat sinbe
ni Sam-Pdro na wal na sila ng maggawa pang mahngo sa infyrno
ang kany ng kapatd.





22. TATL NG KLULUWA NG TUMWAG KAY SAM-PDRO.

Si Hwn ay isa ng bgu ng twu ng maksig. Dtapuwat nang dumatng
sya sa glang na dalawa ng p t dalaw, sya y nagkasakt nang malubh`
at d nalanan at namaty siy. Ang kanya ng kluluwa ay naparon sa
lngit at tumuktk sa pintan nit.

Si Sam-Pdro ay sumagt sa kanya ng pagtuktk at itinanng nit:
"Snu ka? An ang sady mo rto?"

Isinagt nang kluluwa ni Hwn: "Ak ang kluluwa ni Hwn. Buksan m
ang pint`, at big ko ng pumsok."

Binuksn nang bantay-pint` ang pintan, at bgu nya binaya ng
makapsok ang kluluwa ni Hwn ay sinysat mna nya nang ganit:
"Ano ang dhil at naparto ka? Ano ang kabnla ng ginaw mo sa lpa`
at nagakl ka ng nbbgay sa y ang kaginhawhan sa lngit? Ikw
bag y may inwa ng aswa?"

Ang kluluwa ni Hwn ay nagsbi: "Nang ak y nsa lp pa, madals
aku ng magsimb, magdasl, at maglims, dtapuwat hind ako nagkaplad
na magaswa."

Isinagt nang bantay-pint`: "Hind ka dpat magtam nang kaginhawhan
sa lngit."

At pagksbi nya nit ay isinara ny ang pint`. Ang kluluwa ni Hwn
ay hind nakapsok sa lngit.

Pagkaals ni Hwn ay dumatng namn ang isa pa r ng kluluwa.

"Snu ka? At bkit mo gust ng pumsok sa lngit? Ikaw b y nagaswa
nang nssa lp p?" ang manga tanng nang bantay-pint`.

Isinagt nang kluluwa: "Ak y ang kluluwa niy Andrs. Nagaswa ak
nang ak y nssa lp pa. Buksan m ang pint` at big ko ng pumsok."

Agad-agd na binuksn ni Sam-Pdro ang pint nang lngit at pagkkta
nya sa kluluwa niy Andrs ay sinbi nya: "! Kwwa ng kluluwa! Sa
mang gya mo nttan at nrrpat ang manga kaginhawhan sa
lngit. Pumsuk ka!"

Ang kluluwa ni Andrs ay tuwa ng tw at pumsok sa masay ng thnan.

Pagksara nang pint ay my-roon na nam ng tumuktk.

"Snu ka?" ang tanong ul nang banty.

"Ak y ang kluluwa ni Mariyno," ang sagt nang tumuktk.

"Bkit ka naparto? Bkit ka nagakla ng marpat ka ng magtam nang
lngit? Ikw bag y nagaswa nang nssa lpa ka p?"

Sa manga tanng na it y isinagt nang kluluwa ni Mariyno: "Nang ak
y nssa lp pa madals ak ng magpamsa. Ang kalaht nang yman
ko ay ibinigay k sa simbhan sa pagpapamsa at manga pagpapatugtg
nang kampna`. Ang nipatlus k ng kandl ay hind mahhla nang
tatl ng kalabw, at kung sa pagaaswa namn," idinugtung ny,
"ak y nagkaron nang dalaw. Nabo ak at nagaswa ng mul`."

"ki ng ikinallungkot ang hind ko pagkari ng papaskin kit. Ang
manga lku ng gya mo ay wala ng lugr dto sa kahariyn nang lngit."

At isinara ny ang pint`.





23. SI HW NG BANGKRO.

Isa ng raw isa ng Kastla` ay napattawd kay Hwn sa kanya ng
bangk` sa ibyo nang log. Ang Kastla ng sakay ny ay marnung
magsalit nang Taglog. Kany`, nang sil y nllay na sa pasgan,
ay nagumpisa sy nang pakikipagsap kay Hwn.

Ang Kastla ng it ay isa ng marnong na to, sigro ng isa ng gur ng
balt sa Espnya, at it y npagkkilla sa pagsasalit nya kay Hwn
tungkl sa heyugrafya, aritmtika, at iba t ib ng wk sa Ewrpa.

Nang matpus ang kanya ng pagsasalit`, ay nagtanng sy kay Hwn
nang ganit: "Ikw ba y nagral nang hewgrafya?"

"Hind p`," ang sagt ni Hwn,--at katunya y uwal ng mwng si Hwn,
sapagkt sya y lumak sa hrap at sa gay y pany na pagtatrabho
lmang ang pinagddaanan ny ng bhay.

Ang Kastl ay npaglat sa sagt ni Hwn at sinbe niya ng agd:
"Dinramdam ko, kaybgan, ang hind mu pagkalam nang hewgrafya,
sapagkt dhil dto y pra ng nawal` ang kalaht nang iyo ng bhay."

Si Hwn ay hind kumib` at patluy dn ang pagsagwn.

Hind nalanan at tumanng namn ang Kastla`: "Nagral ka b nang
aritmtika?"

"Hind p`," ang sagt ni Hwn.

"Kung gayn, kaybgan, ay pra ng nawal sa iy ang ikpat na bahge
nang iyo ng bhay."

Si Hwn ay natkot nang kaunt`, sapagkt hind nya mpagkro ang
big sabhin nang Kastla`.

Sinbi nya sa kanya ng sarli: "Kww ka, Hwn, wal n ng nttir
nang iyu ng bhay, kung hind isa ng ikpat na part lmang."

Nang ang bangk nila ay nssa mallim na lugr na nang log, at
hbang ang Kastl namn ay pinagkkro ang malak ng kamangmangn
nang manga to ng trabahadr sa Filipnas, si Hwn ay tumanng nang
ganit sa kanya ng saky: "Marnong p ba kayo ng lumangy?"

"Hind`!" ang sagut agd nang Kastla`.

"Kung gayn," ang sagot ni Hwn, "ay hind lmang pra kay ng nawaln
nang bo ng inyo ng bhay, dtapwat nawal na ng ng tnay."

At sinabayn nya it nang pagtatab nang bangk ng sinsakyan nil. Si
Hwn ay lumangy sa pasgan at ang Kastl namn ay tinangy nang gos.





24. ANG KABTAN SA MANGA HYOP.

Is ng gab ng madilm ay nagllakad si Hwn sa manga kaparnga
ng malalyo` sa manga byan. Sya y patngo sa kanya ng byan. Bgu
sya makaratng dto ay kinkayilnga ng magdan sya sa manga ilng
na lugr.

Isa ng gab na sya y nagllakad sa ganit ng lugr bigl sya
ng npaglat sa pagdatng nang isa ng psa ng itm na humni
at kinmot ang kanya ng pa. Ang ginaw nya y bus-laks nya ng
sinpa ang psa`, at it y npahits nang malyo`. Ipinatluy nya ang
paglalakd, dtapuwat hind nalanan at nagbalk na namn sa kany ang
psa`. Llu ng lumak ang kanya ng glit at sinp nya ng mul` ang
psa`. Inakl nya ng ang psa ng iyn ay is ng laruwn nang tynak
o asuwng. Ipinatluy nya ang paglkad. Hind naluwatn at ang psa
ng itm ay nagbalk na mul sa kany. Ngayn, sa lugr nang sipin
nya ang psa`, it y hinawkan ny at dinala ny sa kanya ng bisg,
kanya ng hinagd, at pinagttapk, at sinbi nya sa psa`: "Mabat
na ps`, an ang gusto m? Ssma ka ba sa ki ng paglalakd?" at
ipinatluy ny ang kany ng paglkad.

Hind nalanan at sya y sinumpng nang antk. Sa dan ay my nkta
sya ng isa ng bhay, dtapuwat ang manga to sa byan ay may paniwla
ng ingkantdo ang bhay na iyn. Dtapuwat wal ng iba ng mtulgan
si Hwn, kaniy` ang ginaw nya y pumanhik sy sa bhay pang don
matlog.

Sya y nhimbng, dtapuwat nang naghhti-ng-gabi n ay ngising sya
sa klusksan nang manga dag`. Ang ginaw nya y pinagsisip nya
at pinagdadagukn ang manga dag` pang kanya ng patayn o kay y
palaysin. Dtapuwat ang manga dag` ay dummi nang dummi hanggng
sa napun` ang kuwrto at sya y kanil ng pinagkakagt.

Ang ginaw ni Hwn ay kinha nya ang kanya ng psa ng itm at sinbi
nya rto ng patain ny ang manga dag`. Ang ps` ay ngumiyw at
inumpisahn ang paghbol sa manga dag`. Malak ang nagng tkot nang
manga dag`, at ang manga hind npatay nang psa ay nagsipagtakb sa
kan-kanil ng lungg`. Nang mkta ni Hwn na wal na ng nttir
sa manga dag kung hind ddalawa lmang, ay pinapaghint nya ang
psa`. Kanya ng hinli ang dalawa ng dag` at kanya ng inmo` at
inakl nya ng isma rn sil na gya nang ps sa kanya ng paglalakd.

Kinbuksan ay ipinatluy nya ang kanya ng paglalakd. Inabtan
sya nang gab sa isa ng lugr na wala ng bhay, kany ang ginaw
nya y ipinatluy nya ang paglalakd papunt sa isa ng bhay na r
nang isa ng matand`. Nagktaon namn na ang matanda ng it y is
ng engkantadr. Pinatluy nya si Hwn at pinatlog nya sa isa ng
sild. Si Hwn ay natlog nang wal ng paghihinl nang anu mn.

Dtapuwat, nang mgising sy kinbuksan, ay npaglat sya at
natkot nang mkta nya ng sya y nkkulng sa isa ng kahn na wal
ng bksan. Pinagsip nya ang manga dingdng nang kahn, dtapuwat
wal sya ng magaw`, it y hind nya mabuksn. Malak ang kanya ng
pagdadalamhte` at wal sya ng mlma ng gawn, nang malala nya
ng sya y may kasma ng is ng psa at dalaw ng dag sa kanya ng
klngan. Kinha nya ang dalawa ng dag`, inam-am nya, at sinbi nya
ng bumtas sil sa kah ng kanila ng kinkkulungn. Ang manga dag ay
nagumpis nang pagkagt sa tabl at unt-unt sila ng nakagaw nang
hkay sa makapl na tabl, hanggng sa it y nabtas. Nang makabtas
na sil ay bumalk sil ng mul kay Hwn at si Hwn namn ay pinabtas
sil ng mul` sa dindng nang klngan. Sa pagulit-lit nang kanila
ng paggaw nang manga btas, sa kalanan ay nakagaw sil nang is
ng malaki ng btas, at si Hwn ay nakawal`.

Ang matand ay hinnap ni Hwn, dtapuwat it y hind nya mkta khit
san. Kany ipinatluy ny ang pagw`, at don nang dumatng sya ay
ipinamalt nya ang malak ng serbsyo na ginaw sa kany nang kanya
ng tatl ng kaybga ng is ng psa` at dalawa ng dag`.





25. SI HW NG MANGDUDKIT.

Nbsa ku sa isa ng nobla ng Kastla` na ang pamagt ay "La tmba
de yrro" ang sumsund.

Si Hwn ay isa ng bta ng lilimhi ng tan, ank nang is ng kasam
nang mayma ng si Andrs. Si Hwn mul pa sa pagkabt` ay ppe,
dtapuwat hind` bing. Gayon dn ang pagkappe nya ay hind malubh`,
sapagkt kadalasn sya y nakassigw, dtapuwat hind ng` lmang
gya nang ting nang karanywa ng bta` ang sa kany.

Isa ng gab si Andrs ay dumlaw sa bhay nang kany ng kasam na
ama ni Hwn, at sa kanya ng pagdlaw na yt y isinma nya ang kanya
ng ank na babye, lilimhin d ng tan ang glang. Khit na ppe
si Hwn ay nakipagkayibgan sya sa ank nang kanya ng panginon,
at sil ng dalaw y nagsipaglar` hbang ang kanil ng manga am
ay nagsslitan nang tungkl sa pananm. Ipinakta nya kay Mary
(na sya ng panglan nang kanya ng kalar`) ang manga larwan ny na
gaw nang kanya ng sarli ng kamy at talno.

Ang kanya ng manga laruwn ay sar-sri ng mukh nang to na ginaw
nya at nayyr nang ptik. Marmi rin dto ang manga bu ng to na
may sar-sri ng any`. Ang ib y nagttanm, ang ib y nagssayw,
ang ib y nakahig`, at gayon dn may manga nagbbun`, nagttakbhan,
at iba t iba p ng any`. Gayon dn my manga hyop sy; ang ib y
nayyr nang ptek at ang ib y nayyri nang khoy.

Tumlik ang pagkakaybgan nang dalawa ng bta` at nwli sila sa
paglalar`. Nang makatpus n ang kanila ng am sa pagsaslitan ay
tinwag ni Andrs si Mary pang umw na sil, dtapuwat niyy mna
ni Mary ang kanya ng am sa lugr na kinllagyn nang manga larwn
ni Hwn, at pang it y mkta ny. Nang mmasdan ny Andrs ang manga
larwa ng yn ay npaglat sya sa lak nang talno na ipinakkilla
nang dumkit sa manga tao-taha ng iyn. Sinbi ny Andrs sa ama ni
Hwn na it y matalno at dpat ipadal sa paraln. Dtapwat isinagt
nang ama ni Hwn na sy y wala ng kwrta pang ipapagral kay Hwn.

"Kung gayn," sinbi ni Andrs, "ay ak ang pa sa maystro. Bkas
ay pparoon sa mi ng bhay ang gur ni Mary. Sya y papagttuluyn
ku dto sa iy, pang umpisahn nya ang pagtutro` at pagbubuks nang
sip ni Hwn."

Napasalmat nang marmi ng marmi ang ama ni Hwn at sil y
naghiwaly. Malak ang ikinalungkt ni Hwn nang umalis n ang kany
ng kalar`.

Mul sa raw na it kadalasn si Hwn ay ipinassund nang ama ni
Mary pang don siy sa kanya ng bhay makipaglar` kay Mary.

Isa ng hpon na sil ng dalaw y nagllaro sa hlamanan nang malwak
na bakran ni Andrs ay nagda ng lumlipd sa tab nang dalawa ng
bta` ang isa ng parupar. It y kanila ng hinbol. Nun si Mary
at sumsund si Hwn. Sa pagtatakb nil ay nahlog si Mary sa isa
ng spa ng mabbaw na pbyyan nang manga isd` niy Andrs. Si Hwn
ay npasigw nang malaks at pagsigw nya ng it y napatirn sya
nang lamn sa lalamnan at nagdudug` ang kanya ng bibg. Hind nya
it inalintna at tumaln din sya sa spa` pang iligts si Mary sa
pagkalnod. Sa kababwan nang spa` ay hind nangalnod ang dalaw
ng bta`, dtapuwat sinigln lmang si Mary nang malaki ng tkot na
sya ny ng ipinaghimaty nang nssa tbig na sy. Kany` ang ginaw
ni Hwn ay hinawkan nya si Mary sa likd at itinaas ny pang hwg
makinom nang tbig, hbang sy ay nsssid sa tbig. Ganit ang any
nila nang mdatnan sil nang isa ng alla ny Andrs at sil y hinngo
sa sp`. Malak ang pagkglat niy Andrs at malak ang naging tw`
nang ama ni Hwn nang si Hwn ay mrinig nila ng magsalit` at ibalt
sa kanil ang nangyri.

Dhil sa pagsasalit ni Hwn ay llu ng lumaks ang kanya ng pagslong
sa pagaral, at gayon dn llu ng tumlik ang pagkakaybgan nila
ni Mary. Dumatng ang raw na sinbi nang gur nya na sya y dpat
lumpat nang byan pang ipatluy ang pagaral, sapagkt sya y wal
na ng mitro sa kany. It y sinbi rin ny kay Andrs. Ang ginaw
ny Andrs ay ipinadal si Hwn sa isa ng eskwlhan nang pangdudkit,
at dto sya nagral na may nim na tan.

Si Hwn at si Mary ay nagsilak at ang kanila ng pagkakaybgan ay
nagng pagibgan. Tw ng bakasyn ay umuw` si Hwn sa kanil ng
bhay sa bkid ni Andrs at don sya nagppalpas nang raw sa pling
ni Mariy.

Dumatng ang isa ng raw nang pagtatanygan nang manga dinkit nang
manga artsta, at dhil dto y pinagarlan ni Hwn ang isa ng yos
na kanya ng dpat duktin par sa raw na it. Ang manlo sa manga
kasle ay bbigyn nang isa ng ganti ng pl na may malaki ng kasma
ng kwlta, bukd sa pagdirwang sa karnglan nang mnanal. May is
ng ta ng nagtrabho si Hwn sa kanya ng kumpusisyn.

Dumatng ang raw nang pagtatanyg nang manga dinkit. Si Hwn,
ang kanya ng am, si Andrs, at si Mary ay naparon sa bhay na
kindroonn nang manga dinkit. Lubh ng marmi ang manga to,
dtapuwat ang pinagkkalipumpunn nil ay ang dinkit ni Hwn. Si
Mary ay npaiyk sa tw` sa gand nang dinkit ni Hwn. Si Andrs
namn ay wal ng mlma ng sabhin sa pagpri. Dumatng ang ras nang
pagpapahyag nang manga hukm kung sno ang nanlo, at ang dinkit
ni Hwn ay sya ng binanggt na nakakha nang gant ng pla`.

It y isa ng grpo ng my-roo ng isa ng babye ng nakatindg. Ang
kaliw ng kamy ay may hwak na isa ng sul` at ang knan namn ay
isa ng korna ng dhon. Sa banda ng knan nang babe at sa illim
nang korna ng olva ay may is ng binta ng nlluhod ang kna ng
pa. Sa kanya ng kaliw` ay may hwak sya ng libr at sa knan ay
isa ng pamukpk. Sa kanil ng panan ay nssbug ang iba t iba ng
kasangkpan nang isa ng nagral.

Nang sil y umuw` ipinagtapt nang dalawa ng nagkkibgan sa kanila
ng manga maglang ang kanila ng lhim. Ang ama ni Hwn ay nalungkt
lmang, sapagkt nllman nya na ang pagkakasl sa kanila ng dalaw
ay hind mari`, sapagkt ang kanila ng lagy ay gya nang sa isa
ng busbos o alpin at isa ng panginon o hre`. Pagkalam ni Andrs
sa bgay na it ay sinigln sya nang malaki ng glit. Ipinatwag
nya si Hwn at kanya ng minra. Sinbi nya ng sya y wal ng hy` at
hind marnong tumanw nang tang na lob, hind marnong kumilla sa
nagparnong sa kany, at sinbi nya ng hind sya mari ng mpakasl
kay Mariy. Dhil dto y sya y umals agad-agd na wal ng nakalm
khit sno nang kanya ng pattunghan.

Nagdan ang lim o nim na tan at si Hwn sa kanya ng pangdudkit
ay kylan ma y hind nallimtan si Mary.

Si Mariy namn ay nagpalpas nang nim na tao ng it sa kanya ng
bhay. Nllugmok sy hbang panahn sa isa ng mallim na kalungktan
at tuw na y si Hwn ang kanya ng nalala. Si Mary y nagkasakt
nang malubh` at malpit na ng mammaty.

Ipinyu nang manggagmot nya kay Andrs na, kung big nya ng
mligtas ang kanya ng ank, ay sundn nya ang gusto nit tungkl sa
pagaaswa kay Hwn. Dtapuwat nang pumyag siy Andrs ay lubh ng
huli n. Palal nang palal` ang sakt ni Mary, at si Hwn namn ay
hind nya nllman kung san ang kindroonn. Marmi sya ng inutsan
sa malalaki ng byan pang hanpin si Hwn, dtapuwat nakaraan n
ang marmi ng raw ay wal pa ng nagkaplad khit is sa kanil na
maktagp` kay Hwn.

Sa kalanan ang isa sa kanil y ntagpuan it sa bya-ng-Kamlig sa
kanya ng gwan. Nang mbalitan nya na ipinassundo sy ni Andrs
pang ipakasl sila ng dalaw ni Mary, ay lubh ng malak ang kany
ng naging tw`. Dtapuwat gayon dn malak ang kanya ng tkot na
bak hind nya abta ng buhy ang kanya ng inbig. Sya y matli ng
matli ng umw` at nang dumatng sya sa bhay niy Andrs ay nkta nya
don ang but t balt na pangangatawn ni Mary nlltag sa kanya ng
hihign. Nang sandal ri ng iyn ay nagpasund si Andrs nang isa ng
pre`, at si Hwn at si Mary y ipinakasl. Hbang ang pagkakasl ay
idindaos nang pre` ang hining namn ni Mary ay pumpnaw. Nang
mkasal na sil ay nagkaron lmang si Hwn nang panah ng mahagkn
ang kanya ng aswa, at it y pinanwan nang hining na ang mukh y
masay at nngngit ang bibg.





26. SI MARKTA.

Si Markta ay is ng dalga ng mabat at magand, dtapuwat
mahrap. Sya y my-roo ng isa ng nbyo na mahrap dn, dtapuwat may
emplyo sa gobyrno sa Maynla` at my-roo ng mabti ng swldo.

Si Markta ay my-roo ng isa ng kpit-bhay na mayman. Ang bhay
ay tabl, at yro ang bubungn, malpad ang kanya ng bukirn. Ang
kpit-bhay na yt y malak ang pagkgusto kay Markta, dtapuwat hind
ntin mssbe kung tnay ang kanya ng pagbig, sapagkt maluwg ang
kanya ng tornlyo. Laht nang pagsyo` ay ginaw nya kay Markta,
dtapuwat si Markta y isa ng dalga ng hind sa-lawhan ang lob,
at ang laht nang kanya ng pagsyo` ay hind pinansn.

Sa kalakhn nang pagbig nang manglilgaw na si Markta ay mpasa
kany, ang ginaw nya y gummit nang laks. Isa ng hpon pumsok sa
bakran nila Markta at nagkubli sy sa isa ng pno-ng-sging. Nang
hpu ng yon ay nagktaon nam ng ang bakran nil Markta ay
marum. Kany it y nanog at niwalisn ang bakran. Pagktabi ny sa
pno-ng-sging na pinagkkublihn nang lalke, it y lumpit pagdka,
tinangnn sya sa kamy at kany sya hinagkn.

Nllman na niny na sa manga mahihinh ng to don sa tin ang isa
ng halk ay isa ng malak ng kasiran nang pri. Dhil dto nang si
Markta ay pumanhk sa bhay na umiyk, at nang mlman nang kanya ng
manga maglang na sy y tinampalsan o hinagkn nang lalki ng iyn,
inakl nila na wal ng iba ng pangtakp sa kasira-ng-pri ng it
kung hind ang ipakasl nil sa lalki ng iyn ang kanil ng ank
na si Markta. Khit an ng pagayw ang ginaw ni Markta at khit
na nllman nil na it y may kabgan, ay kanila r ng ipinatloy
ang pagkakasl.

Si Markta ay isa ng bta ng lubh ng masnrin sa kanya ng manga
maglang, kany hind sya makasuwy nang ttohnan ngayn. Ang ginaw
na lmang niy ay isinlat nya sa kanya ng nvyo ang manga nangyri
at mangyyri at sinbi nya ng ang magging pagkakasl sa kany ay isa
lmang pagsund sa manga maglang at siya rn ay kanya ng inbig. Sa
manga maglang namn ni Markta ay kanya ng sinbi na sya ay hind
nila pakkinabngan, sapagkt ang pagkakasl nya sa tu ng kanya ng
kinabbuwistan ay kany ng ikammatay na madal`.

Ikinasl sil. Hind nalanan at inapuyn si Markta nang lagnt. Mul
sa raw nang kanya ng pagkakasl ay hind sya makakin nang khit
an, at raw-gab sya y lumlha`. Ang manga magagalng na mdiko sa
byan, ang laht nang yman nang kanya ng aswa, at ang laht nang
manga panalngin nang kanya ng manga maglang ay hind makapagligts
sa kany sa kamtyan. Pagkaran nang pit ng raw nang kanya ng
pagkkasl ay sya y namaty. It y nagng malak ng kalungktan nang
kanya ng nagng nbyo at isa ng nakatlong sa nagng kasawi-ng-plad
nit sa kanya ng bhay na dumatng.





27. ANG MANGMNG NA PRE`.

Sa bya-ng-Balwag ay my ndistno ng isa ng pri ng wala ng muwng
khit anu mn. Hinhinla` nang manga to na sy y isa ng sakatro
lmang sa Espnya na npadpad don at idinistno sa kanil ng byan
pang magkaron nang swldo at sa gay y mligtas sa pagkamaty nang
gtom. Linggo-lingg sy y nagmmsa, dtapwat ang manga nakkinig
nang msa ay wala ng mrinig sa kany kung hind` ang salit ng
"Msa, msa, msa," at iba p. Papas-pasyal sa harapn nang altr;
kung mnsan ay humharap sa manga to, pinagddoop ang kamy, at sa
laht nang pagklos nya ng it y wala ng patd nya ng sinsbi ang
"Msa, msa, msa," at iba p.

Ang manga to y naglit at ipinagsumbng sya sa arsubspo. Ang sagt
nang arsubspo ay pparoon sya ng is ng lingg at makkinig nang msa,
pang mkta kung tnay ng` ang sumbong nil.

Dumatng don ang arsubspo. Sa kany y sinbi nang pri` na sya y
hind makapagmsa, sapagkt ang manga ull na to ay naglsan sa
simbhan paguumpis nya nang msa.

"Bkas," sinbi pa ny, "ay mmmasdn niny ang kanila ng
pagtatakbhan sa pagbebendisyn ko pa lmang."

Kinbuksan ay lingg at sa pagmimsa nya ay hharap ang
arsubspo. Umsip sya nang paran nang pagliligts sa kanya ng
sarle. Kany`, bgu sya nagumpis nang pagmimsa ay nagpakul sya nang
langs. Hbang sya y nagbbhis ang manga to namn at ang arsubspo
ay nup na sa simbhan. Ang arsubspo ay malpit sa altr at hbang
sya y nagbbhis ang langs namn ay kasalukya ng kumkul`. Nang
makapagbhis na sy ay ibinhus nya sa lalagyn nang tbig na bendta
ang kumkulu ng langs. Ang ugl nya ay magbendisyn mna bgu
magmsa, kany` pagpsok nya sa simbhan ay sya ny ng iniwisk sa
manga to ang kumkulu ng langs sa lugr nang gwa-bendta. Ang manga
to ng dinapan nang mainit na patk nang langs ay nagsipagtindg at
bus-lksa ng nagsipagtakbhan papalabs sa simbhan. Nang mkta it
nang arsubspo ay hind nya ipinatuly ang pagmimsa sa raw na iyn,
sapagkt wala ng ntira sa simbhan n isa mn sa manga to.

Sinbi nang arsubspo sa pr` na sya y hind mals sa bya ng iyn
at hind na ny ppansinn ang anu m ng ipagsumbng nang manga to.





28. ANG PKUMPISLAN.

Si Pr Mund ay sya ng ndistnu ng il ng tan sa
bya-ng-Marikna. Sya y isa ng to ng maibign sa pagliliwalw. Sa
pagtupd sa kanya ng manga tungklin sya y hind nagkklang
kylan mn. Araw-raw sya y nagmmsa at kung lingg ay maklawa
sya ng magmsa. Gayon dn sya y nagbbinyg nang manga bta`,
nagbbendisyn nang paty, naghhatid nang biytiko, nagppakumpisl,
at nagpakinbang. Ang laht nang kany ng tungklin ay sinsunod
ny ng mabte, dtapuwat ang pagpapakumpisl ay nilalan nya nang
kaunt`. Sa gan ng kany sigro ng it y mabte pang pauntin ang
manga kasalnan nang kanya ng kinkumpisl, dtapuwat sa ib sa kanya
ng manga kinkumpisal it y may nagng masam ng dlo.

Mnsan my-ro ng is ng babi ng dalga na mapagsimb at
mapagkumpisl. Nang dumatng ang dalga ng it sa dalawa ng p ng tan
ang glang ay inwan na ny ang kabnla ng pagkukumpisl, gayon dn
bihra ng magsimb. Nang mnsan usisin ang babye ng it ay nagsbi
nang ganit:

"Noo ng na ang bo ng akl ko si Pr Mund ay isa ng snto, dtapwat
ngay y npagkkilla nang marmi na sya y isa ng buwsit na to. Kung
bah` at ang manga to y nagssipamangk` sa bah`, sya y sa bangk`
nang manga babe nakkisaky at hind sa manga lalki. Kung umga
pagkamsa nya ay mkkta na sya ng nakatalungk sa kanya ng ptyo na
ang bito y naggmun sa lpa` at sya y humhgod nang mank kaharp
nang ib ng sabungro.

"Noo ng na ak y madals magkumpisl sa kany, dtapwat dumatng
ang isa ng raw na pany na kaululn lmang ang ipagtatanng nya sa
kin sa kumpslan. Skat ba ng itinanng nya sa kin kung iln ang
manlilgaw sa kin, kung sno ang ki ng inbig, at kung san ak
makkipagtagp`? Sa loob-lob ku lmang ay npakawala-ng-hy` ang
pri ng it. Kany` inwan ku sya agd sa kumpslan at mul noon ay
hind na ak nangumpisl."





29. SI HW NG BBAS.

Si Hwn ay isa to ng mapaggaw nang kaululn, dtapuwat it y hind
nya sinsady` pang magpaglit nang kpwa to, kung hind yon ay
talag ng sya ny ng ugli` na tas sa kanya nang kanya ng pagisip.

Mnsan sya y naparn sa fiysta nang isa ng byan. May pasn sya
ng tatl ng bik, pang ipagbil sa byan. Nang sya y dumating n,
nkta nya sa ptyo nang simbhan ang marmi ng to ng nallpon at
nakking nang binbigkas na talumpti` nang kpitan sa byan. Masikp
ang pagkaktayo nang manga to, dtapwat sya y nlapit dn sa
paann nang entabldo na kinttayun nang nagttalumpti`. Hbang
nakkipagsikskan sy, ang tatl ng bik ay wala ng luby nang
pagyk. Nang sy y makarating n sa harapn nang kpitan, tinkup
nya ang manga bibg, pang sil y patahann, dtapwat wal sya ng
magaw`. Nino nang kpitan ang manga ykan nang bik at tiningnan
ny kung sno ang my dala don nang manga bik.

Nang mkta nya si Hwn ay sinbi nya ang gant: "Huwn! An
ang gustu m ng sabhin sa pagpapaiyk mo dto nang iyo ng manga
bik? Lumyas ka ngayon dn, at hwag k ng maktuntong-tuntng kylan
mn sa lpa-ng-Bstos!"

Si Hwn ay umals at umw` sa kanya ng byan sa San-Ildepnso. Nakaran
ang isa ng tan at dumatng na mul` ang fysta sa byan nang
Bstos. Inbig ni Hwn na pumaron, dtapuwat nalala nya na tinangan
sya nang kpitan sa bya ng iyn na, pag sya y nkta ng mul` sa
lpa-ng-Bstos, ay sya y ipabbilangg` at pahhirpan. Umsip si
Hwn nang paran pang makaparn.

Nang dumatng ang fiysta ay my-roo ng is ng msa ng malak na
dinaluhn nang lbo-lbo ng to. Si Hwn ay is sa manga to ng it at
sy ang nppansn nang marmi ng to, dahiln sa any nang pagklagay
ny don sa lob nang simbhan. D nalanan at is sa manga to ng
nagmmasid sa kany ay nagsumbng sa kpitan at sinbi na si Hwn ay
nssa lob nang simbhan at nakasaky sa isa ng karta na hinhla
nang kalabw, at ang laht, karta, kalabw, at si Hwn ay nssa
lob nang simbhan. Si Hwn ay hind nannog sa karta ng kanya
ng tintuntungn.

Pumarn ang kpitan sa simbhan pang hulhin si Hwn. Nang mlapit
sy dto ay sinbi ny: "Huwn! Sumund ka sa kin at ibbilangg
kit. Hind ba sinbi ko n sa iy t hwg k ng ttuntong nang
lpa-ng-Bstos?"

Isinagt namn ni Hwn: "Gino ng Kpitan! Sinbi ng` po niny sa
kin iyn. Kany` ak y hind makaals sa ki ng karta. Nkkta
p ba niny it ng lpa ng llan nang ki ng karta at sya k
ng tintuntungn? Ito p` ay hind lpa-ng-Bstos kung hind
lpa-ng-San-Ildepnso. Don ko p` sa ki ng byan kinha ang lpa
ng it."

Pagksbi ni Hwn nit ay hind npiglan nang kpitan ang pagtwa,
at sinbi na lmang nya sa kanya ng sarli na sy y wala ng maggawa
kay Hwn, sapagkt it y nsa katwran.





30. TATL NG MAGKAKAYBGA NG MAGNANKAW.

Si Hwn, si Andrs, at si Dygo ay tatl ng magagalng na
magnankaw. Sil y balta ng balta`, at marmi ng to ang nagssihle
sa kanil, dtapuwat sa galng nil nang panginglag at pagnankaw
ay hind sila mhle. Ang tatl ng it y nagtpna ng mnsan na
magtatagp` sila sa isa ng lugr na tahmik at lhim pang paguspan
nil ang kanil ng pamumhay at manga mabubti ng bgo ng paran nang
pagnankaw. Sil ng tatl ay nabbhay sa pagnankaw lmang. N isa
mn sa kanil ay wal ng paghahnap na mabte. Mul pa sa pagkabt`
ay ganito n ang kanila ng pamumhay, kany` sil y nagng matalno
at lubh ng maknis sa gawa ng it.

Nang dumatng ang raw nang kanil ng tpnan, madali ng raw pa
lmang ay nrron na sil. Malak ng pamamalta` nang bwat is at
hind magkmyaw ang kanila ng pagbablitan.

Itinanng ni Hwn kay Dygo: "Gnu ka na b kaknis ngayn sa ti
ng trabho?"

"Sa damdam k," ang sagt ni Dygo, "ay ak ang pinakamaknis sa ti ng
tatl, sapagkt ak y nakapagnnkaw nang manga itlg na hinhalimhimn
nang mank na hind nllman nit. At hind itu lmang," idinugtung
ny, "ang manga hyop mn na mababagsk ay nnnakwan ku nang kanila
ng inaky nang wal sila ng mlay."

"Ganyn ba lmang ang knis mo?" isinabd pagdka ni Andrs, "Ak
ay nakapagnnkaw sa hyop at gayon dn sa to. Ang manga alhas
nang to na big ko ng nakwin ay ninnkaw ko, khit na nattlog o
nagllakad ang may re`. Mnsan ay ninkaw ko ang isa ng singsng na
hinhign nang may ri` pang hwag mnkaw, dtapwat it y nnkaw
ko nang wal sya ng mlay."

"Ganyn ba lmang ang knis niny?" itinanng ni Hwn, "Wal sa
kalaht nang knis ko sa pagnankaw ang iny ng manga naggaw`. Ak
y nakapagnnkaw nang to msmo at hind nang kanila lmang na manga
pagare`."

Npaglat ang dalaw nya ng kasap, sapagkt hind nila inakla ng ang
isa ng to ng buhy ay mari ng mnkaw nang hind nito nllman,
at pang subkan nil ang galng ni Hwn ay nakipagpusthan sil
ng dalaw kay Hwn. Sinbi nil ng nakwin nya ang pr` sa byan
at ihatid ny sa lugr na kanila ng kindroonn ngayn. Kung it y
magaw nya, bbayran sya ni Andrs at ni Dygo nang lim ng da ng
pso. Dtapuwat kung hind nya magaw`, bbayran nya si Andrs at
si Dygo nang isa ng da ng pso. Umyon si Hwn sa pustha ng it
at sil y naghiw-hiwaly.

Si Hwn ay napatngu sa byan at pinakibalitan nya kung san nttir
ang pr`. Nang mlman nya it ay nagisp sya nang para ng ggawin
ny na pagnkaw sa pr`. Sya y pumsuk na alla` sa pri ng it. Sa
kanya ng pagkpaalla ng it ay nkilla nya ang manga ugli nang
pre`. Is sa kanya ng ugli` na hind nabbli` kylan mn ay ang
pagdadasl nang rosriyo sa harapn nang isa ng pon. Ang po ng it
ay nayyr nang khoy, at it y si Sang-Hwn. Ang lak nang po ng
it ay kasingpanty nang isa ng to.

Ang ginaw ni Hwn ay nagpagaw sya sa isa ng mandurkit nang isa ng
po ng gya rin nit, dtapuwat huky at wala ng lamn ang lob. Ang
btas na it sa lob nang katawn nang po ng it ay mari ng
sootn nang isa ng to. Nang mayr na ang po ng pagaw ni Hwn,
ay pinalitan ny ang po ng si Sang-Hwn na tnay nar nang pr`.

Isa ng hpun bgu dumatng ang orasyn ay kumha sya nang isa ng
sko nang bigs at napalob sya sa lob nang snto ng ipinagaw
nya. Pagkahpon nang pr` it y pumaron sa kwrto ng kanya ng
pinagddasaln pang magrosryo. Nang magkkalahat na ang kanya ng
pagdadasl at ktaon nam ng nangngwit na si Hwn sa pagktay`, ay
nagsalit ito: "Ihint mu n, Pr Lkas, ang iyo ng pagdadasl. Ako
y pinparto sa iy pang ihatd kit sa lngit."

Nang na ay sinigln nang tkot ang pre`, dtapuwat inakl nya ng
ang kanya ng pon ay nagmmilgro at totoo ng ng sinsund sya pang
ihatd sa kalangitn.

Sa kany ng hind pagkib` ay nagsalit ng mul si Hwn nang ganit:
"Marmi n ang kabnla ng iy ng ginaw`. Matagl ka nang nammhay
nang mabba`, at dhil dto y nttan sa iy ang laht nang
kaginhawhan sa lngit. Summa ka sa kin at ihhatid kit."

Isinagt nang pre`: "Papno ang ggawin k ng pagsma sa iy? Ak
y matand na at hind ako makallkad mul dto sa lpa` hanggng
sa lngit."

Isinagt namn ni Hwn: "Yn ay hwag m ng alalahnin. My-ron ako ng
isa ng sko. Sumild ka dto at ppasanin kit sa pagpunt sa lngit."

At pagksbi nya nit y iniladlad ny ang sko nang bigs. Pagksilid
nang pre` ay tinala ng mahigpt ni Hwn ang sko. Lumabs sya sa
lob nang pon at pinasan ny si Pr Lkas patngo sa bhay na kanya
ng pinagtipann sa dalawa ng kaybgan. Tiwal ng tiwal si Pr Lkas
na sya y papunt sa lngit, kany` wal sya ng kib` sa lob nang sko.

Dtapwat, nang nagbbtis na si Hwn sa isa ng mabbaw na log, ay
inakl nya ng sya y nllko lmang at hind sa lngit ang punta nil.

Kany itinanng nya kay Hwn: "Anu ng log it, at bkit tyo dpat
tumawd nang log sa pagpunt sa lngit?"

Isinagt ni Hwn: "Sssst! Hwag k ng mangay! It y log nang Hrdan."

Ang pr ay nagtahn nang pagsasalit`. Ipinatloy ni Hwn ang
paglkad.

Nang sya y pumpanhik n sa bhay na kanila ng tagpan, npaglat na
mul` ang pre`, at tumanng sya ng mul`: "Anu ng hagdnan it? Ganito
b ang hitsra nang hagdna ng papunt sa lngit?"

"Sinbi ko n sa iy at hwag k ng mangay", ang isinagt ni Hwn,
"Ito ng` ang hagdna ng paakyt sa lngit."

Nang mpanhik n sil sa bhay ay sinalbong sil ni Dygo at ni
Andrs. Inilapg ni Hwn ang kanya ng dal, at sinbi nya sa dalaw:
"Dala ko rto ang iniytos ninyo sa ki ng nakwin. Dala ba niny
ang lima ng daa ng pso?"

Ang dalaw y hind naniwla ng agd. Kany` ang ginaw nila y bintas
nil ang sko at sinlip nil ang lamn. Sa lob ay nkta nila ang
lo nang pr` na may satst. Kany` iniyabt nila kay Hwn ang lima
ng daa ng pso, at sila ng laht ay nanog pagdka. Inwan nil ang
pre` pang sya ay magpakawal` sa kanya ng sarle.





31. ANG PANGHUHLI NANG MANGA UNGG`.

Hind bihra` sa manga gbat na mtagpun ang malalak ng kwal nang
manga ungg`. Kung wal ng arms ang is ng nppasa kanila ng lugr,
sil y mababagsk, at may pangnib na patayn nil ang to ng kanila
ng mpagkalipumpunn. Sil kung nagglit ay nagssipanog sa manga
pn nang khoy at pinagttulng-tulnga ng kinkagat ang to ng
nssa kapangyarhan nil. Dhil dto ang isa ng to ng nagllakad
sa manga gbat na marmi ng ungg` ay hind magppabya ng magdal
nang barl. Ang manga ungg` kung pinputukan n nang barl ay wala ng
tkot. Karamhan ay hind nagttakbhan, dtapuwat tintingnan nil ang
pinangggalngan nang ngay at nang as. Ang manga dinratnan namn
nang bla ay sinsangga it nang kanya ng kamy, pra ng sumsangga
sa isa ng pukl lmang. Kany` ang manga plad nil ay nbbtas dn
nang bla kung sil y taman.

Hind bihra` ang manga to y nanghhle nang buhy na ungg` pang
kanila ng alilin at ipagbil sa manga taga iba t ib ng lupan
na nagssipunt sa Filipnas. Ang panghuhle nang buhy na ungg`
ay hind nangngailngan nang malak ng pgod, dtapuwat ang paran
nang paghle sa kanila ay is ng panglolko lmang sa kanil. Ito ng
sumsund ay isa ng halimbw nang paghle sa kanil.

Kung ang isa ng to ay big humle nang ungg`, karanyan ay
nagllto` o nagppalto sya nang kakann, at it y hinhalan o
pinahhalan niya nang balasng. Ang balasng ay isa ng but nang
halman na nakallasng o nakapagantk nang mallim na antk sa
manga hyop na makkin. Gayon dn gingmit it sa panghuhle
nang isd sa log. Pagkalt nang kakann it y dindala nang to
sa lugr na kindroonn nang kwal nang manga ungg`. Dtapuwat
kung it y ilagay ny nang mahsay sa lp` ang manga ungg` ay
hind magssipanog pang kumin. Hinhinl nil na ang kakan ng
iyn ay pin lmang sa kanil pang sil y hulhin o patayn. Dhil
dto ang gingawa nang to ay nagttakut-taktan pagktanaw ny sa
manga ungg`, at sya y nagttakb na snong ang bilo nang kakan
ng may balasng. Sa kanya ng pagtakb ay nagddapa-dapan sy, at
dhil dto y ang snung nya ng kakann ay nppalagpk at nssbog
sa lpa`. Kung it y mangyri n, ipinattloy din ny ang kanya ng
pagtakb, at sya y nangngubl sa isa ng lugr, pang tanawn nya ang
pagkaknan nang manga ungg`. Pagkkta nang manga ungg` sa patakb
ng pagals nang to at pagkkubli nit, sil y nagssipanug sa manga
pno-ng-khoy at nagssipagagawn nang kakann. Nagkkdagn-dagn
sil sa pagaagawn, at lubh ng malak ang ngay, sapagkt ang bwat
isa ng kwal nang ungg ay my-roo ng lim ng dan o is ng lbo ang
blang. Pagkakin nil hind nallon at sinsumpong sil nang antk,
nagssipanghna` at hind makaakyt sa khoy. Isa ng nakttawa ng
panoorn ang manga ungg ng it, matand` at bt`, ay nangttalungk
sa lpa` at nagssipagyukayk bwat is. Ang ib ng hind nagkaplad na
makgaw nang kakann ay nagssiyakyt sa pno-ng-khoy at pinannood
ang kanila ng manga lasng na kasamahn. Pagaany` nang ganit nang
manga ungg`, ang to ng nkkubl ay sak pa lmang lumlpit at
isa-is ng sinsunggabn ang manga nattlug na ungg`. Hind malo
ng panahn ang pagubr nang balasng na it, at ang manga ungg y
nagssihsay pagkaran nang il ng raw.

Ang ikalaw ng karanya ng gawn sa panghuhli nang ungg` ay ang
pagpapin sa kanila nang nyg. Ang isa ng bo ng nyg ay nillagyan
nang btas. Ang lak nang btas na it ay hust lmang na mipsuk
nang ungg` ang kanya ng kamy kung wal ng tngan. Sa lob nang
bo nang nyg ay inillagay ang isa ng pirsu-ng-lamn nang nyg, at
ang laht na it y inillagay sa lugr nang manga ungg`. Ang manga
ungg` ay magusthin sa nyg, at pagkkta nil dto ay dindkot
nil ang lam ng nsa lob nang bo. Kung masunggabn na namn nil
ang lamn nang nyg, ang kanila ng kamy ay hind nila milabs sa
btas, n big namn sil ng bitwan ang lamn nang nyg. Dhil dto
sil y pra ng nakapangw at paglpit nang to ng manghuhle ay hind
sila makaals, sapagkt ang niyog namn ay mabigt at kung mnsan
ay my-roo ng pabigt. Kany` paglpit nang manghuhle, ay wala ng
hrap nya ng nassunggabn ang manga ungg` o matsng na nangppangw.





32. ANG FIYSTA NI SANG-HWN.

Ang abynte-kwtru nang Hnyo ay sya ng raw na kapyesthan
ni Sang-Hwn, at it y ipinagddwang sa manga bayn-bayn sa
lalawgan nang Bulakn. Sa bwn nang Hnyo ay kasalukyan ang uln
at maptik. Ang paniwl nang manga to si Sang-Hwn ay sya ng snto
ng nagppauln, dhil dto y maibign sa tbig at ptik. Kany`
ang manga pagdirwang na gingaw` sa kanya ng kaarawn ay lubh
ng malak ang pagkiba sa pagdirwang na gingawa sa kaarawn nang
ib ng snto. Sa bya ng malalpit sa dgat kung bwn nang Hnyo ay
bumbah`, at ang tbig ay umhon sa byan. Sa manga bya ng malalyo`
sa dgat ay lubh ng mauln dn, at karanywa y ang manga pagbah ng
it at paguln ay nttan sa kaarawn ni Sang-Hwn. Ang manga to
ng kasli sa pagdirwang ay nagssipagbas` sa bah` o sa uln. Sa
manga byan nang Mallos at Hagnoy kung nttan ang fysta ng it sa
isa ng bah ng malak, hlos laht nang to ay nagllublob sa tbig
o kay y nagssipamangk`. Kung hind namn bah`, ang manga to y
nagssipaglibt lmang sa uln. Marmi ng taga bkid at taga briyo ay
nagssipagpalims sa kaaraw ng it. Karamhan sa kanil ay manga bta`
o kay y manga binta`. Bihra ng my manga babye. Pangkat-pangkt
sila ng nagssipagpalims, at bwat isa ng pangkt ay my manga kasma
ng msiku ng bungbng. Ang manga hind nagssitugtg ang katungklan ay
kumant o kay y sumayw. Sila ng laht ay uwal ng pamamro` hlos,
gya nang manga Igorte, dtapuwat ang bo ng katawn mul sa pa
hanggng lo, pat manga mat at tanga, ay nkkulaplan nang ptek.

Ang manga pangkt na it ay tumtwag sa bahay-bahy. Naghhint sila
sa harapn nang bhay, at dto y tumtugtog sil o kay y nagssikant
o nagssayw. Ang karanya ng kanila ng kantahn ay kol sa nagng
pamumhay ni Sang-Hwn o kay y nang iba ng snto ng kaybgan nit. Sa
kanila ng pagtutugtgan ang kanila ng yos ay makahilra ng pabilg,
kung mnsan ay nakatay`, kung mnsan ay nakatalungk`, o kay y
nakaluhd. Kung my-roo ng nagkkant o sumsayw, it y nssa lob
nang blog nang manga mnunugtg, at don nya gingaw ang kanya
ng pagkant o pagsayw. Pagkaran nang dalaw o tatl ng tugtgan,
kanthan, o sywan, sila y nagssipaghint` at saby-saby na
nagssipanghing` nang lims sa manga to ng nannood sa kanil. Kung
sila y hind limusn, kumkha sil nang ptik sa kanila ng katawn
at pinpukul nil ang manga to ng mararmot.

Ang bo ng maghpun ay inbus nil sa ganit ng pagdirwang. Ang manga
manglilmos na it ay lubh ng marmi rn, kany` sil y nakattlung
na magpasigl sa byan khit na lubh ng mauln.

Sa manga pagbabangkan namn ay hind bihr` ang magkalund ang
manga to. Kany ang ugli ng it ay unti-unt ng nawwal`. Gayon
dn sa manga panah ng it ang manga to y nagging kurput at bihra
ng maglims. Kany` ang manga manghihing nang lims sa kaarawn ni
Sang-Hwn ay unt-unt ng nawwal`.





33. ANG MANGA PANGINGLIN NANG MANGA KAMAGNAK NANG ISA NG NAMATY.

Ang is ng angk ng nammatayn ay hind` ang kanila ng lob at
kluluwa lmang ang nagttamu nang hrap, kung hind` pat ang buls
rn nil. It y dahiln sa lubh ng malalak ng dmi nang ginggul
nang nammatayn sa pagdados nang sar-sri ng kaugalin.

Sa raw nang pagkamaty nang isa ng to, sa angkn nit ay marmi ng
lubh` ang nagssidlaw, at ang manga nagssidlaw nam ng it ay hind
nassyahn nang pakikipagdalamht lmang sa kamagankan nang namaty,
dtapuwat sil y nagttumir sa bhay nang namatayn. Dhil dto
ang angkn nang namaty ay nappilta ng maghand nang pangpakin sa
manga dlaw. Karanywa y hind inillibing agd ang paty, dtapuwat
ibinbrol mna ng dalaw o tatlo ng raw mul sa pagkalagt nang
hining. Sa manga raw na it raw-gab ay wal ng patd ang dlaw
nang manga to. Karamhan ay manga kamagnak at ib y manga kaybgan,
kpit-bhay, o ib ng kakilla sa byan. Kung ang namaty ay isa ng
to ng marmi ng kaybgan o kamagankan sa iba ng byan sila mn ay
dumdlaw rn, at sil y dpat na bigyn nang trhan at pagkin nang
angkn nang namaty. It y ganit sapagkt sa manga bayn-bayn sa
provnsiya ay wal ng bhay-tlyan.

Sa pagpapakin sa marmi ng dlaw na it hind bihra ng nakabus
sil nang kabyk na bka at il ng tpa, kambng, at hind mablang
na manga mank. Ang kosinro karanywa y upahn, at ang malalpit
na kamagnak nang namaty ay nagssitlung na maglto`. Dhil dto
sa bhay nang namatayn ang lugr na kinbburlan nang paty ay
tahmik na tahmik at khit na marmi ng to ang nrron, pabulng
lmang kung sil y magslitan. Dtapuwat sa kainn at lutun ang
ngay ay hind karanyan. Isa t is y nagtos sa manga alla`, may
naghhgas nang pinggn o kay y manga palayk, may nagppakintb
nang manga tinidr at kutslyo, may naghhand` sa lamsa, at iba
p. Sa kusn namn ang sagitst nang kawle` ay wala ng luby. Ang
pagtatadtd nang karn ay wala ng patd at ang ting nang kosinro
at kanya ng alagd ay sya na lmang nrring.

Dtapuwat sa isa ng sild namn nang bhay ay don nrron at
nllugmk sa pagdadalamhte` ang manga angkn nang namaty. Sila y
nagssiyk nang bus-laks at kung mnsa y nagddukly-dukly sil
nang kung ano-an ang mangyyri sa kanila ng pamumhay dahiln sa
pagpnaw nang namaty.

Kung mayman ang namaty, it y ipinaddpit sa pr` at inihhatid
sa simbhan. Pagdatng don sa simbhan binbendisyunn nang pr` ang
paty at pagkatpos ay inihhatid dn nya sa lbngan. Ang laht nang
manga dlaw ay kasma sa paglilibng na it at kadalas y nssakay
sil sa manga karumta. Ang manga karumta ng it namn ay upahn,
lban na lmang sa il ng r nang manga dlaw.

Pagklibing nang paty ang manga dlaw na taga iba ng byan ay doon
dn ang w` sa bhay nang namaty. Kadalasn sil y nagssials agd,
dtapuwat kung magkbihra` ay sil y nagttira na tatlu ng raw pang
maksle sa pagtatatlo-ng-gab. Ang tatl ng gab ay idindos sa
bhay nang namaty. Dto ay dumdlaw ang manga kamagankan at sil y
nagssipagdasl. Sa pagdadasl na it ay ang manga matatand lmang
ang kasli, at ang manga bint at dalga ay nagssipagbugtngan
namn. Ang ganit ng panginglin ay gingawa sa lob nang tatlu ng
gab. Sa katapus ng gab karanya y lubh ng marmi ang to, at ang
hand` ay malak ky sa dalaw ng gab ng nagdan. Marmi rn namn
sa manga nagssidal ang nagbbigay nang lims sa namatayn. Karanywa
y manga pangpakin sa manga dlaw.

Sa manga angk ng mahihrap ang manga pangingli ng ito ay gingaw
rn, dtapuwat ang pagdpit at paghahatd lmang nang pri sa paty
ay wal`. Sa pagbebendisyn nang paty ang isa ng to y makabbyad
sa pre` nang gustuhn ny. Ang pinakamra ay ang pagbebendisyn
sa paty sa pintan lmang nang simbhan at sa sahg nllapg. Ang
sumsund ay ang pagbebendisyn nang paty sa pintan dn, dtapuwat
npptung lmang ang atal sa isa ng altr. Ang manga mahahalag ng
pagbebendisyn ay gingaw` sa tab nang altr. Mul sa isa ng da
ng pso hanggng sa lima ng dan ang manga halag nit.





34. ANG TAKBHAN SA AMERIKNO.

Ang manga to sa San-Migl ay nagng pra ng manga kwal nang hyop
na umlag sa manga pamlo` nang manga pastl at panghahbol nang
manga so ng mababagsk. Sil y lubh ng maibign sa katahimkan
at kapayapan. Gayon dn sila y lubh ng pniwalan sa sabi-sab,
at it ng manga bgay na yit ay sya ng hind ikinptag nang marmi
sa kanil sa byan sa panahn nang manga paghihmagskan lban sa
Kastla` at sa Amerikno. Toto rn namn na marmi sa kanil ay
nangagsipagtakb dahiln lmang sa kataktan o kadwgan.

Nang mangyri ang paghihmagskan lban sa Kastla` nang ta ng isa
ng lbo walu ng dan at siym na pu t nim, ak y pat na tan pa
lmang sa glang. yon sa sinbi sa kin nang ki ng nnay, kam ay
nagsipunt sa Maynla` sa lugr nang umhon sa bundk. Wal ako ng
marmi ng nattandan nang manga nangyri sa panah ng yan, kung
hind ang bgay nang mi ng pagpunt sa estasyn nang trn. Pagdatng
sa Maynla` ay hind kami nakapsok sa lob nang byan kung hind`
may pahintlot nang isa ng pinno` sa bya ng iyn.

Ang sumsunod na bgay na ntal` sa ki ng pangalala ay ang
pagktira nmin sa Biga, sa bhay nang isa ng mnananggl na ang
pangla y si Don-Nasryo. Ang dahiln nang ikinalpat nmin sa bya
ng it ay ang paglag sa paglalabann nang manga Katipnan at manga
Kastla` sa Maynla`. Sa Biga ay manga sundlo ng Taglog sa kanila
ng pagsasnay sa pakikipaglban.

Hind nalanan at kam ay npasa byan nang Bstos. Ang bya ng it
ay nasskup dn sa manga panah ng iyn nang manga Katipunros. Ang
bya ng iyn ay lubh ng magand dahiln sa sar-sre ng hitsra
nang manga bgay-bgay na nkkta. Ang lug ay lubha ng malwak,
ang pasgan ay malpad, may manga buntn nang bat at buhngin sa
pasgan. Ang mi ng manga kaybga ng tinulyan ay mababat na to. Ak
at ang ki ng kapatd na babye ay kanila ng parti ng ipinallibng,
at ang paglilibng na it ay ang pagpapassid nang pto sa malnaw
na tbig sa log.

Kung an ang nangyri sa manga paglalabann nang manga panaho ng iyn
ay hind ku nalamn, dahiln sa kaliitn at kawaln pa nang mlay.

Nang dumatng ang takbhan sa Amerikno, ak y may glang na
nang kaunt`, at marmi ak ng nattandan sa mi ng pagtakb sa
bundk. Nang ang manga Amerikno ay nagssipanlo na lban sa manga
sundlo ni Aginldo ang manga to sa bya-ng-San-Migl ay pinagsisigln
nang tkot. Lumagnap sa byan ang balta` na ang manga Amerikno ay
manga to ng salbhe, malulupt, at mababagsk at wala ng ptgan
sa khit anu pa mn. It y sigru ng isa ng balta ng paklat nang
manga Kastla` at ll na nang manga kra sa Filipnas.

Dhil sa pagkatkot nang manga to sa manga Amerikno hlus kami ng
laht na nammyan ay nagsipagbalt at nagsihun sa bundk. Kam ay
nttir non sa bhay nang isa ng li nang ki ng nnay, at don
ay kasno rn nmin ang angkn nang kya nang ki ng nnay. ki ng
nattandan na my-ro ng mahigt na s m pu ng raw ang pagbabastan
at ang paghahktan nang manga kasangkpan nmi ng magkakasno`. Ang
manga karitn na my lla ng kasangkpan ay gab kung ipalkad, pang
ang manga kalabw na humhla ay huwg magsisyad sa kaintan nang
raw. Ang manga karitn ay pnan hanggng sa ituktk nang krang nit
at ang manga kalabw ay lubh ng nahirpan sa paghla nang mabibigt
na llan. Nang wal na ng nttir sa manga abbot ay kam nam ng
manga to ang nagsillan sa karitn pang ihatd sa bundk.

Ang lugr na mi ng pinarunn ay tintwag na Pa-ng-Bundk,
kalahti-ng-raw na lakrin mul sa Sibl. Don ang dinatnn
nmi ng titirhn ay isa ng kbo lmang na may atp na kgon at
lubh ng malit. Ang sahg ay manga sang nang khoy na pinutlan
nang manga malilit na sang, dtapuwat hind makiknis n hind
pantay-panty. Gayon dn lubh ng malit at pinpsok nang hngin at
lamg. Ganon ang mi ng tinirhn na may ila ng bwn, sa lugr nang
bhay na tabl nang li nang ki ng nnay.

Don sa Pa-ng-Bundk ay naktagpu kam nang marmi ng kababyan na
nagsilag dn, at ang manga nhuli ng nagsidatng ay nagbalta ng ang
laht nang to sa byan ay nangsa bundok n o kay y nangsa ib
ng byan n. Ang bya-ng-San-Migl ay nawal`, dtapuwat ang manga
bhay ay sya lmang nrron.

Pagkaran nang ila ng bw ng pagtitir nmin sa Pa-ng-Bundk ay
lumpat kam sa isa ng lugr na lhim. Ang lugr na iyn ay is
ng kaingn sa kagubtan. Wal ng nakalam n snu man sa min ang
panglan nang lugr, at ang ib ng nakalm ay inilhim na lubh`,
pang hwag mpagalamn nang iba ng to ang mi ng kinttagan. Iyn ay
paran nang panginglag hind sa kaway lmang, dtapuwat sa tulisn at
magnankaw dn. Ang bhay na tinirhn nmin don ay lubh ng malak,
mahba ng mahba` sa illim nang is ng bubungn. Ang kabahayn ay
hinti nang magkakasinglak ng kwrto. My-roo ng wal ang blang
nit. Sa bwat kwrto ay is ng angkn ang ntir. Dto ay my-roon
d ng ila ng bwn ang mi ng ikinpagtir.

Nang mllapit n sa bya-ng-San-Migl ang manga Amerikno, nbalitan
nmin na ang manga to ng it y hind gya nang manga sab-sab, kany`
umunt nang umunt` ang mi ng tkot sa kanil. Dhil dto y umals
kam sa mi ng mallim na tagun, at naparon kam sa Pho`. It y is
ng lugr sa bundok dn, dtapuwat malpit nang kaunt` sa byan. Dto
y lubh ng marmi kam ng dinatnn nang manga kababyan at tag iba
t ib ng lugr. Karamhan sa kanil ay my manga sakt, dahiln sa
pagtitir sa bundk. Dto nagkaron nang malak ng kagamitn ang manga
gamt na ipinahon ni Nnay sa bundk, at hind inwan sa byan. Ang
manga gamt na it y r ni Ttay at kanya ng inwan sa pagkapatpun
sa kany nang manga kra sa Hol. Isa ng umga my-roo ng tumwag sa
mi ng bhay pang bumil nang gamt. Hinnap ni Nnay ang kah ng
kinllagyn nang gamt. Nang it y mabuksan n ay nkta nmin ang
is ng has na nakakid at nattlog sa ibbaw nang ip na nttbon
sa manga bte. Malaki ng tw` nang ib ng to ng nakkta, dtapuwat
si Nnay ay natkot lmang. Hind nya nllman ang kahulugn nang
has na iyn. Pagkaran nang ktwan ay itinanng ni Nnay kung
an ang dhil at sil y nagkktwan. Isinagt nil kay Nnay na
ang kahulugn nang has na iyn ay ang pagpatngo sa pagyman nang
may r nang gamt. Si Nnay ay npataw lmang sa kanil ng sbi,
at hind sya nanniwl sa manga bgay na iyn.

Nang makaran ang il ng bwn ay inwan nmin ang Pho` at umw kam sa
byan. Nang kam ay dumatng na don, marmi sa ila ng kasangkpan na
nawan nmin ay pinagnakw nang ila ng to ng nangawan sa byan. Ang
tabl na sahg nang bhay nang li ni Nnay ay wal na, at hind nila
nlman kung sno ang kumha.

Hind nalanan ang mi ng pagdatng sa byan at nbalta ng ang
manga sundlo ng Amerikno ay malpit na sa bya-ng-San-Migl. Kam
ay hind nabagbag sa balta ng it, at hininty nmin ang kanila
ng pagdatng. Is ng katanghalan ay matahmik ang byan. Ang manga
sundlu ng nangsa byan ay nangagsials at ang ib ng hind umals
ay ipinagtapn ang kanila ng manga barl. Ang dahiln nang bgay na
iyn ay ang pagpsok nang manga sundlo ng Amerikno. Sa dulhan nang
bakran nang bhay na mi ng kintirhn ay nkta ko ang paglpit nang
manga sundlo. Ang salawl nil ay kki at ang kamista asl. Bitbt
nil ang manga barl at nakahilra sila nang pagtakb sa bukirn at
patngo sil sa dan.

Nang ang manga Amerikno y sya n ng nammahla` sa byan, may ila ng
bw ng ang manga tos ay mahihigpt. Ang manga law ay ipinappatay
sa alass nang gab, at wala ng to ng pinahhintulta ng maglakd
pagkaran nang ras na it. Sa manga bundk na malpit sa San-Migl
ay marmi ng manga sundlo ng Taglog at madals nila ng sinalakyan
ang bya-ng-San-Migl. Dhil sa manga pagsalkay na it, ang manga
bhay sa San-Migl ay pinagsung nang manga Amerikno. Kung gabi-gab
ang pagsalkay nang manga sundlo, gabi-gab rn namn ang ginaw
ng panunnog nang manga bhay. Ang mi ng manga kpit-bhay ay
nagssilpat sa min gabi-gab pang don makitlog, sapagkt sa mi
ng bhay ay hind lubh ng malak ang pangnib sa manga bla nang
nagssipaglabann. Ang manggagamt nang manga sundlo ng Amerikno
na nssa bya-ng-San-Migl ay nagng kaybgan nang ki ng ttay,
at dhil dto y nligtas sa snog ang mi ng trhan. Mnsan ay
sinbi nang manggagmot na it kay Ttay na madals sya ng summa
sa manga patrlya at sinsbi nya rto na hwag sungin ang mi ng
bhay. Sa kalanan, nang hind mapaals nang manga sundlo ng Taglog
ang manga Amerikno sa byan, ay hinintun na nil ang pananalkay,
at ang bya y tumahmik n.









TRANSLATION


1. THE FOOLISH MONKEY AND THE CLEVER TURTLE.

Once upon a time, when the turtle was swimming in the river, he
saw a banana-tree adrift and being carried along by the current. He
dragged it to the beach, but was not able to carry it up to the solid
ground. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and offered him
a half of the banana-tree, if he would plant his part for him. The
monkey agreed, and they divided the banana-tree at the middle,
half-way from either end. The monkey took the half which had leaves,
because he thought it would grow better than the half which had none.

When a few days had passed, the monkey's tree died, while that of the
turtle grew until it bore fruit. The bananas grew ripe, but the turtle
could not climb for them. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey,
and offered him some of the fruits of the banana, if he would climb
the tree. The monkey climbed up and ate for all he was worth.

Said the turtle: "Throw me some."

But the monkey answered: "Though sweet the skins, I'd throw you none."

The turtle got angry and scattered spines round the foot of the
tree. When the monkey jumped down, he landed on the spines. He
suspected the turtle and looked for him, in order to punish him. He
found the turtle behind a stump.

Said he to the turtle: "I am going to punish you. Choose between the
two: shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the river?"

The clever turtle began to shout and begged the monkey, if it were
possible, to bray him in a mortar.

But the monkey answered: "I shall give you the punishment you don't
want."

And he threw the turtle into the river.

When the turtle arrived in the water, he set up a shout and said to
the monkey: "Thank you, friend! This is my home."



Note. p. 16, l. 2 ang pagng hbang nallgo` is unusual and no
doubt traditional for hbang ang pagng ay nallgo`. Similarly,
p. 16, l. 18 Balat mn at malinamnm ... is traditional (proverbial)
for modern Khit na malinamnm ang manga balt.





2. THE RACE OF THE DEER AND THE SNAIL.

A deer, grazing in the jungle, came upon a snail that was creeping
over the leaf of a bamboo-plant. The deer ceased from his grazing
and watched the slow creeping of the snail.

When a few moments had passed, he said to the snail: "How slowly you
walk! Why don't you learn to walk faster? Look at me,--I am often
pursued by dogs, but my swift running is what saves my life. But
look at you,--if you should be pursued by any foe, what will ever
save your life? Surely you will get killed."

When the snail had heard these words, he looked at the deer and scanned
his fine physique, his long legs, and his strong muscles. He wished
that he too might be like the deer, so that he could run fast. However,
he thought that if he forced himself to run, he should not remain
far behind the deer.

Accordingly he answered the deer: "You are overweening. You do not
suspect what can be done by one who has a strong will. I challenge
you to race with me from here to the river that lies west of here."

The deer laughed loudly and answered the snail: "How can you think
you will defeat me? I suppose you are going to cheat."

The snail answered that he was not going to cheat, and, so that
there might be someone to watch them and be judge over their race,
he suggested that they call one of their friends to be judge.

The deer agreed, and they called an owl to be judge.

When they began to run, the snail was soon left far behind. On his
course the deer came upon a flourishing grass-field. He stopped to
graze, since his start over the snail was so great. He planned that
when he saw the snail coming, he would start running again. However,
when he had done feeding, he was attacked by laziness. He went to
sleep, with the thought that he would wake up before the snail arrived.

However, while he was asleep, the snail passed by. When he awoke,
it was already late in the afternoon. He ran with all his might to
the river, and there he was met by the snail and their judge, the owl.

"You are defeated," said their judge at once.





3. A GOOD FRIDAY.

Juan and his friend Pedro were canoeing on the river toward the town
Baliwag. In their canoe they had an image of Christ which they were
conveying to a priest to be used in the celebration of a Good Friday
Mass. Juan was filled with terror.

Said he to Pedro: "This man of ours in the canoe is all chopped up
with wounds and no longer breathing. I think this man is a corpse. I
am afraid we shall be suspected by the priest to whom we are delivering
him."

Pedro answered: "We shall tell him that when this man was loaded into
our canoe, he was already in this condition. We have many witnesses,
so don't be afraid."

When they reached the priest they gave him the image. The priest
told them to come to church the next day in the afternoon to hear
the sermon.

Juan was again filled with terror, for he could not make out why the
priest wanted them to go to the church. He had often heard of men being
summoned to the church and there seized by the gendarmes. However, he
did not say anything to Pedro, for he saw that the latter had no fear.

On the next day in the afternoon they went to church, and there they
saw a Christ nailed to the cross.

Said Juan: "That man, if you remember, is the one we delivered to
the priest. We had better go to some place out of sight of the priest."

So the two of them went under the pulpit, to hear the sermon from
there. The Good Friday Mass began, and the priest was already getting
to the last part of his sermon.

In his sermon the priest said: "Repent ye of your sins, cruel
people! Behold the wounds which you struck in the body of our Savior!"

When Juan heard this, he was again filled with terror, for he thought
that he had fallen under suspicion.

Therefore, what he did was to come out from under the pulpit, face
the priest, and say: "Father, we are not the ones who wounded this
man! When he was loaded into our canoe he was already wounded."

When he had said this, he went back under the pulpit. The priest paid
no attention to the speech he had heard, and went on with his sermon.

"The day has come now, when ye sinners must repent. The portals
of Heaven are open now through the death of our Savior, and every
sinner can enter Heaven, if he repent. But if ye do not repent, ye
shall come to be punished with sufferings without end in the flames of
Hell for the sufferings which ye caused our Savior to undergo. Behold
His body sweating blood, His hands and feet nailed to the cross, and
His wounds from head to feet. No one other caused Him to suffer and
wounded His dear body, than you, ye sinners, and if ye do not repent,
ye shall fall into Hell."

Juan could not remain in his place, for he thought that the priest
was overflowing with anger against him.

So he again faced the priest and said, as loudly as he could: "Father,
only a moment ago I told you that I had no part in wounding this man,
so do not send me, sir, to Hell."

The priest was filled with great anger and said to the congregation:
"What sort of people are you, foolish folk? Is there not one among
you who can take hold of this fellow and choke him?"

When Juan heard this, he ran with all his might, trampling without
regard the people who were kneeling and weeping in repentance of
their sins. He was followed by Pedro, and the two ran together,
without stopping, until they reached their home town. And there they
told the story of their narrow escape.





4. THE HUNCHBACK AND THE BLINDMAN.

A hunchback and a blindman were close friends. When they walked, the
hunchback led the blindman; the blindman, on the other hand, carried
the hunchback on his shoulders, when they had a hard road to travel,
for the hunchback was weak of body.

Once they came upon a cocoanut-tree. They wanted to pick some of the
fruits, but they did not know which of the two of them should be the
one to climb the tree. The blindman said that he should not be able
to climb, because he should not be able to see which fruits to pick,
since there were many unripe fruits. The hunchback also did not want
to climb, on account of his weakness. However, he was very eager to
eat of the cocoanuts, so, finally, he said to the blindman that he
would do the climbing.

"To prevent your being robbed of the fruits which I shall throw down,
do you count out loud the thud on the ground of the fruits as I drop
them, so that I may keep track of the number."

The hunchback began to climb, but when he was half-way up, he fell
down.

"One!" said the blindman.

The hunchback told him that it was he who had made the thud and not
a cocoanut.

He climbed again. After a few moments he took another fall.

"Two!" shouted the blindman.

The hunchback got angry and told the blindman that he was stubborn.

He said: "That first thing that made a thud was I, and the second
one was I again; I haven't yet picked any cocoanuts."

But the blindman planned to make fun of the hunchback's falls. So he
decided that, when he again heard a thud, he would cry "Three!"

The hunchback climbed again, but again fell. The blindman cried
"Three!" and laughed.

The hunchback grew hot with anger. He went up to the blindman and
slapped him in the face. The slap hit the blindman's eyes, and through
it his eyes came open. To take revenge he kicked the hunchback. He
struck him on the back, and through this his hump was straightened out.

They both rejoiced at what had happened, and their friendship grew
all the closer, instead of their becoming enemies.





5. THE KING WHO HAD HORNS AND JUAN.

On a group of islands there ruled a man who had two short horns hidden
in his thick hair. This was not known to his subjects, but the secret
began to spread among the people by way of the barbers who had cut
his hair.

On account of this he conceived a great anger against barbers and
planned to exterminate the barbers in his kingdom. He ordered four
deep wells dug in front of his residence, and in the center between
the four pits he had a seat placed. One day he sat down on the chair
between the four pits, and asked everyone who passed whether he knew
how to cut hair. Whenever anyone said "Yes," he stopped him, gave
him a pair of shears, and had him cut his hair. After a little while
he asked each hair-cutter what he saw on his, the king's, head. The
hair-cutters all told the truth, and each one of them answered that
he saw horns. Every one who answered thus was pushed by the king into
one of the pits that were round him.

A few days passed and two of the pits were already filled with barbers
and were ordered by the king to be filled up with earth. The passers-by
who knew how to cut hair grew scarce, and the king thought he had
already killed all the barbers in his kingdom.

One day he waited on his seat until mid-day, before a man came by
who said he knew how to cut hair.

The king asked him: "What is your name?"

The man answered: "My name, sir, is Juan."

"Cut my hair, Juan," commanded the king.

Juan approached the king and began to cut his hair.

After a short time the king asked: "What do you see on my head, Juan?"

His reply was thus: "Your Majesty, I see on your head the crown."

This made the king glad. Therefore he got up from his seat and led
Juan into his palace and made Juan barber royal. He gave Juan large
wages and had the remaining pits filled up.





6. THREE STUDENTS.

Juan, Pedro, and Andrs were three students from the same town who were
friends. When the opening of the schools came, they knew that they
would part: each one of them was to go to a different town. Before
they parted, they appointed a place where they would meet at the
beginning of the vacation.

A year passed, the closing of the schools arrived, the students
returned to their home towns, and the three friends, Pedro, Juan,
and Andrs met in the town where Pedro had been brought up, to spend
the vacation there.

When they came together, after discussing various matters, they
inquired how much each of them had learned in his study of the Spanish
language. Pedro said that he knew a great many Spanish words, but
that which he remembered best was the word "Vamos."

Juan in turn answered: "I too know a great deal, but what I recall
just now is the word 'Matar.'"

Andrs said that he had learned nothing except the word "Si."

After their conversation Pedro suggested that they go boating on the
river and take a bath.

When they were boating on the river, they saw on the bank a Spaniard
who wanted to bathe. Pedro said it would be a good idea to speak to
the Spaniard, so that each one of them might show his knowledge.

Pedro began and said "Vamos!"

Juan answered "Matar!"

And last came Andrs with his "Si!"

When the Spaniard heard this, he was filled with terror, for he thought
that the three canoers were going to kill him. Therefore, even though
he did not know how to swim, he jumped into the river and was drowned.





7. A SOLDIER WHO KNEW LATIN.

Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a soldier, went together to
shoot wild game in a deep jungle. As the jungle was far from the town,
they carried plenty of provisions, so as not to be in want of food. A
few days passed without their bagging anything. Their provisions grew
less and less, until there was nothing left except one raw egg. There
came to them the day of great hunger, but the three had no food except
the egg that was left.

The priest said that, if they divided the one egg, it would do them
no good, for it would not slacken their hunger. Therefore the priest
suggested that only one of them should eat the remaining egg, and
in his selfishness he suggested that whichever of them was best at
speaking Latin should eat the egg all by himself. He thought that the
soldier did not know Latin, and the doctor alone would be his opponent,
and his knowledge he held in contempt.

The doctor agreed to the advice of the priest, but the soldier did
not want to consent, for he had not studied like the priest and the
doctor, but there was nothing for him to do.

The priest took the egg and tapped it against a stone. When the egg
was broken, he said: "Coronatum est," and looked at his two companions.

The doctor took the broken egg, removed the broken part of the shell,
put on some salt, and said: "Saltum est."

The physician handed the egg to the soldier, and the priest and he
waited for what the soldier would say.

The latter did not know what to say, for he really did not know a
single iota of Latin. In his cogitation he remembered that once,
when he went to church to hear the Good Friday Mass, he heard from
the priest that the meaning of the words "Consummatum est" was "It
is all over now." So he poured the egg into his mouth and, when he
had swallowed it, he said: "Consummatum est."

His two companions were greatly astonished at the learning of the
soldier, which they had by no means suspected.





8. THE SEVEN DWARVES.

A certain married couple had seven children who were dwarves. The
father was out of work and could not find any. The mother also was
not earning any money, for her body was weak and often sick.

One noon they were sitting on a bench and discussing the life they
were leading. The man asked what they had better do with their many
children. The woman suggested that they should look for work for their
children, so that they might earn money. But the man answered that,
in his opinion, they would not be able to find any work, since he
himself had not been able to find any. Therefore he suggested that
they had better abandon their children.

This made the woman grieve and weep. She would not consent to abandon
the children. But her husband made it clear to her that, if they did
not do this, they would all die of hunger. Finally the woman consented
and they agreed that they would take their children for a walk and
leave them on the way.

While they were discussing this, the seventh child was in a crack
of the bench on which they were sitting and heard what their parents
were going to do to them. After they had finished talking, the child
at once looked for his brothers and sisters and told them what he
had heard. They all wept, because their parents had not told them
that they were a burden to their life. They thought that, if they had
known this, they would have done anything whatever to help them gain
a living. However, they agreed that they would go along, if they were
asked to go walking, and would allow themselves to be led astray.

On the next day their father came to them, told them to get dressed,
gave them some cakes, and told them that they should all go for a
walk. When they started out, the seventh child did not eat his bread,
but, starting at their gate, he crumbled it and scattered it along
the road which they were walking. When they had gone some distance,
he ran out of bread and asked his brothers and sisters for some. But
they did not give him any. He did not tell them why he had run out
of bread so soon. When he could get no bread, he picked up stones
and these he dropped one by one on their path.

When they came to a jungle, their parents left them, telling them
to wait for them there and that they would soon come back. Their
parents left them, but they knew that their parents would not come
back to them.

When a short time had passed, they heard a noise. They went toward the
place from which the noise came. There they saw a great giant bathing
by the side of a well. They looked round about the place, and by the
side of a tree they saw the clothes of the giant. The seventh child
sent his brothers and sisters away and told them to hide, and he would
steal the giant's shoes. They did this and the child stole the shoes.

When the giant had finished bathing and was getting dressed, he
could not find his shoes. He got angry and cursed. He called for
help. When the one who had stolen the shoes heard this, he quickly
approached. When the giant saw him, he did not suspect him, for,
on account of his smallness, the giant thought that he would not be
able to carry the shoes.

Therefore the giant said to him: "If you will carry this bag of money
of mine to my wife and tell her to buy some shoes and to bring them
to me, I shall pay you much money."

He said further that he could not walk without shoes, and therefore
he should hurry. Taking the bag of money, the child promised to
return at once. However, when he had gone some distance, he called
his hidden brothers and sisters, and when they were assembled, he
suggested that they go home. But his brothers and sisters answered
that they did not know the way home. He however answered that they
should follow the stones and bread he had dropped on the way.

One of his brothers said that, if he had known what he had done with
the bread, he would have given him some when he asked for it. They
were sorry for the stinginess they had shown toward their brother.

It was not long before they came upon the trail of stones along their
way. This they followed and arrived at their house, bringing with
them the bag of money, which they at once gave to their parents. The
latter rejoiced and were sorry for their bad conduct toward their
children,--they rejoiced because they had now the means of living
for a long time to come.





9. A POLICEMAN WHO PLAYED VAMPIRE.

In the summer of the year 1902, when the ripe fruits of the fruit-trees
were hanging from the branches, there circulated all through the town
of San Antonio the rumor that a vampire was going about the town.

The people of San Antonio in those years believed in ghosts, vampires,
dwarves, and other objects of terror. Most of them had not been
fortunate enough to get an education, but, in spite of this, they
were kindly, quiet, and industrious people.

The houses in this town were built of nipa-fibre and bamboo. There
were also some frame houses. Most of them stood in large enclosures,
and the rear part of these yards was planted with trees that have
tasty fruits, such as the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, mabolo,
mango, and the like.

These fruits were just getting ripe, when the rumor spread that,
for several nights back, some women had caught sight of the vampire
in various back yards. The women and children were filled with great
terror; accordingly, as soon as darkness came down, they staid still in
their houses. Most of the men also were afraid, but there were some who
said that they were not afraid, because they had not yet come across a
vampire and therefore did not know whether it was really to be feared.

A vampire is a being of great power. It changes its body into
various forms. At some times it has a body like a human being,
but black, at others it is a large dog or pig. It eats people,
especially children. But its favorite food, by far, and that which
it most commonly eats, is the child yet unborn and still in its
mother's womb. Therefore the pregnant women in the town had great
fear. They did not allow their husbands to sleep, for watching at
their side. A vampire is hard to kill with knife or gun, because it
has but one place which one must hit or wound in order to kill it,
and this place is secret. The only thing it flees from is garlic,
which therefore is much used in driving off vampires.

A surprising thing, however, about this vampire was its habit of
keeping itself in back yards. Strange was also the fact that it was
mostly young girls who said that they had caught sight of this vampire
in back yards, up in grape-fruit trees and other trees. A few bold men
said that they suspected that this spook was a thief and no vampire.

It was a certain policeman of more than usual courage who spied upon
this vampire in a back yard in which it had recently been seen. When
darkness came, he went to his hiding-place. It was not long before
the vampire came and climbed on a grape-fruit tree, and he heard it
picking many fruits. It came down and went away, but was followed by
the policeman to a house which it entered.

Great was the surprise of the policeman, when he saw here his fellow
policeman wrapped up in a black sheet and just putting down on the
floor a black bag full of grape-fruit.

He summoned his fellow policeman to the town hall and there on the
next day accused him before the judge. The policeman who had played
vampire was put in jail for the crime of theft.





10. A VAMPIRE THAT GOT KILLED.

One evening in a students' boarding-house in the town of Malolos I
heard an old man, ninety years of age, tell a company the following
story:

When he was still a young unmarried man, he lived in the country. There
were only a very few neighbors. One day there was a death in the
house of a neighbor. Following an ancient custom, he went to the
house of mourning.

When he arrived there it was not long before he was told that there
was a vampire in the place. He had a great and inherited hatred of
vampires and therefore decided to watch that night.

Late in the evening he left the house and in a wagon not far from
the house, there he lay down. There was a full moon that night, so
that he had a clear view of things round about. As he saw nothing
that could be suspected of being a vampire, he went to sleep.

At midnight he woke up, and the first thing that struck his eyes
was a black object on the roof of the house where there had been a
death. This black thing had not been there before he went to sleep, so
he suspected that this was the vampire he had been told about. Vampires
eat dead people, so he concluded that the dead person was the thing
for which the vampire had come there.

Carrying a bolo-knife, he went up to the house. The people were
asleep. Up above he saw something hanging down from the roof of
the house. It was like the intestine of a chicken. It got longer
and longer, until the end of it went into the mouth of the dead
person. The corpse stood up from the place where it lay, when this
thing went into its mouth.

What the young man did was to walk up to the upright corpse and, with
the bolo he was carrying, cut the thing that was like the intestine
of a chicken. When he had cut this, something came down with a thud at
the side of the house. He went down, and there he saw the dead vampire.





11. SORCERERS.

In some places in the Philippines the people have a firm belief in
sorcerers. According to their belief a sorcerer is a person of great
power, and this power comes from a demon or else is inherited from
one's parents. Before one may gain this power one must first become
friends with a demon and serve it. However, there are some also who
believe that one may find or snatch up this power in a jungle or some
uncanny place that is hard to reach and usually full of terror.

The kulam is that seized, inherited, or given by the demon, and it is
the source of the possessor's power. The appearance of the kulam is
not always the same. Sometimes it is a stone or a small doll of ugly
appearance. In the dark this kulam glows like a firefly, but this
glow disappears when the kulam desires it. The kulam and the person,
man or woman, who possesses it, do not separate even for a moment,
and even when bathing the sorcerer carries his kulam. Therefore,
curious people, when they wish to find out whether a person whom they
suspect is really a sorcerer or not, watch him at his bath. If the
sorcerer is not careful and has no suspicion that he is being watched,
the watcher sometimes succeeds in seeing the kulam.

The sorcerer has also the power of concealing the kulam inside his
body, and the people are not rare who have seen a sorcerer at his
death. At the last moment, before breathing ceases, he spits out
the kulam.

This happens only when the sorcerer does not wish to bequeath his
kulam. If, however, he wishes to bequeath it, then, long before the
sorcerer dies, he calls the person to whom he wishes to bequeath it
and in all secrecy gives him the kulam.

The great power of the sorcerer is used by him against his enemies,
against people who have incurred his anger; or against their live
stock, in case he wishes to make this latter the object of his
vengeance. He also uses his power in playing jokes on a person or
animal that has gained his liking.

His victim usually acts like crazy. Sometimes the person he has
bewitched complains that his whole body is sore, keeps shouting, and
cannot keep quiet even for a moment. In the case of animals,--usually
the pig most valued by the owner,--the punishment he gives is like
the disease of cholera, but more severe than this. The bowel-movement
of the animal does not stop, and after a few hours, no matter how
fat the animal, it becomes skin and bone. The bewitched person eats
mightily, like two men, and keeps asking for tasty food. Therefore
people believe that the sorcerer who is punishing him shares in the
eating of the sick person.

The sorcerer has the power of entering the body of the person
bewitched. This is the belief, but in what way the sorcerer effects
his entrance or at what point he enters the body of the person he
is bewitching, there is no one who knows. However the place where he
comes out is the forefinger. This fact is of great importance for the
cure of people who have been bewitched and also for the punishment
of sorcerers.

Although the power of the sorcerer is great, yet there are some
things which he fears, usually strong people who are bold and have no
faith in the powers of sorcerers and other things that terrify other
people. Therefore it is not rare that, after the first or second time
he cures a person of this disease, some man receives the title of
"witch-doctor."

I once heard someone who had seen the cure of a bewitched person tell
the story. The narrator had a neighbor who had a young daughter. This
young lady had many suitors, and one of them was suspected of being
a sorcerer. He had the bad fortune to be one of those who were not
accepted. In his great anger he bewitched, one after the other,
the betrothed man and woman.

He began with the woman, and her parents at once called in a
witch-doctor for her. When the doctor arrived and saw the patient,
he said that the woman was really bewitched.

He told the people who were there not to let the bewitched person know
that he was in the house. If the patient knew this, the sorcerer who
was inside her body would have a chance to go away at once. The doctor
went up to the woman without her being aware of it and suddenly seized
her two forefingers in a tight grip. She shouted all the louder and
trembled like one in terror.

The sorcerer, according to people's belief, feels any pain that is
given to the body of the person he is bewitching while he is within
the latter's body. Likewise, when one speaks with the patient, it is
he who answers.

Therefore the doctor suddenly asked: "What are you doing here,
you brute?"

The patient did not utter a word, but tried to get free. The strength
she displayed was not the usual strength of a woman.

But the doctor did not let her go, and asked her again: "What are
you doing here? Why have you come here? If you do not answer, I shall
torture you."

The woman answered in a pitiful tone: "No, sir, I shan't do it again;
let me go, sir; you are torturing me already."

"Shall I let you go?" asked the doctor at once. "Promise me first
that you won't come back."

"No, I shan't come back, sir," answered the woman.

"If I catch you here again, I shall kill you. Don't be
troublesome. Stay still in your house."

"Yes, sir; yes, sir; I shan't come back, sir. Please, let me go!"

While this dialogue was taking place, the woman was struggling to get
loose and trying to make the doctor let go of her forefingers. When
the woman had made her promise, the doctor let go of her two
forefingers. The face of the woman, which just before had been
expressing great suffering, now became quiet, and she was like a
madwoman who has got back her reason. She became quiet, stopped
shouting, and was able to converse intelligently.

The man lived in a near-by town. When he was bewitched his brother
called a physician for him. In his extreme anger, this brother called
a physician who was fierce and cruel in his treatment of sorcerers.

The physician came secretly to the sick man's house. From his
hiding-place he first determined at what time the sorcerer was in the
body of the sick man. This showed itself in the shouting, movements,
and senseless talking of the patient. The physician sharpened a
bolo-knife and, when he had done this, quickly ran to the side of the
patient. He then seized the latter's two forefingers, leaned over his
body, and cut several deep gashes in his face. The patient screamed
and tried to get away, but when he did get away there were wounds in
his face and the blood was flowing in a stream. The physician left
him without a word. He sought out the brother of the wounded man and
told him not to heed his brother's wounds, for tomorrow they would
go away and be transferred to the sorcerer, for it was the latter
whom he had reached in the body of his brother. On the next day the
doctor went to the man whom he had cured with the knife and was much
pleased when he found him well and without the marks of wounds in his
face. A few days later they heard that a sorcerer in the neighboring
town was in a serious condition, owing to the unceasing flow of blood
from some wounds in his face.

There are also, however, some sorcerers who are quick and have not
been caught by physicians. The physician, too, must be skilful and
quick. Anyone at all can cure a person who has been bewitched, since
there is no other method of cure than that of inflicting pain on the
body of the bewitched person. The danger, however, is great, since,
if the one who is attempting the cure is not quick, owing to lack of
practice, the sorcerer will be able to get away. In this event it is
the bewitched person himself who will suffer from the punishment. It
is related that there once happened something like this which follows.

One of two brothers was bewitched by his rival in courtship. There
was no witch-doctor within call. In his great pity for him, the older
brother decided to cure him, even though he had had no practice. He
was not practised, to be sure, but he had often heard from physicians
the manner of cure. One evening, when he thought that the sorcerer was
inside his brother's body, he quickly seized a bolo, and, stepping up
to his brother, cut him without care. On the next day, instead of his
finding his brother well and unwounded, the latter was a corpse. The
sorcerer had got away.





12. THE GAME OF FOOTBALL IN THE PHILIPPINES.

The games of football in the United States and in the Philippines are
very different. Instead of the players belonging to two contending
sides, as in American football, in "sipa" the players form but one
party. In sipa the aim of the players is not to defeat an opponent,
but to prevent the ball or sipa from falling to the ground. The ball
used is also very different. It is made of split rattan woven into the
shape of a sphere. The inside is hollow and the eyes of the weave are
large. Therefore the sipa, unlike the ball used in baseball, is light.

The number of players is from two to twenty. When they are many,
they stand in a circle. To begin the game, one of the party throws
the sipa ball up into the air and toward one of the players, usually
toward one opposite him. The one to whom the ball is tossed returns it
to the one who threw it to him, not with his hand, but with his foot.

When the players are skilful, they direct the ball to each one
of the party, so that each one of them is alert and ready for the
coming of the ball. Each one is careful not to let the ball fall to
the ground. Often the players display various manners of sending
the ball. The graceful bendings of the legs forward and backward,
the quick and light leaps, the gentle and light kicking of the ball,
and the sending of the ball in every possible direction, are features
which give beauty to the game of sipa. Sometimes the shoulder, the
elbow, the knee, or the hand is used in returning the ball.

How is there any contest in this game? This can consist only in the
test of endurance in keeping the ball from falling to the ground.

When, for instance, one team of football-players or siperos wants
to contend with another team, the former challenges whatever team
it has picked out. If the challenge is accepted, the day, hour,
and place of the game are at once announced in the newspapers.

At the time of the game thousands of people look on. The challenging
party usually hires a band of musicians, and each team is played for
during its innings. Usually there are two bands, for, if the challenged
party has any pride, it wants to show it and so brings its own band.

After the game the judge announces to the spectators which team has
won. When the announcement of the judge has been heard, there begins at
once the yelling and the honoring of the victorious team. The winning
team and their friends and followers, accompanied by the music of their
band, at once begin to parade through the places near to the field
of the game. On the next day the whole story appears in the newspapers.

Such games of sipa as these are not common in the little towns in
the provinces, but only in the large cities, such as Manila.





13. THE PRIEST PATUPAT.

In the last years of the Spanish time there dwelt in the town of
San Miguel a certain man. This man was educated and was intelligent
enough to understand the evil ways of the priests, who were really
little kings in their towns.

In San Miguel the priest who had the parish was a violent and
hot-headed man. The people called him "Patupat."

One Sunday the man above mentioned went to church to hear the sermon
of the priest. As this priest thought that the people to whom he was
preaching were uneducated people, he took no pains to speak Tagalog
correctly. His speech had neither beginning nor end and was mixed up
like rice-pudding. Moreover, what he preached about was never other
than Hell, Purgatory, what brutes the people of the town were, and
the End of the World.

When the sermon began, our friend Francisco entered the church.

As usual, the priest began his sermon with this utterance: "Brezren
and faylow-Christiannes!" Although he had been for almost forty years
now in the Tagalog country, he had not yet learned to say correctly
"Brethren and fellow-Christians."

Francisco stood in a place near the pulpit and listened carefully
to the sermon, which on that day contained nothing except what had
already been a thousand times repeated by the priest, namely about
the sufferings in Hell and Purgatory, the offering of candles and the
giving of money to the church in order to escape from these sufferings.

Francisco was filled with great anger, for he saw that the priest
was fooling his people and had no other aim than to frighten the
townspeople so that they should enrich the church and priests.

After the sermon Kiko did not go home as usual, but waited until mass
was over. After mass he staid in the church until he was alone. He
took some pieces of paper and wrote to the priest as follows:

"Father, I heard your sermon this morning. It is apparent to me that
you believe that there is a Hell and that there is a Purgatory. I do
not believe in these things. Next Sunday, if you wish, you may prove to
the people in your sermon that there is a Hell and a Purgatory. When
you are done, I shall try to prove to them that there is no Hell and
no Purgatory. If the people believe you, I do not mind if you have
me hanged for my defeat and my unbelief, but, if I am the victor,
all I ask of you is to allow me to say to the people at large that
there is neither a Hell nor a Purgatory."

Several copies of this letter he pasted to the walls of the church,
and one he sent to the priest.

When Patupat read it, his blood boiled and his anger knew no bounds. He
had the gendarmes called, and on the evening of that very Sunday he
had all the houses in the town entered and searched, so as to catch
Kiko. But they did not catch Kiko. That same afternoon Kiko told
some of his intimate friends what he had done, and they were all
astonished. They asked him why he had done this thing and whether he
could not see what would happen to him.

One of them spoke thus: "Pack up some clothes and go away right now, if
you don't want to be caught by Patupat's soldiers and shot tomorrow."

Kiko refused to follow his advice, because he thought that Patupat
would accept his challenge about showing the people that there was
neither a Hell nor a Purgatory and that these things were merely a
device of the priests for getting money. Therefore he allowed himself
to be overtaken by night in the house of a friend of his.

Not until it was dark and the town was upset with the searchings
of the gendarmes did he recognize the great danger which he was
incurring. Since he had heard of this at once, he had time to hide
in a secret corner of his friend's house.

When the house-searchings were over, he went out from his hiding place,
went home, wrapped up some clothes, had a wagon hitched up, and,
taking some rifle-bullets, shouldered his gun, got into the wagon,
and had himself driven out of town. After a few days he went to the
mountains together with several townsmen who could not stay in the
town because they had incurred the anger of the priest or of some
other Spanish official of the town.

There, in his stay in the mountains, he was overtaken by the revolution
against the Spaniards in the year 1886.





14. MARIANO AND THE PRIEST PATUPAT.

Mariano was one of the very few apothecaries in the town of San
Miguel. He was one of the people who fell into misfortune through
disobeying the orders of the priest Patupat. He had a family; beside
his wife he had two children, one two years old and one new-born.

One day his servant fell sick. He had a brother-in-law who was a
doctor, so he had him treat the servant without charge, and he gave
the servant medicine without charge. After some days the servant got
well and decided to rest for a while in the country. Accordingly
he paid his debt and took his leave of Mariano for a stay in the
country. His stay in the country did not last long, before he fell
sick anew, and the end was his death.

In the Philippines in those days it was not allowable to bury a dead
person without first having him blessed by a priest. The priests did
not allow this, but they did not much mind the living together of a man
and woman not married, for the reason that they did this themselves.

The deceased servant of Mariano was very poor and his relatives
also were poor and had not the means to pay the price demanded by
Patupat. Thus there was no one to see to the burial of the servant's
body.

When Patupat learned this, he had Mariano called and said that
it was his place to have the dead man buried and to pay the
costs. In Mariano's opinion Patupat's insolence was getting beyond
bounds. Therefore he said that he would not pay him for the burying
of the dead man, no matter what happened.

Patupat boiled with rage. He had the dead man buried and on the
same day went to court and sued Mariano for the cost of blessing the
dead man.

When the session of the court came, Mariano was present, and when the
judge asked what he had to say to this accusation, he spoke as follows:

"Your Honor, this man who died was no longer in my care, for he was
no longer my servant when he died. When he was still sick, I had him
treated without charge and gave him medicine without charge. I have
done my duty to my fellow-man and the duty placed upon me by the
Lord. One of the duties of the priests is to provide burial for the
dead. Now this man is dead, why cannot this priest do his duty without
receiving pay, since even this would not happen, if the relatives of
the deceased had means?"

After asking some further questions of the priest and of Mariano,
the judge closed the hearing and announced that Mariano was in the
right and that the priest would have to put up with having blessed
the dead man without payment.

When this had happened Patupat's wrath against Mariano greatly
increased, and after a few days he again entered a charge against
Mariano. This time he made a different accusation. He complained to
the court that Mariano was a Mason, because he did not come to church,
did not confess, and did not kiss the priest's hand. The Masons are
enemies of the Catholic Church and, in consequence, were enemies also
of the government in the Philippines in those days; and therefore he
suggested that Mariano be deported.

When Mariano heard of this accusation of Patupat, he decided that
his only hope was to hide or to escape from those who were to arrest
him. Accordingly what he did was to go down to Manila, and there
he hid.

But even there he was caught by the gendarmes. Together with seven
or eight men from various towns he was put into a steamboat and they
were taken to the southern part of the Philippine Islands. And when
they arrived there some of their number were shot by the soldiers
who accompanied them, for this was ordered by the officials who sent
these men into banishment.

However, Mariano was not one of those who were shot. He staid there
until, after the victory of the Americans, he was given the liberty
of returning to his family. When he came back to the latter, his one
child was seven years old and the second, five.





15. THE STORY OF THE CHINESE CARPENTER.

Juan was a carpenter who had for neighbor a Chinaman who also was a
carpenter. This Chinaman was a skilled carpenter and his cleverness
showed itself in his skilful use of the plane. One day he bought a
piece of wood forty feet in length. This he proceeded to smoothe. He
tried to see if he could obtain shavings without a break for the
whole length of the wood. What with the excellence of his tools and
his skill at carpentry, this feat went off as if there was nothing
to it. Every time he pushed his plane he obtained a shaving without
a break, forty feet in length. In order to show this his skill to
his neighbor, the Tagalog carpenter, he sent him one shaving every day.

The Tagalog carpenter, Juan, marvelled at the skill of the Chinaman. In
order to make return for the shavings he had received, he too tried
to use the plane and to send the shavings to the Chinaman. However,
the longest shavings he succeeded in getting were only fifteen
feet. These it would have been humiliating to send to the Chinaman.

Juan was skilled in the use of the daras, and he was able to smoothe
boards by the use of the daras alone. Any piece of wood which he had
chopped smooth with the daras did not require the use of the plane;
but the pieces he chopped off were only short splinters, not suited
to show his skill, and he could not send them to the Chinaman.

While Juan did not know what to do, the Chinaman did not stop sending
long shavings. Juan was filled with anger. He took his daras and went
over to the Chinaman's. The latter was surprised and frightened when
he saw Juan.

The latter said: "What do you mean to say by sending me those
shavings? You are offensive to me and you shall pay for it. I am
going to cut your hair with this daras."

The Chinaman was frightened, for he knew that if that daras struck
his head, he would surely not survive. He tried to escape, but Juan
seized him, tied him to a bench, and began to use the daras on the
Chinaman's head.

The daras is a large tool, the size of a pick, and heavy, but in Juan's
skilful hand it was like a mere pair of scissors. The descent of the
daras on the Chinaman's head was very gentle, and only the hair was
cut by the edge.

The Chinaman in his fright shouted and said: "Wapelo! Come helpee me,
Juan bad man, not Chlistian!"

This was heard by the neighbors and passers-by.

Accordingly they came into the Chinaman's workshop, but there Juan
said to them: "Don't you mix in here! I am not hurting this Chinaman. I
am just cutting his hair."

And he kept on with his chopping.

When the Chinaman's hair was completely cut, the onlookers were greatly
astonished, for the Chinaman's hair was as if cut by the shears of a
skilful barber. The Chinaman too, when he saw in the looking-glass
that his head was unhurt, was greatly astonished and did not stop
praising Juan's skill in the use of the daras.





16. A MAN WHO HAD THE POWER OF A DEER.

In a certain town in the Philippine Islands there once became
celebrated the name of a certain man, both among his fellow-townsmen
and the people of the neighboring towns, on account of his unusual
strength in running and jumping.

He was not a proud man, but he had some astuteness in money matters
and also some courage. He did not let his rare good fortune make him
proud, nor did he lie about the source of his unusual strength. He
told those who were curious that the source of his strength was the
power of the deer which he had made his own.

He did not tell how this power had come into his possession, but he
was not stingy about doing favors by helping with his strength both
friends and strangers.

Like most people, he wanted to get rich, and it was toward this end
that he used his strength. He often entered into races, and these
races were always means of winning much money. He always made large
bets. He refused no one that wanted to race with him. Sometimes he
ran races with people, sometimes with horses, with dogs, and with
other animals that are fast at running.

After a few days the money he had won in bets made up a large sum. His
friends also, who had bet on him, got much money. When people came
to know that he had the power of a deer, they did not want to run
against him. Therefore, so as not to stop winning and making money,
he gave large handicaps to his opponents. The handicaps which he gave
were so great that many people contended with him. Still he always
came out the winner. In jumping-matches also he was always victorious.

However, though the advantages which he gained through this power
were great, yet there were also some disadvantages which he obtained
through it. On account of these disadvantages he did not manage to
keep this power as his own through all his life. Through this power
he had become very nervous. The sounds of falling bodies, noises,
and the barking of dogs at night, did not allow him to sleep. These
noises often made him start up with a jump from his sleep. Especially
when the barking of a dog, for instance, woke him up, he jumped high
up from his bed, and before he recovered his wits he was running at
full speed. He could exercise no care about his involuntary jumping
up and usually went way up to the ceiling, and, since this was low,
his body got full of bruises and his head full of bumps from striking
against the ceiling. Likewise in his unintentional running whenever
he woke up with a start, his whole body got knocked again and again
against the walls of his house.

This was hard to bear, and he thought that he should not live long,
what with not sleeping of nights. Therefore he decided to get rid of
this power in a few days. When the seventh day of his possession of the
power came, he was very sore and thought he should die of soreness. His
head was covered with bumps. His face was full of black and blue marks,
and though he had broken no bones, his muscles were badly bruised.

Therefore, without saying a word, he went to a forest and there
abandoned the power which he had got hold of, seeing that he had
already won much money.





17. THE PET MONKEY.

Andrs had a pet monkey which he prized very highly, because this
monkey gave him much service. At night the monkey spread out his
sleeping-mat for him; in the morning it handed him his water for
washing, and whatever order he gave was obeyed by the monkey.

Every night this monkey slept underneath the bedstead on which
its master slept. This was not pleasing to the latter, for owing
to its great value, Andrs wanted to give it a good place to sleep
in. However, no matter what efforts Andrs made to force it, his pet
monkey could not be brought to sleep in any other place.

Andrs was a man who feared and loved God. Therefore, every night,
before he went to sleep, he made the Sign of the Cross and called
upon God. At his bed-time every night he found that his monkey was
already under his bedstead. Not once did he get ahead of the monkey
in going to bed.

One day the priest of the town visited Andrs in his house. After some
time had elapsed in conversation, Andrs told the priest that he had
a pet monkey which was very useful, because it served him well and
obeyed his every command, and he also said that this monkey was more
diligent than his other servants.

The priest was much surprised and asked that the monkey be shown to
him. So Andrs called the monkey. Usually the monkey came at once at
a single call by Andrs, but on this occasion it did not appear even
when he had called ten times. Andrs got angry, arose, and looked
for the monkey in the nooks and corners of the house.

He found it in a corner, clinging tightly to a post. He called it and
tried to get it out of the corner, but the monkey would not come away,
no matter what Andrs did to it. Therefore he called the priest to
look at his pet monkey there in the corner.

At the approach of the priest the monkey trembled with fear. The priest
conceived the suspicion that this monkey was an evil spirit. So he
made the Sign of the Cross, and blessing a little water, sprinkled
it over the monkey.

When the water struck the latter's body, there was a report like that
of a gun, and in the place of the monkey they saw only some smoke,
which soon disappeared.

Thereupon the priest questioned Andrs concerning his faith in
God. Andrs said that his firm faith had not changed and that he
prayed every night before going to sleep. The priest then asked where
the monkey used to sleep. Andrs answered that it slept every night
under his bedstead.

Thereupon the priest informed him that this monkey was an evil spirit
which had been lying in wait for him, and that if he had ever failed
to call upon God before he went to sleep, on that very night the evil
spirit would have thrown him into Hell.





18. THE OLD MAN OF THE ANT-HILL BY LIGHT OF DAY.

Pedro was a brave man. He had often heard stories about vampires,
dwarves, sorcerers, and old men of the ant-hill, but what made Pedro
wonder was why he had never chanced to meet even a single one of
these creatures. He wanted to get a sight of at least one of them,
so that he might know whether it was true that they had powers not
common to most persons.

One night he walked about in a dark and haunted place, because he
had heard that many people had there seen an old man of the ant-hill.

The cigar of such an old man is of terrifying size, and when he draws
at it, the light given forth is like the light of a bonfire.

On this night he had gone some distance on his ramble, when he saw a
flare of light. His hair stood on end and he thought of going back,
but he overcame his fear and continued on his walk.

He was met by the smoker. When he approached, Pedro examined the old
man's figure, but as he did not succeed in gratifying his curiosity,
he was taken with the desire of seeing the old man by daylight. To
bring this about, he would have to hold the old man fast, for these
spirits return to their abode in Hell or some other place of the kind
as soon as morning comes.

Therefore what he did was suddenly to seize hold of the old man. The
latter began to wrestle with him. Sometimes Pedro was below, sometimes
he was on top, but he did not let go of the old man. He held him as
tightly as possible and made up his mind that he would follow no matter
where the old man bore him, should the latter prove stronger than he.

They wrestled till three o'clock. By this time Pedro was as tired
as can be and ready to sink to the ground, but he did not let go of
his fellow-wrestler. When four o'clock came his opponent ceased to
move. When another half hour had passed, the rays of the sun began
to fall upon them, but it was not yet light enough for Pedro to make
out what sort of thing it was he had hold of. When five o'clock came,
he was greatly surprised to see that he was embracing a post which
was not much higher than he. It was, however, firmly fixed in the
ground and completely charred.





19. JUAN'S GOBLIN.

One night Juan while rambling about, crossed a river. While he
was still on the bank and just walking on the sandy beach, he felt
some sand being showered on his back. He thought he would watch for
the person who was throwing sand on him and catch him, so, while
walking, he kept turning suddenly right about at short intervals,
but he saw nothing.

This frightened him a little, and he began to wonder if he was
not perhaps dealing with some old man of the ant-hill or some
goblin. Therefore he hastened his running, but the faster he went,
the more frequent grew the striking of sand on his back. His fear
increased and he returned home running with all his might.

When he got there he was out of breath and unable to speak. It was
only when he had rested a while that he was able to answer the many
questions of his father and the other members of the household. He
told his father that he had been pursued by dwarves on his walk and
showered with sand.

His father asked him where the scene of this was, and he said on the
bank of the river. His father burst into peals of laughter and said
that these were no dwarves, but only his own feet, which sent the
sand up on his back at every stride he made.

But Juan refused to believe this, and for several days he did not
leave the house. His father therefore wanted to show him the truth
of what he had said, so one night he told Juan to go for a walk to
that same place, and he would accompany him.

Juan consented and they both went to the river-bank. When they got
there, Juan's father dropped behind. When Juan walked on the sandy
beach and felt the sprinkling of sand on his back, he was again filled
with terror and shouted to his father that they were already starting
to throw sand on his back.

He made Juan come back and walk on again. This time he followed at his
back. Accordingly Juan's father saw that every time Juan took a step,
the sandals he was wearing carried along some sand, and when he raised
his foot the sand thus carried along was sprinkled on his back.

His father now had him take off the sandals he was wearing and made
him walk on again. This time, no matter how much ground Juan walked
over, he felt no scattering of sand on his back.

From this time on he had no more fear of old men, dwarves, vampires,
and other spooks.





20. JUAN THE SUITOR.

Young Maria was famed for beauty in her district. She had no suitors,
however, except only Juan. But Maria's father had a great dislike
for Juan. Juan could converse with the girl he was courting only in
secret, for when Maria's father knew of it, he would punish them both
with his stick.

Sometimes, when the father's anger was great, he used a club on Juan,
so that he was in danger of getting his bones broken whenever they
were caught talking together.

One dark night Maria's father had gone out. When Juan found this out,
he went to Maria's to talk with her. They forgot themselves in their
conversation, and so were surprised by Maria's father on his return.

He was at once filled with anger and in a loud voice addressed Juan:
"What do you want, you brute? I've told you not to set foot in my
house here. What do you mean by coming here?"

And when he had said this he seized a bamboo cane and made ready to
give Juan a caning. In his terror the latter jumped out of the window,
but he was followed by the father. So he took to running with all
his might.

The night was dark as coal and he could not make out which way to go,
but he kept running nevertheless. He fell on his face again and again
as he ran, but he got up quickly and kept on running.

It was not long before he came upon a large black object. He recognized
it as a carabao, so he leaped quickly on its back and made it run.

Riding on a carabao is not very difficult, owing to the breadth of
its back and the slowness of its pace. Therefore, even though he had
no reins, Juan was not afraid to ride. Owing to the darkness of the
night it happened that in his mounting he faced the tail-end of the
carabao and not the head.

He urged on the carabao. Now it happened that this carabao was owned
by Maria's father. It was not long before Juan saw a lighted house
in the direction toward which the carabao was going. He confidently
expected that this house was his neighbor's. Therefore he got down
from the carabao and went up into the house on the run.

Great was his surprise and terror when, upon entering, he was met by
Maria's father and beaten all over his body and addressed: "What have
you come back for? Haven't I got rid of you yet, you shameless rascal?"

When Juan came to himself he jumped from the porch and ran toward home,
but this time he did not ride on anything.





21. MARIA THE MISER.

When Maria was still alive, she lived in her pleasant house in the
middle of wide grounds with beautiful gardens and trees. As she was
very rich, her life was one constant pleasure.

She had not reached the age of forty years, when she died. All
her wealth she divided between her sister and the church. She did
not remember the poor acquaintances and those of her neighbors who
were poor.

The sister who was left had a series of masses said during the seven
days after death, so that Maria's soul might be admitted by Saint
Peter at the gates of heaven.

When her sister Maria was still alive, she was known far and wide for
her avarice. She herself rarely had masses said or made offerings of
candles. When beggars asking for alms called on her, she had them
driven away and gave them no alms. Often also she had them chased
with dogs. She forced her peons to work without pay, and when she
gave them rations it was without meat or vegetables,--only boiled
rice with salt. To propitiate her, her peons, whenever they went home,
brought chickens, eggs, young pigs, and vegetables or fruits to give
to Maria. They did not make these presents for love of Maria, but as
a kind of bribe, so that they might not be too harshly treated during
their stay in her house. But when Maria went to the country to her
workmen, she appropriated without saying a word and without paying
for it, everything she saw in their house that took her fancy. When,
for instance, she saw at her workmen's a new basket, tray, sieve,
sack, mat, pot, cup, dipper, brazier, or other household utensil,
she took it and carried it off to her house. When she could not make
use of the things she had taken, she sold them. She acted in the same
way about animals that belonged to her servants. In this way she had
quickly grown rich.

When she had been dead about three days, her sister was at her house,
spending the period of mourning. One evening, when she was walking in
the garden she came to the side of a well that was in the yard. She was
surprised, for from the depth of the well she heard someone calling
her name. She turned her head toward the well and there she again
clearly heard the calling, although she could see nobody whatever.

The voice said: "My sister, I am Maria. I am paying now for my life
of avarice, selfishness and cruelty. I am here in the Lord's place of
punishment for all sinners. If it may be, do not follow my example,
but seek some means to save me from the boiling oil here which is
now my place of dwelling."

Her sister was much grieved then and went at once to the priest
to ask to what means she could resort to rescue her sister from
Hell. The priest advised her to go to a certain town where there was a
wonder-working image of Saint Peter. This image of Saint Peter talked
with people and advised various means of getting into Heaven. This
was its miracle.

Maria's sister went immediately to the town where stood the miraculous
Saint Peter. When she got there and talked with Saint Peter, she
told him the whole story. She said that her sister had told her that
her avarice, selfishness, and cruelty had caused her to be thrown
into Hell.

"In that case," said Saint Peter, "find you but one single person,
animal, or plant that was the object of an act of kindness on the part
of your sister. When you have managed to find it, come back to me,
and I shall give you a means to rescue your sister from damnation."

Maria's sister went home to their town at once and there she inquired
of all the townspeople which of them owed any debt of gratitude to
her sister, or which of them had been well treated or kindly spoken
to by her. But not one of them was able to answer. The animals also
of the neighbors and on Maria's own grounds were interrogated by her,
but here she found none that had been done a kindness by her sister.

One dog, a creature of skin and bones, said to her: "One afternoon
I was very hungry. I found a bone in her yard. I seized it and was
carrying it off, when she saw me. She had me chased at once, and when
I dropped the bone she had it buried in the ground. Was that an act
of kindness?"

The grief of Maria's sister became much greater, and her hope of
rescuing her sister from damnation was gradually failing. She began to
question the plants in her sister's yard. She took one by one all the
gourds, pumpkins, cucumbers, chile peppers, melons, sincamas, peanuts,
egg-plants, cow-peas, and onions and garlic, and other vegetables. She
did not find among them that which she sought. She also went through
the trees. She made inquiry, one after the other, of the chico, anona,
custard-apple, mabolo, grape-fruit, orange, lime, and casoy trees. But
here too her labor gave no result; only the group of the garden-plants
she had not yet questioned, and if here she did not find what she
sought, there would be nothing for her to do about the punishment
her sister was undergoing. She went to them all, but there were not
any who could say that they had received any kindness from Maria.

At the very last the sister went to the side of the well, and there
she questioned all the blades of grass. When night came there was only
one head of grass which she had not yet questioned. Full of fear and
hope she approached it.

She asked the head of grass which grew by the side of the well:
"When my sister was alive, did she ever do you an act of kindness?"

"Oh, your sister?" answered the grass, "Yes, it was she who gave me new
life. Last summer my blades were all withered and I was near to dying,
but your sister bathed one evening by the side of this well. As she
bathed, some water was sprinkled on me, so that I grew again and my
withered blades became fresh once more."

Maria's sister could not contain the joy which arose in her, and
that very night she returned to Saint Peter. Saint Peter gave her
a rosary and told her to go home and to hang this rosary down into
the well. She was to call Maria and let her take hold of the rosary;
by this means her sister could be rescued from damnation.

She went home at once, and hardly was the sun shining, when she came
to the yard of the deceased Maria. She approached the well, let down
the rosary, and called her sister. Maria emerged from under the water
and took hold of the rosary. Her sister began to pull at the rosary
and she was slowly lifted up.

As she was thus being rescued, some other souls too wanted to escape
from Hell. So they all took hold of Maria's feet, when they saw that
she was being rescued from damnation. But when only Maria's feet were
still under water, she shook her two feet, so that the souls who had
hold of her should have to let go.

When she did this the rosary broke and she at once fell into the well,
and from that time on her sister was never again able to communicate
with her.

The sister went back to Saint Peter and told him what had happened,
but Saint Peter said that there was no longer anything that they
could do to save her sister from Hell.





22. THREE SOULS WHO CALLED UPON SAINT PETER.

Juan was a gay bachelor. But when he reached the age of twenty-two
he fell very sick and it was not long before he died. His soul went
to Heaven and knocked at its gate.

Saint Peter answered his knock and asked: "Who are you? What brings
you here?"

Juan's soul answered: "I am Juan's soul. Open the door, for I want
to come in."

The door-keeper opened the gate, but before he allowed Juan's soul to
enter, he questioned him as follows: "Why have you come here? What
acts of piety have you performed on earth that you think you are
entitled to the joys of Heaven? Have you left a wife behind you?"

Juan's soul said: "When I was still on earth I often went to church,
prayed, and gave alms, but I did not have the good fortune to get
married."

The door-keeper answered: "You are not fit to partake of the joys
of Heaven."

And when he had said this he closed the door. Juan's soul was not
able to enter Heaven.

When Juan had gone away, another soul arrived.

"Who are you? And why do you wish to come into Heaven? Did you get
married when you were still on earth?" asked the door-keeper.

The soul answered: "I am the soul of Andrs. I took a wife when I
was yet on earth. Open the gate for I want to come in."

At once Saint Peter opened the gate of Heaven, and when he saw the
soul of Andrs he said: "Oh, pitiable soul! For such as you the joys
of Heaven are reserved and fitting. Enter!"

The soul of Andrs was overjoyed and entered the abode of bliss.

When the door was closed there was another knock.

"Who are you?" the keeper asked again.

"I am the soul of Mariano," answered the one who had knocked.

"Why have you come here? Why do you think that you deserve to partake
of Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?"

To these questions the soul of Mariano answered: "When I was still
on earth I often had masses said. Half of my wealth I gave to the
Church for the saying of masses and the ringing of bells. The candles
I offered up could not be drawn by three carabao, and as to getting
married," continued the soul, "I was married twice. I became a widower
and married again."

"I am very sorry that I am not able to let you in. There is no place
for madmen like you in the Kingdom of Heaven."

And he closed the door.





23. JUAN THE CANOER.

One day a Spaniard was having Juan ferry him across the river
in his canoe. The Spaniard, Juan's fare, was able to speak
Tagalog. Accordingly, while they were still far from shore, he began
a conversation with Juan.

This Spaniard was a learned man, no doubt a famous scholar in Spain,
and this showed itself in his discourse to Juan regarding geography,
arithmetic, and various languages of Europe.

When his discourse was ended, he asked Juan: "Have you studied
geography?"

"No, sir," answered Juan,--and in truth, Juan had no education,
for he had grown up in poverty, so that his life at all times was
nothing but ceaseless work.

The Spaniard was astonished at Juan's answer and said at once: "I
am sorry, friend, that you do not know geography, for in consequence
half your life, as it were, is lost."

Juan did not utter a word, and kept on paddling.

It was not long before the Spaniard again asked: "Have you studied
arithmetic?"

"No, sir," answered Juan.

"If that is the case, friend, a fourth of your life is lost to you,
as it were."

Juan became a little frightened, for he could not make out what the
Spaniard was trying to say.

He said to himself: "You poor fellow, Juan, only a fourth of your
life is left now."

When their canoe had got to a deep part of the river, and while
the Spaniard was reflecting upon the great ignorance of the working
people in the Philippines, Juan asked his passenger this question:
"Do you know how to swim, sir?"

"No," answered the Spaniard at once.

"In that case," answered Juan, "you have lost your whole life, not
only as it were, but you have lost it in all truth."

And while he spoke these words he tipped over the canoe they were
riding in. Juan swam to the shore, but the Spaniard was carried away
by the stream.





24. KINDNESS TO ANIMALS.

One dark night Juan was walking in some forests far from any towns. He
was on his way to his home town. Before he could arrive there, he had
to pass through some uncanny places. One night, when he was walking
in such a place, he was suddenly startled by the arrival of a black
cat which purred and scratched at his leg. What he did was to kick
the cat with all his might, and it was tossed a good distance. He
kept on walking, but it was not long before the cat came back to
him. His anger greatly increased, and he kicked the cat again. He
thought that this cat was the plaything of some goblin or vampire. He
kept on walking. It was not long before the black cat again came back
to him. This time, instead of kicking the cat, he took hold of it,
lifted it up on his arm, stroked it and patted it, and said to it:
"Good little cat, what do you want? Are you going to come along with
me on my journey?" and he continued walking.

After a while he was attacked by sleepiness. He saw a house by
the way, but the people in his town believed that this house was
enchanted. However, Juan had no other place to sleep, so he entered
the house to sleep there.

He fell sound asleep, but at midnight he was awakened by the pattering
of rats. He set about kicking and striking at the rats to kill them
or drive them away. But the rats became more and more numerous until
the room became full and they bit him and gnawed at him.

It was then that Juan took his black cat and told it to kill the
rats. The cat miewed and began to chase the rats. Great fear seized
the rats, and those that were not killed by the cat ran to their
holes. When Juan saw that there were no rats left except only a single
pair, he stopped the cat. He caught the two rats and petted them and
decided to take them along on his journey, just like the cat.

On the next day he continued his journey. He was overtaken by night
in a place where there were no houses, so he walked on toward a house
owned by a certain old man. Now it happened that this old man was an
enchanter. He took Juan in and gave him an alcove to sleep in. Juan
went to sleep without suspecting anything.

However, when he woke up on the next day, he was surprised and
frightened when he saw that he was locked up in a box without any
opening. He kicked at the walls of the box, but was not able to do
anything: he could not open it. Great was his despair, and he did not
know what to do, when he remembered that he had a cat and two rats with
him in his prison. He took the two rats, petted them, and told them to
make a hole in the box in which they were confined. The rats began to
gnaw at the boards, and gradually they succeeded in making a hole in
the thick board, until it was pierced through. When they had pierced
it, they returned to Juan, and Juan had them again pierce the wall
of the prison. When they had made holes again and again, they finally
succeeded in making a large opening, and Juan was able to escape.

Juan looked for the old man, but did not find him anywhere. So he
continued on his way home, and when he arrived there, he told of
the great service which had been done him by his three friends,
a cat and two rats.





25. JUAN THE SCULPTOR.

I once read, in a Spanish novel entitled La tumba de hierro, the
following story:

Juan was a child of five years, the son of a workman of the wealthy
Andrs. Juan was dumb from birth, but not deaf. Moreover, his dumbness
was not complete, for often he was able to cry out, though his voice
was not like that of a normal child.

One evening Andrs visited the house of his workman, Juan's father,
and on this visit he brought along his daughter, who also was five
years old. In spite of his dumbness, Juan made friends with his
master's child, and the two played together while their fathers were
discussing matters of farming. He showed Maria (this was the name of
his playmate) his toys, which he had made by his own hand and skill.

His toys were all kinds of faces of people which he had made, and
they were made of clay. There were also many whole figures of people
in all kinds of positions. Some were planting, some were dancing,
some were lying down, and there were also some wrestling, running,
and in many other positions. He also had animals; some were made of
clay and others were made of wood.

The two children became good friends and were engrossed in play. When
their fathers had finished their conversation, Andrs called Maria
to go home, but Maria first asked her father to come to where Juan's
toys were, so that he might see them. When Andrs beheld the toys, he
was astonished at the great ability shown by the one who had shaped
these manikins. Andrs told Juan's father that Juan was gifted and
ought to be sent to school. But Juan's father answered that he had
no money with which to let Juan study.

"In that case," said Andrs, "I will pay the teacher. Tomorrow Maria's
teacher is coming to our house. I shall have him go on here to you,
to begin the teaching of Juan and the opening up of his mind."

Juan's father thanked him profusely, and they parted. Juan was very
sorry when his playmate left.

From that day on Maria's father often sent for Juan that he might
play with Maria there in his house.

One afternoon when the two were playing in the garden in the wide
grounds of Andrs, a butterfly came flying past the two children. They
ran after it. Maria ran ahead and Juan followed. As they were running,
Maria fell into a shallow pool which Andrs used as a fishpond. Juan
gave a loud cry, and, as he cried out, a muscle in his throat broke
and his mouth bled. He paid no attention to this and jumped into the
pool to save Maria from drowning. As the pool was shallow, the two
children did not drown, only Maria was filled with great fear, which
caused her to faint while still in the water. So what Juan did was to
take hold of Maria by her back and lift her up, so that she should
not swallow any water,--he himself meanwhile being immersed. They
were in this position when a servant of Andrs came upon them and
rescued them from the pool.

Great was the surprise of Andrs and great was the joy which came
to Juan's father, when they heard Juan talk and tell them what had
happened. What with Juan's talking, his progress in his studies became
much greater and his friendship with Maria grew much stronger.

There came the day when his teacher said that he ought to go to another
town to continue his studies, for he could teach him nothing more. He
told this also to Andrs. Andrs sent Juan to a school for sculptors,
and there he studied for about six years.

Juan and Maria grew up and their friendship turned into love. Every
vacation Juan went home to their house on Andrs' estate, and there
he passed the days at Maria's side.

There came a day for the exhibition of the sculptures of the artists,
and Juan had planned a design which he was going to carry out for that
day. The victor among the contestants was to be given a prize that
was to be accompanied by much money, in addition to a celebration in
honor of the winner. For about a year Juan worked at his composition.

The day for presenting the statues arrived. Juan, his father, Andrs,
and Maria went to the building where the statues were. Many people
were there, but they were all crowding round Juan's statue. Andrs
did not know what to say in his admiration. The hour came when the
judges announced who was the winner, and Juan's statue was that named
as having won the prize.

It was a group with a standing woman. Her left hand held a torch and
her right a crown of leaves. At the right of the woman and under the
crown of olive a youth was kneeling on his right foot. In his left
hand he was holding a book, and in his right a hammer. At their feet
lay scattered various implements of a student.

On the way home the two lovers revealed their secret to their
parents. Juan's father was merely grieved, for he knew that the
marriage of the two was not possible, for their position was like
that of a slave or thrall and a lord or king. When Andrs learned of
the matter, he was filled with great anger. He had Juan called to him
and scolded him. He told him he was shameless and did not know how to
appreciate favors,--did not know how to repay the man who had given him
his education, and told him that he could not marry Maria. Accordingly
Juan at once went away without anyone's knowing his destination.

Five or six years passed, and Juan at his sculpture did not forget
Maria.

Maria passed these six years in her house. She was sunk at all times
in a deep grief, and it was always Juan of whom she was thinking. Maria
fell seriously ill and was near to death.

Her physician advised Andrs that, if he wanted to save his daughter,
he would have to follow her desire regarding marriage to Juan. But
when Andrs consented, it was already too late. Maria's sickness went
from bad to worse, and he did not even know where Juan was. He sent
many messengers to the large towns to look for Juan, but even when
many days had passed, not one of them had succeeded in finding Juan.

At last one of them came upon him in the town of Kamalig in his
workshop. When he was told that he was being sent for by Andrs that
he and Maria might be married, his joy was very great. But he was also
much afraid that he might not find his loved one alive. He went home
with all possible speed, and when he arrived at the house of Andrs,
he found there the body of Maria, mere bone and skin, stretched out
on her couch. That very moment Andrs sent for a priest, and Juan and
Maria were married. While the marriage-ceremony was being performed
by the priest, Maria's breath ceased. When they were married, Juan
had but time to kiss his wife before her breath left her, her face
glad and her mouth smiling.





26. MARQUITA.

Marquita was a good and beautiful young woman, but poor. She was
betrothed to a man who also was poor, but had a position with the
Government in Manila and received good pay.

Marquita had a rich neighbor. His house was of wood, with an iron
roof, and his estate was large. This neighbor had a great liking for
Marquita, but we cannot say whether his love was true, for he had a
screw loose. He paid every attention to Marquita, but Marquita was
not a girl of fickle heart and paid no heed to all his attentions.

So great was the desire of this suitor to win Marquita that he
decided to employ force. One afternoon he went into the yard of
Marquita's family and hid in a banana-tree. It happened that on this
afternoon Marquita's yard was dirty. Accordingly she went and swept the
yard. When she came near the banana-tree in which the man was hiding,
he suddenly dropped down, seized her by the hand and kissed her.

As you know, among reputable people in our country a single kiss is
a great stain on a girl's honor. Therefore, when Marquita came into
the house weeping and her parents found out that she had been roughly
handled or kissed by this man, they decided that there was no other way
of covering up this disgrace than marrying their daughter Marquita to
this man. No matter how much Marquita objected, and although they knew
that she had a sweetheart, they nevertheless prepared for the marriage.

Marquita was a daughter very obedient to her parents, so she could
not actually disobey them now. All she did was to write her betrothed
what had happened and what was going to happen and to tell him that
her coming marriage was only an act of obedience to her parents, and
that she loved only him. To her parents Marquita said that they would
get no joy from her, for her marriage to the man whom she abhorred
would soon be the death of her.

They were married. It was not long before Marquita was stricken with
fever. From the day of her marriage she was not able to eat anything,
and she shed tears day and night. The skilful physicians of the town,
all the wealth of her husband, and all the prayers of her parents,
failed to save her from death. Seven days after her wedding she
died. This caused much grief to her former betrothed and contributed
to his misfortune in his later life.





27. THE IGNORANT PRIEST.

To the town of Baliwag there was once assigned a priest who had no
education whatever. The people surmised that he was only a grass-cutter
in Spain, who had been cast hither by chance and assigned as priest
to their town so that he might have some income and so be saved from
dying of hunger. Every Sunday he said mass, but those who heard the
mass could hear nothing from him, except only the word "Mass, mass,
mass," and so on. He would walk round in front of the altar; at times
he faced the people, brought his hands together, and, while making
all these movements, he would keep saying his "Mass, mass, mass,"
and so on.

The people got angry and reported him to the archbishop. The answer
of the archbishop was that he would come some Sunday and hear the
mass to see if their accusation was really true.

The archbishop arrived. The priest told him that he was not able to
perform mass, because the silly people all left the church as soon
as he began mass.

"Tomorrow," he added, "you will see how they all run away as soon as
I give the blessing."

The next day was Sunday and at his mass the archbishop was to be
present. He planned a way of saving himself. Accordingly, before
beginning the mass, he caused some oil to boil. While he was putting
on his vestments the people and the archbishop were seated in the
church. The archbishop was near the altar, and, while the priest
was putting on his vestments, the oil was boiling. When he had put
on his vestments, he poured the boiling oil into the vessel for holy
water. It was his custom to give the blessing before saying mass, so,
when he entered the church, he sprinkled the boiling oil on the people
instead of holy-water. The people, struck by the drops of hot oil,
all jumped up and ran with all their might out of the church. When the
archbishop saw this, he did not have the mass gone on with on that day,
for there was not a single one of the people left in the church.

The archbishop said to the priest that he would not have to leave
the town and that hereafter he would not heed any accusation that
the people made.





28. THE CONFESSIONAL.

Father Mundo was the priest assigned for some years to the town of
Mariquina. He was a man who liked amusements. He was never deficient
in the fulfilment of his duties. Every day he said mass, and on Sunday
he said mass twice. Also, he christened children, said blessings over
the dead, carried the sacrament, heard confession, and gave holy
communion. He performed all his duties well, but the confessing he
overdid a little. From his point of view this was perhaps useful in
lessening the sins of those whom he confessed, but for some of the
latter it had its bad side.

Once there was a young woman who was fond of going to church and to
confession. When this young woman reached the age of twenty years,
she abandoned the pious duty of going to confession, and also went
to church but rarely. Once when this woman was questioned, she spoke
as follows:

"At first I really thought that Father Mundo was a saint, but now the
people realize that he is a horrid man. At flood-time, when the people
are all canoeing on the flood, he rides along in the women's canoe,
and not with the men. In the morning, after saying mass, he is seen
squatting in his courtyard with his vestments trailing on the ground,
petting fighting-cocks, in company with the other cock-fighters.

"At first I often confessed to him, but there came a day when
the things he asked me in the confessional were nothing but
foolishness. Was it right for him to ask me how many suitors I had,
whom I liked, and where I met them? What I thought was that this priest
was extremely impudent. So I left him at once in the confessional,
and since that time I have not been going to confession."





29. JUAN THE JOKER.

Juan was a man given to doing nonsensical things, but he did not do
them intentionally to anger his fellow-men; it was merely his natural
habit, prompted by his character.

Once he went to the festival of a certain town. He was carrying three
young pigs to sell in the town. When he got there, he saw many people
gathered in the courtyard of the church and listening to a speech
which the mayor of the town was delivering. The people stood in a dense
crowd, but he succeeded in getting close to the foot of the platform
on which the orator was standing. While he took part in the crowding,
the three pigs kept squealing. When he had arrived in front of the
mayor, he held his hand over their mouths to make them keep quiet,
but he did not succeed. The mayor took notice of the squealing of
the pigs and looked round to see who had brought the pigs there.

When he saw Juan he addressed him as follows: "Juan! What do you mean
by making your pigs squeal here? Get out of here at once and never
again dare to set foot on the ground of Bustos!"

Juan departed and went home to his town of San Ildefonso. A year
passed, and the festival in the town of Bustos came round again. Juan
wanted to go there, but he remembered that the mayor of that town had
threatened him that, if he were seen again on the ground of Bustos,
he would have him imprisoned and tortured. Juan thought of a way of
going there none the less.

When the festival arrived, there was a high mass, which was attended by
thousands of people. Juan was one of these people, and he it was whom
all the people were watching, owing to the manner of his appearance
there in the church. It was not long before one of the people who
were watching him complained to the mayor, saying that Juan was in
the church mounted on a wagon drawn by carabao, and that the whole
thing, wagon, carabao, and Juan, was inside the church. Juan had not
got down from the wagon on which he was standing.

The mayor went to the church to arrest Juan. When he got there he said:
"Juan! Follow me, I am going to imprison you. Didn't I tell you not
to set foot on the ground of Bustos?"

But Juan answered: "Mr. Mayor! You certainly did tell me that. That
is why I cannot get out of my wagon. Do you see this earth, sir, with
which my wagon is loaded and on which I am standing? This is not the
ground of Bustos, sir, but earth of San Ildefonso. I got this earth
in my town."

When Juan had said this, the mayor could not restrain his laughter
and only said to himself that he could do nothing to Juan, for the
latter was in the right.





30. THE THREE THIEVES.

Juan, Andrs, and Diego were three expert thieves. They were
very famous, and many people were trying to catch them, but their
cleverness at dodging and stealing kept them from being caught. The
three once made an appointment to meet at a certain quiet and secret
place to discuss their means of livelihood and new good methods of
thievery. Not one of them had an honest trade. This had been their
mode of life from childhood on, so they had become skilful and very
clever at this activity.

When the day of their meeting came, they were there already at
dawn. Each one of them had much to tell, and, as they were all talking
at once, their stories were indistinguishable.

Juan asked of Diego: "How skilled are you now at your work?"

"In my opinion," answered Diego, "I am the most skilful of us three,
for I am able to steal the eggs a hen is brooding on without its
knowing it. And not only this," he continued, "I am able to rob wild
animals of their young without their noticing it."

"Is that all your skill?" Andrs quickly interrupted, "I am able to
rob animals and men too. I have stolen all of people's jewelry that I
wanted to steal, whether the owner was asleep or up and about. Once
I stole a ring that the owner was sleeping on to keep it from being
stolen,--but I stole it without his noticing."

"Is that all the skill you two have?" asked Juan. "The things you
do don't come halfway up to my skill at stealing. I can steal people
themselves, and not only their property."

The two he was talking to were surprised, for they did not think
that a live man could be stolen without his knowing it, and, to test
Juan's ability, the two made a bet with Juan. They told him to steal
the priest of the town and to bring him to the place where they now
were. If he succeeded in doing this, Andrs and Diego would pay him
five hundred pesos. But if he could not do it, he was to pay Andrs
and Diego one hundred pesos. Juan agreed to this bet, and they parted.

Juan went to the town and found out by inquiry where the priest
lived. When he had found this out, he figured out the plan he would
pursue in stealing the priest. He entered the priest's household as
a servant. During his stay as a servant he became acquainted with the
habits of the priest. One of his habits, from which he never deviated,
was praying a rosary before the image of a saint. The image was made of
wood, and it represented Saint John. The size of this image was equal
to that of a man. Juan had a carver make an image just like this one,
but with an opening, and hollow inside. This opening inside the body
of the image of the saint was such that a man could enter it. When
the image which Juan had had made was ready, he replaced with it the
image of Saint John which belonged to the priest.

One afternoon before prayers he took a rice-sack and went into the
inside of the saint he had had made. When the priest had eaten supper
he went into the room in which he prayed, to say a rosary. When he
was halfway through his prayers, and just about as Juan was getting
tired of standing up, the latter spoke: "Cease your praying, Father
Lucas. I have been sent here to conduct you to Heaven."

At first the priest was filled with fear, but then he thought that his
saint was doing a miracle and was really calling for him in order to
take him to Heaven. As he did not say anything, Juan again spoke as
follows: "Many are the works of piety which you have done. You have
been patient in living a lowly life, therefore all the joys of Heaven
have been reserved for you. Come with me, and I shall conduct you."

The priest answered: "How shall I manage to come with you? I am old
and cannot walk from here on earth as far as Heaven."

Juan answered: "Never you mind that, I have a bag here. Get into it
and I will carry you on my way to Heaven."

When he had said this, he spread out the rice-sack. When the priest
had got into it, Juan tied the bag tightly. He got out from inside
the image and carried Father Lucas on his shoulder toward the house
where he had his appointment with his two friends. Father Lucas
really believed that he was going to Heaven, and so he staid still
in the sack.

However, when Juan was wading through a shallow river, it occurred to
him that he was being fooled and that they were not going to Heaven
at all.

Therefore he asked Juan: "What river is this, and why must we cross
a river on the way to Heaven?"

Juan answered: "Shhh! Don't make any noise! This is the river Jordan."

The priest desisted from speaking. Juan kept on walking. When he was
already going up into the house that was their place of meeting,
the priest was again surprised and again asked: "What stairway is
this? Is this the way the staircase of Heaven looks?"

"I have told you already that you must not make any noise," answered
Juan, "This is the stairway that leads to Heaven."

When they had come up into the house, they were met by Diego and
Andrs. Juan dropped his burden and said to them: "I have brought here
what you told me to steal. Have you brought the five hundred pesos?"

The other two did not believe him at once. So what they did was to
make a hole in the bag and peep at the contents. In it they saw the
head of the priest with the tonsure. Accordingly they handed Juan
the five hundred pesos and they all quickly left the house. They
abandoned the priest, leaving him to get free as best he could.





31. HOW MONKEYS ARE CAUGHT.

In the jungle one not rarely meets with large herds of monkeys. When
the one who comes into their haunts is unarmed, there is danger of
their killing the man whom they overpower by their numbers. When angry,
they climb down from the trees and all bite at the man who is in their
power. Therefore a man who is going into jungles where there are many
monkeys will not neglect to carry a gun. When the monkeys hear the
noise of the gun, they are unafraid. Most of them do not run away,
but look at the place where the noise and smoke come from. Those
who are reached by a bullet try to ward it off with their hand, like
one who is warding off a mere throw. Therefore, when they are shot,
their palms too are pierced by the bullet.

Not infrequently people catch live monkeys, so as to domesticate
them and sell them to the various foreigners who come to the
Philippines. The catching of live monkeys does not involve much labor,
for the method of catching them is simply to trick them.

When one wants to catch monkeys, one usually cooks or has cooked
some sweetmeats, and into these one mixes or has mixed some
balasing. Balasing is the seed of a plant which intoxicates or puts
into a deep sleep the animals which eat it. It is used also in
catching fish in rivers. When these sweetmeats have been cooked,
the man carries them to where the herd of monkeys is. However,
if he should place it carefully on the ground, the monkeys would
not climb down to eat it. They suspect that these sweetmeats are
only a bait for them, that they may be caught or killed. Therefore
what the man does is to pretend that he is frightened and when he
sees the monkeys, he starts running, carrying on his head the tray
of drugged sweetmeats. While running he pretends to take a fall on
his face, so that the sweetmeats he is carrying on his head fall
down and are scattered over the ground. When this happens, he keeps
on running just the same, and hides somewhere or other to watch the
monkeys eat. When the monkeys see the man running away, and when he
is hidden, they climb down from the trees and all start grabbing the
sweetmeats. They all crowd on top of one another in their greed, and
the noise is very great, for each herd of monkeys is about five hundred
or a thousand strong. When they have eaten it is not long before they
are attacked by sleepiness. They get weak and cannot climb into the
trees. It is a laughable sight to see these monkeys, old and young,
squatting on the ground and nodding, everyone of them. The ones who
did not succeed in grabbing any sweetmeats climb up into the trees
and look down at their drunken companions. When the monkeys are in
this state, and not before, does the man who is hidden come up and
take the sleeping monkeys one by one. The effect of the drug is not
of long duration, and the monkeys get well after a few days.

Another common way of catching monkeys is to use cocoanuts as bait. A
hole is made in an unopened cocoanut. The size of this hole is just
large enough for a monkey to put in his hand when it is not holding
anything. Inside the cocoanut-shell is placed a piece of the meat
of the cocoanut, and the whole thing is placed in a spot where there
are monkeys. Monkeys like cocoanut, and when they see it, they grasp
the meat that is inside the shell. But when they have hold of the
cocoanut-meat, they can no longer take their hand out through the
opening, but they will not let go of the cocoanut-meat. Consequently
they are as though in stocks, and when the man who is catching them
approaches, they cannot get away, for the cocoanuts are heavy and
sometimes are weighted in addition. So when the catcher comes up,
he is able without difficulty to capture the handcuffed monkeys,
grown or young.





32. THE FESTIVAL OF SAINT JOHN.

The twenty-fourth of June is the festival of Saint John, and it is
celebrated in the various towns of the province of Bulacn. In the
month of June there is usually rain and mud. The people believe that
Saint John is the saint who makes the rain fall, and therefore is fond
of water and mud. Hence the celebrations performed on his day are
very different from those performed on the days of other saints. In
the towns near the sea there are floods in the month of June and the
water comes up into the town. In the towns farther from the sea it is
also very rainy, and usually these floods and rains fall on the day of
Saint John. The people who take part in the celebration get themselves
drenched in the flood or in the rain. In the towns of Malolos and
Hagnoy, when this holiday falls into a time of large flood, almost
all the people get into the water or else go canoeing. If there is no
flood, the people walk about in the rain. Many people from the country
and the suburbs go about collecting alms on this holiday. Most of them
are boys or young men; rarely are there any women. In separate groups
they go about collecting alms, and each group has with it a band that
plays on bamboo instruments. Those who do not play are supposed to
have the task of singing or dancing. All of them are almost without
clothing, like Igorots, but their whole body, from head to foot,
including even the eyes and ears, is caked over with mud.

These groups go calling from house to house. They stop in front of a
house and there they play music or sing or dance. They usually sing
about the life of Saint John or of some other saint who was a friend of
his. While their music is playing, their order is in single file in a
circle, sometimes standing, sometimes squatting or kneeling. When there
is a singer or dancer, he is within the circle of musicians and there
performs his singing or dancing. After two or three pieces of music,
songs, or dances they stop and all go round asking alms of the people
who are watching them. If they receive no alms, they take mud from
their body and throw it at the stingy people. They spend the whole
day in such celebration. As these alms-gatherers are very numerous,
they help to make the town gay, even though it is very rainy.

When there is canoeing it is not uncommon for people to get
drowned. Consequently this custom is gradually disappearing. Moreover,
in these days people are getting stingy and rarely give alms. Hence
the gatherers of alms on the festival of Saint John are gradually
disappearing.





33. FAMILY CELEBRATIONS AFTER A DEATH.

A family that has suffered a loss by death suffers not only in its
mind and soul, but also in its purse. This is on account of the great
expense borne by the bereaved ones in conforming with various customs.

On the day when someone has died very many people call on his
family, and these visitors do not content themselves with condoling
with the dead person's family, but make a long stay in the house of
mourning. Consequently the bereaved family is compelled to serve food
to the visitors. Usually the dead person is not buried at once, but
is first placed in state for two or three days from the time when he
ceased to breathe. During these days people's visits stop neither by
day nor by night. Most of them are relatives and others are friends,
neighbors, and other acquaintances in town. If the deceased had
many friends or relatives in other towns, they too come to visit,
and they have to be given board and lodging by the dead person's
family. This is because in the small towns in the provinces there
are no hotels. In feeding all these guests they often use up half
a cow, several sheep and goats, and innumerable chickens. The chef
is usually hired, and the near relatives of the deceased help with
the cooking. For this reason in the house of death the place where
the deceased is lying in state is very quiet, and even when many
people are there, when they talk it is only in whispers. But in
the dining-room and kitchen the noise is extraordinary. Everyone
is giving orders to the servants, some are washing dishes or pots,
some are polishing knives and forks, some are serving at the table,
and so on. In the kitchen the sputtering of the frying-pans never
stops, and one can hear only the voices of the chef and his assistants.

But in one chamber of the house stays the immediate family of the
deceased and is plunged in grief. They all cry as hard as they can
and from time to time blurt out questions as to what will happen to
them because of the departure of the one who has died.

If the deceased is wealthy, a priest comes to get him and escorts
him to the church. Arriving at the church, the body is blessed by the
priest and after this the priest escorts it also to the cemetery. All
the visitors are present at the burial, and usually they ride in
carriages. These carriages are hired, except for a few which belong
to some of the visitors.

When the dead has been buried the guests who come from other towns
go along back to the house of mourning. Most commonly they soon
depart, but sometimes they stay three days, to take part in the
Three Nights' Celebration. The Three Nights are celebrated in the
house of the deceased. At this time the relatives call and all pray
together. In this praying only the older people take part, and the
young men and young women tell each other riddles. These ceremonies
are performed during the Three Nights. On the last night there are
usually many people, and the entertaining is more elaborate than on
the two preceding nights. Many of those who come give presents to
the bereaved ones. Usually these are things to eat for the guests.

In poor families these ceremonies are also performed, but the priest's
calling for and escorting the corpse does not take place. For the
blessing of the corpse one may pay the priest whatever one desires. The
cheapest thing is the blessing of the corpse at the door of the church
and placed on the ground. The next in order is the blessing of the
corpse also at the door of the church, but with the coffin placed
on an altar. The most expensive blessings are performed right by the
altar. The price of these is from one-hundred to five-hundred pesos.





34. FLEEING FROM THE AMERICANS.

The people of San Miguel were like herds of animals fleeing before the
whips of the herdsmen and the pursuit of savage dogs. They are very
fond of peace and quiet. Also they are very credulous toward hearsay,
and these circumstances are what did not allow most of them to stay
at ease in the town during the time of the revolutions against the
Spaniards and the Americans. It is also true, however, that many of
them ran away merely from fright or cowardice.

When the revolution against the Spaniards of the year 1896 took place,
I was only four years old. According to what my mother has told me,
we went to Manila instead of going up into the mountains. I do not
remember much of what happened at that time, except the fact that
we went to the railroad station. When we arrived at Manila we were
not able to enter the city unless we had a permit from an official
of this city.

The next thing which has become fixed in my memory is our stay in
Biga, in the house of an attorney, whose name was Don Nasario. We went
to this town to escape the fighting of the forces of the Katipunan
and the Spaniards in Manila. In Biga were Tagalog soldiers drilling
to take part in the fighting.

A little later we went to the town of Bustos. This town also was at
that time in the hands of the Katipunan. This town is very pretty
because of the various aspect of the things one sees. The river is
very broad, the banks are wide, and on the banks are hills of stone
and sand. The friends with whom we stayed were kind people. They
often played with my sister and me, and the game was to make ducks
dive in the clear waters of the river.

What took place in the fighting of those times I did not find out,
for I was still small and had not yet any understanding.

When the flight from the Americans came, I was already a little older,
and I remember much of our flight to the mountains. When the Americans
had defeated the soldiers of Aguinaldo the people of San Miguel
were filled with terror. The report circulated in the town that the
Americans were wild people, cruel and fierce, and without respect for
anything. This no doubt was a rumor which the Spaniards caused to be
spread, and especially the Spanish priests in the Philippines. Owing
to people's fear of the Americans, almost all of us townspeople packed
up our belongings and went up into the mountains. We were living at
that time in the house of an aunt of my mother's, and there dwelt
with us also the family of my mother's oldest brother. I remember
that the packing and hauling of the goods of all of us who lived in
the house took more than ten days. The wagons laden with our goods
were despatched at night, so that the carabao that drew them should
not get exhausted in the heat of the sun. The wagons were filled up
to the top of the covering, and the carabao were much wearied by the
drawing of the heavy loads. When no belongings of ours were left,
we ourselves got into the wagon to be carried to the mountains.

The place we went to was called Paang-Bundc, half a day's walk from
Sibul Springs. The dwelling we came to there was a mere hut with a
roof of cugon-grass, and very small. The floor consisted of branches
of trees with the twigs cut off, but not smooth or even. It was very
small and was penetrated by wind and cold. Such was the place we lived
in for several months, instead of the frame house of my mother's aunt.

There in Paang-Bundc there came to us many fellow-townspeople who
were also fleeing, and the last comers reported that all the people
of the town were by now in the mountains, or at any rate gone, and
only the houses were left.

After several months' stay at Paang-Bundc we went from there to a
secret place. This place was a clearing in the jungle. Not one of
us was allowed to know the name of the place, and those who knew it
kept it very secret, so that our hiding-place should not be known by
any outsider. This was a way of escaping not only the enemy, but also
robbers and thieves. The house we lived in there was very large, a very
long building, all under one roof. The building was cut up into rooms
of equal size. The number of these was about eight. In each room one
family lived. Here too we were compelled to stay for several months.

When the Americans were already near the town of San Miguel, it was
reported to us that these people were not as hearsay described them, so
that our fear of them gradually gave way. Accordingly we left our deep
concealment and went to Paho. This too is a place in the mountains,
but nearer to the town. There we were met by many fellow-townsmen
and people from various other places. Most of them were sick from
staying in the mountains. Here the medicines which Mother had taken up
into the mountains instead of leaving them in the town, were of great
use. These medicines belonged to Father; he had left them behind when
he was banished to Sulu by the Spanish priests. One morning someone
called at our house to buy some medicine. Mother went to the chest in
which the medicine lay. When it was opened, we saw a snake coiled up
and sleeping on the rice-hulls that covered the bottles. The people
who saw this rejoiced greatly, but Mother was only frightened. She
did not know the meaning of the snake. When the rejoicing was over,
Mother asked why they were all so glad. They answered that the
meaning of the snake was that the owner of the medicine was going
to get rich. Mother only laughed at what they said, for she did not
believe in these things.

After a few months we left Paho and went home to our town. When we got
there, most of the few belongings we had left there had been stolen
by the few people who had been left in the town. The boards of the
flooring of the house of Mother's aunt were gone, and they did not
know who had taken them.

Not long after our arrival in town it was reported that the American
soldiers were now near to the town of San Miguel. We were not made
uneasy by this news, and awaited their arrival. One noon the town was
quiet. The soldiers who were in the town went away and those who did
not go away threw away their guns. The reason for this was the entry
of the American soldiers. From the back yard of the house in which
we were living I saw the approach of the soldiers. Their trousers
were khaki and their shirts blue. They carried their guns and ran in
single file across the fields and came toward the road.

When the Americans were in possession of the town, orders for some
months were strict. Lights were ordered extinguished at six o'clock
in the evening, and no one was allowed to walk about after this
hour. In the mountains near San Miguel were many Tagalog soldiers,
and they often attacked the town of San Miguel. On account of these
attacks the Americans set fire to houses in San Miguel. Night after
night when the soldiers attacked, the houses were regularly set fire
to. Our neighbors came to us every night to sleep with us, because in
our house the danger from the bullets of the contestants was not so
great. The doctor of the American soldiers who were in the town of
San Miguel had become a friend of my father's, and for this reason
our house escaped being burned. Once this doctor told Father that
he often accompanied the patrols and told them not to burn down our
house. Finally, as the Tagalog soldiers did not succeed in driving
the Americans out of the town, they stopped their attacks, and the
town became quiet.









II. GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS.


Note.--The following grammatical analysis of Mr. Santiago's speech
can, of course, lay no claim to completeness: he surely uses some
constructions and very many forms which I have not heard or have
failed to note. Such fulness as will be found is due to Mr. Santiago's
intelligence and patience under questioning and in conversation. A
very few of the examples represent his form of sentences in MacKinlay's
Handbook. The full representation of derivatives of the root ptol cut
is due to Mr. Santiago's kindness in listing these forms, wherever they
seemed possible to his speech-feeling, in accordance with my list of
morphologic elements, and in then forming sentences to illustrate them.

In the use of accent-marks and of the symbol y I have deviated from the
practice of the International Phonetic Association. Where roots did
not occur as independent words, I have prefixed a hyphen and given a
theoretical meaning. In the explanation of constructions I have allowed
myself the use of distorted English; although this time-honored device
does not really reproduce the foreign expression (substituting, as
it does, impossible constructions for natural ones), it does enable
the reader to follow the general trend of the foreign idiom.





A. PHONETICS.

1. Distinctive sounds.

1. The distinctive sounds are the following:


                        Labial   Dental   Palatal   Velar    Laryngeal

  Stops: unvoiced          p        t                 k          `
  Stops: voiced            b        d                 g
  Spirants (unvoiced)               s                            h
  Nasals (voiced)          m        n                 ng
  Trill (voiced)                    r
  Lateral (voiced)                  l

  High vowels                    i(e,y)             u(o,w)
  Low vowel                               a


2. a is a low unrounded vowel, as in Standard English far, but more
tense and with the corners of the mouth (lips) slightly drawn back:
hlamann garden.

3. i and u, in what may be regarded as the normal form, are about
as high as the Standard (American) English vowels in pit and put,
but more tense; moreover, the lips are well drawn back for i and well
rounded for u: nit heat, lutin be cooked.

4. In the final syllable of a phrase (or of a word spoken alone)
the tongue position of i and u is as a rule lowered, often all the
way to mid position; the tenseness and lip position are, however,
kept, so that the resulting sound often resembles French  and lower o.

5. u is nearly always so lowered: bgo new, buhk hair. It is not
lowered in p` ten.

6. i is not lowered before dentals: khit though, kin my, pgil
compulsion. It is usually kept high also before velars: sahg flooring,
singsng ring. Some words ending in velars more or less regularly
have the lowering: ptik, ptek mud; so especially some proper names:
Intsk Chinese, Lleng Lola.

Even in other cases the higher variants of i are commoner than the
lower; hind` not, kam we, gab night, mul` again are commoner
than these words with e; a very few words, such as ul` again have
oftener e than i; others, such as itm black are fairly regular in
their variation.

7. Within a closely unified phrase the lowering is as a rule omitted:
ul sya again he (ul`), Hint na! Stop! (hint`). In this regard the
habits are variable; the form chosen depends mostly on the speaker's
momentary attitude toward the closeness of joining of the words.

A dissimilative factor also seems to be involved: a following i or
u favors the lowering:

Nattlug ang so. The dog is sleeping.

Nattlog si Hwn. Juan is sleeping.

8. o occurs in a number of words as the vowel in the last two
syllables: in all of them the intervening consonant is the glottal
stop: `o yes, do`n there; bo`` whole has occasionally bu``. The
raised variant is not used within the phrase: `o p`. Yes, sir. Yes,
ma'am. do`n sya there he.

e occurs in the same way in le`g neck, beside li`g.

9. In word-formation, when, by the addition of suffixes, the i or u is
no longer final, it is not lowered: lto` cook, lutin be cooked; itm
black, itimn be made black. Occasionally, however, the lowered vowel
is retained: to human being, ka-ta-han mankind, beside katahan,
tao-ta-han manikin, pupil of the eye, beside tautahan.

The words with o`o ( 8) keep the lowered vowel when uncontracted:
pina-ro`on-n was gone to (do`n there); these words are also
reduplicated with o: kin-d-ro`on-n is been in.

10. e and o occur also in unassimilated loan-words: bsbol baseball,
Sil y nag-b-bsbol, They are playing baseball, estudiynte,
istudiynte student, pols, puls policeman, sipro football player,
bangkro canoer (both with Spanish suffix -ro added to Tagalog words:
spa` football, bangk` canoe).

For e see also  29.

11. As the variation between i and e and between o and u is thus never
distinctive, there is no need of indicating it in transcription; I
have, however, used the characters e and o wherever I heard markedly
lowered variants.

12. i and u occur also as non-syllabics; I use, respectively, the
characters y and w: yan that, gya like, wka` speech, word, twag
call. In final position they are always lowered: thus in paty dead
person, ikw thou, y represents non-syllabic e, w non-syllabic o.

13. In word-formation before suffixes vowels are in certain cases lost,
see Morphology: knin be eaten, -kin eat with suffix -in.

14. The laryngeal (glottal) stop occurs as a distinctive sound only
after a vowel at the end of words: bta` child, boy, girl, hind`
not, hint` stop.

As a non-distinctive sound it is used as a vowel-separator wherever
syllabic vowels follow each other without an intervening distinctive
non-syllabic. In this use I shall not indicate it in transcription, as
it may be taken for granted wherever vowels are written together. Such
words as those in  8 will therefore from now on be transcribed without
the sign for glottal stop: don, o, bo`. So to ( 9) means t`o,
etc. Cf. below.

15. The distinctive final glottal stop is usually lost before a
following word in the phrase: hind sya not he, Hint na! Stop!

It is always lost before the words ng, t, and y: ang bta ng mabat
the good child.

16. p, t, k are unvoiced fortis stops; they differ from the
corresponding English sounds primarily in that they are only slightly
aspirated. In sentence-final the implosion only is made.

t (in contrast with the English sound) is postdental, often near
to interdental.

k is always articulated in back velar position (as in English coo), no
matter what sound follows. The closure of k is occasionally imperfect,
so that a rather open velar spirant (resembling Slavic x) is heard:
malaxs for malaks strong; this variation has not been noted in
transcription.

In word-formation p, t, k alternate, respectively, with m, n, ng;
see Morphology.

17. b, d, g correspond in position to p, t, k. They are fully voiced
lenis stops; in sentence-final often implosive only, and then weakly
voiced.

The closure of b is occasionally imperfect, so that a bilabial spirant
is produced: tVig for tbig water; this variation has been ignored
in transcription.

In word-formation b alternates with m; see Morphology.

Final d in word-formation is always replaced by r before the vowel
of a suffix: lkad walk, lakar-n walking-party.

Initial d becomes r in the sentence frequently after the final vowel
of a preceding word and occasionally even after a final non-syllabic,
in the words dan hundred (not in dan road), dam, dw, dn, dne,
dto, diyn, don; e. g. ako rn I too.

In word-formation some words frequently change d to r after the vowel
of a prefix or a reduplication, and others do not: pa-ran means
(dan road, way), but i-pa-dal be sent (dal bring, carry). The
words (or roots) that have changeable d- are those mentioned in the
preceding paragraph and dan, -dka, damdm, dmi, dmot, dangl,
dap`, dpat, dti, -dtig, -datng, dikt, -ding, -dwang, -dkit,
-dum, dnong, dsa.

18. s is the normal unvoiced sibilant, spoken in postdental
position. Before y and iy it is somewhat palatalized (more, for
instance, than Russian palatalized s),--a variation that is not
distinctive and need not be noted in transcription: siy, sy he,
she, pronounced with palatalized s.

s alternates in word-formation with n; see Morphology.

In the affricate combination ts, which is felt and treated as a single
sound, the s is always palatalized: Intsk Chinese.

19. h is the unvoiced glottal spirant; as in English, it occurs only
in syllable-initial: hind` not, bhay house, mukh` face.

In word-formation h is often spoken before the initial vowel of a
suffix that is added to a final vowel: -bsa read, basa-hn reading
room. See Morphology.

20. The nasals m, n, ng correspond in position to the stops. In
word-formation they alternate, respectively, with p, t, k; m also
with b, and n also with s; ng is often prefixed to an initial vowel;
see Morphology.

Both in word-formation and in the phrase the nasals are occasionally
assimilated in position to a following consonant: s m p` ten (m
for ng), Sang ka pparon? Where are you going? (for san).

In the sentence, final n is lost before the words ng, t, and y:
ang ki ng am my father (for kin my).

21. r is the voiced tongue-tip trill, postdental. It occurs between
vowels within simple, underived words: raw sun, day,--no doubt as
a substitute for d, which never occurs in this position; everywhere
else r is merely a variant of d ( 17).

22. l is postdental; the timbre is much as in Standard French or
German, the mid-tongue not lowered.

23. f and v (both labiodental) occur in unassimilated foreign words;
they are occasionally replaced (especially in derivatives) by p and
b. Filipnas the Philippines, infiyrno, impiyrno Hell, fiysta,
piysta fiesta, but always ka-piyest-han day of a festival, sivl,
sibl civil, provnsiya province, bintna` window, bso drinking-glass.

r occurs freely in all positions in foreign words (cf.  21): trn
train, trabho work, krs cross, rels watch, sombrro hat, beside
Tagalized samballo.

The occurrence of ts ( 18) is probably limited to foreign words.

24. When in word-formation a vowel is lost before a suffix ( 13),
the non-syllabics thereby brought together are subject to various
changes: sigl-n be filled, sild with suffix -an. See Morphology.



2. Syllabication.

a. In the word.

25. If a single non-syllabic follows a stressed vowel, the latter
is spoken with open syllable accent, and the non-syllabic begins the
following syllable: b-hay house, s-s-lat will write.

If a single non-syllabic follows an unstressed vowel, the latter has
close syllable accent,--that is, no stress-division is made between
the syllables (just as in English): it this, kasakimn selfishness,
sum-lat wrote.

If two non-syllabics intervene between two syllabics, the
syllable-division is made between the non-syllabics: luk-s jump,
muk-h` face, In-tsk Chinese. Stressed ay seems, however, to have
open syllable accent: ky-lan when?

Syllabics never follow each other without an intervening
non-syllabic. If no other non-syllabic intervenes, a non-distinctive
glottal stop is spoken. I have not written the glottal stop in this
position, as it may always be taken for granted ( 14). Hence dan
road is pronounced da`n, sik young pig si`k, don there do`n,
to human being t`o.

Nor do more than two non-syllabics ever follow each other in a native
word. The following are examples of unusual combinations in foreign
words: An-drs, P-dro, beside Tagalized Pro, k-tre bedstead,
sr-mon, trab-ho work, but in reduplication mag-t-trab-ho will
work, krs cross, but in reduplication nag-k-kurs crosses himself,
cf. barso arm, lbo balloon (Sp. globo).

26. In frequently used words, especially in more rapid speech, the
intervocalic glottal stop is often lost.

If like vowels thus meet, they coalesce into a single vowel of no
more than normal length: pumarn went there beside pumaron. When
oo is thus contracted, the resulting o may be raised to u (cf.  9):
pinarunn was gone to, beside pinaronn and pinaroonn.

If unlike vowels meet, the non-syllabic corresponding to the higher
vowel (i. e. y with i, e and w with u, o) takes the place of the
glottal stop. So two beside to. The combinations so resulting are
treated in every way like those discussed in the next .

27. If the non-syllabic intervening between two vowels is y or w,
the combination involves no peculiarity, provided that neither
of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic: b-yan town,
pag-dir-wang celebration, gayn thus.

If, however, one of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic
(i. e. i, e with y and u, o with w) and is not stressed, it is
spoken shorter than a normal unstressed vowel: in such words as iyn
that, buwn moon, month the i, u are spoken shorter than in other
positions. So also in two (see preceding ) the o.

After consonants these short vowels are often entirely omitted: bwn
beside buwn, sy he, she beside siy. The syllable-division remains,
however, as in the longer form: kpw` fellow- beside kpuw` is
pronounced k-pw` (not kap-wa`).

Even in other positions these reduced vowels are often omitted,
especially in frequently used combinations: Ano yn? What's
that? beside Ano iyn?, occasionally tw for two, to.

28. Conversely, one hears now and then a superfluous short i, e with
a y, and an u, o with a w: iyan for yan that, mye for my having,
uwal` for wal` without.

29. The combinations ay and ai are occasionally replaced by a long
open e: klan beside kylan when?, m bhay beside my bhay wife,
housewife, me re` beside may re` master, owner, tnga beside
tanga car.



b. In word-formation.

30. When in word-formation affixes or reduplicative syllables are
added to a root, the syllabication is as in a simple word: sul-tan
be written to (slat writing with suffix -an), sum-lat wrote (same,
with infix -um-), umuw`, umw` ( 27) went home (-uw` go home,
with prefixed -um-).

When vowels meet, they are as a rule separated by the non-distinctive
intervocalic glottal stop: ma--re` will be possible (re` property
reduplicated and with prefix ma-).

31. The intervocalic glottal stop is rarely reduced, except in
certain much-used combinations, the commonest being those with the
prefix i- and with the prefix ka- and the suffix -an in certain uses
(see Morphology): initos was commanded (tos command with prefixes
in- and i-), usually iniytos; larun, toy (lar` play, game with
suffix -an), usually laruwn, larwn, but (with a different use
of the suffix -an) lran playground; kayibgan, kaybgan friend
(big love, desire, with prefix ka- and suffix -an), but kabgan
sweetheart and kaibign affection. For -wan abandon with prefix i-
only the contracted form wan be abandoned is spoken. Cf. further
ikapat, ikpat fourth (pat four with prefixes i- and ka-).

32. Conversely, an original y or w is sometimes under emphasis
replaced by glottal stop; thus, for patayn be killed (paty dead
person, kill with suffix -in), occasionally patan.

33. When a word is doubled, when two words are united in a compound
word, and after the prefixes that end in g, the syllable-division is
however made as though separate words were meeting in a sentence,--that
is, according to the rules in the following paragraphs.



c. In the phrase.

34. When words come together in the phrase, the word-division is
maintained (as in English) as a syllable-division.

In the case of initial consonants the division is thus like that within
a word: Sumlat ka. Write (thou), Sumlat siy, Sumlat sy. He wrote,
Summa ka. Go along, Summa siy, Summa sy. He went along.

Before a vowel-initial the word-division is maintained as a
syllable-division by the use of a non-distinctive glottal stop (as
in German): Sumlat ak. I wrote, i. e. sum-lat-`ak; Summa ak. I
went along, i. e. sum-ma-`ak.

Doubled words, compound words, and forms with prefixes ending in
g (namely, mag-, nag-, pag-, tag-) are similarly treated ( 33):
agd-agd immediately (agd at once doubled), i. e. agd-`agd;
bhay-akltan library-building (compound of bhay house and akltan
place for books), i. e. b-hay-`ak-l-tan; pagslat an act of writing
(slat writing with prefix pag-), i. e. pag-s-lat; nagral studied
(ral teaching with prefix nag-), i. e. nag-`-ral.

Occasionally, in emphatic speech, the same division is made within
other formations: umakiyt, umakyt climbed (-akiyt climb with
prefixed -um-), occasionally, but rarely, um-`akiyt, usually umakiyt,
umakyt (by  30).

35. Reduction of the glottal stop and contraction of vowels occur
only in a few much-used combinations of words: si Andrs (si is the
article of proper names), also siy Andrs, sy Andrs; Ano iyn? What's
that?, also Ano yn? and even An yn?; na it this (na is a particle
expressing attribution), also na yit, na yt.

36. Occasionally such reductions go even farther, as in an in the
preceding paragraph, and occur where the glottal stop is not involved:
as, s for is one in s m p` ten, for is ng p`.

37. The words at, ay, and na have also a shorter form, t, y, and ng,
respectively, which occurs only (but not always) after a final vowel,
glottal stop, or n. When these forms are used, the final glottal stop
or n is lost ( 15, 20) and the t, y, or ng is treated in every
way exactly as though it were part of the preceding word: but at
balt, but t balt bone and skin, i. e. butt-balt; Iyn ay mabti,
Iy y mabti. That's good, i. e. iyy-mab-ti; ang bta` na mabat
(clumsy, as in the speech of a child just learning to speak, for:)
ang bta ng mabat the good child, i. e. ang-b-tang-maba`t.



3. Accentuation.

a. Word-accent.

38. In a word of more than one syllable at least one syllable is
normally spoken with a greater degree of stress than the others.

The unstressed syllables have short vowels (about as long as the
vowel in English pit or put) and close syllable-stress ( 25).

39. A non-final syllable ending in a non-syllabic (i. e. a closed
non-final syllable) never has the stress; such words as luk-s jump,
muk-h` face, ak-lt book are therefore always oxytone. The only
exceptions are syllables ending in ay; this combination seems to
be felt as a unit capable of open syllable-stress: ky-lan, k-lan
when; further, the words mn-san once, pn-san cousin, and nn-don,
by-form of n-ron is there; and, finally, unassimilated foreign
words: bs-bol, sr-mon, kwr-ta, kwl-ta money (Spanish cuarto),
but also Tagalized kwalt.

Words like k-pw` (beside k-puw`) are not exceptions, for the
first syllable is not closed ( 27).

40. The stressed syllables fall into two grammatical classes which
are only in part phonetically distinct; we may call them primary and
secondary word-accent.

41. The primary word-accent on a final syllable or (in the cases
mentioned in  39) on a closed non-final syllable, consists merely in
greater stress than that of an unaccented syllable, accompanied by
a pitch-rise of about half a note. [4] I use the grave accent-sign:
gab night, hind` not, kamy hand, buhk hair, nndon is there,
srmon sermon.

42. On a non-final open syllable the primary word-accent involves an
increase of stress (less than in English), a pitch-rise of two notes,
lengthening of the vowel to about one and one-half times the duration
of an unstressed vowel, and open syllable-stress ( 25). I use the
acute accent-mark: bhay house, byan town.

So also, irregularly, syllables in ay: kylan, klan when?, and even
finally: ky, k than, my, m having; also mnsan, pnsan.

If an unaccented syllable precedes, the pitch-rise really begins on
the latter: in sumlat wrote, for instance, the first syllable is
spoken above the usual pitch, and the two-note pitch-rise is merely
completed in the accented syllable.

43. The secondary word-accent on a final syllable has weaker stress
than the primary accent in the same place, and ordinarily lacks the
pitch-rise. Grammatically, it is recognizable by the presence of
the primary accent on another syllable; I use the grave accent-mark:
akiyt, akyt will climb, nring was heard.

44. On a non-final open syllable the secondary accent differs from the
primary accent in similar position in two respects: its pitch-rise is
less marked, varying from three-quarters to one and three-quarters
notes, and its vowel-lengthening is greater, reaching twice the
length of an unstressed vowel. I use the grave accent-mark: sslat
will write.

When the primary accent is on the last syllable and therefore weak (
41), the secondary accent often approaches a non-final primary accent
in character: the first syllable of a word like nbuksn came open is
often phonetically the same as that of a word like nring was heard.

If an unaccented syllable precedes the secondary accent, the pitch-rise
really begins in the former: in such a word as sumslat is writing
the first syllable is spoken with higher than normal pitch, in the
second syllable the pitch is brought up to a note and three-fourths
above normal, and in the third the two-note rise is completed.

Of two secondary accents following each other the preceding is
the more marked: nrramdamn is felt (n- has more marked accent
than r-). This helps to make the primary accent distinct, for it
is stronger than a preceding secondary accent: sslat will write
(the second su- is stronger, not weaker, than the first); nllman
is known (if the third syllable had a secondary accent, it would be
less marked than the first and second, but its pitch and stress are
actually higher).



b. Sentence-accent.

45. Certain words are atonic, i. e. are always spoken unstressed in
the phrase: e. g. ang so the or a dog, sa kin to me.

The atonic words are: ang, at, ay, kay to (not ky, k than), kung,
na attributive (not n already), nang, ni of (not n nor), o or
(not  oh), pag, sa, si.

The short variants of at, ay, and na, namely t, y, and ng ( 37),
having no vowel, cannot be stressed; they are treated in every way
as though they formed part of the preceding word.

46. In closely united phrases the last word keeps its accent, while
the preceding ones often weaken theirs. Especially a final syllable
often loses its accent before another word in the phrase:

dhil dto on account of this, often: dahil dto,

ang mang bhay the houses, often: ang manga bhay,

ang kany ng bhay his or her house, ang kanya ng bhay,

ang malak ng bhay the large house, ang malaki ng bhay.

47. Opposed to the preceding rule is the treatment of certain words
which we may call enclitics. These very frequently, to be sure,
receive the normal treatment: that is, they are stressed and the
preceding word either keeps its stress or, if oxytone, often loses it;
but frequently, instead, the enclitic loses its accent:

Umakyt siy, Umakyat sy. He climbed, but also Umakyt sya.

akyt siy, akyat sy. He will climb, but also akyt sya.

Gnu ka na b kaknis? How clever are you now? (k, n, b are all
enclitic).

Enclitics have the further (and more easily recognized) peculiarity
that they follow the first orthotonic (i. e. neither atonic nor
pretonic,  48) word of the expression to which they belong (either
as modifiers or as subject):

ang mahahba nya ng pa his (niy, enclitic) long legs.

When several enclitics come together the last one is often
stressed. Monosyllabic enclitics precede disyllabic:

Nahnap na ny ang sombrro. He has already looked for the hat. (n
and niy are enclitics; the latter is treated as disyllabic even when
in the contracted form ny).

The enclitics are:

(1) always: the monosyllabic forms of the personal pronouns, namely
k, k, m, and the words (particles) b, bag, dw, dn, mn, mna,
n, namn, naw`, ng`, p, pal, p`, sna, tuly.

(2) frequently or in certain senses: the disyllabic forms of the
personal pronouns (including siy, sy and niy, ny) except ikw
(which is never enclitic), the demonstrative pronouns, and the words
dne, dto, diyn, don, kay`, lmang, ul`; occasionally short
phrases ( 88).

For details about these words see Syntax.

48. Opposed to the rule in  46 are also certain words (particles)
which we may call pretonics. Their treatment is often regular: that
is, the pretonic as well as the following word keeps its accent, or
the pretonic loses its accent before a following word; but sometimes
the pretonic keeps its accent and the following word, if oxytone,
is unaccented:

my sakt, may sakt having sickness, i. e. sick, but also my
sakit. Only my and nsa actually appear with this accentuation.

The other pretonics are so classed because they share with these
two words the peculiarity that an enclitic belonging to the phrase
follows not the pretonic word, but the first orthotonic word:

My katawn sya ng pra ng to. He has a body like a human being. (siy
he, enclitic follows not my, which is pretonic, but katawn body,
the first orthotonic word of the predicate).

The pretonics are the particles bwat, khit, kapg, kin, mang,
my, nagng (together with its other forms,  250), nsa (together
with its other forms,  212), n nor (not ni of), nin, pagk, sin,
tag (tig). See Syntax.

49. A final syllable ending in glottal stop ( 14) often receives
a higher degree of stress than a corresponding syllable with a
different final.

If the syllable ending in glottal stop has not the word-accent, it
often receives an accent resembling the secondary accent on a non-final
syllable; this is especially common if the glottal stop is lost before
another word in the phrase: pre`, pr` priest, Pr Hwn Father Juan.

If the syllable has a word-accent and the glottal stop is lost in the
phrase, its accent is often spoken like a primary word-accent on an
open syllable: Wal sya. He has none (wal`), Nagllar sya. He is
playing (nagllar`).

If, however, the glottal stop is lost before t, y, or ng, this
heightening of accent does not take place, since the syllable
is then treated as ending in t, y, or ng: Sy y wal ng aklt
(i. e. walng-`ak-lt), Sya y wala ng aklt. He has no book or
no books.

50. In a succession of otherwise unstressed syllables a rhythmical
movement is usually produced by means of grammatically insignificant
stresses weaker than a secondary word-accent; the distribution, and,
indeed, the occurrence of these is so variable that I have not tried
to indicate them in transcription, especially as they are never
distinctive. Thus, in the phrases in  46 an accent of this kind
may fall on the next-to-last syllables of the words that lose their
normal word-accent: ang mnga bhay, ang knya ng am his father,
ang malki ng bhay.

51. The successive accents in a sentence bear a well-marked relation
to each other: the early and especially the middle ones have higher
absolute pitch than the last; an accent on the last syllable of a
sentence often entirely loses its pitch-rise. As a consequence of
this rather fixed melody, the differences of pitch-movement between
statements, questions, commands, and exclamations of various kinds are
not so marked as in English; the higher stress of emotionally dominant
(emphatic) words, also, is less marked than in English.

In exclamation or under emphasis the accent of a final syllable may
be like that of a medial syllable, and may, in addition take on a
falling accent after the rise: Hwn! (with rising-falling stress and
pitch) Juan!, for normal Huwn, Hwn. Other disturbances of accent
also occur in exclamation.





B. SYNTAX.

1. Sentence and word.

a. Syntactic relations.

52. The sentence consists of one or more words:
Ary! Ouch! Umuln. It's raining. Ina k! Mother of mine! (as
exclamation). Sya y sumslat. He or she is or was writing.

53. The relations between the words in a sentence are the usual ones:
(1) Attribution: Ina k! Mother (of) mine! (2) Predication: Sumslat
sy. Literally: Is-writing he. (3) The serial relation: but t balt
bone and skin.

54. Some of the particles ( 55) seem, however, to stand in none of
these relations, but rather to express these relations themselves. Thus
the particle t and in the preceding example is expressive of the serial
relation. So further: malak ng bhay large house; the particle ng
expresses the attributive relation; Sya y sumslat. The particle y
expresses the predicative relation.

It is to be remarked, further, that the sphere of attribution includes
some cases in which the attribute markedly alters the sense: sakt
sickness: my sakt (my is an attribute) having sickness, sick. [5]



b. Parts of speech.

55. Tagalog distinguishes two parts of speech: full words and
particles.

The particles either express the syntactic relations between full words
(as illustrated in  54) or act as attributes of full words (so my
in the example in  54): Hind sya sumslat. He is not writing. The
particle hind` not is an attribute of sumslat.

In contrast with the particles, full words act not only as attributes,
but also as subject or predicate, and any full word may, in principle,
be used in any of these three functions:

(1) Subject: Ang sumslat ay si Pdro. The person writing is
Pedro. Ang pul nang pany ay matingkd. The red of the handkerchief
is intense.

(2) Predicate: Sya y sumslat. He is writing. Pul ang panyo ng
it. This handkerchief is red.

(3) Attribute: ang bta ng sumslat the writing child, the child
who is writing; ang pul ng pany the red handkerchief.

56. Independent of this classification into parts of speech are
certain less important groupings of words and certain phrase types,
some of which will appear in the course of the analysis. Others,
however, demand mention at the outset.



c. Static and transient words.

57. Transient words express an element of experience viewed as
impermanent, i. e. belonging to some limited portion of time, so
sumslat above, as opposed, e. g., to siy, pul, pany, bta`,
Pdro. Words which are not transient may be called static. Only a few
particles are transient; among the full words the transient group is
large and important.



d. Personal names.

58. Except in exclamations and in address, names of persons (or
animals) are distinguished from other words by being always (but see
 78) preceded by the atonic particle si: Hwn! Juan! si Hwn Juan,
si Salamn Glass, Mirror (as name of a dog).

59. Many terms of relationship and titles may be used in place of the
name of an individual and then belong to the personal name class: ang
am the father, ang ki ng am my father, but: si Am Father. Thus
are used, further: si In Mother, si Ttay Papa, si Nnay Mama, si
Kya or si Kyang Oldest brother, si At Oldest sister, si Ingkng
Grandfather, si Ind` or si Imp Grandmother, si li or si Tiy Aunt,
si Mma` Uncle; si Bathla` God, but: ang Dys.

So also phrases in which these and other titles as attributes precede
a name, see  256.

60. The particle sin or sil, pretonic, in place of si forms an
expression denoting the person named together with his family or group
of adherents: sina Hwn or sila Hwn Juan and his family or Juan and
his crowd. With a series of names sin implies that those named form a
group: si Hwn, si Andrs, at si Mariyno Juan, Andrs, and Mariano;
sina Hwn, Andrs, at Mariyno the group consisting of Juan, Andrs,
and Mariano; sina Hwn, sina Andrs, at sina Mariyno Juan, Andrs,
and Mariano, each with his group.



e. The object construction.

61. When a word or phrase denotes an element of experience viewed
as an object, it is, with certain exceptions, preceded by the atonic
particle ang: ang bta` the or a child, boy, girl; children, ang bhay
the, a house; houses, ang byan the, a town, ang kabtan goodness,
kindness; an act of kindness, ang katahan mankind, ang pagslat the
or an act of writing, ang mabte that which is good, the best thing.

The following are the exceptions:

62. Personal names preceded by si or sin (sil) do not take ang; they
always, of course, denote an object idea. See the examples in  58 ff.

63. The personal pronouns (which always express an object idea) do
not take ang. They are: ak I; kit we, i. e. thou and I, inclusive
dual; tyo we, i. e. thou (or ye) and I (or we), inclusive dual and
plural; kam we (but not you), exclusive dual and plural; ikw, k
thou (singular); kay ye, you (dual, plural, and polite singular);
siy he, she; sil they.

All of these except ikw are often enclitic; k is always so: Ikw
ay talnan. You are defeated. Sumlat ka. Write (thou).

Siy is used only of living beings, except for a single peculiar
construction to be described below ( 106 f.).

Kit in the sense here given is not much used, tyo being commoner:
Palt kit nang sombrro. Let's trade hats. Kit ay pumaron sa
teytro. Or, more commonly: Tyo ay pumaron sa teytro. Let us go
to the theatre. Kit is more used in another meaning, as we shall see
( 182).

Kam differs from these two words in excluding the person or persons
addressed: Kkin tyo. We shall eat. Nakitluy kam kina Pdro. We
asked hospitality of Pedro's. In both of these sentences (as also
in that with tyo already given) two or more people may be meant. It
will be seen, therefore, that the distinction between dual and plural
is not categoric (obligatory).

That between singular and plural is categoric in these pronouns;
everywhere else it is not obligatory; the idea of plurality is inherent
in many words and forms, but these are used only where the idea of
plurality is explicitly prominent.

64. The demonstrative pronouns as object expressions also reject
ang. They are: ir this (on the person of the speaker or within his
immediate reach); it this (more generally, of anything nearer to the
speaker than to the person addressed); iyn, yn that (nearer to the
person addressed); iyn, yan, yon, yn that (of things distant from
both speaker and person addressed).

It and iyn are used also anaphorically: the former--the latter.

The demonstrative pronouns are often enclitic.

Ang is omitted also before an object expression in which a
demonstrative pronoun stands first as a modifier, see  130.

65. Similarly before object expressions in which an interrogative
pronoun stands first as a modifier, see  131.168.

66. The use of ang is optional before the numerative pronouns. The use
of ang seems sometimes to lend these greater definiteness, sometimes
to be indifferent.

The numerative pronouns used as object expressions are: ib other,
iln few, karamhan most, laht all. (The other numerative pronouns,
namely bo` whole and the particles bla any and bwat every are not
used as object expressions).

ib others; iln a few; Ang iln ay malalaks at ang ib ay
mahihna`. Some are strong and others are weak. Laht nang to
sa bya ng it ay dpat umals. All people (who are) in this town
ought to leave (nang to of people, of the people is an attribute
of laht). Ang laht nang to sa bya ng it ay my sakt. All the
people in this town are diseased. karamhan sa kanil most of them;
ang karamhan the majority.

The use of ang is optional also before object expressions in which
a numerative pronoun stands first as an attribute, see  132.

67. The use of ang is optional before the cardinal numerals: is sa
kanil, or: ang is sa kanil one of them.

The simple cardinal numerals are: is one, dalaw two, tatl three,
pat four, lim five, nim six, pit seven, wal eight, siym,
sym nine.

Similarly, the use of ang is optional before an object expression in
which a cardinal numeral stands first as a modifier, see  133.

In dates and for the hours of the day the Spanish numerals are commonly
used; these demand ang: ang abynte-kwtru nang Hnyo the twenty-fourth
of June.

68. Ang is omitted, further, before object expressions beginning with
the particle n ( 253) and optionally before those beginning with the
particle khit ( 248). All object expressions lack ang when forming
an indefinite object predicate ( 109), in expressions of indefinite
quantity ( 69), when used indefinitely after pra ( 275), hanggng
( 293), pat ( 305), and in exclamation or address ( 75.78). [6]



f. Expressions of indefinite quantity.

69. Object expressions are used (without ang,  68) to express
indefinite objects (roughly speaking such as would lack the article
the in English) or indefinite quantities of objects, when preceded
by certain modifiers. These modifiers are the pretonic particle
my, expressing existence or forthcomingness ( 252), and the
full words my-ron, equivalent with my; wal` the negative of
these; malak great; malon long; marmi much, many ( 138). The
phrases so formed may be described as expressions of indefinite
quantity. Beside the omission of ang before the object expression,
they have the peculiarity that in certain constructions they express
(without further accompaniments) the possessor of that designated:
may sngay there are horns or having horns, horned; my-roo ng aklt
there are books or having a book, books; wala ng aklt there are no
books or without a book, having no books; malak ng kagamitn great
usefulness, there is great use, or having great usefulness; malo
ng panahn long time or taking a long time; marmi ng salap` much
money, there is much money or having much money; marmi ng kaybgan
many friends, there are many friends or having many friends.

My expresses also approximateness (where the object expression is
one of number): may pat na pu ng pa about forty feet or having,
measuring about forty feet.

70. An expression of indefinite quantity may, as a unit, stand in
object construction; in this case the first three have possessive
value, but not the others: ang my sakt the or a person having
sickness, the or a sick person; ang my-roo ng aklt the (a) person
who has a book or books; ang wala ng hiy` the (a) shameless person;
but: ang malak ng bhay the, a large house; ang marmi ng bgay the
many things.

71. Marmi may by itself stand in object construction; it then has
the meaning: ang marmi the many, the crowd, the people, hoi polloi.



2. Subject and predicate.

72. Most sentences consist of a subject and a predicate, showing the
construction of Sumslat sy, Sya y sumslat ( 53, 54). Indeed,
this goes farther than in English; many commands, for instance,
have the subject-and-predicate structure: Sumlat ka. Write thou,
i. e. Write.

Nevertheless, much of the syntax is determined by the use of
constructions which lack subject-and-predicate structure.



a. Non-predicative sentences.

73. The sentences which lack subject-and-predicate structure are of
two general types: (1) exclamatory, and (2) impersonal-anaphoric.

74. To the exclamatory type belongs the use in independent
sentences of certain particles, the primary interjections:
Ab! Ah! Ary! Ouch! ! Oh!

As in other languages, some of these violate the normal phonetic
structure, that is, are "inarticulate": Sss! Whew!, uttered when the
weather is very hot. One whistles when one wants the wind to blow.

75. To the exclamatory type belong, further, words and phrases used as
secondary interjections: An! What! (unpleasant surprise). In ko! or:
Ina k! Mother of mine! Ano ng hna mo! What weakness of-you! i. e. How
weak you are!

As the second example shows, object expressions are here used without
ang ( 68).

76. Certain words with the prefix ka- expressing high degree of
a quality (see Morphology), with their attributes: Kaitm nang
gabi! What-blackness of-the night! i. e. How black the night is!

77. Certain words with the prefix ka- and reduplication expressing
recent completion of an act (see Morphology), with their modifiers:
Karrating ko pa lmang! Just-arriving by-me still only! i. e. I have
only just arrived.

78. Vocatives, in calling or address: Kay ng manga makasalnan! Ye
sinners! In this use personal names lack si and all object expressions
lack ang ( 68): Hwn! Juan! Mma`! Sir! li! Madam! Wala ng
hiy`! Shameless one!

79. Commands of certain brusque or familiar types, used, e. g.,
to children, servants, animals, in haste or excitement: Hint
na! Stop! lag na! Get out of the way! Slong! Go ahead! Hurry
up! Panog n sa bhay! Come down from the house! Come on out! Tb po`
Look out please! (Cry of drivers to people on the street. The accent
is irregular by  51 for tab).

80. Certain set expressions, such as greetings: Maganda ng raw
p`! Good-morning! Salmat. Thanks. Salmat sa iy. Thank you.

81. Expressions of affirmation and negation: o. Yes. Oo ng`. Yes
indeed. Tma`. That's right, Exactly. Hind`. No. Wal`. None, Nothing,
There isn't.

82. The mere naming of an idea, as in counting or giving the title
of a story: Is, dalaw, tatl, pat, lim.... One, two, three,
four, five....

83. (2) Of the impersonal-anaphoric type are many answers to questions
or continuations of dialogue: Kahpon. Yesterday. Ak. I, It's I,
It was I. (Never "It y ak," or the like).

84. Certain occurrences, especially meteoric phenomena,
are not analyzed into subject and predicate: Umuln. It's
raining. Kabilgan nang bwn. Roundness of-the moon, i. e. There is
a full moon. Bumbah`. There is a flood. Nare`. It is possible,
allowable. Hind nalanan. It did not take long, It was not
long. Taginit n. It is summer already.

85. Very common in impersonal construction are expressions of
indefinite quantity ( 69). In this use they express existence or
forthcomingness (or the opposite) of indefinite objects: My manga
babye. There are women. My-roo ng aswng sa byan. There was a
vampire in the town. Wal ng papl. There is no paper. Wal ng anu
mn! There is nothing. Also: Not at all! You're welcome! Malaki ng tw`
nang iba ng to. There was great rejoicing by the other people. Sa
dalga ng it y marmi ng manglilgaw. For this young woman there
were many suitors.

86. Less common in impersonal construction are expressions of
occurrences involving indefinite or indifferent persons or things:
Humkay. One should dig. Nagumpisa n nang pagsbuy. "They" have
already begun to throw.

87. There is great freedom as to presence or absence of anaphorically
determined elements (i. e., such as have been recently mentioned or,
less commonly, are about to be mentioned), including the subject;
when this is wanting, the subject-and-predicate structure is, of
course, lost: Hinla nya sa pasgan. Was-dragged by-him to-the shore,
i. e. He dragged it or the tree (sc. it, or: ang pno`, from the
preceding sentence) to the shore. Hind makabbti sa kanil. (It,
the scheme mentioned) will do them no good.

Many constructions later to be noticed depend on this habit of
omitting anaphorically determined elements, cf. e. g.: Ang pno`
ay tumbo hanggng sa magbnga. The tree grew until (sc. it) bore
fruit. Pagdatng niya ay sabhin mo ng maghinty. At-the-coming of-him
be-said (impersonal) by-you that (sc. he) should-wait, i. e. When he
comes, tell him to wait.



b. The subject.

88. The subject of a sentence is always an object expression. The
only exceptions are complex sentences with entire predications (
115) or quotations ( 329) as subject.

89. The subject may have two positions:

(1) Non-enclitic: it precedes or follows the predicate; in the
former case the predicate is introduced by the atonic particle ay,
y (y often after syllabic vowel, n, or `; see Phonetics): Sumslat
ang bta`. The child is writing; or: Ang bta` ay sumslat. Ang
bta y sumslat. Siy ay sumslat. Sya y sumslat. He, she is
writing. Here siy, sy is not enclitic.

(2) Enclitic: it follows the first orthotonic word of the
predicate: Hind sya sumslat. Not he is-writing, i. e. He is not
writing. Sumslat sya nang lham. He is writing a letter, letters. In
these examples siy is enclitic.

Not only enclitically used pronouns ( 63. 64), but even short phrases
are thus used: Pinaptol nila si Hwn nang khoy. Was-ordered-to-cut
by-them Juan (subject) some wood, i. e. They ordered Juan to cut
wood. Here the position of si Hwn after the first orthotonic word
of the predicate (pinaptol) but before the rest of the predicate
(nang khoy) shows it to be (like nil) an enclitic element. With the
same subject not enclitically used the sentence would be: Pinaptol
nila nang khoy si Hwn, and this, indeed, is the more usual locution.

90. On the use or non-use of an anaphoric subject (siy, sil, it)
see  87.



c. The predicate.

91. The predicate may be (1) a transient word with its modifiers,
(2) a static word with its modifiers, or (3) an object expression.



(1) Transient predicate.

92. Transient words fall into four classes according to the four
relations which a subject may bear to them when they are used as
predicate. We may designate these classes by the following names:

1. active: the subject is viewed as an actor: Sumslat sya nang
lham. He (subject) is writing a letter, letters. Sya y pumtol nang
khoy. He (subject) cut some wood. Umals sy. He went away.

2. direct passive: the subject is viewed as an object fully affected
or produced: Sinlat nya ang lham. Was-written by-him the letter
(subject), i. e. The letter was written by him, He wrote the
letter. Pintol nya ang khoy. Was-cut by-him the wood (subject),
i. e. He cut the wood.

3. instrumental passive: the subject is viewed as a means, an
instrument, something given forth or parted from: Isinlat nya ang
kwnto. Was-written-down by-him the story (subject), i. e. He wrote
the story. Ipintol nya ang glok. Was-cut-with by-him the bolo
(subject), i. e. He used the bolo for cutting, He cut with the bolo.

4. local passive: the subject is viewed as an object partly
or less fully affected, as a place or sphere: Sinultan nya
ak. Was-written-to by-him I (subject), i. e. He wrote me. Pinutlan
nya ang khoy. Was-cut-from by-him the wood (subject), i. e. He cut
a piece off the wood.

For a detailed description of these classes of transient words,
see Morphology.

93. In general the choice between these four constructions is made
in accordance with the logical situation: the definite, known object
underlying the predication as starting-point of discourse is chosen
as subject: Binigyn nya ak nang aklt. Was-given-to (local passive)
by-him I (enclitic subject) a book, books, i. e. He gave me a book,
books. Ibinigay ny sa kin ang aklt. Was-given (instrumental passive)
by-him to me the book (subject), i. e. He gave me the book. In the
first example the speaker is talking about himself, in the second
about a certain book.

94. However, the active construction is avoided whenever any object
other than the actor is available as subject. Especially are active
constructions with an anaphoric subject (siy, sil, it) avoided
wherever a passive construction is at hand. Thus, in the instance in 
93, even if "he", the actor, were the real subject of discourse, one
would rarely use the active construction: Sya y nagbigy sa kin nang
aklt. He (subject) gave (active) me a book, books. Even elements which
we should look upon as somewhat indefinite are preferred as subjects
to an actor: Kinha nya ang isa ng aklt. Was-taken (direct passive)
by-him a book (subject), i. e. He took a (certain) book (he knew,
or I know which one or what kind).

The active construction is thus confined to instances in which the
object-ideas other than the actor are entirely vague and undetermined
or lacking: Umals sy. He went away. Sya y kumha nang aklt. He
took a book, some books (no matter to him or to me which one or what
kind). Sumslat sya nang lham. He is writing a letter, letters. Sya
y pumtol nang khoy. He cut some wood. Kumin sya nang knin. He ate
some boiled rice; but: Kinin nya ang knin. Was-eaten (direct passive)
by him the boiled rice (subject), i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

If, in spite of the presence of other definite objects, the actor is
very decidedly emphasized, a different construction ( 104.107.) is
used.



(2) Static predicate.

95. The predicate may consist of a static word with its modifiers:
Ang bt ay mabat. The child is good. Iy y masam`. That's bad,
wrong. Pul ang panyo ng it. This handkerchief is red.

96. This type of predicate is regular in word-questions: the
question word is used as predicate; it precedes the subject: Pno
ang pagkgusto niny sa trabho-ng-kanyunro? How (predicate) your
liking for (i. e. How did you like) the artillery-service? Papno ang
pagsasbi sa wka ng Taglog nang salit ng Ingls na "scissors"? How
(predicate) the saying in the Tagalog language of the English word
"scissors"? i. e. How does one say "scissors" in Tagalog? Gano
ang pagkakagalt nila? How great, How serious was (predicate)
their quarrel?

97. This is the construction of the interrogative pronouns in questions
asking for the identity of an object,--unless, indeed, these belong
rather under type (3). The interrogative pronouns are the following:

(a) sno who? (singular and plural), sno-sno (explicit plural,  63,
end) is used of persons only, and then only when the answer expected
is a name or the equivalent; it asks for the identity of a person:
Snu ka? Who are (predicate) you (subject)? Snu yn?--Ak. Who's
that? i. e. Who's there?--I. Snu ya ng tumtuktk? Who's that
knocking? Sno ang nagbigy sa iy? Who (predicate) the one-who-gave
(sc. it, anaphoric) to you (subject)? i. e. Who gave it to you? Sno
ang nagsbi sa iy? Who told you? Who told you so? Sno sa kanila ng
dalaw ang nagnkaw? Which of the two committed the theft? The two are
known by name or, at any rate, as personalities. Sno-sno sa manga
bta` ang iyo ng nhle sa panguumt? Which ones of the children
(predicate) did you catch pilfering? literally: the ones caught by
you at pilfering, subject.

(b) an what? what kind of? how?, explicit plural an-an, asks for
the identity of a thing or for the description, character, condition
of a person or of a thing: Ano yn?--It y libr. What (predicate)
is that you have there (subject)?--This is a book. An yn?--Yo y
snog. What's that over there?--It's a fire. An ang nglan mo? What
is your name? Ano ang sbi mo? What do you say? Ano ang big mo? What
do you want? Ano-an ang pinagsab ni Hwn sa iy? What things did
Juan tell you?, literally: What things (predicate) the things said
by Juan to you? Anu k? What sort of person are you? An ang lagy
nang manga bta`?... nang aswa mo? ... nang m bhay? What (or How)
is the condition of (i. e. How are) the children? ... your husband
or wife? ... your wife?

(c) aln which? which one? which ones?, explicit plural aln-aln,
is used of persons and things; it asks neither for identification
(persons, sno; things, an) nor for characterization (an), but
for indication, by pointing or by description of the place or some
other unessential feature, of persons or things: Aln ang gustu
m? Which one, Which ones do you want? Aln sa kanila ng dalaw ang
nagnkaw? Which of the two (e. g., of these two strange men) committed
the theft? Alin-aln sa manga pnu-ng-khoy ang iyo ng tinag`? Which
ones of the trees did you cut down?

98. Of the numerative pronouns ( 66), bo`, ib, and iln (in this
use interrogative) are used as static predicates: It y bu`. This
is entire, complete, unbroken. Hind ko gusto iyn; ib ang ki ng
gust. Not by-me wanted (static predicate) that (subject); different
(predicate) that by-me wanted (subject), i. e. I don't want that; what
I want is different, I want something else. Iln ang manglilgaw? How
many are the suitors?

99. Of the modifiers of indefinite quantity ( 69) several are used
as static predicates: Sya y wal na. He is or was gone already. It y
wal`. This does not take place, does not appear, falls away. Malak
ang snog. The fire was great. Marmi ang nagssbi nit. Many are
they who say this.

100. For the disjunctive forms of personal pronouns and of sno as
static predicates, see  169. For local expressions, see  211. For
entire predications as static predicates,  112 f., quotations,  114.



(3) Object expression as predicate.

101. If the predicate is an object expression, it may have three
different forms: (A) definite, (B) circumlocutory definite, and
(C) indefinite.

102. (A) A definite object predicate consists simply of a word or
phrase in the object construction ( 61 ff.); it has therefore the
same structure as a subject. Usually this predicate precedes and
is emphatic (emotionally dominant): It ang ki ng trhan. This is
(predicate) my dwelling (subject), i. e. Why, it's here I'm at home!

103. The definite object predicate is especially emphatic in sentences
that have as subject a transient word (with or without modifiers)
in object construction: Si Hwn ang nagnkaw. It was Juan who did
the stealing. Siya rn ang kanya ng inbig. It was he whom she
loved. Both nagnkaw and inbig are transient.

104. When an emphatic actor cannot be used as subject of a transient
predicate (owing to the presence of other definite object ideas, 
94), it is often used as the predicate in this construction,--the
transient part of the sentence being put into object construction and
used as subject. Thus, if, in the sentence: It y ginaw ni Hwn. This
(subject) was-done (direct passive) by Juan, the idea of "Juan", the
actor, should become dominant, one would not use the active transient
predicate ("Si Hwn ay gumaw nit"), for the idea of "this" is too
definite to allow of the actor's functioning as subject; one says
instead: Si Hwn ang gumaw nit. It was Juan who did this, with
"Juan" as definite object predicate and the rest of the sentence,
objectivized, as subject. So: Siy ang nagbigy sa kin nang aklt. It
was he that gave me the (or a) book, books. (cf.  93). Ikaw ng`
ang nagsbi niyn. It was you yourself who said that.

105. Less commonly the subject precedes the predicate. In this
case the construction is quite normal and unemphatic; if there is a
transient element it usually stands in the predicate: It y ang ki ng
trhan. This (subject) is my dwelling. Si Hwn ay ang nagnkaw. Juan
is the one who did the stealing.

106. (B) In the circumlocutory definite object predicate the
central element is the pronoun siy (in this use never enclitic),
which is followed by modifiers which express the real content of the
predicate. In this use siy may apply to inanimate objects and to
two or more objects ( 63). The subject, which has always a moderate
degree of emphasis, usually precedes: It ay sya k ng trhan. This
is what is my home, i. e. This is where I live. In most cases the
real content of the predicate is a transient word (with or without
modifiers): Si Pdro ay sya ng tumtuktk. Pedro is the one (siy)
who is knocking. (Less emphatic than the violently transposed Si
Pdro ang tumtuktk. It's Pedro who is knocking, of type A). Ang
pagktahol nang so ay sy ng ikingising nang bta`. The barking of
the dog is what woke up the child. Ang manga pangparikt ay sya k ng
pinamutlan. The kindlings are what I have cut up. Occasionally the
predicate precedes: Bak sya ng ikaptol nang pingg ang kabigatn nang
buhngin. Perhaps that which may break the carrying-pole (predicate)
the weight of the sand (subject), i. e. See that the weight of the
sand doesn't break the carrying-pole.

107. This construction, like that of type (A), is often used when a
transient predicate is not permissible with an actor-subject; here,
however, the sentence is not, as in (A), reversed, but the actor
is used as subject and the rest of the sentence as true content of
the circumlocutory predicate: Si Hwn ay sy ng gumaw nito. Juan
is the one who did this. Si Pdro ay sy ng nagbigy sa kin nang
aklt. Pedro is the person who gave me the book.

108. A predicate of this type may, in its entirety and as a unit,
be objectivized with ang and used as subject of a sentence of type
(A): Ang mdiko lmang ay sya ny ng mkkatlo. The doctor alone will
be the one to oppose him (literally: he by-him who will-be-opposed,
direct passive): Ang mdiko lmang ang sya ny ng mkkatlo. It is
the doctor alone who will be the one to oppose him. Ang bintna ng
iyn ang sy ng kahhulgan nang bta`! It's that window that will
be the place where the child will fall out!

109. (C) The indefinite object predicate has the structure of an object
expression, but lacks ang ( 68). In meaning it corresponds, roughly,
to an English noun-predicate without the: It y libr. This (subject)
is a book (predicate). Yo y snog. That's a fire. It y mabti ng
libr. This is a good book. Si Hwn ay isa ng magnankaw. Juan is
a thief. Maspag na to it. Industrious people (predicate) these
(subject), i. e. These are industrious people.

110. As indefinite object predicates occur especially the expressions
of indefinite quantity ( 69). In this use they have possessive
value: Sya y my famlya. He has a family. May pat na pu ng pa ang
hba`. Having forty feet (predicate) the length (subject), i. e. The
length is about forty feet. Sya y my-roo ng aklt. He has a book,
books. Sya y wala ng aklt. He has no book, no books. Sya y marmi
ng salap`. He has much money. Hind malo ng panahn ang kanya ng
paghihimaty. Her fainting-spell did not last long. It y malak ng
kagamitn. This has great use, is much used.

It is to be noted that all the modifiers of indefinite quantity, except
my, which is pretonic, are orthotonic and therefore followed by an
enclitic subject ( 89): My-roon sya ng aklt. He has no book. But:
May dalaw sya ng ank. He has two children.



d. Subordinate predications.

111. An entire predication may be used as subject, predicate,
or attribute in a longer sentence. The use of such subordinate
predications is, however, limited (as opposed, e. g., to English usage)
by the habit of freely using transient words (with their modifiers)
as attributes: ang spot nang kwalt na kanila ng ibinigy pagdka
sa kanila ng maglang the bag of money by-them given at once to their
parents, i. e. ... which they gave.... It is limited, further, by the
freedom of omitting anaphoric elements ( 87): Ang pno` ay tumbo
hanggng sa magbnga. The tree grew until (sc. it, subject) bore fruit.

112. Predications as predicates occur very frequently. Ang ginaw
nya ay umals sya. That done by-him (subject) was went-away he
(predication, as predicate), i. e. What he did was, he went away. Ang
mabti ay itpun nil ang manga bta`. The best thing (to do) was
that they should abandon the children. Ang sip ko y balat lmang nang
itlg it. My thought was (i. e. I thought) this was only an egg-shell.

113. Especially common is a whole predication as a predicate describing
or characterizing the subject: Ang kba ay mahna` ang katawn. The
hunchback was: weak was his body, i. e. was weak of body. Ang ikapitu
ng bta` ay hind kinin ang kanya ng tinpay. The seventh child
was: not was-eaten his bread, i. e. did not eat his bread. Ang isa
ny ng ank ay pit n ng tan ang glang. His one child was now
seven years of age. This construction, together with the use of
impersonal expressions ( 84) makes possible such a sentence as:
Ang manga karitn ... ay gab kung ipalkad. The wagons ... were:
it-was-night when (sc. they, anaphoric subject) were-made-to-go,
i. e. The wagons were driven at night.

114. Direct quotations as predicates are frequent: "Is!" ang sbi
nang bulg. "One!" was what the blindman said. "Tnay bag ng ak y
inbig mo?" ang tanng nang dalga ni Andrs sa kany. "Is it really
true that you love me?" was the question of Andrs' young lady to him.

115. A predication as subject is rare: Mabti tyo y dumon sa isa
ng lugr.... It is best (predicate) that we go to a place.... Hind
bihra` ang manga to y nanghhle nang buhy na ungg`. It is not
rare that people go catching live monkeys. It will be noted that
these predications are not objectivized, cf.  88.

116. Occasionally, however, the predication used as subject is
objectivized: Hind bihra` ang magkalund ang manga to. It is
not rare that people get drowned, or The occurrence that people get
drowned is not rare. Skat n ang ikw ay magpasalmat. It is fitting
now that you be thankful.

117. For predications as attributes see the section on attribution.



e. Omission of predicate.

118. The use of a predicate, or of the central element of a predicate
is (like that of any other element,  87) optional when, if used, it
would be anaphoric: (Si Hwn namn ay sumagt: "Matr!" at sa hul)
si Andrs ang kanya ng "S!" (Then Juan answered "Matar!" and last)
Andrs his "Si!" The form of the sentence with the predicate (which
is anaphoric from the preceding sumagt answered) would be: ... si
Andrs ay isinagt ang kanya ng "S!" ... Andrs was: was-answered
his "Si!", i. e. Andrs answered his "Si!",--a sentence of the kind
described in  113.



3. Attributes.

119. We may distinguish four constructions in which an attribute
may stand: 1. Conjunctive attribution: the attribute is joined by
means of the particle na or ng: isa ng to a person, one person;
2. Disjunctive attribution: the attribute, which is always an object
expression, stands in a special disjunctive form, ang, for instance,
being changed to nang: ang pno nang ungg` the tree of the monkey;
3. Local attribution: the attribute, which is always an object
expression, stands in a special local form, ang, for instance,
being always changed to sa: nallgo sa log bathing in the river;
4. Absolute attribution: the attribute merely precedes or follows:
hind tma` not correct.

In a sense the last three constructions, which do not employ the
particle na, ng, stand opposed to the first, which does. Constructions
2 and 3 make it possible to speak, in a very wide sense, of three
"cases" in which an object expression may stand: "subjective" ang
log the river, "disjunctive" nang log of the river, and "local"
sa log in the river; but it is to be observed that these "cases"
are not confined to any class of words, but appear in any word or
phrase when it stands in the object construction. [7]

120. In position attributes may be:

A. Loosely joined. In this position occur only attributes of a
predicate (or of an entire non-predicative sentence). Their treatment
resembles that of a non-enclitic subject ( 89): they either precede
the rest of the sentence with ay, y, or follow at the end of the
sentence: Don ay sy y nahig`. There (don, loosely joined) he lay
down. Nahnap ko n ang sombrro sa laht nang slok. I have looked
for the hat in every corner. The phrase beginning with sa is loosely
joined; it follows all the rest of the sentence, including even the
subject, ang sombrro.

In the placing of enclitics a loosely joined attribute is ignored:
Paguln ay gamtin mo ang kapte. When it rains use your rain-coat. The
enclitic m follows the first orthotonic word of the predicate (which
it modifies), not counting the loosely joined paguln.

When a loosely joined attribute precedes, the ay, y is in some cases
left off: Dahil dto tinwag nya ang kaybgan nya. Therefore he called
his friend. The position of the enclitic niy shows that dahil dto
is loosely joined, but ay, y is not used.

Occasionally a loosely joined attribute is preceded by the subject
and only one ay, y is used: Karanywa y ang kosinro y upahn. Usually
(loosely joined) the cook is hired; but also: Ang kosinro karanywa
y upahn.

B. Closely joined. The attribute immediately precedes or follows that
modified: hind tma` not correct; ang pno nang ungg` the tree of
the monkey.

C. Enclitic. They follow immediately on the first word of the
expression modified, counting closely joined attributes, but not
loosely joined: Hind ko nllman. Not by-me (it) is-known, i. e. I
don't know. ang mahahba nya ng pa his (niy enclitic) long legs.

121. Some attributes always precede (so e. g. hind`,  239); others
always follow (so, for instance, disjunctive attributes,  171).



a. Conjunctive attributes.

122. A conjunctive attribute is connected with the word or phrase
which it modifies by the atonic particle na. Normally ng takes the
place of na after a vowel, n, or the glottal stop (see Phonetics):
mabti ng aklt good book, or: aklt na mabti.

However, na and ng are not exactly equivalent. Predications, longer
phrases, and, frequently, transient expressions are joined with na
even where ng is possible: isa ng malak ng hignte na nallgo`
a big giant who was bathing.

On the other hand, some constructions use na rarely or not at all:
where ng cannot be used the particle is then omitted and we have
absolute attribution. These constructions will be described under
the latter heading.

In the formation of compound words (see Morphology) na is never used,
while ng is a regular element. This latter circumstance sometimes
makes it difficult to determine whether a given expression is a
conjunctive phrase or a compound word.

123. Conjunctive attributes are closely joined and either precede
or follow; for this reason it is sometimes undetermined which of the
elements connected is the attribute, which the element modified.

124. The elements connected by conjunctive attribution are viewed
as constituting a single larger element. Conjunctive attribution is
the normal and general relation between modifier and modified and
includes relations that in many other languages (such as English)
are viewed in manifold ways. We may divide the construction roughly
into three types, although these actually merge into each other:
(1) quality, (2) manner, and (3) complement.

Not included in this division are the cases where conjunctive
attribution alternates with absolute ( 122), which will be treated
of under the latter heading, and a type which in meaning is so closely
parallel with disjunctive attribution that it will be more economical
to treat it under this head ( 165.168).



(1) Conjunctive attributes of quality.

125. Conjunctive attributes of the quality type are used chiefly in
object expressions. They have no fixed order: ang mabti ng aklt the
(a) good book, or: ang aklt na mabti. ang sumslat na bta` the
writing child, the child that is writing, or: ang bta ng sumslat.

126. When they precede a personal name the whole expression is preceded
by ang, but when they follow si suffices: ang bta ng si Hwn the
child Juan, little Juan, si Hw ng Talnan Juan who is always defeated
(as a nickname).

127. Conjunctive attributes of quality tend to precede when they are
emphatic or in contrast; when fixed they tend to follow: Ang marnong
na pagng at ang ull na ungg`. The clever turtle and the foolish
monkey. Si Hw ng Ppe ay nkta nmin sa tuly. We saw Dumb Juan on
the bridge. ang bo ng babye the lower half of the cocoanut shell, ang
bo ng malambt the soft shell of the cocoanut, ang wka ng Kastla`
the Spanish language. Especially those expressing material tend to
follow: ang bhay na bat a stone house, ang korna ng tink a crown
of thorns, ang atsra ng papya papaw salad, pickled papaw, ang tinla
ng mank chicken stew, ang sko ng play a sack of rice. A modifier
expressing the special kind always follows: ang sla ng pagnankaw
the crime which is (i. e. of) theft, ang bsyo ng paginm the vice
of drinking, ang lar ng tagun the game which consists of hiding,
the game of hide-and-seek, kanna ng umga a little while ago in the
morning, i. e. this morning, il ng ras na pagsaslitan a few hours
of conversation, ang band ng kataasn (or: itas) the direction
(which is) north, i. e. the north; so: ang band ng kababan (or:
ibab`) the south, silngan (or: slangnan) the east, kalunran the
west, ang gaw ng knan the right-hand side, kaliw` the left.

128. Titles and the like precede: ang bo ng si Mary the widow Maria.

129. The personal pronouns precede their conjunctive attributes:
sila ng tatl they three, Si Pdro ay sy ng tumtuktk. Pedro is
the one who is knocking ( 106 ff.).

130. The demonstrative pronouns as conjunctive attributes usually
follow: ang to ng it this person, this man, ang tatl ng it these
three, Ang korbta ng ir ay bgo. This necktie is new.

Occasionally, however, they precede, especially with a longer
expression. In this case ang is not used ( 64, end): ito ng spot ko
nang kwlta this bag of money of mine; iyo ng na ng kumalabg that
first thing which made a thud; It ng bhay ang binili k. This house
is what I bought, It's this house I've bought, This is the house I've
bought ( 102 ff.).

Under emphasis the demonstrative pronoun may both precede and follow:
ito ng to ng it this man here, iyo ng to ng yan that man over
there.

131. The interrogative pronouns precede; ang is not used ( 65). See
also kanno,  168. The meanings of the interrogative pronouns as
conjunctive attributes are:

sno which? (of several known people): snu ng to? which one? which
ones?

aln which? (of several known things): al ng lugr which place,
which places? al ng band? which way? (e. g. at a cross-roads)
al ng manga bnga? which fruits? which ones of the fruits?

an what? what kind of? (of persons or things not known), also, in
exclamations, what...! what great...! Anu ng log it? What river
is this? ano ng band? what direction? which way? (of all possible
points of the compass) anu ng to what sort of a person? what sort
of people? who? Ano ng hna`! What weakness!

132. The numerative pronouns mostly precede, and the use of ang
is optional ( 66, end); ib other, however, requires ang when, as
conjunctive attribute, it begins an object phrase. Of the others,
karamhan most and the particle bwat every are not used in this
construction, and laht all occurs only as modifier of the personal
pronouns, which (by  129) precede. The particle bla any, on the
other hand, occurs only as conjunctive attribute: ang iba ng bhay
the other house, another house, sila ng laht they all, all of them,
bla ng to any person, anyone, ang bla ng to any one (of a given
group), bo ng byan all the town, everybody in town, ang bo ng byan
the entire town, everybody in the town, il ng to ng matalno a few
intelligent men, ang il ng sandal` a few moments.

133. The cardinal numerals usually precede; ang is optional ( 67):
isa ng itlg one egg, an egg; ang isa ng itlg the one egg.

134. The tens, hundreds, etc. of the cardinal numerals are always
modified by is one or a higher unit. The phrase so formed precedes
that counted. The higher numerals are: p` ten, dan, ran hundred,
lbo thousand, laks` million, yta` billion: isa ng p ng to,
s m pu ng to ten men, pat na ra ng bhay four-hundred houses.

135. The teens are expressed by lab preceding the simple numerals
as conjunctive modifier: lab ng is ng aklt eleven books, lab ng
tatl ng raw thirteen days.

136. The Spanish numerals, however, (used in dates,  67) follow:
ang ta ng mle-nobisyntos-ds the year 1902.

137. sarle self (see  175) is used as a conjunctive attribute in
the sense of own: Wal sya ng sarli ng bat. He has no self-respect
(literally: own respect).

138. Of the modifiers that form expressions of indefinite quantity
all except my precede as conjunctive attributes; for examples see 
69 f. In object expressions malon, malak and marmi do not differ
from normal conjunctive attributes; examples in  70.

139. Expressions of indefinite quantity as units may stand in
conjunctive attribution. They then have possessive value: ang hre
ng may sngay the king who had horns; ang kaptol na wala ng dhon
the part without leaves.

140. Conjunctive attribution includes many cases which in English
would be envisaged rather as appositions of two objects: ang bta
ng si Hwn the boy Juan, si Hw ng Bbas Juan the Jester, Sya y may
tnga ng pamlo`. He has hold of a stick. Tngan that grasped, thing
grasped is conjunctive attribute of pamlo` club, stick. ang magnak
na sina Bantg the Bantog family, tatl ng magkakayibga ng estudynte
ng magkababyan three friends (ng) students (ng) fellow-townsmen,
i. e. three student friends from the same town; ang tatl ng
magkakaybga ng si Pdro, si Hwn, at si Andrs the three friends,
Pedro, Juan, and Andrs; ang salit ng "bmos" the word "vamos".

141. When a longer expression is used as a conjunctive attribute
of quality, it usually follows, and na is often preferred to ng:
ang parsa na hind mo gust the punishment not by-you liked,
i. e. the punishment you don't like; is ng us ng nangnginin sa
gbat a deer grazing in the jungle; ang is (sa manga kaybgan nil)
na sya ng magging hukm one (of their friends) who will be judge;
cf. the predicates described in  106. ang manga kra na sya ng manga
malilit na hre` the priests (who are) those (who are) little kings,
i. e. the priests, those veritable little kings.

142. An object expression is frequently followed by an entire
predication of the type described in  113, as conjunctive attribute:
Ang tagahle ay isa ng to ng ang katungklan ay humle nang ano mn o
sno mn. A catcher is a person (whose) duty is to catch anything or
anyone. ang manga pno-ng-khoy na masasarp ang bnga trees (whose)
fruits are tasty; isa ng to ng malak ang kapangyarhan a person
(whose) power is great.



(2) Conjunctive attributes of manner.

143. Conjunctive attributes of manner precede or follow. When they
precede a predicate they stand as the first orthotonic word and are
immediately followed by enclitics (such as an enclitic subject pronoun,
 89), after which comes the na or ng, and then the central element of
the predicate: Sy y mabte ng tumugtg. She plays (music) well. This
example illustrates the identity of conjunctive attributes of manner
and of quality, for mabte ng tumugtg may be looked upon indifferently
as a transient predicate ( 92) with mabte well as attribute of
manner, or as an indefinite object predicate ( 109) a good player,
in which mabte good is an attribute of quality. Other forms of
the same sentence are: Mabti sya ng tumugtg. (siy enclitic),
Sy y tumugtg na mabti. So further: Ispin mo ng mabti. Consider
it well. Literally: Be-considered by-you (m enclitic) well. Iyn
ay ttbo na mabti. It will grow well. Sil y magkakasma ng
nagsipamarl. They as-companions (i. e. in company, together) went
hunting. Or: They were companion (quality) hunters. Madal sya ng
tumakb. Quickly he ran. Talag ng mahigpt ang tapn nang bte ng
iyn. The stopper of that bottle is certainly tight. Mahigpt tight,
as central element of the predicate, is modified by talag fated,
by fate, by nature, certainly. Putik ng dumatng si Salamn sa
bhay. "Mirror" (as name of a dog) came home all muddy. Or: ... was a
muddy comer. Paputl nya ng tinag` ang bisg ni Hwn. He cut Juan's
arm transversely. Kinalaykay k ng patipn ang manga sang ng malilit
nang khoy. I raked into-a-heap the twigs of-the trees.

144. A phrase of more than one word usually follows that modified;
frequently na is used instead of ng: Ndala ny na hind sinsady`
sa kanya ng pagals ang ki ng pyong. Was-taken by-him not intendedly
in his departing my umbrella, i. e. In leaving he inadvertently took
my umbrella.

145. The numerative pronoun laht is used as a conjunctive attribute of
manner in the sense of entirely, completely. It follows that modified:
Ang manga lalagyn ay pna ng laht. The containers are entirely full.

146. Expressions of indefinite quantity as conjunctive attributes
of manner follow: Ang manga to ay nagtakbha ng wal ng tto. The
people all ran without order, in disorder.

147. The particles lubh` very and llo` more usually precede: Lubh
ng malak ang glit ni Pdro. Pedro's wrath was very great. Llu ng
lumak ang kanya ng glit. His wrath grew still greater.

148. The particle mul` again follows: Ttakbo sya ng mul`. He will
run again. Ang kamakalaw ay hind na drating na mul`. The day
before yesterday will never come again.

149. A conjunctive attribute of manner may express the time throughout
which: Sy y nanggupt at nanghit na malo ng panahn. He did
hair-cutting and shaving for a long time. Sil y nagttira na tatlu
ng raw. They stay three days. May ila ng bw ng ang manga tos ay
mahihigpt. For several months (literally: having several months, 
69, end) the orders were strict.

150. A word repeated as its own conjunctive attribute of manner
expresses a high degree (intensity): Sya y bing. He is deaf. Sya
y bing ng bing. He is stone deaf. Int si Pdro. Pedro is hot,
is angry. Int na int si Pdro. Pedro is in a rage. lhim na lhim
very secretly, malak ng malak very large.



(3) Conjunctive attributes as complements.

151. The general sphere of conjunctive attribution includes cases where
one element involves another as result or content. The latter follows
and is in many instances plainly viewed as the attribute. In some
instances, however, the former may just as well be looked upon as a
modifier, usually of quality, sometimes also of manner. The transition
from these latter types to that of the complement appears, indeed,
in all possible stages, and no real boundary can be drawn. Sya y
mabti ng tumugtg (nang piyno). She is a good player (of the piano),
or She plays (the piano) well,--see  143--can be analyzed also: She
is good that (she, anaphoric subject omitted,  87) plays the piano;
and in some instances this last analysis is the only possible one.

Other examples illustrating the merging of the three types we
have set up are the following: Malpit na siya ng makatpos nang
karra. He was already near that (he) end his course, i. e. near
ending his course, almost through his course; or: a near ender,
cf. isa ng bya ng malpit a near-by town. Ang pagmamarnong ni Hwn
ay gingawa ng katatawann nang manga nakkkilla sa kany. Juan's
pretending to be wise is made fun of by those who know him, literally:
... is-being-made (gingaw`) that (it) is a laughing-stock, or else:
... a being-made laughing-stock. Cf. ang gaw ng hkay the to-be-made
ditch, i. e. the ditch that is to be made, where only the quality
interpretation is possible. Magtlin ka ng lumkad. Walk faster. This
can be interpreted as Be a fast walker, or Walk faster, or Be-quick
that (you) walk; and this last interpretation comes nearest to the
original in so far as magtlin is an active transient form used
in commands rather than an expression suited to an idea of quality
or of manner. Sya y nagddahil ng may sakt. He alleges that (he)
is sick. Ang pagsaky sa kabyo ay hind maga ng pagarlan. Riding
horseback is not easy that (it) be-learned, i. e. not easy to learn,
or: not an easy thing-to-be-learned. ang pinakamahsay na magsalit`
nang Latn the best that (he) should speak Latin, or: the best speaker
of Latin; Hwag k, Hwn, pumsuk na sekrta. Don't go as a spy (or to
be a spy), Juan. Ginaw nya si Hwn na barbro nang hre`. Was-made
by-him Juan that (he) be barber of-the king, i. e. He made Juan barber
royal. Si Hwn ay pinammagatn nang marmi na isa ng dokt. Juan is
reputed by the people that (he) is (i. e. as) a learned man.

152. The simplest cases are those where both of the expressions
connected by na, ng refer to the same person or thing, as in the
above examples. The following are less doubtful cases of complement
construction of this kind: Nagppumlit sya ng mtto. He strives to
get educated. Si Hwn at si Mary ay nagksundo ng pakasl. Juan and
Maria have agreed that they (i. e. to) get married. Inanyhan sil
ni Hwn na magpasyl. They were invited by Juan that they (i. e. to)
go walking. Mari mo ng ng ihlug sa koryo ang ki ng slat? Can
you please mail my letter? Literally: mari ... ng ihlug a possible
thing-to-be thrown or capable that (it) be thrown. Nari ak ng malgo
maklawa maghpon. I am able that (I) bathe (i. e. to bathe) twice
a day. Pinabayan niya kam ng umals. We were permitted by him to
depart. Hinanty nya ng matpus ang msa. The mass was-awaited by-him
that it end, i. e. He waited until the mass was ended. An ang gustu mu
ng sabhin? What is desired by-you that (it) be-said? i. e. What do you
mean to say? Hind ko gust ng mkatlo si Hwn. Not by-me desired that
(he) be-opposed is Juan, i. e. I don't want Juan to be my opponent.

153. Clear cases of the complement construction are those in which
the two elements connected refer to different persons or things:
Nagyay sya ng umuw`. He advised that (they, anaphoric) go home. (34,
12.) Ang pagkmasd nya sa lngit ay sy ng nagpakilla sa kany na
uln. His glance at the sky was what showed him that (it, see  84)
was going to rain.

154. When the former of the two elements is an object expression (or
similar element) the complement construction is evident: ang kaibig
ng mtto the desire that (he) get educated, i. e. the desire to
get an education. ang pagkgusto ny na kumin nang nyg his desire
that (he) should-eat cocoanuts, i. e. to eat.... Anu ng tagl nya ng
sumsid! What endurance of-him that (he) stay under water! i. e. How
long he stays under water! Ano ng hna mo ng lumkad! What slowness
of-you that (you) walk! i. e. How slowly you walk! Ang tagasuls ay
isa ng babye ng may katungkla ng manah` o manuls nang manga pnit
nang damt. A darning-woman is a woman having the duty that (she) patch
or mend the small holes in clothing, i. e. ... whose duty is to....

155. A further sign that the speech-feeling envisages the complement
construction as different from the constructions of quality or
manner appears when enclitics follow the first word of the complement
(i. e. of the second of the connected elements) rather than the first
word of the sentence: this shows that the complement is viewed as a
relatively independent element within the sentence: Mari ng ng ihlug
mo sa koryo ang ki ng slat? Should-be-capable that (it) be-thrown
by-you into the mail (predicate) my letter (subject)? i. e. Can you
please mail my letter? Cf. under  152 above.

156. Very frequently the complement is an entire predication: ang
panukla` na ang pno` ay ttbo` the thought that the tree will
grow; pagktanaw ny na dumrating ang sus` (at the) seeing by-him
i. e. when he sees that the snail is arriving; ang raw na kay ay
dpat magsipagssi the day that (i. e. when) you ought to repent;
Nagkkaplad ang mannbok na mkta nya ang klam. The spier has the
good fortune that be-seen by-him the magic principle, i. e. ... to
see....

157. A predication as complement is often parallel with a disjunctive
object modifier, i. e. with an object expression used as direct,
instrumental, or local object ( 184 ff.): Sya y nagsbi ng sya
y marnong gumupt nang buhk. He said that he knew how to cut
hair. Ang bulg ay nagakla ng gaw ng katatawann ang pagkahlog nang
kba`. The blindman thought that the falling of the hunchback should
be made (sc. niy by-him, anaphoric) that (it) be a laughing-stock,
i. e. decided to make fun of the falling ...; that which one says or
thinks, with sbi and akla`, is also expressed as a direct object.

158. Similarly, predications as complements are, in impersonal
constructions, parallel with a subject: Sinbi nya ng sya y marnong
gumupt nang buhk. Was-said by-him that he was able to cut hair,
i. e. He said he knew how to cut hair. Hind bihra` na ang isa ng
to y pamagat ng mdiko-ng-mangkuklam. It is not rare that a man is
reputed as a witch-doctor. Cf. the example of predication as subject
in  116. Hinilng nya sa ungg` na dikdikn sya sa lusng. It was
begged by him of the monkey that he be brayed in the mortar, i. e. He
begged the monkey to bray him in the mortar. Pinabayan niya na kam
y umals. It was allowed by him that we depart, i. e. He allowed us
to depart, a less usual form than that in  152. Totoo ng na ak
y naparon sa Balwag. It is true that I went to Baliwag. Mari p
ba ng kay y maghint`? Will it be possible please that you should
stop? i. e. Can you please stop? Insip nya ng magnkaw sa isa
ng tindhan. It was planned by him that (he) rob a shop, i. e. He
planned to.... Iniytus nya ng humkay. It was ordered by him that
(one, see  86) should dig, i. e. He ordered people to dig. Hind
mo gust ng mhle ka. Not by-you it-is-desired that you be-caught,
i. e. You don't want to be caught.

159. A direct quotation may have the same construction as a
predication: Sinbi nya ng "Bmos!" It-was-said by-him, namely
"Vamos!" i. e. He said "Vamos!"



b. Disjunctive attributes.

160. Only object expressions are used as disjunctive attributes,
and all object expressions have a special form for this use.

161. Those beginning with ang substitute for this particle the atonic
particle nang: ang pno nang ungg` the tree of the monkey, ang laruwn
nang bta ng si Hwn the toy of the boy Juan; little Juan's toy, toys.

162. Those beginning with si ( 59. 126) substitute for this
the atonic particle ni; those beginning with sin (or sil,  60)
substitute nil (or nin), pretonic: ang am ni Hwn Juan's father,
ang bhay nila Hwn the house of Juan and his family.

163. The personal pronouns as disjunctive attributes take the
following forms: k my, nit of us two, ntin our (inclusive),
nmin our (exclusive); m thy, niniy, niny your; niy, ny his,
her, nil their.

The monosyllabic forms k and m are always enclitic, the others
usually: Hind ko nllman. I don't know, literally: Not by-me (it)
is-known. ang bhay nya his, her house, ang mahahba nya ng pa his
long legs, ang hind karanywa ng talno ny his unusual talents
(niy not enclitic).

164. When these enclitics meet an enclitic subject, they precede,
unless by the general rule ( 47) the monosyllabic subject k
precedes a disyllabic disjunctive (including niy, ny): San mo sya
nkta? Where by-you he was-seen? i. e. Where did you see him? Binigyn
nya ak nang aklt. Was-given by-him I a book, i. e. He gave me
a book. Bak mo iyn mblag. Perhaps by-you it might-be-blinded,
i. e. See that you don't blind it. Hind ka nmin dinatnn. Not you
by-us were found-there, i. e. We did not find you in.

165. The personal pronouns have another form, which is used as
a conjunctive attribute of quality (cf.  124, end) and always
precedes that modified: its meaning, however, is the same as that of
the disjunctive forms just given. These prepositive forms are: kin
my, kanit thy and my, tin our (inclusive), min our (exclusive);
iy thy, iniy, iny your; kaniy, kany his, her, kanil their,
kan-kanil their respective, several, various.

Examples: An ang iyo ng nglan? What is your name? or: An ang nglan
mo? ang ki ng am my father, or: ang ama k, ang kanya ng bhay his,
her house, ang kany ng mahahba ng pa his long legs, ang kanit
ng kwalt our money (i. e. thine and mine), ang kan-kanil ng bhay
their several houses.

Only a demonstrative pronoun modifier precedes these prepositive forms:
iy ng iyo ng samballo ng lma` that old hat of yours. Exceptions
are rare: ang karanywa ng kanila ng kantahn their usual song;
what they usually sing.

166. The demonstrative pronouns, whether standing alone ( 64)
or as modifiers at the beginning of an object expression ( 130),
have the following disjunctive forms: nir of this (right here),
nit of this, niyn, nyn of that, niyn, nyn, non of that (over
there). Ang klay nir ng korbta ng ir ay nppagtan sa itm at
sa pul. The color of this necktie (I have on) is between black and
red. ang dlo nit the end of this, ang ank niyn that one's child
(e. g. with pointing gesture), ang bhay niyo ng to ng yan the house
of that man over there, ang ank noo ng to ng iyn the child of that
man over there. The form non is used chiefly when the disjunctive
attribute expresses time ( 192).

167. The interrogative pronoun sno, whether used alone or standing
first in an object expression as attribute ( 131), has the disjunctive
form nno whose? This form, however, is little used, for, while the
interrogative pronoun is usually emphatic and tends to come first
( 96), a disjunctive attribute follows that modified ( 171). Hence
the form nno is used only under peculiar conditions of emphasis: Ang
samballo nno? Whose hat (did you say)? Ibinigy sa iy nno? Given
to you by whom? Sinbi sa iyo nno? Told to you by whom?

168. Instead of nno a prepositive form, kanno, explicit plural
kan-kanno, is ordinarily used; like the prepositive forms of
the personal pronouns it stands in conjunctive attribution and
precedes that modified. Before it the use of ang is optional (
65.131); when ang is used the expression is more definite: Kanno
ng samballo? Whose hat? (the ownership of a given hat is inquired
after) Ang kanno ng samballo? Whose hat? (the ownership of each
hat is known; the question asks merely which of them is involved)
Kanno ng aklt iyn? Whose book have you there?

169. The prepositive forms of the personal pronouns and of sno are
used also as static predicates expressing possession: Ang libr ng
binbsa mo kahpon ay kin. The book you were reading last night is
mine. Kanno ang aklt na iyn? Whose is that book? Kan-kanno ang
manga bhay na it? Whose are these houses? The personal pronouns
may be followed by sarle own (cf.  137): Ang laruw ng it y ki
ng sarle. This toy is my own.

170. All other expressions which lack ang,--that is, the remaining
interrogative pronouns, the numerative pronouns, the cardinal numerals,
and object expressions in which these as modifiers stand first (
131 ff.),--prefix nang, atonic, when used as disjunctive attributes:
Sa itas nang an? On top of what? Takp nang al ng kahn it? Of
which box is this the cover? ang panukl nang karamhan the opinion
of the majority; Nakkta ak nang isa ng to. I saw a man.

171. All disjunctive attributes are closely joined and follow that
which they modify. The only exceptions are the enclitic pronoun forms
and expressions of time ( 192). A disjunctive attribute precedes a
subject: Binigyn nya nang aklt si Hwn. He gave Juan some books. When
the subject is enclitic, it of course precedes: Binigyn nya si Hwn
nang aklt. Real exceptions, in which a non-enclitic subject precedes
a disjunctive attribute, are not common: Ipinakkipagptol ni Hwn si
Pdro nang labng. Juan is asking someone to cut some bamboo-shoots
for Pedro.

172. In meaning disjunctive attribution includes almost all cases
in which an object element is viewed as the attribute of another
element in the sentence. The only exception is the sphere of relations
expressed by local attribution ( 195 ff.). The meanings may, very
roughly, be divided into seven groups: (1) possessive-partitive, (2)
agent, (3) direct object, (4) instrumental object, (5) local object,
(6) manner, (7) time.

173. (1) Possessive-partitive modifier: ang kanya ng bhay, ang
bhay nya his house, ang pno nang ungg` the tree of the monkey,
ang pno nang khoy the tree (literally head of wood), ang pno nang
sging the banana-tree, Sa itas nang an? On top of what? Nasnog
ang kalaht nang pno`. Half of the tree got burned up. Ang byad
sa tang ni Pdro ay lbis nang dalaw ng pso. The payment made to
settle Pedro's debt is too great by two pesos. ang ras nang alaskwtro
the hour of four o'clock, Is ng sundlo ng marnung nang Latn. A
soldier who knew Latin, literally: having-knowledge of Latin. ang
sko nang play a rice-sack (cf.  127), ang lar nang barha a game
of cards, cf. ang lar ng tagun ( 127) a game consisting of hiding,
hide-and-seek, ang katapusn nang gab the end of the night; cf. ang
katapus ng gab the night which was the end, the last night, ang
il ng sandal nang pagsaslitan a few moments of the conversation;
cf. ang il ng sandal ng pagsaslitan a few moments (which consisted)
of conversation. Note: ang byan nang Balwag the town of Baliwag,
ang provnsya nang Pampnga the province of Pampanga.

174. The pronoun laht as an object expression is followed by this
kind of attribute: laht nang to all (of) the people.

175. As an object expression sarle self is modified by disjunctive
pronouns: ang kany ng sarle his self. Similarly sarle as conjunctive
attribute, in the sense of own: Wal sya ng bat sa kanya ng sarli. He
does not do even himself any good. ang sarle nila ng bnda nang
msika their own band of music; Ang kanya ng sarli ng barl ang
kanya ng ginmit. It was his own gun he used, What he used was his
own gun. Cf.  137 and 169, end.

176. The modifier may be an entire predication: sa lugr nang magkasir
sil in place of the (occurrence that) they should become enemies,
i. e. instead of their becoming enemies.

177. Here belongs further the disjunctive attribute with words
expressing association, companionship, or equality: Si Hwna ay
siy ng kablngan ni Mary. Juana is the one with whom Maria is
whispering. Ang msa ng it ay kasingklay nang kahn. This table is
of the same color as the chest. Si Hwn ay kapanty ni Pdro. Juan
is of the same height as Pedro. Kalkip nang slat ko ng it ay lim
ng pso. Enclosed with this my letter are five pesos. gya ko like me.

178. Similar is the use of a disjunctive modifier expressing one of
the objects, with expressions involving dual or plural ideas: sil
ni Mary they with Maria, i. e. Maria and he (88,42), sil ng dalaw
ni Mary (92,17).

179. Here belongs the disjunctive attribute in exclamatory sentences
expressing the high degree of a quality; these are formed with an
( 131) and with words with prefix ka- ( 76): Ano ng hna mo! What
weakness of-you! i. e. How weak you are! Anu ng luwt nang hind
nya pagdatng! What duration of his not arriving! i. e. How long he
is getting here! Kapul nang panyo ng iyn! What-great-redness of
that handkerchief! i. e. How red that handkerchief is! Karnong nang
bta ng si Hwn! How much little Juan knows! Kaytipd na bta` ni
Hwn! How-saving a child of Juan! i. e. What an economical boy Juan is!

180. In the preceding and related constructions the attribute may be an
entire predication: Kamunt nang mtaman ang bta`! What-little-lack
of the (occurrence that) the child should-be-hit! i. e. How near
the child came to being hit! Munt nang mliguwak ang dala ny ng
pult. Little-wanting of-the (occurrence that) should-be-spilled
the borne by-him honey, i. e. The honey he was carrying came near
being spilled.

181. (2) A disjunctive attribute expressing the agent corresponds
in sense to the subject of an active transient predicate. When it
modifies a transient word, the corresponding active can be formed:
Sinlat nya ang lham. He wrote the letter; literally: Was-written
by-him (agent) the letter. Isinlat nya ang kwnto. He wrote down the
story. Sinultan nya ak. He wrote to me. The corresponding active
is: Sy y sumlat.... He wrote.... Cf.  92. So further: Pintol
nya ang khoy. The wood was cut by him; active: Sy y pumtol nang
khoy. He cut some wood. Kinha nya ang libr. The book was taken
by him; active: Sy y kumha nang libr. He took some book. ki ng
binitwan ang bte. By-me was-let-go-of the bottle, i. e. I let go of
the bottle; active: Bumitw ak.... Ang hinirm nya ng kampt ay iyo
ng knin. The borrowed by-him (agent) kitchen-knife by-you (agent)
is to be taken, i. e. Take the kitchen-knife he borrowed.

When the word modified is not transient no clear line can be drawn
between disjunctive attributes of agent and of possessor: ang kany
ng pagdatng his arrival, his arriving, or: the arriving by him,
ang gmit nya ng libr the book used by him, ang paup ni Hw ng
sglan the gambling-party invited by Juan, ang dala ny ng pult
the honey he is or was carrying, Ang lar ng tagun ay gust nang
manga bta`. The game of hide-and-seek is liked by children. Hind ko
gust ang libr ng it; ib ang ki ng gust. I don't want this book;
it is a different one I want.

182. When disjunctive agent is the speaker (k by me or its substitute
ki ng) and the subject is the person addressed (ikw, k thou), the
pronoun kit usually takes the place of both. This is the commoner
value of kit (cf.  63): Ssungangin kit. I'll smash your face; the
subject of this direct passive expression is the person addressed, the
agent the speaker: Ikw ay ki ng ssungangin would be an unidiomatic
equivalent. Ipagllaba kit nang damt. I shall wash your clothes for
you. The predicate is instrumental passive, with you, the person for
whom, as subject. Hhatdan kit nang gtas. I shall deliver milk to
you; local passive.

Occasionally the agent is redundantly added: Kit ay ki ng
parrushan. I shall punish you.

183. A disjunctive agent is used with the words expressing recent
completion of an act with prefix ka- and reduplication: ( 77):
Karrating ko pa lmang! I have only just arrived. Kakkin ko pa
lmang! I have only just finished eating.

184. (3) A disjunctive attribute expressing the direct object
corresponds to the subject of a direct passive transient predicate: Sya
y kumin nang knin. He ate some boiled rice. Passive: Kinin nya ang
knin. Was-eaten by-him the boiled rice, i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

It will be seen that when the direct object is definite it is more
likely to serve as subject of a passive predicate ( 94); hence
the disjunctive attribute expressing a direct object has often an
indefinite partitive value. Sy y sumlat nang lham. He wrote some
letters. Sy y pumtol nang khoy. He cut some wood. Bigyn mo ak
niy ng tbig. Give me some of that water. Kattagpi ko niyn! I
have just finished mending that! Sya y naghinty nang ssabhin nang
sundlo. He awaited that which was going to be said by the soldier.

185. (4) A disjunctive attribute expressing the instrument corresponds
to the subject of an instrumental passive transient predicate:
Sy y sumlat nang kwnto. He wrote down a story, stories. Passive:
Isinlat nya ang kwnto. Was-written-down by-him the story, i. e. He
wrote down the story.

The indefinite value of the disjunctive attribute is here due to the
same relation as in the preceding type. Pintol nya nang glok ang
khoy. The wood was cut by him with a bolo; instrumental passive:
Ipintol nya nang khoy ang glok. Was-used-for-cutting by-him of
wood the bolo, i. e. He cut wood with the bolo. Binigyn nya ak nang
aklt. He gave me a book.

186. So a direct quotation or an entire predication: Ang bulg
ay sumigw nang "Tatl!" The blindman shouted "Three!"; passive:
Isinigw nang bulg ang "Tatl!" Ang bwat isa sa kanil ay sumagt
nang sngay ang kanila ng nkkta. Each one answered that horns were
what they saw.

187. (5) Disjunctive attributes of place correspond to the subject of
a local passive transient predication: Sy y pumanhk nang bhay. He
entered a house; passive: Pinanhikn nya ang bhay. He entered the
house. Ang pagng ay nagumpis nang pagsisigw. The turtle began (a)
shouting; passive: Inumpisahn nang pagng ang pagsisigw.

These attributes are in meaning rather close to local attributes
( 203); as opposed to the latter they are, however, the real
correspondents of the subject of a local passive transient predication,
expressing a real participation of the object in the action or
occurrence,--whereas the local attributes express the place of the
action as something more or less unaffected and independent.

188. (6) Disjunctive attributes of manner do not correspond to any
kind of subject. When they are used with a transient word the sentence
may, however, be reversed so as to make of the attribute a transient
predicate of a sentence in which the action (as subject) is spoken
of as being "made such and such". Tumakb sya nang matlin. He ran
fast. The words nang matlin are the disjunctive form of an object
expression, ang matlin, which would resemble German das schnelle. Our
sentence corresponds to: Tinulnan nya ang pagtakb. Was-made-fast
by-him his running, He ran fast. Sy y tumwa nang malaks. He
laughed aloud, cf. Inilakas ny ang pagtwa. He made his laughing
loud. ... mnkaw nang hind nito nllman should be stolen in the
manner of not by-him known, i. e. should be stolen without his knowing
it. matas nang kaunt` higher by a little, a little higher.

189. Expressions of indefinite quantity are used in this way: Sil
y nagtakbhan nang wala ng hint`. They ran without stopping. This
construction is in rivalry with that of conjunctive attribution
( 146).

190. The demonstrative pronouns and the interrogative pronoun an are
not used as attributes of manner; for this value they have separate
derivatives: ganit, ganiyn, gayn or ganon, and gano or gno. These
forms, moreover, occur also as static predicates and as conjunctive
attributes of quality: ang bwat sumagt nang ganit every one who
answered in this way; this could be viewed also as an instrumental
object. Ganit ang kalgyan nil. Their condition was like this. ang
ganit ng manga paglalar` such games as this; Ganyn ba lmang ang
knis mo? Is your skill merely like that? Nakslat ak kay Hwn nang
gayn dahiln sa malak ko ng pagkaglit. I came to write like that
(or such things, cf. instrumental object) to Juan through my great
anger. Ganon ang ki ng pagkring. That was the way (i. e. the form
in which) I heard the thing. Ang gay ng pananalit` that manner of
speaking, that expression. gnu ng pagplit? how much effort? Gano ang
pagkakagalt nila? How great, how serious is their quarrel? (Cf.  96).

191. A special case of the disjunctive attribute of manner is the
repetition of a word as its own disjunctive modifier, expressing
continuity or insistence of action: Humb nang humba`. It grew
longer and longer. Ang kanila ng bon ay umunt nang umunt`. Their
provisions grew less and less. Si Hwn ay twa nang twa. Juan laughs
and laughs. Bil nang bil si Hwn nang play. Juan keeps buying rice.

192. (7) Disjunctive attributes of time express the time when of an
occurrence in the past. They differ from other disjunctive attributes
in being often loosely joined, in which case they may precede. Pumaron
sila nang hpon. They went there in the afternoon. So: nang umga
in the morning, no ng tagraw (nang ta ng mle-nobisyntos-ds)
in the summer (of the year 1902). Nang umuln ay ginmit ko ang
kapte. When it rained I used my rain-coat. Nlkad sina Pdro nang
hind ras. Pedro and his party had to start at a time not planned;
literally: when not time.

193. Complete predications as disjunctive attributes of time are
common. It is as though the whole predication were objectivized:
Nang dumatng ako don ay sya y wal na. When I arrived there he
was already gone. Noo ng sya y bgo ng to pa lmang.... When he was
still but a young man....

194. Anaphorically determined disjunctive attributes are often
omitted. big nya ng knin ang sha`. Desired by-him that
be-eaten (by-him) the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the
grape-fruit. Nanghing sya sa kanya ng manga kapatd. He asked his
brothers and sisters (for some). Hind nila sya binigyn. He was not
given (any) by them, They did not give him any.



c. Local attributes.

195. An object expression in local attribution expresses a local
circumstance of that which is modified, such as the place in, to,
or from which, that from whose midst, that about which or owing to
which, the person to whom, etc.

196. In this construction initial si is replaced by kay (atonic),
sin by kin (pretonic), and ang by sa (atonic); object expressions
which begin with none of these particles take sa: Si Pdro ay galt
kay Hwn. Pedro is angry at Juan. Nakitluy kam kina Pdro. We asked
hospitality of Pedro's family. Sy y nanog sa bhay. He came out of
his house. sa boo ng byan in the whole town.

Rarely both sa and kay precede a personal name: It y ntto sa kay
Maystro ng Hwn. This one got his training from Teacher Juan. ang
pagkbhay nang mdiko sa kay Hwn the doctor's saving of Juan's life.

197. The personal pronouns and sno take their prepositive forms after
sa: Ibinigy nya sa kin ang aklt. Was-given by-him to me the book,
i. e. He gave me the book.

198. In a peculiar construction these prepositive forms are preceded
by the particle gan as a conjunctive attribute, in the sense of so
far as ... is concerned: Sa gan ng kin sya y mari ng umals. So
far as I am concerned he may leave.

199. The demonstrative pronouns and an never stand in local
attribution, see  263 f.

200. Whole predications are rarely used as local attributes:

Dumatng ang dalga ng it sa dalawa ng p ng tan ang glang. This
young woman arrived at (the time when) her age was twenty years,
i. e. reached the age of twenty years.

201. Local attributes are mostly closely joined and as a rule follow
that which they modify, taking precedence of a disjunctive attribute
or of a subject: ang nagbigy sa kin nang aklt na it the giver to
me of this book, the one who gave me this book (Bayad n) ang tang
sa kin ni Hwn. Juan's debt to me (has been paid). Ibigy mo kay Hwn
ang libr. Be-given by-you to Juan the book, i. e. Give Juan the book.

Often, however, a disjunctive attribute which is felt to belong closely
to what precedes, comes before a local attribute: Bayad-tang ni Hwn
sa kin ang rels na it. This watch is Juan's debt-payment to me.

Occasionally the local attribute precedes the expression modified:
Sy y sa bangk` nang manga babe nakkisaky. He goes along into the
canoe of the women. Sa kabil ng band mo ibwl ang pno ng iyn. Make
that tree fall in the direction away from me.

202. Very frequently, however, local attributes are loosely joined,
preceding or following; in the former case ay, y is sometimes omitted:
Sa Bya-ng-San-Migl ay nangyre ang isa ng nakawn. In the town of San
Miguel a robbery took place. Hind makaddala si Pdro nang kahn sa
kabigatn nil. Pedro will not be able to carry any boxes, on account
of their heaviness. Sa gan ng kin sya y mari ng umals. So far
as I am concerned he can go. ( 198).

203. We have seen that disjunctive attribution expresses the relation
of objects (direct object, local object, instrumental object, 
184, 185, 187) to an action, provided that these objects are more
or less indefinite. If they are quite definite, they are preferably
made subjects in a passive construction. Frequently, however, they
are instead put into local attribution, which thus competes with these
types of disjunctive attribution, but involves a more definite object:
Ang bhay na bat ay ang ki ng pinaghhatdn nang gtas. The stone
house is the place to which I am delivering milk (instrumental object),
i. e. I am delivering milk to the stone house; but: Ang bhay na bat
ay ang ki ng pinaghhatdn sa bta`. The stone house is where I am
bringing the child. (nang bta` would be a child or children).

It follows that the personal pronouns, which always refer to definite
persons, cannot stand as disjunctive objects of transient words,
but stand instead in local attribution: Ang bhay na bat ay ang ki
ng pinaghhatdn sa kany. The stone house is the place where I am
taking him.

Similarly a personal name: Ibigy mo kay Hwn ang libr. Give Juan
the book; cf. Bigyn mo nang libr si Hwn. Give Juan a book; "Juan"
could not figure as disjunctive local object.

204. In many cases, however, these local attributes differ from
disjunctive attributes and from the corresponding subjects of passive
constructions: the local attribute represents the object as more
externally involved and less thoroughly concerned in the occurrence:
Humkay sila nang bakran. They dug up some yards. Hinukyan nil ang
bakran. They dug up the yard. In both sentences a serious change,
such as unauthorized tampering, is implied; but: Humkay sila sa
bakran. They dug in the yard, merely tells where they did their
digging. Sya y pumanhk nang bhay. He entered a house (or houses),
perhaps illicitly; the house is viewed as in some way affected
or intimately involved in the action; so also: Pinanhikn nya ang
bhay. He entered the house; but: Sya y pumanhk sa bhay. He went
into the house, He went into his house.

205. In other cases, where a transient predicate is not involved,
the same difference appears: the local attribute is a mere scene or
attendant circumstance, the disjunctive a real factor: Ang pagtatbon
nang manga hkay na it ay tapus n. The filling up of these ditches
is now finished, i. e. These ditches are filled up now; but: Ang
pagtatbon sa manga hkay ay mahrap. Filling earth into ditches is
hard work. karamhan nang manga to most of the people; karamhan sa
kanil most of them; sa ganit under these circumstances; nang ganit
( 190) thus, in this manner.

206. Expressions of time as local attributes denote future time when;
occasionally also past time: Pparon ak sa makalaw. I shall go
there the day after tomorrow. So: sa lnes next Monday, cf. no ng
lnes last Monday. Pho ak ng pparon sa alasngko. I will surely
go there at five o'clock. Sa gabi ng iyn.... That night....

207. With jussive words with prefix pa- (see Morphology) the person
ordered to do so-and-so is viewed as a local feature: Ipinagupt ko sa
barbro ng si Hwn ang buhk ni Andrs. Was-ordered-to-be-cut by-me
of-the barber Juan the hair of Andrs, i. e. I ordered the barber
Juan to cut Andrs' hair.

208. Rarely an expression in local attribution is used as a conjunctive
attribute in an object expression: it precedes and has the meaning
of a disjunctive attribute of possessor: ang sa ib ng to ng kawyan
other people's bamboo, or: ang kawyan nang ib ng to.

209. This construction is much commoner when that owned is
anaphorically omitted: ang sa pagng that of the turtle, the turtle's,
i. e. ang pno nang pagng. So: ang sa kany his, hers.

210. In other cases anaphoric omission of an element modified by a
local attribute is less common: ang pagsaky sa trn sa lugr nang sa
karumta the riding on the train in place of the (sc. pagsaky riding)
in the carriage.

211. A static predicate may have the form of a local attribute: Sa
lingg ang ki ng llan sa trn. On (next) Sunday my embarking on the
train, i. e. Next Sunday I shall take the train. Ang uup ng it ay
sa hre`. This seat is for the king.

212. The particle sa has a number of derivatives which are transient
in meaning, but otherwise have the same construction as sa; they are
pretonic. Sya y nsa Maynla`. He is in Manila. Sya y nsa kanya
ng bhay. He is in his house. Ang tinterhan ay nsa bngit nang
lamsa. The inkwell is at the edge of the table. For these forms
see Morphology.



d. Absolute attributes.

213. Absolute attribution, in which no particle is used, is confined to
certain expressions and types of expressions. Some absolute attributes
and some of the particles introducing absolute attributes end in -ng
or -t; these may contain the particle ng or at ( 313).

We may divide the cases of absolute attribution into six types,
although these are not fully distinct from one another: (1) enclitic
particles, (2) prepositive particles, (3) single words used as
attributes of manner and time, (4) absolute complements, (5) words
used with disjunctive and local attributes, (6) words introducing
subordinate phrases or predications.



(1) enclitic particles.

214. The enclitic particles which are used as absolute attributes
follow a monosyllabic enclitic pronoun (k, k, m) but precede a
disyllabic enclitic pronoun (including niy, ny, siy, sy). Among
themselves they follow the general rule: monosyllabic enclitics
precede disyllabic enclitics ( 47).

215. b is expressive of interrogation in yes-and-no questions
and often in others: My-roon ba sil ng ginaw`? Have they
done anything? My-roon ka b ng ggawn? Have you anything to
do? Ipinptol mo ba ak nang tub? Will you cut some sugar-cane for
me? Pinapagpptol ba nila sy nang khoy? Does he get ordered by them
to cut wood? i. e. Do they have him cut wood? Ano b ang inilltu
mo? What is it you are cooking? Anu ba kay? What sort of people are
you? Hind mu ba nkta si Hwn sa teytro? Didn't you see Juan at
the theatre? Ang iyo b ng kapatd? Your sister? See  223. 229.

216. bag throws more stress on the interrogation: Ikw bag y
nagaswa? Did you (ever) get married? See  290. 317.

217. dw, rw expresses that the sentence represents the saying of
someone other than the speaker; the person so quoted may be the agent
of the sentence itself: Pagk pinapagptol mo rw sya nang kawyan ay
llyas sy. When he is ordered by you to cut bamboo, he will leave,
I am told, or: he will leave, he says. Ang paguup raw nya sa dam ay
mabti sa kany. He says (or: They say) his habit of sitting on the
grass is good for him. It is sometimes used pleonastically, see the
example in  278.

218. dn, rn expresses that the expression modified (which may
be the whole sentence or an element within the sentence) is like a
corresponding earlier idea: Ako rn ang nagpalgo sa bta`. It was I,
too, that bathed the child (beside the other things I did), i. e. I
also bathed the child. Si Hwan dn ang naglnis nang kabalyersa. Juan
also cleaned a stable or stables (beside the other things he did). Si
Hwn ay naglnis rn nang kabalyersa. Juan, too, cleaned stables. Here
dn is an attribute of naglnis nang kabalyersa: this act has been
performed by Juan even as by others previously spoken of or known
of. Si Hwna ay naglto nang estopdo; kamakalaw nagltu rin ak
nang estopdo. Juana cooked meat-stew; day-before-yesterday I too
cooked meat-stew. Iyo ng na ng kumalabg ay ak, ang ikalaw ay ako
rn. That first thing which came down with a thud was I, the second
was I again. Nahlog dn sy. He fell down again. Khit na madilm
ang gab ay nagpasyal dn si Pdro. Although the night was dark,
Pedro none the less (i. e. even as at other times) took a walk.

Thus dn is especially common in expressions of identity: Kahpon
ay nakkta ako nang isa ng to sa Maynla`, at ngayn ay nkta ko
ang two r ng iyn sa bya ng it. Yesterday I saw a man in Manila,
and today I saw the same man in this town.

In some instances dn modifies an element not actually identical
with another. Nagtaln sya sa bintna`, dtapuwat sinundn din sy
nang am. He jumped out of a window, but he was followed, too, by
the father. See  221. 227. 238. 239. 262, (11).

219. kay` expresses doubt or possibility of choice: An kay`
ang ipinagtos mo sa kany? What perchance did you order him to
do? Mppagkro` kay nya sa slat na iyn ang big mo ng gawn
nya. Perhaps he may be able to make out from this letter of yours what
you want him to do. Bak kay` magkaputl ang manga tub sa kalakasn
nang hngi ng it. I am afraid that perhaps the sugar-cane may all
break off, what with the strength of this wind.

For another use of kay` see  297; cf.  317. 321.

220. lmang only: Is lmang ang mansnas na ntira sa lamsa. Only one
apple is left on the table. So: isa lmang only a single one. Sila ng
tatl ay wal ng pagkin kung hind ang itlg lmang na nttir. The
three had no food except only the egg that was left.

Occasionally lmang follows the expression it modifies: isa ng ikpat
na part lmang only a fourth part.

Sometimes a na is left off after lmang: kin lmang pinputln nang
buhk. By-me (for kin ... na, ng) only (he, anaphoric) is-getting-cut
of hair, i. e. I am only cutting his hair. siya lmang kkin nang
itlg he (who; normally this relation is expressed by na, ng) will-eat
the egg, i. e. the one who is alone to eat the egg. See  227. 243.

221. mn expresses contrast with what precedes; it is the opposite of
dn, and the two are often used in one sentence to emphasize the point
of difference and that of identity: Si Hwan mn ay naglnis (rn)
nang kabalyersa. Juan, too, cleaned stables (as did others). Ll
n lumak ang glit ni Hwn, nang mbalitan niya ng ang ikalaw mn
nya ng ank ay nagsundlo rn. Juan's anger grew even greater when he
learned that his second son too had (like the other) become a soldier.

With interrogatives mn produces indefinites: Wal ng anu mn. There
is nothing at all; also: Not at all, i. e. You're welcome. ang ano
m ng paskit any kind of injury; ang alin m ng pangkt any team;
snu mn any person whatever, anyone at all. See  227. 248. 262,
(7. 10). 290. 317.

222. mna expresses that that modified precedes another thing:
Magwtan mna tyo, bgo tyo maghiw-hiwaly. Let's sing a song
together (first) before we part. Mangko ka mna... First promise....

223. n takes into view the maturity of a situation (cf. German
schon): Ang libr y gamit n. The book is used already, i. e. is
second-hand. Agad n ng llamg. It will soon be cold now. Palam na
ak (sa iy). Good-bye (to you). Nahnap ko n ang sombrro. I have
already looked for the hat. Nahnap na ny ang sombrro. He has.... ang
malon na nila ng pagpupuyt gabi-gab their long staying up now
every night, i. e. the fact that they have staid up late every night
now. isa na lmang pangkt only a single group now. It precedes b (
215): Nakahand na ba ang ki ng pangpalgo`? Is my bath ready? Gnu
ka na b kaknis? How clever are you by this time?

It is used also in brusque or familiar commands: Pl na sa
kanya ng kamy! Hit him on his hand! Sma na sa kin. Come
to me (to a child). lag ka na riyn! Be off there! See 
224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244.

224. namn expresses transition to another subject, hence often
also mild contrast: Hbang si Hwna ay nagllto`, si Hwn namn
ay nagllnis nang bhay. While Juana is cooking, Juan cleans the
house. Anu ka ba nam ng to? What sort of person are you, anyway? Ib
namn ang gawn mo ng lto sa mank. You are to cook the chicken in a
different way. siya rn namn ny ng karanywa ng kinkin that which,
however, is usually eaten by him.

The combination n namn means again: Manit na namn. It's hot again.

225. naw` pray, please expresses imprecation: Kaawan naw` ninyo
kam, poo ng Dys! Take pity on us, O Lord!

226. ng` is assertive and emphasizing: Oo ng`. Yes indeed. Ikaw
ng` ang nagsbi niyn. You yourself are the one who said that. It
is used in polite requests: Itru nga niny sa kin ang dan. Please
show me the way. Ipakiptol mo ng`, Hwn, ang tinibn sa ki ng
bakran. Please, Juan, cut down for me the banana-stump in my yard. It
follows n: Pakiptol na ng` ang sinlid na it. Please cut this
string for me. See  229.

227. p expresses the immaturity or continuance of a situation
(cf. German noch) and stands in contrast with n. Its meaning is
often emphasized by lmang: mabti p better yet, big ko p nang
knin. I should like some more rice. Hampasn mo pa sy. Whip him some
more. Sarw pa ang damt. The clothes are still wet. It precedes dn
and mn (cf.  248): ang isa pa r ng kluluwa another (i. e. one more)
soul; Hind pa rn lubh ng maliwnag. It was, however, not yet light
enough. Kaggsing ko pa lmang. I have only just waked up. See 
243. 248.

228. pal, used after hind` ( 239), expresses contrast with one's
expectation, reversal: Ang sip ko y balat lmang nang itlg it, hind
pal, kun d` itlg na bo`. I thought this was only an egg-shell,
but no, it was a whole egg.

229. p` is expressive of politeness toward the person addressed:
Oo p`. Yes, sir; Yes, ma'am. Pattawrin p`! Pardon me; used also
in refusing to give alms. Pattawrin po nang il ng sandal`. Excuse
me for a few moments, please. Maghint pu kay. Please stop (plural
or polite singular). Magsihint pu kay. Please stop (explicit
plural). Umup po kay. Please sit down. Maup po kay. Please be
seated. Ikinallungkot ko p` ang kasawi-ng-plad na nangyre sa
iny. I lament the misfortune which has come to you. ang iyo p
ng Kamhlan your Majesty. p` precedes b and follows n and ng`:
Kaawan na p` ninyo kam, poo ng Dys! Take pity on us, O Lord! Mari
pu b ng kay y maghint`? Can you please stop? Occasionally p`
follows that modified: Magand ng raw p`! Good day; How do you do?

230. sna expresses unreal futurity in the past or doubtful futurity
in the present; in the latter sense it expresses modesty in a request:
Ipagllaba sna kit nang iyo ng damt, ngnit wal` ako ng sabn. I
would wash your clothes for you, but I have no soap. Isinlat ko sa
kany ng piltin sna niya ng mparto sa tin, pag sya y nrrit
sa bya ng it. I wrote to him to try to get round here to us when
he gets to this town.

231. tuly further, in continuation: Sinbi tuly niy.... He said
further....

232. ul` again, equivalent with mul` ( 148), has two irregularities:
it is often not enclitic but closely joined postpositive, and, in
this case, it may, entirely like mul`, be conjunctive instead of
absolute: Nahlog ul sya. He fell again; but: Umakyt sya ul`. He
climbed again; and even: ... nang magdan sya ng ul` sa pasga ng
it.... when he again walked on this beach.



(2) prepositive particles.

233. Certain particles used as absolute attributes always precede
that modified. They fall into two groups: (A) regular closely joined
modifiers, and (B) particles which immediately precede single words
or short phrases.

234. (A) The closely joined particles usually receive regular
treatment, being followed, for instance, by enclitics. Occasionally,
however, the feeling seems to be that the particle is, as it were,
placed before the whole sentence; in this case a non-enclitic subject
or a loosely joined attribute or a second closely joined attribute may
follow the particle, and the last-named may (instead of the particle)
be followed by some or all of the enclitics.

In the case of huwg ( 240) we meet for the first time alternation
of absolute and conjunctive attribution, which mostly follows the
principle that the latter construction is used where ng (as opposed
to na) is possible ( 122).

235. bak` is expressive of an undesired contingency; it is the
negative of wishes and fears: Bak ka maputlan nang dalri`, Hwn. You
might get your finger cut off, Juan, i. e. See that you don't ... or I
hope you won't.... Bak nya iktaw ang iyo ng ssabhin. Perhaps what
you intend to say will only make him laugh. Bak tyu ang pagbintangn
nang pre`. I am afraid the priest may suspect us. See  317.

236. bkit why? Bkit ka naparto? Why have you come here? Bkit
mo inakla`...? Why do you think...? Bkit hind ka magral...? Why
don't you learn...?

237. d` not is often used instead of hind` ( 239) before shorter
expressions: d malyo` not far, d karanywan unusual, Si Hwn ay
d natkot na sumaky. Juan was not afraid to mount. See  301.

238. gayn ( 190), in this use always followed by dn ( 218), also,
furthermore: Sya y isa ng to ng may kaunt ng talno at gayon dn
may kaunt ng tpang. He was a man of some cleverness and also of
some courage.

239. hind` not is used where the specific negatives yaw (
267), bak` ( 235), huwg ( 240), and wal` ( 61. 81. 89)
are not applicable. Occasionally it is replaced by d` (
237). Hind`. No. Hind ak. (It is, was) not I; I don't, didn't,
etc. Hind ble. It doesn't matter. Hind ko nllman. I don't
know. Hind ko sya nkta. I didn't see him. Hind ko mabsa iyn. I
can't read that. Ang tnay na lak nang buwn ay hind sya ng nkkta
nang manga to kung gab. The real size of the moon is not that which
people see at night. ang kanya ng tkot na bak hind nya abta ng
buhy ang kanya ng inbig his fear that (perhaps) he should not see
his loved one alive.

Hind` negates only the material part of a word, not its grammatical
(affixal) elements: Ang kamahaln nang mank ay sya ng hind ikabil
nit nang marmi ng to. The high price of chicken is that which
not causes-to-buy it many people, i. e. causes many people not to
buy it; the idea of buying is the material element of i-ka-bil (see
Morphology); the causal idea, which is expressed by the prefixes i-ka-
is not negated. Ang pagkukubl nang manga sundlo ay siy nil ng
hind ikinamaty. The hiding of the soldiers is what caused them not
to be killed, i. e. saved them from death.

Note hind rn ( 218) also not, nor, and gayn dn hind` ( 238):
Ang dalga ng si Mariy y sumayw sa bla ng to ng humilng sa kany
sa sywa ng pinaroonn niya kagab: sya y hind namli nang kanya ng
sinamhan at hind rin namn namli nang tugtg na kanya ng sinayawn;
gayon dn hind nya inin ang blang at ang kadalasn nang kany
ng pagsayw. Miss Maria danced with any man that asked her at the
dance to which she went last night: she chose neither her partners
nor the music to which she danced; nor did she mind the number and
the frequency of her dances. See  228. 237. 301. 319.

240. huwg, hwg is the negative of commands, purpose,
obligation. Where ng is possible conjunctive attribution takes the
place of absolute: Ang hangd ay ang huwg baya ng lumagpk sa lp
ang bla. The aim is not to let the ball fall to the ground. (46,
36) Sinsbi nya rto na hwg sungin ang mi ng bhay. He told
them not to burn our house. Ang tro sa kin nang maystro ay hwg
ak ng mapagawy. The teacher's order to me is that I must not be
quarrelsome. Hwag m ng tawnan si Hwn. Don't laugh at Juan. Hwag
k ng umyk. Don't cry. Hwag k, Hwn, pumsuk na sekrta. Don't go
as a spy, Juan. See  239.

241. kaniy`, kany` therefore, as a result, consequently: Bumitw
ang bta` sa lbid, kany nparap` ang kany ng kahatakn. The
child let go of the rope, and so the one he was pulling against
fell. Kany` hind tul` ang kanya ng kinant. Therefore what he sang
was disconnected. Kany` sa katapusn ay sinbi nya... Therefore in
the end he said.... Occasionally it is loosely joined: Kany y sya
y umals. Therefore he went away. See  295. 324.

242. llo` ( 147), in this use always followed by n ( 223),
especially, very: Ll na kung isa ng tahl nang so ang makgsing sa
kanya, sya y nppaluks. Especially when the barking of a dog awoke
him, he would involuntarily jump. Sya y nangngin nang to ll n
nang manga bta`. It makes its food of people, especially children.

243. sak` after that, then: Pagk pinapagpptol ko n sya nang
khoy ay sak sya nagddahil ng may sakt. As soon as I order him
to cut wood, (then) he alleges that he is sick.

Especially sak pa lmang ( 227) only then, not till then: Kapag
ipinammtol na nya nang khoy ang lagri` ay sak mo pa lmang knin
it sa kany. When he uses the saw for cutting wood, only then do
you take it from him.

244. tuw` when followed by n ( 223) is used as a loosely
joined prepositive attribute: every time: Tuw n y sy ang nagng
mnanal. He turns out victorious every single time. See  307. 317.

245. (B) The particles of the second group are mechanically prefixed,
as it were, to that modified.

246. The pretonic particle bwat every precedes that modified, forming
an object expression with or without ang ( 66, end): Bwat marnung
nang leksyn ay makaals pagdatng nang alasngko. Everyone who knows
the lesson will be allowed to leave at five o'clock. Ang bwat hind
marnung nang leksyn ay mttir hanggng alass. Every one of those
who do not know the lesson will have to stay till six o'clock. bwat
to everyone, each person.

247. gano, gno how? ( 190) is used absolutely before words with
prefix ka- expressing high degree of a quality (see Morphology and
cf.  76. 179): gno katab`? How fat? gno kalyo`? How far? Gnu
ka na b kaknis? How clever are you now?

248. The pretonic particle khit precedes interrogatives and is one
absolutely or with na; its force is generalizing, more emphatically
than mn ( 221). The expression so formed is an object expression
used with or without ang ( 68): ang khit na sno, ang khit sno,
khit na sno, khit sno anyone, anyone whatever, no matter who,
khit an anything whatever, khit na anu ng to any sort of person
whatever, khit na snu ng to any person whatever, sa khit al ng
band in any direction, khit is anyone whatever, even one.

These expressions are often strengthened by mn ( 221) or p mn (
227): Hind na sya sumaky sa khit ano pa mn. This time he did not
ride on anything. khit snu mn anyone at all.

Expressions beginning with khit have the peculiarity that in the
two normally conjunctive constructions in which they stand na, ng is
often omitted before them:

After wal` ( 138): Wal khit an. There isn't a thing. Wal
sila khit an. They haven't a thing. So even when wal` does not
immediately precede: Nbuksn ang pint nang wala ng nakmlay khit
snu mn. The door came open without anyone noticing it. Wal pa sila
ng nhhli khit an. They had not yet caught anything, literally:
anything that was caught. Wal sya ng nllman khit isa ng hta. He
did not know a single iota. Occasionally na, ng is used: Wal sya ng
mkta ng to ng khit an. He saw no person whatever.

As (normally conjunctive,  149) attribute of time during which:
Sya y hind mtahmik khit is ng sandal`. He cannot keep quiet
even for a single moment. See  253. 294.

249. kpuw`, kpw` fellow-, equally, applied to one of a pair,
is sometimes used with personal pronouns: in this case it follows
(cf.  129): Si Pdro at si Hwn ay dalawa ng kpwa magnankaw. Pedro
and Juan are two fellow thieves. ang kpwa nya magnankaw his
fellow-thief, Kpuwa manam ang ting nila ng dalaw. The voices of
the two are equally pleasant. Kpwa sila malaks. They are equally
strong. Sinsaktan sil kpuwa`. They both get hurt. Redundantly:
Namlog si Hwn nang lo nang kpwa nya kalar`. Juan fooled
(literally: rounded the head of) his (fellow) playmate.

The word modified may be anaphorically omitted: Ang two y hind
dpat sumakt nang kanya ng kpwa`. One must not injure one's fellow
(sc. to man).

250. The transient pretonic particle magng and its other transient
forms (see Morphology) express that the word or phrase modified is
something coming into being, arising, at the time specified by the
tense-form of the particle: Sya y nagng hukm. He became judge. ang
nagng pagkhul the falling-behind which arose, Nagng isa sy sa
manga hind ntanggp. He turned out to be one of those who were
not accepted.

251. The pretonic particle mang is the sign of explicit plurality
with object expressions. It precedes the central element immediately,
not even the na, ng necessitated by a preceding conjunctive attribute
comes between; only ib may come after mang: ang kany ng maglang,
or: ang kany ng manga maglang his, her parents, ang manga ib
ng to other people. Redundantly: Sa tapt nang bhay ni Pdro ay
marmi ng manga bulaklk. In front of Pedro's house there are many
flowers. Ang raw ay sya ng pinpoon nang il ng manga salbhe sa
frika. The sun is worshipped by some savages in Africa. And even:
ang manga ilan p ng manga tanng several further questions. With
mang compare the prefix of the same form, see Morphology.

252. The pretonic particle my belongs here. For examples see 
69. 70. 85. 110. 139.

253. n pretonic, is a frequent substitute (Spanish) for khit (
245) in negative sentences. The object expressions which begin with it
never take ang ( 68): N isa y wal ng ntira. There isn't a single
one left. Wal n isa. There isn't a single one. Nbuksn ang pint
nang wala ng nakmlay n snu mn. The door came open without anyone
noticing it. Wal ng ntira n isa nang manga pras sa msa. Not one
was left of the pears on the table.

Occasionally n seems to take the place of nang before khit: Bkit
hind sya maktagpo n khit is nang manga bgay na it? Why could
he not meet even a single one of these things? Cf.  319.

254. The pretonic particle tag, tig preceding an expression of place
forms an expression denoting a person from that place: Sya y isa ng
taga Kapampngan. He is a Pampangan. ang taga bkid, ang tiga bkid:
ang isa ng to ng tbo sa bkid a country-man: a person raised in the
country, ang mayma ng taga iba ng byan the rich man from another
town, stranger, foreigner, ang manga taga iba t ib ng lupan people
from various countries. So: taga byan, tiga byan townsman, taga
Filipnas Filipino, taga Amrika American, taga Espnya Spaniard
(beside Amerikno, Kastla`). Cf. in Morphology, the prefix taga-.

255. Numerative pronouns and cardinal numerals are used as absolute
attributes before kato persons, men: sa m p kato ten people, ten
men; or: sa m p ng to; Iln kato (or: Il ng to) ang bumhat sa
bhay? How many men lifted at the house?

256. The terms of relationship and titles which are treated as personal
names ( 59) precede a name as absolute attributes; after most of those
that end in a syllabic, n, or `, ng is however used. Some titles occur
only in this construction: si Kya ng Pdro my oldest brother Pedro,
si At Lleng my oldest sister Lola, si Ingkng Pro Grandfather Pedro,
si Ind ng Hwna, or: si Imp ng Hwna Grandmother Juana, si li ng
Mary, or: si Tiy Mary Aunt Maria, si M ng Andrs Uncle Andrs,
Don Andrs, si Gino ng Polikrpiyo Mr. Policarpio, si Gning Mrkes
Miss or Mrs. Marques, si Pr Hwn Father Juan, si Maystro ng Pdro
Teacher Pedro, Master Pedro, si Bo ng Mariy Widow Maria, si nasra
ng Mariy the deceased Maria.



(3) words used as absolute attributes of manner and time.

257. The words used as absolute attributes of manner and time resemble
in meaning conjunctive attributes and are frequently used in the latter
construction. As a rule they are loosely joined and absolute. In this
way are used:

258. Derivatives by doubling of words of time, in the sense of every
(day, night, etc.). With these goes the compound raw-gab day and
night. For both formations see Morphology. Hinhatdan ny ak nang
gtas raw-raw. He delivers milk to me every day. Gabi-gab ay
tintulgan nang banty ang ki ng bhay. Every night the sentry
makes our house his sleeping-place.

259. Words with prefix ka- referring to past time (see Morphology):
Ang ptya ng nangyri kagab ay paglalasng ang nagng sanh`. The
killing that occurred last night had drunkenness as its cause. Ang
manga so sa bya ng it ay nagthlan kagab. The dogs in this town
all bayed last night. Ang kabyo ay namaty kahpon. The horse died
yesterday. Pumaron ak kamakalaw. I went there day before yesterday.

These may be followed by a disjunctive attribute telling the specific
time when: Nagsiptol kam nang tub kahpon nang hpon. We cut
sugar-cane yesterday afternoon. So: kahpon nang umga yesterday
morning.

260. Words of time with prefix kin- and suffix -an expressing actual
past time (see Morphology): Kinhti-ng-gabihn ay ngising sy. When
midnight came he woke up. Kinbuksan hinnap sil nang kanila ng
am. On the next day they were called by their father.

With disjunctive attribute telling the special time: Kinbuksan nang
hpun ay naparon sila sa simbhan. On the next day in the afternoon
they went to church.

261. Words of time preceded by the pronouns bo` and is as conjunctive
modifiers: Sila y nagsipagsugl gabi-gab bo ng magdamg. They
gambled all night every night. Isa ng raw naup sya sa taburte. One
day he sat down on his chair. Ang iy ng kapatd ay nalgo isa ng
hpon. Your sister bathed one afternoon. Isa ng gab ay nrinig
ko.... One evening I heard.... So: isa ng katanghalan one midday,
isa ng lingg one Sunday, isa ng tanghle` one noon, isa ng umga one
morning. As conjunctive attributes: Sya y nagllakad na isa ng gab. He
was walking one night. Pparoon sya ng isa ng lingg. He will come
one Sunday. Those with bo` also as local attributes: Nakatahul n
ang manga so sa bo ng magdamg. The dogs have been barking all night.

262. Various words of time:

(1) antimno beforehand (Spanish).

(2) bkas tomorrow: Magppaptol ba tyo nang khoy bkas? Are we
going to have some wood cut tomorrow? With disjunctive attribute of
specific time: Magssiptol kam nang tub bkas nang umga. We are
going to cut sugar-cane tomorrow morning.

(3) dti for a long time already; formerly; it is sometimes closely
joined: ang mukh nang babye, na dti y nagppakilla nang malak ng
paghihrap the face of the woman, which before had been showing great
suffering; Dti nriyn ang mans ng iyn. That spot has been there
for a long time. As conjunctive attribute: Dti sya ng napparto sa
ki ng bhay. He has been coming to my house since long ago.

(4) kadalasn often, usually: Ang kanya ng pinassaktan kadalas y
naganyo ng pra ng ull. The person he is injuring usually acts as
if crazy.

(5) kanna a little while ago, just now: Sinbi ko na p sa inyo
kanna, na.... I just told you a little while ago that....

With a conjunctive attribute of the specific time in the phrase
kanna ng umga this morning, which may be closely joined: Kumin ka
ba kanna ng umga nang karn?--Hind ako kumin nang karn kanna ng
umga. Did you eat meat this morning?--I did not eat meat this morning.

(6) karanywan mostly, usually: Ang kosinro karanywa y upahn. The
cook is usually hired.

(7) kylan, klan when? Kylan ako mallgo`? When shall I
bathe? Kylan pa kay panghhinayngan nang manga to ang manga ni
ng tan-ta y nssra nang luktn o nang tyot? When, pray, will
the people regret the harvests every year destroyed by locusts or
by drought? So kylan mn at any time, ever, always ( 221. 317):
Kylan m y hind nillimtan si Mary. Maria was never forgotten.

(8) maklaw twice, when with maghpon per day: Nari ako ng malgo
maklawa maghpun, dahiln sa kaintan. I can bathe twice a day
on account of the heat. Alone maklaw is a conjunctive attribute:
Maklawa ko ng itinanng kung san sya pparon, dtapuwat hind nya
ako sinagt. I asked him twice where he was going, but he did not
answer me. Maghpon does not occur alone.

(9) mmay`, mmy` after a while, soon, with a disjunctive attribute
of the specific time when: Mmy nang kaunt` ay alis ak. In
a little while I am going. As conjunctive modifier; the phrase so
formed is used like mmay` alone: Mmaya ng gab ay ppsok tyo sa
teytro. This evening we shall go to the theatre.

(10) mnsan once, once upon a time: Mnsan sila y nakran nang isa ng
pno-ng-nyg. Once upon a time they came across a cocoanut-tree. With
mn at any one time ( 221): Mnsan mn ay hind sya nuna. Not a
single time did he succeed in getting ahead. As conjunctive attribute:
Ang tatlo ng it y nagtpna ng mnsan. These three once made an
appointment.

(11) ngayn now, just now, today (cf.  302): Sya y nsa Maynla
ngayn. He is in Manila today. Ngayn ay mangkkatlog sil. Now
they will be able to sleep. So ngayon dn right now ( 218): Umals
ka ngayon dn. Go away this minute.

(12) parti often: Mahna ang kany ng katawn at parti sa sakt. Her
body was weak and often in sickness. Also conjunctive: Ak y parti
ng nhhbol. I am often pursued.

(13) siympre (Spanish) always: Ang paggalw na pagtaglid ay sympre
(or: kylan mn ay) sa kaiklin nang bangk`, dtapuwat ang pagtikws
ay sa kahaban. The movement of rocking is always along the short
axis of a boat, but pitching is along its length.

263. Four words of place, which serve also as local forms of the
demonstrative pronouns ( 199). They are, corresponding to the four
demonstrative pronouns: dne, rne; dto, rto; diyn, dyn, riyn;
don, ron. They occur in every position which an attribute can have:

Loosely joined, preceding: Don ay sinalbong sya nang sus`. There
he was met by the snail. Dto nmlas nya ng.... Here he perceived
that....

Loosely joined, following: Taginit n nang sya y dumating dto. It
was already summer when he arrived here. Ang alla` ay ipinagamt
nya dto. The servant was-ordered-to-be-cured by-him of-the-latter,
i. e. He had the latter cure the servant. Alis dyn! Get away
there! (e. g. to a dog). Als na riyn, Pdro. Go away from there,
Pedro. Mtira ka dyn. Stay there.

Closely joined, preceding: Dne ako maup`. I am going to sit right
here. Dto ka na makikin sa min. Eat here with us. Dto nya ginmit
ang kanya ng laks. For this he used his strength. Don sila magpalpas
nang bakasyn. There they are to spend the vacation.

Closely joined, following: Hwag m ng ilagay dto ang palatn. Don't
put the plate here.

Enclitic: Dalhn mo rto iy ng libr ng binbsa ko kagab. Bring
here the book I was reading last night. Magdal ka dto nang
kasapwgo. Bring some matches.

These words often precede a local attribute: lag ka dyn sa dan. Get
out of the road there. Nakitloy sil sa min don sa bkid. They
asked us to take them in out there in the country. Note also: Sa isa
ng karit ng d malyo sa bhay, don sya nahig` In a cart not far
from the house, there he lay down.

264. Similarly san where? which serves also instead of a local form
of an ( 199). It is closely joined and, as a question-word, precedes:
San nroon ang kanya ng kapatd?--Hind ko nllman kung san nroon
ang kanya ng kapatd. Where is his brother?--I don't know where his
brother is. Saan nndon sya? Where is he? San mo sya nkta? Where
did you see him? Sang ka maup`? Where are you going to sit? Sang
ka gling? Where do you come from? (Cf., for the local value, the
answer, e. g.: Gling ako sa Maynla`. I come from Manila.) San ka
nangggling? Where are you coming from? San ka nanggling? Where
have you come from? Sang ka pparon? Where are you going? San ka
ppunta? Where are you bound for? So: khit san anywhere at all
( 248): It y hind nya mkta khit san. He could not find the
latter anywhere.

As local form of an, san stands also in conjunctive attribution (
131): Sa ng gaw` mul rto ang bya-ng-Kamlig?--Sa gaw ng knan
mul rto ang bya-ng-Kamlig. In what direction from here is the town
of Camalig?--The town of Camalig is to the right of here. Pagkasip mo,
Hwn, kung sa ng byan ka maghhnap-bhay ay sabhin mo sa kin. When
you have decided, Juan, in what town you will try to earn your living,
tell me.

As a question-word, further, san may form a static predicate (
96): San ang lgyan mo nang iyo ng saptos? Where is your place
for putting away your shoes?

265. Several words of manner:

(1) The particle agd at once and its doubled form agad-agd
immediately (see Morphology) are closely joined; where ng can be
used, they are mostly conjunctive: Tumakb sya agd. He ran at once,
or: Tumakb sya ng agd. Minuln nya agd ang pagtatalumpte`. He
at once began his speech. Agad n ng llamg. It will soon be cold
now. Agad-agd inumpisahn ang pagsisgwan. At once the yelling
begins.

(2) halimbwa` for example, for instance is loosely joined: Kung
halimbwa y makkta sya nang isa ng bkol.... When, for instance,
she saw a basket ... isa ng tahl nang so halimbwa` the barking of
a dog, for instance.

(3) hlos almost is closely joined: hlos laht nang to almost all
the people, wal ng pamamro` hlos almost without clothing.

(4) isa-is one by one is closely joined; it is more often conjunctive
than absolute: Siniysat nya isa-is ang manga pno`. She questioned
the trees one by one. It y sya ny ng isa-is ng inilaglg. These
he dropped one by one.

(5) karka-rka right away, quickly (cf. pagdka, pagkarka, below):
"Hind ak!" winka nya karka-rka. "It wasn't I!" he said at once.

(6) katunyan truth, as absolute attribute, loosely joined, truly; in
this sense also conjunctive: Katunya y uwal ng mwng si Hwn. Really
Juan was ignorant. Katunya ng wal sya ng nllman khit isa ng
hta. He really did not know a single iota.

(7) msmo (Spanish) himself, herself, intensive: ang nkklam msmo
the bewitched person himself; siya msmo he himself, she herself.

(8) palibhsa` is loosely joined and precedes. It expresses that
what follows is stated as a reason; the construction is apparently
not subordinating, but parallel with that of halimbwa` above: Ang
pagsasma ... ay hind nila pinpansn, palibhsa y gaw rin namn
nil. The living together ... was not minded by them, the reason
being that they did it themselves.

(9) pagdka and pagkarka immediately, quickly (synonymous with
karka-rka above): Pagdka y tinangnan ny ang dalaw ng hintutro`
nang babye. He quickly seized the woman's two forefingers. Also
closely joined: Itinanng pagdka nang mdiko.... The doctor at
once asked....



(4) absolute complements.

266. After certain words which are followed by a complement
construction, as described in  151 ff., the conjunctive particle is
often omitted, especially where the form na is required; where ng is
possible its use is preferred. They are:

267. big desired, synonymous with gust (of whose regular construction
examples have been given in  152. 158), and yaw the negative
of big. These are usually accompanied by a disjunctive agent:
An ang big nya ng sabhin? What is that desired by-him that
(sc. by-him it, both anaphoric) be said? or: What is the desired
by-him thing-to-be-said? i. e. What does he want to say? An ang
big mo ng gawn nya? What do you want him to do? Hind na sya big
labann. He was no longer sought as an opponent. It y big na gaw
ng na. This is desired to be done first, i. e. One wants to do this
first. Ang yaw ko ng mkta ay isa ng nno`. What I don't want to
see is a ghost. It y yaw nya ng gawn. He does not want to do this.

Very frequently the construction is impersonal, in which case
the complement (and quasi-subject,  158) may consist of an entire
predication: big nya ng kumin nang sha`. It-is-desired by-him that
(he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some grape-fruit. big
nya ng knin ang sha`. It-is-desired by-him that be-eaten (by-him)
the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the grape-fruit. yaw ipamna
nang mangkuklam ang kanya ng klam. The sorcerer does not want to
bequeath his magic power.

When the person desiring is at the same time the agent of the
complement, the whole expression may serve as predicate or attribute
of the person desiring; this construction is rarely used with other
than active complements: Sya y big kumin nang sha`. He is desired
(by-him) that (he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some
grape-fruit, equivalent to big nya ng kumin nang sha`. Ang kba` ay
hindi rn big umakyt. The hunchback too did not want to climb. isa ng
Kastla` na big malgo` a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Ang sundlo
ay yaw pumyag. The soldier did not want to consent.

Without complement (or with anaphorically omitted complement): An ang
big mo? What is it you want? big ko p nang knin. There-is-desire
by-me still of boiled rice, i. e. I want some more boiled rice. Ang
lar ng tagun ay big nang manga bta`. Children like the game of
hide-and-seek. yaw ko. I don't want to; less commonly: yaw ak.

268. dpat proper, necessary and skat fitting, right: It y dpat
gawn. This ought to be done. Sya y dpat palin. He ought to be
thrashed. An ang dpat nya ng gawn? What ought to be done by
him? i. e. What ought he do? Ang is y dpat mna ng magsilb sa
dimniyo. One must first serve the demon. Hind mo skat ikaglit ang
manga tuks. It is not right for you to get angry at jokes, literally:
Jokes are not by-you a fitting cause of anger.

Without complement: It y skat n. This is right, sufficient.

269. Words with prefix ma-, expressing the possessor of a quality,
and their derivatives (see Morphology), have occasionally an absolute
instead of a conjunctive complement. Those so used are:

(1) madals often, frequent, regular: Ak y madals magkumpisl. I was
regular at going to confession, or: a regular confessor. But: Madals
nila ng sinalakyan ang byan. They frequently attacked the town.

(2) magalng skilful, clever, polite: Si Hwn ay magalng gummit
nang dars. Juan was clever at using the adze, or: a clever user of
the adze, or: cleverly used the adze. But: Magalng sya ng tumugtg
nang piyno. She plays the piano well.

(3) mahrap suffering, destitute, difficult (i. e. having hardship,
actively or passively): Ang aswng ay mahrap mpatay. A vampire
is hard to-be-killed, i. e. hard to kill. Regular constructions:
Ang pagabt nang bnga ng it ay mahrap. The reaching this fruit
is hard, i. e. The fruit is hard to reach. ang mahrap na kasam the
poor laborer.

(4) mahsay able, good (at doing something), in good shape: Ang manga
to sa byan ay mahuhsay sumund sa kautusn. The people in the town
are good law-abiders. But: ang pinakamahsay na magsalit` the best
at speaking; Ang lp nang lpa` ay mahsay. The smearing (with sticky
mud) of the ground (in the threshing-room for rice) is well done.

(5) manam pleasant, tasty, good: Ang mank na kawal` ay hind manam
patayn. Chickens that run free are not good for killing. Cf.: isa
ng manam na singsng a pretty ring.

(6) malaks strong, powerful, loud: Sya y malaks kumin. He is
great at eating, or: a great eater; also: malaks na kumin. Cf.:
ang manga to ng malalaks strong men, Sya y tumwa nang malaks. He
laughed aloud.

(7) maluwt, malwt long (in time), slow: Ang pagptol nang buhk
ay maluwt mtuthan. Hair-cutting takes long to learn. Cf.: Sy
y nagkalatimb ng maluwt. He squatted on heels (as exercise or
punishment) many times. Nattlog ak nang maluwt. I sleep late.

(8) marnong wise, knowing how: Sya y marnung gumupt nang buhk. He
knew how to cut hair. But: Marnong sya ng sumaky sa kabyo. He
knows how to ride horseback. ang marnong na pagng the clever turtle;
Isa ng sundlo ng marnung nang Latn. A soldier who knew Latin.



(5) words used with disjunctive and local attributes.

270. Certain words form with their attributes phrases that are
used as absolute attributes, for the most part loosely joined. The
phrase-forming attributes are either (A) disjunctive or (B) local.

271. (A) akla` a thought followed by a disjunctive possessor: as
so-and-so thinks: Akla ko y gamit n ang sombrro ng it. I think
this hat has been used already, is second-hand. More commonly these
phrases are used as local attribute: Ang harang ng iyn na nangyri
kagab sa akla ko y pahrang ni Andrs. The hold-up which took place
last night was, in my opinion, planned by Andrs.

272. gya like, resembling, in the manner of; for the disjunctive
attribute cf.  177: ang manga pno-ng-khoy, gya nang tsko trees
like the custard-apple; Gya nang karanywan inumpisahn nang kra
ang kanya ng srmon. As usual, the priest began his sermon. Magan
ang spa`, hind gya nang bla ng gmit sa bsbol. The football
is light, unlike the ball used in baseball. These phrases occur
also as conjunctive attributes: Hind umuw si Kko na gya nang
karanywan. Kiko did not go home as usual. Normal constructions: Ang
hni nang bo ng pipt ay gya nang isa ng sutst. The chirp of the
humming-bird is like a whistling. ang manga gya mo those like you,
people like you.

273. kasma (in normal constructions companion): as companion of,
in company with: Namundok sy kasma nang il manga to-ng-byan. He
took the mountains along with a few fellow-townsmen.

274. Abstracts of action with prefixes in p- (see Morphology) express
the time when or (so pagka- and pagk-) the time immediately after
which. They sometimes occur without a disjunctive modifier. Cf. 
300. Paguln ay gamtin mo ang kapte. When it rains use your
raincoat. Pagdatng niya ay sabhin mo ng maghinty. When he arrives
tell him to wait, literally: At the arriving of him be-it-said by-you
that (he) wait. Pagkasnog nang bhay ay hinnap nil ang alhas. When
the house had burned down they looked for the jewelry. Pagakpakan
m si Hwn pagkaran nang kany ng talumpte`. Applaud Juan when his
speech is done.

275. pra like is followed by a conjunctive (instead of a disjunctive)
object expression whenever an indefinite object is meant ( 68). The
phrase so formed is often a conjunctive attribute. It is closely
joined: Si Pdro mn pra ni Hwn ay nbilangg`. Pedro too, like Juan,
was put in jail. But: May katawn sya ng pra ng to. He has a body
like a human being. Normal constructions: Pra ka ng kra. You are
like a priest. Ang lamg nang kanya ng kamy ay pra ng sa paty. The
coldness of his hand is like that of a dead person. (Cf.  209).

276. sbi saying, that said: Sbi daw ny ay malak ang snog. He says,
I am told, that the fire was big.

277. (B) alintna despite: Nblot ko n ang manga libr, alintna
sa karamhan nit. I have managed to pack the books, in spite of
their number.

278. yon according to (giving the source of a statement): yon sa
sbi nang marmi ay mppaghuli na rw ang manga magnankaw. According
to what people say, the robbers are now near to being caught.

279. bukd beside, in addition to: Bukd sa aswa ay may dalaw sya
ng ank. Beside his wife, he had two children.

280. dhil reason, cause and its derivative dahiln, both here in
the sense: on account of: Hind nakatahl ang so dhil sa kanya ng
kahinan. The dog was not able to bark, on account of his weakness,
i. e. was so weak that he could not bark. Hinle si Hwn nang puls
dahiln sa paghrang na ginaw nya kina Andrs at kanila ng manga
kaybgan. Juan was arrested by the policeman for having held up Andrs'
party and their friends. Dahiln sa kanya ng pagkglat ay npaup
sya. In his surprise he sank down on his chair.

Note especially dhil dto, dahil dto on account of this, therefore;
the omission of ay, y is especially frequent, see  120, A, and
the example there given. Dhil dto ay nadlat ang kanya ng manga
mat. Through this his eyes were opened.

281. The particle ky, k than, more than: Ang bnga ng it y matams
ky sa askal. This fruit is sweeter than sugar. malaks k sa kany
stronger than he.

The combination ky sa has so much unity that the sa is often repeated
or used where unnecessary: so always before a proper name: Ang bta
ng si Pdro ay matas nang kaunt` ky sa sa lamsa. Little Pedro
is a bit taller than the table. llu ng mabagsk ky sa rto more
fierce than this; Ang bta ng si Pdro ay matas nang kaunt` ky
sa kay Hwn. Little Pedro is a bit taller than Juan. Sya y mabte
ng tumugtg k sa kay Hwna. She plays better than Juana. Si Hwn ay
maglang ky sa kay Pdro. Juan is older than Pedro.

Owing to the construction described at  120 this construction may be
ambiguous: Llo ng malak ang glit ni Hwn ky sa kay Pdro. Juan's
anger is greater than Pedro's.

282. lban against: ang glit lban sa kany anger against him, Ang
kapangyarhan ay gingmit nya lban sa kanya ng manga kaway. He
uses his power against his enemies.

283. lban except: Ang manga karumta ng it ay upahn, lban na
lmang sa iln. These carriages are hired, except only for a few.

284. The particle mul` from and its derivative magmul` starting from:
ang gitn` mul sa magkbila ng dlo the middle from both ends; ang
kany ng manga sgat mul sa pa hanggng lo his wounds from feet to
head; mul rto from here. With disjunctive attribute of time instead
of local attribute: mul non from then on, from that time.

285. Words of manner with prefix pa- (see Morphology): Ang manga to
ay nagsipagtakbhan papalabs sa simbhan. The people ran leaving
(i. e. out of) the church. Ipinatluy nya ang paglalakd papunt sa
isa ng bhay. He continued walking (directed) toward a certain house.

Commonest is patngo directed towards, aiming for: Tumakbo sy patngu
sa log. He ran towards the river.

Regular construction: Sya y papunt sa lngit. He was on the way
to Heaven.

286. The particle par, pra (Spanish) for, equivalent to kol ( 288):
Nagbwl sila nang isa ng bka pra sa fiysta. They slaughtered a cow
for the fiesta. Humkay sila nang mallim par sa paty. They dug a
deep pit for the corpse. Pumtol ka b nang dam par sa kabyo? Have
you cut any grass for the horse? Also as conjunctive attribute,
modifying an object expression: Sulat n ang lham na pra kay
Hwna. The letter for Juana is written.

287. tungkl about, concerning: Nasiysat nang hukm ang laht nang
bgay tungkl sa kanila ng sap. The judge inquired into all the
matters relating to their suit. Cf.: ang tungkl sa snog the details
about the fire.

288. The particle kol is synonymous with par ( 286) and tungkl:
Humkay sila nang mallim kol sa paty. This phrase as predicate:
Iy y kol sa manga hrap sa infiyrno. This was about the sufferings
in Hell.



(6) words introducing subordinate phrases or predications.

289. Certain words precede words, phrases, and whole predications which
are thereby subordinated to the main sentence as absolute attributes,
loosely joined.

The syntactic relation of these words to the expressions which they
introduce seems to be the peculiar one described in  54. However,
some of them are plainly joined to their phrase by na, ng, and others
end in -ng or -t. Most of them merely precede the phrase, others are
closely joined.

Finally, in a few cases predications apparently not introduced by
any subordinating word are used as absolute attributes.

290. bag ( 216), in this sense always followed by mn ( 221),
although, is less used than khit ( 294). See also  317. Baga mn
nakapagpasyl si Pdro, ntira kam sa bhay. Although Pedro managed
to take a walk, we staid home.

291. bgo, in this use before (in point of time), has closely joined
position as regards its phrase: Ang manga kabyo ng gingmit nang
manga kanyunros nang gubyrno ay pinainum mna, bgo paknin. The
horses used by the artillery of the government are watered first,
before they are fed. Nagkanthan sil bgo naguwan. They sang
together before they went home. Bgo sya y sumlat ay makipagsap
ka sa kany. Before he writes have a talk with him. Magsip ka bgo
ka sumagt. Think before you answer. Balatan m ang mangg bgu mo
knin. Peel the mango before you eat it. maluwat p bgo mamaty ang
mangkuklam long before the sorcerer dies.

In normal constructions bgo has the sense of new, recent: ang bgu
ng bhay the new house; ang bgo ng to an unmarried man, a youth;
ang manga mank na bgo ng bil the chickens just bought; Bgu ng
gling sya sa sakt. He is recently recovered from an illness.

292. hbang throughout, during, while probably consists of hba` length
plus ng. Hbang sya y nattlog ay nakaran ang sus`. While he was
sleeping the snail passed. Hbang pinaguspan nil it ang ikapit ng
bta` ay nsa isa ng bitk nang bangk`. While they were discussing
this, the seventh child was in a crack of the bench. Nllugmok
sy hbang panahn sa isa ng mallim na kalungktan. She was sunk
constantly (literally: throughout time) in a deep sadness. A short
phrase with hbang may be closely joined: Hind nya natagal ng
angkinn hbang bhay nya ang birtd na iyn. He did not succeed in
keeping this quality as his own throughout (his) life. [8]

293. hanggng as far as, to, until may be hanggn limit, end plus ng;
instead of the absolute construction the phrase is, however, often
in local form. For lack of ang in the phrase see  68. Naghinty
sya hanggng katanghalan. He waited till noon. Ang pno` ay tumbo`
hanggng sa magbnga. The tree grew until (it) bore fruit. Sil ay
nagtakbhan hanggng sa dumatng sila sa kanila ng byan. They both ran
until they arrived in their town. As predicate: Ang klang nang gtas
ay hanggng sa leg nang bte. The lack of milk is as far as the neck
of the bottle, i. e. The milk goes only up to the neck of the bottle.

294. khit ( 245), with or without na, in the sense of although, no
matter (cf.  290. 317). The subordinate word or phrase has usually
the form of a question; when it is an entire predication the predicate
stands first: Tinalaga ny ng summa, khit na san sya dalhn. He
decided to go along, no matter where he was carried. Khit na an ang
iytos nya ay sinsund. No matter what it was he ordered, (it) was
obeyed. Khit na madilm ang gab ay nagpasyal dn si Pdro. Though
the night was dark, Pedro nevertheless took a walk. Khit na bahagy
ang uln ay nakabas` nang karsda. Though the rain was scanty,
it sufficed to wet the streets. Khit ull ang so ay yaw nya ng
patayn. Although the dog was mad, he did not want to kill it.

Note the following instance, in which khit na precedes its phrase as
a closely joined attribute: Nramdaman k ang kalabt nya sa kin,
khit na ak nattlog. I felt his touch against me, even though I
was asleep.

Phrases with khit may be closely joined to the main sentence:
Npptol nya khit na wal sya ng kasangkpan ang bkal nang kanya
ng blanggan. He managed, even though he had no tools, to cut the
iron of his prison. ang to khit lalki o babye na nagri sa kany
the person, man or woman, who owns it.

295. kaniy`, kany` ( 241) expressive of result, may with its phrase
be subordinated. It then stands as a closely joined attribute of its
phrase: Kany nya inwan ang pyong ay sapagkt nagtgil ang uln at
lumiwnag ang lngit. The reason he left his umbrella (quasi-subject)
was because the rain let up and the sky cleared. Accordingly we may
analyze as subordinate such clauses as the following: Nup sya sa
tink, kany sya npatindg agd. He sat down on a spine, so as to jump
at once, i. e. that is why he jumped up at once. Cf., however,  324.

296. The particle kapg if, in case (of single events viewed as
completed in the future, synonymous with pagk,  304), see  300:
Ang hinirm nya ng kampt ay iyo ng knin, kapag ipinptol na ny
nang khoy. Take away the knife he borrowed if he uses it to cut wood.

297. kay` ( 219) is sometimes used exactly like kaniy` ( 295):
Kay` aku naparto ay kknin ku ang hinirm mo ng libr. I am going
to take the book you have borrowed, so that I have come here, i. e. I
have come here to.... The act is expressed as a subordinate element,
the purpose as the principal sentence. Nagpptol si Hwn nang khoy,
kay sya y wala rto. Juan is cutting wood now, that is why he is
not here.

298. The atonic particle kung preceding an expression of time
states the time when of repeated occurrences: Gumgmit kam nang
makapl na damt kung taguln. We use thick clothing in the rainy
season. Nagttpon nang pagkin ang manga langgm kung tagraw. The
ants collect food in summer. Ang hnhan nang manga bon kung
umga ay nakalligya. The chirping of the birds in the morning is
gladdening. Ang iba ng two y mabti pa ng makisma ky sa is ng
kapatd kung mnsan. An unrelated person is better to associate
with than a brother at times. So: kung gab at night, of nights,
kung fiysta nang byan during the (periodic) fiesta of the town,
kung madilm at dark, when it is dark, kung bah` at flood-times,
kung buwn nang Hniyo in June.

Occasionally the phrase with kung is closely joined: Hind has`
kung mnsan ang manga bgu ng patalm sa Filipnas. In the Philippines
new cutlery is sometimes without an edge (i. e. sold without an edge,
to be sharpened by the purchaser).

299. With phrases in the form of a question (minus b  215 or bag 
216) kung expresses indirect question. The expression so formed stands
as quasi-subject or quasi-object (cf.  157. 158) or as predicate:
Naalala nya kung papno ang paggaw` nang salamangk. He managed
to recall how the trick was done. Ipinyu nya na kung snu sa kanil
ang pinkamahsay na magsalit` nang Latn ay siya lmang kkin nang
itlg. He advised that whoever (kung sno) among them was the best at
speaking Latin should be the one who alone ate the egg. Si Pdro ay
nagisp kung san nya nawan ang kanya ng pyong. Pedro is trying
to recall where he left his umbrella. Nllman mo b kung san sya
nroon? Do you know where he is? Ang manga to-ng-byan ay nagsiysat
kung mari sila ng magtay nang isa ng mkina nang bgsan sa kanila
ng byan. The townspeople considered whether they could put up a
machine for thrashing rice in their town. Ang siysat ni Hwn sa kanya
ng pagparto ay kung il ng kra ang nrrit sa ti ng byan. Juan's
inquiry when he got here was how many priests there are in our town.

300. Introducing other phrases kung has the sense of if, whenever
(of non-actual occurrences viewed as unreal, hypothetical, or
repeated); compare disjunctive attributes of time ( 192, single actual
occurrence), pag ( 303, single non-actual occurrence, simultaneous),
kapg and pagk ( 296, 304, single non-actual precedent occurrence),
words with prefixes in p- ( 274, single occurrence, actual or
non-actual), tuw` ( 307, repeated actual): Kung dumatng si Hwn
ay umalis k. If Juan comes, go away. Kung dumatng sya ay sabhin mo
ng maghinty. If he comes, tell him to wait. Kung uln ay gamtin mo
ang kapte. If it rains, use your raincoat. Bbilhin k ang kabyo ng
iyn kung my-roon ak ng marmi ng kwalt. I should buy this horse,
if I had enough money. Note: Kung sa pagaaswa namn, ak y nagkaron
nang dalaw. And as to (literally if) taking a wife, I had two.

301. In the same sense kung with d` ( 237) or hind` ( 239) if not,
precedes the second, positive member of a contrast: unless, but rather,
beside, except (Cf. pal  228): Hwag k ng makpakikin-kin kung
hind ka inanyhan. Don't be taking meals with people unless you are
invited. Wal ng ib ng nagppahrap sa kany kung hind kay. There
is no one else who causes suffering to him, beside you.

302. ngayn ( 262), when subordinating, is conjunctively joined to
its clause: Ngay ng raw na yit y drating sil. On this very day
they will arrive. Ngay ng to ng iyn ay patay n, bkit namn...? Now
that this man is dead, why...?

303. The atonic particle pag gives the time when of a single
non-actual occurrence; cf.  274 and see  300. Pag ak ay pagd,
nattlug ak nang maluwt. When I am tired, I sleep late. Pag paputl
mo ng hinwa` ang pakuwn ay hind mbbil ang banda ng pno`. If
you cut the watermelon crosswise, you will not be able to sell the
stem-end. Magmmurahn sila ng dalaw pag nagkta. The two will revile
each other when they meet.

304. The particle pagk (synonymous with kapg,  296) gives the
time immediately after which of a single non-actual occurrence; cf. 
274 and see  300. Pagka ikw ay nahlog ay massaktan k. When you
have taken a fall you will be hurt.

305. The particle pat including; cf.  68. ang bo ng katawn pat
manga mat at tanga the whole body, including eyes and ears.

306. The particle sapagkt (sa pagk at?) because, for: Sapagkt ang
pri ng it ay nagakla ng manga wal ng pinagarlan ang kany ng
sinsrmunan ay hind sya nagplit.... Because this priest thought
his hearers were uneducated people, he took no pains.... Ipinaptol
nya ang kanya ng dalre`, sapagkt tinuban nang knser. He had his
finger amputated because there was a cancer on it. For a phrase with
sapagkt as predicate see example under kany`,  241.

307. The particle tuw` ( 244) in this use tells the time when
always of actual repeated occurrences: whenever, every time. It
is conjunctively joined to its clause: Pinaghhatdan ny nang
gtas ang byan tw ng umga. He delivers milk in the town every
morning. Pumparto ang mdiko twi ng makalaw. The doctor comes
every other day. Si Hwn ay nakkipaglukshan twi ng idindos ang
manga palar` kung fysta nang byan. Juan takes part in the jumping
contest whenever games are held in the fiesta of the town. Tw ng
papsuk ak sa sne sa ki ng kyang ay yaw sya. Every time I ask
my brother to take me to the moving-picture show, he refuses.

308. pang in order to, so that (pa pay, wages?): Sila y naupo pa
lmang pang mananghle`. They are just sitting down to eat the noon
meal. Sy y tumay` sa bubungn nang bhay pang tanawn ang snog. He
stood up on the roof of the house to watch the fire. Kantahn niny ang
my sakit pang sya y malibng. Sing for the sick man so that he may be
cheered. Tinwag nil ang isa ng klaw pang siya ng magng hukm. They
called an owl so that (it) might be the one who served as judge.

309. ymang while, as: Ang pno nang ungg ay namaty ymang ang
sa pagng ay tumbo`. The tree of the monkey died while that of the
turtle grew.

310. Predications and similar phrases (impersonal or anaphoric) as
absolute attributes, in the meaning of disjunctive attributes of time,
are not uncommon: Madali-ng-raw pa lmang ay nrron na sil. (When)
it was still but dawn, they were already there. Maksa-m-pu ng twag n
ay wal pa sy. (At) the tenth call he was still not there. Makaran
ang ila ng sandal` ay sinbi nya sa sus`.... (When) a few moments
had passed, he said to the snail.... May pat na pu ng tan na
sya sa lpa ng Katagalgan ay hind pa nya ntuthan ... (When)
he had already been in the Tagalog country for about forty years,
he had not yet learned.... Mnsan pumsuk sya sa simbhan ay nrinig
nya.... Once (when) he went to church, he heard.... Other examples
at 26,21. 28,11. 66,15. 9213.



4. Serial groups.

311. The serial relation is expressed in part explicitly by particles
and in part by parataxis, parenthesis, and anacolouthic constructions.



(1) coordinating particles.

312. The most important of the coordinating particles is at, t; as
some of the others end in -t, they may be felt to contain at; cf. the
similar ending in other particles,  213; t is used after syllabics,
n, and ` (see Phonetics), but even here at is commoner.

When a sentence begins with a coordinating particle, the latter
gives expression to the connection with the preceding sentence (as
in English sentences beginning with And ... or But ...)

313. at, t and connects words, phrases, or entire predications. bro
t salawl blouse and trousers (native costume), ang tapunn nang
bha at ups the place for throwing cigarette-ends and cigar-stubs,
dalawa ng, p t dalaw twenty-two, kung mnsan at malak ang glit
nang am ... sometimes, when the father's anger was great ... (kung
goes with both of the members connected by at).

When more than two elements are connected, at is used generally between
the last two: sina Pdro, Hwn, at Andrs the group consisting of
Pedro, Juan, and Andrs. isa ng lbo, walo ng dan, walo ng pu t
nim 1886.

314. at is used in a few common phrases: is t is everyone ib t ib
various: ang mang taga ib t iba ng byan people from various towns;
Iba t ib ang klay nang kanya ng pananamt. His clothes are of various
colors. at ib p and so forth, and other; ang tsko, sha`, santl,
... at iba p the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, and so forth;
ang manga hyop at iba p ng r nang pmahalan the live stock and
other belongings of the government.

315. at has occasionally a decidedly adversative tone; so, for
instance, at 78,31.

316. Frequently at has subordinative coloring, the second of the
members joined expressing:

cause: Hinty ka mna t hind pa ak nakappahing. Make a halt first,
for I am not yet rested. big mo b ng kumin sa min?--Salmat, yaw
ko t kakkin ko pa lmang. Do you want to eat with us?--Thank you,
no, for I have only just eaten. Buksan m ang pint` at big ko ng
pumsok. Open the door, for I want to go in.

result: Ano t d ka lumkad nang matlin? Why don't you walk
fast? Ano ang big mo t nrrito k? What do you want that you have
come here? i. e. What have you come here for? So especially: an ang
dhil at...? what is the reason that...?

purpose: Umals sya t makkiptol nang dam. He has gone to help
cut grass.

temporal succession: Hind sya nakaratng nang pat na pu ng tan sa
glang at sya y namaty. She had not reached forty years in her age,
when she died.

a subordinate quasi-subject: Sinbi nang manghuhla sa iy t hindi
malyo rto ang kawwalan nang iyo ng singsng. The fortune-teller
told you that the place where you would lose your ring is not far
from here. Sinbi ko n sa iy at hwag k ng mangay. I have told
you already not to make any noise. [9]

317. The subordinating value of at appears especially in certain
expressions which it forms with other particles:

(1) at bak` lest (cf.  235): Hwag k ng magpatihlog diyn sa
ktre at bak ka masaktn. Don't throw yourself from that bed, for
you might hurt yourself.

(2) at nang so that (cf.  192 f.): Magiinm ka nang gtas at nang
ikw ay tumab`. Drink milk so that you may grow stout.

(3) bag mn at although (cf.  290): Baga mn at umuln ay
nagssipaglar sil. Although it is raining they are at play.

(4) kay` at so that (cf.  297): Napappunta nil ang pelta kay t
bwat isa sa kanil ay nakaabng. They direct the ball so that every
one of them is on guard.

(5) kylan mn at every time that, whenever, synonymous with tuw ng,
 307 (cf. kylan mn  262): Si Hwn ay twa nang twa kylan m t
mrinig nya ang manga katatawan ng bahgi nang kwnto. Juan laughs
and laughs every time he hears the funny parts of the story.

318. dtapuwat but is the commonest adversative coordinating
particle. It is used also when the two members are not logically
but only formally in contrast: Ang hni nang pipt ay mahna`,
dtapuwat matas ang tno. The chirping of the stone-sparrow is
weak, but high-pitched. Pputlin ko ang lbid kung my-roon ak ng
lasta, dtapuwat wal ako. I should cut the rope if I had a knife,
but I have none. Si Pdro ay hind dumatng, dtapuwat iba ng to
ang naparto. Pedro did not arrive; it was someone else who came here.

319. The particles n hind` ( 253. 239) connect coordinate
elements in the sense of nor: Sya y hind nagssimb n hind
nangngumpisl n hind rin nagmmno sa pre`. He neither went to
church nor confessed nor kissed the priest's hand. The hind` may,
as an anaphoric element, be left off after another hind`: Ang kanila
ng kamy ay hind nila milabs sa btas n ibig namn sila ng bitwan
ang lamn nang nyg. They cannot take out their hands from the opening,
nor are they willing to let go the cocoanut-meat.

320. The particle ngnit is equivalent with dtapuwat, but is less
common: Hind sya nagsip, ngnit sumagt karka-rka. He did not
reflect but answered at once.

321. The atonic particle o or (probably Spanish): isa ng malak ng
so o bboy a large dog or pig; Dikdikn kit sa lusng o lunrin
kita sa log? Shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the
river? Frequently the combination o kay` ( 219) is used; it is
loosely joined: Ang kapangyarha ng it y gling sa dimniyo o kay y
mna sa maglang. This power comes from a demon or else is inherited
from one's parents.

322. The particle sublit but is less common than its equivalents
dtapuwat and ngnit: Aku sna y pparoon sa Balwag, sublit hind
ako ntuly, dahiln sa isa ng karamdman. I was going to Baliwag,
but I did not keep on, on account of an illness.



(2) paratactic sentences.

323. A vocative joins another sentence: Hint na kay, manga
bta`! Stop, children! T na, bale! or: Tara n, bale! Come on,
old man!

324. Contrast, cause, result, detail, etc. are sometimes paratactically
expressed; in some cases it seems uncertain whether the second element
is paratactic or subordinate, so especially when it begins with kaniy`
( 241. 295): Sina Pdro, Hwn, at Andrs ay magkakasamah ng nagtnod
sa is ng dlo nang tuly; sina Felpe, Andy, at Mariyno sa ikalaw
ng dlo. Pedro, Juan, and Andrs are standing guard together at one
end of the bridge; Felipe, Andoy, and Mariano at the other. Hind ko
gust iyn, ib ang ki ng gust. I don't like that, I want something
else. Hwag k ng umyk, Mary, bak ka himatayn. Don't weep, Maria,
you might have a fainting-fit. Ang kant nang bta ng si Hwn ay kanya
ng nalimtan, kany hindi tul` ang kanya ng kinant. Little Juan
forgot his song, that is why what he sang was disconnected. Siya ng`,
siy ang nagbigy sa kin nang bgo ng bhay. Yes, she; it was she
who gave me new life. Sya y may famliya; bukd sa aswa ay may dalaw
sya ng ank. He had a family; beside his wife he had two children.



(3) parenthesis.

325. Not infrequently explanatory elements are inserted into a
sentence parenthetically: Tatl ng magkakaybgan, isa ng pre`,
isa ng manggagmut, at isa ng sundlo ... Three friends, a priest,
a physician, and a soldier ... sa hyop namn, karanywa y ang bbuy
... against animals, usually a pig ... wala ng ulm, asn at knin
lmang there was no meat, only salt and boiled rice. Further cases
at 54,5. 86,21. 100,23. 108,29.

326. Often the parenthetic element is descriptive: malaks kumin,
katimbng nang dalaw kato great at eating, a match for two persons;
nang pinagkatamn na wal ng patd, pat na pu ng pa ang hba`
shavings without a break, forty feet in length. Similar cases at
80,39. 86,29. 118,43. 120,2.

327. Especially common are parentheses describing the temporary
state or situation of something: Ang mnanal ng pangkt at ang
kanila ng manga kaybgan, magkakasma ng tintugtugn nang kanila ng
bnda nang msika, ay agad-agd na nagppasyo. The winning team and
their friends, all together accompanied by the playing of their band,
at once form a parade. Nakaratng sila sa kanila ng bhay, dal nila
ang spot nang kwalt. They arrived at their house, bearing the bag
of money. Other cases at 92,22. 98,21. 114,42.



(4) anacolouthon.

328. In other cases a breaking off of the construction rather than
an insertion seems to take place: Ang manga hind nagssitugtg
ang katungklan ay kumant. Those who do not play, their duty is to
sing. Gya ko, ak y parti ng nhhbul nang manga so. Like me, I am
often pursued by dogs. Pabulng lmang kung sil y magslitan. In
whispers only (predicate) when they talk together. The organic
construction would probably be: Pabulng lmang ang kanila ng
pagsaslitan. Their conversation is only in whispers. Kung kanya
ng paknin ay wala ng ulm. When (they, anaphoric) are fed it is
without meat.

329. While direct quotations often enter into normal constructions
as predicate ( 114), as conjunctive complement ( 159), or as
disjunctive object ( 186), they are often joined by a breaking
off of construction. In this case their relation to the rest of a
sentence may resemble that of a subject; this happens especially
when the sentence begins with the quotation or with part of it. If
ay, y were used many of these sentences would be regular: "Magral
ka ng mabti," sinbi ni Hwn sa kanya ng ank. "Study well" was
said by Juan to his son. "Dalaw!" isinigw nang bulg. "Two!" was
shouted by the blindman. "Sa damdam k," ang sagt ni Dygo,
"ay ak ang pinakamaknis." "In my opinion," was Diego's answer,
"I am the cleverest." Similarly their relation may resemble that
of a disjunctive object (instrumental type,  186), but nang is not
used. This happens if the quotation follows active words of saying:
Si Hwn namn ay sumagt: "Matr!" Juan then answered: "Matar!"

330. This peculiar construction of direct quotations is extended to
some cases that are not exactly quotations but may be viewed as such:
Ang bo ng sa ko ang kandidto ng si Maniks ang nggustuhn nang
manga to; hind pal, kung hind ang kandidto ng si Sntos. It
was my whole expectation that the candidate Maniqus would be the
one chosen by the people; but no, it was the candidate Santos. Ang
paniwla nang manga to si Sang-Hwn ay sya ng snto ng nagppauln. It
is the belief of the people that San Juan is the saint who makes rain.





C. MORPHOLOGY.

1. Composition.

331. Compound words (i. e. words resembling in form a succession of
two or more words, but diverging in meaning from such a succession) are
treated phonetically like groups of words in the phrase ( 33. 34).

If the first member ends in syllabic, n, or glottal stop, the particle
ng appears before the second member.

In meaning, compound words resemble a phrase in which the word
corresponding to the first member is modified, in disjunctive
attribution, by the word corresponding to the second: bhay-akltan
library-building: bhay nang akltan. The meaning of the compound is,
however, more specialized than that of the phrase.

Exceptions as to meaning are: (1) the copulative compound raw-gab,
formed on the model of doubled words, such as raw-raw, gabi-gab
( 258. 343.); (2) kapatd-kongkristiynos, a foreign product;
(3) my-ron, equivalent to my, which has been viewed as a compound
because its construction ( 138) differs from that of the phrase my
ron (which would not require the particle ng,  252. 263).

Similar in form to compound words are words derived from a phrase
( 332).

Examples of regular compounds: ang bhay-bta` the womb, bhay-gya`
the womb of an animal (gya` the young of an animal), bhay-phayagn
newspaper office, publishing house, Bhay-Panki Bat-House (name of a
town, panki a bat), bhay-pinthan paint-shop; It y bigay-lob lmang
nya sa kin. This is merely a concession he makes to me as a favor; ang
lalawga-ng-Pampngga, ang provnsiya-ng-Pampngga Pampanga Province,
cf. ang provnsiya nang Pampngga; pilk-mat eyelash (pilk fin,
lash); ang Smha-ng-Sumlong the Sumulong Company; ang tnud-bhay
the watchman of a house, tnud-play watchman of a rice-field.

A member of a compound may consist of an entire phrase (cf. 
332): Bgsa-ng-Sumlong-at-Kasamahn Rice-mill of Sumulong and
Company (equivalent to Bgsan nila Sumlong at Kasamahn); ang
dlo-ng-band-ng-knan the right-hand end (ang band ng knan the
right).

Specialization and transference of meaning are especially marked
in hampas-lpa` (literally: beating of the ground) tramp, vagabond;
kpit-bhay not only neighboring house, but also neighbor: Ang bhay
ni Hwn ay ki ng kpit-bhay, but also: Si Hwn ay ki ng kpit-bhay;
kpit-byan neighboring town, but also person from a neighboring town;
Sawi-ng-plad siy. He is unlucky (literally unhandy of the palm).

For the other occurrences of compounds see Index under bhay, baks,
bnda, banty, bsag, byad, byan, bnga, btas, dan, hnap, log,
kalabw, kapulun, kasaman, kasawin, kasiran, kinamatayn, lpa`,
mdiko, pa, pamaty, panty, pirso, pno`, smhan, to, trabho,
bos.



2. General features of word-formation.

332. Many words are analyzed into (1) recurring affixes, (2) doubling,
(3) reduplication, and (4) a recurring unanalyzable element bearing
the material meaning, the root. The place of the root may be taken by
a word in turn showing derivation by these processes, or by a compound
word, or even by a phrase. Other words, root-words, contain only the
unanalyzable element.

Other modifications affecting the meaning are shifting of the accent
toward the end of the word, and the use of secondary accents.

Modifications not affecting the meaning, but merely accompanying those
already named, are sound-variation and retraction of the accent toward
the beginning of the word.

The same morphologic elements may be variously distributed; it is
most convenient and corresponds most nearly to the speech-feeling
to describe these differences as though they were due to different
successions in which the modifications are applied: sumslat is
slat reduplicated and with infix -um-; but (nag-)ttumir is tir
with infix -um-, then reduplicated (plus prefix nag-).

The part of a word to which a modification is (in this sense)
said to be added will be called the underlying word (or phrase): in
sumslat the infix -um- is added to the underlying word sslat, in
(nag-)ttumir reduplication is added to the underlying word tumir;
in ikasa-m-p` the tenth the prefixes ka- and i- are successively
added to the underlying phrase sa m p` ten.

Roots not actually occurring in this book as independent words will
be written with a hyphen prefixed (-kin), except in unmistakable
lists of roots.

333. The root. Except for some pronoun forms and particles, the roots
have two or more syllables and are almost always accented either on
the last (oxytone roots) or on the next-to-last (barytone roots):
bhay house, kamy hand.

Some disyllabic roots are formed as though a single syllable were
repeated: bitbt, budbd, bungbng piece of unsplit bamboo, damdm,
dibdb chest (part of body), dikdk, dingdng (dindng,  20), gga,
hinhn, ladld, laglg, lingkng, lublb, mangmng, ningnng, padpd,
pangpng, pukpk, satst, siksk, singsng, ssi, sso breast, nipple,
sutst, tadtd, tiktk, tingtng (tintng), tugtg, tuktk, tungtng
(tuntng), ull.

Of the roots of more than two syllables some similarly repeat one
or two syllables: alala, babye (see  345), bulaklk, lipumpn
(beside lpon).

Others appear as though a syllable -al- or -ag- were infixed (or
prefixed) before the first syllabic: alagd (cf. agd`), balahbo
fur, hair on the body, balkat, balta`, Balwag, balbad, baluktt,
dalga, dalamhte`, dalandn, dalanghta`, dalngin, halakhk,
halman, halge, halimbwa`, halimhm, kalabg, kalkal, kalasng,
kalayky, kalusks, palak`, salakb, salkay, salakt a rain-hat of
palm-leaves, salap`, salawl, salaysy, salit`, salbong, salkoy,
talasts, talungk`,--bagbag, bagso bare stalk, of sugar-cane or corn
(Spanish brazo, whence Tagalog barso arm, assimilated to this type?),
Hagnoy, lagablb, lagnap, pagakpk, sagsa`, sagitst.

In some instances roots of the same or similar meaning resemble each
other in form. This is commonest in loan-words, where different degrees
of assimilation exist side by side: birke, bitke blow-gun bullet
(Spanish bodoque); palnsa, pirnsa flatiron (Spanish plancha). It
occurs also, however, in native (or anciently assimilated) roots:
aniyya`, yya`; nib, snib (for sa nib?); balta`, salit`; bitw,
bitw; bugk, bulk; bungnga` mouth, maw (nang hurn of the oven,
nang kaln of the stove), sungnga` a blow on the mouth; ding,
king; pon, lpon (lipumpn, above), tpon; lan, tan; luhd, thod;
mangh`, tangh`; maty, paty; hanty, hinty.

When syllables of a root resemble affixes, there is always
possibility that the root may be interpreted as a derived word by
the speech-feeling, no matter whether historically it be such or
not. Thus the Index will show many roots whose initial syllables are
identical with prefixes; the other cases will be mentioned under the
various affixes.

334. Affixation. Prefixes are added to the initial of the underlying
word: nag-tir; infixes before the first syllabic: t-um-ir, um-als;
suffixes to the end: tr-han.

Affixes are occasionally accompanied by retraction of accent: it,
d-to. See  343,c. 358,c.e. 481,c. 485,a. 523. 528,d.

In the following cases affixes are accompanied by sound-variation:

(a) prefixes:

(1) The prefixes ending in g are treated phonetically as though they
were separate words; this happens occasionally with other prefixes
( 34).

(2) Initial d of the underlying word becomes r after the syllabic of
a prefix in the roots listed in  17. The change is constant only
in the commonest formations: always pa-ran, but nak-dan beside
nak-ran. Striking irregularities at  407,a. 468.

(3) The prefix i- and in some formations the prefix ka- contract with
a following syllabic ( 31): iy-nib (for i-nib), wan (for i-wan),
ka-yibg-an (for ka-ibg-an), kwwa` (for ka-wa-wa`). See 
368. 401. 421. 426,b. 475,a. 481,c. 485,a.

(4) The prefixes ending in ng (mang-, nang-, pang-) alter a following
initial, always in much-used words, frequently in others.

Before an initial syllabic the ng is treated as though it belonged
to the underlying word and not to the prefix. This appears in
reduplication ( 336).

Initial p, b, t, d, s, are often, initial k is always changed
to the corresponding nasal: pamlo` (plo` with pang-), but also
pang-pa-rikt; pamilmt (bilmt), but also pang-bamb; panli` (tli`),
but also pang-takp; panalngin (dalngin), but also pang-dilg;
na-narwa` (sarwa`), but also pang-saky; nangap` (kap`). Where
the change is not made, the ng may be assimilated to dentals ( 20):
mandurkit beside mangdudkit.

Before nasals the ng is usually lost: namahla` (mahla` with nang-).

See pang- and mang- in List of Formations.

(5) The prefix hin- and its compounds give rise to a few similar
changes, see  357,b. 376,a. 518.

(6) For occasional irregularities of prefixes see  347,b. 481,d. 528.

(b) infixes:

(1) Where -in- is infixed in a word beginning with l, w, or y, this
initial is usually interchanged with the n, so that, practically,
we have a prefixed ni- instead of an infixed -in-: ni-lto` (beside
less common l-in-to`), ni-wals (beside w-in-ka`), ni-yya`. See 
359 ff. 374 ff.

(2) Where words beginning with syllabic, h, l, w (and y) have
the prefix i- and the infix -in-, the latter is almost always
used as a prefix, preceding the i-: in-iy-tos, in-wan (for
in-i-wan), in-i-hatd, i-ni-lto` (beside less common i-l-in-to`),
in-i-wisk. See  368.

(3) On -um- see  348,b.

(c) suffixes:

(1) The suffixes (-an and -in) after a syllabic take an initial h:
luks-han.

(2) Final d always becomes r before a suffix: lakar-n (lkad).

(3) When used in the formation of transient derivatives, as well as
in some other of their uses, the suffixes are accompanied by irregular
modifications of certain roots.

Some roots ending in syllabic are treated as if they ended in glottal
stop; they are am, kta, mat: ama-n, kit-an, mat-an.

Others are treated as though they ended in n; they are pa, tlo,
twa: paa-nn (beside regular paa-hn), tal-nan, taw-nan.

Other roots lose the syllabic of the last syllable, as well as a
final glottal stop which may follow this; if the syllabic is final,
the suffix adds h: asn asn-n, bigy bigy-n, bil bil-hn, mul`
mul-n. The roots so treated are: asn, bigy, bil, buks, dal,
hatd, hig`, ib (but also regular iba-hn), eskuwla, gaw`, kin,
kamt, lagy, lak, likd, masd, mul`, pun`, ptol (but also
regular putl-an), saky, skit, sub, sund, tngan, tib`, tingn,
tir (but also regular tir-han), ul`, up`, wal`.

Still other roots add assimilation, dissimilation, or metathesis of
consonants to the loss of vowel: nak angk-n, atp apt-n, danw
(? see  421) ka-raniyw-an, datng datn-n, glid ta-ligd-n (beside
regular ta-gilr-an), halk hagk-n, hangg hangg-n (i. e. the
h of -han is lost), king kingg-n, sild sigl-n, tanm tamn-n,
tuwd ka-tu-tur-n.

Entirely irregular are the following: alala alala-hnin (-hnin
for -hin), aniyya any-han, hri` ka-hariy-n ka-hary-n (beside
regular pag-har-an), hip hp-an, lag inlag-n (for ilag-nn? but
also regular ilg-an), kawyan kwayan-n (beside regular kawayan-n),
killa kilan-ln (for kilal-nn?), kha k-nin, lar` laruw-n larw-n
(beside regular laru-n), pul` ka-puluw-n ka-pulw-n (beside regular
ka-pulu-n), sla sang-ln (for sal-nan? also ka-sal-nan and regular
sal-han), sund` pagk-sunduw-n (beside regular -sundu-n), to
ka-taw-n (? see  422, also regular ka-ta-han), toto tto-hnan
(-hnan for -hn).

335. Doubling. In certain formations the underlying word,
if disyllabic, is repeated; the phonetic treatment is the same as
that of successive words in a phrase ( 34): agad-agd, gabi-gab,
pat-pat, pa-lgid-lgid.

If the underlying word has more than two syllables, only the beginning
of it, inclusive of the second syllabic, is repeated, and the final
syllabic of this repeated part has a primary accent: kan-kanno,
kan-kanil, nag-kag-kagalt (underlying word ka-galt).

336. Reduplication. In some formations the beginning of the
underlying word, including the first syllabic, is repeated, s-slat,
-akiyt. Words with reduced i or u ( 27) reduplicate with i, u:
maka-s-siy, maka-s-sy.

Note the foreign words: krs nag-k-kurs, trabho nag-t-trabho.

Initial d of the roots listed in  17 often becomes r after the
reduplication: k-in--d-roon-n (don), nag-d-dan (dan).

When a prefix which involves change of initial comes before a
reduplicated form, the latter has the changed initial both in the
reduplicative syllable and in the underlying part: n-r-ron (don),
pa-ngu-ngumt (umt with pang-,  334, a, 4; also: pang-u-umt)
ptol pa-mu-mtol (ptol with pang-).

337. Accent-shift. In certain formations the accent is displaced one
syllable toward the end of the word: slat sult. This is especially
the case before suffixes forming transient words: slat sult-an. In
some formations with suffixes the accent moves two syllables toward
the end of the word: slat sulat-n.

Certain roots are especially given to this change and show it in
formations where it is not regular. In these roots the accent-shift
is more or less clearly and regularly connected with a modification
of meaning. The roots are: bot overtake, with shift: reach for,
take hold of, pass, hand; e. g. pa-bot let oneself be overtaken,
pa-abt something caused to be handed, kay, lam, wa`, yaw, bba`,
bhay, bya`, blag, glit, gsing, hyag, hli, lpit, lyo`, mra,
skit, sma, sra`, tlo, tma`, twa, tloy, na. See Index. A few
pairs of roots differing only in accent may possibly belong here,
e. g. -nak family and ank child.

338. Secondary accents. (1) In some formations a secondary accent is
spoken on the initial syllable of the underlying word: als ls-an,
ka-galt kgalt-an, iyk yk-an. If the first syllable is closed, the
secondary accent is omitted: luks luks-han; so also if it is followed
by consonant plus reduced vowel ( 27): taniyg tanyg tanyg-an; and
also if its own vowel is reduced: niyg nyg niyg-an nyg-an. There
are some irregularities. See  377,b. 383. 421. 421,b. 426,b.

(2) Prefixes and reduplications often take a secondary accent: n-ptol
(different in meaning from na-ptol), s-slat.

These secondary accents have phonetically the quality of primary
accents when they come before short oxytone underlying words: n-ring,
-akiyt. If, however, the word is accented on a suffix, the accent on
this is more audible and the secondary accent remains: n-buks-n. So
also if there are two secondary accents: n-r-ring. Longer oxytone
words not accented on a suffix vary; they have been transcribed as
heard in each case: nag-s-si-pag-lar` nag-s-si-pag-lar`.

339. Indications. In the following description formations will be
indicated as follows:

prefixes thus: nag-; infixes: -um-; suffixes: -an; secondary accent
on prefixes: n-;

doubling by "D", e. g. nag- D -an represents the formation seen in
nag-aswng-aswng-an;

reduplication by "r", with secondary accent by "R", e. g. pag- r
(pag-pu-ptol), nag- R (nag-p-ptol), -um- R (s-um--slat), nag-
R -um- (nag-t-t-um-ir);

secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word by "S",
e. g. S -an (ls-an);

accent-shift by "(1)" or "(2)", e. g. (1) describes the formation of
sult from slat; (1) -an (sult-an); (2) -an (sulat-n).

340. Summary of formations. The various formations group themselves
into eight classes: 1. simple formations without characteristic
prefix, expressing simple actions, objects, etc.; 2. formations with
characteristic prefix pag-, expressing chiefly transitive actions;
3. characteristic prefix pang-, deliberate actions; 4. si-, action
by more than one actor; 5. paki-, action along with others; 6. ka-,
reciprocal, involuntary, and accidental; 7. pa-, causative; 8. pati-,
reflexive.

These indications are a mere rough guide: neither the characteristic
prefix nor the meaning indicated runs through the entire group. The
first three groups are the most important, and, to a large extent,
each formation of the other five groups belongs also to one of the
three primary groups.

In each group there are four types of words: simple static, transient,
abstracts of action, and special static. The simple static words
involve no idea of active or passive; the transients are accompanied
by abstracts, in which the transient occurrence is viewed as a
static concept, and by special static words, which, though static,
involve the idea of voice: simple static slat a document, writing,
letter; transient sumlat wrote, sultan is to be written to; abstract
pagslat an act of writing; special static sulatn a writing-desk
(with idea of local passive).

Each (active or passive,  92) transient formation exists in two modes,
actual and contingent, and each of these has two aspects, punctual
and durative; the durative always has accented reduplication. The
actual mode envisages the occurrence as actually having taken place
or taking place: in the punctual aspect the occurrence is viewed in
its entirety, without regard to duration, and hence always as past:
nagral studied, learned; in the durative aspect of the actual
the occurrence is viewed as a process going on in time, past or
present: nagral was studying, is studying, used to study, studied
(repeatedly), studies. The contingent mode views the occurrence as
not having actually taken place: the punctual aspect views it as
possible, hypothetical, or commanded: magral should study, study
(as command); the durative as future from the point of view of the
past or present: magral will study, was going to study. The punctual
contingent form is used not only in commands and hypothetical clauses,
but in subordinate predications and complements generally, even, for
instance, after nang ( 192 f.), and often, in such constructions, in
competition with actual forms. It is often used, further, after hind`
( 238). When objectivized with ang, it expresses the possibility or
circumstance of the occurrence: ang magral a hypothetical studier,
the circumstance that one might study.

The abstracts of action are much used in the construction described
at  274.

In addition to these more or less regular and systematized forms,
there are various isolated formations, which will be discussed after
the others.

A systematically arranged list of formations precedes the Index.



3. Description of formations.

I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, pang-).

A. Simple static forms.

(1) Root-words.

341. The uses of root-words cover a wide range of meanings, the
diversity of which is due to the various material meanings of the
roots. The rough grouping here made is a matter of convenience; the
speech-feeling seems not to distinguish classes of roots or diverse
employments of root-words.

While a complete list of the examples occurring in the Texts and
illustrative sentences will be given for nearly all other formations,
the root-words are so numerous that it will be expedient merely to
refer to the Index.

(1) Root-words in many cases express object-ideas which are viewed
as simple: ang bhay house, ang to human being.

(2) If the words containing a root have in common the idea of a
quality rather than of an object, the root-word may express either
the quality itself, or an object possessing the quality.

(a) In the former case, it is generally a single occurrence of the
quality that is expressed, not the quality in general, which is
expressed rather by a collective with ka- and -an ( 421 ff.), but
this distinction is not fully carried out. The root-word generally
stands in object construction. Examples: Ang bte ni Hwn ay wal sa
kanya ng lo, dtapuwat nssa kanya ng pso`. Juan's good quality
lies not in his head, but in his heart. Si Pdro ay to ng wala ng
dangl. Pedro is a person without honor. ang nit nang tagraw the heat
of summer. Ang llim nang baln ay is ng pantay-kawyan. The depth
of the well is the length of a bamboo-tree. Ang lamg sa Amrika ay
masydo. The cold in America is excessive. Ang ligs nang us ay hind
gya nang sa so. The speed of the deer is not equal to that of the
dog. Ang sam nang sging na it ay nsa ugt. The trouble with this
banana-tree is at the root. ang tas nang khoy the height of the tree.

(b) When expressing an object endowed with a quality, the root-word
is in competition with words formed with the prefix ma- ( 454). It
usually stands as a predicate or as conjunctive attribute of another
word. ang tbig na lat salt-water, ang dgat na lat the salt-sea, the
ocean. Ang pko` ay baluktt. The nail is crooked. Ang patalm ay bwal
sa manga bta`. Children are not allowed to have sharp tools. Ang itlg
na yit y bugk (or: bulk). This egg is rotten. Sya y bugk. He is
crazy. ang buwsit na alla` a repulsive servant. Ikw ay bwsit. You
are a bore. Manga gliw ko ng gino! Honored sirs! isa ng tu ng
hmak a no-account person. ang tu ng lasng the drunken man. Sya
y lasng. He is drunk. ang pulbe ng lump the lame beggar. Sya y
lump. He is lame. Si Hwn ay isa ng mahl na bta` sa kanya ng manga
maglang. Juan is a child dear to his parents. Mra ang manga sle sa
panah ng it. Peppers are cheap at this time. Hind pansn ang piklt
sa mukh nang dalga ng si Mary. The scar on young Maria's face is not
noticeable. ang to ng pant a bald-headed man. isa ng bya ng paypa`
a tranquil town. Sya y ppe. He is dumb. Ang pint nang bintna` ay
put`. The window is painted white. Sagd ang kanya ng gupt. His
hair-cut is close. Sina Hwn ay salt sa pananamt. Juan and his
family are short of clothing. Ak y saw sa pagsusbo` sa bta`. I
am in an awkward position for feeding the child. Syang ang bta ng
si Hwn. Little Juan is to be regretted. Isa ng to ng sinungling
si Pdro. Pedro is a liar. Si Hwn ay isa ng to ng tanyg. Juan is
a renowned man. Tanyg sya sa kanya ng klse. He is at the head of
his class. ang tigs nang khoy the hard part of the log. ang da ng
tumpk the right road. si Unt` Shorty (as nickname).

(3) If the words containing the root refer rather to an action or
occurrence, the uses of the root-word are more varied.

(a) The root-word may refer to the action itself; it is used of
a single instance rather than of the action in general, which is
expressed rather by abstracts of action, though the distinction
is not always clear. The root-word so used is mostly in object
construction. Examples: Ang anyya sa kin ni Hwna ay ki ng
tinanggp. I accepted Juana's invitation. May bl` ang kawyan. The
bamboo has a break in it. May bhay pa ang psa ng it. This cat is
still alive. Ang dalamht nang kanya ng in ay malak. His mother's
grief is great. Sa damdam k y nagumpisa n ang malalamg na raw. I
think (literally: In my feeling) the cold days have begun. Si Hwn ay
sya ng pumyag sa hilng nil sa kanya ng sasakyn. Juan was the one
who acceded to their request for his vehicle. Ang hgas nang pinggn
ay marum. The washing of the dishes is dirty, i. e. The dishes have
been poorly washed. Ang kant nang bon ay manam. The bird's song is
pleasant. Ang kasl ni Pdro at ni Mary ay sa lingg. The wedding
of Pedro and Maria will be on Sunday. ang ki ng llan sa trn my
embarking (with all my goods) on the train. Ang pagakpk nang manga to
ay nakabbingi. The applause of the people was deafening. Ang pso`
sa pa ni Pdro ay malak. The burn on Pedro's foot is large. Ang
ptol nang buhk ni Hwn ay bakl-bakl. Juan's hair-cut is uneven. Sa
lnes ang tagp nila sa da-ng-Balwag. They are to meet on the Baliwag
road next Monday. ang tahl ni Bat ng Bkal the barking of Iron Stone
(name of a dog). Ang tm nang bta` ay sa lo. The child was struck
on the head. Binigyn ni Hwn nang is ng tapk ang kaybgan nya ng
si Pdro. Juan gave his friend Pedro a nudge. Ang kanya ng tlog ay
mabbaw. His sleep is light. Ang up nang Intsk ay patalungk`. The
Chinese sit squatting. Buthan mo ang yr nang samballo. Put a good
finish on (the making of) the hat.

(b) The root-word may express an object by virtue of which the
action becomes possible or has concrete manifestation; this use
closely approaches transient passives of various kinds. Root-words
in this use are most commonly conjunctive attributes, but the object
construction, especially in the predicate, is frequent. Ang gaw nya
ng laruwn ay inilagay ny sa kahn. The toys he snatched were put by
him into a box. Sno sa manga to ang inko ni Mariyno? Ang ko ni
Mariyno ay si Pdro. Which one of the men did Mariano relieve?--The
one whom Mariano relieved is Pedro. Hwag kay ng mamtol nang kawya
ng hind ninyo ri`. Don't make a cutting of bamboo not owned by you;
ang ri` property, ang may ri` the owner or master. Ang bigay ny sa
kin nang Pask nang Pangangank na nagdan ay isa ng tabakra. For
last Christmas he gave me a tabatiere. ang bhis nya ng damt the
(good) clothes she has put on (in place of her others). isa ng bro`
a joke. ang byy na isd` sa palisdan the fish allowed to swim
free in the fish-reservoir. ang dal that carried; Dal ni Hwn ang
lumb. Juan is carrying the cup. ang dikt nang apy the blazing of the
fire. Ang orasn ni Hwn ay gling sa Pars. Juan's watch comes from
Paris. Ang tornlyo ng it y gmit sa mkina. This screw is used in
the machine. ang gant nya ng pla` the gift he gave in return. Ang
kwko ng it ay ganti ng pla` sa kin ni Hwn. This cigar-holder
is a return-gift to me from Juan. May hlo ng iba ng bgay ang gtas
na it. This milk has something else mixed in with it. hti ng gab
midnight. Ang hamps na tinanggp ni Hwn sa kanya ng panginon ay
is ng kabn. The whipping Juan got from his master was twenty-five
strokes. May hrang na pno-ng-khoy ang da ng patngo sa briyo
nang San-Visnte. The road toward the district of San Vicente has a
tree obstructing it. Hle si Hwn nang puls. Juan was arrested by the
policeman. Ang igb nya ng tbig ay marum. The water he dipped from
the spring is dirty. Ang binbsa nya ng libr ay kath ni Risl. The
book he is reading was written by Rizal. Lan (or: tan) kay Pdro ang
alala ng it. This present is reserved for Pedro. Ang lkad ni Hwn
ay ang panghihirm. Juan's errand is to borrow something. Ang llan
ni Hwn sa kanya ng karitn ay manga kahn nang lak. Juan's load
on his wagon is cases of liquor; ang lla ng kasangkpan the loaded
utensils. Ang mank na yit y lto sa duran. This chicken is roasted
on the spit. Nhle si Hwn sa tab nang kanya ng nkaw na kabyo. Juan
was caught with the horse he stole. Ang psak nang bangk` ay bunt
nang nyg at pagkt. The boat is calked with cocoanut fibre and
wax. Ang pgil ni Hwn ay ang kabyo. Juan is trying to restrain the
horse. Ang pints ko kay Hwn ay ang kanya ng bsyo ng paginm. What
I don't like about Juan is his vice of drunkenness. ang plot anything
picked up; an adopted child. ang isa ng ptol na pno-ng-khoy a tree
that has been cut up; Ang ptol nang khoy ay npakaikl`. The wood has
been cut too short. Ang libr ay ang sady ko sa bhay ni Hwn. The
book is what I went to Juan's house for. Ang saky sa trn ay lim
ng kompany ng sundlo. The people in the train are five companies
of soldiers. Ang sangkp nang mank ay kalabsa. The chicken is
cooked with pumpkin. "Magsipagssi kay, manga to ng makasalnan,"
ang sigw nang kra mul sa plpito. "Repent, ye sinners," was the cry
of the priest from the pulpit. isa ng sbo` a mouthful. Marmi sya ng
tgo ng kwalt. He has much money saved away. Ang tanm nang bkid
ay play na malagkt. The field is planted with a sticky rice. Ang
tanggp nya ng blin ay lubh ng marmi. The commissions he received
were numerous. Malaks ang twa ni Hwn. Juan's laughter was loud. Ang
twag sa lugr na it ay Kinamatay-ng-Kabyo. They call this place
Dead Horse. ang tungtng that on which something stands; a mat on
which dishes are set (specific name: dikn). Ang tr nang bta`
ay ang mansnas sa msa. The child is pointing at the apple on the
table. Ang ussa` sa kin ni Hwn ay kung saan nndon ang kanya ng
sombrro. What Juan asked me was where his hat was. Wal sya ng uw
ng manga libr. He did not bring home any books. Ang talm nang glok
ay yri sa Yurpa. The cutting-edge of the bolo is made in Europe.

(c) Especially with the particle n ( 223) the root-word often
expresses a brusque command; in this use it is in competition with
transient forms. Dal ka nang iyo ng pagtakb. Hurry your running,
i. e. Run faster. Hamps na kay, manga bta`, sa manga langgm. Whip
at the ants, boys. Ht na nang mansnas. Divide up the apples. Hint
na kay, manga bta`. Stop, children. sip na kay kung an ang
kahulugn nang ki ng bugtng. Guess the meaning of my riddle. Lyas
na! Get out! Lg na! Take a bath! Luksu n sa tink na iyn. Jump
across those spines. Sma n sa kany. Go to him. Twag na nang manga
pols. Call the police. Tay`. Stand up. Up na. Sit down.

(d) Repeated with nang ( 191) root-words, as predicates, denote an
actor in repeated and continuous action: Nkta ko ng ptol nang ptol
si Hwn nang tub. I saw Juan cutting away at the sugar-cane. Similarly
(see Index) bil and twa.

342. Root-words with accent-shift. Barytone roots are used as
root-words with shift of accent to the last syllable to denote
something which has been affected by the action, quality, or (in
fewer cases) thing, which is denoted by the root. The particle n
is usually added. Agaw n sa snog ang manga laruwn. The toys have
been snatched from the fire. Aw na si Hwn sa kanya ng pinarrusha
ng ank. Juan is already overcome with pity for his child, whom he
is punishing. Ang so ni Hwn ay bahy. Juan's dog is grown up in the
house, is completely domesticated. Ang bta ng si Hwn ay bahy. Little
Juan is shy, is unused to strangers. Bayad n ang tang sa kin ni
Hwn. Juan's debt to me is paid now. Bihis n ang bta`. The child's
clothes have been changed, The child is dressed up now. Bilang n
ang manga itlg na it. These eggs are already counted. Ang lo
ni Hwn ay bilg. Juan's head is round; or: Juan has been fooled;
ang bilg na tbo` the round dipper. Buhy ang ki ng in. My mother
is living. Sya y bulg. He is blinded; or: He is blind; ang babye
ng bulg the blind woman. Daing n ang isd`. The fish has been laid
open. isa ng to ng gutm a hungry (or: gluttonous) person. Hat na ang
tub. The sugar-cane is cut in two. Huli n si Hwna sa trn. Juana is
late for the train. Ang karn ay ihaw n. The meat is done. Init n ang
gtas. The milk is heated. Kayas n ang kawya ng it. This bamboo is
already smoothed. Ang pagkknan nya nang itlg ay ang kah ng kulang
n. He will take eggs from the box that is already started (literally:
incomplete, cf. pat na sntimos ang klang nit. This lacks four
cents, is four cents too little). Lakd kam ng umw`. We went home
on foot. Lipas n ang gamt (ang pabang`). The medicine (the perfume)
is stale, has lost its strength. Lipas n ang ki ng gtom. My hunger
has disappeared. Pas` ang lugr na it nang kanya ng kamy. This spot
on his hand is burned; ang pas` a pottery dish. Ang pagkakgaltan
ni Hwn at ni Pdro ay paw n. The quarrel between Juan and Pedro is
now allayed. Pigil n ang kabyo. The horse is under control now. Ang
khoy ay putul n. The wood is now cut. It y sir na. This is already
ruined. Sung ang damt na kanya ng pinirnsa. The clothes which she
ironed are scorched; sung na askal burnt sugar. Tam na ang iyo
ng pagkwnta. Now you have figured it correctly. Tipun n an manga
kalabw. Now the carabao are rounded up. Tulis n ang lpis. The
pencil is sharpened. Tur` ang kanya ng dalre`. His finger is stiff.

This form occurs, in this book, also from the following roots (see
Index): bsag, bnot, glit, gmit, hsa`, killa, lpad, lmang,
pgod, skop, snay, slat, tpos, tiwla`, tloy.

(a) In the case of some roots this form is used like a simple root-word
without accent-shift; these are roots in which the accent-shift
expresses a modification of the material meaning; see  337. So:
alm that known (see Index); Bab na riyn sa iy ng kinupn! Come
down from your perch! Ang sakt na kanya ng tintiis ay ang lagnt na
tpus. The sickness from which he is suffering is typhoid fever. (ang
skit na kanya ng tintis the grief he is enduring). Sama tyo
sa pagbil nang play. Let us be partners in buying rice. Cf. also
hul, above.

(b) In oxytone roots, where the accent-shift cannot occur, our form
is homonymous with the simple root-word: Bigti n si Pdro. Pedro
is now strangled. Bukas n ang lta. The can is opened. Busug n ang
manga hyop. The animals have been fed their fill. Hint na ang trn
nang ak y sumaky. The train had stopped when I got on. Hubad n ang
bta`. The child is undressed now. Ang manga Igorte ay hubd. The
Igorote go naked. Hungkuy n ang bigs. The rice is fanned now. Sya
y kasl. He (she) is married. Pantay n ang lpa`. The ground has
been levelled. Nkta ko ng patd ang sampyan nang damt. I saw that
the clothes-line was broken. Pun na ang bte ng it. This bottle is
already full. Tay na ang bhay. The house is already erected. Tikwas
n ang khoy. One end of the log is down.

Similarly are used: angkn, bil, tadtd, tuw`.



(2) Doubling.

343. Simple doubling. Simple doubling expresses explicit plurality or
repetition, often with the idea of variation, intensity, or diminution:
pat-pat four by four, four at a time, ang mata-mat trellis-work. Ang
dr nya nang karyom ay hindi par-parho. Her stitches with the
needle are not even. Saby-saby sila ng umals. They all went away at
the same time. Similarly from: agd, aln, an, raw, bgay, bakl,
baluktt, bar, gab, gib`, hal`, is, laht, lbo, lingg, lob,
panty, sri`, sno, sund, tul`, unt`.

(a) The simple root does not occur and the meaning is discrepant in
paru-par butterfly.

(b) From derived words, in the same meaning: kan-kanil (ka-n-il 
528), kan-kanno (ka-n--no  528), dal-dalaw two by two, two at
a time (da-law  345), tatlu-tatl three by three, three at a time
(ta-tl  345).

(c) With retraction of accent: Dl-dli sya ng tumakb. He ran off
like a flash.

344. (1) D. In some cases the accent is shifted; the meaning is the
same: Putl-putl ang katawn ni Hwn nang ki ng mkta. Juan's body
was all cut up when I saw it. This form from: bhay, byan, pnit,
sbi, slok.



(3) Reduplication.

345. Simple reduplication. In a very few cases the place of the
root-word is taken by the root with reduplication. The only clear
case is tutul ear-wax, root -tul. The numerals dalaw two and tatl
three seem to be irregularly reduplicated forms of roots -law and -tl
(for -tal?), as a few of the derivatives seem to indicate. A number
of words, treated in the following as simple roots, have, however,
the aspect of this formation: babye, bibingk, bubuwt a kind of
mouse, gagamb, lalki, papya (Spanish), tutub, toto.

346. Accented reduplication. Accented reduplication is used chiefly
in transient forms ( 348); distinct from this use seems to be that
of numerals, in the meaning of only so many: pat, iln, is;
similarly d-dalaw only two (from da-law) ( 345).

mmay`, mmy` seems to be felt as a simple root-word and has been
treated as such.



(4) pang-.

347. Of the two prefixes round which primary forms are grouped (
340), pag- is used only for abstracts of action ( 348. 350. 351);
with pang- are formed words denoting the thing used for doing so
and so, or as such and such: Nawal` ang kany ng pangakla`. His
power of thought left him. ang pangatp that used for roofing, a
shingle. Magpaptol ka, Pdro, nang manga kawya ng pangbkod. Have
some bamboo cut for a fence, Pedro. ang pangbamb a stick or club used
for beating. pangbay instrument for pounding rice, pestle. pangdilg
implements used for sprinkling. panggpas a slicer, a curved knife
with saw-toothed edge. Ang ginmit nya ng panggupt na guntng
sa damt ay mapurl. The scissors he used for cutting cloth were
dull; also simply: ang panggupt scissors, shears, ang panghamps
a whip. Ang ginaw ng panghrang sa dan nang manga tulisn ay
isa ng gib ng karitn. The robbers used a broken-down wagon to
make the obstruction on the road. Ang lasta ng it ay panghte`
nang dyap. This knife is used for cutting limes. ang panglpa` the
sticky mud used for smoothing the threshing-floor. ang pangagnip a
dream. pamitk a single rein (one guides the animal by flicking it
in various ways, cf. pitk a fillip, a flick, a snap). pamaty in
pamatay-kto thumb, literally: that with which one kills head-lice
(kto). Pamtol nang buhk ang guntng na it. These shears are
used for cutting hair. Ang salawl na yit y sya k ng pangsaky sa
kabyo. These are my trousers for horseback-riding. Ang manga pint ng
may pangsar na gmit ay sumsara ng ksa`. Doors that have closing
attachments close themselves automatically. ang panli` a halter or
rope for tying up an animal. Ang kulilng na yt y sya k ng panwag
nang alla`. This bell is what I use for calling the servants; also:
pangtwag. Ang pangtay nang halge ay hind dumating. The instruments
for setting up posts (i. e. the cranes) did not arrive. Ang kalayky
ay sya k ng ginmit na pangtpon nang manga bunt na dam. I used
the rake for piling up the uprooted grass. ang panro` a pointer,
anything used for pointing. Sya y may salawl na pangup sa damhan
at gayon dn my-roon sy ng pangup sa sglan. He has trousers for
sitting on the lawn and others for when he sits at the gaming-table.

Similarly from, the following roots: hit, ko`, alala, ank, bil,
bilmt, dalngin, gamt, hilmos, hli, sip, ngaln, plo`, pukpk,
sbong, takp, tanm, tiwla`.

(a) This derivative from numerals denotes a thing used to fill such
and such a place: ang pangpat that used as fourth, as: the fourth
horse in a team; of similar meaning: panglim fifth, pangnim sixth,
pamit seventh, pangwal eighth, pangsiym ninth. From the ordinal
( 416,a) is formed pangna first. From phrases the higher numbers:
pangsa-m-p` the tenth (sa m p` ten), panglabi-ng-is the eleventh
(labi ng is), pangdalawa-ng-p` twentieth, pamito-ng-p` seventieth.

(b) A few formations show irregularities: panukla` equivalent to
pangakla` above, is felt to belong with akla`; cf. the similar
insertion of u in paubya` ( 481,d); panginon master, does not seem
to be felt as a derivative of gino and has therefore been treated
as a separate root.

Second and third are derived from the reduplicated form ( 345) and
show phonetic irregularity: ang pangalaw the second; one's second
in a duel; pangatl third, third horse in a gun-carriage; similarly
pangatlo-ng-p` the thirtieth.

(c) From root with accent shift ( 337) only panghul the last (of
an established series).



B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words.

(1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag-.

348. Of the active forms of the primary groups, that of the type with
prefix zero expresses the actor in a simple action or process. Both of
the punctual forms, actual and contingent, are made with infix -um-;
the actual durative consists of the root reduplicated, with infix
-um-; the contingent durative is reduplicated, but lacks the infix;
the reduplication is in both cases accented. The abstract of action
consists of the root with prefix pag-. Thus the forms are: p-um-tol,
p-um--ptol, p-um-tol, p-ptol, pag-ptol. Examples:

Umabang k nang maglalak nang gtas. Watch for a milkman. Sya y umgaw
nang manga laruwn. He snatched some toys. Sya y umhon sa log (sa
bundk, sa guld). He went up the river (up into the mountains, up
the hill). Pumtol ka, Hwn, nang bho`, paghon mo sa bundk. When
you go up into the mountains, Juan, cut some slender bamboo. Ummin
sila Pdro sa harapn nang hukm. Pedro and his band confessed before
the judge. ummot sold, of other than a regular merchant. Umnib
ka kay Pdro. Let your mat overlap Pedro's, i. e. Sleep next to
Pedro. Umangkn ka nang laruwn. Take some toys for yourself. Ang
pagyaw nya ng kumin nang karn ay sya ng nakabbte sa kany. His
not being willing to eat meat is what does him good. Ang halge nang
bhay ay bumba` sapagkt hind kya nang lpa` ang bigt na kanya
ng dindala. The post of the house sank because the weight it was
bearing was too great for the ground. Bbbag si Hwn nang kanya
ng kalar`. Juan will fight with one of his playmates. Bumaluktot
k nang yantk. Bend a piece of rattan. Ang has ay bumaluktt. The
snake doubled itself up. Bumlot ka nang sman (nang sigarlyo, nang
kmot). Roll up some suman (sticky rice cooked in banana-leaves; some
cigarettes, a blanket). Ang pagbsa ay mahrap. Reading is hard. Sya
y bumigt nang to. He choked a man to death. Ang pagbigt ay isa
ng pagpaty sa kpwa to sa pamamagtan nang pagsakl. Strangling
is killing a person by means of choking. Bumlog si Hwn nang isa
ng turump. Juan turned out (on a lathe) a spinning-top. Bumngit
sya sa malaki ng pangnib. He went (voluntarily) to the brink of a
great danger. Bumitw sa lbid ang is sa iny. One of you let go
of the rope. Bumbuks ang manga bulaklk sa hlamann. The flowers
in the garden are opening. Sya y bumnot nang dam. He plucked up
some grass. Laht nang to sa bya ng iyn ay bumto sa kandidto
ng si Maniks. All the people in that town voted for the candidate
Maniqus. Ang halge ay dumdala nang tahlan. The post bears up
girders. Dumamdm si Hwn nang isa ng mabigt na sakt. Juan felt a
severe pain. Sya y dumap`. He lay down on his face. Ang kanit ng
kwalt sa bangk ay kasalukya ng gumgna nang buws. Your money
and mine in the bank is even now earning interest. gumant act
in retaliation. gumpas cut with the panggpas. Ang my sakt ay
guminhwa. The patient became more comfortable ... ay gumginhwa
n ... is getting more comfortable now. Sya y humalk sa kanya ng
nnay. She kissed her mother. Ang bta ng si Hwn ang humamps sa
ank ni li ng Mary. It was little Juan who hit Aunt Maria's little
boy with a whip. ang paghnap a seeking (especially of one's daily
bread). Sya y humrang nang manga to ng naghhatid nang kabyo sa
bya-ng-San-Migl. He held up some people who were taking horses to
the town of San Miguel. Ak ay humt nang mansnas. I cut an apple in
two. Humt ako nang manga itlg na binil ni Hwna. I took half of the
eggs Juana bought. Ingtan mo ang paghwak sa mkina ng iyn, sapagkt
bak ka maputlan nang dalri` na gya nang nangyri sa ib. Be careful
how you take hold of that machine, for you might get your finger cut
off like others before you. Humn nang pagtakb ang kabyo. The
horse lost its speed as a runner. ang paghing` a requesting, a
request. Hhiram kam nang libr sa librerya. We shall borrow books
from the library. humla` predicted, prophesied. umigb get water by
dipping from a well, spring, or stream. Ak y umhip nang pto. I
was blowing the small flute. Umhip ang hngi ng habgat. The spring
wind is blowing. Umlag ka. Get out of the way. Ang kany ng manga
pagilng ay lubh ng maknis. His little dodges are very clever. Umnit
ang plnsa. The flatiron became hot. Umnit ang tbig. The water got
hot. Ang paginm nang lak ay masam`. Drinking liquor is harmful. Sya
y uminm nang gtas. He drank some milk. Umsip ka, Nnay, nang
isa ng kwnto. Try to think of a story, Mother. Ang pagsip nang
bugtng na it ay mahrap. This riddle is hard to solve. ang kany
ng pagiyk her weeping. kumabiyw press sugar-cane. Kumalusks sa
slok ang dag`. The rat pattered in the corner, i. e. I heard the
pattering of a rat in the corner. Ang bon ay kumkant. The bird is
singing. Kumap si Hwn nang itlg sa pgad nang mank. Juan felt out
some eggs in the hen's nest. Kumkap sya nang isa ng palak`. He felt
around for a frog. Sya y kumyas nang isa ng kawyan. He smoothed a
stick of bamboo. Hwag k ng kumurt ngayn! Don't pinch now! Si Pdro
ay lumabs. Pedro went out. Ang so y lumlmon. The dog is feeding. Si
Pdro ay lumlmon at hind kumkin. Pedro is eating like an animal,
not like a human being. Lumyag si Manuwl sa Amrika. Manuel sailed
(i. e. voyaged) to America (ang lyag a sail). Ang bantay-play ay
lumyas. The watchman of the rice-field left his post. Isa ng sundlo
ay lumyas sa nit nang paglalabann. A soldier deserted in the heat
of the battle. Sya y lumbot. He went for a walk. Magptol ka, Pdro,
nang manga kgon, pang lumnis ang bkid. Cut the cugon-grass, Pedro,
so that the field may become clear. Si Pdro ay lumpat sa iba ng
byan. Pedro moved to another town. Lumuhod k, Hwn. Kneel down,
Juan. Si Hwn ay lumuhd sa harp nang hre`. Juan knelt down before
the king. Sya y ngumngit`. She is smiling. Pumagtan sya sa dalaw
ng dalga. He placed himself between two young ladies. Ak y pumna
nang us. I shot an arrow at a stag (pna` an arrow). Pumnaw ang
kanya ng hining. His breath departed, i. e. He gave up the ghost. Si
Hwn ang pumso sa ki ng kulug. It was Juan who burned out my
wart for me. Huwg k ng pumatd nang sampyan! Don't you break
the clothes-line! Si Hwn ay sya ng pumyag sa para ng it. It was
Juan who agreed to this plan. Sya y pumpyag. He is willing. Pumli
ak nang malak ng mansnas. I chose a big apple. Pumplit sya ng
magbuks nang kab ng bkal. He was trying hard to open an iron
safe. (But punctual: Pumlit sya ... He forced open...). pumitk
give a fillip, snap at with one's finger. Sya y pumpukpk nang
bunt nang nyg. He is pounding cocoanut husks. Pumptol nang
kawyan si Mariyno. Mariano is cutting bamboo. Pptol ... will
cut.... Ang sumsbuy na tbig ay nangggling sa bubungn nang
bhay. The water that was splashing on us came from the roof of the
house. sumagsa` jostle. sumaguwn paddle. sumhod put something under
to catch what flows or falls. Sya y sumsakay sa bangka` nang ak y
dumatng. He was getting into the canoe when I arrived. Sumla siy
sa singsng. He missed the ring (in the juego de anillo, in which
one tries to catch a ring on a stick). sumlok dip out water (ang
slok a dipper, a basket for catching fruit when it is cut from the
tree; a net for catching insects). Sya y sumandk nang sining. She
dipped out some boiled rice. Sumnib ka kay Pdro, (same meaning
as umnib above). Sumkad ang kabyo. The horse struck out, gave a
kick. Sumikp ang dan sa karamhan nang to. The road became crowded
with the multitude of people. Sumikp ang damt. The garment shrank
and became tight. Sumiksk si Hwn sa plong nang manga to. Juan
crowded his way into the gathering of people. Sumilakb ang apy (ang
kanya ng glit, ang kanya ng tuw`). The fire (his anger, his joy)
welled up. Ang pagsint ni Pdro ay hind tinanggp nang dalga. The
young lady did not accept Pedro's proffer of love. Siy ang sumukly
sa kanya ng ank. It was she herself who combed her child's hair (ang
sukly a comb). sumlid spin thread. sumlong push ahead, progress;
also as family name: Sumlong. Si Pdro ay sumund` nang pre`. Pedro
fetched a priest. Hind sya nagkaplad sa pagsund nang mdiko. He did
not succeed in fetching a doctor. Pagsuntok ny ay tumakbo k. When
he strikes you, run (suntk a blow on the head). Sya y sumsutst. He
is whistling. Ang bta y tumahmik. The boy quieted down. Tumtahl
ang so. The dog was barking. Sya y tumm sa hwting. He won in
the lottery. Tumtand siy. He is getting old. Sya y tumnod sa
bhay sa bo ng magdamg. He guarded the house all night. Tumanng
ak kay Hwn. I asked Juan. Tumanng ak nang kwlta kay Hwn. I
asked Juan for money. tumangh` wonder. Sya y tumtang`. He
is willing, He assents. Tumtwa siy. He is laughing. Ikw ang
tumwag kay Hwn. Do you call Juan. Nrinig ko ang iy ng pagtwag
sa kin. I heard you calling me. Sya y tumay`. He stood up. tumib`
cut bananas off the tree. tumild cut wood small along the grain,
shave off, cut into small parts. Sya y tumimb nang tbig. He drew
water with a bucket. ang pagtingn the act of looking at something,
observation. Ang pagtipd sa kwalt ay gingawa nang marmi. Many
people practise economy in the matter of money. Ang pagtpon sa manga
khoy kung taguln ay mahrap, sapagkt maptik. It is hard to collect
logs in the rainy season, on account of the mud. Tumir si Hwn na
isa ng tan sa bya-ng-Balwag. Juan lived one year in the town of
Baliuag. tumuk` pick with the beak (tuk` the beak of a fowl). Sya y
tumlak sa isinslong na kah ng bkal. He pushed (i. e. took part in
pushing) at the iron safe they were moving. Also: Sya y tumlak. He
"shoved off", i. e. He went away. Si Hwn ay tumlog sa bhay ni
Pdro. Juan went and slept in Pedro's house. Ang kanya ng pagtlog ay
mabbaw. His sleep is light. Tumngo sya sa bya-ng-Balwag. He went
toward Baliuag. Ang pagubr nang manga barl na yt sa pamamarl nang
kalabw-ram ay hind pinakamabte. These guns are not the best for
shooting wild carabao. Umubr ang ininm nya ng purg. The purge he
drank took effect. Umubr sa kakann ang kanya ng ginaw ng lamsa. The
table he made was suitable for the dining-room. Umubr ng nagmit
ang tornlyo ng bkal sa lugr nang tans. It was possible to use
the iron screw instead of the copper. Sya y umup`. He sat down. Ang
pagup` sa hngin ay isa ng mahrap na parsa. "Sitting on the air"
(standing in sitting position with the forefingers pointing up) is
a hard punishment. Umrung ang trn. The train is backing. Umtang
ka nang salap kay Pdro. Borrow some money from Pedro. Umuw si
Hwn. Juan went home, Yumy si Hwn nang kanya ng mang kaybgan. Juan
invited some of his friends. ang pagyya` the invitation.

Other roots occurring in these forms (and roots occurring above
out of their alphabetical order): abla, gos, kay, akiyt, als,
sa, yon, bbaw, bah`, balk, blang, bil, bhat, btas, dang,
dla, dals, dlaw, dal, dmi, dpit, dpo`, dars, datng, dilm,
dkit, dum, don, galw, gmit, gamt, gpang, gast, gaw`, glang,
gupt, gust, hba`, hbol, hgod, hakbng, hngo`, harp, htak,
hig`, hla, hilng, hing, hkay, hli, hni, big, kagt, kin,
kalabg, kpit, katm, kib`, killa, klos, king, kta, kha,
kulng, kuwnta, lban, lagnap, lagpk, lkad, laks, lak, lamg,
lamps, langy, lpit, lgaw, lindl, lipd, litw, liwnag, lubg,
lha`, luks, luws, nkaw, ngiyw, panhk, pasn, psok, paty, pwis,
phit, pits, pukl, pri, putk, sagt, sakl, skop, salkay, sma,
sangg, spit, sar, sayw, sigw, skat, sild, spa`, ssid, sub,
sgat, slat, sumpng, sund, suwy, syo`, tab`, tag`, takb, tlik,
taln, tanw, tanglw, tarto, tawd, tbay, tiktk, tikuws, tbo`,
tugtg, tuktk, tlong, tungtng, tupd, uln, ul`, unt`, pa, yman.

(a) Kumusta k? How d'you do? may be felt to belong here. [10]

(b) An irregular inflection in which variation of the initial
consonant takes the place of the infix is known to Mr. Santiago from
a few traditional phrases: Hwag k ng maty (for: pumaty) nang kpwa
to. Thou shalt not kill.

(c) Forms with accent shift owe this feature to the root ( 337):
Umabt ka nang isa ng mansnas. Help yourself to an apple. Ang
sumund na silakb nang lagablb ay siya ng umabt sa bubungn. The
next leap of the flame reached the roof. Ang pagabt nang bnga ng
it ay mahrap. This fruit is hard to reach. Nrinig ko sy sa kanya
ng pagayw sa sinbe ni Hwn. I heard him disagree with what Juan
had said. Naglit ak sa kanya ng pagayw sa lamsa. I was angered
at his leaving the table. Si Pdro ay umayw na. Pedro has left the
table. Similarly from bba` and skit.

(d) From a phrase: Hind marnong gumanti-ng-pla` si Hwn. Juan does
not know how to make return for kindness (gant ng pla`).

(e) From derived words: tumaglid, pagtaglid (ta-glid  523);
tumalkod, pagtalkod (ta-lkod  523). See also  404. 488.

349. The doubled root with the same formation is used of actions
aimlessly repeated at intervals. Ntinik sy sa kanya ng pagtakb-takb
sa bakran. In his constant running about the yard, he got a splinter
into his foot. Tumtwa-twa si Hwn hbang nagbbigks nang talumpte
si Pdro. Juan kept laughing at intervals while Pedro was making his
speech. Si Hwn ay tumtwa-twa nang sya y hampasn ni Pdro. When
Juan kept laughing every little while, Pedro finally struck him with
the whip.

(a) From a root with accent shift ( 337): Tumtawa-taw si Hwn tw ng
kin sya ng mmasdn hbang nagbbigkas nang talumpte si Pdro. Juan
kept snickering every time I happened to look at him while Pedro was
delivering his oration.



(2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag-r.

350. Many roots form their active with the prefix mag- for the
contingent, nag- for the actual mode; the durative is reduplicated
before the prefix is added. The corresponding abstract of action
has unaccented reduplication and prefix pag-. Thus: nagptol,
nag-p-ptol, mag-ptol, mag-p-ptol, pag-pu-ptol. These actives
express, generally, a more deliberate action than those with -um-;
often also one involving more effect on external objects than do those
with -um-. We take up first those roots from which forms with -um-
do not occur in our material:

Ak y nagantk. I am sleepy. Ang lsong kay Hwn sa kanya ng pagaarro
ay nagsidating n. The helpers for Juan in his plowing have arrived
(ang arro a plow). Si Pdro ay magaswa. Pedro is going to take
a wife. Si Pdro ay magaswa kay Hwna. Pedro is going to marry
Juana. Sil y nagway. They are fighting. magbhay build a house. Ak
y nagbast nang ki ng damt. I packed up my clothes. Sya y nagbyad
nang kany ng manga tang. He paid off his debts. magbay pound rice
in a mortar. magbigs hull rice (i. e. make bigs, hulled rice, out
of play, rice in the grain). Sya y nagbigy nang libr sa kin. He
gave me some books. Sya y nagbhis kanna ng umga. She put on her
good clothes this morning. Ang pagbibiybo ay isa ng ugli nang
manga Intsk. Swinging the feet when sitting is a habit of the
Chinese. Nagbiyy si Hwn nang isd` sa kanya ng palisdan. Juan
put some fish into his fishpond. magbuhl tie a knot. Nagbwl
sila nang isa ng pno-ng-khoy. They felled a tree. Ang sging ay
nagddhon. The banana-tree is putting out leaves. Ang paghahsa`
nang panghit ay mahrap. Sharpening razors is difficult. Sya y
naghhatd nang manga larwan sa simbhan. He is delivering images
to the church. Maghubad k nang damt. Take off your clothes. Sya
y naghhgas nang pinggn. She is washing dishes. Naghungky
sya. He fanned rice. maghaw roast (something). Nagkamt sya nang
marmi ng tbo`. He obtained much profit. Sya y nagkkuble. He is in
hiding. maglak` peddle (something). Magllar na siy. He is going to
play after all. Naglar na ak. I have played enough now. Nagllaro
sil. They are playing. Naglawt ak nang lbid sa bintna`. I hung
a rope out of the window. maglgaw prepare rice-broth. Nagllto
siy nang glay. She is cooking vegetables. Sya y magppasyl. He
is going to take a walk. Nagppnas sya nang sahg. He is scrubbing
floors. Nagpyat ak kagab. I staid up last night. magsing cook
rice dry (with little water). Nagsampy sya nang damt. She hung
out some clothes. Sya y nagtbon nang isa ng hkay. He dammed up a
ditch. Magtahn ka nang paglalar`. Stop playing. Nang nrinig nya
iyn ay malak ang kanya ng nagng pagtatak. When he heard this,
his surprise was great. Sya y nagtl nang bbuy sa halge. He
tied a pig to the post. Magtr ka nang wka ng Kapampngan sa
iyo ng paraln. Teach the Pampanga language in your school. Sya y
nagttro`. He is teaching. Tm ang kanya ng pagtutwd. His reckoning
is correct. Sya y nagussa`. He made inquiry. Sya y nagussa nang
marmi ng bgay. He inquired into many things. Hind ba ak nagtos
sa iy ng gumaw it? Didn't I order you to do this? Ang pagwawal
nang mang bhag ay pinarrushan nang kamtyan. The escaping of
captives is punished with death. Sya y nagwwals. She is sweeping.

Other roots so used: akla`, alaskuwtro, als, aluwge, aniy`, ri`,
balta`, banty, bngon, btis, ban, bigks, bendisiyn, biniyg,
bintng, bun`, bnga, dan, dalamhti`, dasl, dos, dya`, dwang,
dug`, dsa, rosriyo, hgis, hand`, hri`, htol, hinla`, hinty,
hint`, hrap, hiwaly, ngat, kasl, klang, kumpisl, kurs,
kuwnto, lasng, libng, libng, ligts, lims, litsn, liwalw,
luby, lublb, mahl, mno, masd, milgro, msa, mul`, ningnng,
pasiynsiya, pasyo, sbi, sbog, sbong, sadiy`, salit`, snay,
silb, simb, ssi, siysat, sbo`, sugl, sumbng, sundlo, tabko,
tadtd, tgo`, tlo, talumpti`, tam, taniyg, tangy, tanggl,
tgil, tindg, trabho, tlin, tlos, umpis, sap, wka`.

351. When a root is used both with -um- and mag-, the latter form
usually differs by adding another object affected (dumal bear, bear
up: magdal carry to someone, to a place; bumalk go back; magbalk
return to a place, to someone); in some instances the added object
is the actor himself (reflexive); in others the mag- form expresses
a general activity, that with -um- a specific act (so, in part,
ptol). Examples:

Sya y nagral. He is studying (umral is known as an archaic word
for teach morals, instruct; ang ral that taught, precept, moral
doctrine). Magbaluktot k nang yantk. Curve some pieces of rattan
(bumaluktt,  348, intransitive or of a single specific transitive
action). Magblot ka nang sman, nang sigarlyo. Roll up some suman,
some cigarettes (more general than -um-); Magblot ka nang kmot. Wrap
yourself up in a blanket (cf. -um-,  348). Si Hwn ay nagbigt. Juan
hanged himself; ang pagbibigt suicide by hanging. Nagbil si Hwna
nang marmi ng sombrro. Juana sold many hats. Nagbbile si Hwna
nang sombrro. Juana is selling hats (bumil buy). Siya y nagddala
nang tbig sa kabyo. He is bringing water to the horse. Ang bta` ay
nagddala nang khoy. The boy is bringing wood. Hwag k ng magdamdm
sa hind ko pagkatupd nang ki ng pangko`, sapagkt iy y hind ko
sinady`. Don't feel bad about my not having fulfilled my promise,
for I did not do it intentionally (dumamdm feel something). Si Hwn ay
naghamps no ng Byerne-snto ng nagdan. Juan performed flagellation
last Good Friday. Maghnap kay nang inyo ng ikabbhay. Go and find a
living for yourselves. Sya y naghrang nang pno-ng-khoy sa dan. He
blocked the road with a tree. Ang paghahrang sa dan ay bwal. It
is forbidden to make obstructions on the roads. Naght ako nang
manga bunga-ng-khoy sa manga bta`. I distributed fruits among the
children; ... nang dam sa manga kabyo ... grass to the horses. ang
paghahti nang manga bnga-ng-khoy sa manga bta` the distribution
of fruits to the children. Naghn sya nang pagtuktk sa pint`. He
made his knocking at the door gentle. Sya y nagnit nang gtas. She
is heating some milk. Magsip ka. Bethink yourself, Be reasonable. Si
Hwn ay nagsip na nakwan si Pdro. Juan planned to rob Pedro. Ang
kanya ng pagisip ay matlas (mahna`). His thinking-power is acute
(weak). Sil y nagkmyan nang magkta. They shook hands when they
met. Maglabas k nang manga slya. Bring out some chairs. ang
paglalkad the drawing of something on foot; Naglkad ang manga
estudynte nang is ng karsa. The students drew a float. Sya y
naglbot nang isa ng bandla`. He walked about bearing a flag. Sya
y nagllnis nang msa. He cleans tables. Ang pagnankaw ay isa
ng kasalna ng mabigt. Thievery is a serious offense (numkaw of
a single theft). Nagpplit sya ng magbuks nang kaba ng bkal. He
tries (often) to force open safes. Pagpuptol ni Hwn nang bho` ay
pumaron ka t tulngan mo sy. When Juan cuts bamboo (as an occupation
throughout a longer period of time), go along and help him. Magpptol
kam nang manga kawya ng ggamtin sa pagtatay nang bhay. We shall
cut bamboo for use in building houses. Magpptol ak nang kuk. I
am going to cut my fingernails (reflexive). Nagptol nang buhk ang
Intsk na si Yp. The Chinaman Yap cut his queue. Nagsaky sya sa kanya
ng bangk nang dalawa ng estudynte. He took two students into his
canoe. Nagsikp ang dan. The road grew crowded (apparently equal to
-um-, but cannot be used of a garment). Nagssiksik si Hwn nang bigs
sa sko. Juan was stuffing rice into the sack. Sya y nagsukly. She
combed her hair. Ang pagtatahl nang so ng it sa manga nagddnan
ay masam ng ugle`. This dog's way of barking at passers-by is a
bad habit. Ang Kastla` ay nagttanng. The Spaniard was asking
questions. Nagtanng ak kay Hwn kung san ang dan. I asked
Juan where the road was (mag- with indirect questions or questions
implied). Si Hwn ay sy ng nagtwag nang bgo ng lyi. It was Juan
who announced (as town crier) the new law. Ang pagtatwag ni Hwn ay
hind mrinig nang karamhan dahiln sa mahn nya ng ting. Juan's
announcement was not audible to the majority, owing to his weak
voice. Sya y nagtay nang bgu ng bhay. He built a new house. Ang
pagtatay nang manga bhay dto ay lubh ng mahalag. The building
of houses here is very expensive. Nagtikws si Pdro nang manga
sulras nang bhay. Pedro put some of the joists of the house out of
level. Ang pagtitipd nang kwlta ay gingaw nang marme. Many people
save money. Nagtipd si Hwn sa kanya ng pananamt. Juan was saving
of his clothing. Ang pagtitpon nang manga rmas ay bwal. Storing up
arms is forbidden. Magtpun ka nang khoy. Store up some wood. Sila y
nagtpon nang khoy sa likd nang kanila ng bhay. They stored up wood
in the rear of their house. Nagtpon siya nang man` sa isa ng slok
nang bakran. He kept a pile of peanuts in a corner of his yard. Sya
y nagtlak nang isinslong na kah ng bkal. He did the shoving of
the iron chest that was being moved (-um- shoved at, took part in the
shoving). Magubra ang karit ng it sa mahrap na dan. This wagon
will be suitable for difficult roads. Nagup sya nang manga bta sa
bangk`. He seated some children on the bench.

Similarly: balk, buks, kant, sboy, sma, sar, sayw, takb,
taln, tnod, tir, yya`.

352. Transients with mag- are much used with derived words; in so
far as these belong to secondary groups, they will be treated below;
see  384. 405. 410. 427,a. 430,a.b.c. 453,a. 489. 489,a. 513.

(a) From phrases: Nagmmadali-ng-raw. The day is dawning (madal ng
raw proximate day, i. e. dawn, daybreak), nagmm-ri` is possessing,
has mastery of (may ri` owner, master). naghhti-ng-gab. It is
midnight (hti ng gab midnight). pagtatatlo-ng-gab the three nights'
celebration (tatl ng gab).

(b) From compound words: pagbibigy-lob (bigy-lob); Ang
maghampas-lpa` ay nakassra` nang pri. Being a vagabond is
dishonorable (hamps-lpa`); maghhnap-bhay (hnap-bhay).

(c) From derived words: Transients with mag- from the contingent of
transients with -um- express insistent and prolonged action: Khit na
wal sya ng talno ay nagppumlit sya ng mtto. Although he has no
gifts, he is trying very hard to get educated. Sya y nagppumlit na
pumaron sa pknik. He is trying hard to be able to go to the picnic
(pumlit). Similarly, nagttumir (tumir).

From words with prefix ma- ( 454) in the sense of making something
or making (claiming) oneself to have a quality: Magmmadal tyo
nang paglkad, pang hwg tyo ng mhuli sa trn. We will hurry our
pace, so as not to be late for the train (madal`). Nagmmaligs
si Kuls sa pagsund sa manga tos sa kany. Nicols is quick about
obeying the orders that are given him (maligs). Nagmalwt sya nang
pagparto. He took a long time coming here. Hwag k ng magmaluwt nang
pagparto. Don't take too long about coming here (maluwt). Similarly,
pagmamarnong (marnong).

From various words: Sila y naghimagsk. They came to an armed conflict
(-himagsk  518). Si Hwna ay naghhimaty. Juana is fainting
(himaty). Si Hwna ay nagkkakann. Juana makes sweetmeats (for
sale) (kakann,  367,e). Sya y nagkalatimb nang marmi. He did the
well-bucket exercise many times (kala-timb`,  519).

(d) Especially common are transients with mag- from special static
words with suffix -an; they express mutual or concerted action by
two or more actors.

From the forms in S -an ( 377): Naglsan ang mang aluwge
no ng lnes nan hpon. The carpenters all left last Monday
afternoon (ls-an). Nagllbsan sil. They were all going
out. Sil y nagptsan nang manga biybas. They all picked guavas
together. Magssgwan mna tyo bgo tapsin ang mting. We will
all give a yell together before we close the meeting. Ang manga so
sa bya ng it ay nagthlan kagab. The dogs in this town all barked
last night. Similarly, from: bangk`, bast, dan, hukm, iyk, kamy,
kant, salit`, takb, tamp, taniyg, tipn, tugtg, uw`. The form
in S -an is itself from a derived word in: Naghmagskan ang mang
sundlo ng Taglog at Kastla`. The Tagalog and Spanish soldiers
fought each other (hmagskan from -himagsk,  518).

From the forms in S (1) -an ( 378): Nagwtan sil nang ak y
dumatng. They were singing in chorus when I arrived. Magbgan
kay. Love one another. Nagbgan si Pdro at si Hwna. Pedro
and Juana love each other. Ang ginaw nya ng pagmumrhan nang
kany ng mang kalkal ay dahiln sa kanya ng pangangailngan nang
kwlta. His putting down the prices of his goods was due to his need
of money. Similarly: hkot, kin.

From forms in (2) -an ( 379): Hwag kay ng magmurahn sa dan. Don't
abuse each other on the street. Nagmmurahn sil. They were engaged
in an abusive quarrel. Ang kgaltan ni Ptra at ni Kulsa ay natpus
sa hyga ng pagmumurahn. The hostility between Petra and Nicolasa
ended in an abusive quarrel in public. Nagpurihn ang dalawa ng
magkaybgan sa kanila ng pagtatalumpte`. The two friends praised
each other in their speeches. Nagppurihn ang manga kaybga ng
it sa phaygan. This group of friends praise each other in the
newspapers. Si Hwna at si Mary ay nagputuln nang kuk. Juana and
Maria cut their fingernails. Sil y nagsgasan. They all jostled
one another. Ang pagsasgasan nang manga to ay lubh ng magul. The
jostling of all the people was most confused. Nagsugatn sil. They
inflicted wounds on one another. magtaann flee. Ang kanila ng
pagtutulungn ay hind ntuly. Their plan to help each other was
not carried out. Similarly: gaw, balta`, dhil, hnap, harng, lban.

From diminutives in D -an ( 381): Magaswang-aswngan daw si
Pdro sa karnabl. Pedro says he will dress up as a bogey-man
for the carnival. Hwag k ng magaswng-aswngan. Don't play
bogey-man. Nagmank-mankan si Hwn sa karnabl. Juan masqueraded as
a rooster at the carnival. Sil y nagungg-unggan. They are playing
at being monkeys. Nagus-ushan siy. He pretended he was a deer. So
also: dap`. From (1) D -an: Sya y nagbab-babayhan. He went dressed
as a woman. So also from tkot.

353. Transients with accent shift and mag- may owe the shift to the
root; so from bot ( 337): Nagabt si Hwn nang sigarlyo sa kanya ng
manga kaybgan. Juan is passing cigarettes to his friends. Ang pagaabt
nang sigarlyo ay isa ng ugli ng maglang. Passing cigarettes is a
polite custom (umabt,  348,c, does not involve a person to whom). So
also mra.

In the great majority of instances, however, the accent shift is not
peculiar to the root, but constitutes a special formation, which
expresses a more plentiful and diverse action than the transient
with -um- or simple mag-. Sil y nagbbabg. They are fighting
each other. Magbar ka. Get dressed, Put on your clothes. Sya y
nagbunt nang dam. He plucked up a lot of grass. Maghanp kay
nang manga bulaklk sa prang. Go and look for flowers in the
woods. Pabayan naw niny na sya y maghanp. Please allow him to
make an inspection. Naghat ako nang manga itlg na pinatigasn ni
Hwna. I halved a quantity of eggs which Juana had hard-boiled. ang
paghahat nang manga mansnas the halving of the apples. Magisip k
nang manga lugr na mari ng kinaiwnan mo nang iy ng libr. Think
of the various places where you may have left your book. Si Hwn ay
nagisip nang manga ihhand nya sa fiysta. Juan is thinking of
what things he will serve at the fiesta. Hwag k ng magputl nang
abak, Hwn. Don't cut up any hemp, Juan. Magpputol kam nang bho`,
yantk, at baygin, pagdatng nmin don. We shall cut slender bamboo,
rattan, and thick bamboo when we get there. Nagputl si Hwn nang
tub sa pinsok nya ng tubhan. Juan cut down a lot of sugar-cane in
the cane-field he got into. Nagpputol nang kawyan na hind nya r
si Hwn. Juan cuts down bamboo that does not belong to him. Nagpuyt
ak sa manga gab ng nagdan. I have repeatedly staid up late the
last few nights. Hind ko mputlan nang tahd ang ktyaw, sapagkt
it y nagssikd. I couldn't cut the rooster's spur, because it
kept struggling with its feet. Sya y nagssinungalng. He is telling
lies. Pagsusult nya nang manga slat ay pumaron ka t linsin mo ang
kany ng araln. While he is writing all his letters, go and clean his
study. Ang pangino y nagtawg nang manga alla`. The master called
various servants. Nagttawag sy nang manga kit`, nang kin sya ng
datnn sa bakran. She was calling to a lot of little chicks when I
came upon her in the yard. Ang pagtatawag ny sa manga kit` at ang
manga ptkan nang manga mank ay nakabbing. Her constant calling
to the chicks and the clucking of all the hens made a deafening
noise. Ang bta y nagttur nang kany ng gust. The child points
at the various things it wants. Hwag k ng magutng. Don't go about
asking for credit. Ang magutng sa marmi ng tindhan ay hind manam
na ugle`. Buying on credit in many shops is a bad habit. Similarly
from: blot, ngay, lkad, lyag, lbot, tgo`.

(a) When transients with mag- are made from derived words, the
accent of the underlying word is occasionally shifted, apparently
without change of meaning: Sya y nagmayabng. He boasted (maybang,
 454). Similarly: magkkalahat` (kalahti`  519).

(b) In one such case there is not only accent shift, but also
secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word: Sya
y nagmpuri. He praised himself. Sya y nagmmpur. He is praising
himself. Ang pagmampuri ay hind magand ng ugli`. Praising oneself
is not a becoming habit (ma-pri,  454).

354. The corresponding form from oxytone roots is made with unaccented
reduplication of the underlying word: mag-si-sigw, mag-si-si-sigw,
nag-si-sigw, nag-s-si-sigw; the abstract, however, lacks the extra
reduplication, coinciding with that of  350. 351: pag-si-sigw.

Sya y naggugupt nang manga papl. He cut some pieces of paper
into bits. Sya y nagggugupt nang manga papl. He is cutting up
some pieces of paper. Ang bta ng si Hwn, kung wal ng mgawa`,
ay sya ng naghhahamps sa manga pnu-ng-sging. It is little Juan
who goes whipping at the banana-trees when he can't find anything
to do. Hwag k ng magpupukl nang bat, sapagkt bak mo taman ang
bintna ng salamn. Don't be always throwing stones; you might break
a window. Nagppuputk ang inah ng mank na nsa kulungn. The hen
in the crate keeps up a constant cackling. Ilgan mo ang dumrating
na kabyo na nagttatakb. Look out for the horse that's coming there;
it's a run-away. Naguup sya sa dam. He always sits on the grass. So
also: dug`, inm, lundg, sigw, tagp`.

(a) In one instance a barytone root has this reduplication with
explicit plural meaning: magkikta see one another, meet (of more
than two people, cf. magkta).

355. Accent shift and reduplication of the root appear in barytone
roots in the same sense as accent-shift alone, with perhaps a
somewhat greater intensity of the action: Nagppuputl nang retso ang
bta`. The child was cutting some rags into small bits. Ang ktyaw
ay nagssisikd. The rooster kept struggling with its legs. Sya y
nagttatawg nang manga kit`. She kept calling to the chickens.

356. With doubling of the root, transients in mag- express either
action repeated at intervals or reciprocal action of explicitly more
than two actors: Nagis-is ang manga bta` nang paglpit sa kin. The
children came to me one by one. So from: dukly, hiwaly, lit.

(a) In one instance the root has accent shift: Naguna-un ang manga
bta` nang paglpit sa kin. The children vied with each other for
the first place in coming to me.



(3) Active with mang- and abstract with pang- r.

357. The active with mang- has the forms: ma-mtol, ma-m-mtol,
na-mtol, na-m-mtol, pa-mu-mtol (from ptol); it expresses action
more deliberate, selective, or in larger quantity (professional,
habitual) than mag-; like the latter, but more clearly, it is used
for the making or using of such and such an object. Examples:

Sya y nangabla sa min. He made trouble for us. Nangano k nang
iyo ng manga kalar`? What did you do to your playmates? Nangyap
lmang ang bta`. The child ate only relishes. Sya y nangbbambo
nang so. He is a caning a dog. ang pamamangk` canoeing. Namil ak
sa bya-ng-Mallos. I shopped in Malolos. Sya y nangddilig nang
karsda. He sprinkles streets. ang pangdidilg street-sprinkling
(as vocation). Ang kasalatn nina Hwn sa pananamt ay nangglin
sa pagsusugl ni Hwn. Juan's family's want of clothing is due to
his gambling. Hwag k ng manghamps. Don't go whipping people. Sya
y nanghrang nang manga to. He made a practice of holding people
up. Sya y hinli nang puls dahiln sa panghahrang nang manga to. He
was arrested by the police for highway robbery. Nanghte si Hwna nang
kalkal. Juana shared orders for goods. Ang panghahte ni Hwna nang
kalkal na ipinagbbili ny ay sya ny ng ikinalge. Juana's getting
her stock of goods for sale by sharing in orders of fellow-retailers
is what made her lose money. Nanghn nang pagtakb ang kabyo sa
kalanan nang pagkgmit sa kany. The horse slackened its pace
because it had been driven too long. Sil y nanghna`. They grew
faint. Manghirm ka nang palakl. Go borrow a hatchet. manghla`
practise fortune-telling. Nanghhli kam nang isd` sa kagamitn nang
dla. We catch fish by means of nets. Ang kanya ng manga panginglag
sa sakt ay lubh ng malak. His precautions against sickness are
elaborate. Sya y nangngabyo. He rides horseback. Nangap si Pdro
nang isd`. Pedro caught fish in his hands (by feeling for them in
mud-holes). Sya y nangngasra. He eats in a boarding-house. mangwit
cut twigs with the kwit (a small, hook-shaped pruning-knife);
also: get tired of a position or occupation. Ang bta ng si Hwn
ay nangngya nang manga kpwa nya bta`. Little Juan lords it
over the other children. Sya y nangngubl. He is keeping himself
in hiding. Hwag k ng mangurt, Pdro. Don't be pinching people,
Pedro. Ang kanya ng pananagnip ay hind ntuloy, sapagkt ngising
sy sa kalabg nang psa`. His dream was interrupted by his being
awakened by the falling of the cat. Sya y nannagnip. He is
dreaming. Ak y nanagnip kagab. I had a dream last night. Namso
sya nang dalri nang kpwa nya bta`. He scorched his playmate's
finger. Pamumtol nya nang kawya y sundn mo sy t bak magliwalw
lmang sa kalakhn nang panahn. When he goes bamboo-cutting, follow
him to see that he doesn't loaf most of the time. Ang pamumtol
nang kawyan ay mahrap. Bamboo-cutting is hard work. Namtol si
Hwn nang kawyan. Juan cut bamboo. Nammtol kam nang dam pang
ipagbil. We are cutting grass for sale. Mammtol kam nang tub
sa bakran ni li ng Ptra. We are going to cut sugar-cane in Aunt
Petra's yard. Ang bta ng may sakt ay nammyat sa kanya ng in. The
sick child keeps its mother awake. Ang malwig na pananalit` ay
hind manam. Roundabout speeches are not pleasant. Pdro, hwag k ng
manysat nang gaw nang my gaw`. Pedro, don't be inquiring into other
people's business. ang panunlat writing in quantity, clerkship. ang
pananah` the occupation of sewing, the being a seamstress. Sil y
nanahmik. They quieted down. Ang bta y nanahmik. The boy quieted
down to take a rest. manwag call, summon (people). ang panunro` the
act of pointing things out. Sya y nangna. He went first, He led. Sya
y mangngna. He will be in the lead. Ang bta y nangup sa buntt
nang sya nang babye. The boy went and sat right down on the lady's
train. Ang panguup nang bta sa buntt nang sya ay ipinahint sa
kany nang kanya ng nnay. The boy's trick of sitting down on people's
trains was put a stop to by his mother. Sya y nangussa nang manga
babye. She interrogated a number of women. Nangtang sya sa kin
nang lim ng pso. He made a loan of five dollars from me.

Similarly from: hit, ko`, ank, bhay, balta`, barl, bro`,
byan, blog, bro`, bhay, bundk, damt, dkit, gamt, gupt, hbol,
hmon, hing`, igb, lin, kin, kumpisl, lat`, lko, mahla`, nod,
pagtan, pli`, plot, salkay, sarwa`, singl, sbok, suls, snog,
syo`, tlo, tanghli`, tiwla`, umt, yri.

(a) From derived words: ang panghihmagskan in the same meaning
as paghihmagskan (from hmagskan,  377,a); so from kalahti`
( 519), kinin ( 365). See also  421,a. 422,a.

(b) From words with prefix hin- ( 518) we may derive, theoretically,
the transients with prefix manghin-, though the underlying word in most
cases does not exist. For the phonetic irregularities see  334,a,5.

Sila y nanghimagsk. They came to an armed conflict (bagsk). Hwag
k ng manghigant sa kanil, Hwn; ang kababan nang lob ay llo ng
magand. Don't take revenge against them, Juan; meekness of spirit is
more becoming. Manghhigant kam dahiln sa manga kalupit ng ginaw
nila sa min. We will take vengeance on them for the many cruelties
they have committed against us. manghinuk cut the fingernails
(kuk). Nanghhinyang sil sa pagkamaty ni Del-Pilr. They were
mourning the death of Del Pilar. Malak ang kanila ng panghihinyang
sa namaty na bta ng si Hwn, dahiln sa hind karanywa ng talno
nya. Their grief at little Juan's death was great, on account of
his unusual talents. (syang). manghining pick the teeth (ang ting
foreign substance between the teeth). manghinul clean out the ears
(tu-tul earwax,  343).

(c) In one instance the root is doubled; its accent shift is due
to the meaning of the root: Nanaw-naw si Pdro nang mrinig ny
na sya y npli ng magng bbo sa lar`. Pedro could not keep from
snickering when he heard that the choice had fallen on him to be
clown in the play.



(4) Special static words.

358. A few individual forms of the preceding group have static value;
of transients, umga morning ( 348) and ang mamso` a blister
(pso`); of abstracts, ang pagkin food (beside the act of eating),
cf. also pagdka,  265,9. The following are the regular formations
of special static words of this type:

(a) Dual collectives with mag-: ang magli aunt and niece
or nephew. Ang magam ng si Mary at si Pdro ay naparon sa
bkid. Pedro and his daughter Maria have gone to the country. Ang
magaswa ng Pdro at Hwna ay naparon sa teytro. Pedro and his
wife Juana have gone to the theatre. Ang magat ng si Mary at si
Maryno ay nagsipagpasyl. Mariano and his oldest sister Maria
went for a walk. Sila y magat. She is his oldest sister. ang
magbale ng si Hwn at si Andrs Juan and Andrs, whose children
have married each other. magbayw two men, one of whom has married
the other's sister. magbils two men who have married two sisters
(ang bils the husband of one's wife's sister). maghpag two women,
one of whom has married the other's brother (each of the two is the
other's hpag). magimp grandmother and grandchild. magin mother
and child. magkya the oldest brother and a younger brother or
sister. magnnay mother and child. magttay father and child.

Slightly divergent is magnak: it includes the whole family, a given
person plus his angkn ( 379): Nagsimb ang bo ng magnak. The
whole family went to church. ang magnak na sina Hwn Krs the Juan
Cruz family. Irregular in meaning are also magdamg and maghpon,
of periods of time.

From a compound word: ang magkpit-bhay two neighbors.

From a phrase: Sila y magkpwa-to. They act toward each other as
fellow men should (kpuw to).

From a derived word: magaman uncle and nephew or niece (ama-n, 
367,a); see also  408. 412,a. 490.

(b) mag- r similarly forms explicit plurals: ang magaam the group
of a father with two or more of his children. ang magbabale a
group of three or more people whose children have intermarried. ang
magiin mother and children. ang magkukya a group of brothers
and sisters including the oldest brother. magnannay mother and
children. magpipnsan a group of cousins. magtattay father and
children.

From a compound: magkakpit-bhay.

From a derived word: magkakasinglak (kasinglak,  520). See also 
412,a. 427,d.

(c) mag- r also forms static words denoting a professional agent:
ang magaarro a plowman, magbibisty woman who sieves the rice in a
mill, magnankaw thief.

From oxytone roots also with retraction of accent: ang magbabyo a
rice-pounder, magbibgas a dealer in hulled rice.

(d) Barytone roots usually shift the accent: ang maghuhugs a
dish-washer, maglalakd traveller, maglilins a cleaner, maglilip`
plasterer, maglulut` cook; Si Hwn ay isa ng magpuputl nang
khoy. Juan is a wood-cutter; ang magsusult a clerk scribe, magsusuyd
a harrower (syod a harrow), maguutng a habitual borrower. So also
from: lko`, twag.

(e) mng- r has the same value. The accent of the prefix can appear
only in an open syllable ( 338); ang mngingisd` a fisherman;
mnanalakb fish-trapper (salakb an inverted basket used as a
fish-trap). So: dkit, hmon, hla`, klam, lgaw, skop, spa`,
tanggl, tugtg.

Oxytone roots often have retraction of accent: manggagmot manggagamt;
manggugpit manggugupt; Sya y mngingnum nang lak. He is a drunkard;
also: manginom (with the prefix kept apart by glottal stop,  34,
and no effect on initial vowel); mngangatm mngangtam; mnglilmos;
ang mnanhe` a seamstress (ang tah` a seam); ang mnannim a planter.

(f) Barytone roots usually have accent shift: ang manghuhugs
a dish-washer, manglalagar` a wood-sawer, mmumult a gleaner
(plot); Ang manga mmumutl nang khoy ay nagsihon n sa bundk. The
wood-cutters have already gone up into the mountains. ang mnunult a
scribe, clerk, ang mngungutng a habitual borrower, a "sponger". So
also from: kyo, tlo.



(5) Direct passive.

359. The simple direct passive has suffix -in with accent shift of
one syllable in the contingent, infix -in- ( 334,b,1) in the actual:
putl-in, p-putl-in, p-in-tol, p-in--ptol. It corresponds to
actives with -um- and abstracts with pag- and, to a large extent,
also to actives with mag- and abstracts with pag- r. It expresses,
transiently, an object viewed as fully affected, taken in by the actor,
or created by a simple action.

Irregularities of form are as listed in  334,c.

Inko ni Hwn ang tang ni Pdro. Pedro's debt was taken over (pledged
for) by Juan. Inalala ni Pdro ang kanya ng in. Pedro was thinking
of his mother. Hind nya inalala iyn. He does not mind that. Hind
nya alalahnin iyn. He won't mind that ( 334,c,3). Inmin nya
na ginaw nya iyn. He admits that he did it. amnin nya ang
kanya ng kasalnan. He will own up to his misdeeds. Inangkin
nang bta ng si Hwna ang manga laruwn ni Mary. Little Juana
appropriates Maria's toys. Angkinin m ang laruwn. Take the toy for
yourself. Pag uln ay ararhin mo ang punlan. When the rains come,
plow the germinating-plot. Inso nang in ang kanya ng bta`. The
mother is running and shouting after her child (so a dog). Inyap
nmin ang atsra. We used the mixed pickles as a condiment. (ang
yap condiment). Ang aklt niya ng kaybgan mo ng binanggt ay ki
ng nabsa. I have read the book of that friend of yours whom you
mentioned. Bintis nya ang log. He forded the river. Ang glok na yn
ay bbawin ko sa iy, kapag ipinamtol mo nang kawyan. I shall take
back this bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo. Ang tbo`
ay binlog ni Hwn. Juan turned the dipper (on a lathe). Ang lo
ni Hwn ay binblog nang kanya ng manga kalar`. Juan's playmates
are fooling him (literally: turning his head). Binyk ni Hwn ang
kawyan. Juan has split the bamboo. Dining nya ang isd`. He laid
open the fish. Ang manga isd ng it ay dinla niy sa log-Psig. He
caught these fish with the net in the Pasig river. Yn ay ki ng
dinramdm. I am very sorry, That's too bad. Dilign mo ang manga
halman. Sprinkle the plants. Durin mo ang ki ng mamso`. Prick my
blister for me. Gingabi kam. We were overtaken by night. Hanpin
mo ang magnankaw. Look for the thief. Hinpis nya ak. He made me
sad. Hint ko ang manga bnga-ng-khoy sa manga bt`. I distributed
the fruits among the children. Inhaw nya ang karn. He roasted
the meat. Insip nya ng magnkaw sa isa ng tindhan. He thought
of stealing from a store. Ispin mo kung san mo nawan ang iyo ng
sombrro. Think where you left your hat. Ang kabut ng it ay hind
kinkin. One does not eat this mushroom. Ipatipd mo sa bt` ang
kinkin nya. Make the child be moderate in its eating. Kinap ko
sa kadilimn ang ki ng hgan. I fell out my bed in the dark. Knin
mo ang aklt sa bta`. Take the book from the child. Hwag m ak ng
kurutn. Don't pinch me. Nilkad nmin ang laht nang dan. We walked
all the way. Laruin m ang bta`. Play with the child. Nillnis nya
ang msa. She is cleaning the table. Nilsong mo b ang baln? Did
you go down into the well? Lusngin mo ang baln. Go down into the
well. Nillto niya ang glay. She is cooking the vegetables (also:
linlto`). Minmahl nang manga maglang ang bta`. The parents love
the child. pinalnsa was ironed (palnsa). Pinna ko ang us. I shot
the stag with an arrow. Hind nya pinpansn iyn. He doesn't pay any
attention to that. Pinaty ko ang mank. I killed the chicken. Ang
pinl nya ng mank ay matab`. The chicken she picked out is a
fat one. Pinlit nya ng gumaw nang pyong ang alla`. He forced
the servant to make an umbrella. Pitasin m ang manga bnga nang
mangg. You pick the mangoes. Pintol ni Hwn ang tanikal`. The chain
was cut by Juan. Pagka pintol mo ang lbid na iyn ay llagpak ang
tuly. When you have cut that rope the bridge will fall. Pag pintol
mo ang buntt nang tta` ay malpit iya ng mamaty. If you cut off
the puppy's tail, it is likely to die. Pinptol ko ang khoy. I
was cutting the wood. Putlin mo ang lbid. Cut the rope. Pputlin
nya ang bho`. He will cut the bamboo. Pinyat nya ak. He kept me
up late. Hwag m ng sagasin, Lkas, ang kaintan nang raw sa iyo
ng paglabs sa bkid. Don't hit upon the hottest part of the day for
going out to the field, Lucas. Sinsint ni Pdro ang dalga. Pedro is
in love with the young woman. Ak y sinp nang kabyo. I was kicked
by a horse. Sinukly nya ang buhk nang kanya ng ank. She combed
her child's hair; also: Sinukly nya ang kanya ng ank. Ang gmit
nya ng libr ay sinlat ni Daruwn. The book he uses was written
by Darwin. Kung sinuntk nya ang bta` ay suntukn mo siy. If he
hits the boy, do you hit him. Sinsuntok ny ang bta`. He hits the
boy on the head. Tagpun mo ak sa estasyn nang trn. Meet me at
the railroad station. Tanawin m ang snog! Look at the fire! Ang
tbon sa log ay tinangy nang gos. The dam in the river was carried
away by the current. Hwag m ng tanggapn ang pa. Don't accept the
pay. Tawgin mo si Hwn. Call Juan. Tinipd ni Hwn ang ibinigy
ko ng sging. Juan was saving with the bananas I gave him. Ang dsa
ng kanya ng tintis ay hind lubh ng mabigt. The suffering he is
undergoing is not very severe. Tinsod ko ang baky`. I kicked away
the sandal. Inna si Hwn nang hukm. Juan was dealt with first by the
judge. Inussa ak ni Hwn. Juan questioned me. Ang inussa sa kin
ni Hwn ay kung saan nndon ang kanya ng sombrro. What Juan asked
me was where his hat was. Intang ko iy ng salap ng ibinigy ko sa
kany kahpon. I borrowed that money I gave him yesterday. Niwwalis
ny ang alikabk sa msa. She is sweeping the dust from the table
(also: winwals). Ang niyy ko ng magpasyl ay si Hwn. The one I
invited to come for a walk was Juan.

Similarly from: gaw, akla`, kay, akiyt, alla`, alintna,
alipust`, als, mo`, annaw, sal, blak, bamb, bsa, bat, bwi`,
bigks, bigt, blang, bil, bitbt, bhat, btas, buwsit, dal,
dars, dikdk, dkit, dkot, gmit, gamt, gant, gaw`, ggol, gupt,
gust, gtom, hbol, hgod, hamps, hmon, hanty, hngo`, hrang,
harp, htak, hla, hilng, hinla`, hinty, hirm, hitt, hwa`,
hkay, hli, big, in, inm, kagt, kalayky, kmot, kant, klam,
kumbid, kumpisl, lla, lko, lnod, lob, mat, mra, nkaw, plo`,
pasn, psok, pgil, pho, pirso, pirnsa, pukl, sbi, sadiy`,
sagt,  salbong, sampl, sangg, sapantha`, slip, singl, siysat,
sumpng, sund`, sund, snog, sungnga, tag`, tkot, talag, tlo,
tamplas, tpos, tkop, tuntn, bos, ugli`, lit, wka`.

(a) From derived words: Inumga sil sa kanila ng pagsaslitan. They
were being overtaken by their morning in their conversation (um-ga,
 358). Si Hwna ay hinimaty. Juana was attacked by a fainting-fit
(himaty,  518).

(b) From root with shifted accent: Inabt nang bta` ang gra. The
boy was reaching for his cap.

(c) Accent shift lacking: Mnsanin mo, Hwn, ang paginm nang
gamt. Take the medicine all at one swallow, Juan.

(d) From doubled root, with meaning of repeated action: see is;
barytone root with accent shift: mo`.

360. A few roots which have actives with mag- form the direct passive
from the root with pag- prefixed. On the analogy of other forms
(cf.  369) one should expect this to be the case with roots whose
active with mag- stood in contrast with -um- ( 351); this is clearly
the case, however, only in pag-isp-in, pag--isp-in p-in-ag-sip,
p-in-ag--sip: Pinagsip nya ng magnkaw sa isa ng tindhan. He laid
plans for robbing a store (cf. in-sip,  359). The other roots which
have pag- in the direct passive are: barl, dop, kro`, tapk.

361. To the active with mag- (1) ( 353) corresponds a direct passive
with pag- and accent shift: pag-putul-n, p-in-ag-putl, etc. (ptol):
Pinaghat ko ang manga itlg na pinatigasn ni Hwna. I halved each
of the eggs Juana had hard-boiled. Pinagisp nya ang kahulugn nang
manga snyas na nkta nya ng ibinbigay nang isa ng sundlo sa isa
ny ng kasamah ng nhle nang kaway. He figured out the meaning of
the signals he saw a soldier make to a comrade who was captured by
the enemy. Pinagpputul nang bta` ang sinlid. The child is cutting
the thread to bits. Pagputulin m, Hwn, ang manga sit. Cut out the
bamboo-spines, Juan. Pinagusis nang hukm ang manga magnankaw. The
judge cross-examined the robbers. Similarly from kha, nkaw, sbi,
spa`, snog.

362. Likewise, corresponding to the active with mag- r ( 354),
is a direct passive with pag- r; see gaw`, kagt.

Passive with pag- (1) r (cf.  355) from spa`.

363. Passive with pag- (1) D (cf.  356): Pinagsab-sabi ny sa ib
t ib ng to na si Pdro ay nhli sa pagnankaw. He told various
people on various occasions, that Pedro was arrested for thievery.

364. The direct passive is made from the root with prefix pang- to
correspond to actives with mang- ( 357): pa-mitas-n, pa-m-mitas-n,
p-ina-mits, p-in-a-m-mits (pits). Examples: Inamtan ko si Hwn
nang pinamil ko ng manga libr. I let Juan purchase from me some of
the books I had bought up. Pinammitas nil ang manga kamatsil. They
picked the fruits of the tannic acid tree. Pammitasn nmin ang manga
blak. We shall pick the capoc cotton. Pinamlot nmin ang manga
laglg na bnga. We picked up the fallen betel-fruits. Pinangtang
ko iy ng salap` sa kany. I had to borrow that money you have there
from him. Also from nod.



(6) Special static words.

365. The infix -in- produces static words denoting things which are
produced by such and such a process or treated so and so: ang pintak
each of the small sections into which a rice-field is divided by the
irrigation trenches (ptak divide; as root-word, division). So from
bta`, hing, kin, lgaw, pno`, sing, slid.

(a) With accent shift: inaky.

(b) A number of roots (here treated as simple) have the form of words
with infix -in- (cf.  333): hinla`, kinbang, linamnm, sinungling,
tinpay, tinla.

366. -in- R: ang inam godfather, inin godmother; cf.  412,a.

367. Suffix -in with secondary accent on the first syllable of the
underlying word forms static words denoting something which undergoes
such and such an action: Ang kalasng nang kwlta sa ib y pra ng isa
ng tugtgin. The clinking of money is for others (than the spender)
like music. So from band, damdm, tis (only here does the S show
itself), tungkl.

(a) Static words with (1) -in, with irregularities ( 334,b), person
or animal like something: aman uncle; so from in. Also of things
consumed: inumn drinking water, knin (kin) boiled rice ready to eat.

(b) The same with pang- in pa-na-hin guest, if from to.

(c) (2) -in, collective, of places: bukirn estate, fields, terrain;
lupan country, part of the world. Of animate creatures, tendency:
gulatn scary, shy.

From derived word, in the latter sense, with S on the first of three
syllables: pniwalan credulous (paniwla`,  347).

(d) -in with reduplication, from numerals, in the sense of with so
many: lilimhin; from da-law ( 345), da-dalaw-hin.

(e) r (2) -in, with irregularity: ka-kan-n sweetmeat (kin).

(f) The following roots end in -in ( 333): baygin, buhngin,
dalngin prayer, kaingn, mulwin, salamn.



(7) Instrumental passive.

368. The instrumental passive corresponding to the active with -um-
and, to a large extent, to that with mag-, is formed with the prefix
i- ( 334,a,3); the actual taking also the infix -in- ( 334,b,2):
i-ptol, i-p-ptol, i-p-in-tol, i-p-in--ptol. It denotes,
transiently, an object given forth, parted from, or used as instrument
or the person for whom in such and such an action or process.

Iniyals nil ang hrang nang dan. They removed the obstruction on the
road. Iynib (or: isnib) mo ang iyu ng bang sa kay Pdro. Make your
sleeping-mat overlap Pedro's, i. e. Sleep next to Pedro. Ibinbgay
nang mangkakay ang damt sa nammil sa kany. The cloth-merchant
is suiting the cloth to her customer. Ibinbgay ni Hwn sa kany
ng kalgyan ang kanya ng paggast. Juan adapts his expenses to his
situation. Ibinilangg nang hukm si Hwn. The judge has put Juan
into prison. Ibinngit nya sa lamsa ang orasn. He put the clock
on the edge of the table. Idaan m sa bhay ni Pdro ang bbuy na
it. Leave this pig at Pedro's house as you pass. Ang bantyan sa
pno nang tuly ay inihgis nang manga lasng na to sa log. The
sentry-box at the head of the bridge was thrown into the river by the
drunken men. Ihs mo ang panghit na yt. Sharpen this razor. Ihinkay
nila nang mallim ang paty. They dug a deep grave for the dead. wan
mo dto ang bta`. Leave the child here (so: -wan will be left,
in-wan was left, in--wan is being left). Inillan ko kay Pdro
ang sging na it. I am putting aside this banana for Pedro (also:
itintan). Inillto nya ang glay. She is cooking the vegetables
(also: ilinlto`). Ipinagtan sya sa dalaw ng dalga. He was placed
between two young women. Ipinyag ko sa hinilng nil ang ki ng
sasakyn. At their request I let them have my vehicle. Ipintol nya
ak nang sinlid. She cut off some thread for me. Iptol mo ak nang
mas. Cut some corn for me. Ipptol nya ikw nang tub. He will cut
some sugar-cane for you. Ang kampt na iyn ay mappurol kapag ipintol
mo nang khoy. That kitchen-knife will grow dull, if you cut wood with
it. Kawyan ang isinsahg ni Pdro sa kanya ng bhay. Pedro is using
bamboo for flooring his house. Pag pinptol ko n ang lig nang mank,
ay ishod mo ang mangkk na lalagyn nang dug`. When I am cutting the
chicken's neck, hold under the basin to catch the blood. Isinle nya si
Hwn. He included Juan. Isli mo si Hwn. Take Juan along. Isinampy
nya sa kanya ng balkat ang kmot. He slung the blanket across his
shoulder. Isigang m ang sining. Put the rice on the fire. Isilid m
sa bte ang lak. Put the wine into the bottle. Paguln ay isoot m ang
kapte. When it rains put on the rain-coat. Itinwag nang magpapatawg
ang bgo ng kautusn. The crier cried out the new law. Itinay nya
ang bhay. He erected the house. Itinira ny sa kin ang tinpay. He
left the bread for me. Itru mu sa kany ang simbhan. Show him the
church. Itru mo sa kin ang lar`. Teach me the game. Iwal mo iy
ng iyo ng samballo ng lma`. Get rid of that old hat of yours.

Similarly, from: lay, tas, bagsk, balta`, bigy, budbd, bhos,
buld, brol, buwl, dos, dikt, distno, dugtng, gpos, hnap,
hand`, hatd, hint`, hits, hlog, kasl, kawg, labs, ladld,
lagy, laglg, lkad, laks, lal`, lapg, lawt, libng, ligts,
lhim, llan, luw`, pyo, sabd, sboy, sagt, sakdl, snib, sar,
sigw, srmon, slong, sund, tan, tas, tgo`, tli`, tanm, tngi`,
tpon, tuktk, tloy, tngo, bos, tos, wisk.

(a) From root with shifted accent: Iniyabt nya sa kin ang libr. He
was handing me the book. Iyabt mo sa kin ang libr. Hand me the book.

369. The instrumental passive is made from the root with prefix pag-
when it corresponds to an active with mag- which stands in contrast
with an active with -um- from the same root ( 351); it is used also to
express the instrumental relation more explicitly than the simple form,
especially the person for whom. Forms: i-pag-p-tol, i-pag-p-ptol,
i-p-in-ag-ptol, i-p-in-ag-p-ptol.

Ito ng bhay ang ipinagbili k. This house is the one I have sold
(cf. bumil buy, magbil sell). Ang raw nang kapangnkan ni Risl
ay ipinagddwang sa bo ng Filipnas. Rizal's birthday is celebrated
all over the Philippines. Sno ang ipinagllto mo? Whom are you
cooking for? (inillto` in preceding section). Ipagptol mo ng`
ak nang yantk. Please cut some bamboo for me. Ipagpptol kit
nang tub. I will cut you some sugar-cane. Ipinagptol mo ba ak
nang pamilmt? Did you cut me a pole for fishing? Ipinagpptol niya
ak nang sit na ggaw ng ppa. He is cutting me some bamboo reeds
for cigarette-holders. Ang guntng na iyn ay mappurul agd, kapag
ipinagptol mo nang damt. Those scissors will get dull very soon,
if you keep using them to cut cloth with. Iyo ng knin ang guntng,
kapag ipinagpptol nya nang kyo. Take the scissors, if he uses them
for cutting cloth. Ang paup ni Hw ng sglan ay ipinagsbi sa puls
nang kanya ng kpit-bhay. The gambling party Juan invited was exposed
to the police by his neighbor (sinbi was said). Ipinagsakay k si
Hwn sa ki ng karumta. I took Juan into my carriage. Ang bgo ng
lyi ay ipinagtwag ni Hwn. The new law was called out by Juan. Hind
ko b ipinagtos sa iy ng gawn mo it? Didn't I order you to do this?

Also from: kayil`, lab, ltag, sakdl, sumbng, tak, tanng, tapt.

(a) From derived words: ipinaghimaty (himaty,  518);
Ipinagbus-lksan niya ang pagtakb. He exhausted all his strength
in his running (bus-lksan,  377,b).

370. i-pag (1), corresponding to mag- (1),  353: from tpon; also
from derived word ma-ybang ( 454, cf.  353,a).

371. i-pag r, corresponding to mag- r ( 354), from tanng.

372. The instrumental passive from the root with prefix pang-
corresponds to the active with mang-: Ipinanghrang nila Pdro ang
manga barl na ingaw nil sa manga puls nang byan. In holding people
up Pedro's gang used the guns they had snatched from the police of
the district. Ipinamtol ko nang yantk ang glok. I used the bolo for
rattan-cutting. Ipinammtol nya ak nang kawyan. He is cutting bamboo
for me. Ipinammtol nya nang kawyan ang bgo ng glok. He is using
the new bolo for bamboo-cutting. Ipamtol mo nang tub ang kampt na
it. Use this kitchen-knife for cane-cutting. So also: ko`, balta`.



(8) Special static words.

373. Special static words with prefix i- express the part of something
in such and such a direction, or the direction: ibbaw, ibyo, illim,
itas, ituktk; with shifted root: ibab`.



(9) Local passive.

374. The simple local passive, corresponding to the active with -um-
and largely to that with mag-, has the suffix (1) -an with the
irregularities described in  334. The forms of the actual mode
have also the infix -in-: putl-an, p-putl-an, p-in-utl-an,
p-in--putl-an. The local passive denotes the thing affected as
place in which or the person to whom.

Inabtan ak nang uln. I was caught by the rain. Aghan mo ang
iyo ng pagparto. Make early your coming here, i. e. Come here
early. Pagkagupt nang ki ng buhk ay inahtan nya ak. When he
had cut my hair he shaved me. Alisan m nang manga tink ang ki ng
salawl. Take the thorns out of my trousers. Inanyhan sil ni Hwn
na magpasyl. They were invited by Juan to go for a walk. Arlan
mo ang manga Kapampngan. Teach morals to the Pampangas. Asnan
m ang ding na isd`. Salt the fish you lay open. Aptan m nang
pwid ang bhay. Roof the house with nipa-palm. Awtan mo ang manga
panahin. Sing for the guests. Bakran mo ang sagngan sa tab nang
log. Fence in the banana-grove by the river. Bakran mo ang bhay. Put
a fence round the house. Binalitan ko si Hwn nang manga nangyri sa
kin sa labann. I related to Juan my adventures in the war. Bantayan
m ang play. Guard the standing rice. Bashan mo ak nang manga
kwnto. Read me some stories. Bigasan m ang tinla ng mank. Make
the chicken-stew with rice. Si Pdro ang binilhn ko nang kabyo ng
it. It was Pedro I bought this horse from. Sa katapusn ay kanya
ng npagkilla ang malaki ng pangnib na kanya ng biningtan. In
the end he recognized the great danger into which he had betaken
himself. Binuksn ni Hwn ang pint`. Juan opened the door. Dinaann
nang trn ang bboy. The pig was run over by the train. Dinaann ko
si Hwn. I called for Juan on the way (and took him with me). Dalhn
mo nang tbig ang kabyo. Bring water to the horse. Dalian m ang
pagdadala rto nang libr. Bring the book here soon. Ang pabsa sa
bista nang San-Antnyo ay dinaluhn nang marmi ng to. The reading
at the chapel of San Antonio was attended by many people. Dinamhan
nya ang kinha nya ng sging. He took many bananas. Dinamuhn ny
ang damha ng malpit sa simbhan. He cut grass on the pasture near
the church. Dinapan nang manga bon ang sang nang khoy. Birds
alighted on the branch of the tree. Dinatnn kam nang uln. We were
overtaken by the rain. Dinilan nya ak. She stuck out her tongue
at me (ang dla` the tongue); also: Dilan mo ang mansnas. Lick
the apple. Hwag m ng duran nang karyom ang ki ng pany. Don't
leave needles sticking in my handkerchief. Hagkan m si Nnay. Kiss
Mother. Hinalan nang lak ang gtas. Some wine was mixed into the
milk. Hinampasn ni Pdro ang mukh ni Hwn. Pedro hit Juan in the face
with a whip. Ang dan ay hinarngan. The road was obstructed. Hasan mo
ang glok na it. Sharpen this bolo. Hintuan m ang iyo ng pagsusugl,
Pdro, kung big mu ng yumman ka. Put a stop to your gambling, Pedro,
if you want to get rich. Hinhugsan niy ang manga pinggn par sa
manga babye. He is washing dishes for the women. Hulhan mo nang
isd` ang palisdan. Catch fish in the fish-pond. Ang manga sampy
na damt ay hinpan nang hangin, kany` nahlog sa lpa`. The clothes
on the line were blown by the wind and fell to the ground. Hinpan ko
ang pto. I blew the whistle. Hinpan ko ang apy pang palakihn. I
blew on the fire to make it larger. Inilgan nya ang simbhan. He kept
away from the church. ... ang kabyo. He got out of the way of the
horse. Inlagan m ang dumrating na tumtakbo ng kabyo. Get out of
the way of the horse that is coming on the run. Itiman m ang lubg
nang damt. Make the dye of the garment black. Iniyakn ni Hwna
ang kanya ng namaty na kaybgan. Juana is weeping over her dead
friend. Hwag m ng kurutn, Pdro, ang isd ng nsa dlang. Don't you
take a pinch from the fish on the table, Pedro. Hwag m ng labnan,
Pdro, ang kapatid m ng matand`. Don't oppose your older brother,
Pedro. Ang lands na gaw ng kaliw` ay ang iyo ng lakran. You
must take the path which goes to the left. Lakasan m ang tlak sa
bangk`. Push hard on the boat. Lakhan m, Hwn, ang pirashin mo ng
matams. Break off a big piece of the sugar, Juan. Nilalman nil ang
hkay nang paty. The grave for the corpse was made deep by them. Ang
banty nang manga kanyn ay nilaysan ang kanya ng lugr. The guard
of the cannon deserted his post. Ligsihan m ang paglag sa lugr
na iyn. Get out of that place quickly. Hwag m ng luksuhn ang
tink na iyn. Don't jump on that spine. Lulnan mo nang mangg ang
karitn. Load up the wagon with mangos. Luluran m si Pdro pagbababg
niny. Kick Pedro in the shin when you fight him. Nilusngan mo b si
Pdro? Did you help Pedro? Lutan mo nang bigs ang mank. Cook some
rice in with the (already cooked) chicken. Masdan m ang bwn. Look at
the moon. Minmasdan k ang manga nagddaa ng to. I am looking at the
people who pass by. Minurhan nya ak sa pagbibil nang talng. He
made me a low price on the egg-plant. Murhan mo ang pagbibil
nang labans. Sell your large radishes cheap. Ang tanggpan nang
manga sangl` sa bhay-sanglan ni Pdro ay ninakwan kagab. The
receiving-place of pledges in Pedro's pawn-shop was robbed last
night. Nakwan mo sy nang kany ng salap`. Rob him of his money. Sa
pagbubun` ni Hwn at ni Pdro si Pdro ay pinaahn ni Hwn. Juan
caught Pedro by the leg (or: hurt Pedro in the leg) as they wrestled
together; but: Pinaanan ny ang kanya ng kapatd na nattlog. He lay
down with his feet toward his sleeping brother. Hwag m ng paann sa
iy ng paghig` ang kapatd mo ng nattlog. When you go to bed don't
lie with your feet toward your sleeping brother. Pinanwan sya nang
pagisip. He lost his mind. Patayn mo nang pitsn ang nilgaw. Kill
a pigeon for the stew. Patisan m ang isd` ng it. Put shrimp-sauce
on this fish. Pinaygan nya ang para ng it. He agreed to this
plan. Pilikn mu ang isd`. Cut the fins off the fish. Pintahan m
ang padr na yt. Paint this wall. Hwag m ng pintasn ang damt na
yn. Don't find fault with that garment. Pitasan m nang bnga ang
mangg. Pick some fruits from the mango tree. Ang pinultan nil nang
man` ay ang bakran ni Hwna. The place where they gathered peanuts
was Juana's yard. Pinpunsan nya ang sahg. She is scrubbing the
floor. Punan m, Pdro, nang is ng salap` ang kwlta ng ibinigy mo
sa kin. Add half a dollar to the money you gave me, Pedro. Putkan mo
ang kanya ng salawl. Put mud on his trousers. Pinutlan ko nang usbng
ang manga kamte. I cut shoots from the sweet-potatoes. Pinputlan ny
nang manga sang ang khoy na nabwl. He is cutting the branches off
the tree that was blown down. Putlan mo nang tnga ang so. Cut the
dog's ears. Putlan m nang sngay ang kalabw. Cut the horns of the
carabao. Pputlan ko nang sngay ang us. I shall cut off the stag's
horns. Pputln dw nya nang buntt ang so. He says he will cut off
the dog's tail. Sinakyn nmin ang bangk ni Hwn. We rode in Juan's
canoe. Sakyan m ang bangka ng it. Get into this canoe. Hwag m ng
salhan ang iyo ng mang pagpsok sa eskwlhan. Don't skip going to
school, Don't play hookey; but: Sinanglan ny ang singsng. He missed
the ring (in the juego de anillo). Hwag m ng sangln ang us. Don't
fail to hit the stag. Samhan mo si Pdro. Go with Pedro. Sayawan
m kam, Hwna. Dance for us, Juana. Sinigawn nang pre` ang kany
ng munisily. The priest yelled at his sacristan. Sinikran nang
kabyo ang karumta. The horse kicked at the carriage. Siglan m nang
lak ang bte. Fill the bottle with wine. Unt-unt mo ng suban ang
pitsn. Feed the squabs little by little. Sinugtan sya ni Pdro. He
was wounded by Pedro. Sinuklyan nya ang kanya ng ank. She combed
her child's hair. Sultan mo si Pdro. Write to Pedro. Tinabnan na
ni Pdro ang hkay. Pedro has already filled up the hole. Tagalan m
ang pagkbitbit nang tabl. Keep holding the board that way. Tagalan
m ang pagtitira dto sa min. Stay here with us a long time. Tagpian
m ang bro ng it. Mend this shirt. Tagpuan m nang iba ng kyo ang
kaluwngan nang sya. Fill out (literally: cause to meet) the width
of the skirt with other cloth. Tamnan m nang manga pno-ng-nyg ang
bakran. Plant the yard with cocoanut trees. Tinanran nya ang bhay sa
bo ng magdamg. He guarded the house all night. Hwag m ng tanggapn
nang pa ang kaybgan ko ng ihhatid m sa estasyn nang trn,
sapagkt ak ang pa sa iy. Don't take any fare from my friend whom
you will bring to the railroad station, for I shall pay you. Tapunan
m ang bte. Cork up the bottle. Hwag m ng tawnan si Hwn. Don't
laugh at Juan. Tawgan mo si Bathla`. Call on the Lord. Tinayuan ny
nang kamlig ang bakran. He erected a granary in his yard. Tigasan
m ang lto nang halay. Cook the jelly hard. Tinirhn nya ak nang
tinpay. He left some bread for me. Tirhn mo ak nang inyat. Leave me
some molasses; but: Hwag m ng tirahn ang bhay na iyn. Don't live in
that house. Ang bhay na iyn ay ang kanya ng tintirahn. That house
over there is where he lives. Tinulnan nya ang paglkad. He hurried
his pace. Tulsan mo ang tas nang lpis. Sharpen the point of the
pencil. Untian m, Pdro, ang ibbigay m ng dam sa kabyo. Give the
horse less grass, Pedro. upn nang manga panahin ang manga bangk
ng it. The guests will sit on these benches. Orsan mo ang iyo ng
pagkin. Have your meals at stated times. Utngan mo nang salap
si Pdro. Borrow money from Pedro. Ohan mo ang tanng. Answer the
question in the affirmative. Niwwalisn niy ang sahg. She is
sweeping the floor.

Other roots: akm`, mot, apy, balt, bya`, byad, bigy, bendisiyn,
bti, dagn, retrto, gmit, gaw`, gupt, halimhm, hatd, hwak,
hig`, hits, hkay, hlog, ngat, kamt, kant, labs, lagy, llo`,
lpit, lgaw, ligts, lims, mul`, pagakpk, palt, panhk, psok,
prub, punt, putk, saby, sboy, sagsa`, skit, salkay, silakb,
sub, sbok, sund, sunggb, sot, tli`, tma`, tnga`, tngan,
tbay, tib`, tingn, tbo`, tugtg, tlad, tlog, tlong, tungtng,
umpis, pa, tos, wisk.

(a) From derived words: Sya y tinagilran ni Pdro. Pedro hit him in
the side (ta-glid,  523), but: Tinaligdn ni Hwn si Pdro pagdadan
nit sa kanya ng harapn. Juan turned away from Pedro when the latter
came before him. Tinalikdn ni Hwn si Pdro. Juan turned his back
on Pedro (talkod,  523).

(b) Irregularly without accent shift before the suffix: ki
ng binitwan (or: binitwan) ang bte. I let go my hold on the
bottle. Bitwan mo ang lbid. Let go of the rope. Dinanan siy nang
isa ng silakb nang glit. A fit of anger came upon him. ... nang
isa ng masam ng pagisip. An evil thought came to him. Dindanan
sya nang isa ng malak ng kalungktan. A great grief is upon
him. ... nang pagkaull. He is under an attack of madness. Cf. daann,
above. Minatan nang bgo ng to ang aswng. The young man looked
round for the vampire. Matan mo ang magnankaw. Keep an eye open
for the thief. So from: srmon.

(c) From root with accent shift (so that the total shift is two
syllables): Ang utusn nang kapitn ay tinaman nang bla. The
captain's orderly was hit by a bullet. Ang luld ni Pdro ay tinaman
nang bla. Pedro got shot in the shin. Tinaman nang kulg (nang
lintk) ang isa ng pnu-ng-mangg. A mango tree was struck by the
thunder (by lightning). Taman ka nang lintk! May the lightning
strike you! (curse.)

375. The local passive is formed from the root with pag- when it
corresponds to an active in which mag- is contrasted with -um-
( 351) or when the local relation, especially of person for whom,
is highly explicit: pag-putl-an, pag-p-putl-an, p-in-ag-putl-an,
p-in-ag-p-putl-an. Examples: Ang pagsaky sa kabyo ay hind maga
ng pagarlan kung salbhe ang kabyo. Riding horseback is not easy
to learn if the horse is unruly. Hind kya ni Hwn ang kanya ng
pinagarlan. Juan's studies are too hard for him. Pagbbalikn
kit. I will come back to you. Pagbalikn mo ak. Come back to
me. Ang tang ni Mary ay pinagbayran nang kanya ng kapatd na
babye. Maria's debt was paid off by her sister. Ang ki ng kapatd
na lalki ang pinagbilhn ko nito ng bhay. I sold this house to my
brother. Napatd ang lbid na kanya ng pinagbbiyabhan. The rope
on which he was swinging broke. Ang pinagharngan kina Hwn ay isa
ng lugr na malpit sa mangghan sa da-ng-Balwag. The place where
Juan and his company were held up was a spot near the mango-grove
on the Baliuag road. Pagharan mo ng mabte ang pul ng it. Rule
righteously over this island. Paghasan mo nang manga panghit ang
hasa ng it. Use this whetstone to sharpen razors on. Ang pinaghatdan
k nang gtas ay malyo`. The place to which I delivered the milk was a
long way off. Sa pasga ng it y wal ng lugr na pinaghhubarn nang
damt. At this beach there is no place for undressing. ang pinagibhn
the point of difference, the difference. Pagingtan mo ng dalhn ang
tbo ng kristl na iyn, sapagkt bak magkputl-putl iyn kung
hind ka mangat nang pagdadal. Carry that glass tube carefully,
because it might get smashed if you are not careful about the carrying
it. Pinagkabyawn nil ang lugr na it. This place is where they
pressed sugar-cane. Ang pinagkkabyawn nmin ay isa ng lugr na
matas ky sa tubhan. The place where we press sugar-cane is a place
higher than the cane-field. Pagkabyawn niny nang tub ang bgo ng
kabywan. Press the cane in the new press. Pagkbyawn nil ang bgo
ng tay ng kabywan. They will press sugar-cane in the newly-erected
press. Ang hwtaw ang sya m ng pagknan. The Chinese bowl is what
you are to eat from. Si Pdro ang pinagknan nang manga kasangkpa
ng it. Pedro is the one from whom we got these tools. Si Migl ang
pinagkknan nya nang kwlta ng pangbil nang kalabw. Miguel is the
one from whom he gets money to buy carabao. Ang pagknan mo nang play
ay ang sko ng may klang. The place for you to take rice is the sack
that is already broken. Hwag m ng paglaruwn, Hwn, ang kutng,
sapagkt bak mo iyn mblag. Don't play with the kitten, Juan,
for you might inadvertently blind it. Paglarwan m ang bla. Play
(with the) ball. Ang kutng ay nblot sa pinagllaruwn nya ng
damt. The kitten got wrapped up in the piece of cloth with which it
was playing. Pagmasdan m ang bwn. Look carefully at the moon. Hwag
m ng pagputlan nang ano mn ang sangkla ng iyn. Don't cut anything
on that cutting-block. Pinagsalitan ni Hwn ang kany ng manga bta
ng kapatd. Juan gave his little brothers a talking-to.

Similarly: bintng, dan, dars, dasl, hti`, hinla`, katm, kubl,
paty, plit, sbi, silb, ssi, tagp`, tipn, sap.

(a) From a phrase: pinagsa-uln (sa ul`).

(b) From a derived word: Mang pinagpptagnan ko ng gino! Respected
sirs, Dear sirs (in oral or written address).

(c) Irregularly without accent shift: pinagdanan (dan), cf.  374,b.

(d) With extra accent shift, corresponding to active with mag- (1):
Pagputuln mo, Hwn, nang manga usbng ang kalabsa. Cut a bundle of
shoots from the pumpkin, Juan.

As bitw lacks the accent shift before -an ( 374,b), the form with
pag- and shift of one syllable belongs here: Pinagbitiwan ny ang
manga mank na kanya ng tngan. She let go of all the chickens she
was holding.

(e) With reduplication of the root, corresponding to the active with
mag- r ( 354): pinagsisigln (sild).

(f) With both extra accent shift and reduplication, corresponding to 
355: Pinagddadagukn nya ang manga kaway niy. He was dealing blows
to his enemies right and left (dgok a blow with the fist).

(g) From doubled root (cf. the active,  356): pinagttulng-tulngan
(tlong).

376. The local passive with pang- corresponds to actives with mang-:
pa-mutl-an, pa-m-mutl-an, p-in-a-mutl-an, p-in-a-m-mutl-an.

San ang pinanggalngan mo?--Ang pinanggalngan ko ay an
bya-ng-Maynla`. Where have you come from?--I come from Manila. Ang
manga pintak na kadtig nang spa` ay sya ny ng pinangggapsan
(or: sya ny ng pinammutlan nang play). The sections of the
rice-field bordering on the ditch are the ones he is cutting rice
from. Pinangitlugn nang mank ang kah ng it. The hen laid its eggs
in this box. Hwag m ng pamitasn nang bnga ang tis na nsa tab
nang baln. Don't pick the fruits from the atis tree by the side of
the well. Siya k ng pammitasn nang bnga ang bybas na nsa gitn
nang bakran. I shall pick fruits from the guava tree in the middle
of the yard. Ali ng lugr ang iyo ng pinamutlan nang dam? Which
place did you cut grass from? Sinund ni Pdro ang kapatd na babye
sa bhay na pinannahan. Pedro fetched his sister from the house
where she was working as seamstress. So also from: tlo, tiwla`.

(a) With pang-hin- the local passive corresponds to the active
with mang-hin- ( 357,b); the reduplication affects the hin- which,
theoretically, we may regard as part of the underlying word. "Magral
ka ng mabti at panghinayngan mo ang mahalag ng panahn," sinbi ni
Hwn sa kanya ng ank. "Study hard and take account of the precious
time," said Juan to his son. Kylan pa kay panghhinayngan nang
manga to ang manga ni ng tan-ta y nssr nang luktn o nang
tyot? When will the people at last regret the harvests that are
every year destroyed by locusts or by drought? Pinanghinayngan nil
ang nlubog na bangk`. They were sorry about the canoe that had
sunk. Pinanghhinayngan nmin ang marmi ng bhay na gingol nang
byan sa pagtatanggl sa katwran. We regret the many lives lost by
the country in the defense of its rights. (syang); similarly from
gant: panghigantihn.



(10) Special static words.

377. With S -an special static words are formed from oxytone roots,
without the irregularities described in  334. In meaning they fall
into two types, which, however, are not always clearly distinct.

(a) They express an action by two or more actors, a kind of plural of
root words of the type described at  341,3,a. Ang lsan nang manga
aluwge ay sa lnes nang hpon. The leaving of the carpenters is
fixed for Monday afternoon. ang nman a drinking party. Ang ykan
nang manga bta` ay nrinig ko sa kalsda. I heard on the street
the crying of the children. Ang klabgan nang manga nalaglg na
nyg dahiln sa malaks na hngin ay nrinig hanggng sa malyo ng
lugr. The thud of the cocoanuts that were thrown down by the strong
wind was audible for some distance away. Ang klasngan nang manga
kwalt ng laglg sa buls ni Hwn ay sya ng nakgsing kay Pdro. The
rattling of the coins falling from Juan's purse was what woke Pedro
up. Ang kanthan nang manga bon ay gingaw nila kung umga. The
birds sing together in the morning. Ang krtan nil sa nilto ko ng
isd` ay lubh ng madals. They often pinched pieces out of the fish
I had cooked. Ang litsnan nila Hwn ay hind ntuly. The barbecue
of Juan and his friends did not come off. Ang lukshan nang manga
luktn ay toto ng maiikl`. The leaps of the small grasshoppers are
very short. Ang pgakpkan nang manga to pagkaran nang talumpte`
ay lubh ng mahba`. The applause of the people after the speech
was very long. Ang pintsan ni Hwna at ni Mary ay parho ng hind
toto. The criticisms of Juana and Maria make of each other are
equally untrue. Ang kany ng manga lalagyn nang tuba` ay pna ng
laht. His containers for the sap are all full. Ang kanila ng skyan
sa trn ay sa lingg nang umga. They are all to take the train Sunday
morning. Naparon ak kagab sa isa ng sywan. I went to a dance last
night. Ang sgwan nang manga bta` sa kalsda ay nakabbing. The
shouting of the children on the street is deafening. ang thlan
nang manga so the baying together of the dogs. ang tyan a staking,
a putting up of stakes (ang tay` a stake in a bet or game). Nrinig
sa isa ng pan nang manga Intsk ang kwnto ng it. This story was
heard in a gathering of Chinamen.

Similarly, from: kalusks, paty, pust, putk, salit`, sugl, takb,
tipn, tugtg, umpk.

From derived word: Ang hmagskan sa Filipnas ay natpus n. The
fighting in the Philippines is over. (as though from a form -himagsk,
see  518).

This formation underlies further derivatives, see  352,d. 357,a.

(b) The other meaning of the formation S -an is that of an object
viewed, rather explicitly (cf.  380), as the scene of plural action
or the place of things. So: ang bgsan the place where hulled rice
is made, threshing floor for rice, rice-mill. Si Hwn ang bgyan
nil nang kanil ng manga ninkaw na alhas. Juan is the one to whom
they give the jewelry they have stolen. ang blangan a prison (ang
bilangg` a prisoner). Ang kanila ng blhan nang play ay sa kamlig
ni Hwn. The place where they buy rice is in Juan's storehouse. Ang
dnan nang manga sundlo ay ang lands na it. The usual route of
the soldiers is this path. ang hampsan the whipping-bench. Ang manga
magkakpit-bhay na si Andrs, Kuls, at Pdro ay nagttlo tungkl
sa kan-kanil ng hangghan nang bakran. The neighbors Andrs,
Nicols, and Pedro are disputing about the boundaries of their
grounds. Sa pagtan nang bya-ng-Balwag at bya-ng-San-Migl ay
my-roo ng isa lmang na hintan ang manga nagllakad. Pedestrians
have only one stopping-place between the towns of Baliuag and San
Miguel. Si Pdro ay sya ng hrman nang salap` nang manga to sa
byan. Pedro is the one from whom the people in the town borrow
money. ang hungkyan a machine for fanning the pounded rice. Ang isa
ng taburte lmang ang ginaw nila ng lgyan nang kanila ng manga
sombrro, sapagkt ang sabitn ay pun n. A chair was all they had
to lay their hats on, for the hat-rack was already full. Ang lngyan
sa log ay bumbaw. The swimming-place in the river grew shallow. ang
lran the playground. Ang lbngan sa manga bta` sa manga bapr na
nagllayag sa dgat nang Pasfiko ay lubh ng malilnis na lugr. The
play-rooms for children on the steamers that ply on the Pacific Ocean
are very neat places. ang nygan a cocoanut grove. Ang ptyan nang
bbuy ay nasnog. The pork slaughter-house burned down. ang ptsan
a factory for shrimp-sauce (pats, made of the small shrimp called
hpon). Ang bro ng punt-punt ay sya ny ng ginaw ng tagpan nang
manga retso. She sewed the patches all on to the ragged blouse. Ang
kanila ng tagpan ay ang da-ng-Balwag. Their meeting-place is the
Baliuag road. ang tanygan an exhibition, exposition. ang timbngan
a pair of scales. ang tindhan a shop, store (ang tind the goods
for sale in a store).

Similarly, from: aklt, banty, bigt, biniyg, buks, buntt, dasl,
gaw`, hagdn, hig`, hukm, kabiyw, kubl, kulng, libng, luks,
mangg, pint, pint, pitg, punl`, sampy, sangl`, simb, sahn,
tanggp, tarangk, tir, up`.

A very few show irregularities: eskwl-han, pa-nan, tto-hnan the
truth (toto); the secondary accent is lacking in dam-han, tub-han;
irregular in kumpsl-an.

From a compound word: bus-lksan (bos-laks).

From a phrase: s-lawhan changeable, fickle, as though from sa law;
for the latter see  345.

From derived words: ang numnan place for drinking-water, water-shelf
(inum-n,  367,a); ang slangn-an the east (silang-n,  379.

378. The formation (1) S -an is made from barytone roots and
corresponds in meaning to (a) in the preceding type; the suffix is
added as a rule without irregularity.

Ang bgan ni Mary at ni Hwn ay natpus sa pagtatamphan. The
love-affair of Maria and Juan ended through their contrariness. Ang
lysan nang manga sundlo ay hind maampt nang kanila ng manga
pinno`. The deserting of the soldiers could not be stopped by their
officers. Sa miyrkules ang llnan nil sa trn. On Wednesday they
are to embark on the train. Ang pltan nil nang kwalt ay nhint`
nang mrinig nil ang putk. Their scrambling for money ceased when
they heard the crash. ang tpnan a meeting.

So: hyag, hni, kin, klos, sma, tloy.

Irregular in form is: Ang twnan nila Hwn ay nhinto dahiln sa
kanila ng pagkglat. The laughter of Juan's crowd stopped on account
of their surprise (twa).

Irregular in meaning, as though local instead of plural, is: Ang
guld na it ay sya ng slngan nang raw. This hill is the place
where the sun rises (slang).

379. The form from barytone roots corresponding to the type in 
377,b and often also to type a, is: (2) -an, without irregularities:
Ang agawn nang manga ungg` ay magul. The grabbing by the monkeys
was confused. ang basahn a reading-room, library. Bulakn Bulacn
(name of a province, if from blak a cluster of capoc cotton). Ang
malit na na ng it ay sya k ng durun nang manga aspil. This little
cushion is where I stick my needles. ang halun a mixing-vessel. ang
hugasn a place for washing dishes. ang hulihn nang isd` a
fishing-expedition. Si Hwna ay isa ng babye ng kutuhn. Juana is a
lousy woman. Ang labann nang manga Trkos at Ingglses ay kasulukyan
pa lmang. The warfare between the Turks and the English is only now
taking place. Ang kanila ng lakarn ay lubh ng masay. Their walking
party is very merry. Ang kanila ng lusungn ay hind natpus na mabte,
sapagkt marmi sa manga to ay matamd. Their cooperative scheme did
not turn out well, because most of the people were lazy. Ang murahn
ni Hwna at ni Mary ay nrinig nang bo ng byan. The revilings of
Juana and Maria were heard by the whole town. Sa bya-ng-San-Migl
ay nangyre ang isa ng nakawn. In the town of San Miguel a robbery
took place. Ang tabl ng it ay ginaw ng pakun nang manga bta`
sa manga pku ng aspil na kinha nil. The children used this board
for hammering in the tacks they had taken. Ang btas nang bangka`
ay sya ng ginaw ng pasakn ni Pdro nang pagkt. The leak in the
canoe was where Pedro calked in the wax. ang putikn a clay-pit; a
person or thing covered with mud. Ang is ng labangn ay sy ng nagng
silangn kay Hess. Jesus was born in a manger; ang ktri ng silangn
ni Hwna the bed in which Juana's children were born. Sya y sugatn
He is wounded; ang sugatn the wounded (as, after a battle). ang
sulatn a writing-desk. Ang slong nang bhay ay sya ny ng tagun
nang manga kasangkpan sa pagaalwge. The ground-floor of his house
is where he keeps his carpentry tools. Ang kuwrto ng it ay sya k
ng tulugn. This room is my sleeping-place. Ang tulugn nang bhay
ni Hwn ay nsa bubungn. The sleeping-quarters in Juan's house are
on the roof. ang utusn a servant, a waiter, an orderly.

Similarly: ral, bkol, dhil, hrang, hsa`, haw, law, kin, lto`,
sbit, sbong, tpon, tlis, lo, pa, ras.

With irregularities: hlamann garden, flower-pot (halman) has
secondary accent on the first of three syllables; angkn the members of
a given person's immediate family, not including himself: ang angkn
ni Hwn Krs Juan Cruz' wife and children (from -nak, cf. mag-nak,
 358,a); kwayann, beside kawayann (kawyan).

With irregularity and reduplication: ka-kan-n (-kin).

380. (1) -an with irregularities forms static words denoting objects by
the action for which they are locally used or by the things they are
the place of; the local meaning is less explicit, and the object has
more fixed identity apart from its local relation than is the case in
the preceding forms. This distinction is very clear where both forms
occur from the same root (cf. kulng, lagy); it may disappear where
only one form is made (sagngan, atsan have the same value as nygan).

ang atsan a grove of atis trees. Ang asuhn nang bhay ni Pdro ay
nasnog. The chimney in Pedro's house burned out. Bigasn ang kanya ng
sining. Her boiled rice has raw rice in it, is not done. Ang kanya ng
damt ay pulahn. Her clothes are all red. Sya y is ng pulahn. He
is a Red, a member of the Red party. ang silngan the east, also
Silngan Silangan (name of a town). ang taann a fugitive. ang mank
na talnan the defeated game-cock; lto ng talnan a dish in which the
defeated game-cock is cooked with ginger. Similarly: bkod, bubng,
dlo, gaw`, hangg, harp, kulng, labng, lar`, likd, luld, pa,
sging, tintro.

(a) Some roots which begin with l and most of those whose irregularity
involves contraction, have reduplication in this form: Ang lalagyn
ko nang libr ay ang msa ng it. This table is my bookstand. Ang
uup ng it ay ggamtin nang manga panahin. The guests will sit
on these seats. Ang uup ng it ay sa hre`. This seat is for the
king. lulurn shin. Similarly: hihign (hig`), lalamnan (lmon),
lalawgan (lwig), sasakyn (saky), titirhn (tir).

(b) From derived words: Naptol nil ang pno-ng-khoy sa
kalahatan. They cut the tree at the middle. Nalagt ang lbid sa
kalahatan. The rope broke at the middle. (kalahti`,  519). Ang
btas nang bangk` ay nsa tagilran. The leak in the canoe is in
the side. Nilagyn ni Hwn nang tagilran ang kanya ng bhay. Juan
put side-walls on his house. (taglid,  523).

381. D -an, with accent shift if the root is barytone, forms words
denoting an object which is an imitation or miniature of such and
such: ang dagat-dagtan a lake; ang kab-kabayhan a play-horse; ang
tao-tahan a manikin, doll; the pupil of the eye; ang baril-barlan
a toy-gun. Further derivatives from this formation, see  352,d.

382. Many roots here treated, because felt, as simple, end in -an:
bangn, bataln, dalandn, hagdn, halman, knan, kpitan, kapitn,
kawyan, larwan, pagtan, pakuwn, pangnn a hand-basket, pasgan
(Psig is the name of a river), pinggn, saguwn a paddle, sangklan,
tampalsan, tahlan.

383. Similar formations with pang- prefixed add the element of
meaning present in the transient formations with mang- and pang-;
they have secondary accent on the prefix, as though it formed part
of the underlying word:

(a) png- -an (cf.  377): Ang kah ng it ay sya ng pngitlgan nang
mank. This box is the place where the hen lays its eggs.

(b) png- (1) -an (cf.  378): Si Hwn ay sya ng parti ng pmunan
nang bsag-lo. Juan is the one who always starts the fighting.

(c) png- (2) -an (cf.  379): pngaserahn boarding-place.



II. Secondary groups.

1. Prefix si-.

384. The prefix si- is used only in active transient forms, and
is always preceded by mag- or nag-: mag-si-ptol, mag-s-si-ptol,
nag-si-ptol, nag-s-si-ptol. In meaning these forms are explicit
plurals of the primary active forms. Occasionally the plural value
is emphasized by infixation of -ang- into the mag- or nag-.

385. From the simple root the explicit plural with si- corresponds to
the primary actives with -um- or, in many cases, with mag-. Nagsilag
sila sa byan nang it y paskin nang manga kaway. They all fled from
the town when the enemy entered it. Ang manga so ay nagssilmon. The
dogs are eating. Magsiligya kay. Rejoice, Be glad. Ang manga langgm
ay nagssilipumpn (or: nagssilpon) sa npatay nila ng gagamb. The
ants are crowding all over the spider they have killed. Nagssiptol
sila ng laht nang tub nang kam ay dumatng. They were cutting
sugar-cane when we arrived. Magsiptol kay nang tub. Do you all
cut sugar-cane.

So from: akiyt, als, dlaw, dal, datng, hli, hsay, iyk, kant,
kpit, lak, lpat, llan, pgil, punt, pust, syad, tindg, tugtg,
tlong, tngo, uw`.

(a) Plurality emphasized: Nangagsirong ang manga sundlo. The soldiers
retreated. So also from als.

386. This formation is made from the root with pag- prefixed when
it corresponds to primary actives with mag- in contrast with -um-
( 351). Nagssipagral sil. They are studying. Magsipagral
kay. Study. Ang manga bta` ay yaw magsipagbhis. The children don't
want to change their clothes, get dressed up. Ang manga langgm ay
nagssipagpon (or: nagssipaglpon) nang pagkin kung tagraw. The
ants store up food in the hot season. Magsipagptol kay, Pdro, nang
khoy na ggamtin sa paglilitsn. Pedro, do you folks cut some wood
to be used in the barbecue. "Magssipagptol dw sila nang dikla,"
ang sbi ni Hwna. "They say they are going to cut off the trains
of their skirts," said Juana. Napsipagptol nang buhk ang manga
Intsk. The Chinamen cut off their queues. Nagssipagptol nang buhk
ang manga Intsk na si Yng at Tsng, nang sila y datnn ko sa kanila
ng tindhan. The Chinamen Yeng and Chang were cutting their queues
when I came upon them in their shop. Nagsipagtipd ang sundlo. The
soldiers economized.

So from: bas`, dasl, hint`, lar`, pasiyl, ssi, sugl, takb,
tindg, yukayk.

(a) Plurality emphasized: nangagsipagtakb.

(b) The pag- is used when the underlying word is a derived word: Ang
manga sundlo ng Taglog ay nagsipaghimagsk. The Tagalog soldiers
revolted (-himagsk,  518). Nagsipaghmagskan sil. They fought each
other (hmagskan,  377,a). So from: agawn ( 379), -bugtngan (
377,a), labann ( 379), takbhan ( 377,a). Cf.  406.

(c) The same formation with accent shift of the root corresponds
to primary actives with mag- (1),  353. It occurs from: blot,
lkad, lbot.

387. With pang- prefixed to the root, this formation corresponds to
the primary active with mang- ( 357). Magsipamangk tyo. Let's all
go canoeing. Magssipamiybas kam sa manga gbat na malpit. We are
going guava-picking in the jungles near here. Si Pdro at si Hwn ay
umhon sa bundk pang magsipamtol nang khoy na asan`. Pedro and
Juan went up into the mountains to cut asana. hon kam sa bundk at
magssipamtol kam nang mulwin. We are going up into the mountains
to cut molave.

So from: barl, hna`, hing`, nod, tahmik, tlo.

(a) With pang-hin-, cf.  357,b: Sil y nagsipanghimagsk. They made
a revolution.



2. The prefix paki-.

388. The prefix paki-, which forms simple static forms, transients,
and abstracts, expresses that the subject of the sentence performs
or undergoes the action along with others that were involved in it
before,--this either through interference or by favor of someone else.

389. Simple static form: ang pakikinbang the obtaining of profit
(kinbang) in trade with others; also: holy communion. So pakiptol,
in command (cf.  341,3,c), cut as a favor.

390. The active transient and the abstract have the forms: maki-ptol,
mak-ki-ptol, naki-ptol, nak-ki-ptol, paki-ki-ptol, i. e. the
reduplication affects the syllable -ki-.

Ang kapitn ay nagpadal nang isa ng sekrta sa lp nang kaway
pang makiramdm nang kanila ng klsan. The captain sent a spy to
the enemy's country to spy out (literally: perceive along) their
movements. Makkikin ak kina Llay. I am going to Lilay's for a
meal. Si Pdro ay nakikin kina Hwn. Pedro took a meal at Juan's
house. Nakiptol ak nang dam sa lp ni Mariyno. I obtained
permission to cut grass from Mariano's land. Sila y nrron sa bkid
ni Pdro at nakkiptol nang dam. They have gone to Pedro's field
and are cutting grass there by his permission. Pumaron ka t makiptol
nang dam. Go and ask them to let you cut some grass. Pakikiptol dto
ni Hwn nang dam ay singiln mo ang tang nya. When Juan asks to be
allowed to cut grass here, dun him for his debt. Sila y nakisno kay
Mariy. They had Maria let them live in her house with her.

So: saky, sma, tloy, tlog.

(a) With accent shift of the root ( 337): makialm look after someone,
nose into others' affairs (lam).

391. The root has pag- when the formation corresponds to a primary
active with mag- in contrast with -um- ( 351): Nakkipagway ang
bta ng it, kany` hind dpat pahintulta ng madals na manog
nang bhay. As this boy gets into fights, he should not often be
allowed to leave the house. Nakipagway si Pdro. Pedro got into the
fight. Nasaktn si Hwn sa kanya ng pakikipaglar`. Juan got hurt
when he joined into the game. So from: bun`, dalamhti`, lban,
tagp`, sap.

(a) From derived words: Hwag k ng makipaglngyan, Hwn, at bak
ka malnod. Don't go swimming with the crowd, Juan, I am afraid
you might get drowned. Makkipaglngyan ka b, Pdro? Are you
going along swimming, Pedro? Nakipaglukshan si Hwn nang idos ang
manga lar`. Juan entered in the jumping-contest when the games were
held. Similarly, from: pust-han, siksk-an, takb-han. All these
belong under  377,a. See also  427,b.

(b) Corresponding to primary active with mag- (1)  353: Nakipagbabg
si Pdro. Pedro got into a free fight (bbag).

392. The root has pang-, corresponding to a primary active with mang-:
Sya y hind pinahintultan sa kanya ng pakikipamtol nang tub. His
request to be allowed to cut cane was not granted.

393. In the passive the paki- expresses that the subject undergoes the
action along with others, often as a favor on the part of the actor. So
direct passive: paki-putl-in be cut, as a favor on the part of the
one who does the cutting; the recipient of the favor is the speaker.

394. In the instrumental passive the meaning is similar; sometimes,
however, the instrumental passive is used with the person asking the
favor as agent.

Mar mo ng ng ipakihlog sa kuryo ang slat? Will you please
mail my letter for me? (literally: Can my letter please be
thrown-along-with-yours or thrown-as-a-favor into the mail by
you?). Ipinakihlog ni Pdro ang ki ng slat. Pedro mailed my letter
(along with his or as a favor) for me. Ipinakkihlog ko lmang kay
Pdro ang ki ng manga slat. I am asking Pedro to mail my letters
for me; here ipinakkihlog is not that thrown as a favor, but that
asked to be thrown as a favor. Ipakkiptol daw ni Hwn ang buhk
nang all nya ng Intsk. Juan says he will ask someone to cut his
Chinese servant's hair; ipakkiptol is here that asked to be cut as
a favor, and the relation of asking is the only thing expressed by
the instrumental (rather than the direct) passive.

395. The root has pag-, corresponding to  351: Ipakipagptol mo ng`
nang buhk ang guntng na it, pang ti ng masubkan ang hsay nang
talm. Please use this shears in cutting hair, so that we may test the
quality of the edge (genuine instrumental passive). Ipakkipagptol
daw nya ak nang bh` paghon nya sa bundk. He says he will cut
some bamboo for me when he goes up into the mountains. (genuine
instrumental passive). Ipinakipagptol ak ni Hwn nang tub. Juan had
someone cut me some sugar-cane (literally: I was asked to be cut for
as a favor). Ipinakkipagptol daw ni Hwn si Pdro nang labng. Juan
says he is having someone cut bamboo-shoots for Pedro.

396. Local passive with paki-: pinakibalitan was ascertained by the
actor getting people to tell him as a favor.

(a) From shifted root: pinakialamn.

(b) With pag- (cf.  352): pinakkipagtakbuhn.



3. The prefix ka-.

397. Secondary forms with the prefix ka- are of most varied meaning;
the principal types express association of two individuals or groups
and involuntary action. In accented form the prefix k- expresses
chiefly accidental occurrence. In certain passives associated with
this group the prefix itself does not appear.



(1) Simple static forms.

398. Words with prefix ka- denote objects (or groups) standing in
such and such a relation to another object (or group). Sya y ki
ng nagng kabale. He (she) has become my fellow-parent-in-law,
i. e. Our children have intermarried; the form ka-bale merely
makes explicit the element of relation present in the simple word:
Si Bantg ay ki ng bale. Bantug's son (daughter) has married my
daughter (son). Ang manga so ay nsa kabil nang bkod. The dogs
are on the other side of the fence (the simple -bil` does not occur;
the idea of other side is always envisaged as relative). Ang bkid ni
Hwn ay kartig nang kay Pdro. Juan's field borders on Pedro's. Ang
msa ng it y kaklay nang kahn. This table is of the same color
as the chest. Si Hwn ang kalban ny Andrs sa lar ng dma. Juan is
Andres' opponent at checkers. Kamat si Hwn ni Pdro. Juan and Pedro
took to each other from first sight. Ang tagp nang bro ni Pdro ay
hind kamukh nang bro`. The patch on Juan's blouse does not match
the blouse. ang ki ng kapatd na si Hwn my brother Juan. ang ki
ng kaptol na si Hwn my brother Juan; ang kaptol nang tub a piece
(broken off) of the sugar-cane. Ang kasnib nang ki ng bang ay ang
bang ni Manuwl. Manuel's sleeping-mat and mine overlap (kasnib
one of two things of which one overlaps the other). wal ng kasangkp
without accompaniments, trimmings, affixes. Si Mariyno ang kasunod k
ng lumlkad sa kalsda. Mariano was the one who was walking behind
me on the street; ang kasunod k ng naparon sa simbhan the one who
followed me in going to church (kasund one of two persons one of whom
is following the other). ang katngo the person one is dealing with,
the other party. Si Pdro ang kaugli nang kanya ng kaybga ng si
Hwn. Pedro has the same habits as his friend Juan.

Similarly from: way, byan, biyk, bun`, ribl, harp, killa, klse,
lkip, lar`, panty, part, sabuwt, sli, slo, sma, sno`, tapt,
timb`, unt`, sap, wal`.

Divergent in meaning are kato ( 255), kagab, kahpon (
259). Cf. also  520.

(a) From derived words: Sy y isa k ng kamagnak. He is a relative
of mine (mag-nak,  358,a), and kamakalaw ( 259, from maka-law,
 453).

(b) From a phrase: ang kasa-ng-bhay a person dwelling in the same
house with another, a housemate (is ng bhay).

(c) From shifted root ( 337): Si Hwn ay kagalt ni Pdro at ni
Kuls. Juan is at odds with Pedro and Nicols. ang kany ng kagalt
the person or persons with whom he is at odds. Si Pdro ang nagng
kasir ni Hwn. It is Pedro with whom Juan is angry. Hind ko katal
si Pr Hwn. I don't play winning-and-losing games with Father
Juan. Similarly from lam, sma.

(d) The root is reduplicated in a few cases: Si Pdro ang ki ng
kababyan. Pedro is my fellow-townsman (beside kabyan); katutbo`
native, ingrown, inborn, inherited.

399. k-ka-. With accented reduplication of the prefix these forms
emphasize the incompleteness of the correlative object: Kkaptol
lmang na tub ang ki ng nkha. I got only a little piece of the
sugar-cane. So also kkaunt`.

400. ka- R. With accented reduplication of the underlying word ka-
forms words expressing the recent completion of an act; they are
used impersonally ( 77) or as conjunctive attributes. Kaway pa
lmang ni Hwn sa kanya ng kalar`. Juan has only just now quarreled
with his playmate. Kabbngon ko. I have just got up. Kaggling sa
byan nang kapatd ko ng babye. My sister has just come back from
town. Kahhiga ko pa lmang. I had just then lain down. Kallar ku pa
lmang sa bta`. I have just finished playing with the child. Kapptol
ko pa lmang nang yantk. I have only just now cut some rattan. So
gsing, kin.

(a) ka-pag- R, with the usual value of pag- ( 369, etc.): Kapagpptol
lmang ni Hwn nang kawyan. Juan has just come from cutting bamboo.

(b) ka-pang- R, corresponding to active with mang- ( 357): kapammtol
(ptol).

401. ka- D. With doubling of the root ka- has causative value: it
expresses that which causes such and such an involuntary action,
specifically, such and such an emotion: Ang dumatng na blang
ay katkot-tkot ang dmi. The locusts that came were frightful in
quantity. So from hiy`, tak. Vowel-contraction in kwwa` pitiable,
piteous (for ka-wa-wa`). Slightly divergent in meaning is karka-rka
( 265,5).

402. In a different use ka- has the form kay- in some words; these
formations express a remarkable degree of a quality; they are used
impersonally ( 76), as predicate ( 247), occasionally as conjunctive
attributes: kalat kaylat what saltiness! (of water); kay-asl what
blueness! Katyog nang pno-ng-niyg na iyn! How tall that cocoanut
tree is! Kayunt` nang ibinigy nya ng laruwn sa kin! How few toys
he gave me! So: kay-dmot, ka-rmot, ka-rnong, ka-itm, kaknis,
ka-lyo`, ka-munt`, ka-pul, ka-tab`, kay-tipd.

(a) With reduplication of the root, this form refers to the quality
in an explicit plurality of objects: kaiitm what blackness! (of
several things); Kalalamg nang pa nang manga bta`! How cold the
children's feet are!

(b) With doubled root these forms intensify the quality: Kaydmot-dmot
nang bta ng it! What a terribly stingy child! (kaydmot, karmot
what stinginess! ang dmot stinginess).

403. A few forms with accented ka- prefixed to the root envisage the
accidental nature of the reciprocal relation: Ang manga damt na
it ay ksiya sa bal. These clothes will fit into the trunk. Ak
ang ksundo` ni Ppe sa pagpapalar` nang bsbol sa manga bta`. I
am at one with Pepe as to letting the children play baseball. Hbang
ak y nagddan, ktaon nam ng isinbuy nya ang tbig. He threw out
the water at the very time, it happened, that I was passing by. ang
ktiwla` a confidential agent, manager, overseer.

The words kluluw and kpuw`, which resemble this formation, seem
to be felt as simple roots and have been so treated here.



(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

404. k-um-a-. An active with -um- is made from ka-sap as underlying
word: Si Hwn ay kumkasap sa kin. Juan was talking at me,
haranguing me.

405. mag-ka- pag-ka-ka-. Actives with mag- and abstracts with pag-
r from underlying words with ka- express a partial affection of the
actor or of a group of actors; ka- here has its involuntary force:
the actor is not a rational and voluntary agent. Nagkaron ako nang
trabho kanna ng umga, sapagkt nagpasaky ak sa trn nang manga
kamtis nang ttay ko. I was kept busy this morning, for I attended
to the shipping by train of my father's tomatoes. Nagkaron sya
nang glit. He harbored ill-feeling. Nagkagul ang manga Amerikno
sa pagdatng nang Dytsland. The Americans were surprised at the
coming of the "Deutschland". Nagkagust sya ng kumin nang sha`. He
conceived a desire of eating grape-fruit. Nagkkalpon ang manga
langgm sa pto. The ants are getting all over the cake. Ak y
nagkamlay pagkaran nang il ng sandal ng paghihimaty. I returned
to consciousness after a few moments' fainting-spell. Nagkaplad si
Hwn na makaratng dto ng maluwalhti`. Juan was fortunate enough to
get back here safe and sound. Ang pakwn ay nagkasra`. The watermelon
got partly spoiled. Ang manga sging ay nagkasra` sa kalanan nang
pagktgo` sa lalagyn. Some of the bananas got spoiled on account
of the long time they were kept stored. Nsa simbhan. sil nang
magkasnog. They were at church when a fire occurred. Twi ng papaskin
ko sa kurl ang manga kalabw ay nagkkawal sil. Every time I put
the carabao into the corral, they get away.

So: bkol, hing.

406. mag-ka- (1) pag-ka-ka- (1). Accent shift in this formation serves
various uses:

(a) It may be due to the root: Si Hwn ay nagkasakt noo ng bw ng
nagdan. Juan had a sickness last month. Si Hwn ay hind makaptol
nang khoy, sapagkt mahn pa sya dahiln sa pagkakasakt. Juan cannot
cut wood, because he is still weak on account of his recent illness.

(b) It expresses plurality: Magkkaputl ang manga tub. The sugar-cane
will get broken in numbers. Nagkaputl ang manga tub sa laks nang
hngin. The sugar-cane broke in quantity under the violence of the
wind. Nagkkaputl ang manga tub sa kalakasn nang hngin. Much
sugar-cane is breaking under the force of the wind.

So also from lnod.

(c) The form is really a simple active with mag- from an underlying
word of the form ka- (1),  398,c; three words of this kind occur:
Sila y nagkagalt. They quarreled. ang pagkakagalt the quarrel. Ang
Hapn at ang Tsna ay nagkasir`. Japan and China had a break. Sil
y nagkatal. They played a winning-and-losing game. Nagkatalu n ang
manga nagssugl. The gamblers have lost and won, have finished their
winning-and-losing game.

In accordance with  356, the underlying word is doubled with
distributive plural meaning: Sila ng pat ay nagkag-kagalt. The
four of them all got angry at one another.

Similarly, an explicit plural with mag-si-pag- is formed (cf. 
386,b): Nagsipagkasir sil. They had a falling out.

407. (a) mag-ka- r pag-ka-ka- r. The reduplication of the root
expresses repeated action in a form with retraction of accent and
irregular insertion of ng after the prefix: Sya y nagkkangdadpa`. He
kept falling on his face.

(b) mag-ka- D pag-ka-ka- D. Doubling of the root seems a more regular
expression of the same value: nagkkaumpg-umpg.

408. Special static words with mag-ka- are simply dual collectives with
mag- ( 358,a) from underlying words with ka- ( 398): Ang bang ni
Hwn at ni Pdro ay magkanib (or: magkasnib) sa pagkltag. Juan's
and Pedro's sleeping-mats overlap each other as they are spread. ang
magkabale a pair of persons related by intermarriage of their
children (more insistent on the relational element, but practically
equal to magbale,  358,a). Ang dalawa ng mank ay magkabukd nang
kulungn. The two chickens were in separate crates. Ang bkid ni Hwn
at ni Pdro ay magkartig. Juan's field and Pedro's border on each
other. Si Pdro at si Hwn ay magkapanty. Pedro and Juan are of the
same height. ang magkapatd two brothers or sisters, a brother and
a sister. ang magkaptol na si Andrs at si Rafayl the brothers
Andrs and Rafael. Magkaptol kam ni Hwn nang bro`. Juan and I
have blouses made of the same cloth. dalaw ng bgay na ggawi ng
magkasund two things that are to be done one after the other.

(a) From kababyan ( 398,d): dalaw ng estudynte ng magkababyan
two students from the same town.

409. mag-ka-ka. As the explicit plural corresponding to these duals
reduplicates the underlying word ( 358,b), the syllable ka- is
repeated in this meaning: ang magkakapatd a group of three or more
brothers and (or) sisters; in the same meaning ang magkakaptol. So
also from: bukd, sma, sno`.

(a) The form magkababyan ( 408,a) rejects the extra reduplication,
and is therefore plural as well as dual: tatlo ng estudynte ng
magkababyan three students from the same town.

410. mag-k- pag-ka-k-. The transient with mag- and abstract with
pag- r from underlying words with k- have the accidental value of
the latter prefix, usually with a dual reciprocal meaning. Sa kabil
ng band mo ibwl ang pno ng iyn, sapagkt kung ir ay ibuwal k y
bak magkdagan ang dalawa ng pno`. Fell your tree in the direction
away from me, so that if I fell this one, the two trees won't fall one
on top of the other. Magkkdagn ang dalawa ng pno ng it, kapag
hind mo ibinwl sa kabil ng band iya ng pinptol mo. These two
trees will fall one on top of the other, if you don't make the one you
are cutting down fall the other way. Nagkdagan ang dalawa ng bta`
nang mahlog sila sa hagdn. The two children landed one on top of
the other when they fell from the ladder. Ilabas m sa bkid, Kuls,
ang dalawa ng sko ng play na nagkkdagn na nsa bangn. Nicols,
take out to the field the two bags of rice that are lying one on top
of the other in the granary. Ang pagkakiba nang ugli ni Pdro at ni
Hwn ay gya nang pagkakiba nang tbig at nang apy. The difference
in character between Pedro and Juan is like the difference between
water and fire. magkhiwaly part from each other (by force of
circumstances, of two people). Ang ikinaht nang palayk ay ang
masam ng pagkaklagay nit. What caused the rice-pot to break was
the bad way it was placed. magkmyaw harmonize. ang pagkaksaby the
happening at the same time of two events. Sya y nagksla. He sinned
(against the moral order, God, etc.) Ang pagkaksla kay Bathla`
ay pinarrushan sa infiyrno. Sinning against God is punished in
hell. Bbilhin k ang kabyo ng iyn, kung magkksya ang ki ng
kwalt. I shall buy this horse, if my money is sufficient. Wal sila
ng pagkaksund`. The two don't agree on anything. ang pagkaktan
the coincidence in time of one event with another, of two events. ang
pagkaktay` the standing up together (even of more than two people).

(a) Somewhat different are kung magkbihra` at odd times; kung
magkgayn when things turn out thus, when this is the state of
affairs. So also, with static value: Ang magkbila ng dlo nang lpis
ay matlis. Both ends of the pencil are sharpened.

411. mag-k- D pag-ka-k- D. With doubled root plurality is expressed:
Nagkhiw-hiwaly ang manga dhun nang libr. The leaves of the book
came apart. Ang manga gingaw nya ng pangsip nang manga makabuluh
ng ftsa nang istriya ay ang pagkaksund-sund at pagtan nil. He
remembers the important dates of history by their sequence and their
intervals.

(a) With accent shift, from a barytone root: Nagkputol-putl ang
katawn nang to ng nsagasan nang trn. The body of the man who
was run over by the train got all mangled. Nagkkputol-putl ang
katawn nang bla ng to ng msagasan nang trn. The body of a person
run over by a train is cut to pieces. Magkkputol-putl ang tbo ng
kristl na iyn kapag iyo ng ibinagsk. If you drop that glass tube,
it will break into a thousand pieces.

412. ka- (1) -in, k-in-a-. The simple direct passive is formed from
an underlying derived word with ka- with normal meaning. So from
ka-lban, ka-sap.

(a) A special static word corresponding to those in  366 is ang
kinkapatd the child of one's godparents (from ka-patd).

From it are derived the dual collective ( 358,a) magkinkapatd a
pair of such, and the plural ( 358,b) magkikinkapatd three or more,
as a group.

413. i-ka- i-k-in-a-. The instrumental passive with prefix ka-
has a specialized meaning: it expresses transiently, an inanimate,
or at least irrational and involuntary, object or circumstance which
causes such and such an action: and this latter action is in turn
also involuntary or out of control of the actor (as, for instance,
the ability to do a thing), see  432 ff.

Ang kawaln ni Andrs nang hnap-bhay sa bya ng it ay sya ny ng
ikinaals. Andrs' inability to make a living in this town is what
forced him to leave. Ang mal ng any nang pulbe ay siy ng ikinawa`
sa kanya ni Hwn. The bad condition of the beggar was what made Juan
pity him. Ang pagsasaky nang kutsro nang manga to ng may sakt
na nakhhwa ay sya ng ikinabw nang kanya ng pahintlot. The
driver's taking people with contagious diseases into his carriage
was what caused his license to be withdrawn. Ang ikinahrang nang
mang nagllakd ay ang pagkalam nang manga tulisn na sil y may
dal ng kwalt. What caused the wayfarers to be held up was the
robbers' happening to know that they had money with them. Ikinahte
ni Hwn sa bnga ang kanya ng lasta. Juan's knife enabled him to
cut the betel fruit. Ang pagkasla nya sa singsng ay ang hind niya
ikinakha nang ganti ng pla`. His missing the ring is what kept him
from winning the prize. Yn ay ki ng ikinallungkt. I am sorry,
I am sorry to hear that. Ang pangungubl nang manga sundlo ay sya
nil ng hind ikinamaty. The soldiers' keeping in hiding is what
saved their lives. Ikinaptol nang yantk na pamlo` ang pagkplu
kay Hwn. The caning Juan got broke the rattan that was used on
him. Ikinapptol nang marmi ng tub ang malaks na hngin. The
strong wind is making much sugar-cane break. Ikapptol nang manga
sang nang khoy ang malaks na hngi ng it. This strong wind will
cause many branches of trees to break off. Ikapptol nya sa manga
kawyan ang pagglang nit. The aging of the bamboo plants will force
him to cut them down. Ang pagkalnod nang Kastla` ay ikinatkot nang
tatl ng magkakaybgan. The drowning of the Spaniard frightened the
three friends. Ang kany ng pagmamasd sa manga tla` sa gab ay sya
ny ng malak ng ikinattuw`. His observation of the stars at night
is his great source of pleasure.

Similarly, from: bing, bhay, bti, glit, hngo`, hlog, kya,
lpat, lgi, tlong, wal`.

414. i-pag-ka- i-p-in-ag-ka. With pag- this instrumental passive
corresponds to the active with magka- ( 405). The reduplication of
the durative forms affects the ka-.

Ang ipinagkagusto ny ng kumin nang sorbtes ay ang kaintan. It
is the heat which makes him want to eat ices. Ipagkkamaty nang
manga mank ang masam ng tbig. The bad water will make the chickens
die. Ang kalamign sa taguln ay sya ng ipinagkkamu nang tbig sa
log. The cold weather in winter is what makes the water in the river
congeal. Bak ipagkawal nang manga mank sa kulungn ang pagpapapsok
mo don niy ng so. See that your putting that dog into the enclosure
doesn't make the chickens try to get away. Ipagkkawal nang bhag
ang pagkbalta` sa kany nang parsa ng kkamtan ny. The captive's
being told of the punishment he will get, will make him try to
escape. Ipinagkawal nya sa klngan ang pagpapahrap sa kany. Their
torturing him made him escape from his confinement. Ipinagkkawal
nya sa blanggan ang masam ng pagpapakin sa kanya dto. The bad
food they gave him in the jail made him try to escape.

415. Similarly, with accent shift this passive corresponds to the
active with mag-ka- (1),  406,b. Ipinagkkabal` (or: ipinagkkaputl)
nang manga sang nang khoy ang bagy ng it. This hurricane is
breaking off many branches of trees. Nang ipagkaputl nang ki ng
manga tub ang hngin ay nalungkt ak. When the wind broke down my
sugar-cane I was dismayed. Ipinagkaputl nang manga tub ang malaks
na hngi ng nagdan. The recent strong wind broke down much sugar-cane.

Similarly: ipinagkasakt (skit).

416. Special static forms with i-ka- are made from the numerals,
with occasional contraction, forming ordinals and fractions: ikanim
iknim the sixth; ikapat ikpat the fourth, a fourth, a quarter;
ikalaw the second; ikalim the fifth; ikapit the seventh; ikatl
the third. Cf.  347,a.

(a) The ordinal corresponding to is one is however the independent
root na first; half is kalahte`,  519.

(b) From phrases, of course, the higher numbers: ikaisa-ng-dan
hundredth; ikaisa-ng-laks` millionth; ikaisa-ng-lbo thousandth;
ikasa-m-p` tenth; ikalabi-ng-is eleventh; ikadalawa-ng-p` twentieth;
ikadalawa-ng-p-t-is twenty-first.

417. i-k- i-k-in--. The instrumental passive from the root with
accented k- differs from that with unaccented ka- ( 413) in that
the action or occurrence caused is not only involuntary but accidental
and entirely out of the control of the actor (see  458 ff.).

Ang ikinggusto k sa kayibgan ko ng si Hwn ay ang kanya ng mabat
na ugli`. What makes me have a liking for my friend Juan is his
lovable character. Ang ginaw nya ng paggugupt sa manga retso ng
itintgo nang kanya ng nnay ay sya ny ng ikinplo`. His cutting up
the patches his mother was saving is what made it necessary to thrash
him. Ang ikinsakay ny sa kabyo ng bara-bar ay ang kawaln nya
nang iba ng kabyo. What made him get on the wild horse was his lack
of other horses. Ikintahol nang so ang pagkdap ni Hwan. Juan's
falling down made the dog bark.

So also from: iyk, ptag.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Ang pagktahol nang so ay sya ng
ikingising nang nattlug na bta`. The barking of the dog was what
made the sleeping child wake up. Ikttawa ny ang iyo ng ssabhin. He
won't be able to keep from laughing when you say that. Ikinttaw ni
Hwn ang sinbi ni Pdro. What Pedro said makes Juan laugh in spite
of himself.

418. Corresponding to primary actives with mag- contrasted with -um-,
and with mang-, we should expect pag- and pang- to be retained before
the root in these formations; the only example is: ikinpagtir,
corresponding to magtir, in contrast with tumir ( 348. 351).

419. ka- (1) -an, k-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with ka- is
used when the action is an involuntary one, especially an emotion,
of a rational actor, or when the actor is inanimate or irrational.

Ang hulihn nang manga kinagaltan ni Patpat ay idinos nang manga
gwrdiya-sibl kagab. The arrest of the people who have incurred
Patupat's anger was carried out by the gendarmes last night. Kahiyan
m ang to ng matand`. Reverence the aged. ang kinahulgan nang bta`
the place from which the child fell. Ang bintna ng iyn ang sy ng
kahhulgan nang bta`, pag hind mo isinar. The child will fall
out of that window, if you don't shut it. Bak ninyo kalunran ang
log, manga bta`. See that you don't get drowned in that river,
children. Ang kanya ng kallunran ay ang log na it. He will
get drowned in this river some day. ang bhay na kinamatayn the
house where someone died, ang bhay nang kinamatayn the house in
which someone died, the house of the bereaved family. Kinapatirn
nang lbid ang lugr na malpit sa dlo-ng-band-ng-kaliw`. The
rope broke at a point near the left-hand end. Ang kappatirn nang
sinlid ay malpit sa buhl. The place where the thread will break
is near the knot there. Kinataktan nya ang bhay na pinagpatayn sa
kra`. He was afraid of the house where the priest was killed. Ang
kinattaktan nang manga bta` ay ang nno`. The children are afraid
of the ghost. Kataktan niny ang nno`. You had better be afraid
of ghosts. Kinatamarn ni Hwn ang kany ng pagaral. Juan became
neglectful about his studying. Nang katamarn ni Hwn ang kanya
ng pagaral ay malpit na sy ng makatpos nang karra. When Juan
became lazy about his studies, he was already near the end of his
course. Kattamaran ny ang kany ng pagaral, pag binigyn mo sy
nang marmi ng salap`. He will be lazy about his studies, if you
give him too much money.

Similarly from: buwsit, wan, kta, wal`.

(a) With shifted root: Isa ng pulbe ang kinaawan ni Hwn. It was
a beggar who aroused Juan's pity.

420. pag-ka- (1) -an, p-in-ag-ka- (1) -an; pag-ka- (2) -an, p-in-ag-ka-
(2) -an. Local passives with pag- before the ka- involve a plurality
of actors. The durative reduplication affects the ka-; barytone roots
have an extra accent-shift.

Ang kinin nang us ay malak ng pinagkkagustuhn nang
manga Ilko. The Iloco are very fond of the contents of deers'
stomachs. Pinagkkalipumpunn nang manga langgm ang pto. The ants
are swarming all over the cake. Ang pinagkamatayn nang manga kambng
ay ang lugr na it. This is the place where the goats perished. Hwag
m ng dalhn sa bundk ang manga mank, sapagkt iy y kanil ng
pagkkamatayn. Don't take the chickens into the hills, for they
would die there.

Barytone roots: Pinagkatakutn nil ang bhay na pinagpatayn
sa kra`. They were afraid of the house where the priest was
killed. Pinagkkatakutn nil ang manga mababagsk na hyop. They
are afraid of wild animals. Hwag m ng ipamalta` ang nkta ntin
dto, sapagkt bak ang lugr na it y pagkatakutn. Don't tell what
we have seen here, for this place would be feared. Pagkkatakutn
nil ang lugr na it, pag nlman nil ang nangyri ng paghaharangn
dto. They will be afraid of this place when they know of the hold-ups
that occurred here. ang pinagkatalunn that which was the occasion
of winning by many (tlo).

421. ka- S -an. Special static words, corresponding to those with S
-an ( 377) are formed with prefix ka- from oxytone roots; in meaning
they are collectives and abstracts of quality: ang kasyhan gladness;
Ang katmran ni Patrsiyo ay katutbo` sa kanya ng lhi`. Patricio's
laziness is inborn in his family. So from the roots: bat, banl,
damdm, dangl, duwg, lagy, lungkt, luwng, mahl, mal`, maty,
pints, sangkp, tungkl, tuw`, tuwd.

Divergent in meaning is ang Kapampngan a Pampanga, if from pangpng.

The secondary accent is lacking, irregularly, in kalayan (lay`); with
contraction in kayilngan, kaylngan (beside kailngan, from ilng).

(a) This latter word underlies an active with mang-, an abstract with
pang- r, and a simple direct passive: nangngayilngan requires; ang
pangangayilngan need, necessity; Kkayilangni ng magdan si Pdro
rto bgu sya umals. Pedro will have to come here before he leaves.

(b) From a derived word, with the secondary accent irregularly
placed: Boo ng byan ay nagdwang sa kapangnkan ni Risl. The whole
country celebrated Rizal's birthday; also: ang raw nang kapangnkan
birthday,--from pangank ( 347).

422. ka- (2) -an. Barytone roots have, in the same sense, an accent
shift of two syllables, corresponding to  379. Bo ng kabahayn ang
nkta nmin sa gitn nang dan. We saw a whole set of household goods
in the middle of the road; also: ang kabahayn a house containing
several dwellings. Marmi sa manga to ang nakkkilla nang kanila
ng karapatn, dtapuwat nakallmot nang kanila ng katungklan. Many
are the people who know their rights but forget their duties. Ang
karamtan nang pre` ay nagng kasabihn. The stinginess of the priest
is proverbial. Ang katakutn sa Dys ay isa ng kabtan. Fear of
the Lord is a virtue. Ang pagbibigy nang sigarlyo ay isa sa manga
matatand ng kaugalin sa Filipnas. Giving cigarettes is one of the
old customs in the Philippines. ang kawikan a proverb.

So from abla, raw, blo, gmit, hlog, big, lngit, paypa`, sra`,
tpos, tos.

With contraction: kahariyn, kaharyn (hri`), and, if from to,
katawn body.

(a) From the latter word there is an abstract of action, with pang-
r: ang pangangatawn physique (cf. pananamt, etc.,  357).

423. ka- (1) -an. Corresponding to the formation (1) -an ( 378), the
collective-abstracts of this type with ka- have formal irregularities
and, where there is any contrast (e. g. mahl), less explicit and
more specialized meaning than the preceding two groups.

ang kaaltan saltiness (of water). Sa gab ng it ang kabilgan nang
buwn. The fullness of the moon is tonight. Ang kadalamhatan ay
isa ng damdmi ng hind nrrpat sa to. Grief is an emotion not
becoming to a man or woman. ang karunngan wisdom. ang kahangaln
foolishness (ang hangl a fool). ang kaibhn the difference. ang
kalinsan cleanness, cleanliness. ang kamatsingn monkey-tricks,
naughtiness. ang kamurhan cheapness. Saw` ang kanya ng kapalran. His
luck is bad. Sa kapanayn nang uln kung taguln ay hind masigl ang
byan. The town is not cheerful during the unabated rains of the rainy
season. Ang manga to y marmi ng kasalnan. People have many sins. ang
kasaman badness. kasawin poor position, awkwardness. kasinungalngan
falsehood, a lie. kasipgan diligence. Ang desgrsya ng nangyri
kay Hwn ay isa ng hamps nang katalagahn. The misfortune which
has come to Juan is a blow of fate. Ang kanila ng paglag ay hind
katapngan. Their fleeing was not a brave act. ang bo ng katahan
all mankind. ang katipnan a meeting, Katipnan a secret society
organized against the Spaniards; a member of this. kayabngan pride.

So from: bba`, bbaw, bigt, buhngin, bhay, bti, dals, dmi,
dmot, dniw (if karaniywan is so to be analyzed), dilm, ginhwa,
gbat, hba`, hna`, hrap, ikl`, nit, laks, lak, lamg, lpad,
lon, lit, lko, lnod, lupt, mahl, mangmng, prang, fiysta,
pul`, sakm, salt, salbhi, salkoy, tas, Taglog, tahmik, tkaw,
tkot, talno, tampalsan, tanghli`, tlin, tnay, toto, ull,
wal`, yman.

(a) From a phrase: Iy y kawala-ng-hyan ni Pdro. That was a shameless
action of Pedro's (wal ng hiy`).

(b) From derived words: ang Kakapampangnan the Pampanga country
(Kapampngan,  421).

ang bo ng kamagankan nina Krs, Bantg, at iba p the whole
relationship of the Cruz's, Bantogs, and so on; ang bo ng kamagankan
ni Pdro Vyla the whole family of Pedro Viola (magnak,  358,a).

ang kapangyarhan power (-pangyri, as though by  347).

424. ka- r (1) -an, ka- r (2) -an. With reduplication of the root and
accent shift of one syllable for an oxytone root, of two in barytone
roots, ka- and -an form special static words denoting something
surprising or provocative of such and such an emotion.

It y kagagawn ni Hwn! This is some of Juan's work! cf. It y gaw
ni Hwn. Juan did this, made this. Ang pagkupo ni Pdro sa sglan ay
kagagawn nang isa ny ng kaybgan. Pedro's sitting at the gaming-table
was the work of one of his fine friends. Ang ptya ng nangyri kagab
ay kagagawn ni Pdro. The killing which occurred last night was some
of Pedro's doing. So: katuturn a correct outcome (tuwd).

Barytone roots: Ang katatakutn nang bta` ay ang nno`. The thing
that arouses the child's fear is a ghost. Ang kanya ng katatawann
ay ang ungg`. His source of laughter is the monkey. ang salit ng
katatawann a jest-word, a funny expression.

425. With secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying
word, ka- and -an form also words denoting one of two reciprocal
actors. This is the form for oxytone roots, ang kabgyan a person
with whom one exchanges gifts. Si Hwna ay siya ng kablngan ni
Mary. Juana is the one Maria whispers with. ang kahampsan one of
two who perform mutual flagellation, kahrman one of two who borrow
from each other. kanman person one drinks with. kaklabtan one of
two who touch each other. Ang kaptyan ni Hwn ay si Pdro. Juan is
engaged in a mortal conflict with Pedro. Ang kaptran ni Hwna nang
sinlid ay ang kanya ng kaybga ng si Mary. Juana cuts thread with
her friend Maria. ang kaslitan the person with whom one converses. Si
Hwn ay kallan ni Pdro. Juan and Pedro fool each other. ang kapan
one of two who sit together.

426. Barytone roots add accent shift of one syllable. Ang kahlgan nya
nang sha` ay ang kany ng kapatd. The one with whom he takes turns at
dropping down grape-fruit from the tree is his brother. ang kahnhan
one of two birds that chirp at each other. ang kabgan one of two
who love each other. ang kaknan one of two who eat together. Si
Hwna ay siya ng kaptlan ni Mary nang kuk. Juana and Maria cut
each other's fingernails. ang kasltan one's correspondent. ang
katlnan one's opponent in a dispute.

(a) The shift is due to the root in: Si Mary ay sy ng kabtan ni
Hwna nang manga mabang ng bulaklk. Maria and Juana hand each other
fragrant flowers (as in some ceremony or game).

(b) With contraction and lack of secondary accent: ang kayibgan,
kaybgan a friend (contrast kabgan above).

(c) In a few instances barytone roots have accent shift of two
syllables without secondary accent. Si Maryno ay kahatakn ni Kuls
nang lbid. Mariano is pulling at the rope against Nicols. ang
kamurahn one of two who curse at each other (with meaning ordinarily
peculiar to the shifted root,  337). Sumlong at Kasamahn Sumulong
and Company. kasulatn one's correspondent (equal to kasltan,
above). Ang katurun ni Pdro ay ang bta ng si Hwn. Pedro and little
Juan are pointing at each other.

427. These formations serve as underlying words of a few derivatives:

(a) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r ( 352): ang
pagkakayibgan the joining in friendship of two people.

(b) Secondary active with maki- from the preceding: makipagkayibgan
win one's way into someone's friendship, become friends with someone.

(c) Dual collective with mag- ( 358,a): Si Pdro at si Hwn ay
magkahrman nang samballo at sandlyas. Pedro and Juan lend each
other hats and sandals. magkabgan a pair of lovers. magkaybgan a
pair of friends.

(d) Where the dual value of the underlying form is weak, explicit
plurals of the preceding with mag- r ( 358,b) occur: ang magkakaybgan
a group of three or more friends. ang magkakasamah ng si Pdro, si
Hwn, at si Andrs the party consisting of Pedro, Juan, and Andrs. ang
magkakasamah ng sina Pdro the party of Pedro and his followers. Ang
magkakasamah ng nagsipagpasyl ay sina Mary, Hwna, Pdro,
at Kuls. The party that went for a walk consisted of Maria, Juana,
Pedro, and Nicols. Ang magkakasamah ng napasa hlo` at napaluwsan
ay sin Mariyno, Ppe, at Kuls at sina Pdro, Hlyo, at Andrs. The
groups that went upstream and downstream were, respectively, Mariano,
Pepe, and Nicols and Pedro, Julio, and Andrs. Ang tatlo ng mank na
yt y magkakasamah ng inihatid dto, ang ib y magkakabukd. These
three chickens were brought here together, the others each by itself.

428. k- (1) -an, k-in-- (1) -an. Local passives with k- denote the
place where someone or something happens to be. Hwag k ng kumib`
sa iy ng kindroonn. Don't stir from the spot (where you happen
to be). Sa al ng band ang kindroonn nang bya-ng-Kamlig?--Sa
band ng kaliw`. In which direction is the town of Camalig?--Toward
the left. Ang bya-ng-Balwag ay ang kinmahal ng na ng na nang
play. The town of Baliuag was the first place where rice got dear. Ang
kppatayn sa to ng iyn ay ang bigthan. This man will end on the
gallows. Ang bya-ng-Balwag ang iyu ng kttunghan pag tinuntn mo
ang lands na iyn. You will get to the town of Baliuag if you follow
that path.

Similarly from: bngit, brol, kulng, lagy, tgo`, tay`, tir, up`.

Divergent in meaning are kinbuksan ( 260) and, from a phrase,
kinhti-ng-gabihn ( 260, hti ng gab).

429. pag-k- (1) -an, p-in-ag-k- (1) -an. Local passives of this
type with pag- reduplicate the k-; they refer to other local passive
relations than place in which; so: pagkkilanln be the occasion of
showing something; pagksyahn be the container of something that
fits in; pagksunduwn, pagksundun be agreed upon.

430. Special static words with k- and -an are few and differ in
meaning.

(a) Ang kgaltan nila Andrs, Hwn, at Mariyno ay napw na. The
quarrel between Andrs, Juan, and Mariano has been appeased; this
is no doubt merely a plural with S -an ( 377,a) from the underlying
word kagalt ( 398,c).

It forms the underlying word of a simple active with mag- and abstract
with pag- r: ang pagkakgaltan a quarrel (of two or more people).

(b) Si Pdro ay kibgan ni Mary. Pedro is liked by Maria. Sina
Pdro, Kuls, at Hwn ay sya ng manga kibgan ni Mariyno. Pedro,
Nicols, and Juan are the ones whom Mariano likes. This is probably
a real special static word corresponding to the transient with k-
(1) -an ( 428).

Derived active with mag-: Nagkkibgan si Pdro at si Hwna. Pedro
and Juana are in love with each other, have come to like each other.

(c) Ang ktwan ay nhint` sa pagdatng nang isa ng magnankaw. The
rejoicing was stopped by the coming of a robber. This is, in form
at least, a plural with S -an from an underlying -katuw`, which is
not known.

Derived active with mag-: magktwan rejoice together, be merry
together.

The same form is seen in klingkngan; little finger, fifth finger;
if this is from a root -lingkng.

431. ka- (1) D -an. With doubling of the root and radical accent shift:
Kun-unha ng dumatng si Hwn. Juan got there the very first. So:
khul-hulhan the very last.



(3) Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

432. The prefix ka- in its involuntary meaning and the prefix k- in
its accidental meaning appear in an additional set of transients and
abstracts with maka-, mak- prefixed for the active, ma-, m- for the
passives, and pagka-, pagk- for the abstract. The meanings of these
forms are most varied; especially in the direct passive, where the
involuntary or accidental character of the actor sometimes reaches
the point where an actor is entirely left out of view or lacking,
and the passive borders closely on active meaning. For this reason
it will be convenient to divide the uses into a number of somewhat
arbitrarily defined groups. The forms are as follows:

433. The active forms with ka- are: maka-, maka- R, naka-, naka- R;
abstract pagka-.

The active expresses an inanimate object or circumstance causing an
emotion or feeling; the meaning, then, is the same as in the forms
with i-ka- ( 413), except that here the thing causing the emotion is
viewed as an actor. Nakabblag ang law. The light is blinding. Ang
gamt na it ang nakaginhwa sa my sakt. This medicine is what
relieved the patient. It y makappw nang gtom (haw, ginw,
nit, pgod). This will relieve the hunger (thirst, cold feeling,
hot feeling, fatigue). Ang wit nang manga bon ay nakattuw`. The
song of the birds is gladdening. Similarly from: bigt, bing, bti,
lasng, ligya, sra`, tkot.

434. The active expresses, further, an inanimate object which has got
(in the past) into such and such a condition or position.

Ang bangk` ay nakayon sa gos. The canoe is righted with the
stream. Ang pagkin ay nakahand n. Dinner is served. Nakasbit sa
pko` ang ki ng amerikna. My coat is hanging on the nail. Nakasigng
ang palayk nang sining. The rice-pot is on the fire. Hind
ko bbilhn ang kabyo ng iyn, khit na makassiya ang ki ng
kwalt. I would not buy this horse, even if my money should be
sufficient. Similarly: dan, lawt, tli`, tlong.

435. Very similar is the use of the active to describe an animate
actor in such and such a position (into which he has got): Nakadap`
ang manga to sa kanila ng bhay hbang lumlindl. The people lay
prone in their houses during the earthquake. Si Pdro ay nakahwak
sa taburte nang sya y retrathan. Pedro had hold of a chair when
he was photographed. Nakasaky ang bta ng si Hwn sa so nang
sya y mkta ko sa bakran. Little Juan was mounted (i. e. riding)
on the dog when I saw him in the yard. Nakatay si Pdro nang kin
sya ng mkta. Pedro was standing up when I saw him. Nakaup sya sa
bangk`. He was seated on the bench. So from: abng, hilra, kid,
kpit, luhd, pangw, talungk`, tindg.

436. The active may denote an animate actor who is able, succeeds
in doing so and so; the involuntary element inheres in the matter of
ability, which is not dependent on the actor's will: Sa gana ng kin
sya y makaals. So far as I am concerned, he may go. Sa tigs nang
kanya ng lob ay wal ng makable`. There is no one (or, under the type
in  433, nothing) can break the firmness of his will. Nakaggaw` ang
all nang pyong. The servant is able to make umbrellas. Nakagupt
sya nang makapl na damt. He succeeded in cutting thick cloth. Si
Pdro ay hind makahwak nang palakl, sapagkt masakt ang kanya ng
kamy. Pedro cannot hold an ax, because his hand is sore. Nari ng
sya y makahig`. He may lie down. Hind ako makahing nang kwalt kay
Hwn. I cannot (bring myself to) ask Juan for money. Nakahlog sya nang
isa ng nyg sa kanya ng pagpukl sa kumpl. He succeeded in bringing
down a cocoanut, in his throwing at the cluster. Ang bta` ay hind
makakin, sapagkt kumin sya nang marmi ng kakann. The child can't
eat because he has eaten so many sweets. Si Pdro ay hind nakapptol
nang khoy, sapagkt bgu ng gling sya sa sakt. Pedro cannot cut any
wood, for he has just recovered from sickness. Sa tanty raw ny ay
makapptol na sya nang khoy, sapagkt sya y malakas n. He reckons
he will be able to cut wood, for he is strong again. Nakassakay
sy sa kabyo. He is able to mount the horse. Ang bta y nakasslat
n. The child is already able to write. Hind ako makaslat. I can't
write. Ang my sakit ay nakattay n. The patient is already able
to stand up. Hind ako nakatpon nang manga dhon, sapagkt wal ako
ng kalayky. I was not able to pile up the leaves, because I had no
rake. Ang hle ng isd ni Hwn ay nakawal`. The fish Juan caught got
away. Similarly from: akiyt, balk, byad, dal, datng, klos, kha,
lkad, psok, sagt, sigw, suwy, tahl, takb, tir, bos, sap.

Abstracts: Ang mkina ay sy ng dahiln nang pagkagaw ni Pdro
nang pyong. The machine is the cause of Pedro's ability to make
umbrellas. Ang pagkasaky ny sa kabyo ng bara-bar ay hind dahiln
sa kanya ng tpang, dtapuwat dahiln sa marmi ng iba ng to ng
nagsipgil sa kabyo. His ability to get on the wild horse was not
due to his courage, but to the many other people who controlled the
horse. Ang kanya ng pagkatpon sa manga kalabw ay nanyri dhil sa
marmi ng tlong. His success in rounding up the carabao was due to
much aid.

437. Closely bordering on the preceding type is the active,
mostly with the particle n, expressing the actor of a completed
action. Nakaals na siy. He has already (succeeded in going,
i. e.) gone away. Nakaptul n si Pdro nang khoy. Pedro has now
finished cutting wood. Si Pdro ay nakaptul n nang khoy, bgo ko
ng inutsa ng mangigb. Pedro had already cut the wood, before I asked
him to fetch water. Similarly from: btas, datng, kha, lmot, tpos.

The abstract lends itself especially to the use as absolute attribute
( 274): Pagkagaw nya nang bkod ay naglasng siy. When he had
finished making the fence, he got drunk. Pagkahrang nang manga
tulisn sa koryo ay nagsitngo sil sa bundk. When the bandits
had robbed the mail, they took to the hills. Pagkahte ni Hwn nang
manga mansnas ay umals sya. When Juan had distributed the apples,
he went away. Pagkahli nang puls sa magnankaw ay dinala ny it sa
blanggan. When the policeman had caught the thief, he took him to the
jail. Pagkapaty nya sa to ng kany ng hinrang ay tumakbo sy. When
he had killed the man he had held up, he ran away. Pagkaptol ni Hwn
nang tahd nang ktyaw ay nagdudug` ang pa nit. When Juan had cut
the spur of the rooster, its foot kept bleeding. Pagkasaky sa kabyo
ay naparon ak sa hlamann at pumits ako nang isa ng pakwn pang
ki ng knin. When I had had my horseback ride, I went to the garden
and picked a melon to eat. Pagkasaky ni Hwn sa trn ay lumkad ito
ng agd. When Juan had got on the train, it soon started to move. Ang
pagkasnog nang byan ay ikinalungkt nang marmi. The people grieved
at their town having burned down. Pagkatanw nang ungg` sa pagng
ay nagbalik sy sa pno-ng-sging. When the monkey had looked at the
turtle, he went back to the banana tree. Pagkatwag nang pagng sa
ungg` ay sumund it agd. When the turtle had called the monkey,
the latter came at once. Pagkatay nya sa kanya ng pan ay minuln
nya agd ang pagtatalumpte`. When he had stood up from his seat he
at once began making his speech. Pagkatpon mo nang manga baybas ay
umuw ka. When you have piled up the guavas, go home. Pagkana nya
sa takbhan ay naghint sya. When he had got ahead in the running,
he stopped. Similarly from: als, bendisiyn, gupt, hpon, sip,
kin, kha, lagk, lto`, msa, sbi, snay, tpos, tpon, tupd.

438. The forms of the direct passive are: ma-, ma- R; na-; na- R.

The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active in  436,
and denote the object directly affected by an action which an actor
is able to perform.

Hind nya mabsag ang bte. He did not succeed in breaking the
bottle. Sa kalakasn ni Pblo ay nadala ny ang kab ng bkal. Pablo,
with his strength, managed to lift the iron chest. Nadal nang bta`
ang khoy. The boy managed to carry the wood. Hind madal ni Pdro ang
kahn sa kabigatn. Pedro cannot lift the box; it is too heavy. Hind
ku magmit ang pyong na it. I can't use this umbrella. Hind nakin
nang bta` ang matigs na tinpay na iyn. The child was not able
to eat that hard bread of yours. Nakya ko ng buhtin ang is ng
malit na pno-ng-khoy. I managed to lift one small tree. Nakkya
ko ang pagaral nang Inggls. I manage to get along with the study of
English. Nakyas ni Pdro ang bo. Pedro managed to smooth the cocoanut
shell. Nalkad nmin ang laht nang dan. We managed to walk the whole
way. Nallpon nang manga langgm ang kanila ng pagkin. The ants
succeed in amassing their food. Hind ko mapaty ang bta ng it. I
cannot (get myself to) kill this child. Hind ko maptol nang kamy ang
bkal na it. I can't break this iron with my hand. Mapptol daw ny
ng wala ng tlong ang laht nang kawya ng maglang. He says he will
be able to cut all the old bamboo without any help. Hind nya masra`
ang kandro nang pint`, khit na iniybus nya ang kanya ng laks. He
did not succeed in breaking the lock of the door, although he used up
all his strength. Nattalasts mo b ang sinsbi ko sa iy? Do you
understand what I am saying to you? Similarly: gaw, akiyt, alala,
ampt, gaw`, hngo`, hla.

439. Similarly, the direct passive may correspond regularly to the
active of the type in  437 and denote an object directly affected
by an action which has been (successfully) completed by an actor.

Naso ko n sa boo ng byan ang bta`. I have hunted and called the
child all over town. Nablot ko n ang manga libr. I have already
wrapped up the books. Nabsa ku n ang diyriyo. I have finished
reading the paper. Nahamps ko n ang bta`. I have already whipped
the child. Nahnap na ny ang libr. He has already looked for the
book. Napaty ku n ang mank. I have already killed the chicken. Kapag
napptol na ny ang pno-ng-khoy ay sak mo hatkin ang lbid na
nakatli sa sang nit. When he is getting the tree cut, then do you
pull at the rope that is tied to the branch. Natipd nya ang pagkin
nang knin. He has been saving of the rice. Natpon ko n ang manga
dhon. I have already heaped up the leaves. Natsod ku n ang baky`. I
have kicked off the sandal. Nanat ku n ang baluktt na kwad na
ibinigy mu sa kin. I have straightened the bent wire you gave
me. Nauss ku n si Hwn. I have already questioned Juan. Similarly
from: gaw, gaw`, pon, wan, lbot, skop, siysat.

440. We come now to direct passives which do not correspond regularly
to any active; these have their own abstracts with pagka-.

The commonest type expresses an object which undergoes or has
undergone a process due to an inanimate actor or to no actor
in particular; it differs from the simple direct passive in the
involuntary and often perfectic nature of the action. Nable` ang
sang nang khoy. The branch of the tree is broken. Ang tlis nang
lpis ay nable`. The point of the pencil is broken. Hwag m ng
ilagay dyn ang palatn, sapagkt bak mabsag. Don't put the plate
there, for it might get broken. Ang kanila ng knan ay nagambla
sa pagdatng nang manga puls. Their dinner-party broke up when the
police arrived. Ang boo ng byan ay nagul. The whole town became
riotous. Nahte` ang mansnas. The apple is in halves. Nalagt ang
lbid. The rope broke. Ang kanya ng dalri` ay napso`. His finger
is blistered. Napatd ang lbid. The rope broke. Ang bat ng hasan
ay napirso. The whetstone went to pieces. Napitas n ang manga
bulaklk. The flowers have been picked. Napptol ang manga sang
nang khoy sa laks nang hngin. The branches of the trees are being
broken off by the force of the wind. Naptol n ang khoy. The tree
has been cut down. Naptol ang dlo nang khoy. The end of the log is
cut off. Naptol ang sang nang khoy. The branch of the tree broke
off. Nasyang ang trabho ni Hwn. Juan's work went for naught. Ang
bkid ay nasra`. The field is waste. Similarly, from: ri`, bgo,
buwl, dlat, gmon, hing, laglg, lamg, lon, pwi`, pun`, purl,
snog, tpos, bos, uts, wal`, yri`.

The abstract is regular: dan, hing, lagt, psok, snog, wal`.

441. The passive is used, further, to denote the animate performer
of an involuntary act, which, then, is looked upon rather as an
undergoing than as a performing.

This is the clearest where the subject is undergoing an emotion or
sensation: Naw si Hwn sa pulbe. Juan pitied the beggar. Ang bta
ng si Hwn ay naddung. Little Juan is bashful. Naginw sya sa kanya
ng pagpalgo`. He got cold while taking his bath. Ak y naggtom. I am
hungry; isa ng to ng naggtom a hungry person. Nahhpis siy. He is
sad. Nahhiy ka b? Are you ashamed? Nahhiy sya. He is ashamed. Ak
y nailng. I was nonplussed, I didn't know what to do. Ak y nainip n
nang paghihinty kay Hwn. I am impatient with waiting for Juan. Sya y
nalmang sa kanya ng pagblang. He got confused in his reckoning. Sya
nallungkt. He is sorry. Ak y nahaw. I am thirsty. So: bagbag,
glit, libng, tkot, tuw`.

This form is used also of processes of life, especially physiological
and morbid: Nalump sy. He got lame. Nappe sya. He got dumb. So:
nari` got the ability, nabo got widowed, nabhay lived, nangay was
noisy, naking heard, nalnod got drowned, namaty died, natlog slept.

It is used, finally, in nahlog fell (from a place to the ground),
and, strangely enough, for two voluntary actions which consist of a
relaxing of the muscles: Sya y nahig` He lay down. Sya y nahhig`. He
was in the act of lying down. Naup sya sa bangk`. He sat down on
the bench. Naup sya sa taburte. He was in the act of sitting down
on the stool.

Further, irregularly, in: Sya y nalgo`. He took a bath. Sya y
nanog. He came down from the house. See  488,c.

Abstracts: Ang pagkaw ni Hwn sa pulbe Juan's pity for the
beggar. ang pagkabta` one's childhood. ang pagkabhay ni Hess
the resurrection of Jesus. Ang pagkaglat ni Hwna ay sya ny ng
ipinagkasakt. Juana's scare was what made her sick. Pagkalnod
nang Kastla` ay lumyas ang manga estudynte. When the Spaniard
had got drowned, the students hurried away. ang kanya ng pagkamaty
his death. ang kanya ng pagkasla sa singsng. his missing the
ring. Pagkaup nya sa bangk` ay minuln nya ang pagkukwnto sa manga
bta`. When she had sat down on the bench, she began her story-telling
to the children. So: ri`, hpis, hlog, lit, lko, ppi, tkot,
tlo, ull.

442. An explicit plural of both active and direct passive is formed
by the infixation of -ang- into the prefix.

In the active the syllable after this infix often receives a secondary
accent: Nangkaup na sil sa pagkin, nang kam ay dumatng. They
had already sat down to their meal when we arrived. So also from:
bitw, biybit.

With reduplication of the ka- instead of root initial: Nangkkaup
sil sa pagkin. They are able to sit up for their meals.

Direct passive: Ang dinala ny ng manga mank ay nangamaty. The
chickens he brought all died. Nangaptol ang tub sa laks
nang bagy. The sugar-cane broke under the strength of the
typhoon. Nangapptol ang karamhan nang tub nang kasalukyan ang
bagy. During the typhoon most of the sugar-cane got broken. So from:
bulk, wan, lnod, lungkt, tkot, tuw`.

443. From a compound word, passive: nasawi-ng-plad (saw ng plad).

From a derived word, active: makataann (taann,  378).

444. Accent shift is due to the root. Si Pdro ay nakaayw n. Pedro
has left the table. So from bot, skit.

Passive: Naabut ny ang ilawn. He managed to reach the lamp. Hind
nya maabt ang itlg. He can't reach the egg. Ang bta ng si Hwn ay
nabbahy. Little Juan is shy.

Abstract: Pagkaabt nang bt nang kany ng laruwn ay tumakb sya
ng agd. After reaching for his toys, the boy at once ran.

445. With pag- before the root, this active is made from roots whose
primary active has mag-. The reduplication affects either the ka-,
or the pag-, or the root initial: mak-ka-pag- or maka-p-pag- or
maka-pag- R.

Ang bta` ay nakapagdal nang khoy. The boy managed to bring the
wood. Ang bta` ay nakapagddal (or: nakkapagdal, or: nakappagdal)
nang khoy. The boy is able to bring the wood. Nakkapaglasng
si nong, khit na sya y hind binbayan nang kanya ng aswa na
makapagpabil nang lak. Anong manages to get drunk, even though his
wife does not allow him to have liquor purchased for him. Nakapagptol
na si Hwn nang khoy. Juan has finished cutting wood. Nakapagpptol
n si Hwn nang khoy. Juan is already able to cut wood. Hind
makapagptol nang khoy si Hwn, dahiln sa sgat nya sa kamy. Juan
cannot cut wood, on account of the wound on his hand.

Similarly: antk, ral, bhis, ligts, msa, nkaw, pasiyl, sbi,
salit`, tgo`, tak.

446. Direct passive: ma-pag-; ma-pag- R or ma-p-pag-. Hind ko
mapagyos ang manga damt na it. I can't straighten out these
clothes. Mappagyos nya ang manga lips sa so ng damt na it. She
will be able to fix these out-of-date clothes. Hind ko mapagkro`
kung an ang big nya ng sabhin. I couldn't make out what he wanted
to say. Nang mapagkr ni Hwn kung an ang mangyyri, ay hind nya
itinloy ang kanya ng blak. When Juan saw what was going to happen,
he did not carry out his plan. Hind ko mapagkro ang kahulugn nang
slat na it. I can't get at the meaning of this letter. Napagtalasts
ko ang manga sinsbi mo sa iyo ng slat. I understand all you say
in your letter. Napagttalasts (or: nappagtalasts) k ang big mo
ng sabhin. I understand what you mean.

447. maka-pag- (1), cf.  353. Nang nakapaghanap sy ay umuw sya sa
kanya ng bhay. When he had finished searching, he went home. Kung
makapaghanap sy ay uw sya. When he has finished searching, he will
go home.

448. maka-pang-, corresponding to mang-,  357. Nakkapanghirm
kam nang kwalt kay li ng Kulsa. We can borrow money from
Aunt Nicolasa. Makkapanghirm ka ng wala ng sla kay Hwn nang
isa ng sombrro. You will surely be able to borrow a hat from
Juan. Nakapangngabyo sya ng patay`, sapagkt hind gulatn ang
kanya ng kabyo. He is able to ride standing up, because his horse
is not given to shying.

Abstract: pagkapangko` (ko`).

(a) The root is reduplicated for plurality: Ang pagkapanghahrang
nila Hwn ay hind nila sna magaw`, kung hind sa karamhan nang
to nila na my barl. The highway robberies by Juan and his gang
could not have been perpetrated by them, if it had not been for the
number of them that had guns.

(b) From a derived word: makapanginin (kinin,  365, 357,a).

449. ma- D; expressive of slow activity: Hind sya mamaty-maty. He
is lingering on the death-bed. Ang pgakpkan nang manga to ay hind
matpus-tpus. The applause of the people could find no end.

450. In the instrumental passive, which seems to occur only with pag-
and pang-, the i- follows the ma-: Ang pagktwag nang kra sa manga
puls ay hind nya ikinabte, sapagkt sil y kkaunt lmang pang
maipagtanggl sya sa manga magnankaw. The priest's having called in
the police did him no good, for they were too few to defend him from
the thieves.

With pang-: naipangngank (ank, cf.  357).

451. The local passive has the prefix ma- and the suffix (1) -an.

Namatayn sina Hwn. Someone has died in Juan's family. Namatayn
sa bhay ni Hwn. There has been a death in Juan's house. Naputlan
si Hwn nang dalre` sa pagpapalkad nang mkina. Juan got a finger
cut off in running the machine. Napputlan nang mdiko ang manga to
nang kanila ng kamy o pa kung kayilngan. When necessary, people get
their hands or feet cut off by a doctor. Mapputlan ka nang dalr`,
pag hind ka nagngat sa iyo ng pagtatrabho sa mkina ng iyn. You
will get your finger cut off, if you aren't careful about the way you
work that machine. Nasakyn ko n ang kabyo ng bara-bar. I have
succeeded in mounting the wild horse. Naskyn ko n ang bangka ng
it. I have already been in this canoe. Nawaln nang mlay ang babye
sa kany ng paghihimaty. The woman lost consciousness in her swoon.

Similarly: bli`, buks, halk, hrap, lon, lmot, luwt, patd,
plit, skit, sra`, siy, sbok, sgat, sunggb, tagl, tand`, bos.

(a) bitw lacks accent shift: mabitwan, cf.  374,b.

452. Local passive with explicative pag-: Hind nmin mapaglagaran
nang khoy ang kabyo ng khoy na ginaw mo. We cannot saw wood on the
saw-buck you have made. Napagputlan nmin nang kawyan ang bgo ng
gaw mo ng kabyo ng khoy. We were able to cut bamboo on the sawbuck
you have just made.

453. Special static words resembling the active; the following occur:
Si Bantg ay isa ng to ng makabyan. Bantog is a patriotic man. dam
ng makahy` the sensitive plant, Mimosa pudica.

Of irregular use are makalaw ( 262,8), and makatuwd (tuwd).

(a) From a word of this kind an active with mag- is derived in:
nagmmakawa` provoking pity (as though from makawa`).

(b) The abstract is like a special static word in: Ang bigs ay sya ng
pinakamahalag ng pagkabhay nang to sa Filipnas. Rice is the most
important staple food in the Philippines. Cf. also pagkarka,  265,9.

454. ma- forms special static words denoting that which by nature or
circumstance possesses such and such, usually a quality. Maalikabok
n ang msa. The table is dusty already. Masim ang ska ng it. This
wine is sour. ang pno-ng-khoy na mabba` a low tree; isa ng mabba ng
to a humble person. Ang labng ay mabbaw. The trough of the manger is
shallow. Madlang ang manga lindl dto. Earthquakes are rare here. Sya
y isa ng gino ng maglang. He is a polite gentleman. Maginhwa ang
umup sa slya ng it. This chair is comfortable to sit in. Si Mary
ay isa ng babye ng mapri. Maria is a decent woman. Maluwng ang
bro ng it. This blouse is too loose. matams sweet, ang matams
sugar. Matipd na bta` si Hwn. Juan is a saving child.

The plural is made with ma- r: Ang manga to sa byan ay mahuhsay
sumund sa kautusn. The people of the town are all good law-abiders.

These forms are made from so many roots that the Index will be as
convenient as a list.

Derivatives:  352,c. 353,a.b. 370. 499,a. 500,b.

(a) Note masiydo excessive, extreme, as though from a root -siydo
(and so listed), still felt by Mr. Santiago to be from Spanish
demasiado.

(b) Accent shift due to the root in masakt.

(c) From derived words: Ang pagtay sa bubungn ay mapangnib. It is
dangerous to stand on the roof. So from kasalnan ( 423), kabuluhn
( 422).

455. ma-pag- someone given to doing so and so: Ang in ni Pdro ay
mapagbigy sa kanya ng manga kaululn. Pedro's mother always gives in
to his foolishness. Sya y mapagtipd. He is very economical. So from:
gaw`, kumpisl, simb, siysat, ussa`.

(a) From a phrase, probably: Ang to ng si Hwn ay
mapagpku-m-bab`. That man Juan is overmodest (pko ng bab`
low peg?).

(b) With accent shift: Mapaghun ang manga kabyo ng it, kanya
hind dpat dalhn sa labann. These horses are given to neighing
and therefore should not be taken to war. So also: mapagawy.

456. In the same sense, but transitive in value, ma-pang-: mapangglat
given to surprising or frightening people, mapanghgis given to
flinging things; Ang to ng si Hwn ay mapanghirm. The fellow Juan is
a great borrower. mapanghiy` given to embarrassing people. mapamukl
given to throwing things. So from: hilng, mat.

457. In similar meanings, with suffix -in:

(a) ma- S -in: So magusthin, masnrin.

(b) ma- (2) -in: Ang manga to y hind maibign sa pagkaksla. People
are not fond of sinning.

(c) ma- r (2) -in: matatawann easily made to laugh; Sya y
matutulugn. He is a sleepy-head. So also: magugulatn.

458. The transients with k- refer to accidental actions. The active
has the forms: mak-, mak- R, nak-, nak- R, but the reduplication
sometimes affects the k- instead of the root initial. The abstract
has pagk-. The meanings are various, much like those of maka-.

459. The active sometimes expresses an inanimate object as the agent
of an accidental action: Ang guntng nang manggagamt ay nakgupit
nang isa ng ugt na malak, kany` namaty ang kanya ng gingamt. The
physician's scissors accidentally cut a large artery, in consequence
of which his patient died. Similarly, from gsing, hwa.

460. More frequent is a rational actor of an accidental action; as such
is viewed any action the exact form of which is out of the actor's
control. Si Pdro ay nakhwak nang kwad na my elektrisidd. Pedro
got hold of a charged wire. Hind nya kilal ang manga kwayan ng
iyn, kaniy nakptol sya nang sa iba ng two ng kawyan. As he
did not know those bamboo-groves, he inadvertently cut some bamboo
that belonged to other people. Sundan m sil sa kawayann, sapagkt
bak sila nakpptol nang kawya ng hind nasskop nang ti ng
lpa`. Follow them to the bamboo-grove, for they may be cutting some
bamboo that is not included in our land. Hwn, usisin mo ng mabti
ang hangghan nang kawayann, bgo ka tumag nang kawyan, sapagkt
bak ka makptol nang kawya ng hind tin. Juan, find out exactly
the borders of the bamboo-grove before you cut any bamboo, for else
you might cut some bamboo that is not ours. Pho ng makpptol
sil nang kawya ng hind sakp nang lpa`, kapag hind mo sila
pinakialamn, sapagkt ang hangghan nang lpa ng iyn ay lubh ng
bal-baluktt. They will surely cut some bamboo not included in the
piece of ground, if you don't look after them, for the boundary of
the land is very irregular. Naktsod ak nang isa ng has. I hit a
snake with my foot. Naktlog si Hwn sa bhay na gib-gib`. Juan
hit upon a broken-down house as a place to sleep in, was constrained
by circumstances to sleep in a broken-down house. Nakuss sya nang
nawal ng kwalt. It came to her mind to inquire about the lost
money. Nakuss sya nang isa ng to ng nakalm nang lhim. He
happened to ask a man who knew the secret. Similarly: bil, dan,
inm, kin, slat, tagp`.

Abstract: In the abstract the element of accident often takes the form
of expressing the way something turned out. Limng ang pagkblang
nya sa manga itlg na it. His count of these eggs has turned out
wrong. Ang pagkgaw ni Hwna sa pyong ay masam`. The umbrella Juana
made turned out poorly. Ang pagkgupt sa lo nang bta` ay hind
panty-panty. The boy's hair-cut isn't (hasn't turned out) even. Ang
pagkhti nang mansnas ay hind parho. The halving of the apple is
not exact. Ang pagksip nya sa bugtng ay hindi tma`. His guess
at the riddle is not correct. Ang pagklagok ny sa itlg ay kanya
ng pinagsishan. He repented his having (in a moment of weakness)
swallowed the egg. Ang pagkpsok ni Hwn nang tapn sa bte ay
mallim. Juan got the cork too deep into the bottle. Ang pagkpatay
sa magnankaw ay hind sinady`. The killing of the thief was not
done on purpose. Ang pagkpatay sa mank ay masam`. This chicken has
not been slaughtered in the proper manner. Ang pagkptol nang plong
nang ktiyaw ay hind sagd. The cock's comb is not cut off clean. Ang
pagktahul nang so ay sya ng inilal nang sakt nya sa lalamnan. The
dog's barking made the pain in its throat worse. Ang pagktanaw k sa
pno-ng-khoy ay it y may madidilw na dhon. The way I looked at that
tree made it seem as if it had yellow leaves. Ang kanya ng pagktay`
(or: pagktindg) ay dahiln sa kanya ng pagkglat. He jumped to his
feet because of his surprise. Ang pagktpon nang manga dho ng it
ay hind mabte. These leaves have not been well heaped up. So from:
bendisiyn, bitbt, hamps, hig`, plo`, tgo`, tir, up`.

461. The active may denote a rational actor successful, thanks to outer
circumstances, in such and such an action. Nakhampas ang bta ng si
Hwn nang isa ng tutub. Little Juan succeeded in hitting a dragon-fly
with his whip. Nakhte si Hwn nang manga mansnas. Juan got a chance
to divide up the apples. Nakkkap sya nang isa ng palak`. He has
got hold of a frog (as, in grasping for frogs in mud-holes). Nakpna
ak nang us. I hit a deer with an arrow. Naktpun n ak nang
manga dhon, nang pumarn si Ttay. By the time Father got there,
I had already had time to get some leaves heaped up. So also: gaw,
hing`, sli.

Abstract: Ang pagkbhay nang mdiko sa kay Hwn ay is ng malak ng
ikinatw nang kanya ng kababyan. The doctor's saving of Juan's life
was a cause of great gladness to his fellow-townsmen. Ang pagktwag
ny sa mdiko ng nagligts nang bhay nang kanya ng ank ay dahiln
sa pagkgmit nya nang telfono. His chance of calling the doctor who
saved his child's life was due to the use he was enabled to make of the
telephone. Ang nagng pagkgupit ny sa makapl na damt ay nangyre
dahiln sa paggmit nya nang guntng nang lta. The fact that he was
able to cut the thick cloth was due to his using the tin-shears. Ang
pagkhampas ny sa manga bt` ay dahiln sa kahaban nang kanya
ng pamlo`. He can hit the children because of the length of his
stick. Ang pagkhrang kina Hwn ay sya nil ng ikinawal nang kanila
ng salap`. Juan and his party's having been held up was what deprived
them of their money. Ang pagkhti nya sa tub ay hind mangyyre
kung gummit sya nang mapurl na glok. He would not have been able
to slice the sugar-cane down its length (as a game or trick), if he
had used a dull bolo. Pagksip nya kung an ang dpat nya ng gawn
sa magnankaw na nhli nya, ay ginaw nya iyn agd. When he had at
last hit upon the idea of what to do with the thief he had caught,
he immediately carried it out. Nanghinyang ang boo ng byan sa
pagkpatay kay Risl nang manga Kastla`. The whole country mourned
over the killing of Rizal by the Spaniards. Ang mi ng pagksakay sa
bangk` ay sy ng nagligts sa mi ng bhay. Our having been able
to get into the canoe is what saved our lives. Ang pagksnog nang
manga magnankaw sa byan ay pinarushan nang gubyrno. The thieves'
burning the town was punished by the government. Ang pagktayo nang
isa ng bhay-pmahala ng bat ay dahiln sa pagpapaalala ni Hwn
nang pangnib sa snog. The fact that a stone government-building
came after all to be built, was due to Juan's calling attention to
the danger from fire. Anu ng pagktipid ni Hwn! How saving Juan has
been! So from: sbi, twag.

462. The active is used of certain acts of sensation whose
occurrence is out of the control of the subject: ang nakkkilla,
ang nakkkilla one who has got knowledge of a person or thing,
has come to know his habits, recognizes his nature. Ang pagkglat
ni Hwna ay sy ng ikintaw nang marmi ng nakkkta. Juana's
astonishment amused many who saw it. With killa compare nakramdm
felt; with kta, nakmlay, naktanw, and nakring heard.

Abstract: Malnaw ang pagkkta ko sa nangyre. I had a clear view
of what took place. So: ding, masd, tanw.

463. The direct passive has the forms m-, m- R, n-, n- R.

It may correspond regularly to the active type in  460, and denote
an object undergoing an accidental action of a rational actor.

Nso ko sa boo ng byan ang bta`, khit na hind ko gust. I
was forced to go shouting after the child all over town, though I
didn't like to do it. Hind mu ba nbsa sa diyriyo ang tungkl
sa snog? Haven't you come across the details of the fire in
the paper? Bak mo mbsag, Hwna, iy ng pinagllaruwan m ng
kandelro. See that you don't break that candlestick you're playing
with, Juana. Ndala ny nang hind sinsady` sa kanya ng pagals
ang ki ng pyong. When he went away he inadvertently carried off
my umbrella. Ngambla ku ang pagaral ni Hwn dahiln sa ki ng
pagdatng na wal sa ras. I disturbed Juan in his studying by my
untimely arrival. Ngmit ni Hwn ang ki ng, sombrro dahiln sa
kany ng pagmamadal nang pagals. Juan used my hat in the haste of
his departure. Ngsing nya sa kanya ng pagiingy ang manga bta`. What
with his racket he woke up the children. Nhamps nang hind sinsady
ni Pdro ang bbuy nang kanya ng kpit-bhay. Pedro inadvertently hit
his neighbor's hog with his whip. Nwan din ny sa kin ang kany
ng ank, khit na it y yaw nya ng gawn. She was also forced to
leave her child with me, although she disliked to do this. Npaty
ko nang barl-barlan ang mank. I accidentally killed the chicken
with my toy-gun. Knin mo ang miln, kung iyu ng gust, o kay` ang
sging, kung sya mo it ng npple`.--Nppli ko ang miln. Eat the
banana, if you like, or the melon, if you prefer it.--I prefer the
melon. Npitas ny ang bulaklk nang hind sinsady`. She picked the
flower without intending to. Nptol ko nang hind sinsady` ang lbid
na it. I chanced, without intending it, to cut this string. Bak mo
msra`, Hwn, ang patgo sa iy ng kwlta nang iyu ng kapatd. See
to it, Juan, that you don't do away with your brother's money that
is entrusted to you. Nuss ni Hwna ang inumt na singsng nang
kany ng kapatd. Juana happened to inquire for the ring her sister
had filched. So from: angkn, blag, btas, hbol, paty, plot.

464. The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active
described in  461, and denote an object undergoing an action which a
rational actor was enabled to perform by virtue of outer circumstances.

Ang lo ni Hwn ay nbblog nang kanya ng kalar`. Juan's playmates
are succeeding in making a fool of him (literally: in rounding his
head). Ngupit ny ang makapl na damt. It turned out that he was
able to cut the thick cloth. Hind ku mpon ang manga karyum na
nangsbug sa lpa`. I did not succeed in gathering up all the needles
that were scattered over the floor. Hind ko mpatay ang psa ng
it. I cannot kill this cat (i.e. its life is tough, it gets away,
etc.) Kapag nptol mo ang bkal na iyn, ikw ay makawwal`. If
you can get a chance to cut through that iron, you can make your
escape. Nptol nya ang khoy. He got the wood cut all right. Hind nya
mptol ang leg nang mank. He couldn't get the chicken's neck cut
through. Mpptol na raw ny ang pno nang khoy na nabwl. He says
he will be in a position to cut through the tree that has fallen. ang
kany ng nsingl the money he was able to collect. Similarly, from:
blot, gaw`, hli, kha, klam, nkaw, pits, sbi, tas, twag.

465. Similarly, the direct passive is regularly used to correspond
to the active in  462, of objects of sensation. Nkilla ko si Hwn
don sa swyan. I got acquainted with Juan at that dance. So from:
alala, ding, in, kta, mlas, pansn.

466. Other uses of the direct passive do not regularly correspond to
any active, cf.  440 f.; these have their own abstract with pagk-.

The direct passive is used to denote an object which has accidentally
got into such and such a condition; the actor is either indifferent
or entirely lacking. There seems to be no abstract principle clearly
separating this form from the passive with na- described in  440;
where position of the object is involved, the accidental form is
preferred.

Nbte ang kany ng pagkatkot. His fear reached a high point. Ang
kanya ng bangk y patngo sa band ng kalunran, dtapuwat pagkaran
nang il ng sandal` ay niba ang kanya ng bandhin. His canoe was
headed toward the west, but after a while his direction changed. Ang
numnan nang bhay ay dpat mlagay sa lugr na mallim. The shelf
for drinking-water of a house should be in a shady place. Nsakay
sa trn ang ipinahatd mo ng manga dalanghta`. The tangerines you
sent have been shipped. Ntlin ang pagpapaduls nang bta ng si Hwn
sa ptek. Juan's sliding on the mud got faster and faster (in spite
of him).

Similarly from: bgay, balta`, ban, dpat, don, hint`, hsay,
kpit, lapg, ltag, ligts, liguwk, lpat, lubg, llan, mna,
nkaw, pagtan, pko`, paty, ptung, sbog, tan, tbon, tgo`,
tal`, tanm, tan, tay`, tir, tlos, nat.

Abstract: Pagksakay nang manga sko nang kamte sa trn ay lumkad
it agd. As soon as the bags of sweet-potatoes had been put on board
the train, the latter started to move. So from: balta`, gmit, ib,
ltag, libng, sar.

466a. This irregular passive is used also of animate, rational
subjects, whose actions, then, are viewed rather as an accidental
undergoing; this type is not clearly definable from that with ma-
in  441, except where both forms are used in contrast (-hig`);
the habit with regard to each root is, however, entirely fixed.

In some cases the accidental actor is imaginable: Nakyt si Pdro
sa itas nang lngit dahiln sa ginaw nya ng pagkpit sa pinalipd
na lbo. Pedro got carried up into the air owing to his grip on the
loosed balloon. Nhrang sina Hwn sa da-ng-Balwag. Juan and his
company chanced to get held up on the Baliuag road. Hwag k, Hwn,
pumsuk sa sekrta, sapagkt bak ka mhig` sa ihawn, kung ikw
ay mhle. Don't go as a spy, Juan, for you might get laid on the
gridiron, if you got caught. Similarly: banggt, barl, bilangg`,
distno, hli, ligts, pli`, tanggp, twag.

Processes of life: Sya y nbing. He got deaf. Nbte si Hwn sa kanya
ng pagkatkot. Juan was bettered by his fright. Si Pdro at si Mary
ay mkkasl. Pedro and Maria will get married some day. So: himbng,
lko, tahmik, tink, tto, wli.

Abstract: Ang pagkglat ni Hwna sa mangay na putk nang kanyn ay
sya ny ng ikinabing. Juana's shock at the loud report of the cannon
was what made her deaf. Malak ang kanila ng nagng pagkglat. Their
astonishment was great. Ang pagksnog sa manga sundlo sa lob
nang bhay ay nangyri dhil sa pagksara nang manga bintna`. The
fact that the soldiers were burned in the house was due to the
circumstance that the windows had been closed. Ang pagktink sa
lalamnan nang bta` ay sya ny ng ikinamaty. The boy's getting a
fishbone into his throat was what killed him. Pagktinik nang ungg`
ay sya y naglit. When the monkey had got a spine into his foot he
got angry. Ang pagkwle ni Hwn sa bhay ny Andrs ay dahiln sa
ank na dalga nit. Juan's being spell-bound in Andres' house was
due to the latter's daughter. So: gust, kasl, mangh`.

Movements, especially the resultant position: Sya y nrap`. He fell on
his face. Nriyan kam sa iyo ng bhay kahpon nang umga, dtapuwat
hind ka nmin dinatnn. We were at your house yesterday morning, but
we did not find you there. Nluhod sya sa kany ng harapn. He knelt
down in front of her. Nppagtan si Hwn sa dalaw ng dalga. Juan
chanced to get placed between two young ladies. Sila y nup`. They
are seated. Similarly from: kap, als, blot, dne, dto, duls,
don, harp, kubl, kulng, lkad, lugmk, padpd, panhk, saky,
ssid, tab, tgo`, tay`, tir, tungtng.

Abstract: Ang ikintahol nang manga so ay ang pagkdap ni Hwn. What
made the dogs bark was Juan's falling on his face. Pagksakay ni Hwn
sa trn ay lumkad ito ng agd. When Juan was on board the train,
it soon started to move. So also: duls, kubl, lagy, panhk, sild,
tab, tay`.

467. The passive forms an explicit plural in which -ang- is infixed
into the n-: Tibyan mo ang manga ittay mo ng kbo sa bkid,
sapagkt bak iyo y manggib` kung lumaks ang hngin. Prop up the
huts you are going to build in the fields, for otherwise they might
break down when the wind gets stronger. Mangggib` ang manga bhay na
it, sapagkt hind tma` ang pagktay`. These houses will break down,
because they are not built right. So from: pangw, sbog, talungk`.

468. An irregular form is nndon beside n-ron.

469. Accent shift is due to the root: Ang pagpapatahl ni Hwn sa
kanya ng so ay nakttaw. Juan's making his dog bark is a funny
sight. So lam, tloy.

Passive: Nabut ny sa kany ng paglulundg na may tnga ng pamlo`
ang ilawn, kany` it y nabsag. In his climbing with the stick in
hand, he accidentally reached the lamp, and so it got broken. Sya y
nbulg. He went blind. So: gsing, hyag, hli, lpit, lyo`, tloy.

Abstract: Ang pagkhuli nang sus` ay malak. The snail was left way
behind. Ang pagkabot ny sa bte ay hindi maglang. The way he reached
for the bottle was not polite. So: lam, yaw, gsing, lpit, na.

470. From phrases: Ang panan nang hgan ay nbband-ng-kataasn,
dtapwat dpat mbanda-ng-ibab`. The foot of the bed is turned toward
the north, but should be turned to the south (band ng ibab`, band
ng kataasn).

From derived words: Passive: Nttaglid ang bangk`. The boat has
a list to one side (ta-glid,  523).

(a) Passives from words with prefix ka- ( 398) are frequent. Ang
bkid ni Hwn ay nkkartig nang kay Pdro. Juan's field borders
on Pedro's. Nkasle nya sa kanya ng paglalar` ang kanya ng
pnsan. He took his cousin for playmate. Si Maryno ay nkatlo ni
Hwn. Mariano was Juan's opponent. Si Narsso ang lgi ng nkkatlo
ni Pdro sa manga pagtatlo ng idindos linggo-lingg sa kanila ng
smhan. Narcisso is always Pedro's opponent in the debates which they
hold every Sunday at their club. Si Lkas ang mkkatlo ko. Lucas
will be my opponent. nkkatngo the person one happens to be dealing
with. nkasap be by chance able to be conversed with.

Underlying word non-existent: Nkatlog si Hwn sa panunod nang
tetro. Juan fell asleep while watching the play. Umuln kagab at
lumamg, kaniy` ako nkatlog nang mahimbng. Last night it rained and
got cool; in consequence I fell sound asleep, got a sound sleep. Hind
ako mkatlog. I couldn't get any sleep. Abstract: ang pagkkatlog.

(b) Explicit plural of the preceding: Nangkkatlog sila ng laht,
nang pumsok sa bhay ang magnankaw. They had all fallen asleep,
when the thief came into the house. Pagpiltan niny ng hwag kay
ng mangkatlog sa inyo ng pagbabanty sa manga hyop at iba p ng
r nang pmahalan. See to it that you don't fall asleep when on
guard over the animals and other property of the government. Ngayn
ay mangkkatlog sil, dahiln sa malon nila ng pagpupuyt
gabi-gab. Now they will be able to sleep, owing to their staying up
late night after night.

471. Passive with pag- (cf.  445): the reduplication affects the
pag-. Hind ko mpagway ang tams at ang sim nang limonda ng it. I
cannot produce a balance of sweet and sour in this lemonade. Sa
kalanan ay npagkilla ni Hwn ang kanya ng kamlan. Finally
Juan saw where he was wrong. Hind nya npagkro` agd kung an ang
ggawin ny. He was not able to decide at once what he was going to
do. Nppagkr mo b ang laht nang sinbi ko sa iy kahpon? Are
you able to figure out all I said to you yesterday? Hind ko mpagkro
kung an ang big nya ng sabhin. I simply couldn't make out what he
was trying to say.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: yon sa sbi nang marmi ay
mppaghuli na rw ang manga magnankaw. According to what people say,
the thieves will soon be caught.

472. Passive with pang-: Npanagnip niya ng nkta nya ang kanya ng
am. He dreamt he saw his father.

473. mak- D is used in prohibitions: Hwag k ng maklyas-lyas! Don't
ever run away! So from tungtng.

(a) with paki-: Hwag k ng makpakikin-kin kung hind ka
inanyhan. Don't ever take a meal with people unless they invite you.

474. The instrumental passive is rare: badiy, milabs, mipsok,
mitro`.

475. Local passive with m-.

Nmmasdan k mul sa banda ng it nang bintna` ang bhay ni li
ng Mary. I get a view of Mistress Maria's house from this side of
the window. Pagingtan mo ang iyo ng kwalt sa buls pagluws mo sa
Maynla`, at nang hwag k ng mnakwan. Look carefully to the money in
your purse when you go to Manila, so as not to get robbed. Npaskan
nya sa kwrto ang magnankaw. In entering the room he came upon the
thief. Nputlan ku nang tahd ang ktyaw. I managed to cut the
game-cock's spur. Npputlan ko n nang plong ang ktyaw. I am
succeeding in cutting off the game-cock's comb. Mpputlan daw ny
nang manga plong ang manga ktyaw nya ng pangsbong. He will manage
to cut off the combs of his pit game-cocks, he says. Nsagasan nang
trn ang isa ng to. A man got run over by the train. Nsakyan nmin
ang bangk ni Hwn. We happened to get into Juan's canoe. Ang kamtya
ng mtagpun nang isa ng magnankaw ay lgi ng hind mabte. The death
a robber meets is usually not good. Bak mu mtaman ang lu nang
bta`. See that you don't hit the child's head (and disfigure him).

Similarly: balta`, buks, damdm, datng, gust, intind, kamt,
kulpol, ligts, mlay, pgil, tanm, tlog, tumpk, tto, wisk.

(a) With contraction of prefix and initial: mlman (lam).

(b) Accent shift lacking: nmatan (mat).

(c) Extra accent shift is due to the root: Kamunt nang mtaman nang
kanya ng pukl ang bta`. He nearly hit the child with his throw. Bak
mu mtaman ang bta`. See that you don't hit the child. So also:
nalamn (lam).

476. Local passive with m-pag-: Npaghhinalan nang kpitan
ang mabat na si Hwn. Even honest Juan falls under the mayor's
suspicion. Nppaghinalan nil si Kuls sa pagkawal nang alhas. They
are capable of suspecting Nicols in connection with the disappearance
of the jewelry. Mppaghinalan ka ng kasabuwt nang manga sundlo sa
bundk, kapag hind ka tumahmik sa bhay. You will risk suspicion
as having connection with the soldiers in the mountains, if you do
not stay quietly in your house. Similarly: lam, bintng.

(a) Extra accent shift (plural): m-pag-alam-n.

477. Local passive with m-pang-; the only example lacks accent shift:
n-pang-aginldo-han.

478. Local passive with m- from underlying word with ka- (cf. 
398): nkagaltan, mkatuwan.

(a) with pagka-, corresponding to an active with magka- ( 405):
mpagkalipumpunn (lipumpn).

479. Special static words with mak- are formed from numerals in the
sense of so many times: maknim six times; maklaw twice; maklim
five times; maksiym nine times. So: makiln several times.

From phrases, the higher numbers: maksa-m-p` ten times.

With irregularities: makitl, makyitl three times; makpat,
makpat four times.

Reduplicated: makllbo a thousand times.



4. The prefix pa-.

480. The general sense of the prefix pa- is to denote something
caused or ordered to undergo such and such an action. With accent p-
an increase of the action is expressed.



(1) Simple static forms.

481. The root with prefix pa- denotes an object or person ordered,
caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action. The person
caused to undergo may be the same as the person ordering or allowing.

Ang paakyt ni Hwna na pno nang kakw ay ang nsa slok nang
bakran. The cocoa-tree Juana ordered climbed is the one in the corner
of the yard. Ang panyo ng it ay paalala sa kin niy li ng Mary sa
ank nya ng dalga. This handkerchief is a souvenir to me from Aunt
Maria which she sent by her daughter. Inihand nang mi ng kasra
ang atsra ng papya pang siya nmi ng magng payap. Our landlady
served some pickled papaws for us to use as condiment. Pabalk ni
Hwn ang lbru ng it. Juan sends this book back. It ang pahti` sa
kin ni Pdro. This is what Pedro ordered me to deal out. Ang manga
tub ng it ay paptol sa kin ni Pdro. Pedro ordered me to cut this
sugar-cane. Ang to ng it ang pasaky ni Hwn sa karumta ko. This
is the man whom Juan asked me to take into my carriage. Ang binsa
ni Hw ng kautusn ay patwag nang kra. The ordinance Juan read was
given out for proclamation by the priest. Ang bhay na yt y patay
ni Hwn. Juan had this house built. Patpon ni Hwn sa kin ang manga
nyg na it. Juan ordered me to gather up these cocoanuts. Ang pauw
ni Hwn sa kanya ng in ay isa ng manam na singsng. What Juan sent
home to his mother was a beautiful ring.

As conjunctive attribute the word with pa- may express manner: ang
da ng pabalk sa Balwag the road back to Baliuag. Papsok sya ng
lumlkad sa gitn nang bhay. He was going farther in toward the
inside of the house. Pasaky sya ng lumuks sa kabyo. He jumped on
the horse as if mounting to ride. Nang mahlug ang bta` sa khoy,
ay paup sya ng lumagpk sa lpa`. When the boy fell from the tree, he
landed on the ground in a sitting position. Paurng sya ng lumkad. He
went backwards.

With movements pa-, reflexive, is often weakened to a mere indication
of direction: Paakyt sa pn nang khoy ang ungg` nang sya y abtan
nang lbo. The monkey was just climbing the tree, when he was overtaken
by the wolf. Pabalk si Hwn. Juan is going back. Patngo si Hwn sa
bya-ng-Balwag. Juan was headed for the town of Baliuag.

Similarly: lam, bigl`, bulng, gaw`, hrang, klat, lgi`, lal`,
punt, sigw, tgo`, takb, talungk`, tay`, tloy.

(a) From a derived word: paitas (itas,  373).

(b) The peculiar meaning is weakened in some words: ang paga a kind
of rice which matures early, ang pakinbang profit, advantage, ang
palabs a theatrical performance, ang palgo` a bath, ang pamagt an
appellation, a nickname. So from: bang`, bsa, bay, bigt, dan,
dsa, hyag, hintlot, lkad, lgid, lgit, skit, talm.

(c) With retraction of accent and contraction: pno (an).

(d) Irregular: Ang pagkparoon k sa bsbol ay paubya` nang ki ng
gur`. My going to the baseball game was by permission of my teacher
(bya`).

482. pa- (1) is made from barytone roots when they express manner, or,
more especially, direction: Ang bangk` ay hind paayn sa log. The
boat is not headed with the stream. Pahags nya ng iniyabt sa kin ang
aklt. He handed me the book by tossing it. Inwan nya ng paharng sa
dan ang karitn. He left the wagon blocking the road. Paharng nya ng
inihgis sa log ang pno-ng-sging. He threw the banana tree crosswise
into the river. Ang paglak nang lmat nang pinggn ay pahat`. The
increase in the crack of the dish is going towards halving it. Ang
bnga ng it y pahat` kung mapirso pagkahing. This fruit goes into
halves when it breaks on ripening. Similarly: lhim, ptol.

(a) The accent shift is due to the root and the value of the
formation is as in  481, in: Ang paabt mo ng slat ay tinanggp
ko. I have received the letter you sent to me. Si Hwn ay isa ng bta
ng pabay`. Juan is a neglectful boy.

(b) The accent shift is like that of a root word in: Palig na ang
manga bta`. The children are bathed now (pa-lgo`).

483. pa- r, as explicit plural: see bot.

484. pa- D. The action is repeated at short intervals; the reflexive
value is frequent. Sya y lumlkad na pahint-hint`. He goes on,
stopping every little while. Pamal-mal` ang kanya ng pagblang. His
count contains repeated errors. Alam ny ang manga paskot-skot sa
bya-ng-Balwag. He knows all the ins and outs of the district of
Baliuag. So from: iyk, lgid, mnsan, pasiyl, tlog.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Patlog-tlog at pagisng-gisng
siy. He sleeps and wakes by fits and starts. Pataw-taw at
paiyk-iyk siy. She giggles at one moment and weeps the next.

485. pa-pa- has durative-iterative meaning: Papaals sya nang ak
y dumatng. He was just going away when I arrived. Papaurng sya ng
lumlkad. He was going backwards. So from labs.

(a) papno (an) seems equivalent to pno ( 481,c).

486. As appears in the example of palig` above ( 482,b), the forms
with pa- are apparently capable of all the modifications that are
found in simple roots: Thus:

(a) with prefix pang- ( 347): Pangpakin sa bta` ang gtas na
it. This milk is for the children's food. Pangpakin sa panahin ang
pinatay k ng tpa. The sheep I have slaughtered is for serving to the
guests. Pangpatuk sa mank ang play na it. These rice-grains are to
be given to the chickens to pick (tuk` the beak of a fowl). So from:
dikt, lgo`.

(b) with ka- R ( 400): Kappaptol ko pa lmang nang manga khoy na
it. I have just had this firewood cut.

(c) with ka-pag- R ( 400,a): Kapagppaptol ko lmang nang sit kay
Hwn. I have just ordered Juan to cut up the bamboo spines.



(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static words.

487. The root with pa- is sometimes used as a transient contingent
punctual, with the value of a reflexive passive; more commonly the
form with ma-pa- ( 506) fulfils this function. There are three types:

(a) Genuine reflexive passive: Pabut ka sa mang nagssihbul sa
iy. Let yourself be overtaken by your pursuers. Paakyat k kay Hwn
sa itas nang khoy. Ask Juan to take you up into the tree. Tw ng
papsuk ak sa sne sa ki ng kyang, ay nassiran ang mkina. Every
time I ask my oldest brother to take me to the moving-picture show,
something goes wrong with the machine. So: kasl, ligw.

(b) Reflexive of interest: one who orders that something undergo
such and such an action for him: Paakyt ka kay Hwn nang isa ng
bnga-ng-nyg. Ask Juan to climb for a cocoanut for you.

(c) Reflexive of motion; the pa- has faded value; thus are used
the local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns and a few other
words. Parni ka. Come here. Tuw ng aku y paron sa kanya ng bhay
ay hind ku sya inabtan. Every time I go to his house, I fail to
find him in.

(d) If the pa- is accented, the action is more intense: Pga ka nang
pagparto. Be very early in your coming here.

(e) A contingent durative is formed with pa- R. (a) Paakyat ak kay
Hwn sa itas nang khoy. I shall ask Juan to take me up into the
tree with him. Pappsok ak sa sne sa ki ng kyang. I shall ask
my brother to take me to the moving-picture show. (b) Paakyat ak
kay Hwn nang isa ng bnga-ng-nyg. I shall ask Juan to climb for a
cocoanut for me. Papptol ak nang buhk kay Hwn. I shall ask Juan
to cut my hair.

488. For the reflexive of motion ( 487,c) a set of transients and
an abstract are formed with -um- and pag-. These also are equivalent
to the forms with ma-pa- ( 506).

(a) Regularly from the four roots serving as locals of the
demonstrative pronouns. Pumarni ka! Come here! Pumarne ka sa ki
ng tab. Come close here to my side.

Madlang ang pagparto nang manga blang. Locusts come here but
rarely. Pho ako ng pparto sa alasngko. I will surely come here
at five o'clock.

Ppariyn sna kam, dtapuwat nagkaron kam nang malak ng
kaabalahn, kany hind kami ntuloy. We were coming to you, but we
had so much trouble that we did not carry out our intention.

Pagparon ko ay ssabhin ko sa kany ang ibinalt mo. When I get
there I shall tell him what you have told me. Kit ng dalaw ay
pparon sa teytro. We two are going to the theatre.

(b) Occasionally from lob: pumalob.

(c) Also the abstracts pagpalgo`, pagpanog; these form the transient
with ma- from the root ( 441); and pagpatngo, which forms its
transient with -um- from the root.

(d) Plurals: magsipalgo`, nagssipanog.

489. mag-pa-, pag-pa-pa-. Active with mag- from the root with pa-
denotes one who causes, orders, or allows such and such an action to
be performed on something else or (reflexively) on himself.

Nagpayap ang mi ng kasra. Our landlady served a relish. Si
Hwn ay nagpabya` sa kanya ng tungklin. Juan grew lax about his
duties. Nagpabyy si Hwn nang isd` sa kanya ng palisdan. Juan
had some fish put into his fishpond. Ang mdiko ang nagpaginhwa sa
my sakt. The doctor made the patient feel comfortable. Nagpagupt
ak sa barbro. I had the barber cut my hair. Ang pagpapagupt ko sa
barbro ng si Hwn ay hind ko lubh ng gust. I don't like very much
to have my hair cut by barber Juan. Parti ang manga pagpapahrang
ni Andrs sa manga to ng nagllakd. Andrs often orders travellers
to be held up. Si Pdro ay nagpahte sa kin nang play. Pedro had
rice dealt out to me. Ang ktiwla y sy ng nagpaht nang play sa
manga kasam. It was the agent who ordered rice distributed to the
field-workers. Ang pagpapahte nang ktiwla sa manga lariy sa manga
magkakpit-bhay ay hind iniytos nang panginon nya ng si Hwn. The
agent's having bricks distributed among the neighbors was not in
accordance with the orders of his master Juan. Sya y nagpahkaw sa
kanya ng alla`. She had her maid put her earrings on her. (hkaw an
earring). Si Pdro ay nagppahing. Pedro is taking a rest (literally:
allowing himself to breathe). Ang in y nagpahubd (or: nagpahubd
nang damt) sa kanya ng ank. The mother ordered her daughter to
undress her. Sya y nagpakin nang glay sa manga panahin. She
served vegetables to the guests. Sya y nagppakasra. She keeps a
boarding-house. Sya y nagppalabs nang lamk. He is driving out
the gnats. Nagppalabs nang teytro ang smha-ng-pera. The opera
company is producing a play. Nagpalgo si Hwn nang kabyo. Juan
bathed some of the horses. ang pagpapalgo` the bathing something or
someone. Nagpaptol si Hwn nang labng. Juan had some bamboo shoots
cut. Nagppaptol kam nang khoy. We are having some wood cut. Ang
pagpapaptol nya sa Intsk nang buhk ay hind sinund nit. When he
ordered the Chinaman to cut his queue, the latter did not obey. Ang
pagpapasaky sa trn ni Hwn nang manga kamtis ay hind nauts bgo
lumkad ang trn. Juan had not finished having his tomatoes loaded
on the train, when the train started. Si Hwna ay nagpaskit nang
marmi ng manglilgaw sa kany. Juana caused grief to many who wooed
her. Si Hwna ay nagpasukly sa kanya ng alla`. Juana ordered her maid
to comb her hair for her. Ang pagpapasund nya sa kin sa alla` ay
ikinaglit ko. His ordering me to fetch the servant made me angry. Sya
y nagppatalm nang isa ng glok. He is sharpening a bolo. Nagpatwag
ak nang is ng kasam. I had a workman called. Ang pagpapatwag ko
sa manga alla ay hind sinund nang bta ng si Hwn. Little Juan
did not obey my order to him to call some servants. Ang pagpapatwag
nang kra sa lyi ay hindi ntuluy, sapagkt binat nang manga to
ang magtatawg. The priest's order that the law be proclaimed was not
carried out, for the crier was stoned by the people. Nagpatay sya nang
isa ng kbo. He had a hut built. Ang pagpapatay ni Hwn nang isa ng
kbo ay hind natpus bgo sya ntwag sa pagsusundlo. The hut Juan
was having built was not finished before he was called to military
service. Nagpatipd sya sa manga kasam nang kanila ng pagkin. He
had his workers be sparing with their food. Nagpatpon si Hwn nang
khoy sa kanya ng manga kasam. Juan ordered his workmen to gather
wood. Ang pagpapatpon ni Hwn sa manga kalabw ay hind sinund
nang kanya ng ktiwla`. Juan's order that the carabao be gathered
together was not obeyed by his overseer. Sya y nagpatoto sa sap ni
Mary at ni Hwna. She gave testimony in the lawsuit between Maria
and Juana. Si Hwna ay naparon sa kin at siy ng nagpatoto na ikw
ay dumal sa isa ng sabungn. Juana came to me and assured me that you
had attended a cock-fight. Ang pagpapatoto ny ay hind tinanggp nang
hukm. The judge did not accept his testimony. Sya y nagpaup` nang il
ng eskwla. He had a few of the pupils sit down. Ang pagpapaup nang
mastro sa manga eskwla ay hind nila sinund agd. The teacher's
order to the pupils to sit down was not promptly obeyed. Magpatang
ka nang kwalt sa manga mahihrap. Lend money to the poor. Nagpauw
ba si Hwn nang slya sa kanya ng in?--Hind`. Ang kanya ipinauw`
ay isa ng singsng. Did Juan send a chair home to his mother?--No,
he sent home a ring.

Similarly: bot, alala, balk, ban, dal, duls, dnong, dsa,
galng, glit, gand, gaw`, hyag, hrap, hli, sip, iyk, killa,
kinbang, kintb, kta, kul`, kumpisl, lagy, lkad, lar`, lyas,
lyaw, lims, lpas, lto`, magt, msa, psok, sigl, singkw, ssid,
tahl, tugtg, tlog, tlos, uln.

(a) Plural with magsi- ( 386); nagssipagpalims.

(b) From a derived word: Huwag kay ng magpaumga sa inyo ng
pagsaslitan. Don't let yourselves be overtaken by the morning in
your conversation (umga,  358).

(c) Root with accent shift: Sya y nagpaabt nang slat sa kin. He
had a letter handed to me.

(d) The pa- is accented, expressing extreme degree of action; from
shifted root: Nagpuna si Hwn sa lakarn. Juan managed to get himself
into the very first place in the walking-party. So from: wan.

(e) Doubled root, shifted: Nagpuna-un si Hwn sa lakarn nang manga
magkakasma. Juan got himself too far ahead in the boys' walking-party.

(f) Special static word (of the kind in  358,d): ang magpapatawg
a town-crier.

490. pa- (1) -in, p-in-a. The direct passive from words with pa-
denotes the person ordered to do so and so, the thing caused to be
so and so.

Padalngin mo ang iyo ng pagparto. Make your coming here
infrequent. Pagka pinaptol ka ny nang khoy ay sumund
ka ng agd. When he orders you to cut wood, do you obey at
once. Pinapptol nmin nang tub si Pdro. We are having Pedro cut
some sugar-cane. Paputlin mo si Hwn nang kgon. Have Juan cut the
cugon-weeds. Papputlin nmin kay nang yantk. We shall ask you to
cut some rattan. Pinatahl ni Hwn ang kanya ng so. Juan made his dog
bark. Pinatalm nya it. He made this sharp. Pinatay ni Hwn sa kanya
ng plad ang kapatd nya ng malit na si Maryno. Juan stood his little
brother Mariano up on his open hand. Hind ako pinatlog nang pagtahl
nang so. The barking of the dog kept me from sleeping. Patulgin mo
ang bta`. Put the child to sleep. Pinaup nya ang manga eskwla. He
had the pupils sit down. Pinaup ko ang ki ng bista. I asked my
visitors to be seated.

Similarly: als, balk, bil, btas, dto, hint`, inm, kin,
kpit, lkad, lyas, lpad, psok, tahn, takb, twad, tlin, tloy,
unt`, yman.

(a) With accented p-: Pbusugin m ang manga hyop. Feed the animals
till they have had enough. Phampasn mo siy. Whip him harder. Hwag
m ng pputin ang pint nang bhay. Don't paint the house too white.

(b) p- with accent shift: Pdalangin m ang iyo ng pagparto. Come
here very rarely.

491. pa-pag- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-. The direct passive has pag- before
the root when it corresponds to simple actives with characteristic
mag- ( 351). Mppahmak lmang ang bta ng ito, kapag hind ntin
pinapagral nang sapt. This boy will turn out a mere good-for-nothing,
if we do not make him study enough. Pinapaghubd nang in ang kanya ng
manga ank. The mother ordered her children to undress. Pinapagptol
nmin nang sging sina Hwn. We asked Juan and his people to cut
bananas. Papagputlin mo si Hwn nang buhk. Tell Juan to get a
hair-cut. Papagpputlin nila kam nang kanila ng manga kawyan. They
will order us to cut all their bamboo. Pinapagsukly ni Hwna ang
kanya ng alla`. Juana told her maid to comb her (the maid's) hair.

Similarly, from: bhis, hint`, trabho.

(a) From a derived word: Sya y pinapagkalatimb`. He was forced to
do the well-bucket exercise (kalatimb`,  519).

(b) With extra accent shift: papagttuluyn (tloy).

492. With pang-: Parti ng pinapanghhrang ni Andrs ang kanya ng
manga kampn. Andrs often orders his companions to commit highway
robberies. Papanghiramn mo si Pdro nang lbid. Have Pedro go and
borrow some rope. Papamutlin mo nang dam si Pdro. Have Pedro cut
grass. Papammutlin sil ni Hwn nang dam. Juan will order them to
cut grass.

493. pa-pag-pa- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-pa-. With both pag- and pa-
preceding the root the direct passive with pa- denotes someone caused
to cause something: Pinapagpatoto nang tagapagtanggl ni Andrs ang
to ng si Mariyno na sy ng nakkta sa nangyre. Andrs' lawyer
called as a witness the man Mariano, who had seen the occurrence
(cf. magpatoto,  489).

494. i-pa-, i-p-in-a-. The instrumental passive with pa- denotes the
object ordered, caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action.

Ipinalam ko sa kany ang manga bta`. I made known to him the
departure of the children with me. Ipinaals nila ang hrang nang
dan. They ordered the obstruction of the road to be removed. Ang
ipinadala m ng slat ay tinanggp ku n. I have received the letter
you sent me. Ang saptos na may lapd na suwlas na yit ay sy ng
ipinaggmit na pangtay` sa bta`. This flat-soled shoe is given
children to be used in learning to stand up. Ang mayma ng taga iba
ng byan na pparto ay ipinahrang nang pno nang tulisn. The rich
stranger who was going to come here was held up by order of the chief
of the bandits. Ipinaht sa kin ni Pdro ang mansnas. Pedro ordered
me to divide the apples. It y ipinahte ni Pdro par sa kin. This
was ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me as my share. Isinaky
sa trn ang ipinahatd mo ng manga dalanghta`. The tangerines you
shipped were put on board the train. Ipinasip nya sa manga eskwla
ang ftsa nang pagaway nang manga Rso at Hapuns sa Port-rtur. He
asked his pupils to think of the date of the fighting between the
Russians and the Japanese at Port Arthur. Ipakta mo ang dla` sa
manggagamt. Show the doctor your tongue. Ipinapptol ni Hwn ang
manga khoy sa kanya ng bakran. Juan is having the trees in his yard
cut down. Ipapptol ko ang manggs nang ki ng bro`. I am going
to have the sleeves of my blouse cut off. Ipaptol mo, Hwn, ang iyo
ng kuk. Have your fingernails cut, Juan. Ang ipinasaky ni Ttay na
manga sha` sa trn ay nangablok sa dan. The grape-fruit Father sent
by train got spoiled on the way. Ipinasund ko kay Hwn ang mdiko. I
told Juan to fetch the doctor. Ipinatwag ko sa alla` si Hwn. I had
Juan called by a servant. Ipinatay ni Hwn ang bhay na it. Juan had
this house built. Ipinatipd nya sa bt ang pagkin nang lansnes. He
made the child eat sparingly of the lansones. Ipinatpon ni Hwn sa
kanya ng ktiwla` ang manga kalabw. Juan had his agent gather the
carabao. Ipinatluy nya ang pagkant, khit na mangay ang mang
nakking. He went on with his singing although the audience was noisy.

So: hon, balk, ban, bilangg`, btay, dpit, dsa, gamt, gaw`,
gupt, hbol, hyag, hint`, hintlot, kasl, killa, lkad, libng,
mna, paty, skit, tpon, uw`.

(a) Different in meaning is the corresponding form from dto; it is the
primary instrumental passive corresponding to pumarto, etc. ( 488):
Ang pagskop niy nang tu ng makasalnan ay sya ny ng ipinarto. His
saving of sinful man is what he came here for.

(b) Accent shift is due to the root: Ipaalm ka sa kany ang ki ng
pattunghan. Let him know where I am going. Ipinaalam ny sa kin
ang kanya ng nillob. He made his intentions known to me. Ipinatuly
ni Pdro ang pagpapatay nang bhay. Pedro had them go on with the
construction of the house. Similarly: bot.

(c) With pag- (cf.  491): ipapagral.

(d) With pa- prefixed to the root, the instrumental passive with pa-
denotes that ordered to be caused. The only example has radical accent
shift: Ipinapatuly ni Hwn sa kanya ng ktiwla` ang pagtatanm
nang manga kasam. Juan had his agent order the field-workers to go
on with the planting.

495. i-pag-pa-, i-p-in-ag-pa-. When the relation of the object ordered
to undergo an action is explicitly that of a thing given forth (
368), a kind of double instrumental passive is made by prefixing
pag- to the pa- (cf. the explicit use of pag- in primary passives,
 369. 375): Ipinagpahte` sa kin ni Pdro ang play. The rice was
ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me. Ang kwlta ng npangaginldohan
ni Hwn ay sya ny ng ipinagpasaky sa tiyobbo sa kanya ng kapatd
na malit. Juan used his Christmas money to treat his little brother
to a ride on the merry-go-round. Ang kautusn ay ipinagppatwag nang
kra. The law is being called out by order of the priest.

(a) With additional pa- (as in  494,d): ipinagpapadal.

496. i-paki-pa-, i-p-in-aki-pa-. Before a word with pa- the
instrumental passive with paki- denotes the thing asked (as a favor) to
be caused to undergo such and such an action. Hwag m ng ipakipaptol
ang pno-ng-khoy, dtapuwat pakiputlin mo na msmo. Don't ask
someone else to cut down the tree for me, but cut it down for me
yourself. Ipakkipaptol ni Hwn sa iny ang manga tinibn sa kanya
ng bakran. Juan will ask you to have the banana-stumps in his yard
cut down. Ipinakipaptol nya kay Hwn ang manga dam sa bakran. He
asked Juan to have the grass cut in his yard.

(a) The thing asked (as a favor) to be caused to do so and
so: Ipinakipakin lmang niya ang kanya ng ank hbang sya y
wal`. She asked someone else to feed her child while she was
away. Ipinakkipasso lmang nya kay Mary ang kanya ng ank, sapagkt
wal sya ng gtas. She is asking Maria to nurse her child for her,
because she has no milk.

497. pa- (1) -an, p-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with pa- denotes
that caused to undergo an action as local object.

Paalman mo sa kany kung san ka pparon. Let him know where you
are going. Pinaasuhn ni Pdro ang manga pno-ng-mangg. Pedro smoked
(i.e. warmed, so as to speed flowering) the mango trees. Pinabayan ni
Hwn ang kanya ng manga tungklin. Juan neglected his duties. Pabayan
mo sy. Leave him alone. Ang pagpaty sa manga magnankaw ay hind
pinarrushan nang hukm. The judge does not punish one for killing
robbers. Pinahatan ak ni Pdro nang play sa ktiwla`. Pedro had
the agent give me my share of rice. Pinahubarn nang in ang manga
bta`. The mother had her children undressed. Pakinggn naw niny
ang ki ng pagtwag. Pray give hearing to my call. Pinalligan
nang pagng ang log. The turtle bathed in the river. Pinalligan
nang babye ang bta`. The woman was bathing the child. Hwag m ng
pamalyan sa marmi na ikw ay marmi ng kayamnan sa bhay, pang
hwag k ng nakwan. Don't let people know that you have many valuables
in your house, lest you be robbed. Pinanagan nya ang bhay. He went
down from the house. Pinaputlan ni Hwn nang tanga ang kanya ng
manga bik, pang hwag mangkin nang iba ng to. Juan had the ears
of his little pigs cut, so that they might not be inadvertently
taken by anyone else. Pinapputlan ni Hwn nang buntt ang laht
nang kanya ng manga mank. Juan has all his chickens' tails clipped
(for identification). Paputlan mo nang kaunti` ang mahb mo ng
buhk. Have your long hair cut a little. Papputlan ko nang buntt
ang manga mank na bgo ng bil. I shall have the tails clipped of the
chickens I have just bought. Ang bangka ng it ay pinasakyn ko kay
Hwn. I allowed Juan to ride in this canoe. Pinatunyan sa kin ni Hwn
na ikw ay nagssugl. Juan proved to me that you are gambling. Ano ng
band ang kanil ng pinattunghan? What direction are they headed for?

So also: bendisiyn, dal, hintlot, hrap, don, kinbang, magt,
mna, panhk, skit, tbon, tigs, wal`.

(a) Accent shift, due to the root: pabayan, equivalent, however,
to pabayan.

(b) p-: Paghan mo ang pagslong. Get away very early. Pinman mo
ang slat. Write very neatly. Pitiman m ang klay nang tbig. Make
the color of the water very black. Hwag m ng pputian ang pint nang
bhay. Don't put too much white into the paint for the house.

(c) pa- also prefixed to the root: Pinapahatan ak ni Pdro nang
play sa ktiwla`. Pedro told the agent to have me given my share
of rice. Pinapahatan ni Pdro nang play ang manga kasam. Pedro
ordered that the laborers be given their share of rice.

498. Special static words are formed with p- and -an to denote place
or plurality of habitual causative action; barytone roots have accent
shift of two syllables, sometimes optionally of one syllable:

Ang malit na spa ng it ay sya ng pbiyyan ni Alfnso nang malilit
na isd ng nhhli nya sa log. This little pool is where Andrs
turns loose the little fish he catches in the river. Ang plangyan
nang manga pto ni Hwn ay mallim. Juan's duck-pond is deep. Ang
kanila ng ptaglan nang pagssid ay ginaw nila sa Sibl. Their
diving-contest took place at Sibol.

ang prusahn penitentiary; hell. ang pligun bathroom, bathtub.

So also: pkumpislan, paraln, phayagn phaygan, pmahalan
pmahalan.

(a) Derived from these a transient and abstract in mag-: ang
pagpaptaglan a contesting for endurance.



(3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka-.

499. mag-pa-ka-, pag-pa-pa-ka-. The active with mag-pa- ( 489) from
words with ka- expresses a reflexive actor: Ang pagpapakahrap sa
pagaral ay my ganti ng pla`. Exerting oneself at studies has its
reward. Nagpakamaty si Lkas. Lucas committed suicide. Magppakamaty
si Lkas. Lucas will commit suicide. ang pagpapakamaty the act of
suicide. So also from: wal`.

(a) From forms with ma-, in more intensive sense than mag- alone (
352,c): Ang pagpapakamarnong serious effort at learning things.

With irregularities of accent, as in  353,a.b.: Sya y
nagpakampuri. He praised himself very much. Sya y nagpakamayabng. He
boasted much.

500. pa-ka- (1) -in, p-in-a-ka-. The direct passive with pa-ka- denotes
something caused to be too much so and so: Hwag m ng pakalalmin ang
gawi ng hkay. Don't make the hole you are to dig too deep. Hwag m
ng pakallalmin ang hhukin mo ng baln. Don't make the well you
are going to dig too deep. Pinakallim ni Hwn ang hkay. Juan made
the ditch too deep.

(a) The form with p-in-a-ka- occurs as special static word: pinakamahl
most expensive, dearest; pinakamra cheapest.

(b) More commonly from words with ma- ( 454): Si Risl ay sy ng
naging pinakamarnong na to sa kapulua-ng-Filipnas. Rizal was
the most learned man in the Philippines. pinakamalaks strongest;
pinakamalnis cleanest. So from: bti, hba`, halag, hsay, knis.

501. i-k-pa-, i-k-in--pa-. The instrumental passive with i-k- (
417) from words with pa- expresses the thing or circumstance causing
someone to be made to do so and so. Ikinpaals sa kany sa bhay
ni Hwn ang kanya ng pangungumt. His petty thievery caused him
to be ordered to leave Juan's house, to be dismissed from Juan's
house. Ikinppaals nila sa kany ang kanya ng pinaggagaw ng
katampalasnan sa manga hyop. His constant cruelty to the animals is
forcing them to dismiss him. Ang kaibign nya ng mtto ay sya ny
ng ikinparoon sa Espnya. His desire to get an education is what
made him go to Spain. Bak mo ikpahmak ang iyo ng pagparon. I am
afraid your going there may cause you to be unfortunate. Ikppahmak
nya ang kanya ng pagsusundlo. His military service will cause him
to fall into bad ways.

(a) With pag- either before or after the k- a voluntary actor is
implied who is caused to make someone or something do or be so and
so. Ang ipinagkpasaky ni Hwn sa kanya ng my sakit na kapatd sa
trn sa lugr nang sa karumta ay ang katulnan nang trn. What made
Juan have his brother ride on the train rather than in a carriage was
the speed of the train. Nagpasip sya sa kanya ng manga eskwla nang
manga para ng ikpagppalak nil sa kanila ng akltan. He had his
students think of means that would help them to make their library
(get) larger.

502. pa-ka- (1) -an. Local passive with pa- ( 497) from a word with
ka- ( 398): pinakawaln was allowed to go free.

503. ka-pa- (1) -an. Local passive with ka- ( 419) from a word with
pa- ( 481): kappatunghan the place one will be headed for.

(a) Static words with ka-pa- -an are forms with ka- -an from words
with pa-:

With S ( 421): Si Hwn ang kaptaglan ni Maryno sa pagssid sa
tbig. Juan contends with Mariano in staying under water as long
as possible.

With S (1), ( 423); accent irregularly placed: Ang bta ng si Pdro
ang sya ng kpakitan ni Mary nang kany ng larwn. Little Pedro is
the child to whom Maria showed her toys and who showed her his.

With (2), ( 422): Ang kapabayan nya sa manga tungklin ay sy ng
malak nya ng kapintsan. His neglectfulness of his duties is his
great fault.

504. maka-pa-. With maka- in the usual meanings ( 433 ff.) a few
transients are made from words pa-. Nakapahing sa llim ang manga
kalabw. The carabao rested in the shade (irrational actor). Bayan
mo ng makapahing ang manga dal mo ng kalabw bgu ka bumalk sa
bkid. Let the carabao that brought you rest before you go back to
the country. Makappahinga n ang manga hyop bgo sya dumatng. The
carabao will have rested before he arrives. So from: don, lgo`.

505. Commoner is maka-pag-pa- (corresponding to mag-pa-); the abstract
has pagkapa-. Nakapagpaptol na ak nang khoy na ggamtin ko sa bo
ng taguln. I have already had wood cut for the entire rainy season. Si
Llay ay nakkapagpaptol nang khoy sa all ni Kka`. Lilay
has permission to order Kika's servant to cut the wood. Hind ako
makapagpaptol nang tub kay Hwn, sapagkt marmi sya ng trabho sa
ib. I cannot have Juan cut sugar-cane, because he has already too
much work to do for other people. Makkapagpaptol ak nang labng,
kung iy ng gust. I can have some bamboo-shoots cut, if you wish.

So from: bil, knis, tpon.

506. The passive with ma- from words with pa- varies in meaning,
owing chiefly to the various values of words with pa-.

(a) Genuine passive: Hind nya napahing ang manga sging. He did
not succeed in getting the bananas to ripen. Mapahhiram mo ba
ak nang lima ng pso ng gint? Can you let me borrow five dollars
gold? Napapsok ko sa kurl ang manga kalabw. I succeeded in bringing
the carabao into the corral. Napattalim ni Pdro ang mapurl na
glok. Pedro is able to sharpen dull bolos. So from: als, punt,
sboy, tlog.

(b) Reflexive passive: Ang my sakit ay napadap` sa manga nagalg
sa kany, sapagkt sya hind makaklos. The sick man had the people
who were caring for him lay him on his face, because he could not
move. Napagsing si Hwn sa kanya ng kapatd sa ras nang alaskwtro
nang umga. Juan had his brother wake him up at four o'clock in the
morning. Napapsok ak sa sne sa ki ng kyang. I asked my oldest
brother to take me to the moving-picture show. Mapappsok.... I shall
ask to be taken in. Sil y napattlong. They are asking for help. So:
lam, hatd, tawd.

(c) Reflexive of interest: Napaakiyt ak kay Hwn nang isa
ng bnga-ng-nyg. I asked Juan to climb for a cocoanut for
me. Napaptol sil nang khoy. They asked to have wood cut for
them. Napapptol ang manga ank nang kanila ng kuk kay Nnay. The
children ask Mother to cut their fingernails. Napapptol ak nang
ggawi ng ppa kay Hwn. I am asking Juan to cut me some wood for
a cigarette-mouthpiece. Napatild ak nang tub kay Nnay. I asked
Mother to slice me some sugar-cane.

(d) Movement: Napabngit sya sa malaki ng pangnib. He got into a
very dangerous situation. Naparne sa tabi k ang bta`. The child
came up close to me. Ang magkaybga ng si Pdro at si Maryno ay
naparon sa Maynla`. The two friends, Pedro and Mariano, have gone
to Manila. Sya y napao. He assented. So from: dto, lob, salmat,
tngo. Also from the derived word luwsan: napaluwsan.

507. Instrumental passive only in: maipabarl.

508. Passive with m- ( 463 ff.) from words with pa-. Bumitw ang
bt sa lbid, kany nparap` ang kany ng kahatakn. As the child
let go of the rope, the one who was pulling against him fell on his
face. Nparto si Hwn sa kany ng pagtatag` sa manga tiktk. Juan
happened to come here in his hiding from the spies. Npparto sya
ng madals. He often gets round here. Mpparto raw sy sa bya
ng it. He will get round to our town, he says. Npahmak sya sa
ginaw nya ng pagsusugl at pagsasbong. He became good-for-nothing
through his gambling and cock-fighting. Nppahmak ang bta ng
si Hwn, dahiln sa lubs na pagpapalyaw sa kany nang kanya ng
manga maglang. Little Juan is getting spoiled through his parents'
complete indulgence. Hwag k ng duwg, Hwn, at nang hwg ka ng
mpahmak lmang sa iyo ng pagsusundlo. Don't be a coward, Juan,
so that you may not merely come to misfortune through your military
service. Mppahmak lmang ang bta ng it, kapag hind ntin
pinapagral nang sapt. This boy will turn out a good-for-nothing,
if we don't make him study enough. Hind npahing na maga ni Hwn
ang manga sging. Juan didn't get his bananas ripe early enough. Hind
nya npahing ang manga sging, sapagkt nabus agd. He did not get
his bananas ripe, because they were all eaten up too soon. Si Pdro ay
nppahing. Pedro is resting. Npatay si Pdro dahiln sa kanya ng
pagkglat. Pedro leaped to his feet in his surprise. Dahiln sa kanya
ng pagkglat ay npaup siya. In his surprise he fell into his chair.

So from: glat, halakhk, hits, iyk, kasl, lagy, lagpk, luks,
sigw, tindg.

(a) Plural with -ang-: Ang manga kalabw ay nangppahing. The
carabao are resting. So: nangpamangh`.

(b) Accent shift: Npagisng si Hwn sa kalakasn nang putk nang
barl. The report of the gun was so loud that Juan woke up. So: twa.

(c) Abstract, of movements, pagkpa-. Ang dhil nang kanya ng
pagkparto ay ang paniningl. What brought him here was the collecting
of debts. Ang pagkpalgo nang kabyo ay marum. The horse has not
been bathed clean. So from: alla`, don.

(d) With mak- D ( 473) from -parto: Hwag k ng
makpar-parto. Don't you ever come round here!

509. Instrumental passive, m-i-pa-, from: dal, killa, kta, tlos.

510. Local passive, m-pa- (1) -an. Mpparushan kit. I shall have
to punish you. So: king.

511. Special static words with n-pa-ka- denote something having a high
degree of such and such a quality. Ang skit na iyo ng ipinarrsa sa
kin ay npakabigt. The grief you cause me is very severe. Npakabte
ang kanya ng pagkatkot. Her fear reached a high degree. Ang saky
na to nang kutsro sa karumta ay npakatab`. The man the driver
has taken into his carriage is very stout. So also: ikl`.

(a) From a phrase: npakawala-ng-hiy`.



5. The prefix pati-.

512. pati- before a root expresses that such and such a movement
(of one's own person) is suddenly performed.

513. With mag- it denotes the voluntary performer. Barytone roots seem
to have accent shift. Ang bta y nagpatihig` sa sahg. The child
suddenly lay down on the floor. Nagpatihulg si Pdro sa bintna`
sa isa ng pagsumpng nang kanya ng pagkalko. Pedro suddenly threw
himself from the window in an attack of his madness. Nagppatihulg si
Hwn sa hagdnan kung sinsumpng nang kalokhan, kaniy` sya y itinli
nil sa isa ng halgi nang bhay. They tied Juan to one of the posts of
the house, because when he is assailed by a fit of insanity he throws
himself down the stairs. Magppatihulg daw sya mul sa ituktk nang
kanya ng blanggan pang sya y makataann. He says he will throw
himself from the roof of his prison so as to make an escape. Sya y
nagpatiluhd. He suddenly knelt down. Ang pagpapatiluhd nang bta`
ay sya ng nakasakt sa kanya ng thod. The boy's throwing himself on
his knees is what injured his knee.

514. The passive with m- denotes the involuntary
performer. Nppatihig` ang bwat mduls sa lugr na it. Every one
who slips at this place falls on his back. Hwag k ng magpaduls,
sapagkt bak ka mpatihig`. Don't slide, for you might fall
on your back. Sya y npatiluhd. He fell, landing in a kneeling
position. Npatiup sya sa kanya ng pagkduls. He fell into a sitting
position when he slipped. Nppatiup` ang bwat to ng magdan sa
lugr na it, dahiln sa maduls na lmot nang lpa`. Everyone who
comes through this place falls and lands in a sitting position,
owing to the slippery moss on the ground.



III. Irregular Derivatives.

(1) Transients and abstracts of the particles sa and -ging.

515. The particle sa has transient forms as follows:

(a) A normal transient: with p-sa, p-p-sa, n-sa, n-s-sa. Nsa
simbhan sil. They are (were) at church. Nssa simbhan sil nang
mangyre ang snog. They were at church when the fire occurred. Nang
psa simbhan sil.... When they went to church.... Ppsa simbhan
sil. They will go to church.

Plural: Nangsa simbhan sil. They are (were) at church.

(b) An accidental passive (of movement): m-pa-sa, m-p-pa-sa,
n-pa-sa-, n-p-pa-sa-; abstract: pagk-pa-sa. Nang mpasa simbhan
sil ay mallim n ang gab. When they got to the church, it was
already late at night. Mppasa simbhan sil sa gab. They will strike
the church at nightfall. ang pagkpasa simbhan a chance coming upon
the church.

516. The (transient) forms of -ging are ma-gng, ma-g-ging, na-gng,
na-g-ging; abstract: pa-gi-gng. Magpptol daw nang buhk ang Intsk
na si Yng pagigng binygan nya. The Chinaman Yeng says he will have
his queue cut when he gets baptized.



(2) Odd affixes.

517. ba- seems to appear in ba-lasng.

518. hin-, with irregular nasalization of initials, in one simple
derivative: Ang kanya ng himaty ay hind nalanan. Her fainting-fit
did not last long (maty). -himagsk (bagsk) does not occur, but
underlies many derivatives, especially maghimagsk ( 352,c) and
hmagskan ( 377,a). Many such underlying forms can be postulated
from the various transients with manghin- ( 357,b).

(a) With r: ang hintutro` the forefinger (tro`).

519. kala- in ang kalahte` a half; ang kalatimb` dipping on the
heels and rising, hands holding opposite ears (as trick or imposed
as a punishment), from hti` and timb` a well-bucket; these have
various further derivatives, see Index.

520. kasing- having such and such a quality in common with something
else; hence partly equivalent with ka-: Kasingklay nang ki ng
bro` ang kanya ng salawl. His trousers are of the same color as my
blouse. Ang bla ng it ay kasinglak nang itlg. This ball is the
same size as an egg. Si Hwn ay kasingpanty ni Pdro. Juan is of
the same height as Pedro.

521. mala- (Spanish ?) derogatory: ang malasutst a young lout,
a half-grown boy (literally: a bad whistler).

522. pala- expresses extreme tendency to such and such an action:

(a) pala- S -in, from oxytone roots: Sya y isa ng palabintngin. He
is very distrustful. Ang manga isd y palablkin sa tagraw. Fish
easily spoil in the hot season. ang palalungktin a melancholy person,
palaptkin a fowl given to cackling, palasumbngin tattle-tale,
palasutstin one who is always whistling, palatuntnin one who is
always trying to follow up his stolen property, palatuwin palatwin
one who is easily amused.

From root with shifted accent: palasktin person who is always
getting sick. Irregularly: palahnhin an animal given to neighing,
chirping, etc.

Lack of secondary accent: palaiykin a cry-baby.

(b) pala- (2) -in, from barytone roots: palagalitn a hot-head,
palagisingn a poor sleeper, palagutumn one who is always getting
hungry, palagulatn nervous person, palahilawn a kind of rice that
is hard to cook through; Palaputuln ang manga tingtng nang wals
na yt. The fibres of this broom are very brittle. palatakutn a
timorous person.

(c) pal- -an the place for such and such a thing: ang palisdan
a fish-pond, palsingsngan the ring-finger, the fourth finger,
paltuntnan a set of rules, rules of order.

523. ta- in ta-glid the side; with retraction of accent: -talkod.

524. tag- in names of seasons: tagraw, taguln, the two Philippine
seasons; ang taglamg cold weather, the (American) winter. With
accent-shift: tagint the hot season.

525. taga- person whose duty it is to do so and so, especially upon
some particular occasion: ang tagaals nang gwarnisyn nang kabyo
the one detailed to unharness the horses, tagablang accountant,
counter, tagakid sa gawan nang lbid the one who rolls up a rope
in the rope-factory; Ikw ay tagainm lmang. Your job here is only
to drink; so: tagakin one whose only duty is to eat. Tagaptol nang
khoy ang katungklan niy. He is delegated to cut wood. tagaslat the
one who does the writing; tagatah` one who does the sewing. So from:
hli, suls.

(a) With pag-: tagapagbigy, tagapagtanggl.

(b) With pag-pa- one whose duty it is to oversee the doing of so and
so: ang tagapagpaals nang tapn nang manga bte head bottle-opener;
tagapagpainm sa fiysta bartender at a fiesta; Isa ng tagapagpainm ay
isa ng tagapagbigy nang inumn sa manga hyop o manga bta`. So: ang
tagapagpakin who gives food to animals or children, tagapagpalgo` who
bathes children or horses, tagapagpaslat head writer, tagapagpatoto
witness.

526. tara-, tra- is felt to be a prefix in: ang to ng tarabko,
trabko a bald-headed person, felt as derivative from bko smooth,
unripe cocoanut.

527. -ro (Spanish) as suffix of agent; final vowel (or vowel plus
n or glottal stop) is lost: bangkro, sabungro, sipro (sipros,
plural); from derived word: Katipunros (ka-tipn-an,  423); from
compound word: bsag-ulro a brawler, ruffian (bsag-lo).



(3) Pronoun forms.

528. The various forms of the pronouns and objectivizing particles
show some regular derivation.

(a) n- with irregularities, for disjunctive forms: n-ang, n-i (si),
n-in n-il (sin sil), n-no (sno), n-ir, n-it, n-iyn, n-on
(iyn, yan); n-it (kit), n-iy (siy), n-il (sil). From the
prepositive form: n-tin, n-min, n-iniy.

Similarly, the particle naw`, root wa` pity.

(b) ka- for local and prepositive forms: ka-y (si), k-in (sin);
from the disjunctive form: ka-nno, ka-nit, ka-niy. ka-nil.

(c) With si compare s-no, with ang, a-n.

(d) Local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns (treated as
separate roots): d-ne (ir), d-to (it), d-iyn, d-on.

(e) Words of manner with ga-: ga-no, g-no (an), ga-yn (iyn). From
disjunctive forms: ga-nit, ga-niyn, ga-non. Cf. also gya like.

Of similar formation: Ang but nang halma ng it y gabtil nang
play. The seed of this plant is as large as a grain of rice (btil
a kernel of grain).

(f) san (for sa an?) is felt as a simple word.









III. LIST OF FORMATIONS.


The formations with irregular affixes (515 ff.) have been omitted
from this list.

The following regular features have been ignored:

(1) Prefixes beginning with n-; these are the actual-mode forms of
prefixes beginning with m-, and are treated in the same paragraphs
as the latter.

(2) Forms with doubling or reduplication of the root; also those with
accented reduplication (of root or prefix) expressing durative aspect;
these are treated in the same paragraphs as the corresponding forms
without reduplication.

(3) Secondary accent, when not peculiar to prefixes.

(4) Variations in position of accent.

The numbers refer to paragraphs.





A. FORMS WITHOUT PREFIX.

(1) No affix: 332. 336. 338. 341-346. 348. 358.

(2) Suffix only:
  -an 31. 334,c. 374. 377-381.
  -anan 377,b.
  -han, -hanan see -an.
  -hanin, -hin see -in.
  -in 334,c. 359. 367.
  -inan 377,b.
  -nan see -an.
  -nin see -in.

(3) Infix only:
  -in- 334,b,1. 359. 365. 366.
  -in- -um- 359,a.
  -um- 348. 349. 358.

(4) Infix and suffix:
  -in- -an 374.
  -um- -in 359,a.





B. FORMS WITH PREFIX.

i- 31. 334,a,2.b,2. 368. 373.
    i- -in- 368.
    ika- 413. 416.
    ik- 417.
    ikpa- 501.
    ikpag- 418.
    ikpagpa- 501,a.
    ikin ... see ik ...; the -in- expresses actual mode.
    ini- see i- -in-.
    ipa- 494.
    ipag- 369-371.
    ipag- -an- 369,a.
    ipagka- 414. 415.
    ipagkpa- 501,a.
    ipagma- 370.
    ipagpa- 495.
    ipaki- 394.
    ipakipa- 496.
    ipakipag- 395.
    ipang- 372.
    ipapang- 394,c.
    ipin ... see ip ...; the -in- expresses actual mode.

    ka- 31. 76. 77. 179. 183. 334,a,2. 398. 400-402.
    k- 403.
    ka- -an 419. 421-426.
    k- -an 428. 430. 431.
    ka- -anan 423,b.
    ka- -anin 421,a.
    ka- -in- 412.
    kka- 399. 404.
    kamag- 398,a.
    kamag- -an 423,b.
    kamaka- 398,a.
    kapa- -an 503.
    kpa- -an 503,a.
    kapag- 400,a. 486,c.
    kapang- 400,b.
    kapang- -an 421,b. 423,b.
    kappa- 486,b.
    kay- see ka-.
    kina- 412.
    kina- -an 419.
    kin- -an 260. 503.
    kin- -anin 421,a.
    kinapa- -an 503.
    kuma- 404.
    ma- 438 ff. 444. 449. 454.
    m- 463 ff. 469.
    ma- -an 451.
    m- -an 475.
    ma- -in 457.
    mag- 34. 334,a,1. 350. 353-356. 358.
    mag- -um- 352,c.
    mag- -an 352,d.
    mag- -in 352,d. 358,a.
    magka- 405. 408. 409,a.
    magk- 410. 411.
    magka- -an 427,a,c.
    magk- -an 430.
    magkaka- 409.
    magkaka- -an 427,d.
    magkinka- 412,a.
    magma- 352,c. 353,a.
    magm- 353,b.
    magmaka- 453,a.
    magpa- 489.
    magp- 489,d,e.
    magpa- -um- 489,b.
    magp- -an 498,a.
    magpaka- 499.
    magpakama- 499,a.
    magpakam- 499,a.
    magpapa- 489 f.
    magpati- 513.
    magsi- 385.
    magsipa- 488,d.
    magsipag- 386.
    magsipag- -an 386,b.
    magsipagka- 406.
    magsipagpa- 489,a.
    magsipang- 387.
    mi- 474.
    maipa- 507.
    mipa- 509.
    maipag- 450.
    maipang- 450.
    maka- 433 ff. 444. 453.
    mak- 458 ff. 469. 473. 479.
    mka- 470,a.
    maka- -an 443. 454,c.
    mka- -an 488.
    makapa- 504.
    makapag- 445. 447.
    makapagpa- 505.
    makpaki- 473,a.
    makapang- 448.
    makapang- -in 448,b.
    maki- 390.
    makipag- 391.
    makipag- -an 391,a.
    makipagka- -an 427,b.
    makipang- 392.
    mang- 334,a,4. 357. 358.
    mng- 358,e. f.
    mang- -in 357,a.
    manga- 442.
    mang- 467.
    manga- -an 421,a.
    mangagsi- 385,a.
    mangagsipag- 386,a.
    mangaka- 442.
    mangka- 442. 470,b.
    mangpa- 508,a.
    mapa- 506.
    mpa- 508.
    mpa- -an 510.
    mapag- 446. 455.
    mpag- 471.
    mapag- -an 452.
    mpag- -an 476.
    mpagka- -an 488,a.
    npaka- 511.
    mapang- 454,c. 456.
    mpang- 472.
    mpang- -an 477.
    mpati- 514.
    pa- 207. 481-484. 487.
    p- 487,d. 515,a.
    pa- -an 497.
    p- -an 497,b. 498.
    pa- -in 490.
    p- -in 490,a,b.
    pag- 34. 274. 334,a,1. 348-356.
    pag- -an 352,d. 375.
    pag- -anan 375,b.
    pag- -in 352,c. 360-363.
    pag- -um- 352,c.
    pagka- 274. 404. 433, ff. 444. 453,b.
    pagk- 274. 458 ff. 469.
    pagka- -an 420.
    pagk- -an 429.
    pagkaka- 405. 406. 407,a,b.
    pagkak- 410. 411.
    pagkka- 470,a.
    pagkaka- -an 427,a.
    pagkak- -an 430,a,b.
    pagkpa- 508,c.
    pagkapag- 445. 447.
    pagkpag- 471.
    pagkapang- 448.
    pagkapang- -in- 448,b.
    pagmama- 352,c. 353,a.
    pagmam- 353,b.
    pagpa- 488.
    pagpapa- 489.
    pagpap- -an 498,a.
    pagpapa- -um- 498,b.
    pagpapaka- 499.
    pagpapakama- 499,a.
    pagpapakam- 499,a.
    pai- 481,a.
    paka- -an 502.
    paka- -in 500.
    paki- 389.
    paki- -an 396.
    paki- -in 393.
    pakiki- 390.
    pakikipag- 391.
    pakikipag- -an 391,a.
    pakikipagka- -an 427,b.
    pakikipang- 392.
    pakipag- -an 396,b.
    panu- see pang-.
    pang- 334,a,4. 347. 357.
    pang- -an 376.
    png- -an 383.
    pang- -in 357,a. 364. 367,b.
    png- -in 367,c.
    panganga- -an 421,a. 422,a.
    pangpa- 486,a.
    papa- 485.
    ppa- 488.
    papa- -an 497,c.
    papag- -in 491. 491,b.
    papagpa- -in 493.
    papang- 492.
    pau- see pa-.
    pin... see p...; the -in- expresses actual mode.
    puma- 488.









INDEX OF WORDS.


The words are arranged by roots, in accordance with the speech-feeling,
so far as ascertainable. The forms dne, dto, diyn, don have,
however, been given separate places.

In using the index the sound-variations described in  334 should
be kept in view. The forms are given with fullest accentuation and
vocalism (iy for y, uw for w after consonant), regardless of actual
occurrence. For e see i, for o see u. Foreign r is under d, f under p,
v under b.

The brief indication of meaning after each form ignores shades of
meaning that would require long definitions; so especially factors
of involuntary or completed action and of ability (ka-, maka-, ma-)
and of accident or ability due to external causes (k-, mak-, m-).

The references to occurrence have been limited by considerations
of space; the numbers refer to page and line; when in heavy type,
to paragraphs of the Grammatical Analysis.

The following abbreviations are used: arch.: felt as archaic. C.:
Chinese. disj.: disjunctive form. E.: English. excl.: exclusive. id.:
the same meaning. incl.: inclusive. intr.: English definition to be
taken in intransitive sense. loc.: local. n.: name. pl.: the Tagalog
form is an explicit plural. prep.: prepositive. S.: Spanish [11]. tr.:
English definition to be taken in transitive sense.





A

a- see an, ang.

ab ah 151(14).

abak S. hemp 237(37).

-abla: pagabla a bothering; see Corrigenda.
  nangabla made trouble 239(29).
  kaabalahn trouble 302(14).

-abng: umabng watch for 226(23).
  umabng is lying in wait 64(41).
  nakaabng is on guard 48(12).

bito S. vestment 98(20).

abynte-kuwtro S. twenty-fourth 110(11).

abbot belongings 118(23).

-bot (a) overtake: abtan be reached 92(19). 299(38).
  inabtan was overtaken 52(42). 84(34). 250(30).
  inabtan is being reached 301(34).
  pabot let oneself be overtaken 301(21).
  paabot pl. 46(11).
  nagpabot let himself be overtaken 52(28).
  --(b) with accent-shift; reach for, take: umabt reach for
  231(5). 237(20). reached for 231(6).
  umabt reaches for 62(14).
  pagabt a reaching for 231(7).
  nagabt is handing 237(17).
  pagaabt a handing 237(19).
  inabt was taken 30(10).
  inabot is being reached for 246(3).
  iyabt be handed 249(13).
  iniyabt was handed 30(13). 106(21).
  iniyabt is being handed 249(12).
  kabtan one of two who hand to each other 278(4).
  maabt he reached 286(28).
  maabt will be reached 20(27).
  naabt was reached 286(27).
  pagkaabt a reaching for see Corrigenda.
  nabt was reached 296(13).
  pagkabt a reaching for see Corrigenda.
  paabt caused to be handed 300(23).
  nagpaabt caused to be handed 304(21).
  ipinaabt was caused to be handed 52(11).

-ga: umga morning
50(40). 62(36). 66(25). 120(19). 163(23). 190(24). 241(39). 262(5).
  inumga is being overtaken by morning 245(42).
  magpaumga let oneself be overtaken by morning 304(18).
  aghan be done early 250(30).
  maga early 312(27).
  paga early rice 300(3).
  pga be very early 301(36).
  paghan be done very early 308(36).

agd soon 32(22). 42(31). 48(26). 265(1).
  agd-agd immediately 36(5). 48(37.40). 265(1).

gaw that snatched 220(17).
  agw snatched 222(16).
  umgaw snatched 226(24).
  ingaw was snatched 250(11).
  agawn a grabbing together 260(3).
  pagaagawn a scrambling 108(25).
  nagssipagagawn are scrambling 108(24).
  nagaw can be seized 40(8).
  makgaw seize 108(31).

aginldo S. Christmas present; as n. 118(6).
  npangaginlduhan was given as a Christmas present 298(26). 307(21).

gos stream 16(3).
  umgos is streaming 44(42).

guwa-bindta S. holy-water 96(28).

has snake 120(21).

-hit: panghit razor 232(17).
  nanghit did shaving 167(2).
  inahtan was shaved 250(32).

-hon: umhon go up 116(18). went up 226(25).
  umhon is going up 110(20).
  hon will go up 263(26).
  paghon a going up 226(27).
  nagsihon went up, pl. 118(13).
  ipinahon was caused to go up 120(16).

akla` opinion 20(8). 98(15). 271.
  pangakla panukla` thought 16(9). 224(40). 226(1).
  nagakla` thought, planned 24(17). 50(13).
  inakla` was thought 18(17.24).
  inakla` is being thought 11(86).
-kap: nkap is embracing 66(40).

-kay (a) lead: umkay is leading 22(31).
  inkay was led 26(36).
  (b) with accent-shift inaky young of animal 102(20). 247(13).

kin prep. and loc. of ak: my, me, by me 165. 169. 182.

-akiyt: umakiyt climb 22(39). climbed 16(15).
  akiyt will climb 22(36).
  pagakiyt a climbing 24(6).
  nagssiakiyt are climbing 108(31).
  akiyatn will be climbed 16(15).
  makaakiyt be able to climb 108(28).
  makakiyt will be able to climb 22(37).
  maakiyt be able to be climbed 16(13).
  nakiyt got carried up 295(3).
  paakiyt ask to be climbed with or for; caused to be climbed or
  climbed for; climbing up 106(14). 299(6.37). 301(22.29).
  paakiyt will ask to be climbed with or for 301(38). 302(1).
  napaakiyt asked to be climbed for 311(37).

aklt book 154(28).
  akltan library 210(12). See bhay.

-akm`: inakman was prepared for 70(29).

ak I 16(17). 152(14). 63. Cf. kin, ko.

ko` person relieved 220(19).
  pangko` 233(35).
  mangko` promise 44(13).
  inko` was pledged for 220(19). 243(31).
  ipinangko` was promised 34(10).
  pagkapangko` a having promised 44(22). 287(29).

alala souvenir, present 72(37). 221(3).
  pangalala memory 116(24).
  alalahnin be minded 104(33).
  alalahnin will be minded 243(34).
  inalala is being remembered 243(32).
  naalala was remembered 202(36).
  nalala was recalled 30(16). 72(23). 100(13).
  nalala is remembered. malala be recalled 86(3).
  paalala caused to be given as a souvenir 299(8).
  pagpapaalala a causing to be remembered 292(22).

-alga`: nagalga` is attending to 311(28).

alagd assistant 114(12).

alhas (S.) jewelry 102(24).

lak wine, liquor 221(6).

-alala see alala.

-lam (a) know: mlman be known 22(35). 298(9).
  mllman will be known 42(37).
  nlman was known 26(32).
  nllman is known 24(32).
  mpagalman be generally known 60(35).
  palam causing himself to be known (as leaving) 183(17).
  ipinalam was caused to be known (as leaving) 32(9). 306(4).
  paalman be made known 308(3).
  paalman will be made known 42(35).
  napalam caused himself to be known (as leaving) 54(12)
  --(b) with accent-shift: alm known 300(32).
  makialm interfere 58(42). 264(18).
  pinakialamn was looked after 265(32). 290(32).
  kaalm accomplice 267(1) and Corrigenda.
  nakalm knows 42(14).
  pagkalm a knowing 82(9). 272(6).
  nalamn got known 118(1). 298(14).
  mpagalamn get generally known 118(42). 298(24).
  ipaalm be given out to be known 307(3).
  ipinaalm was given out to be known 307(4).

alasngko S. five o'clock 180(7).

alass S. six o'clock 122(6).

alaskuwtro S. four o'clock 172 (42).
  magalaskuwtro will be four o'clock 66(34).

alastrs S. three o'clock 66(32).

lat salty 218(37).
  kalat kaylat what saltiness 267(34).
  kaaltan saltiness 267(27).

-lay: iniylay was offered 16(5).

li aunt, madam 118(14). 151(36). 59. 256.
  magli aunt and niece or nephew 242(1).

alikabk dust 245(26).
  maalikabk dusty 289(1).

alla` servant, domesticated 54(7). 62(32).
  alilin be domesticated 106(40).
  pagkpaalla` a making a servant of oneself 104(2).

aln which? 22(37). 48(18.25.36). 97.
  aln-aln pl. 97.

alintna in spite 277.
  inalintna was paid attention to 88(29).

alpin slave 90(36).

-alipust`: alipustan be mistreated 72(39).

als go away 192(36).
  umals go away 52(22). went away 20(36).
  als will go away 192(2).
  pagals a going away 108(22).
  nagssials are going away 114(27).
  nangagsials went away, pl. 120(39).
  inals was removed 30(10).
  iniyals was removed 248(6).
  alisn be removed from 250(33).
  lsan a going away together 257(23).
  naglsan went away together 236(14).
  naglsan are going away together 96(15).
  ikinaals was the cause of going away 271(41).
  makaals be able to go away 78(11).
  makaals will be able to go away 42(38). 281(25).
  nakaals has gone away 282(21).
  pagkaals a having gone away 80(3).
  mals will be removed 96(34).
  papaals going away 300(39).
  pinaals was caused to go away 32(34).
  pinaals is being caused to go away 64(23).
  ipinaals was caused to be removed 70(4). 306(5).
  mapaals be able to be caused to go away 122(21).
  ikinpaals was the cause of ordering to go away 310(5).
  ikinppaals is the cause of ordering to go away 310(8).
  tagaals remover 315(33).
  tagapagpaals head remover 316(1).

alitaptap firefly 40(15).

Alfnso S. n. 309(6).

-als S.: pagaals a raising 70(2).

altr S. altar 96(17).

aluwgi (S.) carpenter 56(35).
  pagaaluwgi carpentry 58(2).

am father 30(26). 59.
  magam father and child 242(2).
  magaam father and children 242(27).
  aman uncle 247(26).
  magaman uncle and nephew or niece 242(25).
  inam godfather 247(17).

min prep. and loc. of kam: our, us, by us excl. 165. 169.
  nmin disj. of us, by us 163.
  ummin confessed 226(28).
  amnin will be owned up to 243(36).
  inmin is being owned up to 243(35).

Amrika S. America 189(29).

amerikna S. European coat 281(5).

Amerikno S. American 56(30).

-ampt: maampt be able to be stopped 46(8). 259(30).

-mo` (S. ?): inmo` was caressed 84(32).
  inam-am` was repeatedly caressed 86(4).

mong (S.) sir, Father 20(37). 50(40).

-mot sell, of other than professional merchant: ummot sold 226(30).
  inamtan was sold to 246(41).

an see an.

-nak: magnak family 165(17). 242(17).
  kamagnak relative 54(22). 266(34).
  kamagankan clan 112(26). 277(14).
  angkn one's family 112(19). 260(39).

ank son, daughter 30(25).
  pangank infant 54(6).
  kapangnkan birth, birthday 275(43).
  pangangank a giving birth 220(24).
  naipangngank has just been born 36(16). 288(4).

Andrs S. n. 26(30).

Andy S. short-n. 208(1).

ni harvest 191(32).

-nib: pangnib danger 46(15).
  mapangnib dangerous 289(21).
  umnib make one's sleeping-mat overlap 226(30).
  iynib be made to overlap 248(7).
  magkanib overlapping each other 269(38).

nim six 52(44). 67.
  pangnim number six 225(38).
  ikanim iknim sixth 273(17).
  maknim six times 298(32).

-annaw: inannaw was scrutinized 66(19).

aniyya invitation 219(28).
  inaniyhan was invited 250(34).
  inaniyhan is being invited 203(26).

aniy` aspect 20(12).
  naganiy` is behaving 40(40).
  pagaaniy` behavior 108(33).

antimno S. beforehand 20(39). 262(1).

antk sleepiness 84(14).
  nagantk is sleepy 231(42).
  nakapagantk causes to get sleepy 108(8).

an, an what? what kind of? 18(6). 22(21). 97. 179. 190. 264.
  an-an pl. 114(16). 97.
  nangan did what? 239(29).
  pno how? 155(21). 300(8).
  papno how? 18(11). 301(1).
  gano gno how great? 28(2). 316(28). 190. 247. See also san.

annas S. custard-apple, Anona reticulata L. 76(19).

nong S. short-n. 286(38).

ang the, a 45. 61-71. 75. 78. 108. 109. 115. 116. 119. 126. 130-133.
161. 168. 196. 246. 248. 253.
  nang disj. the, a, of the, by the; when
  45. 119. 116-194. 253. 317(2). 340. 341 (3,d).

-angk see -nak.

angkn appropriated 60(20).
  umangkn appropriate 226(32).
  angkinn be appropriated 62(6). 243(39).
  inangkn was appropriated 16(8).
  inangkn is being appropriated 243(37).
  mangkn get appropriated 308(20).

pat four 24(37). 67.
  pat only four 116(16).
  pat-pat four at a time 223(41).
  pangpat number four 225(36).
  ikapat ikpat fourth 82(16).
  makpat makpat four times 298(36).

frika S. Africa 189(4).

-apt see atp.

apy fire 22(6).
  inapuyn was inflamed 94(29) and Corrigenda.

ral doctrine 140(31). 223(23).
  umral arch. teach morals 233(22).
  magral study 18(7). 209(13).
  magral will study 217(28).
  nagral studied 30(5).
  nagral is studying 90(31). 233(22).
  pagaral a studying 28(3).
  magsipagral study pl. 262(34).
  nagssipagral are studying 38(5).
  arlan be taught morals 250(36).
  araln study-room 238(6).
  pagarlan be learned 168(1).
  pinagarlan was studied 18(14).
  pinagarlan is being studied 255(4).
  makapagral be able to study 34(33).
  pinapagral was caused to study 305(19).
  ipapagral be used for causing to study 88(11).
  paraln school 26(32).

arro S. plow 232(2).
  pagaarro a plowing 232(1).
  magaarro plowman 242(38).
  ararhin be plowed 243(40).

raw sun, day 16(11). 66(1). See also madal`, kalahti`.
  raw-gab day and night 94(31). 257. 331.
  raw-raw every day 58(7). 331.
  kaarawn holiday 110(17).
  tagraw sunny season 34(27). 315(29).

ary ouch 151(15).

ri` that owned 42(2). 220(22). See also my.
  nagri` owns 40(17).
  pagari` possession 62(24). 102(31).
  mari` be possible 168(18).
  mari` will be possible 16(27). 46(12).
  nari` was owned, became possible 104(12). 285(29).
  nari` is possible 152(18).
  pagkari` possibility 80(30).

aritmtika S. arithmetic 82(1).

rmas arms S. arms 106(26). 235(4).

arsubspo S. archbishop 96(10).

artsta S. artist 90(10).

sa expectation 72(7). 209(24).
  pagsa hope 56(19). 76(13).

-sal: insal conduct 34(24).

asan` (S. ?) a tree, Pterocarpus Indicus Willd. 263(25).

aswa husband, wife 30(39). 34(5).
  magaswa take a wife 78(38). married couple 30(25). 242(4).
  magaswa will take a wife 232(2).
  nagaswa took a wife 80(6).
  pagaaswa the taking a husband or wife 80(27). 92(9).

sim sourness 297(10).
  masim sour 289(1).

asn salt 30(11).
  asnn be salted 250(37).

aspil S. pin 260(7.21).

so dog 18(8).
  inso is being chased 243(41).
  naso has been chased 284(9).
  nso got chased 292(42).

as smoke 64(33).
  asuhn chimney 261(10) and Corrigenda.
  pinaasuhn was smoked 308(4).

askal S. sugar 198(31).

asl S. blue 122(2).
  kayasl what blueness 267(35).

asuwng vampire 34(30).
  magasuwng-asuwngan play vampire 237(9).
  magasuwng-asuwngan will play vampire 237(7).
  nagasuwng-asuwngan played vampire 34(26).

at t and; for, that, though
15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 213. 289. 306. 312. 317.

tas that prompted 98(33).
  iniytas was enjoined 54(42).

atal S. coffin 116(1).

at (C.) oldest sister 59. 256.
  magat oldest sister with brother or sister 242(5).

tin prep. and loc. of tyo: our, us, by us, incl. 165. 169.
  ntin disj., of us, by us 163.

atp roofing 118(27).
  pangatp shingle 224(40).
  aptn be roofed 250(38).

tis custard-apple, Anona squamosa L. 76(20).
  atsan grove of tis trees 261(10).

atsra sour preserves 163(17). 299(11).

wa` (a) pity 46(22).
  kwwa` piteous 80(12). 267(29).
  ikinawa` was the cause of pitying 272(1).
  nawa` pitied 285(16).
  pagkawa` a pitying 285(40).
  nagmmakawa` is calling forth pity 44(11). 288(36).
  (b) accent shifted: aw` overcome by pity 222(17).
  kaawan be the object of pity 182(39).
  kinaawan is the object of pity 275(1).
  naw` pray 47. 225.

-way: nagway is fighting 232(4).
  pagaway a fighting 306(18).
  nakipagway fought along 264(24).
  nakkipagway fights along 264(21).
  kaway enemy 18(11).
  kaway there has just been quarreling 267(12).
  mapagawy quarrelsome 186(33).
  mpagway be matched 297(10).

wit song 280(39).
  awtan be sung to 250(38).
  magwtan sing together 183(11).
  nagwtan are singing together 236(27).

ay y is; then 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 89. 119.

yap condiment 244(2) and Corrigenda.
  nangyap ate relishes 239(31).
  inyap was used as a condiment 244(1).
  payap given to be used as a condiment 299(12).
  nagpayap served a relish 302(28).

yaw (a) not desired 30(5.37). 40(30). 239. 267.
  pagyaw unwillingness 226(32).
  (b) accent shifted: umayw refused, left the table 231(12).
  pagayw refusal 94(17). 231(9).
  nakaayw has left the table 286(25).
  pagkayw dislike 70(13).

yon according to 40(3). 278.
  umyon agreed 30(4).
  nakayon has come to be in accordance 281(3).
  paayn conforming 300(13).

yos formation 48(4.15) 90(11).
  mapagyos be able to be straightened 287(6).
  mappagyos will be able to be put into shape 287(7).





B(V)

b interrogative particle 47. 215. 223. 229. 299.

-bba` (a) bumba` became low 226(35).
  kababan lowness, south 62(15). 163(26). 241(19).
  mabba` low, humble 104(27). 289(2).
  (b) Accent shifted: bab` low; come down 223(16) and see pko`.
  bumab` descended 36(35).
  ibab` south 56(24). 163(26). See also band.

-bbag: bbbag will fight 226(37).
  nagbbabg are fighting each other 237(25).
  pagbababg a fighting together 252(14).
  nakipagbabg fought along 264(37).

-bbaw: bumbaw became shallow 258(40).
  ibbaw top surface 66(28).
  kababwan shallowness 88(30).
  mabbaw 88(26). 220(8).

babyi babi female, woman 30(32). 163(13). nagbab-babayhan played
woman 237(14).

bboy pig 36(13).

-badiy: nibadiy got spread abroad 24(33).

bag really? 22(21). 47. 216. 290. 219. 317(3).

-bagbag: nabagbag grew uneasy 120(37).

-bgal: mabgal slow 18(4).

bgay thing, circumstance 28(1). 36(22).
  bgay-bgay various things 116(33).
  ibinbgay is being adapted 248(9).
  nbbgay is suitable 78(34).

bagiy hurricane 273(8).

-bagsk: ibinagsk was dropped 271(24).

-bagsk: mabagsk violent 42(3). 44(30).
  mababagsk pl. 102(19).
  maghimagsk come to violence 314(27).
  naghimagsk came to violence 236(5).
  nagsipaghimagsk revolted, pl. 263(12).
  nanghimagsk resorted to violence 241(18).
  nagsipanghimagsk pl. 263(30).
  hmagskan internal warfare 258(13). 314(28).
  naghmagskan fought each other 236(23).
  nagsipaghmagskan pl. 263(13).
  paghihmagskan internal warfare 52(42). 116(12).
  panghihmagskan id. 241(11).

bgo new; before 18(37). 36(32). 291.
  kabbgo newly 54(6).
  nabbgo has been changed 64(35).

bah` flood 98(17). 110(23).
  bumbah` there is a flood 110(19).
  pagbah` a flooding 110(21).

bahgi part 82(17).

bahagiy slight 201(21).

bhay (a) house 34(21). See also kpit, tnod.
  bhay-akltan library-building 210(11).
  bhay-bta` womb 210(23).
  bhay-gya` womb of animal 210(24).
  bhay-phayagn newspaper-office 210(25).
  bhay-pmahalan government building 292(21).
  Bhay-panki place-n. 210(25).
  bhay-pinthan paint-house 210(26).
  bhay-sanglan pawnshop 252(22).
  bhay-tlyan inn 112(38).
  bahy-bahy various houses 52(15). 110(36).
  magbhay build a house 232(5).
  pamamhay household 70(26).
  kabahayn house containing several dwellings 120(3). furnishings
  of a house 276(5).
  --(b) Accent shifted: bahy tame, shy 222(19).
  nabbahy is shy 286(29).

bat good conduct 165(1).
  kabtan kindness, virtue 74(41).
  mabat well-behaved 84(11).
  mababat pl. 34(35).

bka S. cow 112(40).

bkal iron 201(30). 220(5).

baks mark, in: baks-sgat mark of a wound 46(6).

bakasiyn S. vacation 26(35).

-bakl: bakl-bakl uneven 220(2).

bkit why? 18(7). 236.

bakiy` sandal 245(20).

bkod fence 266(6).
  pangbkod used in making a fence 225(2).
  bakran be fenced in 250(40). yard, grounds 34(38).

bkol open bamboo basket without handle 74(5).

bla any 186(18). 271(22). 66. 132.

bla S. bullet 52(36).

balahbo fur 212(18).

bale person whose son or daughter one's daughter or son has married;
old friend 207(35). 266(5).
  magbale two people whose children have intermarried 242(8). 269(42).
  magbabale pl. 240(28).
  kabale one's bale 266(2).
  magkabale two fellow bale 269(40).

blak plan 287(11).
  binlak was planned 18(34).

blang locust 267(27).

balt skin, shell 16(18). 30(10).

bli S. matter, harm 52(6). 42(5).
  balatn be peeled 200(24).

bli` break 219(29).
  ipinagkkabal` is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7).
  makable` be able to break 281(26).
  nable` was broken 284(32).
  nabble` is interrupted 104(4).
  mabalan be broken in 70(18).
  nabalan was broken in 62(27).

-balk: bumalk come back 66(17). 233(17). came back 20(40).
  bbalk will come back 32(27).
  bumbalk is coming back 66(24).
  magbalk come back to 233(18).
  nagbalk came back to 72(11). 283(4).
  pagbalikn be come back to 255(5).
  pagbbalikn will be come back to 32(28). 255(5).
  makabbalk will be able to go back 56(31).
  pabalk going back 299(13.27.39).
  pagpapabalk a causing to go back 48(20).
  pinabalk was caused to go back 68(41).
  ipinabbalk is being sent back 48(7).

balkat shoulder 48(19).

balta` that reported; famed 34(29). 36(2).
  magbalta` relate 42(24).
  nagbalta` related 118(35).
  pamamalta` a relating of stories 102(12).
  ibalta` be reported 88(39).
  ibinalta` was reported 32(8).
  ipamalta` be related 275(18).
  ipinamalta` was related 22(27).
  binalitan was narrated to 250(42).
  pagbablitan a reporting by many 102(13).
  pinakibalitan was ascertained by report 102(42). 265(30).
  nbalta` got related 46(18).
  nbbalta` gets related 48(26).
  pagkbalta` a getting narrated 272(42).
  mbalitan be learned by report 56(18).
  nbalitan was learned by report 38(12).

Balwag place-n. 173(9). See byan, dan.

balbad casoy, Anacardium occidentale L. 76(20).

baluktt crooked 218(38).
  bal-baluktt variously bent 290(33).
  bumaluktt bend; bent 226(39). 233(25).
  magbaluktt bend in quantity 233(24).
  pagbabaluktt a bending 48(15).

baln a well 24(37).

-blot: bumlot roll up 226(40). 233(27).
  magblot roll up in quantity; wrap oneself up 233(26).
  magbalt roll up variously 52(21).
  nagbalt rolled up variously 52(35).
  nagsipagbalt pl. 118(13).
  nablot has been wrapped up 284(10).
  nabblot is wrapped up 36(39).
  nblot got wrapped up 198(8). 255(40).

bamb club 70(17).
  pangbamb club for beating 225(2).
  nangbbamb is beating 239(32).
  bambuhn be beaten 70(29).
  binamb was beaten 72(10).

-banl: kabnlan act of piety 78(33).

banyad gentle 48(17).

bnda S. band, orchestra 48(31).
  bnda-ng-msika band of music 48(30).

band direction 18(22).
  band ng ibab` south
  mband-ng-ibab` get turned towards the south 296(21).
  band ng kaliw`, knan see dlo.
  band ng kataasn north
  nbband-ng-kataasn is turned toward the north 296(20).
  bandhin direction headed for 294(24).

bandla` S. flag 234(14).

bang sleeping-mat 62(35).

banty watcher 80(18).
  banty-play rice-guard 228(17).
  banty-pint` door-keeper 78(31).
  magbanty stand guard 38(14).
  pagbabanty a guarding 36(18).
  bantayn be guarded 251(2).
  bantyan sentry-box 248(16).

Bantg family-n. 165(17).

bangn granary 270(33).

-banggt: binanggt was mentioned 90(23).
  nbanggt got mentioned 50(11).

bangk` canoe 20(3).
  mamangk` go boating 28(12).
  magsipamangk` pl. 263(21).
  nammangk` is boating 20(2).
  nagssipamangk` pl. 98(17).
  pamamangk` a boating 239(32).
  pagbabangkan boating-party 112(13).
  bangkro boatman 80(34). 316(11).

bangky corpse 46(30).

bngko S. banking-house 227(18).

bangk` S. bench 30(29).

-bang`: mabang` fragrant 278(15).
  pabang` perfume 222(38).

-bngon: nagbbngon is getting up 70(36).
  kabbngon there has been getting up 267(13).

bapr S. steamship 56(24).

-bar: bar-bar unruly 273(37).

barha S. cards 173(3).

barso S. arm 138(31).

barbro S. barber 24(35).

barl gun 36(20).
  nagsipamarl went shooting, pl. 28(25).
  pamamarl a shooting 230(9).
  pinagbbarl is being shot 56(26).
  barl-barlan toy-gun 261(35). 293(18).
  maipabarl be caused to be shot 52(23). 312(9).
  nbarl got shot 56(29).

briyo S. district of a town 70(11).

bro` blouse 205(20).
  magbar` put on one's clothes 237(26).
  pamamro` clothing 110(33).

-bsa: pagbsa reading 227(3).
  binsa was read 299(18).
  binbsa is being read 172(6).
  bashan be read to 251(2).
  basahn reading-room 137(16).
  mabsa be able to be read 186(2).
  nabsa has been read 244(3). 284(11).
  mbsa get read 52(12).
  nbsa got read 86(19). 293(2).
  pabsa gospel-reading ordered by a communicant 251(13).

-bas`: nagssipagbas` are getting themselves wet 110(23).
  nakabas` caused to be wet 201(22).

bsag a breaking, in:
  bsag-lo a head-smashing, free-for-all fight 262(7).
  bsag-ulro ruffian 316(13).
  basg broken 30(10).
  mabsag be broken 30(8). 283(21). 284(35).
  nabsag has been broken 296(14).
  mbsag get broken 293(4).

-bast`: nagbast` packed up 232(5).
  pagbabastan a packing up together 118(17).

bso S. drinking-glass 137(39).

bta` boy, girl 30(33). See also bhay.
  binta` young man 90(28).
  pagkabta` childhood 86(22). 285(41).

bataln platform of house 72(14).

Bathla` God 54(42). 59.

-btis: nagbbtis is fording 104(42).
  bintis was forded 244(4).

bat stone 30(7). 220(4).
  binat was stoned 303(30).

bo cocoanut-shell 108(32). 163(13).

bo widower, widow 163(29). 256.
  nabo was widowed 80(29). 285(29).

bal S. box, trunk 268(8).

bon provisions 28(27).

-ban: pagbaban a burying 54(29).
  mban get buried 54(17).
  magpaban cause to be buried 54(24).
  ipinaban was caused to be buried 54(30).

bwal forbidden 218(39).

bwang garlic 36(22).

bwat every 24(40). 48. 66. 132. 246.

-bwi`: bbawin will be taken back 244(4) and Corrigenda.
  ikinabwi` was the cause of being taken back 272(3).

-bya` (a) bayan be permitted 46(37). 48(13).
  binayan was permitted 78(31).
  binbayan is being permitted 286(38).
  paubya` permitted 300(9).
  magppabya` will be neglectful 106(32).
  nagpabya` was neglectful 302(29).
  pabayan be left alone 308(7).
  pinabayan was left alone, not interfered with
  168(23). 169(42). 308(6).
  (b) Accent shifted: pabay` neglectful 300(25).
  kapabayan neglectfulness 310(39).
  pabayan be permitted 52(8). 237(29). 308(34).

baybas see biybas.

byad payment 54(9).
  byad-tang debt-payment 178(29).
  bayd paid 222(22).
  magbyad pay 54(23).
  nagbyad paid 232(6).
  bbayran will be paid to 54(29).
  binayran was paid 54(11).
  binbayran is being paid for 74(3).
  pagbayran be settled with 54(32).
  pagbbayran will be settled for 58(27).
  pinagbayran was settled for 255(6).
  pinagbbayran is being atoned for 74(21).
  makabbyad will be able to pay 114(41).

byan town, district 22(27). See also kpit, to.
  bya-ng-Balwag the town of Baliuag 20(3).
  bya-ng-Kamlig 92(15).
  bya-ng-Mallos 38(5).
  bya-ng-Marikna 96(38).
  bya-ng-Maynla` 256(30).
  bya-ng-San-Migl 50(14).
  bayn-bayn various towns 50(8).
  nammyan is dwelling in a town 50(34).
  kababyan fellow-townsman 60(12). 267(3). 291(37).
  magkababyan two or more fellow-townsmen 26(31). 270(10.17).
  makabyan patriotic 288(30).

bayw wife's brother, sister's husband 54(8).
  magbayw two men, one of whom has married the other's sister 242(9).

-byo: ibyo far side 80(36).

-bay: pangbay pestle 225(3).
  magbay pound rice 232(7).
  magbabyo rice-pounder 242(40).

baygin a tree, Pterospermum 237(39).

bayng palm-leaf sack 74(5).

bbas jester 98(30).

bibg mouth 30(20).

Biga place-n. 116(25).

bigs hulled rice 104(15).
  magbigs hull rice 232(8).
  magbibgas rice-dealer 242(41).
  bigasn be supplemented with rice 251(3). containing uncooked
  rice 261(10).
  bgsan rice-mill 203(3).
  Bgsa-ng-Sumlong-at-Kasamahn Rice-Mill of Sumulong and Company
  210(34).

bigt weight 226(36).
  kabigatn heaviness 158(12).
  nakabbigt is making heavy 32(10).
  mabigt heavy, grave 58(34).
  mabibigt pl. 118(22).
  pabigt weighting 110(7).
  npakabigt too severe 313(10).

bigy that given 220(24).
  bigy-lob favor 210(27).
  pagbibigy-lob a doing favors 60(23). 235(26).
  nagbigy gave 76(35).
  nagbbigy is giving 60(38).
  pagbibigy a giving 50(30).
  ibigy be given 42(43).
  ibbigy will be given 16(28).
  ibinigy was given 20(14).
  ibinbigy is being given 40(11).
  bigyn be given to 26(2).
  bbigyn will be given to 74(42).
  binigyn was given to 32(15).
  bgyan receiver 258(22).
  kabgyan one of two who give to each other 277(36).
  mapagbigy over-indulgent 289(25).
  tagapagbigy hander-out 315(41).

-bigks: nagbbigks is pronouncing 231(24).
  binbigks is being pronounced 98(38).

bigl` suddenly 82(40).
  pabigl` in sudden manner 68(10).

bigt strangled 223(24).
  bumigt strangled 227(3).
  pagbigt a strangling 227(4).
  nagbigt strangled himself 233(29).
  pagbibigt a strangling oneself 233(29).
  bigtihn be strangled 22(22).
  bigthan gallows 279(19).

bha cigarette-stub 205(21).

bhag captive 233(1).

bihsa` skilled 46(12).

bihra` seldom, rare 40(26). 42(21). 72(29). 106(39). 110(29). 112(13).
  magkbihra` occur at odd times 114(27). 271(9).

bhis that donned 220(26).
  bihs dressed up 222(23).
  nagbhis dressed himself up 232(10).
  nagbbhis is dressing himself up 32(37). 96(21).
  magsipagbhis dress up, pl. 262(35).
  makapagbhis have dressed oneself 96(24).
  pinapagbhis was ordered to dress himself 32(14).

bik young pig 72(36).

-bil`: kabil` other side 16(23). 266(6).
  magkbil` be on both sides 16(7). 271(11).

blang number 24(5).
  bilng counted 222(24).
  pagblang a counting 285(24).
  bbilngin will be counted 24(4).
  mablang having a number 114(1).
  pagkblang count 291(2).
  tagablang counter 315(34).

bilangg` prisoner 258(24).
  ibbilangg` will be put into prison 100(28).
  ibinilangg` was put into prison 248(12).
  blanggan prison 201(31).
  nbilangg` got jailed 38(2). 198(1).
  ipabbilangg` will be caused to be put in prison 100(15).

bils wife's sister's husband 242(11).
  magbils two men whose wives are sisters 242(10).

bilo large flat basket 74(5). 108(17).

bil that bought 308(26).
  bil nang bil keeps buying 177(8).
  pangbil used for buying 255(34).
  bumil buy 120(19).
  pagbil a buying 223(21).
  magbil sell 249(22).
  nagbil sold 233(30).
  nagbbil is selling 233(31).
  pagbibil a selling 252(19).
  namil bought in quantity 239(33).
  nammil is shopping 249(9).
  bbilhn will be bought 203(18).
  binil was bought 163(40).
  pinamil was bought in quantity 246(41).
  ipagbil be sold 98(36).
  ipinabil was sold 249(21).
  ipinagbbil is being sold 74(8).
  binilhn was bought from 251(5).
  pinagbilhn was sold to 255(8).
  blhan market 258(24).
  ikabil be the cause of buying 186(10).
  nakbil happened to buy 56(38).
  mbbil will get bought 203(37).
  pabilhn be caused to buy 34(5).
  makapagpabil be able to cause to be bought 286(39).

blin commission, errand 221(27).

-bilmt: pamilmt used as fish-pole 249(28).

blog circle 112(2).
  bilg rounded, round 222(25).
  bumlog turned on a lathe 227(6).
  namlog turned 188(26).
  binlog was turned 244(5).
  binblog is being turned 244(6).
  kabilgan roundness 38(17). 152(17). 276(27).
  nbblog gets turned 293(36).
  pabilg in a circle, spherically 46(40). 48(4). 110(41).

-bendisiyn S.: magbendisiyn give blessing 96(26).
  nagbbendisiyn is blessing 98(3).
  pagbebendisiyn a blessing 54(32).
  binbendisyunn is being blessed 114(19).
  pagkabendisiyn a having blessed 64(29).
  pagkbendisiyn a having chanced to bless 56(8).
  pabendisyunn be caused to be blessed 54(17).

bendta S.: holy 96(25).

-biniyg: nagbbiniyg is baptizing 98(2).
  binygan person baptized 314(20).

bintna` S. window 70(30).

bintng suspicion 36(29).
  nagbintng suspected 38(24).
  pagbintangn be suspected 20(9).
  pinagbintangn was suspected 16(21).
  nppagbintangn gets suspected 20(35).
  palabintngin given to suspicion 315(7).

bing deaf 86(23). 167(8).
  ikinabing was the cause of being deaf 295(17).
  nakabbing causes deafness 219(42).
  nbing got deaf 295(12).

bngit edge, brink 180(34).
  bumngit went to the brink 227(7).
  ibinngit was put on the edge 248(13).
  biningtan was approached up to the brink 251(7).
  kinbbingtan is been on the brink of 52(31).
  napabngit go to the brink 312(2).

birtd S. occult quality 60(10).

bro` joke 220(27).
  pangbibro` a joking 40(39).

birke S. blow-gun bullet 212(31).

bsbol E. baseball 48(2).
  nagbbsbol is playing baseball 135(28).

bisg arm, stick 70(28). 84(10).

bista S. visitor, visitors 305(5). chapel 251(13).

bsiyo S. vice 163(21). 221(14).

bisty sieve 74(5).
  magbibisty screener 242(38).

bitk crack 32(5).

-bitw: binitwan was let go of 66(34). 254(24).
  mangkabitw relax their hold 78(15).

-btay: ipabtay be caused to be hanged 52(6).

bitbt that carried by a part of it 122(2).
  binitbt was carried 52(37).
  pagkbitbt the way of holding 253(24).

-bitw: bumitw let go 174(22).
  bitwan be let go of 76(10). 254(25).
  binitwan was let go of 44(22).
  pinagbitiwn was variously let go of 256(16).
  mabitwan be let go of 44(21). 288(23).

bitka intestine 38(30).

bitke (S.) blow-gun bullet 212(31).

biybas baybas S. guava, Pisidium guayava
L. 236(17). 256(38). 283(11).
  magssipamiybas will go guava-picking, pl. 263(22).

-biybit: nangakabiybit were hanging 34(28).

-biybo: pagbibiybo swinging the feet 232(11).
  pinagbbiyabhan is being swung on 255(10).

-biyk: biniyk was split 244(7) Corrigenda.
  kabiyk half, side 112(40).

Biyrnes-Snto Biyernesnto S. Good Friday 20(1).

biytiko S.: viaticum 98(3).

biyy that given liberty in a closed space 220(27).
  nagbiyy set loose 232(13).
  nagpabiyy caused to be set loose 302(20).
  pbiyyan place for giving temporary liberty 88(26). 309(6).

Viyla S. family-n. 277(16).

bbo clown 241(34).

-bubng: bubungn roof 38(22).

bubuwt a kind of mouse 224(27).

-budbd: ibinudbd was strewn 32(18).

bugtng riddle 222(3).
  nagssipagbugtngan tell each other riddles 114(32).

bugk rotten, crazy 218(40).

buhngin sand 68(4).
  kabuhangnan beach 68(4).

-bhat: bumhat lifted 189(34).
  buhtin be lifted 283(29).

bhay life 18(10). See also hnap.
  buhy alive 92(19).
  nammhay is leading a life 104(27).
  pamumhay way of living 30(30).
  ikabbhay will be the means of living 34(25).
  kabuhyan livelihood 32(12).
  mabbhay will live 58(30).
  nabhay lived 285(29).
  nabbhay is living 72(17).
  pagkabhay a coming to life; staple food 285(41). 288(38).
  pagkbhay a lucky bringing to life 291(36).

bho` slender bamboo, Dendrocalamus 18(3).

buhk hair 24(31).

buhl knot 274(29).
  magbuhl tie a knot 232(14).

-bhos: ibinhos was poured 30(20).

bkas tomorrow 88(13). 262(2).
  kinbuksan when the next day came 48(41). 190(27). 279(24).

buks opened 223(26).
  bumbuks is opening, intr. 227(10).
  magbuks open, tr. 228(35).
  pagbubuks an opening, tr. 26(31).
  buksn be opened 78(30).
  binuksn was opened 78(31).
  bksan aperture 84(43).
  mabuksn be opened 86(1). 120(21).
  nbuksn came open 22(2). 188(9).

bkid field, estate, country 38(8). 74(1). 90(7).
  bukirn estate, fields 92(35).

bko unripe cocoanut 316(8).
  tarabko trabko bald-headed 316(7).

bukd beside, in addition to 54(5). 279.
  magkabukd two separately 269(43).
  magkakabukd pl. 279(9).

-bkol: bukuln covered with bumps 62(26).
  nagkkabkol is getting bumps 62(16).

bla S. ball 46(38).

-blag (a) nakabblag is causing blindness 280(35).
  mblag get blinded 255(38).
  (b) Accent shifted: bulg blinded, blind 22(29).
  nbulg went blind 296(16).

blak cluster of capoc cotton 247(2).
  Bulakn place-n. 110(13). 260(5).

bulaklk flower 189(2).

-buld: ibinuld was pushed off 26(7).

buls S. purse 112(21).

-blo: kabuluhn importance 42(15).
  makabuluhn important 271(16). 289(23).

bulk rotten 218(40).
  nangabulk became rotten, pl. 306(27).
  palablkin easily decaying 315(8).

-bulng: kablngan one of two who whisper together 277(38).
  pabulng in whispers 114(5).

bundk mountain 116(18). See also pa.
  namundk took to the mountains 52(38).
  pamumundk a living in the mountains 52(42).

bunts pregnant 36(17).

buntn heap 116(34).

buntt tail, train 240(41). 244(40). 253(8).
  bunttan tail-end 72(3).

-bun`: nagbun` wrestled 66(32).
  nagbbun` is wrestling 86(40).
  pagbubun` a wrestling 252(25).
  nakipagbun` engaged in wrestling 66(27).
  kabun` person with whom one wrestles 66(34).

-bnot: bunt plucked up 225(26). cocoanut-fibre 221(11).
  bumnot plucked up 227(11).
  nagbunt plucked up in quantity 237(27).

bnga fruit; betel-fruit 16(15). 247(3).
  bnga-ng-khoy fruit of a tree 36(1).
  magbnga bear fruit 16(12).

bungnga` maw 212(35).

bungbng piece of unsplit bamboo 110(31).

-brol: ibinbrol is being laid in state 112(30).
  kinbburlan is being lain in state in 114(4).

busbos slave 90(36).

bses S. voice 74(19).

Bstos S. place-n. 100(12). See also lpa`.

busg satiated 223(27).
  pbusugn be well fed up 305(10).

btas hole, hollow space 86(11). 104(10).
  btas-karyom needle's-eye 22(27).
  bumtas make a hole 86(5).
  bintas was pierced 106(20).
  makabtas have made a hole 86(8).
  nabtas has been perforated 86(8).
  nbbtas gets perforated 106(37).
  pinabtas was caused to make a hole 86(9).

bte S. bottle 120(22).

bti goodness 218(23).
  buthan be done well 220(10).
  ikinabti was the cause of improvement 287(43).
  kabuthan excellence, advantage 58(2). 62(3).
  makabbti will cause to improve 28(35).
  nakabbti causes to be well 226(33).
  mabti good, well 16(9).
  mabubti pl. 102(5).
  nbti got better, reached a high point 294(22). 295(12).
  pinakamabti best 230(10).
  npakabti extreme 313(11).

botikriyo S. apothecary 54(2).

btil kernel of grain 316(33).
  gabtil as large as a grain 316(31).

-bto S.: bumto voted 227(13).

but bone, seed 42(5). 108(7).

bo` bu` whole, entire 34(29). 66. 98. 261.

-buwl: nagbuwl felled 199(25). 232(14).
  ibuwl be felled 178(33).
  ibinuwl was felled 270(27)
  nabuwl has been felled 253(4). 294(5).

buwn moon, month 38(18). 110(13).

buws interest on money 227(18).

buwsit repulsive 98(16). 219(1).
  binuwsit was annoyed 58(26).
  kinbbuwistan is being abhorred 94(27).





D(R)

dan ran hundred 52(43). 17. 134.

dan way, road 32(3).
  da-ng-Balwag road to Baliuag 220(3).
  magdan pass by 68(7).
  nagdan passed by, past 24(40). 76(36).
  nagddan is passing by 26(11).
  pagdadan a passing by 254(20).
  idan be left on the way 248(15).
  dinaann was run over, was called for on the way 251(9). 254(29).
  dinanan was assailed 254(25).
  dindanan is being assailed 254(27).
  pinagddaann is being gone through 30(30). 82(7).
  pinagdanan was traversed 32(24). 256(10).
  dnan usual route 258(26).
  nagddnan are passing on the way 234(31).
  makaran have passed 16(11).
  nakaran has passed 18(38).
  pagkaran a having passed 24(11).
  nakran nakdan came upon 18(32).
  paran manner, means 42(12).

dag` rat 84(20).

-dagn: dinagann was lain upon 44(38).
  magkdagn be one on top of the other 270(24).
  magkkdagn will be one on top of the other 270(26).
  nagkdagn were one on top of the other 270(30).
  nagkkdagn are one on top of the other 270(33).
  nagkkdagn-dagn pl. 108(24).

dgat sea 110(19).
  dagt-dagtan lake 261(34).

dgok blow with the fist 256(23)
  pinagdadagukn was variously struck at 84(21) and Corrigenda.
  pinagddadagukn is being variously struck at 256(22).

dhil cause 16(4). 78(33). 143(15). 206(10). 280.
  dahiln cause 22(6). 280.
  nagddahiln is alleging as cause 187(10).

dhon leaf 16(9).
  nagddhon is putting out leaves 232(16).

ding that laid open 250(37).
  dang laid open 222(29).
  dining was laid open 244(7).

-dang: dumdang is complaining 40(41).

-dka: pagdka immediately 18(42).
  karka-rka at once 207(20). 267(30).
  pagkarka at once 288(40). 265(5.9).

dla fishnet 240(7).
  dinla was caught with the net 244(8).

dal that borne 34(22) 38(27.34).
  dumal bear up 233(16).
  dumdal is bearing up 227(14).
  magdal bring, carry 106(32). 233(17).
  nagdal brought 28(27).
  nagddal is bringing 48(33). 72(35). 233(32).
  pagdadal a bringing 251(12).
  dalhn be carried 32(2).
  ddalhn will be carried 34(4).
  dinal was carried 56(24).
  dindal is being carried 40(19).
  dalhn be carried to 251(11).
  makaddal will be able to carry 178(39).
  nakapagdal was able to bring 286(35).
  nakapagddal nakappagdal nakkapagdal is able to bring 286(36).
  madal be able to be carried 16(4). 283(25).
  maddal will be able to be carried 34(31).
  nadal was able to be carried 283(22).
  ndal got carried off 293(6).
  nagpadal caused to be carried, sent 264(3).
  pagpapadal a sending 48(17).
  ipadal be sent 22(19).
  ipinadal was sent 90(32). 306(7).
  ipinaddal is being sent 74(6).
  ipinagpapadal were repeatedly sent 58(25). 307(26).
  pinadalhn was sent to 58(6).
  mipadal get sent 58(19).

dalga young woman 36(26).

dalamhti` grief 219(31).
  pagdadalamhti` a grieving 74(13).
  pakikipagdalamhti` a grieving along 112(26).
  kadalamhatan grief 276(28).

dalandn orange 76(20).

-dlang: dumlang became infrequent 26(10).
  madlang infrequent 289(4).
  padalngin be made infrequent 304(35).
  pdalangn be made very infrequent 305(14).

dalanghta` tangerine 294(28).

-dalngin: panalngin prayer 94(33).

-dals: dumdals is growing frequent 68(16).
  kadalasn frequency, frequently 40(40). 186(22). 262(4).
  madals frequent 46(24). 269(1).

dlaw visitor 112(29).
  dumlaw paid a visit 64(9).
  dumdlaw pays a visit 112(36).
  nagssidlaw pl. 112(25).
  pagdlaw a visiting 86(28).

dalaw see -law.

dal` hasten 221(41).
  dl-dli` very quickly 34(1). 224(13).
  dalin be done quickly 251(12).
  madal` quick, soon 94(28). 102(11). 166(16).
  madal ng raw: nagmmadal-ng-raw it is dawning 235(21).
  --magmadal` be quick 34(9).
  magmmadal` will hurry 235(38).
  pagmamadal` a hurrying 293(11).

dalri` finger 185(21).

-dal: dumal come for a purpose, to aid 34(1). 38(11). 304(1).
  nagssidal are coming 114(36).
  daluhn be succored 58(39).
  dinaluhn was attended 100(18). 251(14).

dma S. checkers 266(12).

-damg: magdamg the whole night 190(35).

damdm feeling 102(16). 219(32).
  dumamdm felt 227(15). 233(37).
  magdamdm feel oneself hurt 233(34).
  dinramdm is being regretted 82(9). 244(10).
  damdmin feeling, emotion 276(29).
  makiramdm spy out 264(4).
  karamdman illness 207(31).
  nakramdm felt 68(3). 292(32).
  nakrramdm is feeling 42(43).
  nramdamn was felt 201(26).
  nrramdamn is being felt 70(6).

dmi multitude 112(21). 267(27).
  dummi grew in number 60(32).
  dinamhan was made numerous 251(15).
  karamhan numerousness, majority 34(33). 198(9). 66. 132.
  marmi many 20(13). 28(27). 69. 71. 99. 110. 138.

damt garment, cloth 52(22). 169(2).
  pananamt clothing 32(33). 219(14).

dam ram grass 76(28). See also kalabw, pno`.
  dinamuhn was cut grass from 251(16).
  damhan grass-field 18(33). 259(17).

dmot stinginess 268(5).
  kaydmot karmot what stinginess 268(5).
  kaydmot-dmot what great stinginess 268(4).
  karamtan stinginess 34(18).
  marmot stingy 60(22).
  mararmot pl. 112(8).

-dniw?: karaniywan karaniyan usual, usually 36(15). 40(9). 262(6).

dangl honesty, honor 218(26).
  karnglan honoring 90(13).

-dap`: dumap` lay down on his face 227(17).
  nagddap-dapan pretends to fall on his face 108(18).
  nagkangdadpa` sustained repeated falls on his face 70(35). 269(29).
  nagkkangdadpa` is falling repeatedly on his face 269(31).
  nakadap` is prone 281(12).
  nrap` fell on his face 295(30). Corrigenda.
  pagkrap` a falling on one's face 295(39).
  napadap` had himself laid on his face 311(27).
  nparap` fell on his face 312(11).

dpat necessary, fitting 22(1). 36(9.20). 268.
  karapatn due, right 276(8).
  marpat deserving 80(20).
  nrrpat is appropriate 80(13). 276(29).

Rafayl S. n. 270(5).

-dpit: pagdpit a calling for 114(39).
  ipinaddpit is being caused to be called for 114(18).

-dpo`: dumpo` struck, landed 16(31).
  pagdpo` a hitting, landing 64(31). 68(16).
  dinapan was landed on, was hit 96(28). 251(18).

dars adze 58(14).
  pagdars a chopping with the adze 60(3).
  darasn be trimmed with the adze 58(17).
  dinars was trimmed with the adze 58(32).
  pinagdarasn was variously hewn off 58(17).

Daruwn E. family-n. 245(9).

-dasl (S.): magdasl say prayers 78(37).
  nagddasl is saying prayers 64(36).
  nagssipagdasl pl. 114(30).
  pagdadasl a praying 104(4).
  pinagddasaln is being prayed in 104(17).
  dslan rosary 76(43).

dtapuwat but 16(4). 318. 322.

dti formerly; since long ago 44(23). 64(18). 262(3).
  parti often 18(8). 30(28). 262(12).

-dtig: kadtig kartig bordering on, next to 256(32). 266(9).
  magkartig bordering on each other 270(2).
  nkkartig borders on 296(27).

-datng: dumatng arrive 18(37). arrived 20(14).
  nagsidatng pl. 118(34). 232(1).
  dumratng is arriving 18(35).
  dratng will arrive 52(2).
  pagdatn an arriving 48(12). 56(25).
  datnn be reached 56(32).
  dinatnn was reached 46(3).
  dinratnn is being reached 64(7).
  karratng there has been arriving 151(31).
  makaratng have arrived 82(38). 100(1).
  nakaratng has arrived 34(21).
  mdatnn be come upon 88(36).

-dos: pagdados a performing 20(5).
  idos be performed 264(32).
  idinos was performed 274(15).
  idindos is being performed 92(24). 114(29).

dw rw he says, they say 17. 47. 217.

-dya`: magddya` will cheat 18(24).

dyap the lime 76(20).

d` not 38(17). 237. 239. 301.

-ribl S.: karibl rival 46(21).

dibdb the chest 212(9).

-dikdk: dikdikn be crushed 16(25).

dikn mat on which dishes are set 221(32).

dikt blaze 220(30).
  pangparikt kindlings 158(10).

-dikt: idinik was pasted 52(10).

dikla S. (de cola) train 262(41).

dla` tongue 251(21). 306(21).
  dilan be licked 251(22).
  dinilan was shown the tongue (as insult) 251(20).

-dlat: nadlat came open 24(24).

-dilw: madidilw yellow, pl. 291(19).

-dilg: pangdilg implements for sprinkling 225(4).
  nangddilg is sprinkling 239(34).
  pangdidilg a sprinkling 239(35).
  dilign be sprinkled 244(11).

dilm darkness 36(5).
  dumilm it grew dark 52(29).
  pagdilm a growing dark 36(32).
  kadilimn darkness 72(1).
  madilm dark 40(15).

Del-Pilr S. family-n. 241(25).

rels S. watch 137(41).

dimniyo S. demon 40(5).

dn rn also, again 18(16). 17. 47. 218. 221. 227. 238. 239. 262(11).

dindng, see dingdng.

dne rne loc. of ir: here 316 (27). 17. 47. 263.
  nrrin is here 74(21).
  parne come here 301(33).
  pumarne come here 302(8).
  naparne came here 312(3).

-ding: makring hear 24(18).
  nakring heard 20(19). 292(33).
  mring be heard 28(19).
  nring was heard 20(41).
  nrring is being heard 114(12).
  pagkring a hearing 18(13). 176(41).

dingdng dindng wall 62(20).

Risl S. family-n., Rizal 275(43).

desgrsiya S. misfortune 276(39).

-distno S.: idinistno was assigned to the parish 96(2).
  ndistno got assigned 50(9).

retso S. patch 239(10).

-retrto S.: retrathan be photographed 281(14).

dto rto loc. of it: here, hither; to him
16(4). 18(22). 316(27). 17. 47. 263. 280.
  nrrit is here 70(26). 184(36). 203(6).
  pumparto comes here 204(18).
  pparto will come here 302(11). 306(11).
  pagparto a coming here 203(5).
  pinparto is being sent here 104(20).
  ipinarto was come here for 307(1).
  naparto came here 44(9).
  napparto comes here 191(16).
  mparto get here 184(35).
  mpparto will get here 312(15).
  nparto got here 312(13).
  npparto gets here 312(15).
  pagkparto a getting here 313(1).
  makpar-parto never come here 313(3) Corrigenda.

-dwang: nagdwang celebrated 275(43).
  pagdirwang a celebrating 90(13).
  ipinagddwang is being celebrated 110(12). 249(23).

diyn riyn loc. of iyn: there, thither, from there
182(27). 316(27). 17. 47. 263.
  nriyn went there, was there 191(14).
  ppariyn will go there 302(13).

diyriyo S. newspaper 284(11).

Diygo S. n. 100(40).

Diys S. God 64(4). 182(40). 59.

-dugtng: idinugtng was said in continuation 80(28). 102(19).

dug` blood 22(8).
  nagdudug` bled profusely 88(28). 282(38).
  pagdudug` a bleeding 46(8).

-dkit: dumkit carved 88(8).
  pangdudkit sculpture 90(3).
  mangdudkit mandurkit carver, sculptor 86(18). 104(8).
  duktin be carved 90(11).
  dinkit was carved 90(9).

-dukly: nagddukly-dukly keeps blurting out 114(15).

dokt S. learned man 168(9).

-dkot: idindkot is being scooped out 110(2).

dlang low table 252(1).

-duls: maduls slippery 313(41).
  mduls slip 313(35).
  pagkduls a slipping 313(39).
  magpaduls let oneself slide 313(36).
  pagpapaduls a letting oneself slide 294(29).

dlo end 16(7).
  dlo-ng-band-ng-kaliw` left-hand end 274(28).
  dlo-ng-band-ng-knan right-hand end 211(1).
  dulhan end part, back yard 34(38).

Romansmo S. Romanism 56(14).

-dum: pagdum defecation 42(4).
  marum dirty 94(7). 219 (36).

Don-Nasriyo S. n. 116(26).

dnong knowledge 28(15).
  karnong what wisdom 173(42).
  karunngan wisdom 276(30).
  marnong wise, knowing, knowing how to 16(1). 26(1). 269(8).
  pagmamarnong a pretending to be wise 167(29).
  pagpapakamarnong a making oneself wise 309(24).
  pinakamarnong wisest 309(40).
  marurnong pl. 48(10).
  nagparnong caused to be educated 90(40).

-dung: nagddung is shy 285(17).

dro` stitch 224(1).
  durin be pricked 244(1).
  duran be stuck into 251(22). a spit 221(8).
  durun place for sticking 260(6).

-drog: dinrog was crumbled 32(18).

dsa suffering 245(18).
  pagdudsa a suffering 76(24).
  parsa punishment 16(28).
  nagpparsa is causing to suffer 42(9).
  pagpaparsa a causing to suffer 42(16).
  ipinarrsa is being caused to be suffered 313(10).
  parushan be punished 16(22).
  parrushan will be punished 16(24).
  pinarushan was punished 292(19).
  pinarrushan is being punished 222(18). 233(1). 308(8).
  prusahn place of punishment 74(21). 309(12).
  mpparushan will get punished 22(5). 313(6).

rosriyo S. rosary 104(4).
  magrosriyo pray a rosary 104(17).

Rso S. Russian 306(19).

don ron ron loc. of iyn: there; to him, to it
18(40). 38(17). 316(27). 17. 47. 263.
  dumon go there 20(26).
  magkaron get, have 96(3).
  nagkaron got, had 24(35). 52(30). 268(25).
  kindroonn is been in 74(33). 90(18). 279(13).
  nron nndon got there, is there 36(33). 193(15). 39. 468.
  nrron is there 42(36). 74(12). 264(10).
  paron go there 301(33).
  pumaron go there 20(15). went there 76(27).
  pparon will go there 88(13). 207(30). 302(18).
  pagparon a going there 72(40). 302(16).
  parunn be gone to 70(34).
  pinaroonn pinaronn pinarunn was gone to 46(4). 138(37).
  ikinparon was the cause of going there 310(11).
  makaparn be able to go there 100(16).
  naparon went there 20(23). 312(5).
  pagkparon a getting there 300(9).

-dop: pinagddop were brought together (hands) 96(8).

duwg coward 312(22).
  kaduwgan cowardice 116(14).

duwnde S. dwarf, elf 30(24).

Dytsland E. n. of a ship 268(29).





G.

-gan: magan light, easy 48(2). 255(2).

gano, see an.

gab night, evening 36(2). See also raw.
  gab-gab every night 62(38). 331.
  gingab is being overtaken by night 244(12).
  kagab last night 190(15). 259.

gga madwoman 44(25).

gagamb spider 262(23).

-glang: maglang polite 237(19). 289(5).

-glaw: pagglaw a moving 192(20).

gling coming from 40(5). 193(18).
  nanggling came from 193(22).
  nangggling is coming from 193(22).
  pinanggalngan was come from 256(30).
  pinangggalngan is being come from 32(30).
  kaggling there has just been coming from 267(14).

galng skill 58(6).
  gumalng got well 54(10).
  magalng skilful; well 46(29). 269(2).
  magagalng pl. 94(32).
  pagpapagalng a causing to get well 42(22).

glit (a) anger 22(15).
  ikaglit be the cause of anger 195(39).
  ikinaglit was the cause of anger 303(24).
  kinagaltan was the object of anger 274(15).
  kinaggaltan is the object of anger 40(36).
  naglit got angry 16(20).
  nagglit gets angry 106(28).
  pagkaglit a getting angry 176(39).
  nkagaltan happened to be the object of anger 52(40). 298(28).
  magpaglit cause to get angry 98(32).
  palagalitn hot-head 315(18).
  --(b) Accent shifted: galt angry 177(39).
  kagalt at odds 266(39).
  nagkagalt had a falling out 269(19).
  pagkakagalt a falling out 155(27). 269(19).
  nagkag-kagalt got angry at each other, pl. 269(25).
  kgaltan quarrel 236(36). 279(34).
  pagkakgaltan a quarreling together 222(42). 279(39).

-gambla`: nagambla` was disturbed 284(36).
  ngambla` was unintentionally disturbed 293(8).

gmit that used 46(39).
  gamt used, second-hand 183(15).
  gummit use 58(14). used 94(4).
  gumgmit is using 202(17).
  paggmit a using 56(37).
  gamtin be used 161(20).
  ggamtin will be used 234(22).
  ginmit was used 60(26).
  gingmit is being used 40(35).
  gamtan be used on 58(16).
  kagamitn use, employment 36(23). 120(15).
  magmit be able to be used 20(5). 74(7). 283(26).
  nagmit was able to be used 230(14).
  ngmit was accidentally used 293(10).
  pagkgmit the way of using, chance ability to use 240(3). 291(40).
  ipinaggmit is being caused to be used 306(9).

gamt medicine 54(9).
  panggamt means of curing 46(14).
  gumamt cure 46(13).
  gumgamt is curing 46(16).
  paggamt a curing 42(15).
  manggagamt manggagmot physician 28(24). 44(28.30). 243(10).
  panggagamt curing 42(25).
  gamutn be treated 46(23).
  ginamt was treated 46(4).
  gingamt is being treated 290(13).
  ipinagamt was caused to be treated 54(8).

-gna S.: gumgna is earning 227(18).

gan concern 98(6). 281(25). 198.

gand beauty 70(11).
  magand beautiful 48(15). 152(3).
  magagand pl. 72(19).
  nagppagand is causing to be beautiful 48(18).

ganit, see it.

ganiyn, see iyn.

gant that given in return 90(12). 200(33). 272(11).
  gant ng pla`: gumant-ng-pla` return favors 231(14).
  gumant act in retaliation 227(19).
  manghigant take vengeance 24(25). 241(19).
  manghhigant will take vengeance 241(21).
  gantihn be given return for 58(9).
  panghigantihn be the object of vengeance 40(38).

gno, see an.

ganon, see iyn.

-gpang: gumgpang is crawling 18(3).
  paggpang a crawling 18(4).

-gpas: panggpas kind of knife 225(5).
  gumpas cut, slice 227(20).
  pinangggapsan is being cut from 256(32).

-gpos: iginpos was tied down 58(31).

-gast S.: paggast a spending 248(11).

gstos S. expense 54(27).

gtas milk 175(1).

gaw` that done 54(20). 74(8). 240(34). 277(24).
  gumaw` do, make 244(35).
  paggaw` a making, doing 86(10). 202(36).
  gawn be done, made 24(17).
  ggawn will be made, done 32(6). 104(1).
  ginaw` was done, made 20(36).
  gingaw` is being done, made 44(3.9).
  pinaggagaw` was variously done 310(8).
  ginawan was done to 74(40). 76(3.6).
  gwan workshop 58(41).
  gawan factory 315(35).
  kagagawn surprisingly, illicitly done 277(23).
  nakagaw` succeeded in making 86(7).
  nakaggaw` is able to make 281(28).
  magaw` be able to be done 30(6). 56(2).
  maggaw` will be able to be done 18(20). 74(27).
  nagaw` has been done 54(40).
  naggaw` can be done 102(30).
  pagkagaw` a having made, ability to make 282(10.28).
  mapaggaw` given to doing 98(31).
  mgaw` chance to be done 238(36).
  pagkgaw` the way making turned out 291(3).
  pagaw` ordered to be made 104(11).
  nagpagaw` caused to be made 104(8).
  ipinagaw` was caused to be made 104(15).

gaw` direction 163(28). 193(28).

gya like 18(8). 316(30). 272.

gayn, see iyn.

gib` broken-down 225(9).
  gib-gib` tumble-down 290(36).
  manggib` collapse, pl. 296(3).
  mangggib` will collapse 296(5).

glas energy, enterprise 48(32).

-glid: taglid side 315(27).
  tumaglid turned the side to 231(17).
  pagtaglid a moving side-ways 192(20). 231(17).
  tinagilran was hurt in the side 254(18).
  tinaligdn was turned the side to 254(19).
  tagilran side wall, side part 261(29).
  nttaglid is inclined to one side 296(24).

gliw respected 219(3).

ginw cold feeling 280(38).
  naginw got cold 285(17).

-ginhwa: guminhwa became comfortable 227(20).
  gumginhwa is getting comfortable 227(21).
  kaginhawhan comfort, bliss 72(20).
  nakaginhwa caused to be comfortable 280(36).
  maginhwa comfortable 289(6).
  nagpaginhwa caused to be comfortable 302(32).

gning Miss, Mrs. 256.

gint gold 311(20).

gino Mr., gentleman 54(37). 100(30). 219(3). 289(5). 256.

-gng 48. 250. 516.: magng become 18(26). 314(18).
  magging will become, take place 18(28). 94(23).
  nagng became, occurred 18(31). 36(38). 144(23).
  nagging is becoming, arising 42(5). 62(14).
  pagigng a becoming 314(19).

-gsing (a) awaken, tr.:
  kaggsing there has been awakening 184(12).
  makgsing accidentally awaken 62(11).
  nakgsing awakened 257(32).
  ngsing was accidentally awakened 293(12).
  napagsing caused himself to be awakened 311(30).
  --(b) With accent shifted: wake up, intr.:
  ikingisng was the cause of waking up 158(9).
  mgisng wake up 18(39).
  mggisng will wake up 18(37).
  ngisng woke up 38(21).
  pagkgisng a waking up 62(18).
  pagisn-gisng waking up now and then 300(36).
  npagisng woke up 312(39).
  palagisingn fitful sleeper 315(19).

gitn` middle 16(7). 24(38).

grpo S. group 90(25).

gbat jungle 18(2).
  kagubtan jungle country 118(40).

gubiyrno S. government 92(32). 200(18).

-ggol: gingol was spent 257(14).
  ginggol is being spent 112(22).

glang age 38(6). 56(33).
  pagglang a growing ripe 272(22).
  maglang old, mature; parent 32(6). 283(39).

-glat: gulatn scary 247(32).
  pagkaglat a getting scared 285(42).
  pagkglat astonishment 36(38).
  mapangglat given to scaring 289(36).
  magugulatn jumpy 62(7). 290(4).
  npaglat was astonished 30(22). 58(8).
  palagulatn nervous person 315(20).

glay vegetable 72(36).

-gul: nagkagul was surprised 268(29).
  magul confused 237(2).
  nagul became confused 284(38).
  naggul is confused 52(29).

guld hill 226(25).

glok bolo 38(27).

-gmon: nggmon is trailing 98(20).

guntng shears 26(2).

gupt a cutting with scissors, hair-cut 219(13).
  panggupt used for cutting, scissors 225(5).
  gumupt cut 26(15).
  naggugupt cut to bits 238(33).
  nagggugupt is cutting to bits 238(34).
  paggugupt a cutting to bits 273(33).
  manggupt cut hair 26(1).
  nanggupt did hair-cutting 167(2).
  manggugupt manggugpit hair-cutter 24(34). 243(11).
  panggugupt hair-cutting 26(19).
  ginupt was cut 60(6).
  gupitn be sheared 26(3).
  nakagupt was able to cut 281(29).
  pagkagupt a having cut 250(32).
  nakgupt accidentally cut 290(12).
  ngupt chanced to be cut 293(38).
  pagkgupt a chance cutting 291(4.42).
  nagpagupt allowed himself to be sheared 302(33).
  pagpapagupt an allowing oneself to be sheared 302(34).
  ipinagupt was caused to be cut 180(11).

gra S. cap 246(4).

gur` teacher 80(40).

gust S.: desired, liked 16(29). 52(22). 267.
  paggust a desiring 18(21).
  gustuhn be desired 114(41).
  nagkagust conceived a desire 268(31).
  ipinagkagust was the cause of desiring 272(33).
  ikinggust is the cause of liking 273(31).
  pinagkkagustuhn is being liked by many 275(7).
  magusthin fond 110(1). 289(42).
  pagkgust a coming to desire 24(1). 92(36).
  mgustuhn happen to be liked 74(2).
  nggustuhn is liked 209(25).

gtom hunger 28(32).
  gutm hungry 76(8).
  gutmin be assailed by hunger 28(28).
  naggtom is hungry 285(19).
  palagutumn one who easily gets hungry 315(19).

guwrdiya-sibl guwrdiya-sivl S. gendarme, gendarmerie 20(20).

guwarnisiyn S. harness 315(33).

gya` young of animal, calf 210(24). See bhay.





H.

hba` length 56(39).
  humba` grew long 38(30).
  kahaban length 192(22).
  mahba` long 120(2).
  pinakamahba` longest 58(11).
  mahahba` pl. 18(15).

habgat spring wind 227(40).

hbang while, during 16(2). 292.

-hbol: nagssihbol are pursuing 301(21).
  paghbol a pursuing 84(27).
  panghahbol a chasing 116(7).
  hablin be pursued 18(10).
  hinbol was pursued 88(24).
  hinhbol is being pursued 68(19).
  nhhbol gets pursued 18(8).
  ipinahbol was caused to be pursued 76(10).
  ipinahhbol is being caused to be pursued 72(32).

hagdn ladder 270(31).
  hagdnan stairway 106(11).

-hgis: naghgis tossed 48(8).
  inihgis was tossed 16(30). 248(17).
  mapanghgis given to flinging 289(36).
  pahags with a toss 300(14) and Corrigenda.

-hagk, see halk.

-hgod: humhgod is stroking 98(21).
  hingod was stroked 84(10).

Hagnoy place-n. 110(24).

-hakbng: hhakbng will take a step 70(1).
  paghakbng a stepping 68(29).

-hkot: paghahktan a carting together 118(17).

halag price 54(23).
  mahalag dear 36(14). 234(41).
  pinakamahalag most valued 42(1). 288(38).
  mahahalag pl. 116(2).

-halakhk: npahalakhk burst into laughter 68(26).

halman garden-plant 72(36).
  hlamann garden, flower-pot 74(14). 260(38).

halay S. jelly 253(38).

halge post 64(23).

halk kiss 94(12).
  humalk kissed 227(22).
  hagkn be kissed 251(24).
  hinagkn was kissed 94(10).
  mahagkn be able to be kissed 92(26).

halimbwa` example 48(23). 62(10). 265(2).

-halimhm: hinhalimhimn is being brooded on 102(18).

hlo` that admixed 220(35).
  hl-hlo` confused 50(15).
  hinalan was mixed with 251(24).
  hinhalan is being given an admixture 108(6).
  halun mixing-vessel 260(8).
  pinahhalan is being caused to be given an admixture 108(7).

hlos almost 110(25). 265(3).

hmak unfortunate, no-account 219(3).
  ikpahmak be the cause of coming to grief 310(12).
  ikppahmak will be the cause of coming to grief 310(14).
  mpahmak come to grief 312(22).
  mppahmak will become good-for-nothing 312(24).
  npahmak came to grief 312(17).
  nppahmak is getting spoiled 312(19).

hamps whipping, whip 220(37). 221(42).
  hamps-lpa` vagabond 211(4).
  maghamps-lpa` be a vagabond 235(27).
  panghamps used as a whip 225(8).
  humamps hit with a whip 227(24).
  naghamps whipped himself 233(38).
  naghhahamps is whipping about 238(36).
  manghamps whip people 239(38).
  hampasn be whipped 184(8).
  hinampasn was struck with a whip 251(25).
  hampsan whipping-bench 258(27).
  kahampsan one of two who perform mutual flagellation 277(39).
  nahamps has been whipped 284(12).
  nakhamps happened to hit 291(27).
  nhamps was accidentally hit with a whip 293(14).
  pagkhamps a chance hitting 62(17). 292(3).
  phampasn be whipped harder 305(11).

hmon a challenge 52(25).
  manghhmon will challenge 48(24).
  manghahmon challenger 48(29).
  hinmon was challenged 48(32).
  hinhmon is being challenged 18(21).

hnap that sought 76(23).
  hnap-bhay livelihood 271(40).
  maghhnap-bhay will work for a livelihood 193(32). 235(30).
  humnap seek 74(23).
  paghnap a seeking 227(25).
  maghnap earn 32(11). 233(39).
  paghahnap the earning one's living 60(16). 102(7).
  maghanp seek in quantity; search 237(28).
  paghahanp a searching 52(29).
  hanpin be sought 92(12). 244(13).
  hinnap was sought out 16(22).
  hinhnap is being sought 76(18).
  ihnap be looked for 30(32).
  paghahanapn a searching through a place 52(34).
  nahnap has been sought 143(36).
  makapaghanp have searched 287(20).
  nakapaghanp has searched 287(18).
  pinahanpan was ordered to be sought in 52(15).

hand` a serving food 114(34).
  maghand` serve 112(29).
  naghhand` is serving 114(9).
  ihhand` will be served 237(36).
  inihand` was served 299(11).
  inihhand` is being served out 62(36).
  nakahand` is served 183(22). 281(4).

-hanty: hantayn be awaited 32(26).
  hinanty was awaited 50(37).

hangd aim, goal 46(36).

hangl fool 276(31).
  kahangaln foolishness 276(31).

-hangg: hangghan boundary 258(29).
  hanggn limit 22(6).

hanggng until, up to 16(12). 68. 293.

hngin wind 118(31).

-hngo`: paghngo` a rescuing 78(10).
  hinngo` was rescued 88(36).
  ikahhngo` will be the means of rescuing 74(42).
  mahngo` be able to be rescued 74(23).
  mahhngo` will be able to be rescued 78(2).
  nahhngo` is being rescued 78(12).

hpis grief 38(11).
  hinpis was grieved 244(14).
  nahhpis is sad 285(20).
  pagkahpis a grieving 74(25).

hpon afternoon 18(39). 190(23.31).
  maghpon whole day 112(9). 262(8).
  kahpon yesterday 152(13). 172(6). 259.
  pagkahpon a having supped 104(16).

Hapn S. Japan 269(20).

Hapuns S. Japanese 306(19).

hrang obstruction 220(39).
  panghrang used as an obstruction 225(8).
  humrang held up 227(26).
  paghrang a holding up 198(21).
  naghrang made an obstruction 233(41).
  paghahrang an obstructing 233(42).
  nanghrang held people up 239(38).
  panghahrang highway robbery 239(40).
  hinrang was held up 282(36).
  ipinanghrang was used in holding up 250(10).
  hinarngan was obstructed 251(27).
  pinangharngan was the place of holding up 255(11).
  harangn hold-up 197(9).
  paghaharangn a holding up together 275(22).
  ikinahrang was the cause of being held up 272(6).
  pagkahrang a having held up 282(29).
  pagkapanghahrang a having practised highway robbery 287(30).
  nhrang got held up 295(6).
  pagkhrang a chance holding up 292(5).
  pahrang caused to be held up 197(10).
  paharng crosswise 300(15).
  pagpapahrang a causing to be held up 302(36).
  pinapanghhrang is being caused to practise highway robbery 305(22).
  ipinahrang was caused to be held up 306(11).

harp front 228(25).
  humharp is facing 96(7).
  hharp will be present 96(18).
  hinarp was faced 20(37).
  harapn place in front of 24(37).
  kaharp facing 98(21).
  nharp came to face 72(2).

hardn S. garden 72(19).

hri` king 24(29).
  naghhri` is ruling 24(30).
  pagharan be ruled 255(14).
  pinaghharan is being ruled 24(32).
  kahariyn kingdom 24(36). 276(18).

-hsa`: has` sharpened 202(30).
  paghahsa` a sharpening 232(16).
  ihsa` be sharpened 248(19).
  hasan be given a sharp edge 251(28).
  paghasan be sharpened on 255(15).
  hasan whetstone 255(15).

-htak: paghtak a tugging 78(8).
  hatkin be pulled at 284(16).
  kahatakn one of two who tug against each other 186(38).

hti` divide; that divided; mid- 222(1).
  hti ng gab: naghhti-ng-gab it is midnight 84(19). 235(24).
  kinhti-ng-gabihn was at midnight 38(21). 279(25).
  hat` divided 222(31).
  panghti` used for dividing 225(11).
  humti` divided, halved 227(29).
  naghti` distributed 234(1).
  paghahti` a distributing 234(3).
  naghat` divided up, divided in quantity 237(30).
  paghahat` a dividing in quantity 237(32).
  nanghti` shared orders 239(41).
  panghahti` a sharing orders 239(42).
  hinti` was divided 16(7). 244(4).
  pinaghat` was divided in quantity 246(20).
  paghatan be shared 28(34).
  ikinahti` was the cause of breaking in two 270(39). of being able
  to divide 272(9).
  nahti` has been divided 284(39).
  pagkahti` a having divided 282(31).
  nakhti` chanced to divide 291(29).
  pagkhti` a chance dividing 291(6). 292(8).
  pahti` ordered to be divided 299(14).
  pahat` tending to halve 300(18).
  nagpahti` caused to be divided 302(38).
  pagpapahti` a causing to be divided 302(41).
  ipinhti` was caused to be divided 306(13).
  ipinagpahti` was caused to be divided up 307(19).
  pinahatan was caused to be given his share 308(9).
  pinapahatan was caused to be caused to to be given his share
  308(41).
  kalahti` half 80(24). 273(21). 314(32).
  kalahti-ng-raw half-day 118(26).
  kalahti-ng-ras half-hour 66(36).
  magkkalahat` will be half through 104(17). 238(22).
  pangangalahti` a being halfway 24(6). 241(13).
  kalahatan middle 261(27).

-hatd: naghatd conveyed 56(26).
  naghhatd is conveying 98(3).
  paghahatd an escorting 114(39).
  ihatd be conveyed 34(6).
  ihhatd will be conveyed 104(28).
  inihatd was conveyed 20(26).
  inihhatd is being conveyed 20(4).
  hhatdn will be conveyed to 175(1).
  hinhatdn is being conveyed to 190(10).
  paghhatdn will be delivered to 20(9).
  pinaghatdn was delivered to 255(16).
  pinaghhatdn is being delivered to 179(8).
  ipinahatd was caused to be conveyed 294(28).
  napahatd had himself conveyed 52(37).

htol advice 30(4).
  naghhtol advises 74(30).

-hwa: nakhhwa is contagious 272(3).

hwak that grasped 66(35).
  humwak took hold 78(7).
  paghwak a taking hold 227(31).
  hinawkan was taken hold of 66(26).
  makahwak be able to take hold 22(22).
  nakahwak has taken hold 281(14).
  nakhwak got hold of 290(18).

-hyag (a): pahyag that published 48(37).
  nagppahyag causes to become public, announces 48(35).
  pagpapahyag an announcing 90(22).
  ipinahyag was caused to become public, was announced 56(6).
  phaygan phayagn newspaper 48(27). 236(41). See bhay.
  --(b) with accent shift: hygan public affair, public 236(37).
  nhayg got widely known 60(11).

hyop animal; carabao 28(26).

-hig`: paghig` a going to bed 64(6).
  hinhign is being slept on 102(26).
  hgan bed 244(22).
  hihign couch 62(12).
  kahhig` there has just been lying down 267(15).
  makahig` be able to lie down 281(33).
  nakahig` has lain down 86(39).
  nahig` lay down 38(17). 285(34).
  nahhig` is in the act of lying down 285(35).
  mhig` get laid 295(8).
  nagpatihig` suddenly lay down 313(20).
  mpatihig` fall on one's back 313(37).
  nppatihig` falls on his back 313(35).

hignte S. giant 32(31).

-higt: mahigt with an excess 118(16).

-higpt: mahigpt firm, strict 42(40).
  mahihigpt pl. 122(5).

hkaw ear-ring 303(3).
  nagpahkaw caused himself to be adorned with ear-rings 303(2).

-hla: humhla is dragging 118(20).
  paghla a dragging 118(22).
  hinla was dragged 16(3).
  hinhla is being dragged 100(23).
  mahhla will be able to be dragged 80(27).

-hilmos: panghilmos water for washing hands 62(36).

hilw raw 28(31).
  palahilawn kind of rice 315(20).

hilng request 219(34).
  humilng requested 186(18).
  hinilng was asked for 16(27).
  hinhilng is being asked for 52(8).
  mapanghilng given to demanding 42(7).

hlra S. row 34(20).
  makahilra be in single file 110(41).
  nakahilra is in single file 122(2).

-himbng: mahimbng sound, deep 296(39).
  nhimbng fell sound asleep 84(19).

hna` weakness 18(7).
  humna` became weak, slow 227(34).
  naghna` made gentle 234(5).
  nanghna` slackened up 240(2).
  nagssipanghna` are getting weak 108(28).
  kahinan weakness, slowness 22(39).
  mahna` weak, slow 22(33).
  mahihna` pl. 149(20).

hinla` suspicion 40(23).
  paghihinla` a suspecting 84(39).
  hininla` was suspected 30(23).
  hinhinla` is being suspected 18(20).
  pinaghhinalan is the object of suspicion 40(21).
  mpaghhinalan mppaghinalan will get suspected 38(19). 298(19).
  npaghhinalan nappaghinalan gets suspected 298(15).

hind` not, no 16(4). 152(7). 228. 237. 239. 301. 319. 340.

-hinhn: mahihinhn respectable, decent, pl. 94(11).

hinty wait 206(1).
  maghinty wait 153(4).
  naghinty awaited 26(13). 30(14).
  naghhinty is awaiting 48(12).
  paghihinty a waiting 285(23).
  hininty was awaited 120(37).

hint` a stopping; stop 22(26). 222(2). stopped 223(28).
  maghint` stop 170(3).
  magsihint` pl. 184(22).
  naghint` stopped, ceased 18(3). 283(13).
  naghhint` stops 110(36).
  nagssipaghint` pl. 112(5).
  ihint` be stopped 104(19).
  hintun be ceased from 251(28).
  hinintun was ceased from 122(22).
  hintan stopping-place 258(32).
  mhint` come to an end 60(37).
  nhint` got stopped 259(34).
  pahint-hint` stopping at intervals 300(30).
  pinahint` was caused to stop 26(2).
  pinapaghint` was caused to cease 84(31).
  ipinahint` was caused to be stopped 241(1).

-hintlot: pahintlot a permit 116(2). 272(4).
  ipinahhintlot is being permitted 54(18).
  pahintultan be given permission 264(22).
  pinahintultan was given permission 264(39).
  pinahhintultan is being given permission 122(6).

hing ripe 34(28).
  nagkkahing are in part getting ripe 36(1).
  nahing got ripe 16(13).
  pagkahing a getting ripe 300(19).
  napahing was able to be caused to ripen 311(20).
  npahing came to be caused to ripen 312(27).

-hing: humhing is breathing 20(8).
  hining breath 40(28). 228(29).
  makapaghing be able to breathe 68(20).
  magpahing rest 54(11).
  nagppahing is resting 303(3).
  makapahing be able to rest 311(2).
  makappahing will have rested 311(4).
  nakapahing has rested 310(43).
  nakappahing has just rested, is rested 206(1).
  nppahing is resting, of animals 312(31).
  nangppahing pl. 312(37).

hing`: paghing` a requesting 227(35).
  manghing` beg 34(18).
  nanghing` begged 32(20).
  nagssipanghing` are begging 112(5).
  manghihing` begger, beggar 112(16).
  makahing` be able to ask for 281(33)
  makhing` get by asking 32(22).

hip, see -hip.

hpag husband's sister, (woman's) brother's wife 242(13).
  maghpag two women, one of whom is married to the other's brother
  242(12).

hpon kind of shrimp 259(6).

-hirm: hhirm will borrow 227(36).
  manghirm borrow 240(5).
  panghihirm a borrowing 221(5).
  hinirm was borrowed 174(22).
  hrman person borrowed from 258(34).
  kahrman one of two who borrow from each other 277(39).
  magkahrman two who borrow from each other 278(35).
  makkapanghirm will be able to borrow 287(24).
  nakkapanghirm is able to borrow 287(22).
  mapanghirm given to borrowing 289(37).
  papanghiramn be caused to go and borrow 305(34).
  mapahhirm will be able to be caused to borrow, will be able to
  be lent to 311(21).

hrap misery 22(5). 50(29).
  hirp wearied 62(25).
  maghhrap will suffer 46(18).
  paghihrap suffering 44(24).
  kahirpan hardship 62(4).
  mahrap difficult, poor 22(32). 36(19). 269(3).
  mahihrap pl. 54(22).
  nahirpan was pained, wearied 118(22).
  nahhirpan is being pained 44(12).
  nagppahrap is causing to suffer 22(10).
  pagpapahrap a causing to suffer 46(14). 273(1).
  pagpapakahrap a taking pains 309(20).
  pahhirpan will be caused to suffer 44(10). 100(15).

Hess S. Jesus 285(42).

-hitt: hititn be puffed at 66(13).

-hits (S. ?): ihinhits is being tossed up 48(5).
  hinitsahn was tossed to 48(7).
  npahits got thrown upward 84(3).

hitsra S. appearance 40(13). 106(11). 116(33).

-hwa`: hinwa` was slashed 20(33). 203(37).

-hiwaly: maghiw-hiwaly part, separate, pl. 183(11).
  naghiwaly parted (two persons) 88(17).
  naghiw-hiwaly pl. 26(34). 102(40).
  naghhiwaly are parting 40(18).
  magkhiwaly go apart (two involuntary actors) 270(38).
  magkkhiw-hiwaly will part, pl. 26(32).
  nagkhiw-hiwaly went apart, pl. 271(14).

hiy` shame 72(12). 90(39).
  kahiy-hiy` arousing shame 58(13).
  kahiyan be revered 274(18).
  makahiy` given to embarrassment 288(31).
  nahhiy` is ashamed 285(20).
  mapanghy` given to embarrassing 289(38).

heyugrafya hewgrafya S. geography 82(1).

hubd naked 223(29).
  maghubd undress oneself 232(19).
  pinaghhubarn is being undressed in 255(18).
  nagpahubd had himself undressed 303(5).
  pinapaghubd was caused to undress himself 305(21).
  pinahubarn was caused to be undressed 308(11).

hgas dish-washing 219(36).
  naghhgas is washing 114(7).
  maghuhugs dish-washer 242(42).
  manghuhugs id. 243(14).
  hinhugsan is being washed 251(30).
  hugasn place for dish-washing 260(8).

hkay hole, ditch 24(38).
  huky hollowed 104(9).
  humkay dig 24(37). 152(32). dug 179(26).
  hhukyin hhukin will be dug 309(34).
  ihinkay was dug for 248(19).
  hinukyan was dug up 179(27).

hukm judge 18(26).
  hkman court of justice 54(31).
  paghuhkman session of court 54(34).

-hla`: humla` predicted 277(37).
  manghla` tell fortunes 240(6).
  manghuhla` fortune-teller 206(16).

hli (a) that caught 220(41). 282(6).
  panghli means of catching 52(27).
  humli catch 108(5). 165(34).
  paghli a catching 108(3).
  nagssihli are catching 102(1).
  nanghhli goes catching 106(39). 240(6).
  panghuhli a catching in quantity 106(24).
  manghuhli catcher 56(20). 110(6).
  hulhin be caught 52(16). 68(9).
  hinli was caught 20(20). 84(31).
  hulhan be caught from 251(32).
  hulihn a catching by many 260(9).
  pagkahli a having caught 282(33).
  mhli get caught 52(22). 70(19). 102(3).
  nhli got caught 16(22). 44(16).
  nhhli is getting caught, is caught 28(29). 309(7).
  nagpahli allowed himself to be left behind 68(36).
  tagahli catcher 165(34).
  --(b) Accent shifted: hul late; last 20(30). 28(18). 222(31).
  panghul last 226(10).
  khul-hulhan very last 40(27). 280(17).
  mhul be late 235(39).
  mhhul will be left behind 18(18).
  nhul was last 118(34).
  pagkhul a being left behind 18(31). 296(18).
  mppaghul will all be caught 198(12). 297(20).

Hliyo S. n. 279(5).

Hol S. Sulu 120(18).

hlo` source, upstream 279(4).

-hlog: ihlog be dropped 168(19).
  ihhlog will be dropped 64(43).
  hulgan be dropped to 16(17).
  hhulgan will be dropped to 16(19).
  ipakihlog be dropped along 265(6).
  ipinakihlog was dropped along 265(9).
  ipinakkihlog is being asked to be dropped along 265(10).
  ikinahlog was the cause of falling 74(38).
  kahhulgan will be fallen from 158(30).
  kinahulgan was fallen from 274(19).
  kahlgan one of two who drop to each other 278(6).
  kahulugn meaning 30(18). 120(24).
  nakahlog caused to drop 281(34).
  mahlog fall down 299(32).
  mahhlog will fall down 22(12).
  nahlog fell down 24(7).
  pagkahlog a falling down 24(18).
  magpatihulg throw oneself down 206(23).
  magppatihulg will throw himself down 313(28).
  nagpatihulg threw himself down 313(21).
  nagppatihulg throws himself down 313(24).

hni chirp 197(21).
  humni purred 84(1).
  hnhan chirping together 202(21).
  kahnhan one of two that chirp at each other 278(8).
  mapaghun given to neighing 289(31).
  palahnhin given to neighing, chirping 315(15).

Hniyo S. June 110(11).

hungky winnowed 223(30)
  naghungky winnowed 232(21).
  hungkyan winnowing-machine 258(36).

Hrdan S. Jordan 106(6).

hurn S. oven 212(36).

hsay excellence 58(1).
  nagssihsay are getting well 108(36).
  mahsay in good shape, excellent 46(5). 108(12). 269(4).
  pinakamahsay most excellent 28(38).
  mahuhsay pl. 196(22).
  nhsay got well 44(24).

hust S. just suited 108(40).

hta S. iota 30(16).

huwg not, do not 20(13). 234. 239. 240.

Huwn S. n. 20(2).

Huwna S. n. 173(25).

huwtaw (C?) Chinese bowl 255(30).

huws S. judge 54(37).

huwting (C?) lottery 229(26).





I(E).

ib other 22(10). 66. 98. 132. 251. 314.
  ib t ib: nakapagib-t-ib is able to alter 36(10).
  pinagibhn was differed in 255(19).
  pagkakib a being different 46(39). 276(31).
  nib got different 294(24)
  nib changes 50(17).
  pagkib a being different 110(17).

big liked, desired 20(18). 267.
  pagbig a desiring, loving 60(25). 64(4).
  inbig was desired, loved 18(15). 40(16).
  inbig is being desired, loved 92(20).
  bgan mutual love 259(28).
  magbgan loved each other 236(29).
  nagbgan are loving each other 236(29).
  pagibgan a loving each other 90(6).
  kaibign desire, affection 140(2). 168(38).
  kabgan one of two who love each other 94(18). 140(2). 278(9).
  magkabgan two who love each other 42(30). 278(36).
  kayibgan friend 16(5). 139(41). 278(17).
  magkayibgan pair of friends 22(30). 278(37).
  magkakayibgan pl. 26(30). 278(40).
  pagkakayibgan a being friends 24(28). 278(30).
  makipagkayibgan make friends with 40(6). 278(31).
  nakipagkayibgan made friends with 86(30).
  kibgan person loved 279(41).
  nagkkibgan are loving each other 90(32). 280(4).
  maibign fond of 96(39). 110(15).

bon bird 197(21).

-gi`: magi` accurate 28(5).

igb that dipped 220(42).
  umigb dip out 227(38).
  mangigb fetch water 282(24).

Igorte S. Igorote 110(33).

-haw: ihw roasted 222(32).
  maghaw roast, tr. 232(21).
  inhaw was roasted 244(16).
  ihawn gridiron 295(9).

-hip: umhip is blowing 227(39).
  hinpan was blown on 251(33).

ikw thou 18(10). 47. 63. 182.
  See iy, k, m.

-kid: nakakid is coiled up 120(21).
  tagakid roller 315(35).

-ikl`: kaiklin shortness 192(21).
  maiikl` short, pl. 24(31).
  npakaikl` very short 221(17).

lag go away 151(39).
  umlag get out of the way 56(20).
  nagsilag got out of the way, pl. 118(34).
  umlag is running away 116(7).
  pagilag a getting away 116(27).
  panginglag an avoiding 102(2). 118(43). 240(8).
  ilgan inlagn be avoided 238(42).
  inilgan was avoided 251(37).
  inilgan is being avoided 36(22).

iln a few; how many? 16(11). 66. 98.
  iln only a few 38(9). 48(28).
  makiln several times 44(39). 298(33).

ilng uncanny 40(9).
  pagilng a tricking 227(41).
  kailngan kayilngan necessity 58(16). 275(35). 288(12).
  nangngailngan requires 108(2). 275(38).
  pangangailngan a needing 236(32). 275(39).
  kkailangnin will be necessitated 275(39).
  kinkailngan is being necessitated 46(11). 82(38).
  nailng was nonplussed 285(21).

-lap: mailap wild, pl. 28(25).

law light, lamp 122(5).
  ilawn lamp 286(27).
  malaw illuminated 72(6).

elektrisidd S. electricity 290(19).

-lin: panginglin performing of ceremonies 112(18).

log river 16(2).
  log-Psig Pasig river 244(9).

Ilko S. Iloko 275(8).

impiyrno, see infiyrno.

emplyo S. employment 92(32).

imp grandmother 59. 256.
  magimp grandmother and grandchild 242(13).

in mother 30(27). 151(22). 59.
  magin mother and child 242(14).
  magiin pl. 242(30).
  inahn female 238(40).
  inin godmother 247(17).

-nam: manam handsome, pleasant 18(14). 269(5).
  pinman be made very pretty 308(37).

ind` grandmother 59. 256.

-inp: nainp is impatient 285(22).

nit heat 134(19).
  int heated, angry 167(9). 222(33).
  umnit became hot 227(42).
  nagnit heated; grew angry 24(22).
  nagnit is heating 234(6).
  kaintan heat 118(20).
  manit hot 50(9).
  mainit pl. 96(29). and Corrigenda.
  tagint hot season 152(20). 315(11). and Corrigenda.

iniy prep. and loc. of kay: your, you, by you, pl. 165. 169.
  niniy disj., by you, of you, 163.

-inlag, see lag.

infiyrno impiyrno S. hell 22(6).

entabldo S. platform 98(40).

-intind S.: nintindihn was understood 50(6).

Intsk Chinese 56(34).

-in: inin was paid attention to 68(6).
  nin got noticed 100(3).

-inm: uminm drank 228(2).
  paginm a drinking 163(21).
  magiinm drink much 206(26).
  mngingnom manginom boozer 243(11).
  ininm was drunk 230(11).
  inumn drinking water 247(27).
  numnan water-shelf 259(22).
  nman drinking-party 257(25).
  kanman one of two who drink together 277(40).
  makinm accidentally drink 88(34).
  pinainm is being caused to drink 200(18).
  tagainm one whose only duty it is to drink 315(36).
  tagapagpainm one whose duty it is to give drink 316(2).

inyat molasses 253(40).

-ngat: nagngat was careful 288(13).
  nagngat is being careful 48(13).
  pagingat a being careful 62(14).
  ingtan be done carefully 227(31).
  pagingtan be given due care 255(20).
  mangat careful 40(22).

ngay noise 32(30).
  pagiingy a making much noise 293(13).
  nangay made a sound 285(30).
  mangay make a sound 106(5). noisy 295(16).

Inggls Ingglses S. English 155(24). 260(11).

ingkantdo S. enchanted 84(16).

engkantadr S. enchanter 84(38).

ingkng grandfather 59. 256.

ip rice-hulls 120(22).

-pat, see pat.

-pon: nagssipagpon are gathering up 262(37).
  mapon have been gathered 34(12).
  napon has been gathered 60(32).
  mpon get gathered 293(39).

ir this 163(36). 64.
  nir disj., of this, by this 316(18). 166.
  See also dne.

is s one, a 16(3). 67. 248. 261. 314.
  is ng bhay: kas-ng-bhay housemate 68(22). 266(37).
  is ng dan: ikais-ng-dan hundredth 273(22).
  is ng laks: ikais-ng-laks` millionth 273(23).
  is ng lbo: ikais-ng-lbo thousandth 273(23).
  is ng p`: pangs-m-p` number ten 225(40).
  ikas-m-p` tenth 212(38). 273(24).
  maks-m-p` ten times 64(19).
  is only one 36(20).
  is-is one by one 32(23). 76(19). 265(4).
  nagis-is acted one by one 239(16).
  inis-is were taken one by one 76(15).

isd` fish 88(26).
  mngingisd` fisherman 243(6).
  palisdan fishpond 315(24).

sip thought, intelligence; think 88(15). 159(29). 184(15). 222(2).
  pangsip means of thinking 271(15).
  umsip think 228(3). thought out 96(19). 100(15).
  pagsip a thinking out 228(4).
  magsip take thought 200(23). 234(7).
  nagsip took thought, planned 207(20). 233(8).
  pagisip a planning; thinking-power, reason
  44(25). 98(34). 234(9). 252(31). 254(27).
  magisp think of various things 237(33).
  nagisp thought about, ransacked his mind 102(43).
  nagisp is variously thinking of 202(42).
  pagiisp a searching through one's mind 30(16).
  ispin be thought of 166(11).
  insip was thought of 170(4).
  pinagsip was planned 246(14).
  pinagisp was variously thought out 246(21).
  pagkasip a having thought out 193(31).
  pagksip a chance thinking out 291(7). 292(11).
  nagpasip caused to be thought out 310(21).
  ipinasip was caused to be thought of 306(18).

eskuwla S. pupil 304(5).
  eskuwlhan school 90(3).

Espniya S. Spain 80(40).

isprito S. spirit 66(23).

Estdos-Undos S. United States 46(33).

estasiyn S. station 116(20).

estudiynte S. student 26(29).

estopdo S. stew 182(2).

istriya S. history 271(6).

itm black 36(40).
  itimn be made black 251(40).
  kaitm what blackness 151(27).
  kaiitm pl. 267(41).
  maitm black 36(12).
  pitimn be made very black 308(37).

itlg egg 28(31).
  pinangitlugn was laid into 256(35).
  pngitlgan place where eggs are laid 262(4).

it yit this, the latter, he, it 16(32). 64.
  nit disj., of this, by this 20(34). 166.
  ganit in this manner 26(7). 190.
  See also dto.

-wan: wan (for i-wan) be left 32(3). 140(3).
  wan will be left 248(21).
  inwan was left 32(25). 44(42).
  inwan is being left 248(22).
  kinaiwnan was left in 237(34).
  nawan has been left 32(27).
  nangawan pl. 120(33).
  nwan got left 293(16).
  nagpiwn caused himself to be left 50(38). 304(26).

-iyk: umiyk weep, cry 186(35).
  umiyk is weeping 22(24).
  nagssiiyk pl. 114(15).
  pagiyk a weeping, crying 100(1). 228(6).
  iniyakn is being wept for 251(42).
  ykan a crying by many 100(4). 257(26).
  nagykan wept together 32(8).
  ikiniyk was the cause of weeping 30(37).
  paiyk-iyk weeping at intervals 300(38).
  pagpapaiyk a causing to cry 100(7).
  npaiyk burst into tears 90(20).
  palaiykin cry-baby 315(17).

iyn yn that 20(9). 64.
  niyn disj., of that, by that 157(32). 166.
  ganiyn in that manner 20(12). 102(22). 190.
  See also diyn.

iy y prep. and loc. of ikw: by thee, thee, thy 16(28). 165. 169.

iyn yn yon yan that, you, the former 16(9). 64.
  niyn non disj., of that, by that, 34(27). 38(8). 50(27). 166.
  gayn ganon in that manner 18(19). 190. 238. 239.
  magkgayn happen thus 46(17). 271(10).
  See also don.

Eyurpa Yurpa S. Europe 82(2). 221(37).





K.

k thou, enclitic form of ikw 47. 63. 182.

kabaliyersa S. stable 181(39).

kabn box; dry measure of 75 litres, equal to 25 salp; twenty-five
220(38). 228(36).

kabyo S. horse 60(30). 288(25).
  See kinamatayn.
  nangngabyo is riding horseback 240(9).
  kab-kabayhan hobby-horse 261(34).
  nakapangngabyo is able to ride horseback 287(26).

kabiyw: kumabiyw press sugar-cane 228(6).
  kabywan cane-press 255(28).
  pagkabyawn be used to press cane in 255(27).
  pagkkabyawn will be used to press cane in 255(28).
  pinagkabyawn was the place of pressing cane 255(24).
  pinagkkabyawn is the place of cane-pressing 255(25).

kabuluhn, see -blo.

kabut mushroom 244(19).

-kagt: pagkagt a gnawing 36(4). 86(6).
  kinagt was gnawed 76(9).
  kinkagt is being gnawed 106(30).
  pinagkakagt was variously gnawed 84(24).

khit although; no matter; any
18(11). 22(3). 28(21). 48. 68. 248. 253. 264. 290. 294.

kahn S. box 84(42). 120(20).

khoy wood; tree 32(33). 34(28). 58(1).
  See bnga, pirso, pno`.

-kin: kumin eat 24(1). ate 16(16).
  kumkin is eating 42(8).
  kkin will eat 28(39).
  pagkin an eating; food 28(33). 241(40). 254(5).
  nangngin makes his food of 36(13).
  knin be eaten 293(20). boiled rice 72(34).
  kinin was eaten 32(16). contents of stomach 275(7).
  manginin graze 18(33). 241(13).
  nangnginin is grazing 18(2).
  panginginin a grazing 18(4).
  makapanginin have grazed 18(36).
  kinkin is being eaten 36(15).
  kakann sweetmeats 108(6).
  nagkkakann makes sweetmeats 236(7).
  pagknan be eaten from 255(30).
  knan eating-party 284(36).
  pagkaknan an eating together 108(21).
  kainn kakann dining-room 114(6). 230(12).
  makikin eat along 192(40).
  makkikin will eat along 264(6).
  nakikin ate along 264(7).
  kakkin there has been eating 175(8).
  kaknan one of two who eat together 278(9).
  makakin be able to eat 94(30). 281(37).
  nakin was able to be eaten 283(27).
  pagkakin a having eaten 108(27).
  makkin happen to eat 108(9).
  makpakikin-kin ever eat along 297(26).
  pangpakin served as food 112(29).
  nagpakin caused to be eaten 303(6).
  pagpapakin a causing to eat 112(39).
  paknin be caused to eat 72(33).
  ipinakipakin was asked to be caused to eat 307(37).
  tagakin one whose task is merely to eat 315(37).
  tagapagpakin one who is to serve food 316(4).

kaingn a clearing 118(40).

kakw S. cocoa 299(6).

kki S. khaki 122(2).

kalabsa S. pumpkin 76(15).

kalabw (S.) carabao 70(38).
  kalabw-ram grass-carabao, wild carabao 230(9).

kalabt a touch 201(26).
  kaklabtan one of two who touch each other 277(41).

kalabg a thud 24(4).
  kumalabg fell with a thud 24(9).
  klabgan thud of many objects 257(27).

kalkal merchandise 236(31).

kalmay rice-paste 56(16).

kaln stove, brazier 74(5).

kalasng clink 247(21).
  klasngan clink of many objects 257(31).

-klat: paklat caused to be rumored 118(10).

klaw owl 18(29).

kalayky rake 225(25).
  kinalayky was raked 166(22).

klingkngan, see -lingkng.

kaliw` left-hand 90(26).
  See band.

kalsda, see karsda.

kluluw soul 72(26). 268(15).

-kalusks: kumalusks pattered 228(6).
  klusksan a pattering by many 84(20).

kamlig storehouse 253(37).
  Also as place-n., see byan.

kamtis (S.) tomato 268(26).

kamatsil S. a tree, Pithecolobium dulce Benth. 247(1).

kamy hand 22(9).
  nagkmyan shook hands with each other 234(10).

kambng goat 112(40).

kam we, excl. 20(38). 63.
  See min.

kamista S. shirt 122(2).

-kamt: nagkamt gained 232(22).
  kkamtn will be received 272(42).
  mkamtn get obtained 40(5).
  nkamtn got obtained 62(3).

kampna` S. church-bell 80(26).

kampt kitchen-knife 174(22).

kampn S. comrade 305(33).

-kmot: kinmot was scratched 84(2).

kamte S. sweet-potato 253(2).

knan right-hand 90(26).
  See band.

kandro S. lock 283(40).

kandidto S. candidate 209(24).

kandla` S. candle 50(29).

kandelro S. candlestick 293(5).

kanil, see sil.

kanna a little while ago 22(17). 50(40). 262(5).

kanno, see sno.
  --kanit, see kit.
  --kaniy, see siy.

kaniy` therefore 20(13). 241. 295. 297. 324.

kaniyn S. cannon 252(9).

kaniyunro kaniyunros S. cannoneer 200(18). See trabho.

knser S. cancer 204(11).

kant S. song 208(6).
  kumant sing 110(32).
  kumkant is singing 228(8).
  nagssikant pl. 110(38).
  pagkant a singing 112(3).
  nagkkant sings 112(2).
  kantahn be sung 110(38).
  kinant was sung 208(7).
  kantahn be sung for 204(29).
  kanthan song in chorus 112(4).
  nagkanthan sang in chorus 200(20).

-kap`: kumap` felt out 228(9).
  kumkap` is groping for 228(10).
  nangap` caught with his hand 240(10).
  kinap` was groped out 244(21).
  nakkkap` has come to be grasping 291(31).

kapg when, if 187(12). 248(31). 48. 296. 300. 304.

-kapl: makapl thick 86(7).

Kapampngan, see pangpng.

kpit that held; a hold 66(29).
  kpit-bhay neighboring house, neighbor 38(10). 56(35). 211(5).
  magkpit-bhay pair of neighbors 242(22).
  magkakpit-bhay pl. 38(9).
  kpit-byan neighboring town; person from the next town
  46(7). 60(12). 211(7).
  pagkpit a holding on 295(4).
  nagsikpit took hold, pl. 78(11).
  nakakpit has taken hold 64(22).
  nkkpit is clinging 78(15).
  pakaptin be caused to take hold 78(2).

kpitan S. mayor 98(38).

kapitn S. captain 254(34).

kapte S. rain-coat 161(20).

kpuw` fellow-; equally 36(39). 249.
  kpuw to: magkpuw-to two fellow-men 242(23).

karaniywan, see -dniw.

krang covering of wagon or boat 118(21).

karyom needle 224(1). See btas.

karra S. course 167(27).

karta S. wagon 100(23).

karitn S. cart 38(17).

karnabl S. carnival 237(8).

karn S. meat, beef 114(11).

karsda kalsda S. street 201(22). 257(26).

karumta S. carriage 52(36).

karsa S. float 234(13).

kasl (S.) wedding 219(38). married 54(19). 223(31).
  pagkakasl a uniting in marriage 90(34).
  ikinasl was united in marriage 94(29).
  mkasl get married 92(26).
  mkkasl will get married 295(14).
  pagkkasl a getting married 94(35).
  pakasl get married 168(16).
  ipakasl be caused to be united in marriage 92(17).
  ipinakasl was caused to be united in marriage 92(24).
  mpakasl get married 90(41).

kasalukyan, see -salkoy.

kasapuwgo S. match 193(7).

kasra S. landlady 302(28).
  nangngasra eats in a boarding-house 240(11).
  pngaserahn boarding-place 38(4). 262(9).
  nagppakasra keeps a boarding-house 303(8).

Kastla` S. Spanish, Spaniard 28(3).

katm a plane 56(38).
  kumatm use the plane 58(10).
  mngangtam planer 56(34).
  pinagkatamn was variously planed off; shavings 56(40).

katawn, see to.

kath` that composed 221(2).

ktiyaw fighting-cock 238(3).

ktre S. bedstead 62(38).

katuturn, see -tuwd.

kwad wire 284(22).

-kwag: ikinwag was shaken 78(14).

kwal herd, troop 106(26). 116(6).

kawle` frying-pan 114(10).

kwwa`, see wa`.

kawyan bamboo 34(37). See panty.
  kawayann kwayann bamboo-grove 260(42). 290(20).

kwit pruning-knife 240(12).
  mangwit prune; get tired of 240(12).
  nangngwit is getting tired of 104(18).

kay, see si.

ky k than 16(9). 281.

kya ability, means 56(4). 226(35). 255(3).
  nangngya has mastery 240(14).
  ikakya be the cause of ability; means 54(22).
  makkya will come within the ability 16(16).
  nakya came within the ability 283(29).
  nakkya comes within the ability 283(30).

kay` else 40(5).
  so that 48(11). 47. 219. 297. 317(4). 321.

-kyas: kays smoothed 222(34).
  kumyas smoothed 228(11).
  nakyas was able to be smoothed 283(31).

-kayil`: ipinagkayil` was lied about 60(18).

kylan klan when? 70(18). 92(2). 39. 262(7). (13). 317(5).

kyo cloth 249(34).
  mangkakay cloth-dealer 248(9).

kay you, pl. 63. See iniy.

kib` least sound or movement 44(42).
  kumib` make the least sound, budge 279(13). made the least sound,
  budged 44(5).
  pagkib` a making the least sound or movement 104(25).

Kka` (S.) short-n. (Francisca) 311(11).

Kko` (S.) short-n. (Francisco) 50(36).

-killa: kilal familiar 290(19).
  kumilla make acknowledgement 90(40).
  kakilla person with whom one is acquainted 60(23).
  pagkkilanln be used as an advertisement 58(18). 279(28).
  nakkkilla nakkkilla is acquainted with
  167(30). 276(8). 292(28).
  nkilla was perceived, got known 70(38). 104(2).
  mpagkilla be found out 40(20). 66(38).
  npagkilla was realized 50(32).
  npagkkilla is being recognized 44(34). 52(1).
  nagpakilla caused to be known 168(34).
  nagppakilla is causing to be known, showing 44(24).
  pagpapakilla a showing 52(25).
  ipakilla be caused to be known 58(5).
  ipinakilla was caused to be known 64(40).
  ipinakkilla is being shown 88(8).
  mipakilla come to be shown 68(32).

-klos: pagklos a moving, intr. 44(35). 66(35).
  klsan concerted movement 264(4).
  makaklos be able to move 311(28).

kin, see sin.

kinbang profit 263(39).
  pakikinbang profit; holy communion 263(38).
  pakinbang advantage 300(3).
  nagpakinbang caused to profit, gave holy communion 98(4).
  pakkinabngan will be profited from 94(26).

-king: kuming trembled 42(41). 64(27).

-king: making hear 20(16). 30(17).
  makking will hear 96(11).
  naking heard 285(30).
  nakking is hearing 22(21). 96(5).
  pakinggn be listened to 20(29). 308(12).
  pinakinggn was listened to 50(27).
  npakinggn happened to be heard 46(24).

knis skill 56(37). 102(22).
  kaknis what cleverness, how clever? 102(14).
  maknis smooth, skilful 102(9).
  pinakamaknis most skilful 102(14).
  makiknis pl. 118(29).
  nakapagppaknis is able to make smooth 58(14).

-kintb: nagppakintb is causing to shine, polishing 114(8).

-kingg, see king.

-ksig: maksig lively 78(23).

-kta: kumta find, earn 30(33).
  kumkta is finding 30(37).
  pagkta an earning 60(37).
  magkta see each other (two actors) 234(10).
  magkikta pl. 28(1). 239(5).
  nagkta saw each other 203(40).
  kinakitan was the place of seeing, was seen in 36(32).
  makkta happen to see, find 30(26). 66(6).
  makkkta will happen to see 30(36).
  nakkta happened to see 16(2). 40(27).
  nakkkta happens to see 292(31).
  mkta get seen 30(25). 32(38).
  mkkta will be seen 22(37).
  nkta got seen 20(24). 32(31).
  nkkta is getting seen 20(21). 26(4).
  pagkkta a chance seeing 38(18). 80(12). 292(35).
  kpakitan one of two who show each other 310(36).
  nagppakta causes to be seen, shows 48(14).
  ipakta be shown 48(33). 306(21).
  ipinakta was caused to be seen, was shown 30(38). 34(18).
  mipakta come to be shown 28(15).

kit thou and I; thou by me 16(19). 18(21). 63. 182.
  nit disj., by, of thee and me 163.
  kanit prep. and loc., thy and my, thee and me, by thee and me
  227(17). 165. 169.

kit` chicken 238(9).

klse S. class, school 26(36).

kristl S. glass 255(21).

kristiyno (Chinese brogue: kilistiyno) S. Christian 58(39).

Krsto S. Christ 20(4).

krs S. cross; also as family-n. 20(24). 242(20).
  nagkurs crossed himself 64(29).
  nagkkurs is crossing himself 64(5).

k disj. of ak: of me, by me 47. 163. 182.

kba` hump; hunchback 22(29).

-kubl: nagkubl concealed himself 94(5).
  nagkkubl is hiding (intr.) 232(23).
  pagkukubl a hiding 186(14).
  nangngubl is staying concealed 108(20). 240(16).
  pangngubl a staying concealed 272(14).
  pinagkkublihn is being hidden in 94(8).
  kublhan hiding-place 36(33).
  nkkubl is in hiding 108(33).
  pagkkubl a being in hiding 108(23).

kbo hut 118(27).

kgon nipa, Imperata arundinacea 118(27).

-kha: kumha took 50(38).
  kumkha is taking 112(7).
  knin be taken 202(10).
  kinha was taken 30(7). 84(25).
  kinkha is being taken 74(26).
  pinagkkuh is being variously taken 74(7).
  pagknan be taken from 255(35).
  pagkknan will be taken from 222(35).
  pinagknan was taken from 255(31).
  pinagkknan is being taken from 255(33).
  ikinakha was the cause of taking 272(11).
  makakkha will be able to take 56(40).
  nakakha has taken 90(24).
  nakakkha succeeds in taking 54(4).
  pagkakha a completed taking 52(36).
  mkha get taken 34(9).
  nkha chanced to be taken 58(11). 267(7).

kuk fingernail 234(23).
  manghinuk cut the fingernails 241(24).

klam magic principle 40(11).
  mangkuklam sorcerer 40(1). See mdiko.
  kinlam was bewitched 42(29).
  kinklam is being bewitched 40(41).
  nkklam is bewitched 42(6).

klang lack 201(10).
  kulng made incomplete 222(35).
  nagkklang is at fault 96(40).

-kulpol: nkkulaplan is encrusted 110(35).

Kuls (S.) n. (for Nicols) 258(28).

Kulsa (S.) n. 287(23).

klay color 171(21).
  kaklay of the same color 266(10).
  kasingklay id. 314(37).

kulilng small bell 225(22).

klera S. cholera 42(3).

-kul`: kumkul` is boiling, intr. 74(24).
  nagpakul` caused to boil 96(20).

kulg thunder 254(36).

kulug wart 228(30).

-kulng: klngan place of imprisonment 86(4).
  kulungn cage, crate 238(41).
  kinkkulungn is the place of accidental imprisonment 86(5).
  nkkulng is imprisoned 84(42).

-kumbid (S.): kinumbid was summoned 20(19).

kompaniy S. company 221(20).

-kumpisl (S.) magkumpisl go to confession 98(22).
  pagkukumpisl a going to confession 98(12).
  nangumpisl practised going to confession 98(28).
  nangngumpisl goes to confession 56(13).
  kinkumpisl is being given confession 98(7).
  kumpslan confession 98(24).
  mapagkumpisl given to going to confession 98(11).
  nagppakumpisl gives confession 98(3).
  pagpapakumpisl a giving confession 98(5).
  pkumpislan confessional 96(37).

kumpl cluster 281(35).

kumpusisiyn S. composition 90(15).

kumust S. como est? 230(39).

kmot blanket, sheet 36(39).

-kun, see--kha.

kung when, if, whether 16(6). 45. 298-301.

kongkristiynos S., see kapatd.

kpiya S. copy 52(10).

kra S. priest 50(3).

kurl S. corral 268(42).

korbta S. necktie 163(36).

kurpot stingy 112(16).

koryo S. mail 168(19).

-kro`: pinagkkro` is being considered 82(24).
  mapagkro` be able to be divined 287(10).
  napagkkro` is able to be divined 52(19).
  mpagkro` get figured out 20(18).
  mppagkro` will get figured out 182(20).
  npagkro` got figured out 297(13).
  nppagkro` is divined, is understood 297(15).

korna S. crown 26(24).

-kurs, see krs

-kurt: kumurt pinch 228(13).
  mangurt pinch people 240(16).
  kurutn be pinched 244(24).
  kurutn be pinched from 251(43).
  krtan a pinching by many 257(35).

ksa` of its own accord 225(20).

kusna` S. kitchen 114(9).

kosinro S. cook 114(1).

kutng kitten 255(37).

kutsliyo S. table-knife 114(9).

kutsro S. driver 272(2).

kto head-louse 225(16). See pamaty.
  kutuhn lousy person 260(10).

kuwko cigar-holder 220(34).

kuwalt kuwlta kuwrta (S.) money 30(33). 141(27).

kuwrto S. room 84(23).

-kuwayan, see kawyan.

-kuwnta S.: pagkuwnta a counting 223(6).

kuwnto S. story 66(3).
  pagkukuwnto a story-telling 286(5).

kya kyang (C.) oldest brother 46(22). 118(15). 59. 254.
  magkya oldest brother with brother or sister 242(14).
  magkukya pl. 242(30).





L

lan that reserved 221(3).
  inillan is being reserved 248(22).

-lab S. ipagllab will be washed for 174(40).

lban against 22(15). 282.
  lumban complete 60(40).
  labnan be opposed 60(36).
  labann war 251(1).
  nagssipaglabann are fighting each other 122(15).
  paglalabann a fighting, war, battle 116(27).
  makipaglban engage in a contest 48(23).
  pakikipaglban an engaging in a contest 116(29).
  kalban opponent 266(11).
  kinkalban is being opposed 60(38).

labans (S.) large radish 252(21).

labng trough 289(3).
  labangn manger 260(25).

labs the outside 52(38).
  lumabs went out 52(34).
  lumlabs is going out 74(1).
  paglabs a going out 245(3).
  maglabs bring out 234(11).
  ilabs be brought out 270(32).
  nillabasn is being come out at 42(14).
  nagllbsan are going out together 236(16).
  milabs get taken out 110(4).
  palabs theatrical performance 300(4).
  papalabs going out 96(30).
  nagppalabs is bringing out, presenting 303(9).

lab added to ten, -teen 58(12). 135.
  labi ng is: panglab-ng-is number eleven 225(40).
  ika-lab-ng-is eleventh 273(24).

lbis excessive 172(40).

labng bamboo-sprout 172(25).

-ladld: iniladld was dropped 104(36).

lagablb blaze 231(6).

-lagnap: lumagnap circulated, intr. 34(29).

lagri` a saw 187(13).
  manglalagar` food-sawer 243(17).
  mapaglagaran be able to be sawed on 288(24).

lagy situation, condition 46(8). 90(35).
  ilagy be placed 108(12).
  inilagy was placed 220(17).
  inillagy 108(42).
  nilagyn was put onto, was covered 30(11). 261(30).
  nillagyn is being put into, is being filled 108(39).
  lgyan place where things are put 193(36). 258(38).
  lalagyn receptacle 96(25). 261(22).
  pagkaklagy a placing, position 270(40).
  kinllagyn is the place of putting 38(32). 88(5).
  kalgyan position, state 34(34). 176(35).
  mlagy get placed 294(26).
  pagklagy chance placing, position 100(20).
  nagpalagy caused to be placed 24(39).
  mpalagy chance to stay in a position 22(14).

lgi` frequently 60(27). 62(15).
  palgi` id. 62(10).

-lagkt: malagkt sticky 221(26).

laglg that falling 247(3). 257(31).
  illaglg will be dropped 24(3).
  inilaglg was dropped 32(24).
  nalaglg fell down 257(28).

lagnt fever 94(30).

lagpk a falling down 58(35).
  lumagpk come down on, land 46(38). came down 299(32).
  llagpk will fall down on 244(39).
  paglagpk a falling down onto 48(22).
  nppalagpk is falling down onto 108(19).

-lag`: malag` dense 24(31).

-lagk: pagkalagk a having swallowed 30(20).
  pagklagk a chance swallowing 291(9).

-lagt: malagt break off, intr. 40(28).
  nalagt broke off 261(27).
  pagkalagt a breaking off 112(31).

laht all 26(12). 66. 132. 145. 174.
  laht-laht all the various things 74(35).

lhi` family, race 275(29).

lkad a going, an errand 221(4).
  lakd on foot 223(17).
  lumkad go, walk 18(7). went 283(1).
  lumlkad is walking 115(15).
  paglkad a going 66(18).
  naglkad drew on foot 234(13).
  paglalkad a drawing on foot 234(12).
  maglakd walk about 122(7).
  nagllakd is walking about, journeying 22(31). 66(9).
  nagssipaglakd pl. 58(40).
  paglalakd a walking, journeying 66(15). 84(4).
  maglalakd traveler 242(43).
  lakrin be traveled over 118(26).
  nilkad was walked over 244(24).
  lakran be gone to, be gone on 70(6). 252(4).
  nilakran was travelled on 32(19).
  nillakran is being walked on 22(33).
  lakarn walking-party 260(13).
  makallkad will be able to walk 104(31).
  nakallkad is able to walk 34(8).
  nalkad was able to be walked over 283(33).
  nlkad chanced to walk 177(17).
  palkad course 50(6).
  pagpapalkad a causing to go 288(9).
  pinalkad was caused to walk 68(41).
  ipalkad be caused to go 118(19).

laks force 44(6). See bos.
  lumaks grew strong 76(39).
  inilaks was made louder 42(41).
  lakasn be done with strength 252(5).
  kalakasn strength, loudness 182(23).
  malaks strong, loud 18(23). 269(6).
  pinakamalaks strongest 309(41).
  malalaks pl. 18(15).

lak size 66(12).
  lumak grew larger 56(9).
  nagsilak pl. 90(5).
  paglak a growing larger 300(17).
  lakhn be made big 252(6).
  kalakhn greatness, most 44(29). 60(39).
  malak large 18(18). 69. 99. 110. 138.
  malalak pl. 34(38).
  ikpagppalak will be the means of causing to grow larger 310(22).
  kasinglak of the same size 314(39).
  magkakasinglak several of the same size 120(3).

lkip: kalkip having the same cover, enclosed with 173(28).

laks` million 134. See is.

-lko`: maglko` peddle 232(23).
  maglalak` peddler 226(23).

-lla: nilla was woven 46(40).

-lal`: inilal` was the cause of getting worse 291(17).
  palal` getting worse 92(10).

lalki man, male 30(31).

llim depth 218(27).
  illim under side 20(28).
  nilalman was done deeply 252(7).
  mallim deep 18(39).
  pakalalmin be made too deep 309(33).
  pakallalmin will be made too deep 309(34).
  pinakallim was made too deep 309(35).

llo` more 24(27). 147. 242.
  nilalan was exaggerated 98(5).

-lam, see -lam.

lamn flesh, muscle, contents 18(15). 48(1). See pirso.

lmang only 28(33). 47. 220. 227. 243.

lmat crack 300(17).

-lambt: malambt soft 163(14).

lamg cold 118(31).
  lumamg became cold 296(39).
  llamg will become cold 183(16).
  kalalamg what coldness, pl. 268(1).
  kalamign coldness 272(36).
  malalamg cold, pl. 219(32).
  taglamg cold weather 315(30).

lamsa S. table 114(9).

-lamps: lumlamps is getting excessive 54(27).

lamg bruised 62(28).
  nagllamg is getting bruised 62(15).

lamk gnat 303(9).

-lmon: lumlmon is feeding, intr. 228(14).
  nagssilmon pl. 262(21).
  lalumnan throat 88(28).

lands path 252(3).

lansnes S. fruit of Lansium domesticum Jack. 306(32).

lant withered 76(36).

langgm ant 202(20).

langs oil 74(24).

lngit sky, heaven 22(2).
  kalangitn heavenly regions 104(24).

-langy: lumangy swim 28(21). swam 82(33).
  lngyan swimming-place 258(40).
  makipaglngyan go along swimming 264(28).
  makkipaglngyan will join the swimming party 264(30).
  plangyan place where something is allowed to swim 309(8).

-lpad: lapd widened 306(8).
  kalapran wideness 70(40).
  malpad wide 92(35).

-lapg: inilapg was placed on the ground 106(16).
  inillapg is being placed on the ground 36(41).
  nllapg is lying on the ground 114(43).

lpis S. pencil 223(8).

-lpit (a) lumpit came near 26(19).
  lumlpit is coming near 64(19).
  paglpit a coming near 66(25).
  nilaptan was approached 24(22).
  malpit near 44(27).
  malalpit pl. 110(18).
  --(b) With accent-shift: mlapt get near 100(27).
  mllapt will be near 120(7).
  nlapt got near 98(40).
  pagklapt a having got near 46(28).

larwan image 20(4).

lariy (S.) brick 302(41).

lar` game; play 46(32). 241(34).
  magllar` will play 232(24).
  naglar` played 232(24).
  nagsipaglar` pl. 86(31).
  nagllar` is playing 46(36).
  nagssipaglar` pl. 46(35).
  paglalar` a playing 48(5).
  larun be played with 244(25).
  lran play-ground 139(41).
  laruwn toy 84(6).
  paglaruwn be used as a plaything 255(37).
  pinaglarun was played in 48(41).
  pinagllaruwn is being used as a plaything 255(40).
  makipaglar` play along 88(20).
  pakikipaglar` a playing along 264(25).
  kalar` playmate 86(33).
  kallar` there has been playing 267(16).
  palar` public games 204(20).
  pagpapalar` an allowing to be played 268(9).

lasng drunken 108(32).
  naglasng got drunk 282(28).
  paglalasng a getting drunk 190(15).
  nakallasng makes drunk 108(8).
  nakkapaglasng is able to get drunk 286(38).
  balasng an intoxicant plant, Anamirta cocculus 108(7). 314(23).

lasta (S.) knife 207(6).

lta tin; can 223(26). 292(2).

-lat`: panglalat` extreme fatigue 66(33).

-ltag: ipinaglltag is being spread for 62(35).
  nlltag is lying stretched out 92(22).
  pagkltag a chance spreading 269(39).

latn S. Latin 28(23).

-lon: kalanan duration, length 32(1). 86(11).
  nalon took long 34(20). 70(37).
  nallon takes long 108(27).
  malon long, taking long 34(25). 108(35). 69. 110. 138.
  nalanan lasted long 36(33). 38(12). 54(13).

law, see sa.
  dalaw two 16(25). 224(22). 67.
  dalaw ng p`: pangdalaw-ng-p` number twenty 225(41).
  ikadalaw-ng-p` twentieth 273(24).
  dalaw ng p t is: ikadalaw-ng-p-t-is twenty-first 273(25).
  ddalaw only two 84(30). 224(32).
  dal-dalaw two by two 224(10).
  pangalaw number two 226(7).
  dadalawhin having two 54(5).
  ikalaw second 24(15).
  makalaw second day, day after tomorrow 180(4). 204(18). 288(33).
  kamakalaw day before yesterday 166(42). 266(35). 259.
  maklaw twice 98(1). 262(8).

-lwak: malwak broad 28(26). 72(18).

-lwig: lalawgan province 110(13).
  lalawga-ng-Pampngga Pampanga province 210(28).
  malwig roundabout 240(32).

-lawt: naglawt hung out, tr. 232(26).
  ilawt be hung out, down 78(1).
  inilawt was hung down 78(6).
  nakalawt hung down 38(29).

-lay`: kalayan liberty 56(31).

lyag a sail 228(17).
  lumyag sailed, voyaged 228(16).
  nagllayg sails back and forth 258(42).

lyas get away 222(4).
  lumyas go away 100(8). went away 228(18).
  llyas will go away 181(28).
  nilaysan was deserted 252(9).
  lysan a deserting by many 259(30).
  maklyas-lyas ever run away 297(24).
  pagpapalyas a driving away 36(23).
  palaysin be driven away 84(22).
  pinalyas was driven away 72(11).
  pinallyas is being driven away 72(31).

-lyaw: pagpapalyaw a causing to be fulfilled 312(19).

-lyo` (a): kalyo` what farness, how far? 70(5).
  malyo` distant, far 28(26).
  malalyo` pl. 82(37).
  --(b) With accent-shift: mlay` be far away 32(19). 34(11).
  nllay` is far away 80(37).

lban except 70(12). 114(23). 283.

-libng: paglilibng an amusing 116(37).
  lbngan place for amusing 258(42).
  malibng be diverted 204(30).
  nalibng became engrossed 70(22).
  ipinallibng is being caused to be amused 116(37).

-libng: paglilibng a burying 114(21).
  inillibng is being buried 112(30).
  lbngan burial-ground 114(21).
  pagklibng a chance burying 114(25).

librerya S. library 227(36).

libr S. book 90(29).

lbo thousand 48(28). 52(43). 134. See is.
  lbo-lbo a thousand at a time 100(18).
  makllbo a thousand times 50(28). 298(38).

-lbot: lumbot took a walk 228(20).
  naglbot carried about 234(14).
  naglibt went on his errands 70(20).
  nagllibt is going about 34(30).
  nagssipaglibt pl. 110(27).
  paglilibt a going about 68(2).
  nalbot has been gone round to 76(24).

-lgaw: paglgaw a courting 46(21).
  manglilgaw manlilgaw wooer 42(27). 70(10).
  nilligwan is being courted 70(14).

-ligw: paligw allowing himself to be led astray 32(13).

-ligya: magsiligya rejoice, pl. 262(21).
  nakalligya is gladdening 202(21).

-ligd, see -glid.

-lgid: palgid round about 16(20). 26(8).
  palgid-lgid all around 32(33). 38(19).

ligs speed 218(30).
  ligsihn be done quickly 252(10).
  maligs quick 44(37).
  nagmmaligs acts quickly 235(41).

-ligts: nagligts saved 291(39).
  naglligts saves 18(9).
  pagliligts a saving 96(19).
  iligts be saved 88(30).
  niligtasn was escaped from 22(28).
  makapagligts be able to save 94(34).
  mligts get saved 92(8). 96(4).
  nligts got saved 122(18).
  mligtasn get escaped from 50(30).

lgo` bathe, intr. 222(4).
  malgo` bathe, intr. 28(14). 191(38).
  mallgo` will bathe 191(30).
  nalgo` took a bath 76(37). 285(38).
  nallgo` is bathing 16(2). 32(31).
  palgo` bath 300(4).
  palig` bathed 300(26).
  pangpalgo` used for bathing 183(23).
  pagpalgo` a bathing, intr. 40(18). 76(38). 302(20).
  magsipalgo` bathe, intr. pl. 28(12). 302(23).
  makapalgo` have bathed 32(37).
  pagkpalgo` a chance bathing 313(2).
  pligun bathroom, bathtub 309(12).
  nagpalgo` caused to bathe, bathed, tr. 181(36). 303(11).
  pagpapalgo` a bathing, tr. 303(12).
  pinalligan is being caused to bathe, given a bath 308(14). is
  being bathed in 308(13).
  tagapagpalgo` one whose duty it is to bathe, tr. 316(5).

-liguwk: mliguwk get spilled 174(6).

lham letter 154(4).

lhim secret 24(32). 40(33).
  lihm kept secret 36(22).
  inilhim was kept secret 118(41).
  palihm secretly 70(14).

lig neck 135(17). 201(10).

-lit: kaliitn smallness 34(2). 118(1).
  malit small 40(14).
  malilit pl. 34(36).

leksiyn S. lesson 187(24).

likd back 24(26). 68(4).
  likurn rear 48(16). 68(11).
  -talkod 315(27).
  tumalkod turned the back 231(18).
  pagtalkod a turning the back 231(18).
  tinalikdn was turned the back to 254(21).

Llay (S.) short-n. 264(6).

llim shade 310(43).
  mallim shady 294(27).

lim five 56(33). 67.
  panglim number five 225(37).
  lilimhin having five 86(21). 247(36).
  ikalim fifth 273(18).
  maklim five times 298(33).

-lmang: limng confused 291(1).
  nalmang became confused 285(24).

limonda S. lemonade 297(10).

lims alms; ceremonial gift 112(6).
  maglims give alms 78(37).
  manglilmos alms-seeker 112(10).
  limusn be given alms 112(7).
  nillimusn is being given alms 72(31).
  nagppalims is asking for alms 72(30).
  nagssipagpalims pl. 110(28). 304(17).

-lmot: nalimtan was forgotten 208(7).
  nallimtan is forgotten 92(2).
  nakallmot has forgotten 276(8).

-linamnm: malinamnm tasty 16(18).

-lnaw: malnaw clear 38(18). 116(38).

lindl earthquake 289(14).
  lumlindl there is an earthquake 281(12).

-lnis: lumnis get clear 228(21).
  naglnis cleaned 181(38).
  nagllnis is cleaning 182(31).
  maglilins cleaner 242(43).
  linsin be cleaned 238(6).
  nilnis was cleaned 56(39).
  nillnis is being cleaned 244(26).
  kalinsan cleanness 276(32).
  pinakamalnis cleanest 310(1).
  malilnis clean, neat, pl. 259(1).

lintk lightning 254(37).

lingg (S.) Sunday 50(11).
  lingg-lingg every Sunday 96(4).

-lingkng: klingkngan little finger 280(13).

lpa` a smearing, plastering 196(24).
  panglpa` used for plastering 225(12).
  maglilip` plasterer 242 (43).

-lipd: lumlipd is flying 88(23).
  pinalipd was caused to fly 295(5).

-lpas: lips elapsed, evaporated 222(38). 287(7).
  magpalpas allow to elapse 26(39).
  nagpalpas allowed to elapse 92(3).
  nagppalpas allows to elapse 74(12). 90(7).

-lpat: lumpat change one's abode, move 88(43). moved
118(39). 228(23).
  nagssilpat are changing their abode 122(13).
  ikinalpat was the cause of moving 116(26).
  mllpat will go over 46(2).

-lpol: liplin be exterminated 24(36).

-lipumpn: nagssilipumpn are swarming over 262(22).
  pinagkkalipumpunn is being overrun by many 90(19). 276(9).
  mpagkalipumpunn get overrun by many 106(28). 298(30).

-lpon: nagsslpon are swarming over 262(22).
  nagssipaglpon are gathering up 262(37).
  nagkkalpon is getting all over 268(32).
  nallpon has been, is able to be gathered together 98(38). 283(34).

-litw: lumitw bobbed up 78(7).

-litsn S. paglilitsn a pig-roasting 262(39).
  litsnan pig-roasting party 257(37).

-lit: pagkalit a having become confused 72(9).

-liwalw: magliwalw be idle, loaf 240(23).
  pagliliwalw an amusing oneself, pleasure 96(39).

liwnag illumination 66(1).
  lumiwnag became light 201(37).
  maliwnag bright 66(37).

liyb flame 66(16).

lyi S. law 234(36).

luby cessation 100(1).
  nagluby ceased 66(35).
  naglluby ceases 58(21).

lubh` very 46(33). 147.
  malubh` intense 46(7). 78(25).

lbid rope 186(38).

-lublb: nagllublb is splashing about 110(25).

lbo S. wolf 299(38).

lbo (S.) balloon 138(31).

lubg immersion, dyeing 251(41).
  lumubg went under 78(17).
  nlubg got sunk 257(12).
  nllubg is immersed 78(13).

lubs complete 40(2). 312(19).

lugr S. place 20(27).

-lgaw: maglgaw prepare rice-broth 232(27).
  nilgaw rice-broth 252(32).

-lgi: ikinalgi was the cause of losing money 239(43).

-lgit: palgit handicap 60(38).

-lugmk: nllugmk is sunk (in an emotion) 92(4). 114(14).

-lha`: lumlha` is shedding tears 94(31).

-luhd: lumuhd kneel down 228(24). knelt down 228(25).
  nakaluhd has knelt down, is on his knees 112(1).
  nluhd knelt down 295(33).
  nlluhd is kneeling 22(24).
  nagpatiluhd suddenly knelt down 313(29).
  pagpapatiluhd a suddenly kneeling down 313(31).
  npatiluhd fell on his knees 313(38).

Lkas S. n. 104(20).

luks jump over 222(5).
  lumuks jumped 16(21).
  pagluks a jumping 60(14).
  luksuhn be jumped onto 252(11).
  lukshan jumping by many 257(38).
  nakipaglukshan took part in a jumping-contest 264(31).
  nakkipaglukshan takes part in a jumping-contest 204(19).
  pakikipaglukshan a jumping with others 62(1).
  nppaluks involuntarily jumps up 62(10).

luktn locust 191(32).

lko S. crazy 80(31).
  panglolko a fooling 108(3).
  nillko is being fooled 50(32).
  kalokhan insanity 313(25).
  pagkalko a fit of insanity 313(22).
  nllko is fooled 106(1).

llan that loaded onto a vehicle; an embarking
100(32). 118(18). 219(40).
  nagsillan embarked, pl. 118(24).
  illan be put on a vehicle 20(38).
  inillan was put on a vessel 56(24).
  lulnan be laden 252(12).
  llnan an embarking by many 259(32).
  mllan get put in a vehicle 20(11).

Lleng (S.) short-n. 134(31).

luld shin 254(35).
  lulurn be hit on the shin 252(13). the shin 261(25) Corrigenda.

lma` worn-out, old 171(4).

lumb cocoanut-shell drinking-cup 74(5).

lump lame 219(5).
  nalump became lame 285(28).

lmot moss 313(41).

lundg a leap 48(16).
  lumundg leaped 70(39).
  paglulundg a leaping about 296(13).

lnes S. Monday 180(5).

-lnod: lunrin be drowned 16(25).
  kalunran be drowned in 274(22). west 18(22). 163(27).
  kallunran will be the place of drowning 274(23).
  magkalund have drownings 112(13).
  malnod get drowned 264(29).
  nalnod got drowned 28(22).
  nangalnod pl. 88 (31).
  pagkalnod a drowning 88(30). 272(23).

lungg` lair, hole 84(29).

-lungkt: ikinalungkt was the cause of regret 32(37). 88(17).
  ikinallungkt is the cause of regret 80(30). 272(13).
  kalungktan melancholy 92(5).
  nalungkt became sad 90(34).
  nangalungkt pl. 34(23).
  nallungkt is sorry 285(25).
  palalungktin given to grief 315(9).

lpa` land, ground, earth 16(4). 24(4). 46(38). See hamps.
  lpa-ng-Bstos ground of Bustos 100(9).
  lpa-ng-San-Ildepnso ground of San Ildefonso 100(34).
  lupan land, country 56(17).

-lupt: kalupitn cruelty 74(20).
  malupt cruel 44(30).
  malulupt pl. 20(32).

lsong aid 231(42).
  lusngin be gone down into 244(27).
  nilsong was gone down into 244(27).
  nilusngan was gone to the aid of 252(15).
  lusungn mutual aid 260(14).

lusng mortar 16(25).

lto` a cooking; that cooked 182(33). 221(8).
  maglto` cook 114(3).
  naglto` cooked 182(1).
  nagllto` is cooking 108(6).
  maglulut` cook 243(1).
  lutin be cooked 134(19).
  nilto` was cooked 257(35).
  nillto` linlto` is being cooked 244(28).
  inillto` ilinlto` is being cooked 181(18). 248(24). 249(25).
  ipinagllto` is being cooked for 249(24).
  lutan be cooked with 252(15).
  lutun kitchen 114(6).
  pagkalto` a past cooking 108(10).
  nagppalto` causes to be cooked 108(6).

lob inside; spirit, will, opinion 36(5). 40(25). 90(40). See bigy.
  lob-lob modest opinion 98(26).
  nillob is being intended 307(5).
  pumalob go into the inside 42(10). 302(19).
  napalob got into the inside 104(15).

-luw, see kluluw.

-luw`: inilw` is being spat out 40(28).

-luwg: maluwg loose, not well fixed 92(38).

-luwalhti`: maluwalhti` in good shape 268(36).

-luwng: kaluwngan looseness, width 253(27).
  maluwng loose, too wide 289(8).

-luws: lumuws go down-stream 56(21).
  pagluws a going down-stream 297(34).
  napaluwsan went down-stream together 279(4). 312(8).

luwt long duration 173(39).
  maluwt long 40(31). 62(22). 269(7).
  magmaluwt take much time 236(2).
  nagmaluwt acted slowly 236(1).
  naluwatn took long 84(8).





M.

(see also B, P).

m, see na.

m` Uncle, Don, Mr. 256.

mablo a tree and its fruit Trichodesma zeylanicum 34(40).

madl` populace 24(33).

-magt: pamagt title 86(19). 300(5).
  pamagatn be given a name 42(21).
  pinammagatn is being given a name 168(8).

magging, magng see -gng.

mahl dear 22(11).
  pagmamahl a holding dear 72(38).
  minmahl is being held dear 62(34).
  kamhlan highness, majesty 26(23).
  kamahaln dearness, high price 186(9).
  kinmahaln was got dear in 279(17).
  pinakamahl dearest 309(38).

-mahla`: nammahla` is ruling 122(4).
  pmahalan pmahalan government 56(15). See bhay.

mas S. maize 248(29).

mastro maystro S. master, teacher 88(12).

mkina S. machine 203(2).

-mlas: nmlas got perceived 36(38). 38(19).

mlay consciousness 288(18).
  nagkamlay became conscious 268(33).
  nakmlay happened to notice 188(10).
  nmalyan got noticed 42(39).
  pamalyan be caused to be noticed 308(15).

mal` bad 34(24). 271(42).
  kamlan wrongness 297(12).
  pamalmal` repeatedly wrong 300(31).

Mallos place-n. 110(24). See byan.

mma` uncle, sir 151(35). 59.

mmay` mmiy` soon 262(9).

mn too, as well
16(18). 47. 221. 227. 248. 262.(7).(10).(13). 219. 317(3).(5).

mna that inherited 40(5).
  nmmna is inherited 40(11).
  ipamna be bequeathed 40(30).
  ipinammna is being bequeathed 40(31).
  pamanhan be bequeathed to 40(33).

man` peanut 76(16).

manka` (S.) doll 40(14).

Maniks S. family-n. 209(24).

mans S. spot 191(14).

mansnas S. apple 182(27).

-mno S.: nagmmno kisses the hand 56(14).

mank hen, cock, chicken 38(30). 72(36).
  nagmank-mankan played rooster 237(10).

Manuwl S. n. 228(16).

mang plural sign 16(8). 143(16). 48. 251.

mangg S. mango 34(40). See pno`,
  mangghan mango-grove 255(11).

manggs S. sleeves 306(24).

-mangh`: pagkmangh` a getting astonished 60(5).
  nangpamangh` were astonished 52(18). 312(38).

mangkk (C.?) bowl 248(35).

mangmng ignorant 94(39).
  kamangmangn ignorance 82(24).

mppasa, mpasa, see sa.

Marikna S. place-n. See byan.

Mariy S. n. 70(11).

Mariyno S. n. 54(1).

Mrkes S. family-n. 189(43).

Markta S. n. 92(29).

-masd: nagmmasd is observing 100(21).
  pagmamasd an observing 272(25).
  masdn be looked at 20(32).
  minmasdn is being looked at 252(17).
  pagmasdn be observed 255(42).
  pinagmasdn was scrutinized 18(4).
  pagkmasd a chance looking at, a glancing 168(33).
  mmasdn get looked at 88(7).
  mmmasdn will get looked at 96(16).
  nmmasdn is visible 297(32).

masiydo, see -siydo.

Masn S. freemason 56(12).

mat eye 20(27). See pilk.
  mat-mat trellis-work 223(41).
  minmat is being looked down on 30(3).
  matan be looked round for 254(31).
  minatan was looked round for 254(30).
  kamat congenial at sight 266(12).
  mapangmat given to looking down on people 18(19).
  nmatan got espied 36(3).

-maty: ikammaty will be the cause of dying 94(28).
  ikinamaty was the cause of dying 186(15).
  ipagkkamaty will be the cause of a part dying 272(34).
  kinamatayn was died in 38(23).
  Kinamatay-ng-kabyo place-n. 221(30).
  pagkkamatayn will be died in by some 275(13).
  pinagkamatayn was died in by some 275(10).
  kamtyan death 94(34).
  mamaty die 40(32).
  mammaty will die 32(1). 62(26).
  namaty died 16(11).
  nangamaty pl. 286(16).
  nammaty is dead 74(11).
  pagkamaty a dying 22(3). 40(27).
  mamaty-maty be able to die off 287(37).
  namatayn was died from 38(9).
  nammatayn is died from 112(19).
  magppakamaty will commit suicide 309(23).
  nagpakamaty committed suicide 309(22).
  pagpapakamaty suicide 309(24).
  himaty fainting-fit 314(25).
  naghhimaty is fainting 236(6).
  paghihimaty a fainting 159(6).
  himatayn be attacked by a fainting-fit 208(5).
  hinimaty was attacked by a fainting-fit 246(1).
  ipinaghimaty was the cause of fainting 88(32). 250(3).

matsng young monkey 110(9).
  kamatsingn monkey-tricks 276(32).

my m there is; having; about 16(8). 48. 69. 110. 138. 252. 331.
  my ri`: nagmm-ri` has ownership 40(13).
  my-ron same as my 18(25). 69. 110. 331.

-myaw: magkmyaw harmonize 102(13). 270(41).

maystro, see mastro.

Maynla` place-n. 50(2). See byan.

mdiko S. physician 30(2).
  mdiko-ng-mangkuklam witch-doctor 42(21).

Migl S. n. 255(33).

milgro S. miracle 74(32).
  nagmmilgro is working a miracle 104(23).

milagrso S. miraculous 74(29).

mle-nobisiyntos-ds S. 1902 34(27).

miln S. melon 76(16).

mnsan once 16(2). 22(34). 39. 42. 262(10).
  mnsanin be done all at once 246(5).
  pamnsan-mnsan once in a while 68(10).

msa S. table 173(26).

msa S. mass 50(37).
  magmsa say mass 96(26).
  nagmmsa says mass 96(4).
  pagmimsa a saying mass 96(18).
  pagkamsa a having said mass 98(19).
  makapagmsa be able to say mass 96(14).
  magpamsa have mass said 72(29).
  nagpamsa had mass said 72(25).
  pagpapamsa a having mass said 80(25).

msmo S. himself 46(18). 72(29). 265(7).

mting E. meeting 236(18).

miyrkules S. Wednesday 259(32).

mo disj. of ikw: by thee; of thee 47. 163.

mukh` face 24(23).
  kamukh` of the same appearance 266(14).

mul` from 16(7). 284.
  magmul` start from 32(7). 284.
  minuln was begun 283(9).

mulwin a tree, molave, Vitex littoralis Decne 263(27).

mul` again 18(35). 20(17). 148.

mna previously, first 40(6). 47. 222.

mund S. world 50(18).

Mund (S.) short-n. 96(38).

munisiliy S. sacristan 253(16).

munispiyo S. town-hall 36(42).

munt` little 174(6).
  kumunt` what almost-ness 174(4).

mra (a) cheap 219(7).
  minra was scolded 90(38).
  murhan be done cheaply 252(20).
  minurhan was sold too cheaply 252(19).
  pagmumrhan a making things cheap 236(31).
  kamurhan cheapness 276(33).
  pinakamra cheapest 114(41).
  --(b) With accent-shift: nagmur cursed 32(38).
  murahn mutual reviling 260(16).
  magmurahn revile each other 236(34).
  magmmurahn will curse each other 203(39).
  nagmmurahn are reviling each other 236(35).
  pagmumurahn a mutual reviling 236(37).
  kamurahn one of two who curse at each other 278(22).

mra` unripe 22(38).

msika S. music 48(31). See band.

msiko S. musician 110(31).

-mu`: ipinagkkamu` is the cause of partial hardening 272(37).

muwng information 82(6).





N

(See also D, S, T.)

na ng m attributive 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 119. 122-159 and Syntax,
passim.

n already
18(39). 47. 223. 224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244. 341(3,c). 342. 437.

nagging, see -gng.

-nagnip: panagnip dream 225(13).
  nanagnip dreamt 240(21).
  nannagnip is dreaming 240(20).
  pananagnip a dreaming 240(17).
  npanagnip was dreamt 297(22).

nagng, see -gng.

nkaw that stolen 221(9).
  numkaw stole 32(39).
  pagnkaw a stealing 104(1).
  magnkaw commit theft 170(4). 244(17).
  nagnkaw did some stealing 155(41).
  pagnankaw thievery 38(2).
  magnankaw thief, robber 36(29).
  nakwin be stolen 102(24).
  nnakwin will be stolen 32(35).
  ninkaw was stolen 32(36).
  ninnkaw is being stolen 102(24).
  pinagnakw was variously stolen 120(32).
  nakwan be stolen from 234(8).
  ninakwan was stolen from 252(22).
  nakawn robbery 178(37).
  nakapagnnkaw is able to commit thefts 102(17).
  mnkaw get stolen 102(27).
  nnkaw got stolen 102(27).
  mnakwan chance to be stolen from 24(3).
  nnnakwan chances to be stolen from 102(20).

namn on the other hand, however 22(32). 47. 224.

nmin, see min.

nnay mother 116(17). 59.
  magnnay mother and child 242(15).
  magnannay pl. 242(31).

nndon, see don.
  --nang, see ang.

Narsso S. n. 296(30).

nsa, nssa, see sa.
  --ntin, see -tin.

-nog: manog come down from one's dwelling 264(23).
  nanog came down 38(16).
  nannog is descending 100(25).
  panog come down 151(40).
  pagpanog a descending 302(20).
  magssipanog will descend, pl. 108(13).
  nagssipanog are descending 106(29).
  pinanagan was come down from 308(18).

naw`, see wa`.
  --ni, see si.

n S. nor; any, and, and not 22(22). 48. 68. 253. 319.

nil, see sil and sin.
  --nin, see sin.
  --niniy, see iniy.
  --nno, see sno.

ningnng glow 40(16).
  nagnningnng glows 40(15).

nir, see ir.
  --nit, see kit.
  --nit, see it.
  --niy, see siy.
  --niyn, see iyn.
  --niyya`, see yya`.

niyg cocoanut 24(1).
  See pno`,
  niygan cocoanut-grove 259(3).

niyn, see iyn.

nobla S. novel 86(19).

nbiyo S. fianc 92(31).

nno` ghost 34(32).

-nod: nannod is looking on 48(36).
  nagssipanod pl. 48(29).
  panunod a looking on 296(37).
  panoorn be looked at 108(29).
  pinannod is being looked at 108(32).

non, see iyn.





Ng

(See also K.)

ng, see na.

ng` indeed, please 40(21). 47. 226. 229.

nglan name 156(11).
  panglan id. 26(16).

ngayn now, today 28(7). 262(11). 302.

-ngit`: ngumngit` is smiling 228(26).
  nngngit` is asmile 92(28).

-ngiyw: ngumiyw mewed 84(27).

ngnit but 30(6). 320. 322.





P (F)

p still, yet, more 24(16). 47. 226. 243. 248. 314.

pa foot, leg 18(15).
  Pa-ng-bundk place-n. 118(25).
  pinaahn was caught by the leg, hurt in the leg 252(25).
  paann be turned the feet to 252(29). base, foot 98(40).
  pinaann was turned the feet to 252(27).
  panan base, foot 90(30).

Pblo S. n. 283(22).

padr S. wall 52(11).

-padpd: npadpd was cast by chance 96(2).

pag when, if 32(13). 45. 300. 303.

pagakpk applause 219(41).
  pagakpakn be applauded 197(36).
  pgakpkan applause by many 257(40).

pagigng, see -gng.

pagtan place between, interval 258(31). 271(17).
  pumagtan took position between 228(26).
  pamamagtan an acting as means 24(33). 38(34).
  ipinagtan was placed between 248(25).
  nppagtan is between 171(21).

pagk as soon as, after, when 181(27). 48. 296. 300. 304. 306.

pagkt wax 221(11).

pgod weariness 76(1).
  pagd tired 66(33).

pagng turtle 16(1).

Pho` place-n. 120(11).

pin bait 108(14).
  pagpapin a catching with bait 108(39).

pkay purpose, aim 50(33).

pko` nail 218(38).
  pko ng bab`: mapagpko-m-bab` over-modest 289(28).
  pakun nailing-place 260(20).
  nppko` is nailed 20(24).

pakuwn watermelon 203(37).

pal but otherwise 209(25). 47. 228. 301.

pla` gift, prize, favor 90(12). See gant.

plad palm of hand 106(37). See kasaman, kasawin, saw`.
  nagkaplad had good fortune 34(3). 78(38).
  nagkkaplad has the good fortune 40(24).
  kapalran fortune 60(17).

palak` frog 228(11).

palakl hatchet 240(5).

palnsa plnsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32). 227(42).
  pinalnsa was ironed 244(30).

palsiyo S. palace 26(26).

palatn S. dish 193(3).

play rice, standing or in hull 163(19). See banty, tnod.

palayk earthenware pot 74(5).

palibhsa` for the reason, because 54(20). 265(8).

palt exchange 148(26).
  pinalitn was supplanted 104(12).

plo` hit, strike 183(25).
  pamlo` club, cudgel 70(16).
  palin be caned 195(35).
  ikinplo` was the cause of getting thrashed 273(34).
  pagkplo` a thrashing that was got 272(16).

plong comb of rooster 291(16).

famliya S. family 54(4).

Pampngga S. place-n. 173(9). See lalawgan, provnsiya.

pna` arrow 228(28).
  pumna` shot an arrow at 228(28).
  pinna` was shot with an arrow 244(31).
  nakpna` chanced to hit with an arrow 291(32).

panahn time 34(25). 50(5). 52(32).

-pnaw: pumnaw departed 228(29).
  pumpnaw is departing 92(25).
  pagpnaw a departing 114(17).
  pinanwan was parted from 92(27).

pany constant 72(20). 82(6).
  kapanayn continuance 276(34).

-panhk: pumanhk entered (a dwelling), went up into (a house)
38(27). 72(8).
  pumpanhk is entering 106(9).
  pinanhikn was entered 175(41).
  mpanhk get in 106(15).
  pagkpanhk a getting in 72(9).
  pinapanhikn was caused to be entered 52(14).

panki bat 210(26). See bhay.

paniy S. handkerchief 147(1).

pansn noticeable 219(8).
  pansinn be paid attention to 46(1).
  ppansinn will be minded 96(35).
  pinansn was paid attention to 20(41). 94(2).
  pinpansn is being paid attention to 54(19).
  nppansn gets noticed 100(19).

panty leveled 223(32).
  panty-kawyan height of a bamboo-plant 218(28).
  panty-panty even, all level 118(30). 291(5).
  kapanty of the same height 173(28).
  magkapanty both of the same height 270(3).
  kasingpanty id. 104(6). 315(1).

pno, see an.
  --panukla`, see akla`.

pant bald-headed 219(10).

-pangw: nakapangw is pilloried 110(5).
  nangppangw have got into the pillory 110(9).

panginon master 62(39). 86(31). 226(3).

pangkt group, team 46(34). 76(21). 110(31).
  pangkt-pangkt group by group 110(30).

pangnn hand-basket 261(40).

pangpng bank of stream 28(13).
  Kapampngan Pampanga 189(23).
  Kakapampangnan the Pampanga country 277(12).

papno, see an.
  --ppasa, see sa.

papya S. papaw 163(18).

papl S. paper 50(39).

pra like 36(12). 67. 275.

par pra S. for 90(11). 286. 288.

prang forest 62(29).
  kaparngan wooded regions 82(36).

pri` S. priest, Father 20(4). 256.

parho S. equal 257(42).
  par-parho all equal 40(13). 224(1).

Pars S. Paris 220(31).

part S. part 82(21).
  kapart share 16(6).

-par: par-par butterfly 88(24).

psa, see sa.

pas` bruise 62(27).

psak that calked with 221(10).
  pasakn calking-place 260(23).

pasn that carried on the shoulders 98(36).
  pumpasn carries on the shoulders 22(32).
  ppasann will be carried on the shoulder 104(34).
  pinasn was carried on the shoulder 104(38).

Pasfiko S. Pacific 259(1).

Psig the Pasig; see log.

pasgan beach 16(4).

-pasiyl (S.): magpasiyl take a walk 32(2).
  magsipagpasiyl pl. 32(13).
  magppasiyl will take a walk 232(28).
  magssipagpasiyl pl. 32(15).
  nagpasiyl took a walk 182(7).
  nagsipagpasiyl pl. 279(1).
  nakapagpasiyl was able to take a walk 200(14).
  papas-pasiyl walking about at intervals 96(6).

-pasiynsiya S.: magpasiynsiya rest content 56(8).

-pasyo S.: nagppasyo forms a procession 48(40).

pask S. Easter; Christmas 220(24).

pastl (S.) herdsman 116(7).

pso` a burn 220(1).
  pas` burnt; pottery 222(40).
  pumso` burned 228(30).
  mamso` a blister 241(39). 244(12).
  namso` scorched 240(21).
  napso` has been burned 284(41).

-psok: pumsok go in, enter 78(30). went in 30(17). 38(31). 50(19).
  pumpsok enters 42(13).
  ppsok will go in 192(5).
  pagpsok a going in 42(12). 96(26).
  paskin be violently entered 262(19).
  pinsok was illicitly entered 237(41).
  pinpsok is being penetrated 118(30).
  pinaskan was entered 36(36).
  makapsok be able to enter 74(31).
  makappsok will be able to enter 22(4).
  nakapsok was able to enter 80(2). 116(21).
  pagkapsok a having gone in 38(32).
  pagkpsok the way of getting put in 291(11).
  mipsok get put in 108(41).
  npaskan chanced to be come upon in entering 297(37).
  papsok going in; asking to be taken in; ask to be taken in
  204(22). 299(29). 301(24).
  pappsok will ask to be taken in 301(40).
  pagpapapsok a causing to enter 272(39).
  papaskin be caused to enter 72(26). 80(30).
  mapappsok will ask to be taken in 311(34).
  napapsok caused himself to be taken in; was able to be caused to
  enter 311(23.32).

-ptag: ikinptag chanced to be the cause of staying quiet 116(11).

patk a drop 96(29).

paty dead person 20(8). 38(25).
  pamaty used for killing 225(15).
  pamaty-kto louse-killer, thumb 225(15).
  pumaty (arch. maty) kill 231(2).
  pagpaty a killing 227(4).
  patayn patan be killed 84(22).
  ppatayn ppatan will be killed 28(20). 44(16).
  pinaty was killed 244(33).
  patayn be killed for 252(32).
  pinagpatayn was killed in 274(31).
  ptyan mortal combat; slaughter-house 190(15). 259(3).
  kappatayn will be the place of killing 279(18).
  kaptyan one of two who kill each other 277(42).
  mapaty be able to be killed 283(35).
  napaty has been killed 284(14).
  pagkapaty a having killed 282(35).
  mpaty get killed 36(19). 293(42).
  mppaty will get killed 18(12).
  npaty got killed 26(12). 38(3). 84(28).
  pagkpaty a chance killing 291(12). 292(15).
  ipinappaty is being caused to be extinguished 122(6).

pat also, even 110(34). 112(20). 68. 305.

patd a breaking, an interruption 42(4). 44(42). 58(1). broken 223(33).
  pumatd break, tr. 228(31).
  kapatd broken from the same piece; brother, sister 32(8). 266(16).
  kapatd-kongkristiynos brother-Christians 50(22). 210(16).
  magkapatd two brothers or sisters, brother and sister 46(20).
  magkakapatd pl. 270(14).
  kinkapatd child of one's godparents 271(30).
  magkinkapatd two people, one of whom is the child of the other's
  godparents 271(31).
  magkikinkapatd pl. 271(32).
  kappatirn will be the place of breaking 274(29).
  kinapatirn was the place of breaking 274(27).
  kaptran one of two who break together 277(43).
  mapatd break off, cease 60(9).
  napatd broke off 78(16).
  napatirn was broken in, suffered a fracture 88(28).

pats shrimp-sauce 259(5).
  patisn be spiced with shrimp-sauce 252(33).
  ptsan cannery for shrimp-sauce 259(5).

ptiyo S. court-yard 98(20).

Patrsiyo S. n. 275(28).

patrliya S. patrol 122(20).

pto S. duck 116(38).

patumangg` regard, consideration 22(24).

-ptung: npptung is placed on 116(1).

Patpat derisive n. 50(3).

-pwi`: paw` allayed 222(42).
  nakappwi` will allay 28(35). 280(37).
  napwi` has subsided 279(34).

pwid nipa fibre 30(37).

-pwis: pumpwis is sweating 22(8).

-pyag: pumyag consent 30(5). consented 18(29).
  pumpyag consents 228(34).
  ipinyag was granted 248(26).
  pinaygan was agreed to 252(33).

paypa` tranquil 219(11).
  kapayapan tranquility 116(9).

pyo advice 52(24).
  ipinyo was suggested 28(36).

pyong umbrella 166(27).

Pdro S. n. 20(2).

pgil that restrained 134(28).
  pigl under control 223(1).
  nagsipgil controlled, pl. 282(14).
  piglin be brought under control 66(23).
  npiglan got restrained 66(17). 100(36).

-phit: pumphit turns round 68(10).

pho surely 18(11).
  pinho was ascertained 44(33).

piklt scar 219(9).

pknik E. picnic 235(34).

pko S. a pick 58(33).

-pli`: pumli` chose 228(34).
  mamli` choose out 16(24).
  namli` selected 186(20).
  pinli` was chosen 244(34).
  mpli` get chosen 241(34).
  nppli` is preferred 293(21).

pilk fin, lash 210(30). Corrigenda.
  pilk-mat eyelash 210(30). Corrigenda.
  pilikn have the fins removed 252(34).

pling side, proximity 90(8).

Felpe S. n. 208(1).

Filipnas S. the Philippines 40(2). See kapulun.

-plit: pumlit effected by trying hard 228(37).
  pumplit is trying hard 228(35).
  pagplit a trying hard 64(1).
  nagplit tried very hard 44(5). 50(14).
  nagpplit tries very hard 44(20). 234(17).
  nagppumlit is making an extreme effort 168(14). 235(32).
  piltin be striven for 18(17). 184(35).
  pinlit was compelled 244(35).
  pagpiltan was striven for 297(2).
  nappiltan is compelled 112(28).

pelta S. ball 48(11).

pnsan cousin 39. 42.
  magpipnsan group of cousins 242(32).

pint S. paint, painting 219(12).
  pintahn be painted 252(35).
  pinthan place for paint; see bhay.

pints that found fault with 221(13).
  pintasn be found fault with 252(36).
  pintsan mutual fault-finding 257(42).
  kapintsan reprehensible quality 310(40).

pint` door 78(30). See banty.
  pintan doorway 22(2).

pingg carrying-pole 158(12).

pinggn dishes 114(7).

ppa S. cigarette-mouthpiece 249(29).

Ppe S. short-n. 279(5).

ppe dumb 86(23).
  nappe became dumb 285(28).
  pagkappe dumbness 86(23).

pipno S. cucumber 76(16).

pipt stone-sparrow 197(21).

pras S. pears 189(16).

pirso (S.) piece broken off
  pirso-ng-khoy piece of wood 56(38).
  pirso-ng-lamn piece of meat 108(42) Corrigenda.
  pirashin be broken off 252(6).
  mapirso go to pieces 300(19).
  napirso went to pieces 284(42).

pirnsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32).
  pinirnsa was ironed 223(4).

Pro (S.) n., for Pdro. 138(28).

pso S. peso, half-dollar 102(38).

-pitg: ptgan respect 118(9).
  pinagpptagnan is being respected 256(8).

ptak section 247(11).
  pintak section of rice-field 247(10).

-pits: pumits pick, pluck 22(35). picked 282(40).
  pitasn be picked 244(36).
  ppitasn will be picked 22(37).
  pammitasn will be picked selectively, in quantity 247(2).
  pinammits is being gathered 246(42).
  pitasn be picked from 252(37).
  pamitasn be gathered from 256(36).
  pammitasn will be gathered from 256(38).
  nagptsan picked together 236(17).
  napits has been picked 284(43).
  npits got picked 293(22).
  nppits is picked 24(16).

pitk fillip 225(14).
  pamitk single rein 72(1).
  pumitk give a fillip 228(37).

Ptra S. n. 240(29).

ftsa S. date 271(16).

pitsn S. pigeon 252(32).

pto S. small flute, whistle 227(39).

pit seven 20(5). 67.
  pit ng p`: pamit-ng-p` number seventy 225(42).
  pamit number seven 225(38).
  ikapit seventh 32(4).

piyno S. piano 167(21).

fiysta piysta S. fiesta 98(35). 137(37).
  kapiyesthan holiday 110(11).

plnsa, see palnsa.

Pranssko S. n. 50(20).

presidnte S. magistrate 38(1).

-prub S.: prubahn be proved 52(3).
  pprubahn will be proved 52(4).

provnsiya S. province 50(1).
  provnsiya-ng-Pampngga Pampanga province 210(29).

p` deferential particle 20(37). 47. 229.

p` ten 38(6). 134. See is, dalaw, etc.

pgad nest 228(9).

-pukpk: pamukpk mallet 90(30).
  pumpukpk is pounding 228(38).

pukl a throw 106(36).
  pagpukl a throwing 281(35).
  magpupukl throw repeatedly 238(38).
  pinpukl is being thrown at 112(8).
  mapamukl given to throwing things 289(39).

pul red, redness 147(1).
  pulahn all red 261(12).
  kapul what redness 173(40).

Polikrpiyo S. family-n. 189(43).

pols S. policeman 34(26).

plpito S. pulpit 20(28).

pul` island 255(14).
  kapulun kapuluwn archipelago 24(30).
  kapulu-ng-Filipnas the Philippine archipelago 56(24).

pulbe beggar 72(30).

plong crowd 229(13).

plot that picked up 221(15).
  namlot gathered up 32(23).
  mmumult gleaner 243(17).
  pinamlot was picked up selectively, in quantity 247(3).
  pinultan was picked up in 252(38).
  pltan a scramble 259(33).
  nplot got picked up 62(30).
  npplot gets picked up 40(8).

pult honey 174(7).

-pnas: nagppnas is scrubbing 232(29).
  pinpunsan is being scrubbed 252(40).

pnit small hole, tear 169(2).
  punt-punt full of small holes 259(6).

-punl`: punlan germinating-plot 243(40).

puns ant-hill 66(1).

punt S. direction of going 106(2).
  nagsipunt went to, pl. 116(18).
  ppunt will go to 193(24).
  nagssipunt are going to 108(1).
  pagpunt a going toward 104(35). 106(4). 116(20).
  puntahn be gone to 40(9).
  pinuntahn was gone toward 32(20).
  papunt towards 84(36).
  napappunt is able to be directed 48(10).

pno` head: of wood (i. e. tree) 16(8).
  of grass (i. e. blade) 76(31).
  of bridge 248(16).
  stem end of fruit 203(38).
  chief 306(11).
  beginning 50(15).
  pno-ng-dam blade of grass 76(29).
  pno-ng-khoy tree 34(39).
  pno-ng-mangg mango-tree 254(37).
  pno-ng-niyg cocoanut-tree 22(34).
  pno-ng-sging banana-tree 16(3).
  pno-ng-sha` grape-fruit-tree 36(34).
  pinno` chief, official 56(27). 116(22).
  pmunan initiator 262(7).

pun` filled, full 36(40). 76(30).
  punn be completed, be added to 252(41).
  pnan all full 118(21). 258(1).
  napun` became full 26(9).

purg S. purge 230(11).

purgatriyo S. purgatory 50(17).

pri honor, respectability 94(12). See kasiran.
  nagpri an honoring 48(38). 60(9).
  nagpurihn praised one another 236(39).
  nagppurihn are praising one another 236(41).
  mapri honorable 289(8).
  nagmpur praised himself 238(25).
  nagmmpur is praising himself 238(25).
  pagmampur praising oneself 238(26).
  nagpakampur praised himself much 309(28).

Port-rtur S. Port Arthur 306(19).

-purl: mapurl dull 225(6).
  mappurl will get dull 248(31).

psa` cat 84(1).

pust S. a bet 60(29).
  nagsipust made a bet, pl. 60(34).
  pusthan a betting together 60(33). 102(40).
  nakipagpusthan entered into a bet with 102(34).

pso` heart 218(24).

-putk: nagppuputk is cackling much 238(40).
  ptkan cackling by many 238(10).
  palaptkin given to cackling 315(10).

ftbol E. football 46(35).

put` white 219(12).
  pputin be made too white 305(12).
  pputin be made very white 308(39).

ptik mud, clay 86(37).
  putkan be made muddy 253(1).
  putikn muddy place, person, thing; clay-pit 166(19). 260(24).
  maptik muddy 110(14).

pto cake, bun 32(15).

putk crash, report 259(34).
  pumutk made a crash; there was a crash 64(31).
  pinputukn is reached by a crash 106(33).

ptol a cut; that cut 220(2). 221(16).
  p. nang p. cuts and cuts 222(10).
  putl cut 223(3).
  putl-putl all cut up 224(16).
  pamtol used for cutting 225(16).
  pumtol cut 154(4). 199(27). 226(26).
  magsiptol cut, pl. 262(26).
  nagsiptol cut, did cut, pl. 190(22).
  pumptol is cutting 228(39).
  nagssiptol pl. 262(24).
  pptol will cut 228(40).
  magssiptol pl. 191(8).
  pagptol a cutting 196(34).
  magptol cut several things, cut on oneself 228(21).
  magsipagptol pl. 262(38).
  magpptol will cut 234(21).
  magssipagptol pl. 262(41).
  nagptol cut 234(24).
  nagsipagptol pl. 263(2).
  nagpptol is cutting 202(14).
  nagssipagptol pl. 263(3).
  pagpuptol a cutting 234(19).
  magputl cut variously or repeatedly, cut up 237(37).
  magpputl will cut 237(38).
  nagputl cut 237(40).
  nagpputl is cutting 237(42).
  nagppuputl is cutting to bits 239(9).
  magpuputl cutter 243(1).
  mamtol cut selectively, in quantity, or as occupation 220(21).
  magsipamtol pl. 263(24).
  mammtol will cut 240(29).
  magssipamtol pl. 263(26).
  namtol cut 240(27).
  nammtol is cutting 240(27).
  mmumutl cutter 243(18).
  pamumtol a cutting 240(23).
  putlin be cut 244(42).
  pputlin will be cut 58(27). 207(5).
  pintol was cut, cut off, stopped 38(34). 44(26). 154(10).
  pinptol is being cut 58(36). 248(34).
  pagputuln be cut up 246(27).
  pinagpputl is being cut up 246(25).
  iptol be cut for 248(29).
  ipptol will be cut for 248(29).
  ipintol was cut for or with 154(15). 175(31). 248(28).
  ipinptol is being cut for or with 181(15). 202(6).
  ipagptol be cut for 249(26).
  ipagpptol will be cut for 249(27).
  ipinagptol was cut for or with 249(28).
  ipinagpptol is being cut for or with 249(29).
  ipamtol be used for cutting 250(17).
  ipinamtol was used for cutting 250(13).
  ipinammtol is being cut with or for, in quantity 187(13). 250(14).
  putlan putln be cut from 253(5).
  pputlan pputln will be cut from 253(7).
  pinutlan was cut from 118(28). 154(20).
  pinputln is being cut from 60(1). 253(3).
  pagputlan be cut on 256(1).
  pagputuln be cut from variously 256(13).
  pinamutlan was cut from selectively or in quantity 158(10). 256(40).
  pinammutlan is being cut from 256(33).
  nagputuln cut together 236(43).
  pakiptol that cut with others or as a favor 184(3). 263(40).
  makiptol cut by permission 264(12).
  makkiptol will cut along with others 206(11).
  nakiptol cut by permission 264(8).
  nakkiptol is cutting by permission 264(10).
  pakikiptol a cutting by permission 264(13).
  pakikipamtol a cutting, as occupation, by permission 264(39).
  pakiputlin be cut as a favor 264(43).
  ipakiptol be cut as a favor 184(1).
  ipakkiptol will be asked to be cut 265(13).
  ipakipagptol be cut with as a favor 265(19).
  ipakkipagptol will be cut for as a favor 265(23).
  ipinakipagptol was asked to be cut for 265(25).
  ipinakkipagptol is being asked to be cut for 172(26). 265(28).
  kaptol piece; brother, sister 16(5). 266(16).
  magkaptol two such 270(5).
  magkakaptol pl. 270(16).
  kkaptol only a piece 267(6).
  kapptol there has just been cutting 267(17).
  kapagpptol there has just been cutting of several things 267(20).
  kappamtol there has just been cutting in quantity 267(23).
  magkaputl get broken in numbers 182(22).
  magkkaputl will many of them get broken 269(10).
  nagkaputl got broken in numbers 269(11).
  nagkkaputl is breaking in numbers 269(13).
  magkputl-putl break into many pieces 255(21).
  magkkputl-putl will break into many pieces 271(23).
  nagkputl-putl broke into many pieces 271(19).
  nagkkputl-putl gets mangled 271(21).
  ikaptol be the cause of breaking 158(12).
  ikapptol will be the cause of breaking or involuntary cutting
  272(19).
  ikinaptol was the cause of breaking 272(15).
  ikinapptol is the cause of breaking 272(17).
  ipagkaputl be the cause of breaking in numbers 273(9).
  ipinagkaputl was the cause of breaking in numbers 273(11).
  ipinagkkaputl is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7).
  kaptlan one of two who cut together 278(10).
  makaptol be able to cut 269(7).
  makapptol will be able to cut 281(41).
  nakaptol has cut 282(22).
  nakapptol is able to cut 281(39).
  maptol have been cut, be able to be cut 38(35). 60(4). 283(37).
  mapptol will be able to be cut 283(38).
  naptol has been cut, was cut 261(26).
  nangaptol pl. 286(17).
  napptol has just been cut, is cut 284(15). 285(1).
  nangapptol pl. 286(19).
  pagkaptol a having cut 282(37).
  makapagptol be able to cut several things 286(43).
  nakapagptol has cut 286(41).
  nakapagpptol is able to cut 286(42).
  maputlan be cut from 185(21).
  mapputlan will be cut from 288(13).
  naputlan was cut from 288(9).
  napputlan is cut from 288(10).
  napagputlan was able to be cut on 288(26).
  makptol chance to cut 290(28).
  makpptol will chance to cut 290(30).
  nakptol chanced to cut 24(34). 290(20).
  nakpptol is by chance cutting 290(23).
  mptol get cut 294(3).
  mpptol will get cut 294(5).
  nptol got cut 293(24.43). 294(2).
  npptol gets cut, is cut 201(30).
  pagkptol the way cutting got done 291(15).
  mputlan get cut from 238(2).
  mpputlan will get cut from 297(41).
  nputlan got cut from 297(38).
  npputlan gets cut from 297(39).
  paptol that caused to be cut 299(15).
  paputl transversely 166(21).
  kappaptol there has just been causing to cut 301(11).
  kapagppaptol there has just been causing to cut several things
  301(13).
  papptol will ask to have cut 302(2).
  magpaptol cause to be cut 225(1).
  magppaptol will cause to be cut 191(6).
  nagpaptol caused to be cut 303(13).
  nagppaptol is causing to be cut 303(14).
  pagpapaptol a causing to be cut 303(15).
  paputlin be caused to be cut 304(39).
  papputlin will be caused to cut 304(40).
  pinaptol was caused to cut 153(23).
  pinapptol is being caused to cut 304(37).
  papagputlin be caused to cut on oneself 305(23).
  papagpputlin will be caused to cut several things 305(24).
  pinapagptol was caused to cut 181(27).
  pinapagpptol is being caused to cut 181(16).
  papamutlin be caused to cut selectively, in quantity, or as
  occupation 305(35).
  papammutlin will be caused to cut 305(36).
  ipaptol be caused to be cut 306(25).
  ipapptol will be caused to be cut 306(23).
  ipinaptol was caused to be cut 204(10).
  ipinapptol is being caused to be cut 306(22).
  ipakipaptol be asked to be caused to be cut 307(29).
  ipakkipaptol will be asked to be caused to be cut 307(32).
  ipinakipaptol was asked to be caused to be cut 307(34).
  paputlan be caused to be cut from 308(24).
  papputlan will be caused to be cut from 308(25).
  pinaputlan was caused to be cut from 308(19).
  pinapputlan is being caused to be cut from 308(22).
  makapagpaptol be able to cause to be cut 311(12).
  makkapagpaptol will be able to cause to be cut 311(15).
  nakapagpaptol has been caused to be cut 311(8).
  nakkapagpaptol is able to cause to be cut 311(10).
  napaptol asked to be cut for 311(38).
  napapptol asks to be cut for 311(40).
  palaputuln brittle 315(21).
  tagaptol person whose duty it is to cut 315(32).

pok place, district 40(2).

pon lord, saint 104(5). 182(40).
  pinpon is being worshipped 189(3).

-puw`, see kpuw`.

-pyat: nagpyat staid up, watched 232(30).
  nagpuyt repeatedly staid up 238(1).
  pagpupuyt a repeated staying up 297(7).
  nammyat keeps from sleeping, keeps up 240(31).
  pinyat was kept up late 245(2).





S.

sa loc. particle 16(2). 45. 49. 195-212. 306. 515.
  sa law: s-lawhan fickle 94(1). 259(20).
  sa ul`: pagsa-uln be returned to 62(12). 72(13).
  pinagsa-uln was returned to 44(25). 256(7).
  nsa is in 18(22). 314(7).
  nangsa pl. 118(35).
  nssa is being in 36(16). 44(1).
  psa go to 20(18). 314(9).
  ppsa will go to 314(10).
  mpasa get to 94(4).
  mppasa will get to 314(15).
  npasa went by chance 116(30). 279(4).
  nppasa comes by chance to 106(26).
  pagkpasa a chance coming to 60(21). 314(16).

s, see is.

san loc. of an: where? to what? 42(14). 64(37). 316(34). 264.

-sabd: isinabd was said in interruption, was thrust in 102(22).

-saby: saby-saby all at the same time 224(2).
  sinabayn was accompanied 82(32).
  pagkaksaby a happening at the same time 270(42).

sbi that said 24(8). 74(36). 198(12). 276.
  sab-sab chance talk 116(10). 120(9).
  nagsbi said 26(14). 36(29).
  nagsipagsbi pl. 26(5).
  nagssbi is saying 156(40).
  pagsasbi a saying 155(24).
  sabhin be said 30(15). 50(24).
  ssabhin will be said 20(11). 30(14).
  sinbi was said 16(17).
  sinsbi is being said 96(9).
  pinagsab was variously said 156(13).
  pinagsab-sab was repeatedly said 246(34).
  ipinagsbi was told about 249(35).
  pinagsabhan was told, was ordered 20(15). 32(26).
  kasabihn proverb 276(11).
  pagkasbi a having said 70(28).
  makapagsbi be able to tell 52(9).
  nakapagsbi was able to tell 76(25).
  mssbi will get said 92(37).
  pagksbi a getting said 80(1). 100(36).

-sbit: sabitn clothes-rack 258(38).
  nakasbit is hanging (from a nail, peg, etc.) 281(4).

-sbog: nagsbog strewed 16(20).
  nssbog is lying scattered 90(30). 108(19).
  nangsbog got scattered, pl. 293(40).

sabn S. soap 184(34).

-sbong: pangsbong used for cock-fighting 297(42).
  pagsasbong cock-fighting 312(17).
  sabungn cockpit, cock-fight 304(1).
  sabungro cock-fighter 98(21). 316(11).

-sabuwt: kasabuwt accomplice 298(19).

sboy a sprinkling 68(3).
  sumsboy is splashing, intr. 228(41).
  pagsboy sprinkling 68(40).
  nagssboy is scattering 68(9).
  isinboy was sprinkled 268(11).
  sinsabyan is being sprinkled at 68(24).
  nappasboy falls scattering 70(4).

sadiy` that come for 38(26). 78(28). 221(18)
  magsadiy` go for one's purpose 74(28).
  nagsadiy` went for his purpose 74(33).
  sinadiy` was done intentionally 233(36).
  sinsadiy` is being done intentionally 62(13). 98(32).

sagd close-cropped 219(13).

-sagsa`: sumagsa` knock, jostle 229(1).
  sagasin be hit upon, be conflicted with 245(3).
  sinagasan was bumped into 22(24).
  nagsgasan jostled each other 237(1).
  pagsasgasan a jostling each other 237(1).
  msagasan get run into 271(22).
  nsagasan got run into 297(43).

sging banana 16(8). See pno`.
  sagngan banana-grove 250(40).

sagitst sizzling 114(10).

sagt that answered 26(23). 44(15).
  sumagt answer 44(10). answered 26(1).
  sumsagt answers 44(2).
  sinagt was given an answer 191(41).
  isinagt was said in reply 16(18).
  makasagt be able to answer 76(4).
  nakasagt was able to answer 68(21).

saguwn a paddle 261(41).
  sumaguwn paddled 229(1).
  pagsaguwn a paddling 82(12).

sahg flooring, floor 114(43).
  isinsahg is being used as flooring 248(32).

-shod: sumhod hold under 229(1).
  ishod be held under 248(34).

-sing: magsing cook rice dry 232(30).
  sining ration of rice, not yet served 229(8).

sak` then, afterwards 52(30). 68(21). 243.

-sakl: pagsakl choking 227(5).

sakatro S. grass-cutter 96(2).

saky person carried in a vehicle 80(36).
  pangsaky used for riding or driving 225(18).
  sumaky mount, ride 72(1). mounted 52(37).
  sumsaky is mounting, is getting on or in (a vehicle) 229(2).
  pagsaky mounting, riding 70(40). 167(41).
  nagsaky took into a vehicle 234(25).
  pagsasaky a taking into a vehicle 272(2).
  isinaky was put on a vehicle 306(16).
  ipinagsaky was taken into a vehicle 249(37).
  sakyn be embarked in 253(10).
  sinakyn was ridden in 253(9).
  sinsakyn is being ridden in 82(32).
  skyan embarkation by many 258(3).
  sasakyn vehicle 219(35).
  nakkisaky embarks along with others 98(18).
  ikinsaky was the cause of chance mounting 273(36).
  nakasaky has mounted, is mounted 100(23). 281(15).
  nakassaky is able to mount 281(43).
  pagkasaky a past mounting, ability to mount 282(12.39).
  nasakyn was able to be mounted 228(16).
  nsaky got put on a vehicle 294(28).
  nssaky is in a vehicle 114(22).
  pagksaky a chance mounting or riding 292(17). 294(36). 295(41).
  nsakyn got mounted 298(1).
  pasaky that caused to be taken into a vehicle 299(17). in riding
  position, astride 299(30).
  nagpasaky caused to be put on a vehicle 268(25).
  pagpapasaky a causing to be put on a vehicle 303(17).
  ipinasaky was caused to be put on a vehicle 306(26).
  ipinagpasaky was caused to be used for riding 307(21).
  pinasakyn was caused to be mounted 308(28).
  ipinagkpasaky was the cause of causing to ride 310(18).

sakdl accusation 54(36).
  isinakdl was charged 56(12).
  ipinagsakdl was accused 54(31).

-sakm: kasakimn selfishness 28(34). 74(20).

skit (a) grief 223(20).
  paskit suffering caused 42(43).
  nagpaskit caused suffering to be undergone 303(20).
  ipinaskit was caused to be suffered 22(7).
  pinassaktan is being caused to suffer 40(40).
  --(b) Accent shifted: sakt pain, sickness 30(28). 42(3). 223(18).
  sumakt hurt, injure 188(30).
  sinsaktn is being hurt 60(1). 70(15).
  nagkasakt got sick 54(7). 78(24).
  pagkakasakt a getting sick 269(8).
  ipinagkasakt was the cause of getting sick 273(14).
  nakasakt cause injury 313(32).
  masakt sore 40(41). 281(31).
  masaktn be hurt 206(24).
  massaktn will be hurt 204(2).
  nasaktn got hurt 264(25).
  palasktin one who easily gets sick 315(14).

sko S. sack 104(15).

-skop: sakp included 290(31).
  pagskop an including, a saving 306(42).
  mnankop savior 20(33).
  nasskop is included, is under control 116(31).

sla failure, offense 38(2).
  sumla fail, miss, 64(42). failed 229(4).
  salhan be omitted, skipped 253(11).
  sangln be missed 253(14).
  sinangln was missed 253(12).
  nagksla sinned against 271(1).
  pagkaksla a sinning against 290(1).
  kasalnan sin 20(32). 98(7).
  makasalnan 22(1). 74(22). 289(22).
  pagkasla a having missed 272(10). 286(3).

salakb fish-trap 243(7).
  mnanalakb fish-trapper 243(7).

-salkay: pagsalkay an attacking 122(10).
  pananalkay a repeated attacking 122(23).
  sinalakyan was attacked 122(9).

salakt rain-hat of palm-leaves 212(22).

salamangk S. sleight-of-hand trick 202(37).

salmat thanks 16(32). 152(4).
  magpasalmat give thanks, thank 160(15).
  napasalmat was thankful 88(16).

salamn glass, looking-glass, eye-glass 60(7). 238(39). n. of dog
147(22).

salap` money; half-dollar 30(27). 252(41).

salt needy 219(14).
  kasalatn lack 239(35).

salawl trousers 122(1).

-salaysy: isinalaysy was narrated 38(5).

salbhi S. savage, brutal; brute 44(4). 50(17). 70(25).
  kasalbahhan brutality 54(28).

-sli: isli be taken along, be included 248(37).
  isinli was included 248(36).
  kasli participant 22(18). 48(5).
  nkasli got taken as companion 296(28).
  maksli chance to take part 114(28).

salit` word, speech 18(13). 20(41).
  magsalit` speak 28(39). 80(37).
  nagsalit` spoke 104(19).
  pagsasalit` a speaking 80(40).
  pananalit` manner of speaking 44(35). 50(15).
  pinagsalitan was spoken to 76(3).
  slitan conversation 32(7). 44(20).
  magslitan converse 114(5).
  nagsslitan are conversing 86(32).
  pagsaslitan a conversing 28(11). 64(10). 88(3).
  kaslitan one of two who converse together 278(2).
  makapagsalit` be able to speak 50(14).

-slo: kaslo fellow-partaker 42(8).

-salbong: sinalbong was met 18(40). 66(19).

slok dipper; basket 229(6).
  sumlok dip out water 229(6).

-salkoy: kasalukyan present, at the same time 36(40). 260(11).

salp a dry measure; see kabn.

sma (a) come along, go along 182(26). 222(5).
  summa go along 32(13). 66(30). went along 140(19).
  ssma will go along 84(12).
  pagsma a going along 104(30).
  pagsasma a going together 54(18).
  isma be taken along 84(32).
  isinma was taken along 86(28).
  samhan be gone with 253(14).
  sinamhan was gone with 186(20).
  ssamhan will be gone with 68(34).
  smhan society, company 296(32).
  smha-ng-Sumlong the Sumulong Co. 210(30).
  smha-ng-pera opera company 303(10).
  makisma go along with 202(23).
  kasma companion 30(9.22). 50(39). 273.
  magkakasma group of three or more companions 28(25). 48(39).
  --(b) With accent-shift: sam act as partners 223(20).
  kasam field-worker, peon 72(32). 86(22).
  kasamahn partner 108(32). 210(35). See Sumlong.
  magkakasamahn group of three or more 207(41). 278(40).

sam` badness, injury 218(31).
  kasaman badness, injuriousness 276 (37).
  kasama-ng-plad bad fortune 42(28).
  masam` bad, hurtful, ugly 40(14). 50(7). 58(39).

samballo (S.) hat 137(42).

sampl a slap 24(23).
  sinampl was slapped 24(22).

sampy that hung across 251(33).
  nagsampy hung across, tr. 232(31).
  isinampy was hung across 248(38).
  sampyan clothes-line 223(33).

Sam-Pdro S. St. Peter 72(27).

sna in that case, then 34(17). 74(23). 47. 230.

San-Antniyo S. place-n. 34(29). See to.

snay practice 46(16).
  sany practised 46(24).
  pasasnay a drilling 116(29).
  pagkasnay a past practising 46(23).

San-Visnte S. place-n. 220(40).

sandal` moment, while, short space of time 18(6). 24(11).

sandliyas S. sandals 278(35).

sandk cooking-dipper of cocoanut-shell 74(5).
  sumandk dipped out 229(8).

sanh` cause 190(16).

-snib: sumnib make one's sleeping-mat overlap 229(8).
  isnib be made to overlap 248(7).
  kasnib overlapping 266(18).
  magkasnib two that overlap 269(38).

San-Ildepnso S. place-n. 100(10). See lpa`.

San-Matyo S. place-n., see byan.

San-Migl S. place-n. 50(9). 116(6). See byan.

snto S. saint 98(15). 104(15).

Sntos S. family-n. 209(26).

santl fruit and tree of Sandoricum Indicum L. 34(40).

sang bough 34(28). 118(28).

-sangg: sumsangg is warding off 106(36).
  sinsangg is being warded off 106(35).

Sang-Huwn S. St. John 104(6). 110(10).

sangklan chopping-block 256(1).

sangkp accompaniment 221(22).
  kasangkp id. 266(20).
  kasangkpan  utensil, tool, appurtenances 58(2.33). 74(6).

-sangl, see sla.

sanl` pledge 252(22).
  sanglan place for pledges, see bhay.

spa` pond 88(26).

sapagkt because 20(17). 201(36). 306.

-sapantha`: sinapantha` was conjectured 38(25).

sapt sufficient 305(19).

saptos S. shoes 32(35).

-spit: sumpit arrived, came 62(24).

-sar: pangsar instrument for closing 225(19).
  sumsar closes, intr. 225(20).
  pagsasar a closing, tr. 26(36).
  isinar was closed 80(1).
  pagksar a chance closing 80(17).

-sarp: masasarp tasty, pl. 34 (39).

sri` sr-sri` various 48(15). 74(31).

sarle self; own 48(33). 62(12). 72(13). 137. 169. 175.

sarwa` moist; fresh 184(9).
  nanarwa` got fresh 76(40).

satst tonsure 106(21).

saw` awkward 219(15). 276(33).
  saw-ng-plad unlucky 211(8).
  nasaw-ng-plad became unlucky 54(3).
  kasawin awkwardness 276(37).
  kasawi-ng-plad bad fortune 94(37).

sya S. dress, skirt 240(41).

-say: kasyhan gladness 275(27).
  masay gay 80(15). 92(28).

-syad: magsisyad get wearied, pl. 118(20).

syang that regretted 219(16).
  nanghinyang grieved 292(14).
  nanghhinyang is mourning 241(24).
  panghihinyang a mourning 241(26).
  panghinayngan be regretted 257(6).
  panghhinayngan will be regretted 191(31).
  pinanghinayngan was regretted 257(12).
  pinanghhinayngan is being regretted 257(13).
  nasyang went for naught 285(5).

-sayw: sumayw dance 110(32). danced 186(18).
  sumsayw is dancing 112(2).
  pagsayw a dancing 112(4).
  nagssayw is performing a dance 110(38).
  sayawn be danced before 253(15).
  sinayawn was danced to 186(21).
  sywan dance by many; ball 112(5). 186(19). 258(4).

si siy particle of names 20(2). 45. 58. 62. 78. 126. 162. 196.
  ni disj., of, by 45. 162.
  kay loc., to, for 45. 196.

Sibl place-n. 118(26).

sibyas S. onions 76(17).

sig` bonfire 66(16).

-signg: isigng be put on the fire 248(39).
  nakasigng is cooking 281(6).

sigarliyo S. cigarette 227(1).

sigw that cried 221(23).
  sumigw yelled 24(21).
  ssigw will yell 24(19).
  pagsigw a shouting 42(41).
  nagsisigw kept shouting 16(31). 44(40).
  nagssisigw screams continually 40(42).
  pagsisigw a continual shouting 16(26). 44(26).
  isinigw was cried out 24(13). 68(39).
  sinigawn was yelled at 253(16).
  sgwan a shouting by many 258(5).
  magssgwan will yell together 236(18).
  pagsisgwan a yelling together 48(37).
  nakassigw is able to cry out 84(25).
  pasigw in a shout 70(24).
  npasigw involuntarily gave a shout 88(27).

-sigl, see sild.

-sigl: masigl cheerful 276(35).
  magpasigl cause to be cheerful 112(11).

sigro S. no doubt 18(24). 80(39).

sit spines at base of bamboo-cluster 246(27).

-skad: sumkad kicked at 229(9).
  nagssikd kicks repeatedly 238(3).
  nagssisikd is kicking much and repeatedly 239(11).
  sinikran was kicked at 253(17).

skat ray of light 66(22).
  sumskat is shining 78(4).

-sikp: sumikp became narrow 229(10).
  nagsikp grew crowded 234(27).
  masikp crowded 98(39).

sekrta S. spy 168(5).

-siksk: sumiksk crowded his way 229(13).
  nagssiksk is stuffing 234(29).
  nakkipagsikskan takes part in the crowding 98(41).

sko elbow 48(19).

sko, see tsko.

-skot: paskot-skot nooks and corners 300(33).

sil they 18(27). 63.
  nil disj., by them, of them 16(7). 163.
  kanil prep. and loc., their, by them, them 18(26). 165. 169.
  kan-kanil prep. and loc., their various, their respective
  26(37). 165. 169.

sil, see sin.

silakb a flare, leap 231(6). 254(26).
  sumilakb flared up 229(14).
  sinsilakbuhn is being welled up in 22(15).

-slang: slngan place of rising 259(41).
  silangn place of child-birth 260(26).
  slangnan east 163(27).
  silngan east; place-n. 163(27). 261(13).

-silb (S.): magsilb serve 40(7).
  pinagssilbihn is being waited on 64(12).

sle S. chile pepper 76(16).

sild small room 84(39). 114(13).
  sumild get into a small space 104(34).
  isild be put in 248(40).
  sigln be filled 138(5).
  sinigln was filled 20(17.34).
  sinsigln is being filled 20(6).
  pinagsisigln was variously filled 118(7). 256(20).
  pagksild a chance putting away 104(37).

-slip: sinlip was peeped at 106(20).

sliya S. chair 234(12).

slong ground-floor, space under platform of house 260(29).

-simb: magsimb go to church 78(37).
  nagsimb went to church 242(18).
  nagssimb goes to church 56(13).
  simbhan church 20(15).
  mapagsimb devout 98(10).

sin sil pl. particle of names 48. 60. 62. 162. 196.
  nin nil disj., of, by 48. 162.
  kin loc., to, for 48. 196.

snag ray 66(36).

sne S. cinematograph 204(22).

sinlas S. sandals 70(1).

sniyas S. signals 246(22).

-sint: pagsint a proffering love 229(16).
  sinsint is being loved 245(5).

sntimos S. centimos, cents 222(37).

sno who? 97. 167.
  sno-sno pl. 97. 131.
  nno disj., of whom? by whom? 167. 168.
  kanno prep. and loc., whose? by whom? 168. 169.
  kan-kanno pl. 168. 169.

sinungling mendacious 219(17).
  nagssinungalng tells lies 238(5).
  kasinungalngan falsehood 276(38).

-singl: paniningl a dunning 313(1).
  singiln be dunned for 264(14).
  sinsingl is being claimed 54(23).
  nsingl got collected 294(7).

singkams (S.) Pachyrizus angulatus Rich. 76(16).

-singkw: nagpasingkw caused to be hitched up 52(35).

singsng ring 102(2).
  palsingsngan the ring finger 315(25).

spa` that kicked away; football 46(32).
  pagspa` a kicking 48(15).
  mninpa` football-player 48(24).
  sipin be kicked away 84(9).
  sinpa` was kicked away 24(45). 84(3).
  pinagsip` was variously kicked 84(43).
  pinagsisip` was variously and repeatedly kicked 84(21).
  sipro football-player 316(11).
  sipros pl. 48(24).

-spag: kasipgan diligence 276(38).
  maspag diligent 64(14).
  masispag pl. 34(35).

-sra` (a) nagkasra` got partly spoiled 268(37).
  nakassra` causes ruin 235(27).
  masra` be able to be destroyed 283(40).
  nasra` was destroyed; deceased 78(5). 285(7).
  nassiran gets damaged 301(24).
  msra` get destroyed 293(26).
  nssra` gets destroyed 191(32).
  --(b) Accent shifted:
  sir` destroyed 223(3).
  kasir` opponent in anger 266(42).
  magkasir` break with each other 24(28).
  nagkasir` had a falling out 269(20).
  nagsipagkasir` pl. 269(28).
  kasiran ruin 94(12).
  kasira-ng-pri injury to honor 94(16).

serbsiyo S. service 62(35).

srmon S. sermon 20(16).
  isinsrmon is being preached about 50(16).
  sinsrmunan is being preached to 50(13).

-ssi: magssi repent 20(31).
  magsipagssi pl. 22(2).
  pagsissi a repenting 22(25).
  pinagsishan was repented 291(9).

-ssid: sumsid stay under water 168(41).
  pagssid a staying under water 309(10).
  nsssid is submerged 88(35).
  pagpapassid a causing to dive 116(38).

staw the cow-pea, Vigna catjang Endl. 76(16).

siy he, she; that which 47. 63. 106.
  niy disj., by him, of him, 47. 163.
  kaniy prep. and loc., his, by him, him 165. 169.
  ksiy sufficient 268(8).
  magkksiy will be sufficient 271(4).
  pagksiyahn be a sufficient container 52(13).
  makassiy will be adequate 281(7).
  nasiyahn got what corresponded to it 66(21).
  nassiyahn gets what corresponds to it 112(26).

-siydo (S. demasiado)
  :masiydo excessive 54(19). 289(17).

siym nine 38(6). 67. pangsiym number nine 225(38).
  maksiym nine times 298(33).

siysat that inquired into 203(5).
  nagsiysat inquired 28(2). 203(2).
  pagsisiysat an inquiring 66(21).
  maniysat pry into 240(33).
  siniysat was interrogated 64(34).
  nasiysat has been inquiring into 199(32).
  mapagsiysat inquisitive 40(20).

siympre S. always 262(13).

siyte-palbras S. Easter Mass 20(29).

sublit but 322.

-sub: sumub boiled over, intr. 52(12).
  sinubhn was boiled over in 54(30).

sbo` mouthful 221(24).
  pagsusbo` a feeding 219(15).
  suban be fed 253(19).

-sbok: nannbok is spying 40(24).
  subkan be watched for, put to a test 68(8). 102(34).
  sinubkan was put to a test 56(39).
  sinsubkan is being spied on 40(22).
  masubkan be able to be tested 265(20).

-sugl (S.): nagssugl is gambling 269(22).
  nagsipagsugl gambled, pl. 190(34).
  pagsusugl a gambling 251(29).
  sglan gambling-party 174(29).

sgat a wound 20(8).
  sumgat wounded 20(38).
  sinugtan was wounded 253(20).
  sugatn wounded person, the wounded 20(39). 260(28).
  nagsugatn wounded each other 237(3).
  masugtan be able to be wounded 36(21).

sha` grape-fruit 34(40). See pno`.

shol a bribe 72(39).

ska` wine set to sour, vinegar 289(2).

skat proper, fitting 58(18). 98(24). 268.

sukly comb 229(19).
  sumukly combed 229(18).
  nagsukly combed himself 234(30).
  sinukly was combed 245(7).
  sinuklayn id. 253(21).
  nagpasukly caused himself to be combed 303(22).
  pinapagsukly was caused to comb himself 305(26).

slat that written, letter 52(10).
  sult written 199(30).
  sumlat write 140(18). wrote 50(39).
  sslat will write 138(11).
  sumslat is writing 146(5).
  pagslat a writing 140(29).
  pagsusult a writing in quantity 238(5).
  panunlat id. 240(35).
  magsusult clerk, scribe 243(2).
  mnunult id. 243(20).
  sinlat was written 154(8). 245(9).
  isinlat was put into writing 94(22). 184(35).
  sultan be written to 154(19).
  sulatn writing-desk 217(13).
  kasltan kasulatn correspondent 278(12. 24).
  makaslat be able to write 282(2).
  nakasslat is able to write 282(1).
  nakslat happened to write 176(38).
  tagaslat writer 315(39).
  tagapagpaslat overseer of writers 316(5).

-slid: sumlid spin thread 229(19).
  sinlid thread 184(4).

sulihiy the weave 48(1).

sulras S. joists 234(43).

-suls (S.): manuls darn 169(2).
  tagasuls darning-woman 169(1).

sul` torch 90(26).

slok corner 52(33). 64(22).
  sulk-sulk nooks and corners 64(21).

slong go ahead 151(39).
  sumlong push ahead 229(19). also as family-n. (Sumlong at
  kasamahn: see bgsan).
  pagslong a pushing on; a going away 88(41). 308(36).
  isslong will be pushed forward 58(3).
  isinslong is being pushed ahead 230(3).

sman steamed rice in banana-leaves 227(1).

sombrro S. hat 137(41).

sumbng complaint 96(12).
  nagsumbng brought a charge 100(21).
  ipagsumbng be complained of 96(35).
  ipinagsumbng was complained  of 38(1). 96(10).
  palasumbngin tattle-tale 315(10).

-sumpng: pagsumpng attack, fit 313(22).
  sinumpng was overcome 18(36). 84(14).
  sinsumpng is being overcome 108(27).

sundlo S. soldier 52(23).
  nagsundlo became a soldier 183(2).
  pagsusundlo military service 303(34).

-sund`: sumund` fetch 229(21).
  pagsund` a fetching 229(22).
  sinund` was called for 256(41).
  sinsund` is being called for 104(23).
  ksund` agreeing 268(9).
  nagksund` agreed with each other 168(16).
  pagkaksund` an agreeing with each other 271(5).
  pagksundun pagksunduwn be agreed upon 278(30).
  pinagksundun was agreed upon 32(2).
  nagpasund` caused to be fetched 92(23).
  pagpapasund` a causing to be fetched 303(23).
  ipinasund` was caused to be fetched 306(28).
  ipinassund` is being caused to be fetched 88(19). 92(16).

suntk blow on the head 229(24).
  pagsuntk a striking on the head 229(23).
  suntukn be struck on the head 245(10).
  sinuntk was struck on the head 245(10).
  sinsuntk is being struck on the head 245(11).

-sno`: nakisno` dwelt along, dwelt with 264(15).
  kasno` fellow-guest 118(15).
  magkakasno` pl. 118(18).

-sund: sund-sund following on one another 72(25).
  sumund follow, comply, obey 52(24). 100(27). followed 231(6).
  sumsund is following 38(7). 46(19).
  pagsund a following 38(10). 94(24).
  sundn be complied with 92(8).
  sinund was complied with 303(16).
  sinsund is being complied with 62(37). 66(13).
  isinund was taken next, was made to follow 76(18).
  sundn be followed 240(23).
  sinundn was followed 22(25). 36(36).
  sinsundn is being followed 68(23).
  kasund following another 266(21).
  magkasund two, one of whom follows the other 42(29). 270(8).
  pagkaksund-sund a following one on the other 271(6).
  masnrin obedient 94(20).

snog a burning up, conflagration 122(18). 156(10).
  sung burnt 66(41). 223(4).
  panunnog a setting fire to, a burning 122(12).
  sungin be burned up 122(20).
  pinagsung was variously burned up 122(10).
  magkasnog have a fire 268(41).
  nasnog has been burned 172(39). 259(4).
  pagkasnog a past burning 197(34). 283(2).
  pagksnog a getting burned 292(19). 295(19).

snong that carried on the head 108(16).

sungnga` a blow on the mouth 212(37).
  ssungangin will be struck on the mouth 174(37).

sngay horn 24(29).

-sunggb: sinunggabn was seized 46(27). 58(22).
  sinsunggabn is being seized 108(34).
  masunggabn have been taken hold of 110(2).
  nassunggabn is able to be seized 110(8).

spot bag 34(5).

sorbtes S. sherbet 272(33).

sso breast, nipple 212(11).
  ipinakkipasso is being asked to be caused to take the breast
  307(38).

sus` snail 18(1).

sutst a whistling 197(22).
  sumsutst is whistling 229(24).
  malasutst a young lout 315(3).
  palasutstin one who always whistles 315(11).

sot that worn 70(1).
  isot be put on 248(41).
  sootn be got into 104(11).

-suwy: pagsuwy a disobeying 54(3).
  makasuwy be able to disobey 94(21).

suwlas S. soles 306(8).

suwldo S. pay 26(27).

-syo`: pagsyo` a bribing 92(38).
  panunyo` a propitiating by bribes 72(34).

syod a harrow 243(3).
  magsuyd harrower.





T.

t, see at.

tan that set apart 221(3).
  itintan is being reserved 248(24).
  taann fugitive 261(14).
  magtaann flee 237(4).
  makataann be able to flee 286(24). 313(29).
  nttan is reserved 80(13).

tas height 218(13).
  itas upper part, north 36(27). 163(25).
  paitas upward 48(6).
  itinas was raised 88(34).
  kataasn north 163(25).
  matas high 64(12).
  ntas got raised up 78(8).

-tab`: tumab` grow stout 206(27).
  katab` how fat 42(5).
  matab` fat, stout 244(34).
  npakatab` very fat 313(12).

tabakra S. tabatire 220(25).

tabko S. cigar 66(12).
  nagttabko is smoking a cigar 66(19).

tab side; step aside 32(31). 152(1).
  ntab got to the side of 74(14).
  pagktab a getting to the side of 94(8).

tabl S. board 34(37).

tbo` dipper 222(27).

tbon dam 245(14).
  nagtbon dammed up 232(32).
  pagtatbon a damming up 179(39).
  tinabnan was dammed up 253(22).
  nttbon is covering, is piled over 120(22).
  pinatabnan was caused to be filled 26(10).

taburte S. chair 24(39).

tadtd chopped up 20(7).
  pagtatadtd a chopping up 114(10). and Corrigenda.

tag tig coming from 56(23). 48. 254.

-tag`: tumag` hew, chop 290(27).
  tinag` was chopped 44(39).

tagl length in time, endurance 168(41).
  tagaln be done long 253(23).
  matagl long-enduring, patient 104(26).
  natagaln was able to be endured in 62(6).
  ptaglan contest of endurance 309(10).
  pagpaptaglan a contesting for endurance 48(22). 309(17).
  kaptaglan opponent in a contest for endurance 310(32).

Taglog Tagalog 50(15). 58(6).
  Katagalgan the Tagalog country 50(23).

taglid, see -glid.

tagp` a patch 266(4).
  tagpin be mended 253(26).
  tagpan place of patching 259(7).
  kattagp` there has just been mending 175(9).

tagp` a meeting 220(3).
  magtatagp` meet each other, pl. 102(4).
  nagtatagp` met each other 26(39).
  tagpun be met by appointment 245(12).
  tagpun be joined up 253(26).
  pagttagpun will be met in 26(34).
  tagpan meeting-place 106(9).
  makkipagtagp` will meet another 98(26).
  maktagp` happen to meet 66(5). 92(14).
  naktagp` happened to meet 18(2). 36(8).
  mtagpun get met with 106(25).
  ntagpun got met with 34(20). 92(15).

tgo` that put away 221(25).
  magtgo` hide oneself 32(35).
  magtag` keep oneself in hiding 56(19).
  nagtag` kept himself in hiding 56(21).
  pagtatag` a staying in hiding 312(13).
  itgo` be hidden 40(25).
  itintgo` is being put away 273(34).
  tagun place for safe-keeping; hiding-place; hiding
  52(35). 120(10). 163(22).
  kinttagan is the place of concealment 118(43).
  makapagtgo` be able to hide oneself 52(32).
  nttgo` is hidden 24(31). 34(11).
  pagktgo` the way of storing 268(39).
  patgo` given for safe-keeping 293(26).

-tahn: magtahn cease 232(33).
  nagtahn ceased 106(7).
  thnan abode 66(24).
  patahanin be caused to cease 100(2).

-tah`: manah` sew, patch 169(2).
  pananah` sewing as occupation 240(36).
  mnanhi` seamstress 243(14).
  pinannahin is the place where sewing is done 256(42).
  tagatah` person appointed to sew 315(39).

tahd spur of rooster 238(3).

tahlan girder 227(15).

tahmik quiet 102(4). 114(4).
  tumahmik become quiet, quiet down 44(17). became quiet
  44(25). 122(23).
  nanahmik quieted down 240(37).
  nagsipanahmik pl. 36(5).
  katahimkan quietness 116(9).
  matahmik quiet 34(35). 120(38).
  mtahmik get quiet 40(42).

tahl a bark 62(8).
  tumtahl is barking 229(25).
  pagtahl a barking 305(2).
  pagtatahl a barking at 234(31).
  thlan a baying together 258(7).
  nagthlan bayed together 190(17).
  ikintahl was the cause of barking 273(38).
  nakatahl has barked, was able to bark 191(2). 198(18).
  pagktahl a chance barking 158(8).
  pagpapatahl a causing to bark 296(10).
  pinatahl was caused to bark 304(41).

tanga tnga ear 110(35).

-tak: pagtatak a being surprised 64(16). 232(34).
  ipinagttak is the cause of surprise 66(4).
  katak-tak exciting wonder 36(26).
  nakapagttak causes wonderment 36(24).

takb a run 70(40).
  tumakb run 18(18). ran 18(39).
  tumtakb is running 251(39).
  ttakb will run 18(35).
  pagtakb a running 18(9).
  pagtakb-takb a running about at intervals 231(22).
  nagttakb runs (as repeated occurrence) 108(16).
  nagsipagtakb ran, pl. 84(29).
  nangagsipagtakb id. 116(13).
  pagtatakb a running 88(25).
  nagttatakb is running wild 62(13). 238(42).
  takbhan a running together 60(27). 116(5).
  nagtakbhan ran together 22(26).
  nagsipagtakbhan pl. 96(30).
  nagttakbhan are running together 86(40). 106(34).
  pagtatakbhan a running together 18(1). 96(17).
  makipagtakbhan join in a race with 18(21).
  nakkipagtakbhan joins in a race 60(26).
  pinakkipagtakbuhn is being run with 60(29). 265(33).
  makatakb be able to run 18(16).
  patakb on the run 68(18). 72(8).
  pinatakb was caused to run 70(39).

takp cover 172(15).
  pangtakp used as cover 94(15).

tkot fear 20(6).
  taktin be frightened 50(33).
  nagttakt-taktan pretends to be frightened 108(15).
  katkot-tkot terrifying 267(27).
  ikinatkot was the cause of fearing 272(23).
  kataktan be feared 36(9).
  kinataktan was feared 274(30).
  kinattaktan is being feared 42(18).
  pagkatakutn be feared by many 275(19).
  pagkkatakutn will be feared by many 275(21).
  pinagkatakutn was feared by many 275(15).
  pinagkkatakutn is being feared by many 36(30).
  kataktan timidity 116(14).
  katakutn reverence 276(11).
  katatakutn terrifying 34(32). 277(30).
  nakattkot is causing fear 66(12).
  matkot be afraid 20(13).
  natkot grew afraid 58(23).
  nangatkot pl. 36(6).
  nattkot is afraid 36(7).
  pagkatkot a being afraid 72(9).
  palatakutn easily frightened.

tla` star 272(25).

-tal`: ntal` got fixed 116(24).

talag by fate, by nature, once for all 98(33). 116(16).
  tinalag was resolved upon 46(23).
  katalagahn fate 276(40).

-tlas: matlas keen, clever 234(9).

-talasts: nattalasts is able to be understood 284(2).
  napagtalasts was entirely understood 287(14).
  napagttalasts nappagtalasts is entirely understood 287(15).

-tli`: panli` used for tethering, tying up 225(21).
  nagtli` tethered 232(35).
  itinli` was tethered 313(25).
  tinalan was tied up 104(37).
  nakatli` is tied 284(16).

-tlik: tumlik became close 88(2).
  matlik intimate 22(30). 52(17).

-talkod, see likd.

talm cutting-edge 221(36).
  patalm cutting instrument 36(19).
  nagpatalm caused to be sharp, sharpened 44(36).
  nagppatalm is sharpening 303(25).
  pinatalm was made sharp 304(42).
  napattalm is able to be made sharp. 311(24).

talno (S.?) intelligence 60(16).
  katalinhan id. 50(6).
  matalno intelligent 36(28).

-tlo (a): nagttlo is contending 46(34).
  pagtatlo a contending 296(31).
  manlo be victorious 52(8).
  nanlo won 48(36).
  nannlo is victorious 62(2).
  nagssipanlo pl. 118(5).
  pananlo victory 56(30).
  mnanal victorious, victor 48(38). 62(1).
  talnin be defeated 46(37).
  ttalnin will be defeated 18(24).
  talnan defeated, loser 18(42). 148(22). 163(7).
  pinanalnan was won 60(33).
  katlnan one of two who are opposing each other 278(12).
  pinagkatalunn was won in by many 60(27). 275(23).
  pagkatlo a being defeated 52(7).
  mkatlo turn out to be the opponent 168(28).
  mkkatlo will be an opponent 30(2).
  nkatlo was the opponent 296(29).
  nkkatlo is the opponent 296(31).
  --(b) Accent shifted: katal opponent in winning-and-losing game
  266(43).
  nagkatal played a game 269(21).
  pagkakatal a winning-and-losing 48(21).

talumpti` oration 98(38).
  nagttalumpti` is making a speech 98(41).
  pagtatalumpti` a speech-making 236(39).

-taln: tumaln jumped down 88(29).
  nagtaln jumped down 28(21). 70(30). 72(13).

talng egg-plant 76(16).

-talungk`: nakatalungk` has squatted down 98(19). 112(1).
  nangttalungk` are in squatting position 108(29).
  patalungk` in squatting position 220(9).

tma` (a) a hit, correct 152(7). 220(5).
  tumma` hit 24(23). 229(26).
  taman be hit and destroyed or disfigured 238(39).
  mtaman get hit and disfigured 298(5).
  --(b) Accent shifted: tam` hit 223(5).
  taman be hit in some part 106(38).
  tinaman was hit 24(25). 38(21).
  mtaman get hit in some part 36(21). 298(11).

-tamd: katamarn be neglected 274(36).
  kattamarn will be neglected 274(39).
  kinatamarn was neglected 274(34).
  katmran laziness 18(36).
  matamd lazy 260(15).

tams sweetness 297(10).
  matams sweet, sugar 198(31). 252(6).

-tamn, see tanm.

-tampalsan: tinampalsan was roughly handled 94(14).
  katampalasnan roughness 310(9).

-tamp: pagtatamphan mutual contrariness 259(28).

-tam: magtam partake 78(39).
  nagttam is partaking 112(20).

-tanw: tumanw take into view 90(39).
  tanawn be observed 108(21).
  pagkatanw a having looked 283(4).
  naktanw chanced to espy 28(13). 72(5).
  pagktanw a chance espying, the way of seeing
  18(34). 108(16). 291(19).

-tand`: tumtand` is getting old 229(27).
  matand` old 38(6).
  matatand` pl. 114(31).
  matandan be able to be remembered 24(5).
  nattandan is able to be remembered 20(25). 28(5). 116(19).

tanikal` chain 244(38).

tanm that planted 221(26).
  pananm used for planting 86(32).
  nagttanm is planting 86(38).
  pagtatanm a planting 307(13).
  mnannim planter 243(15).
  ittanm will be planted 16(6).
  tamnn be planted in 253(28).
  nttanm is planted 76(31).
  nttamnn is planted in 34(39).

taniyg much regarded 219(18).
  pagtataniyg an exhibiting 90(16).
  tanygan exhibition 259(9).
  pagtatanygan the making an exhibition 90(9).

tans` copper 230(14).

tantiy S. calculation, guess 281(41).

tnod watchman
  tnod-bhay house-watchman 210(31).
  tnod-play rice-guard 210(31).
  tumnod guarded 229(27).
  nagtnod stood guard, formed a guard 207(41).
  tinanran was guarded 253(30).

tanng that asked, question 56(5). 68(21).
  tumanng asked (with quotation or thing asked about)
  44(8). 82(13). 106(10). 229(29).
  nagtanng put questions, asked (with indirect quotation)
  82(3). 234(34).
  nagttanng is putting questions 234(33).
  tinanng was inquired of 26(1).
  itinanng was asked 26(3). 30(30).
  ipagtanng be asked about 74(26).
  ipagtatanng be repeatedly asked about 98(23).

-tnga`: tinangan was threatened 100(13).

tngan grasp; that grasped 66(38). 108(41).
  tinangnn was grasped 42(39).

tangy that carried along 70(3).
  nagttangy is carrying along 68(28).
  tinangy was carried along, washed away 82(34).
  tintangy is being borne along 16(3).

tanggp that received 221(27).
  tumanggp received 76(25).
  tanggapn be accepted 48(25). 245(16).
  ttanggapn will be accepted 52(25).
  tinanggp was received, accepted 58(9). 219(29).
  tanggapn be taken from 253(31).
  tanggpan receiving-place 252(21).
  ntanggp chanced to be accepted 42(28).

-tanggl: pagtatanggl a defending 257(14).
  mnananggl attorney 116(25).
  maipagtanggl be able to be defended 288(1).
  tagapagtanggl attorney 305(40).

-tangh`: tumangh` wonder 229(30).

tanghli` noon 30(29).
  mananghli` eat the noon meal 204(26).
  katanghalan middle part of day 26(14). 120(38).

-tngi`: itinngi` was refused 60(29).

-tanglw: pagtanglw an illuminating 66(36).

-tang`: tumang` consented 16(6).
  tumtang` consents 229(31).

tpang courage 36(31).
  katapngan bravery 276(41).
  matpang courageous 42(19). 66(2).

tapt space in front 189(1).
  ipinagtapt was owned up 90(32).
  katapt facing 48(7).

tapk a tap 220(7).
  pinagttapk is being petted 84(10).

-tpon: itpon be cast away 30(36). 62(23).
  itinpon was cast away 62(30).
  ipinagtapn was variously cast away 120(40).
  tapunn place for throwing away 205(21).
  nagpatpon caused to be exiled 56(27).
  ipatpon be caused to be cast out 56(17).
  pagkapatpon a having caused to be banished 120(18).

tapn S. stopper, cork 166(17).
  tapunn be corked 253(34).

-tpos: taps ended 30(19).
  tapsin be ended 236(18).
  tinpos was ended 56(6).
  katapusn end, cessation 24(1). 50(18). 114(33).
  makatpos have finished 88(3). 167(26).
  matpos come to an end 50(37). 82(3).
  natpos ended 236(37).
  pagkatpos a having ended 44(37). 52(4).
  matpos-tpos be able to come to an end 287(39).

tar come along 207(35).

tarabko, see bko.

-tarangk: trangkhan gateway 32(17).

-tarto S.: pagtarto a treating 44(31).

tas (S.) point 254(2).

ttal splinters 58(17).

ttay father 120(17). 122(17). 59.
  magttay father and child 242(16).
  magtattay pl. 242(33).

tatl, see -tl.

to person, human being 20(7).
  to-ng-byan townsperson 50(17).
  to-ng-San-Antniyo person of San Antonio 34(31).
  panahin guest 247(29). 250(39).
  to-tahan manikin; pupil of the eye 88(8). 135(22).
  kato persons 42(6). 255.
  katahan mankind 135(21).
  katawn body 20(33). 276(19).
  pangangatawn physique, body 18(14). 36(11).

-tab: pagtatab a tipping over, tr. 82(32).

tan year 26(36).
  tan-tan every year 191(32).
  ktan at the same time 104(18).
  nagktan happened at the same time 84(37). 94(6).
  pagkaktan a happening at the same time 271(6).
  nttan comes at the same time 110(22).

twa (a) laughter 68(27).
  t. nang t. keeps laughing 206(35).
  tumwa laughed 18(23).
  tumtwa is laughing 229(31).
  pagtwa a laughing 100(37).
  tumtwa-twa laughs at intervals 231(23).
  tawnan be laughed at 186(34).
  twnan laughter by many 259(37).
  katatawann laughable, laughing-stock 24(17). 167(30).
  --(b) Accent shifted: tumtaw-taw snickers, giggles at intervals
  231(28).
  nanaw-naw kept snickering 241(33).
  iktaw be the cause of laughter 185(23).
  ikttaw will be the cause of snickering 274(2).
  ikintaw was the cause of laughter 292(31).
  ikinttaw is the cause of snickering 274(4).
  nakttaw causes irrepressible laughter 108(28).
  matatawann easily made to laugh 290(3).
  patawtaw snickering at intervals 300(38).
  npataw burst out laughing 120(28).

-twad: pattawrin will be pardoned, excused 184(19).

twag a call; name 50(10). 64(18).
  pangtwag panwag used for calling 225(22).
  tumwag call 18(27). called 32(39).
  tumtwag is calling 64(5).
  pagtwag a calling 64(42).
  nagtwag announced 234(36).
  pagtatwag an announcing 234(37).
  nagtawg called in numbers 238(7).
  nagttawg is calling in numbers 238(7).
  pagtatawg a calling in numbers 238(11).
  nagttatawg is calling much and variously 239(12).
  magtatawg town-crier 303(30).
  manwag summon 240(38).
  tawgin be called 78(1).
  tinwag was called 16(5).
  tintwag is being called 40(32).
  itinwag was called out, was called for 42(31). 44(28). 248(42).
  ipinagtwag was called out 249(39).
  tawgan be called to 253(36).
  pagkatwag a having called 283(6).
  mtwag get called 46(21).
  ntwag got called 303(34).
  pagktwag a chance calling 291(39).
  patwag caused to be called out 299(19).
  nagpatwag caused to be called 303(26).
  pagpapatwag a causing to be called 303(27).
  magpapatawg town-crier 248(42).
  ipinatwag was caused to be called 52(13). 54(25).
  ipinagppatwag is being caused to be called out 307(24).

-tawd: tumawd cross 106(4). crossed 68(2).
  napattawd is causing himself to be taken across 80(35).

tay` stakes 258(8).
  tyan a staking by several 258(8).

tyo we, incl. 63. Cf. tin and t.

tay` stand up 222(7). erected 223(35).
  pangtay` used for setting up, for standing up 225(24). 306(9).
  tumay` stood up 204(27).
  pagtay` a standing up 289(21).
  magtay` set up, erect 203(2).
  nagtay` erected 234(40).
  pagtatay` an erecting 234(22).
  ittay` will be set up 296(2).
  itinay` was erected 248(43).
  tinayun was built in 253(36).
  pagkaktay` a standing up together 98(39). 271(7).
  kinttayun is being stood on 98(40).
  nakatay` is upright 110(41).
  nakattay` is able to stand up 282(3).
  pagkatay` a having stood up 283(8).
  nttay` is standing 34(38). 50(26).
  pagktay` a chance standing up or erecting 104(19). 291(21).
  patay` caused to be erected 299(20). in standing position 287(26).
  nagpatay` caused to be erected 303(32).
  pagpapatay` a causing to be built 303(33).
  pinatay` was caused to stand up 304(43).
  ipinatay` was caused to be erected 306(30).
  npatay` jumped to his feet 312(31).

-tyog: katyog what tallness 267(35).

t (tyo?) come along 207(35).

tetro, see teytro.

-tib`: tumib` cut down bananas 229(34).
  tinibn trunk of banana-tree after fruit has been gathered 184(2).

-tbay: tumbay grew firm 24(27).
  tibyan be propped 296(2).
  matbay firm 18(20). 64(36).

tig, see tag.

tigs hardness, hard 219(20). 281(26).
  tigasn be done with hardening 253(38).
  matigs hard 283(27).
  pinatigasn was made hard 237(31).

-tgil: nagtgil ceased 201(37).

-tis: tintis is being endured 223(18).
  tsin hardship 62(21).

tiktk spy 312(14).
  tumiktk spied 36(31).

tikuws lowered at one end 223(35).
  pagtikuws a getting out of balance 192(22).
  nagtikuws tilted 234(42).

-tild: tumild split, cut up 229(35).
  tinild was split 46(40).
  napatild asked to be sliced for 311(43).

telfono S. telephone 291(40).

timb` well-bucket 314(34).
  tumimb` drew in a bucket 229(36).
  kalatimb` squatting on heels 314(32).
  nagkalatimb` squatted on heels 196(37).
  pinapagkalatimb` was caused to squat on heels 305(29).

-timbng: timbngan scales 259(10).
  katimbng equal 42(6) and Corrigenda.

tinpay bread 32(17).

tind (S.) goods for sale 259(11).
  tindhan store, shop 170(4).

-tindg: nagsitindg stood on end, pl. 66(16).
  nagtindg stood up 26(25).
  nagsipagtindg pl. 96(29).
  nakatindg is on his feet 38(33). 90(25).
  pagktindg a chance standing up 291(21).
  npatindg jumped to his feet 202(1).

tinidr S. table-fork 114(8).

ting voice 86(25). 114(11).

tink spine, splinter, fish-bone 16(20). 250(34).
  ntink got a splinter 16(21).
  pagktink the getting a splinter 295(23).

-tintro: S.: tinterhan ink-stand 180(33).

tinla stew 163(18).

ting foreign substance between the teeth 241(29).
  manghining pick one's teeth 241(29).

-tingn: tumingn watch 18(26).
  pagtingn an observing 229(37).
  tingnn be looked at 64(26).
  tiningnn was looked at 18(13).
  tintingnn is being looked at 106(34).

-tingkd: matingkd intense 147(1).

tingtng fibre, bristle, straw 315(21).

-tipn: pinagtipann was appointed as meeting-place 104(39).
  tpnan a meeting by appointment 102(11).
  nagtpnan made an appointment to meet each other 26(34).

-tipd: pagtipd a being economical 229(37).
  nagtipd saved 235(2).
  nagsipagtipd pl. 236(6).
  pagtitipd a saving 235(1).
  tinipd was economized in 245(17).
  kaytipd what savingness 174(1).
  natipd has been economized in 284(18).
  matipd economical 298(9).
  mapagtipd given to saving 289(26).
  pagktipd a chance saving 292(25).
  nagpatipd caused to be economized 303(36).
  ipatipd be caused to be economized in 244(20).
  ipinatipd was caused to be economized 306(31).

-tpon: tipn gathered 223(6).
  pangtpon used for gathering 225(26).
  pagtpon a gathering 229(39).
  magtpon store up 235(5).
  nagtpon stored up 235(5).
  nagttpon stores up 202(19).
  pagtitpon a storing up 235(3).
  tpnan meeting 259(35) Corrigenda.
  katipnan a gathering; n. of a secret society 116(27).
  Katipunros members of the Katipunan 116(32).
  nakatpon succeeded in gathering 282(4).
  natpon has been gathered 284(19).
  pagkatpon ability to gather, a having gathered 282(16). 283(10).
  naktpon chanced to gather 291(33).
  pagktpon a chance gathering 291(23).
  patpon that caused to be gathered 299(21).
  patipn into a heap 166(23).
  nagpatpon caused to be gathered 303(37).
  pagpapatpon a causing to be gathered 303(39).
  ipinatpon was caused to be gathered 306(32).

tpus S. typhoid 223(19).

-tir: tumir dwelt, staid 229(41).
  magtir dwelt 54(12).
  nagtir dwelt 50(4).
  nagttir is dwelling, stays 38(8). 114(27).
  pagtitir a staying 36(25). 54(13).
  nagttumir keeps staying 112(27).
  itinir was left 249(1).
  tirahn be dwelt in 253(40).
  tintirahn is being dwelt in 253(42).
  tirhn be left for 253(39).
  tinirhn was dwelt in, was left for 118(3). 253(38).
  trhan dwelling 16(32). 24(38).
  titirhn home, house 118(27).
  ikinpagtir was the cause of dwelling 120(6).
  kintirhn was lived in 120(42).
  makatir be able to stay 52(39).
  mtir remain, get left 192(38).
  mttir will have to remain 187(26).
  ntir got left, dwelt 28(31). 56(30).
  nttir is left, dwells 26(28). 28(33).
  pagktir a chance staying 116(25).

-tsod: tinsod was kicked away 245(20).
  natsod has been kicked away 284(20).
  naktsod accidentally hit with the foot 290(35).

-tiwla`: tiwal` persuaded, convinced 104(40).
  paniwla` belief 40(3).
  maniwla` believe 68(29).
  naniwla` believed 106(19).
  nanniwla` believes 40(7). 52(1).
  paniniwla` a believing, faith 34(32). 40(2).
  pniwalan credulous 116(9).
  paniwalan be given credence 52(6).
  ktiwla` confidential agent, manager 268(13).

tiy S. aunt 59. 256.

tiyn womb 36(16).

tiynak goblin 68(1).

teytro tetro S. theatre 148(27).

tiyobbo S. merry-go-round 307(21).

-tl: tatl three 24(18). 67.
  tatl ng gab: pagtatatl-ng-gab a three-nights' celebration
  114(28).
  tatl ng p`: pangatl-ng-p` number thirty 226(9).
  tatl-tatl three by three 224(1).
  pangatl number three 226(8).
  ikatl third 273(19).
  makitl makyitl three times 298(36).

trabahadr S. laborer 82(25).

trabho S. labor 30(26).
  trabho-ng-kaniyunro artilleryman's work 155(22).
  magttrabho will work 138(30).
  nagtrabho worked 90(14).
  pagtatrabho a working 82(7).
  pinapagttrabho is being caused to work 72(33).

trabko, see bko.

trn S. train 116(21).

Tsng C. n. 263(4).

tsko sko S. custard-apple, Achras sapota L. 34(40).

Tsna S. China 269(20).

tub` sap 258(1).

tbig water 16(31).

tbo S. tube 255(20).

tub sugar-cane 181(15).
  tubhan cane-field 237(41). 259(18).

tbo` that grown; profit 189(24). 232(22).
  tumbo` grew 16(12).
  ttbo` will grow 16(9).
  tinuban was grown up in, was grown on 26(39). 204(10).
  katutbo` inborn 38(13). 267(4).

-tud, see -tuwd.

tugtg that played, piece of music 186(21).
  tumugtg play music 166(3).
  tumtugtg is playing music 110(37).
  nagssitugtg pl. 110(32).
  mnunugtg musician 112(3).
  tugtgin music 247(22).
  tintugtugn is being played for 48(30).
  tugtgan piece of music by several performers 112(4).
  pagtutugtgan a playing together 110(40).
  pagpapatugtg a causing to be played 80(26).

thod knee 48(19).

tuk` beak 230(2).
  tumuk` pick with the beak 230(2).
  pangpatuk` given to pick 301(8).

tuks joke 195(39).

-tuktk: tumuktk knocked 78(26).
  tumtuktk is knocking 155(37).
  pagtuktk a knocking 78(27).
  itinuktk was knocked 30(7).
  ituktk top, ceiling 62(15). 118(21).

-tkop: tinkop was covered with the hand 100(2).

tul` connected 186(40).
  tul-tul` coherent 44(35).

-tlad: tulran be limited 74(23).

tlak push 252(5).
  tumlak pushed at; went away 230(3). 235(10).
  nagtlak pushed 235(9).

tuly bridge 163(12).

-tul: tutul ear-wax 224(22).
  manghinul clean the ears 241(30).

-tlin: magtlin go fast 167(35).
  nagttlin is hurrying 68(16).
  tinulnan speed 310(19).
  matlin swift 18(8). 60(31).
  ntlin got faster 294(29).
  pinatlin was caused to hurry 72(4).

tlis point 284(33).
  tuls pointed 223(7).
  tulsan be sharpened 254(1).
  tulisn bandit 120(1).
  matlis pointed 271(12).

tlog sleep 220(8).
  tumlog slept in 64(38).
  tumtlog sleeps in 64(37).
  pagtlog a sleeping 230(7).
  tintulgan is being slept in 62(39). 190(12).
  tulugn sleeping-place 260(32).
  makitlog sleep along with 122(14).
  matlog go to sleep 64(5). 84(18).
  natlog went to sleep 18(36). 38(20). 84(39).
  nattlog is asleep 18(38). 38(28). 62(9).
  matutulugn sleepy-head 290(4).
  naktlog happened to sleep in 290(36).
  mkatlog chance to fall asleep 296(41).
  mangkatlog pl. 297(3).
  mangkkatlog will fall asleep pl. 192(14).
  nkatlog fell asleep 296(37).
  nangkkatlog are asleep 296(43).
  pagkkatlog a falling asleep 62(22).
  mtulgan get slept in 84(17).
  patlog-tlog sleeping by fits and starts 300(36).
  nagpatlog caused to sleep 62(8).
  patulgin be caused to sleep 305(3).
  pinatlog was caused to sleep 36(18). 84(38).
  mapatlog be able to be caused to sleep 64(2).

tlong help 32(39).
  ttlong will help 32(11).
  nagssitlong are helping 114(2).
  tulngan be assisted 234(19).
  pinagttulng-tulngan is being done by haphazard helping 106(29).
  pagtutulungn a mutual assisting 237(4).
  ikatlong be the means of helping 60(23).
  nakatlong contributed 94(37).
  nakattlong is contributing 112(11).
  napattlong is asking to be helped 311(35).

-tlos: pagtutlos an offering up 50(29).
  nttlos is set up 66(41).
  nagpatlos caused to be set up 72(29).
  nipatlos was caused to be set up 80(26).

-tloy (a): itinloy was gone on with 287(11).
  tinulyan was staid with 116(35).
  tlyan place of lodging; see bhay.
  nakitloy asked to stay with 148(31).
  patloy caused to go on; going on 60(3). 70(34).
  pinatloy was caused to stay on 84(38).
  ipatloy be caused to go on, be continued 88(43).
  ipinatloy was continued 20(41). 66(18). 84(3).
  ipinattloy is being continued 108(20).
  --(b) With accent-shift: tuly further 28(12). 34(8). 47. 231.
  ntuly chanced to continue, got continued 207(31). 237(5). 240(18).
  papagttuluyn will be caused to go on 88(14).
  ipinatuly was caused to be gone on with 96(31). 307(6).
  ipinapatuly was caused to be caused to be gone on with 307(12).

tumpk correct 219(20).
  mtumpakn get ascertained 70(32).

tnay true 66(7). 82(31).
  katunyan truth, truly 30(15). 82(5). 265(6).
  pinatunyan was caused to be realized 308(29).

-tuntn: ttuntunn will be followed 34(14).
  tinuntn was followed 34(21).
  palatuntnin querulant 315(11).
  paltuntnan set of rules 315(26).

tno S. tone 207(4).

tungkl about, concerning 30(16). 52(25). 287. 288.
  tungklin concern, duty 96(40).
  katungklan duty, office 52(41). 110(32).

tungtng a stand 221(31).
  ttuntng will set foot on 70(26). 100(29).
  tintuntungn is being stood on 100(25).
  maktuntng-tuntng ever set foot on 100(8).
  mtuntng happen to stand on 68(4).

-tngo: tumngo went toward 230(8).
  nagsitngo pl. 282(30).
  katngo person dealt with 266(25).
  kttunghan will turn out to be the place gone toward 279(20).
  nkkatngo is being dealt with 68(14).
  patngo towards 18(40). 20(3). 48(6). 285.
  pagpatngo a going towards 120(7). 302(21).
  pattunghan will be headed for 90(43). 307(4).
  pinattunghan is being headed for 72(6). 308(30).
  kappatunghan will be the place headed for 26(33). 310(28).
  napatngo went toward 102(42).

-tung: itinung was bent over 74(16).

tpa sheep 112(40).

-tupd: pagtupd a fulfilling 96(39).
  pagkatupd a having fulfilled 233(35).

Trkos S. Turks 260(10).

tornliyo S. screw 92(38).

tro` that pointed out, a teaching 186(32). 221(32).
  tur` extended, stiff 223(8).
  panro` pointer 225(27).
  magtro` teach 232(36).
  nagttro` is teaching 232(38).
  pagtutro` a teaching 88(14).
  nagttur` is pointing out variously 238(14).
  panunro` a pointing things out 240(39).
  itro` be pointed out, be shown 182(43). 249(2).
  katurun one of two who point at each other 278(25).
  mitro` get taught 90(1).
  hintutro` forefinger 42(14).

turump S. spinning-top 227(6).

tta` puppy 244(40).

tto perception, care 166(36).
  mtto get educated 168(14).
  ntto got taught 178(4).
  mtuthan get learned 196(35).
  ntuthan got learned 28(2). 50(24).

tutub dragon-fly 291(28).

toto true 104(23). 116(2).
  ttohnan actuality 94(21). 259(16).
  katotohnan truth 26(5). 68(32).
  nagpatoto testified, affirmed 303(42).
  pagpapatoto a testifying 304(3).
  pinapagpatoto was caused to testify 305(40).
  tagapagpatoto witness 20(13).

tod stump 16(23).

tus care 46(29).

tuw` joy, gladness 46(5). 76(41). glad 80(15).
  ikinatuw` was the cause of joy 26(25).
  ikinattuw` is the cause of being glad 272(26).
  ktwan a rejoicing together 120(25).
  magktwan rejoice together 280(11).
  nagkktwan are rejoicing together 120(26).
  nakattuw` causes pleasure 280(40).
  natuw` became glad 24(27).
  nangatuw` pl. 34(23).
  mkatuwan happen to be liked 40(39). 298(28).
  palatwin easily pleased 315(13).

tuw` every time, whenever 58(3). 60(40). 244. 300. 307. 317(5).

-tuwd: pagtutuwd a reckoning 232(39).
  katuwran the right 56(7). 100(38). 257(14).
  katuturn right outcome 76(21).
  makatuwd have figured out; consequence 56(15).
  matuwd correct 44(26). 50(14).

tyot drought 191(32).





U (O).

o S? or 16(25). 45. 321.

 oh 76(34). 80(12). 151(15).

, see o.

-ubr (S.): umbr took effect, was suitable 230(11).
  pagubr a taking effect 108(35).
  magubr will suit 235(11).

bos exhaustion
  bos-laks exhaustion of strength 18(39). 22(16).
  bos-lksan exhaustion of strength by several 96(29).
  ipinagbos-lksan was done with exhaustion of strength 250(4).
  inbos is being used up 112(9).
  iniybos was expended 283(41).
  nakabos is able to use up 112(40).
  nabos was used up 312(29).
  naubsan was exhausted of 32(19).

ugli` habit 96(26).
  inugli` was made a habit 36(25).
  kaugli` accordant in habits 266(27).
  kaugalin custom 38(10). 112(22).

ugt root, artery 218(32). 290(12).

haw thirst 280(38).
  nahaw is thirsty 285(25).

kol with regard to, for 42(15). 50(28). 288.

lam that eaten along with one's rice 72(34).

uln rain 110(14).
  umuln rained 177(16).
  umuln is raining 152(16).
  uln will rain 168(34).
  paguln a raining 110(21).
  mauln rainy 110(21).
  nagppauln causes rain 110(15).
  taguln rainy season 202(18).

ul` again 24(11). 47. 232. See sa.
  ul` will do it again 44(12).

olva S. olive 90(28).

ling charcoal 70(32).

-lit: pagulit-lit a manifold repeating 86(10).
  inlit was repeated 50(28).
  malit stubborn 24(14).

lo head 22(10). 26(4). See bsag.
  uluhn head-end 72(3).

ull foolish, crazy 16(1).
  kaululn foolishness 98(23).
  kallan one of two who fool each other 278(3).
  pagkaull insanity 254(29).

umga, see -ga.

-umt: pangungumt panguumt petty thievery 156(3). 310(6).
  inumt was filched 293(28).

-umpis: magumpis begin 18(31). 32(16).
  nagumpis began 16(26). 20(29).
  paguumpis a beginning 26(35). 96(15).
  umpisahn be begun 48(4).
  inumpisahn was begun 26(19). 50(21).
  inumpisahn is being begun 48(37).

-umpg: nagkkaumpg-umpg is getting repeated bumps 62(19).

-umpk: umpkan assemblage for talking 38(7).

na (a) first 24(15). 38(21). 273(21).
  pangna number one 225(39).
  mangngna will take the lead 240(40).
  nangna took the lead 240(40).
  inna was taken first 42(31).
  pagkana a having got ahead 283(12).
  --(b) With accent-shift: nagun-un competed for the first place
  239(19).
  kun-unhan very first 280(16).
  nun got ahead 64(8).
  nun is ahead 88(24).
  pagkun a getting ahead 18(34).
  nagpun got himself into the first place 304(24).
  nagpun-un got himself too far ahead 304(27).

nan pillow 260(6).

-nat: nanat has been straightened 284(21).
  nnat got straightened 24(26).

unt` short 219(21).
  unt-unt` little by little 76(12). 78(9).
  umunt` grew less 28(30).
  untin be lessened 254(2).
  kaunt` something small, a bit 48(32). 60(16).
  kayunt` what fewness 267(36).
  kkaunt` only few 267(8).
  pauntin be caused to be few, be reduced 98(7).

ungs stupid 22(21).

ungg` monkey 16(1).
  nagungg-unggan is playing monkey 237(11).

pa pay 56(3). 72(33).
  pa will pay 88(12).
  umpa hires 48(29).
  uphan will be paid 34(6).
  upahn hired 114(1.23).

pang in order to, so that 16(22). 18(16). 308.

pera S. opera; see smhan.

po a vegetable, Lagenaria vulgaris Seringe 76(16).

up` sit; a sitting 220(9). 222(7).
  pangup` used for sitting 225(28).
  umup` sit 184(23). sat 230(15).
  pagup` a sitting 230(16).
  nagup` seated 235(12).
  naguup` sits variously 239(2).
  paguup` a sitting variously 181(30).
  nangup` mischievously sat down on 240(41).
  panguup` a mischievous sitting on 240(42).
  upn will be sat on 254(4).
  inupn is being sat on 32(5).
  pan a sitting together 258(9). seat 24(39). 283(9).
  uupn chair 180(29).
  kapan one of two who sit together 278(4).
  kinupn happens to be the place of sitting 223(16).
  nakaup` is seated 281(19).
  nangkaup` pl. 286(11).
  nangkkaup` are able to sit 286(14).
  maup` sit down 184(24).
  maup` will sit down 192(39).
  naup` sat down 24(39).
  naup` is (in the act of) sitting down 204(26).
  pagkaup` a sitting down 286(4).
  nup` happened to sit down 202(1).
  nup` is sitting 30(29). 96(22).
  pagkup` a chance sitting 277(24).
  paup` that caused to sit 174(29). 249(35). in sitting position
  299(32).
  nagpaup` caused to sit 304(4).
  pagpapaup` a causing to sit 304(5).
  pinaup` was caused to sit 305(4).
  npaup` involuntarily sat down 198(24).
  npatiup` fell into sitting position 313(39).
  nppatiup` falls on his seat 313(40).

pos cigar-butt 205(21).

ras S. hour 42(4). 48(26). See kalahti`.
  orsan be done promptly 254(5).
  orasn watch, clock 248(14).

orasiyn S. prayer 104(14).

-rong: umrong is going backwards 230(18).
  nangagsirong retreated, pl. 262(30).
  paurng backwards 299(34).
  papaurng backwards continually 300(40).

us deer 18(1).
  nagus-ushan played deer 237(12).

sap law-suit 199(33).
  pagusap a conversing 70(19).
  paguspan be discussed 102(5).
  pinaguspan was discussed 28(2).
  pinaguspan is being discussed 30(29).
  makipagsap converse with 28(14).
  nakkipagsap is entering into conversation with 74(30).
  pakikipagsap an engaging in conversation with 80(38).
  kasap person conversed with 102(32).
  kumkasap is talking at 268(19).
  kauspin be conversed with 44(2). 70(21).
  kinasap was addressed 70(24).
  makasap be able to converse 68(20).
  mkasap get conversed with 70(14).
  nkasap got conversed with 44(26). 78(17).

usbng edible shoot 253(2). 256(13).

ussa` that inquired about 221(34).
  nagussa` made inquiry 76(1).
  nangussa` interrogated 241(3).
  usisin be asked about; be interrogated 76(14). 98(13). 290(26).
  inussa` was questioned 76(28).
  pinagusis` was variously questioned 76(5).
  naussa` has been questioned 284(23).
  naussa` has just been questioned 76(22).
  mapagussa` inquisitive 60(19).
  nakussa` happen to inquire 290(39).
  nussa` got inquired for 293(28).

so S. fashion 287(7).

tang debt 54(12). 76(2). See byad.
  umtang borrow 230(19).
  magutng borrow variously 238(15).
  maguutng habitual borrower 243(3).
  nangtang borrowed 241(4).
  mngungutng habitual borrower 243(20).
  intang was borrowed 245(24).
  pinangtang was (reluctantly) borrowed 247(4).
  utngan be borrowed from 254(6).
  magpatang cause to be borrowed, lend 304(8).

-uts: nauts was completed 303(18).

tos a command 56(27). 122(5).
  nagtos commanded 232(41).
  nagtos is commanding 114(7).
  iytos be commanded 62(37). 64(13).
  iniytos was commanded 24(37). 26(18). 106(17).
  ipinagtos was given as an order 182(19). 249(40).
  inutsan was given an order 92(12).
  utusn servant, waiter, orderly 254(34). 260(34).
  kautusn decree, law 54(4).

o  yes 26(2). 44(18).
  ohan be answered affirmatively 254(7).
  napao assented 312(6).

uwal`, see wal`.

uw` a going home; that taken home 114(26). 221(35).
  umuw` go home 34(12). 76(43). went home 50(36). 52(35).
  uw` will go home 287(20).
  nagssiuw` are going home 72(35).
  paguw` a going home 70(23).
  naguwan went home together 26(37).
  pauw` that caused to go home 298(23). homeward 34(14).
  nagpauw` caused to be taken home, sent home 304(9).
  ipinauw` was caused to be taken home, was sent home 304(10).





W.

wal` without, not having; there is not
16(10). 20(21). 69. 99. 110. 239. 248.
  wal ng hiy`: kawal-ng-hiyan shamelessness 277(10).
  npakawal-ng-hiy` most impudent 98(27).
  pagwawal` a breaking away 232(42).
  iwal` be got rid of 249(3).
  kawal` partaking of freedom 196(27).
  magkawal` get away 44(6).
  nagkawal` got away 44(10).
  nagkkawal` is getting away 58(31).
  ikinawal` was the cause of being without 292(6).
  ipagkawal` be the cause of getting away 272(38).
  ipagkkawal` will be the cause of getting away 272(41).
  ipinagkawal` was the cause of getting away 273(1).
  ipinagkkawal` is the cause of getting away 273(2).
  kawwaln will be the place of losing 206(17).
  kawaln lack, absence 46(16). 118(1).
  makawal` be able to get away 44(40).
  makawwal` will be able to get away 294(1).
  nakawal` succeeded in getting away 46(31). 86(12).
  mawwal` will disappear 46(2).
  nawal` disappeared 64(33). 82(10).
  nawwal` is disappearing 40(16). 76(13).
  pagkawal` a disappearing 298(17).
  nawaln has been deprived of 70(8). 82(30).
  pawaln be allowed to get away 44(12).
  pinawaln was allowed to get away 44(8).
  magpakawal` get oneself away 106(23).
  pinakawaln was allowed to get loose 66(28). 310(26).

wals broom 315(22).
  nagwwals is sweeping 233(2).
  winwals niwwals is being swept away 245(26).
  niwalisn was swept 94(7).
  niwwalisn is being swept 254(8).

wal eight 52(43). 67.
  pangwal number eight 225(38).

waplo C. exclamation of distress 58(38).

wka` language, word, words 20(5). 28(3). 74(39).
  nagwka` spoke 20(20).
  winka` was spoken 18(42).
  kawikan proverb 276(15).
  pagkawka` a having spoken 20(40).

-wli: nwli got spellbound 88(2).
  pagkwli a getting spellbound 295(26).

-wisk: iniwisk was sprinkled 96(27).
  niwisikn was sprinkled on 64(30).
  nwisikn got sprinkled on 76(38).





Y.

-ybang: kayabngan pride 272(2) Corrigenda.
  maybang proud 60(15).
  nagmayabng boasted 238(21).
  ipinagmayabng was boasted of 60(17).
  nagpakamayabng boasted of himself 309(29).

-ybong: maybong grassy 18(33).

yman wealth 72(22). 80(25).
  yumman get rich 60(25). got rich 74(9).
  pagyman a getting rich 120(27).
  kayamnan wealth 308(16).
  mayman wealthy 72(19).
  payamnin be caused to get rich 50(34).

ymang while 16(12). 18(33). 309.

yn, see iyn.

yantk rattan 46(40).

Yap C. n. 234(25).

-yri: mangyri happen 54(29). 66(22).
  mangyyri will happen 18(11). 52(20).
  nangyri happened 24(27). 46(19).
  nangyyri happens 40(30). 44(20).
  kapangyarhan power 36(10). 40(4).

yri` that made; the make 74(4). 220(10). 221(37).
  mayri` have been made 104(11).
  nayyri` is made 34(36). 46(40).

yan, see iyn.

-yya`: yumya` invited 230(21).
  pagyya` an inviting 230(22).
  nagyay` urged 28(11). 34(12).
  niyya` was invited, summoned 32(13). 36(42).

Yng C. n. 263(4).

yro S. iron 92(35).

yit yt, see it.--y, see iy.

-yukayk: nagssipagyukayk are nodding 108(30).

yn, see iyn.

Yurpa, see Eyurpa.

yta` billion 134.

yon, see iyn.









CORRIGENDA.


The following errors are due entirely to oversights on my part;
they would have been far more numerous, but for the accuracy and
intelligence of the typesetter, Mr. Staley, and the unfailing kindness
of the editor, Professor W. A. Oldfather.--L. B.

[Transcriber's Note: The indicated errors have been corrected in the
text of this edition, except for the one referring to 212(25), as the
instruction is not clear enough, and 322(42), as the location could
not be found.]


VOLUME I.

PAGE   LINE   FOR               READ

  20     16   mkinig           making
  22      2   nabuksan          nbuksan
  24     31   n                 ng
  32      1   nammatay         mammatay
  38     11   galan            galin
  40     39   pagbibro`        pangbibro`
  42      6   katimb`          katimbng
  42     39   tiningnan         tinangnan
  44      2   sumagt           sumsagt
  44     40   nagsisigw        nagsisigw
  46     24   ng               ng
  48     20   pagbabalk        pagpapabalk
  60     38   nagbibigay        nagbbigay
  62      5   sy               ny
  68     13   siniglan          sinigln
  72     12   hy               hy`
  74     40   a                 o
  84     21   pinagdagukn      pinagdadagukn
  92      6   mmaty           mammaty
  94     29   inapyan          inapuyn
  96     29   manit            mainit
  98      2   magbbinyg       nagbbinyg
  98     39   Masakp           Masikp
  99     25   giving            given
 100     15   ipabbilanngg`   ipabbilangg`
 108     42   pirsu ng lamn   pirsu-ng-lamn
 114     10   pagtadtd         pagtatadtd


VOLUME II.

PAGE   LINE

 190      2   Add: si nasra ng Mariy the deceased Maria.
 210     30   Add example: pilk-mat eyelash (pilk fin, lash), and at
              211(13) omit pilk.
 212     25   Omit: bagso etc.; the word may be S. bagazo sediment.
 212     37   Add: hanty hinty.
 215     41   Omit: lkad.
 223     17   The example of lakd should be transferred to 222(38).
 223     25   Binyk etc.; transfer to 244(7).
 244      2   Add: (ang yap condiment).
 244      4   Add example: Ang glok na yn ay bbawin ko sa iy,
              kapag ipinamtol mo nang kawyan. I shall take back this
              bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo.
 244      7   See on 223(25).
 245     39   Add: sagt.
 249      8   Add: lal`.
 259     35   Add example: ang tpnan a meeting; and omit tpon in
              next line.
 261     10   Add example: Ang asuhn nang bhay ni Pdro ay nasnog.
              The chimney in Pedro's house burned out; and omit as
              from line 16.
 261     24   Add example: lulurn shin.
 267     18   Add: So gsing, kin.
 277      2   Add example: kayabngan pride; and omit ybang, line 8.
 277      7   Add: salkoy.
 286     30   Add example: Pagkaabt nang bt nang kany ng laruwn ay
              tumakb sya ng agd. After reaching for his toys, the boy
              at once ran. Omit the words: see bot.
 294     33   Omit: ibady.
 295     30   Add example: Sya y nrap`. He fell on his face.
 296     19   Omit: bot, and add example: Ang pagkabot ny sa bte ay
              hindi maglang. The way he reached for the bottle was not
              polite.
 297     29   Add: badiy.
 299     27   For pahgis read pahags, and transfer the example to
              300(14).
 300     14   See preceding.
 313      3   Add: With mak- D ( 473) from -parto: Hwag k ng
              makpar-parto. Don't you ever come round here!
 315     31   Add: With accent-shift: tagint the hot season.
 322     42   Add reference: 28(7).









NOTES


[1] An English translation by Charles Derbyshire was published in
1912 by the Philippine Education Company in Manila and the World Book
Company in New York, under the title "The Social Cancer".

[2] The entire syntax and much of the morphology, especially whatever
relates to the accent-shifts in word-formation, will be found to be
new. I have of course refrained from any and all historical surmises
beyond the indication of unassimilated loan-words. The system of
transcription used is, with a few deviations, that of the International
Phonetic Association.

[3] They were accessible to me chiefly through the courtesy of the
Newberry Library in Chicago.

[4] I owe this and the following statements about the degree of
pitch-rise to the kindness of Dr. C. Ruckmich of the Department of
Psychology of the University of Illinois.

[5] It might perhaps be more correct not to include such cases under
the term attribution (as will be done in the following analysis),
but to set up instead an additional syntactic type of "exocentric
modification".

[6] In the proverbial expression at 16,18, balt skin, skins is used
as an object expression without ang, contrary to the normal habit.

[7] Although grammatical terms are necessarily and properly employed in
different meanings when referring to different languages, the Tagalog
constructions in question are so different from what is ordinarily
understood by "cases" that the above terminology has been avoided in
the following discussion.

[8] At 16, 2 hbang, instead of standing at the beginning of its
clause, follows the subject, taking the place of ay. I take it
that this sentence has been handed down in this form from an older
generation of speakers. Cf.  316.

[9] Once, at 16, 18, at is used concessively, even though, and is
placed not at the beginning of its phrase, but after the subject,
where ay would normally stand. The sentence is no doubt traditional;
it has currency as a proverb. See  68 and cf.  292.

[10] Cf. Kern's derivation of lingg from Spanish domingo, felt as
containing infix -um- (Sanskritsche woorden).

[11] Where S. words are, as genuine loan-words, more or less fully
Tagalized, the S. is enclosed in brackets. In cases where Mr. Santiago
is not conscious of this origin, it would have been more consistent
to omit the indication, but it would be very difficult to single
these out.






End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by
Leonard Bloomfield

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***

***** This file should be named 50797-8.txt or 50797-8.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/5/0/7/9/50797/

Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of
public domain material from the Google Books project.)


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
1.E.8.

1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country outside the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

  This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
  most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
  restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
  under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
  eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
  United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
  are located before using this ebook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
provided that

* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
  the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
  you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
  to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
  agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
  within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
  legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
  payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
  Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
  Literary Archive Foundation."

* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
  you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
  does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
  License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
  copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
  all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
  works.

* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
  any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
  electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
  receipt of the work.

* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
  distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

For additional contact information:

    Dr. Gregory B. Newby
    Chief Executive and Director
    gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

